JP6552102B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a so-called ball-and-ball type gaming machine (hereinafter also referred to as "pachinko gaming machine" or "pachinko machine") or a torso-type gaming machine (generally referred to as "pachislot machine" or "slot machine") It relates to a gaming machine.

  In a general pachinko gaming machine, whether or not the game ball (game medium) is fired to the game area and a big hit is generated for the player triggered by entering the starting opening provided in the game area Make a lottery (special lottery). Then, while the variable display of the special symbol is performed based on the lottery result of the special lottery, the variable display using the decorative symbol is performed also in the liquid crystal display device etc., and the player wins the big hit in a more easily recognizable manner from the player. It is indicated whether or not.

  In this type of gaming machine, an upper tray for storing gaming media for hitting into the gaming area below the gaming area in front view, and a lower tray for positioning gaming media below the upper tray and storing the gaming media And have. (For example, Patent Document 1)

JP, 2010-273844, A

  However, in a gaming machine including a dish for storing such a game medium, a more suitable one is required for realizing the function as a dish.

  The present invention proposes a lower tray configuration more suitable for gaming machines.

  The present invention
  It is a gaming machine equipped with a front door,
  An upper plate provided on the front door;
  A lower plate (for example, a lower plate main body 325) provided on the front door and capable of receiving a supply of game balls from the upper plate;
  And a predetermined effect device provided on the front door,
  In the front door, a predetermined space (for example, an attachment space 326j) is formed on the side of the lower plate, and the effect device is disposed in the predetermined space,
  The lower plate is provided with a lower plate cover part (for example, a lower plate cover 340) that blocks communication with the predetermined space,
  The stage device can be removed from the predetermined space without removing the lower plate cover part,
  With the stage device removed from the predetermined space, the outer surface of the lower plate cover part can be visually recognized through the predetermined space from the outside.
  (See, for example, the description of paragraphs 0169-0214 and FIGS. 6, 41-47, etc.).

  According to the present invention, a more suitable lower dish can be provided.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine which is one embodiment of the present invention. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is a left view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at a pachinko machine from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at a pachinko machine from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at a pachinko machine from the back. It is the perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front in the state which made the door frame open from the main body frame, and made the main body frame open from the outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the pachinko machine into the door frame, the game board, the main body frame, and the outer frame, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the pachinko machine into the door frame, the game board, the main body frame, and the outer frame, and was seen from the back. It is a front view of the outer frame in a pachinko machine. It is a right view of an outer frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the outer frame and was seen from the front. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the site | part of the outer frame side upper hinge member in an outer frame from the lower side, omitting the left frame member, (b) is the exploded perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows (a). is there. (A) is a perspective view which expands and shows the state by which the main frame side upper hinge member of the main body frame is removed with respect to the outer frame side upper hinge member of an outer frame, (b) is an outer upper upper hinge member. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the state by which the main body side upper hinge member is attached to. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect | action of the lock member in an outer frame. It is a front view of the door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a right view of a door frame. It is a left view of a door frame. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at a door frame from the front right. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the AA in FIG. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the BB line in FIG. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the CC line in FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame for every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame for every main member, and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit in a door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit into every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit into every main member, and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the ball feed unit of the door frame base unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the ball feed unit from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit disassembled and viewed from the front, (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit after removing the rear case of the ball feeding unit and the tamperproof member and viewed from the rear. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the foul cover unit from the back. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which removed the cover member from the front and removed the cover member, (b) is the disassembled perspective view which removed the cover member and was seen from the back. It is a front view of a foul cover unit in the state where a lid member was removed. (A) is a front view of the handle unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the handle unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the handle unit as viewed from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as seen from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the tray unit of the door frame from the front right, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the tray unit from the left front. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit from upper right back, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit from lower left back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the tray unit into every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the tray unit into every main member, and was seen from back. It is explanatory drawing which expands and shows the site | part of a lower plate in the state which removed the lower plate cover in sectional drawing of FIG. (A) is an explanatory view schematically showing an example in which a lower plate is provided with a ball guiding portion, and (b) is an explanatory view schematically showing an example in which a lower plate is provided with a ball guiding portion different from (a) (C) is an explanatory view schematically showing an example provided with a different ball guiding portion. (A) is an explanatory view schematically showing the lower tray made divisible, and (b) is a schematic illustration showing a state where the storage area of the lower tray is expanded according to the size of the space behind the rendering operation unit (C) is explanatory drawing which shows the lower plate of (b) with a schematic perspective view. (A) is a front view of the rendering operation unit in the door frame, and (b) is a right side view of the rendering operation unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation unit from the back. It is explanatory drawing which looked at the production operation unit from the direction where the central axis of the operation button is extending. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the DD line in FIG. 48 (a). It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the EE line in FIG.48 (b). (A) is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the FF line | wire in FIG.48 (b), (b) is an enlarged view of the A section in (a). It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the presentation operation unit into every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the presentation operation unit into every main member, and was seen from back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the operating button disassembled and viewed from the front, (b) is an exploded perspective view of the operating button disassembled and viewed from the rear. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the decoration board unit of a production operation unit, and was seen from the front. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the base unit of the production operation unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the base unit of the production operation unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the base unit of the rendering operation unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the base unit of the rendering operation unit, and was seen from back. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which pressed the operation button in sectional drawing of the rendering operation unit of FIG. (A) is a view of the production operation unit as viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends, and shows a part of the operation button that is notched and hidden by the first button decoration portion or the button frame of the operation button. It is explanatory drawing shown, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the site | part which is going to hide by the 1st button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. in sectional drawing of an effect operation unit. (A) is explanatory drawing shown in the perspective view which looked at the external appearance of the production | presentation operation unit from the front, (b) is explanatory drawing which looked at the external appearance of the production | presentation operation unit from the direction where the central axis of an operation button is extended. . (A) is a front view of a second effect operation unit different from the effect operation unit of FIGS. 48 to 63 in the embodiment, and (b) is a right side view of the second effect operation unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the 2nd production operation unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the 2nd production operation unit from the back. It is explanatory drawing which looked at the 2nd presentation operation unit from the direction where the central axis of the operation button is extending. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the GG line | wire in Fig.64 (a). It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the HH line | wire in FIG.64 (b). (A) is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the II line | wire in FIG.64 (b), (b) is an enlarged view of the A section in (a). It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the 2nd rendering operation unit into every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the 2nd production operation unit for every main member, and was seen from back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button of the second effect operation unit disassembled and seen from the front, (b) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button of the second effect operation unit disassembled and viewed from the back is there. It is the perspective view which looked at the 2nd base unit of the 2nd production operation unit from the front. (A) is explanatory drawing which looked at the 2nd production operation unit from the direction where the central axis of the operation button has extended in the state where the main screen of the screen unit was turned forward, and (b) is the subscreen of the screen unit. It is explanatory drawing which looked at the 2nd presentation operation unit from the direction where the central axis of the operation button is extended in the state which turned to the front. (A) is a cross-sectional view cut along line JJ in FIG. 74 (a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along line KK in FIG. 74 (b). (A) is an attempt to hide the second rendering operation unit from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends with the main screen facing forward by the first button decoration portion or the button frame of the operation button. It is explanatory drawing which shows the site | part which is present, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the site | part which is going to hide by the 1st button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. in sectional drawing of the 2nd production operation unit of the state of (a). It is. (A) In the state which looked at the 2nd production operation unit from the direction where the central axis of the operation button has extended in the state where the subscreen turned to the front, it tried to hide by the 1st button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. It is explanatory drawing which shows the site | part which is present, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the site | part which is going to hide by the 1st button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. in sectional drawing of the 2nd production operation unit of the state of (a). It is. (A) is a front view of the door frame left side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit viewed from the front, and (c) is a view of the door frame left side unit from the back. FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame left side unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame left side unit and was seen from back. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the LL line in FIG. 78 (a). (A) is a front view of the door frame right side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit viewed from the front, and (c) is a view of the door frame right side unit from the rear. FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame right side unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame right side unit and was seen from back. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the MM line in Fig.82 (a). (A) is a cross-sectional view cut along the line NN in FIG. 82 (a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along the line OO in FIG. 82 (a). (A) is the front view of the door frame top unit in a door frame, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame top unit from the front, (c) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame top unit from the back It is. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame top unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame top unit and was seen from back. FIG. 90 is a cross-sectional view of FIG. 87 taken along the line PP. It is the perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the main body frame from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the main body frame for every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the main body frame for every main member, and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the dispensing unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the dispensing unit from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the delivery unit by each main structure, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the delivery unit by each main structure, and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the ball guidance unit of the delivery unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the ball guidance unit from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of a ball guidance unit. (A) is a perspective view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the dispensing device as viewed from the rear. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the payout apparatus and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the payout apparatus and was seen from back. (A) is a front view of a delivery apparatus, (b) is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the QQ line in (a). (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the state which closed the ball extraction path | pass by the ball extraction movable piece in a delivery apparatus, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the state which open | released the ball extraction path by the ball extraction movable piece. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the upper full sphere path unit in the dispensing unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the upper full sphere path unit from the back. (A) is the exploded perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the upper full sphere path | route unit and was seen from the front, (b) was the exploded perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the upper full sphere path unit and was seen from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the lower full sphere path unit in the dispensing unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the lower full sphere path unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the lower full ball path unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the lower full-scale ball path unit and was seen from back. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the state in which the guidance path opening / closing door is closed in a lower full sphere path | route unit, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the state in which the guidance path opening / closing door is open. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the foul cover unit of a door frame, and a lower full sphere path | route unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball in a payout unit. It is a front view of a game board. It is a figure explaining the internal passage through which the game ball received by the normal electric prize winning opening flows down. It is a figure explaining the internal passage through which the game ball received by the normal electric prize winning opening flows down. It is a front view of the game board except a front unit and a back unit. FIG. 118 is an exploded perspective view of the gaming board of FIG. 117 disassembled and viewed from the front. FIG. 118 is an exploded perspective view of the gaming board of FIG. 117 disassembled and viewed from the rear. It is explanatory drawing which expands and shows the site | part of a function display unit from the front in the state which attached the game board to the pachinko machine. FIG. 118 is an exploded perspective view of a gaming panel of a form different from that of FIG. 117 as seen from the front together with a front component member, a substrate holder, and a main control unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at FIG. 121 from the back. It is a block diagram of a main control board, a payout control board, and a peripheral control board. FIG. 124 is a block diagram showing the continuation of FIG. 123. It is the schematic of the various detection signals input / output to lending device connection terminal boards, such as a game ball which relays the electrical connection of the payout control board which comprises a main board, CR unit, and a frequency display board. FIG. 124 is a block diagram showing the continuation of FIG. 123. It is a block diagram which shows the outline of peripheral control MPU. It is a block diagram around VDP with a built-in sound source in the liquid crystal and the sound control unit. It is a block diagram which shows the power supply system of a pachinko machine. FIG. 129 is a block diagram showing the continuation of FIG. 129. It is a circuit diagram showing a circuit of a main control board. It is a circuit diagram showing a power failure monitoring circuit. FIG. 6 is a circuit diagram showing an interface circuit for communication between the main control substrate and the peripheral control substrate. It is a circuit diagram showing a circuit etc. of a payment control part. It is a circuit diagram showing a payout control input circuit. FIG. 136 is a circuit diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 135. It is a circuit diagram showing a payout motor drive circuit. It is a circuit diagram showing a CR unit input / output circuit. It is an input / output diagram showing various input / output signals to / from the main control board and various output signals to the external terminal board. It is a figure which shows the arrangement | sequence of the output terminal of an external terminal board. FIG. 6 is a circuit diagram showing a liquid crystal module circuit that draws a display area of the upper-plate-side liquid crystal display device. It is a table which shows an example of the various commands transmitted to a delivery control board from a main control board. It is a table which shows an example of the various commands transmitted to a periphery control board from a main control board. 143 is a table showing a continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board in FIG. 143; It is a table which shows an example of the various commands from the delivery control board which a main control board receives. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process at the time of main control side power activation. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation of the process at the time of main control side power-on of FIG. It is a flow chart which shows an example of main control side timer interrupt processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of payout control part power-on. 149 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the power-on process of the payout control unit in FIG. 149. FIG. 161 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the payout control unit power-on processing following FIG. 150. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a payment control part timer interruption process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of rotation angle switch history creation processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a sprocket fixed position determination skip process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a ball look determination process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of prize ball stock number addition processing for prize balls. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the prize ball stock number addition process for a rental ball. It is a flow chart which shows an example of stock surveillance processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of payout ball look-up operation judgment setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a payout setting process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of ball ball operation setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of retry operation monitoring processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of inconsistency counter reset judging processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of error cancellation operation judgment processing. It is a timing chart which shows the signal process (a) at the time of paying-out operation by ball lending, and the input signal confirmation process (a) from CR unit. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of peripheral control part power activation. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the peripheral control part V blank interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a peripheral control part 1 ms timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a periphery control part command reception interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a peripheral control part power failure warning signal interruption process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of LOCKN signal history creation processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of connection fault judging processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a connection recovery process. It is a timing chart explaining the timing which outputs a connection confirmation signal with respect to the INIT terminal of the transmitter IC for upper plate side liquid crystals. It is a circuit diagram showing an example of the conventional magnetic sensor input circuit arranged in a game machine. It is a circuit diagram showing an example (example 1) of the magnetic sensor input circuit arranged in the gaming machine of the embodiment. It is a circuit diagram showing an example (example 2) of a magnetic sensor input circuit arranged in the gaming machine of the embodiment. It is a circuit diagram showing an example (example 3) of a magnetic sensor input circuit arranged in the gaming machine of the embodiment. It is a figure showing the operation state of a magnetic sensor and each transistor in a tabular form. It is a figure showing the circuit composition when a plurality of sensor signal input parts respectively connected to each of a plurality of magnetic detection sensors were connected in parallel with a plurality of base terminals of a transistor of a detection circuit part. (A) shows the signal waveform input into the sensor signal input part in a prior art example, (B) is the figure which shows the signal waveform input into the sensor signal input part in an Example. (A) shows the signal waveform input into the sensor signal input part in a prior art example, (B) is the figure which shows the signal waveform input into the sensor signal input part in an Example. It is a circuit diagram showing an example of a magnetic sensor input circuit of another example. It is a figure which shows an example of the circuit structure which has arrange | positioned the voltage output part, the voltage raising part, and the detection circuit part on the same board | substrate. It is a figure which shows the example of the circuit structure which arrange | positions a voltage raising part and a detection circuit part on the same board | substrate, and arrange | positions a voltage output part in another board | substrate (sensor board | substrate). It is a figure which shows the example of a circuit structure which has arrange | positioned the voltage output part and the voltage raising part on the same board | substrate, and has arrange | positioned the detection circuit part on another board | substrate (for example, main control board). It is a figure which shows the circuit structure which connected the several sensor in parallel to the voltage output part. FIG. 7 is a view schematically showing a state in which integration is achieved only with components (discrete components) with high security performance against fraud in the first control unit MCG. It is a figure which shows the partial area | region in this base substrate about the base substrate of the main control substrate concerning a modification. It is a figure which shows the symbol determination table referred at the time of big hit determination. It is a figure for demonstrating the outline | summary of the control relevant to a normal symbol. It is an example of a table used when determining the normal symbol fluctuation time based on a plurality of conditions. It is a time chart which shows the operation pattern of the movable member of a normal electric prize opening, and the operation pattern of the distribution member provided in a normal electric prize opening. It is a figure showing transition of a game state. It is a figure showing the example of the 1st presentation. It is a figure showing the example of the 1st presentation. It is a figure showing the example of the 2nd production. It is a figure which shows each light emission condition with respect to a 1st non-electric start start winning opening and a 2nd start opening (2nd non-electric start start winning opening). It is a figure which shows each light emission condition with respect to a 1st non-electric start start winning opening and a 2nd start opening (2nd non-electric start start winning opening). It is a figure for demonstrating the prior suggestion effect of an open state.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
A pachinko machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, an entire configuration of a pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 10. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine which is an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the right front, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the left front, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the rear. Moreover, FIG. 8 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front in a state in which the door frame is opened from the main body frame and the main body frame is opened from the outer frame. FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine as seen from the front after disassembling the door frame, game board, main body frame, and outer frame. FIG. 10 shows the pachinko machine as a door frame, game board, main body frame, and outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled and was seen from back.

  The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed on an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 for closing the front of the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, A main unit frame 4 supported so as to be openable and closable, and removably attached to the main unit frame 4 from the front side, is made visible from the player side through the door frame 3. And a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which a game ball is driven.

  As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 includes an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member 20 that are separated from each other in the vertical direction and extend to the left and right, and the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member. 20 includes a left frame member 30 and a right frame member 40 which are connected to each other at both ends and extend vertically. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 have the same front and rear width. Further, the upper and lower lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed longer than the left and right lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20.

  Further, the outer frame 2 is attached to the curtain plate member 50 which is attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20 by connecting the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and to the left end side of the upper frame member 10 in front view An outer frame side upper hinge member 60, and an outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the upper left end portion of the curtain plate member 50 and the left frame member 30. The main frame 4 and the door frame 3 are attached to be openable and closable by an outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and an outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2.

  The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 is a quadrangle in which the external shape of the front view extends vertically and which has a frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 having a through hole 111 which penetrates back and forth, and a through hole of the door frame base unit 100. A handle unit 300 attached to the front lower right corner below the side 111 and operable by the player to drive the game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and the through hole 111 of the door frame base unit 100. The player is attached to the player according to the game state which is changed by the game unit being attached to the center of the dish unit 320 and the dish unit 320 which are attached to the lower front on the lower side and the dish unit 320 It is attached to the front left part on the left side of the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 320 and the presentation operation unit 400 capable of presenting participatory effects. A door frame left side unit 530, a door frame right side unit 550 mounted on the front right side on the right side of the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 320, and a door frame left side unit 530 And a door frame top unit 570 attached to a front upper portion above the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the door frame right side unit 550.

  The main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 includes a frame-shaped main body frame base 600 that can be partially inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the main body frame base 600. It is attached to upper and lower ends of the left side of the front view and is rotatably attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 and the door frame upper hinge member 140 of the door frame 3 and the door frame A body frame side upper hinge member 620 and a body frame side lower hinge member 640 to which the side lower hinge members 150 are rotatably attached, a reinforcing frame 660 attached to the left side surface of the body frame base 600 in a front view, and a body frame base 600 The ball launcher 680 is attached to the lower front of the front and is for hitting a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and is attached to the right side of the main frame base 600 in a front view. 4, A lock unit 700 for locking between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 and a reverse L-shaped character attached to the rear side along the front view upper side and the left side of the main body frame base 600 to pay out the game ball to the player -Like payout unit 800, a base board unit 900 attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and a rear of the game board 5 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 openably and closably And a back cover 980 covering the side.

  The payout unit 800 of the main body frame 4 has an inverted L-shaped payout unit base 801 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600, and is attached to the upper part of the payout unit base 801 and extends to the left and right open upward. A ball tank 802 for storing gaming balls supplied from a not-shown island facility in a box shape, and attached to the payout unit base 801 below the ball tank 802, and the gaming balls in the ball tank 802 are left as viewed from the front A tank guide 803 extending to the left and right, a ball guiding unit 820 attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 at the upper left side in a front view and guiding the gaming ball from the tank rail 803 downward in a meandering manner; A game ball that is detachably attached from the payout unit base 801 and guided by the ball guiding unit 820. Based on instructions from the payout control board 951 housed in the payout control board box 950, the payout device 830 pays out one by one, and the game balls attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 and paid out by the payout device 830 downward. An upper full-ball path unit 850 which causes the game balls to be released from either the normal outlet 850d or the full tank outlet 850e according to the storage state of the gaming balls in the upper plate 321 in the tray unit 320 and the payout unit A normal guiding path 861 and a full guiding path 861 attached to the lower end of the base 801 and guiding the gaming ball discharged from the normal discharge port 850d of the upper full tank path unit 850 forward to the penetrating ball passage 273 of the door frame 3 from the front end. The game ball released from the tongue outlet 850e is guided forward and guided from the front end to the full ball receiver 274 of the door frame 3. A lower full sphere path unit 860 having a RuMitsurutan taxiway 862, and a.

  The substrate unit 900 of the main body frame 4 is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 on the left side of the main body frame base 600 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 and the speaker for bass A speaker unit 920 having a 921. A power supply substrate box 930 mounted on the right side in a front view on the rear side of the substrate unit base 910 and having a power supply substrate housed therein. The interface control board box 940 in which the interface control board is housed, and the payout control board 951 that is mounted across the power supply board box 930 and the interface control board box 940 and controls the payout of the game ball is housed inside. And a delivery control board box 950. .

  As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, etc., the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a into which the game balls are hit, and the game balls fired from the ball launcher 680 are the top of the game area 5a. A front component 1000 having an outer rail 1001 and an inner rail 1002 for guiding the game, and a flat game panel 1100 attached to the rear of the front component 1000 and defining the rear end of the game area 5a There is.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the player rotates the handle 302 in a state where the gaming ball is stored in the upper plate 321, the game ball has a strength according to the rotation angle of the handle 302 by the ball launcher 680. The game board 5 is driven into the game area 5a. Then, when the gaming balls driven into the gaming area 5a are received by the winning opening, a predetermined number of gaming balls are paid out by the payout device 830 to the upper tray 321 according to the accepted winning openings. Since the interest of the player can be enhanced by the payout of the game balls, the game balls in the upper plate 321 can be driven into the game area 5a, and the player can enjoy the game.

[2. Overall configuration of outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 16. FIG. 11 is a front view of the outer frame in the pachinko machine, and FIG. 12 is a right side view of the outer frame. FIG. 13 is a perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 14 is a perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the back. FIG. 15 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame as seen from the front. FIG. 16 (a) is a perspective view of the portion of the outer frame side upper hinge member in the outer frame, viewed from the lower side with the left frame member omitted, and FIG. 16 (b) is an exploded perspective view showing a disassembled (a) FIG. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) on which the pachinko machine 1 such as a game hall is installed.

  As illustrated, the outer frame 2 connects the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 which are vertically separated and extends in the left and right direction, and both ends of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20. And the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 which are extended in The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 have the same front and rear width. Further, the upper and lower lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed longer than the left and right lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20. The outer frame 2 is assembled so that the left and right end surfaces of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 and the side surfaces of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 facing outward in the left-right direction are the same surface. It has been.

  Further, the outer frame 2 includes an outer frame side upper hinge member 60 attached to the front end left side of the upper frame member 10 and a lock member 66 attached to the lower surface of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60; An outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the left end upper portion of the curtain plate member 50 in front view and the left frame member 30 is provided. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 can attach the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 so as to be able to open and close.

  The outer frame 2 connects the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and is attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20 and is attached to the rear side of the curtain plate member 50. A curtain plate reinforcing member 80 whose both ends are attached to the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 respectively, a flat plate-like left sliding member 81 attached to the left side of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 from the left and right center, and a curtain A plate-like right sliding member 82 attached at a position near the right end on the upper surface of the plate member 50. The curtain plate reinforcing member 80 is formed of a solid member (for example, wood, plywood, etc.), and is attached to the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40.

  Furthermore, the outer frame 2 includes the upper frame member 10 and the left frame member 30, the upper frame member 10 and the right frame member 40, the lower frame member 20 and the left frame member 30, and the lower frame member 20 and the right frame member 40, respectively. It has a connecting member 85 connected. The outer frame 2 is attached to the inner side (left side) of the right frame member 40, and the upper hooking member 90 and the lower hooking member 91 are engaged with the outer frame hook 703 of the locking unit 700 described later. Have.

[2-1. Upper frame member]
The upper frame member 10 of the outer frame 2 is formed of a solid (solid) material (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) having a predetermined thickness. The upper frame member 10 includes an engagement notch portion 11 penetrating vertically in the center in the front-rear direction at both left and right ends and recessed toward the center in the left-right direction. In the engagement notch portion 11, an upper left fixing member 87 of the upper left connecting member 85A and an upper right connecting member 85B, which will be described later, of the connecting member 85 are attached. Moreover, the upper frame member 10 is provided with the mounting step part 12 which became depressed rather than the general surface in the upper surface and front surface of a left end part by front view. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is attached to the attachment step 12.

[2-2. Lower frame member]
The lower frame member 20 of the outer frame 2 is formed of a solid (solid) material (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) of a predetermined thickness. The lower frame member 20 is formed such that the left and right lengths and the upper and lower thicknesses are the same as the left and right lengths and the upper and lower thicknesses of the upper frame member 10, and the front and rear width is the upper frame member 10. It is formed longer than the front and rear width of the. The lower frame member 20 includes an engagement notch portion 21 penetrating vertically and recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at a position closer to the rear side than the center in the front-rear direction at both left and right ends. A lower left fixing member 88 of the connecting member 85, which will be described later, and a lower horizontal fixing portion 88 of the lower right connecting member 85D are mounted in the engagement notch 21.

  In addition, the lower frame member 20 includes front end notch portions 22 that are recessed rearward from the front surfaces at both left and right ends. In the lower frame member 20, the width in the front-rear direction from the rear end of the front end notch 22 to the rear surface of the lower frame member 20 is formed to the same dimension as the width in the front-rear direction of the upper frame member 10. When the lower frame member 20 is assembled to the outer frame 2, a portion between the left and right front end notches 22 is inserted into the curtain plate member 50.

[2-3. Left frame member and right frame member]
The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 extend vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and are formed of a metal extruded shape such as an aluminum alloy. The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed in symmetrical shapes in plan view. When the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are assembled as the outer frame 2, the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are recessed inward from the rear side position to the vicinity of the rear end with respect to the center in the front-rear direction. The concave portions 31 and 41 and the protruding portions 32 and 42 that bulge from the side surface on the opposite side of the concave portions 31 and 41 and are formed in a hollow shape are provided. The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are enhanced in strength and rigidity by the protrusions 32 and 42. In addition, in the protrusions 32 and 42, a lower horizontal fixing portion 88 on the rear side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B, which will be described later, of the connecting member 85 is inserted and attached.

  Further, the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 have a plurality of grooves extending in the vertical direction on the surface. The plurality of grooves make it easy for the operator to hold the pachinko machine 1 while holding the pachinko machine 1 in place when carrying or installing the pachinko machine 1 on an island facility such as a game hall or the like. The design of the appearance of the machine 1 can be enhanced.

[2-4. Curtain plate member]
The curtain plate member 50 of the outer frame 2 is formed in a box shape whose rear side is open. The curtain plate member 50 is U-shaped in such a size that the game ball can pass from the left end of the rear extension 51 and the rear extension 51 extending in the form of a flat plate to the rear near the left end in front view on the upper surface. A left discharge hole 52 which is notched and penetrates up and down, and a right discharge hole 53 which penetrates up and down with a size which allows the game ball to pass on the right side of the left discharge hole 52 in the rear extension 51; A standing wall 54 extending flatly upward from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 including the rear end of the rear extension 51 and a front side bulging forward from near the upper end of the standing wall 54 And a return portion 55 which is inclined so as to move rearward toward the rear.

  The curtain plate member 50 is configured so that the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is placed on the upper surface on the front side of the rear extension 51 and the upper surface of the rear extension 51. The horizontal part 71 mentioned later is attached. Further, the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50 is formed at a position coincident with a discharge hole 74 described later of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 in a state assembled to the outer frame 2. Further, the right discharge hole 53 is formed at a position on the right side of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 in a state assembled to the outer frame 2. The right discharge hole 53 is formed larger than the left discharge hole 52.

  Further, the curtain plate member 50 is inclined such that the upper surface on the right side of the rear extension 51 is lower on the front end side. In addition, the curtain plate member 50 has a left mounting portion 56 for mounting the left sliding member 81 at a position on the right side of the rear extension 51 at the upper surface and a right mounting for mounting the right sliding member 82 near the right end at the upper surface And a unit 57. The lower surface of the main body frame 4 is placed on the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 via the left sliding member 81 and the right sliding member 82.

  As shown in the figure, the curtain plate member 50 has a shallow relief decoration on the front surface. Further, although the illustration is omitted, the curtain plate member 50 has a box-like interior divided into a grid by a plurality of ribs, and the strength and rigidity are enhanced. The curtain plate member 50 is formed so that the front half of the curtain plate reinforcing member 80 can be accommodated therein.

[2-5. Outer frame side upper hinge member]
The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 is a flat plate extending horizontally and having a rectangular outer shape fixed to the upper fixing portion 61 and a flat shape extending forward from the front end of the upper fixing portion 61 as illustrated. Of the front extension 62, a bearing groove 63 extending to the left and right center of the front extension 62 as going forward from the right end of the front extension 62, and penetrating vertically, and a plan view of the upper fixing portion 61 A flat horizontal fixing portion 64 extending downward from the left side, and a lower side extending from the end of the front extension 62 from the left end to the portion where the bearing groove 63 is open from the left end to the horizontal fixing A flat drooping portion 65 that is continuous with the portion 64 (see FIG. 16B and the like).

  In the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the upper fixing portion 61 is placed on the upper surface of the mounting stepped portion 12 of the upper frame member 10 in a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, and fixed by screws not shown. Yes. Further, the front extension portion 62 extends forward of the front end of the upper frame member 10. Further, the horizontal fixing portion 64 is fixed to the left frame member 30 by a screw in a state of being inserted from the upper side into the recess 31 of the outer side surface of the left frame member 30.

  The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 inserts the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 into the bearing groove 63, thereby cooperating with the outer frame side lower hinge member 70. It can be supported openable and closable. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

[2-6. Lock member]
As shown in FIG. 16, the lock member 66 of the outer frame 2 includes a band plate-like lock main body 66 a extending in the front-rear direction with a predetermined width on the left and right sides, and an operation portion protruding rightward from the rear end of the lock main body 66 a. 66b, an elastically deformable rod-like elastic portion 66c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock main body 66a and extending obliquely left frontward, and a mounting hole penetrating vertically near the rear end of the lock main body 66a And 66d. The lock member 66 is made of synthetic resin. The lock member 66 is rotatably attached to the lower surface of the front extension portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 by a mounting screw 67.

  The lock member 66 is attached at a position where the rear end of the lock main body 66a is behind the bearing groove 63 in the front extending portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 through the attachment hole 66d. Further, in a state where the lock member 66 is attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the lock main body 66a can block the bearing groove 63 in plan view, and the right side near the front end is the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 extends forward so as to be able to come into contact with a portion extending to the opening of the bearing groove 63 in the hanging portion 65 (see FIG. 18).

  Further, the tip end of the elastic portion 66c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock main body 66a is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the hanging portion 65 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60. The lock member 66 is biased in a direction such that the front end pivots to the left around the mounting hole 66d by the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c. Therefore, in a normal state, the right side surface of the lock member 66 near the front end of the lock body 66a is in contact with the hanging portion 65 (see FIG. 18). In this state, a space that can accommodate a body frame upper hinge pin 622 (to be described later) of the body frame side upper hinge member 620 is formed in a portion of the bearing groove 63 on the front side of the lock body 66a.

  The lock member 66 can rotate the lock main body 66a against the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c by operating the operation portion 66b. Then, by operating the operation portion 66b, the lock main body 66a is rotated in a direction in which the front end thereof moves to the left, whereby the lock main body 66a can be retracted from the bearing groove 63 in a plan view. Can be completely through. Thus, the main frame upper hinge pin 622 can be inserted into the bearing groove 63 or the main frame upper hinge pin 622 can be removed from the bearing groove 63.

[2-7. Outer frame side lower hinge member]
As shown in the figure, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 stands upward from a horizontally extending flat plate portion 71 and a rear side of the left side of the horizontal portion 71 from the center in the front-rear direction. A rising plate-like rising portion 72, an outer frame lower hinge pin 73 projecting upward from the vicinity of the front end of the horizontal portion 71, and passing through the horizontal portion 71 up and down so that only one game ball can pass therethrough. And a discharge hole 74 of a size. The outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

  The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed in a trapezoidal shape with the left side as the bottom in plan view. The outer frame lower hinge pin 73 has a cylindrical shape and is formed in a truncated cone shape whose upper end is narrowed at the upper end than the center in the vertical direction. The outer frame lower hinge pin 73 is attached to the left side position in the vicinity of the front end of the horizontal portion 71. The discharge hole 74 is formed in the horizontal portion 71 so as to be in contact with a central portion of the rising portion 72 in the front-rear direction, and extends from the left side of the horizontal portion 71 to the right in an inverted U shape. The discharge hole 74 is formed in substantially the same size as the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50.

  In the state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 has the horizontal portion 71 placed on the upper surface near the left end of the curtain plate member 50 and the rear extension portion 51. Is fixed to the curtain plate reinforcing member 80 by screws (not shown) penetrating the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50. Further, in a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the rising portion 72 is attached to a portion on the front side of the projecting portion 32 on the inner side surface of the left frame member 30 by a screw (not shown). The outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 73 into a main body frame lower hinge hole (not shown) in the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 of the main body frame 4. The main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be able to open and close in cooperation with the hinge member 60.

  Further, in a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge hole 74 coincides with the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50. Thereby, the gaming ball on the horizontal portion 71 can be dropped (discharged) to the rear side of the curtain plate member 50 through the discharge hole 74 and the left discharge hole 52. More specifically, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game balls that have dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 are closed as the main body frame 4 is closed. Since the gap between the two gradually narrows, the space is rolled backward and can be discharged from the discharge hole 74. At this time, the discharge hole 74 is formed at a position that is substantially the same as the rear end of the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in a state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. The game ball dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 can be easily prevented from rolling to the rear side of the main body frame 4 by being discharged from the discharge hole 74, and the outer frame side It is possible to make it difficult for the game ball to stay on the lower hinge member 70.

[2-8. Connecting member]
The connecting member 85 of the outer frame 2 includes an upper left connecting member 85A that connects the upper frame member 10 and the left frame member 30, an upper right connecting member 85B that connects the upper frame member 10 and the right frame member 40, and a lower frame member. 20 and a left lower connecting member 85C connecting the left frame member 30 and a lower right connecting member 85D connecting the lower frame member 20 and the right frame member 40.

  The connecting member 85 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 86, a flat plate-like upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extending upward from either one of the left and right sides of the horizontal fixing portion 86, and a horizontal fixing portion. And 86 a flat lower lower fixing portion 88 extending downward from the same side as the portion where the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extends. The connection member 85 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  In the upper left connecting member 85 </ b> A and the upper right connecting member 85 </ b> B, the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extends upward from the center of the horizontal fixing portion 86 in the front-rear direction, and the lower horizontal fixing portions 88 are formed from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87. It extends downward. That is, the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are provided with two lower lateral fixing portions 88 that are separated from each other in the front-rear direction. The horizontal fixing portions 86 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are fixed to the upper frame member 10 in a state of being in contact with the lower surface of the upper frame member 10. Further, the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is inserted into the engagement notch portion 21 of the upper frame member 10 and is fixed to the left and right ends of the upper frame member 10. Further, the lower lateral fixing portions 88 on the front side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are fixed to the inner side surfaces on the front side of the protruding portions 32 and 42 of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively. Further, the lower horizontal fixing portion 88 on the rear side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is inserted into the protruding portions 32 and 42 of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and is screwed from the outer side surface. Thus, the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are respectively fixed.

  In the lower left connecting member 85 </ b> C and the lower right connecting member 85 </ b> D, the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 protrudes rearward from the rear end of the horizontal fixing portion 86 and is more than the horizontal fixing portion 86 of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87. A lower lateral fixing portion 88 extends below the horizontal fixing portion 86 from the lower end of the portion protruding rearward. The lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D further include a bent portion 89 projecting from the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 to the same side as the horizontal fixing portion 86. The horizontal fixing portions 86 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are fixed in contact with the upper surface of the lower frame member 20. Further, the upper horizontal fixing portions 87 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are fixed to the inner side surface on the front side of the protruding portions 32, 42 of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively. Furthermore, the lower horizontal fixing portion 88 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D is inserted into the engagement cutout portion 21 of the lower frame member 20 and fixed to the end surface of the lower frame member 20 in the left-right direction. The

[2-9. Locking mechanism of outer frame side upper hinge member]
Next, in the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a lock mechanism for the main frame side upper hinge member 620 of the main body frame 4 by the lock member 66 in the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 will be described with reference to FIGS. Refer to the description. Fig.17 (a) is a perspective view which expands and shows the state by which the main frame side upper hinge member of the main body frame is removed with respect to the outer frame side upper hinge member of an outer frame, (b) is an outer upper side. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the state by which the main body side upper hinge member is attached to the hinge member. FIG. 18 is an explanatory view showing the action of the lock member in the outer frame.

  When the lock member 66 in the outer frame 2 is attached to the front extension portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 (normal state), the tip of the elastic portion 66 c is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the hanging portion 65. In addition, the lock body 66a is configured to close a part of the bearing groove 63 bent in a square shape, and the distal end portion of the lock body 66a does not close the deepest part of the bearing groove 63. A space in which the main frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main frame side upper hinge member 620 of the main body frame 4 can be inserted is formed at the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63.

  The support mechanism of the body frame upper hinge pin 622 using the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the lock member 66 in this embodiment is such that the body frame upper hinge pin 622 is inserted into the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63 and the front end of the lock body 66a. The right side surface of the lock body 66 is in close contact with the right hanging portion 65 (in this state, there is a slight gap between the right side surface at the front end of the lock body 66a and the right hanging portion 65 so that it is in contact with the right hanging surface 65). In the normal pivotally supported state, the respective centers of the main frame upper hinge pin 622 located at the deepest part of the bent bearing groove 63 and the front end face of the lock main body 66a are diagonally offset and opposed It is in a state.

  And, in this normal support state, since the main frame upper hinge pin 622 supporting the heavy main body frame 4 is in contact with the front end portion of the bearing groove 63, the main frame upper hinge pin There is almost no load from 622 on the front end face of the lock body 66a. That is, no load is applied to the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66. In addition, since the front end face of the lock main body 66a is formed in a circular arc shape, when the operation portion 66b is turned to turn the lock member 66, the lock member 66 is smoothly turned. Yes. Further, in the drawing, the arc center of the front end face of the lock main body 66a is taken as the center of the mounting hole 66d (the rotation center of the lock member 66).

  Therefore, when the acting force F is applied in a direction in which the hinge pin 622 on the body frame is removed along the inclination of the bearing groove 63 formed in a square shape, the acting force is applied to the arcuate front end surface of the lock body 66a. F is a component force F1 (normal direction of the arc of the front end surface of the lock main body 66a) acting on a contact portion between the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame and the arc-shaped front end surface, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame and the bearing groove 63. The component force F1 is directed to the center (rotation center of the lock member 66) of the mounting hole 66d (mounting screw 67) when divided into the component force F2 acting on the contact portion with the inner surface on one side The moment of rotating the front end of the lock main body 66 a of the lock member 66 in the direction away from the right hanging portion 65 does not act, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame is connected to the front end of the lock main body 66 a of the lock member 66 and the bearing groove 63. Inside Clamped state is maintained between the.

  For this reason, even in a normal shaft support state or a state where the acting force of the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame is applied to the lock member 66, the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66 is not constantly loaded, and is integrally formed of synthetic resin. It is possible to prevent plastic deformation due to creep of the elastic portion 66c, and to prevent the main frame upper hinge pin 622 from coming off from the bearing groove 63 for a long period of time. Even if an excessive force is applied and the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 is rotated in the direction to move to the right, the front right side of the lock main body 66a abuts on the hanging portion 65 to further Since it does not rotate, the lock member 66 does not protrude outside the front extension 62.

  Note that even if the shape of the front end face of the lock main body 66a is not arc-shaped, the position where the rotational moment is not generated by the action of the component F1 described above or the front end portion of the lock member 66 faces the outside of the forward extension portion 62. By placing the rotation center of the lock member 66 (the shaft fixed by the mounting screw 67) at a position where a rotational moment to rotate is generated, no load is always applied to the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66, Even when the lock member 66 rotates, the right side surface of the front end of the lock body 66 a just abuts on the hanging portion 65, and therefore the lock member 66 does not protrude outside the front extension portion 62.

  When the main body frame hinge pin 622 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 is supported by the bearing groove 63 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the main body frame is inserted into the bearing groove 63 from the open side of the bearing groove 63. Insert the hinge pin 622. When the hinge pin 622 on the body frame is inserted into the bearing groove 63, the hinge pin 622 on the body frame comes into contact with the right side surface of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66, and the front end of the lock body 66a is against the urging force of the elastic portion 66c. The lock member 66 rotates about the mounting screw 67 so as to move to the left. As a result, the lock main body 66 a that has closed the bearing groove 63 is retracted, the bearing groove 63 is opened, and the main body frame hinge pin 622 can be moved to the deepest portion (front end) of the bearing groove 63.

  When the body frame hinge pin 622 is moved to the deepest part of the bearing groove 63, the contact between the body frame hinge pin 622 and the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 is released, and the lock body 66a is urged by the urging force of the elastic portion 66c. The lock member 66 rotates so that the front end of the lock member moves to the right, and the lock member 66 returns to the normal state. As a result, the hinge pin 622 on the body frame is accommodated in a space in front of the front end of the lock body 66 a in the bearing groove 63, and the hinge pin 622 on the body frame is rotatable at the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63. It is held (locked) in the state.

  When removing the main frame upper hinge pin 622 from the inside of the bearing groove 63, the operating portion 66b of the locking member 66 is operated to turn the locking member 66 so that the front end of the lock main body 66a moves to the left. The lock main body 66a is retracted from the bearing groove 63 against the biasing force of 66c. As a result, the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63 and the opening communicate with each other, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame can be removed from the bearing groove 63.

[2-10. Crime prevention mechanism and ball biting prevention mechanism at the outer frame side lower hinge member]
Ball catching prevention for preventing the game ball from being caught between the crime prevention mechanism and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 at the portion of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment The mechanism will be described.

  In the assembled state, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is attached to the outer frame 2 at the left end in the front view on the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50. The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is mounted in a state of being placed near the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 and the upper surface of the rear extension portion 51. The curtain plate member 50 includes an upright wall portion 54 rising upward from the rear end of the upper surface. As a result, even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire enters the rear side of the main body frame 4 (pachinko machine 1) through the gap between the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640. Since the tip of the incorrect tool abuts on the upstanding wall portion 54 extending upward from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, it is possible to prevent the incorrect tool from being inserted further backward. It is possible to prevent an illegal act from being performed via the outer frame side lower hinge member 70.

  In addition, since the upper end of the standing wall portion 54 is provided with the return portion 55 extending forward, when the incorrect tool in contact with the upper wall portion 54 is bent upward, the end of the incorrect tool by the return portion 55 Can be folded further forward, so that unauthorized tools can be prevented from entering the rear side of the main body frame 4, and an illegal act is performed through the portion of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70. Can be reliably blocked.

  By the way, when the standing wall portion 54 extending upward is provided at the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, the gaming ball is on the outer frame side with the main body frame 4 open to the outer frame 2. When dropped onto the lower hinge member 70 (horizontal portion 71), the gaming ball on the horizontal portion 71 is not discharged rearward from the rear end of the horizontal portion 71 due to the presence of the standing wall portion 54. There is a risk of being caught between. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the discharge hole 74 and the left discharge hole 52 through which the game ball can pass through the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the rear extension portion 51 of the curtain plate member 50. Because the right discharge hole 53 is provided, the gaming balls on the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 can be discharged downward from the discharge hole 74 or the like, and the outer frame 2 and the body frame 4 It is possible to reduce the game ball being caught between the two.

  Therefore, when the game ball is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, the periphery of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is damaged, or the main body frame 4 is not closed in a normal state. A gap is created between the main unit frame 4 and the gap, which can be used to prevent fraudulent acts.

[3. Overall configuration of the door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 is a front view of a door frame in a pachinko machine, FIG. 20 is a right side view of the door frame, FIG. 21 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 22 is a rear view of the door frame. FIG. 23 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the front right, FIG. 24 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the front left, and FIG. 25 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the rear. 26 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line A-A in FIG. 19, FIG. 27 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line B-B in FIG. 19, and FIG. 28 is a cross section taken along the line C-C in FIG. FIG. FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear.

  As shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, the door frame 3 is attached to the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 and the square frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 whose front view extends vertically. The handle unit 300, the dish unit 320 attached to the lower front of the door frame base unit 100, the rendering operation unit 400 attached to the center of the dish unit 320, and the door frame base unit above the dish unit 320 A door frame left side unit 530 attached to the front left of the 100, a door frame right side unit 550 attached to the front right of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 320, and a door frame left side The door frame top attached to the upper part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 above the unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550. Is provided with a knit 570, a.

  The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3, which will be described in detail later, is a plate-shaped door frame base 110 having a through-hole 111 penetrating in the front and rear in a rectangular shape (rectangular shape) whose front view extends vertically. The frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 and the upper and lower ends of the reinforcing unit 130 on the left end side in a front view are hinge-rotatably attached to the main body frame 4 A door frame side upper hinge member 140 and a door frame side lower hinge member 150, a glass unit 190 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 and closing the through hole 111, a crime prevention cover 200 covering the lower rear surface of the glass unit 190; A door frame 3 and a main body frame 4 which are attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 so as to protrude forward through the door frame base 110 and can be opened and closed, and a main body frame 4 and an outer frame 2 An open / close cylinder unit 210 for locking the space, a ball feed unit 250 attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the door frame base 110 for sending gaming balls to the ball launcher 680, and a ball attached to the lower surface of the door frame base 110 A foul cover unit 270 that receives a game ball that has been launched by the launching device 680 and has not reached the game area 5a and that discharges it to the lower plate 322.

  Although the handle unit 300 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail later, the game ball stored in the upper plate 321 is changed according to the rotation angle of the handle 302 by the player rotating the rotatable handle 302. It is possible to drive into the game area 5a of the game board 5 with an extra strength.

  The plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 is attached to the lower portion of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100, and the front surface bulges forward. The effect operation unit 400 is attached to the front end in the center in the left-right direction. The dish unit 320 is provided with an upper dish 321 for storing gaming balls to be driven into the game area 5a, and gaming balls provided under the upper dish 321 and supplied from the upper dish 321 and the far cover unit 270. The lower plate 322 that can be stored, the upper plate ball removal button 327 for extracting the gaming balls stored in the upper plate 321 to the lower plate 322, and the remaining amount of cash or prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine A ball lending button 328 for lending a game ball to a player, a cash obtained by subtracting a game ball loaned from a ball lending machine or a return button 329 for returning a prepaid card, a cash inserted into the ball lending machine , A ball rental return display unit 330 for displaying the remaining number of prepaid cards, etc., an effect selection left button 331 and an effect selection right button 332 that can be accepted by the player when the effect is presented, and a lower plate Game balls in 22 and lower tray ball vent button 333 for discharging downwardly the dish unit 320, and a.

  The effect operation unit 400 of the door frame 3 is attached to the front of the plate unit 320 in the center in the left-right direction of the front view, and can be pressed by the player and presents the effect image to the player It is something that can be done. Although this effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail later, a door frame side effect capable of displaying the effect image, which is disposed so as to be visible from the player side in the operation button 410 and the large operation button 410 operable by the player Display device 460.

  The door frame left side unit 530 of the door frame 3 is attached to the front left portion on the left side of the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100 at the upper side of the plate unit 320, though the detailed contents will be described later. The left outer side of the game area 5a) is decorated. The door frame left side unit 530 includes a left unit decorative lens member (not shown) that can be decorated with light emission.

  The door frame right side unit 550 of the door frame 3 is attached to the front right portion on the right side of the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the plate unit 320, though the detailed contents will be described later. The right outer side of the game area 5a) is decorated. The door frame right side unit 550 protrudes to the front more largely than the door frame left side unit 530, and is provided at the front end with the right unit left decoration member 554 and the right unit right decoration member 557 provided on both right and left sides. The right unit decorative lens member 561 is provided. The door frame right side unit 550 can decorate the right unit left decorative member 554, the right unit right decorative member 557, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 with light emission.

  The door frame top unit 570 of the door frame 3 is attached to the upper side of the through hole 111 in the front of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 above the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 The upper part of the frame 3 is decorated. The details of the door frame top unit 570 will be described later, but the left and right sides of the pair of upper speakers 573 spaced apart to the left and right, the top middle decoration member 576 projecting forward at the front center, and the top middle decoration member 576 A top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 are provided. The door frame top unit 570 can light-decorate the top middle decorative member 576, the top left decorative lens member 579, and the top right decorative lens member 580.

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. 31A is a perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 31B is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the main part of the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the main part of the door frame base unit as seen from the rear. is there.

  The door frame base unit 100 is attached to the main body frame 4 so as to be openable / closable (rotatable by hinges) so that the left side when viewed from the front closes the front surface of the main body frame 4. In the door frame base unit 100, the handle unit 300 is attached to the front lower corner, and the plate unit 320 to which the rendering operation unit 400 is attached to the lower front of the through hole 111. The door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the right outer front surface of the through hole 111, and the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the upper outer front surface of the through hole 111, respectively.

  The door frame base unit 100 is, as shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, a plate-like door frame base 110 having a through-hole 111 which has a rectangular shape whose front view outline extends vertically and which penetrates back and forth. The frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 and the upper and lower ends of the reinforcing unit 130 on the left end side of the reinforcing unit 130 are projected forward from the door frame base 110. A door frame upper hinge member 140 and a door frame lower hinge member 150 rotatably attached to the body frame upper hinge member 620 and the body frame lower hinge member 640, and a front face of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 A door frame left side decoration substrate 160 mounted on the left side and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front, and a glass unit 19 rotatably mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 110 The glass unit mounting member 170 for mounting the detachably, and a.

  The door frame base unit 100 is attached to the lower right corner in front view on the front surface of the door frame base 110 and is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 and a cylindrical handle attachment member 180 for attaching the handle unit 300. A glass unit 190 that closes the through-hole 111, a security cover 200 that covers the lower rear portion of the glass unit 190, and an opening / closing cylinder unit that is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 so as to penetrate the door frame base 110 and protrude forward. 210, a ball feeding unit 250 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110, and a foul cover unit 270 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110.

  Further, although not shown, the door frame base unit 100 includes various decoration substrates provided in the door frame 3, a ball feeding solenoid 255, a handle rotation detection sensor 307, a handle touch sensor 310, a single button operation sensor 312, Ball rental button 328, return button 329, ball rental return display section 330, effect selection left button 331, effect selection right button 332, vibration motor 424, press detection sensor 440, door frame side effect display device 460 (liquid crystal display device 461) , Etc., and a door main body relay board for relaying the connection between the main body frame 4 and the door frame relay board 911 of the board unit 900.

3-1a. Door frame base]
The door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 31 to FIG. The door frame base 110 is formed in a quadrangle (rectangle) in which the outer shape in a front view extends vertically. The door frame base 110 is penetrated back and forth, and is provided with the penetration opening 111 formed in the substantially rectangular shape which the inner peripheral shape in the plain view extended up and down. In the through-hole 111, the upper side and the left and right sides forming the inner periphery are close to the outer periphery of the door frame base 110, respectively, and the lower side forming the inner periphery is up and down from the lower end of the door frame base 110. It is located at a height of about 1/3 of the direction. Therefore, the door frame base 110 is formed in a frame shape as a whole by the through holes 111 penetrating in the front and rear direction. The door frame base 110 is integrally formed of synthetic resin.

  The door frame base 110 is formed at the lower right corner in the front view of the front view, and is inclined so that the left end side protrudes slightly more forward than the right end side, the handle mounting surface 112, and the through hole 111. The cylinder mounting portion 113 to which the cylinder mounting plate metal 213 of the opening and closing cylinder unit 210 is attached is recessed toward the front from the rear surface in the vicinity of the right end in front view, and the cylinder mounting portion 113 penetrates back and forth The cylinder lock 211 is inserted through the cylinder insertion hole 114, the cylinder insertion hole 114, and the handle mounting surface 112 in a front view on the left side, and penetrates the entrance 251a and the ball outlet 251b of the ball feed unit 250 forward. And a ball feed opening 115 for facing the surface.

  Further, the door frame base 110 penetrates back and forth at substantially the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 112 to the left from the center of the door frame base 110 in the left-right direction, The lower plate passage port 116 and the front side of the door frame base 110 are penetrated forward and backward so as to be adjacent to the lower side of the through hole 111 in the vicinity of the left end, and the through ball passage 273 of the far cover unit 270 is faced forward A dish passage opening 117, a glass unit mounting portion 118 into which the glass frame 191 of the glass unit 190 is inserted and recessed from the rear surface along the inner periphery of the through-hole 111, and both left and right sides of the door frame base 110 And a speaker insertion port 119 through which the rear end of the upper speaker 573 of the door frame top unit 570 is inserted.

[3-1b. Reinforcement unit]
The reinforcing unit 130 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. The reinforcing unit 130 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 to reinforce the door frame base 110, thereby enhancing the strength and rigidity of the door frame base 110 (the door frame 3). The reinforcing unit 130 includes a left and right extending upper reinforcing sheet metal 131 attached along the upper side of the rear surface of the door frame base 110, and a laterally extending middle reinforcement attached below the through hole 111 on the rear surface of the door frame base 110. A sheet metal 132, a vertically extending left reinforcing sheet metal 133 attached along the left side in a front view on the rear surface of the door frame base 110, and a vertically extending right reinforcement attached along the right side in the front surface on the rear surface of the door frame base 110 A sheet metal 134 and a locking engagement portion 135 attached to the rear surface of the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 and to which the door frame collar 702 of the locking unit 700 is engaged are provided.

  The left and right ends of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131 are connected and fixed to the upper ends of the left reinforcing sheet metal 133 and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 by screws, and the left end of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is connected to the left reinforcing sheet metal 133 by screws. It is fixed. The right end of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is connected and fixed to the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 via a cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 of the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 described later. Therefore, the reinforcing unit 130 is formed in a frame shape by the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, the right reinforcing sheet metal 134, and the like.

  The upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, the right reinforcing sheet metal 134, and the locking / locking portion 135 of the reinforcing unit 130 are formed by appropriately bending a metal sheet. The middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is formed with a notch portion 132a penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the upper plate passage opening 117 of the door frame base 110.

  Although not shown in detail, the reinforcing unit 130 has portions of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 which are bent in the front-rear direction, This part increases the strength and rigidity, and prevents the entry of unauthorized tools such as a piano wire or a flat-blade screwdriver from the outside.

[3-1c. Door frame side upper hinge member]
The door frame side upper hinge member 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The door frame-side upper hinge member 140 is attached to the door frame base 110 and has a pair of protruding pieces 141a that are spaced apart from each other in the vertical direction, and a pair of protrusions of the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141. A cylindrical door frame upper hinge pin 142 which penetrates the piece 141a and whose upper end is inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main frame side upper hinge member 620, and a pair of projecting pieces 141a of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 A disc-shaped eaves member 143 attached at a position between the eaves member 143, the eaves member 143 and the lower protruding piece 141a of the pair of protruding pieces 141a, and a hinge pin 142 on the door frame And a lock spring 144 urging the door frame upper hinge pin 142 upward.

  The door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 has a flat plate-like mounting piece connecting the rear ends of a pair of projecting pieces 141a although not shown, and the shape of the side view is opened forward. It is formed in a letter shape. The door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 has a mounting piece connecting a pair of protruding pieces 141a attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 with screws.

  A portion (upper end) of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 projecting upward from the upper projecting piece 141 a is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main frame side upper hinge member 620. Further, although not shown, the door frame upper hinge pin 142 is bent in a horizontal direction at a portion protruding downward from the lower protruding piece 141a. The bent portion abuts on the lower surface of the lower protruding piece 141a, thereby restricting the upward movement of the hinge pin 142 on the door frame.

  The eaves member 143 is an E-ring, and is inserted and held in a groove formed on the outer periphery of the door frame upper hinge pin 142. The lock spring 144 is a coil spring through which the door frame upper hinge pin 142 can be inserted. The upper end is in contact with the wedge member 143, and the lower end is in contact with the lower projecting piece 141a. The lock spring 144 is interposed between the flange member 143 and the lower protruding piece 141a in a compressed state, and biases the door frame upper hinge pin 142 upward via the flange member 143. .

  The door frame upper hinge member 140 is in a state in which the door frame upper hinge pin 142 is biased upward by the lock spring 144, and the horizontally bent portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 protrudes downward. By coming into contact with the lower surface of the piece 141a, further upward movement is restricted. In this state, the upper end of the hinge pin 142 on the door frame protrudes a predetermined amount above the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 141a.

  The door frame side upper hinge member 140 holds the horizontally bent portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142, and pulls the portion downward against the biasing force of the lock spring 144 to open the door frame. The upper hinge pin 142 can be moved entirely downward, and the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 can be recessed below the upper surface of the upper projecting piece 141a. Therefore, the door frame side upper hinge member 140 inserts the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main frame side upper hinge member 620 from below or pulls it down. Can do. Thereby, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame side upper hinge member 140 is inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main frame side upper hinge member 620, whereby the front left upper end of the door frame 3 is obtained. The main body frame 4 can be supported so as to be capable of hinge rotation.

  Further, in the door frame side upper hinge member 140, a portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 supported by the pair of projecting pieces 141a of the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 is a door frame of the door frame lower lower hinge member 150 described later. The lower hinge pin 152 is supported coaxially. Thus, the door frame 3 upper hinge member 140 and the door frame side lower hinge member 150 can rotate the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 in a favorable state.

[3-1d. Door frame side lower hinge member]
The door frame side lower hinge member 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32. The door frame side lower hinge member 150 is attached to the door frame base 110 and includes a door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151 having a flat plate-like extension piece 151a extending forward, and a door frame lower hinge shaft bracket. A columnar door frame lower hinge pin 152 (see FIGS. 21 and 22) protruding downward from the vicinity of the front end of the extending piece 151a.

  The door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151 has a flat plate-like attachment piece (not shown) extending upward from the rear end of a flat plate-like extension piece 151a extending horizontally, and has an overall shape in a side view. Is formed in a substantially L-shape. The door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151 has a mounting piece (not shown) attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 with screws.

  The door frame lower hinge pin 152 is formed in a truncated cone shape whose lower end is narrowed toward the lower side. The door frame lower hinge pin 152 is rotatably inserted into the door frame hinge hole 644 of the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 in the main body frame 4 described later. The door frame lower hinge pin 152 is arranged coaxially with the door frame upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame side upper hinge member 140.

  The door frame lower hinge member 150 can rotate the door frame 3 relative to the body frame 4 by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 152 into the door frame hinge hole 644 of the body frame lower hinge member 640. Can be supported.

[3-1 e. Door frame left side decoration board]
The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 31 and 32 and the like. The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 is attached to the front of the door frame base 110 on the left side in a front view of the through hole 111. The door frame left side decorative board 160 extends up and down from the height of the position below the speaker insertion port 119 on the left side when viewed from the front in the door frame base 110 to the height near the center of the through hole 111 in the vertical direction. The frame left side upper decorative board 161 and the door frame left side lower decorative board extending up and down from the height of the lower position of the door frame left side upper decorative board 161 to substantially the same height as the lower end of the upper plate passage opening 117. And a substrate 162.

  The door frame left side upper decoration substrate 161 of the door frame left side decoration substrate 160 and the door frame left side lower decoration substrate 162 are respectively provided with a plurality of LEDs 161 a and 162 a capable of emitting light forward on the front surface. The LEDs 161a and 162a are full color LEDs.

  The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 is located behind the door frame left side unit 530 described later in a state where the door frame 3 is assembled, and a plurality of (mounted) LEDs 161 a and 162 a provided on the front surface By appropriately emitting light, the left unit decorative lens member of the door frame left side unit 530 can be decorated with light emission.

[3-1f. Glass unit mounting member]
The glass unit attachment member 170 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 31 (b) and the like. The glass unit attachment member 170 is rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 and is for detachably attaching the glass unit 190. The glass unit attachment member 170 has a disk-like base 171 rotatably mounted about an axis extending back and forth on the rear side of the door frame base 110, and a bar-like projection from the base 171 in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. And a protruding portion 172.

  The glass unit attachment member 170 is rotatably attached to a portion below the pair of speaker insertion openings 119 on the rear surface of the door frame base 110 and outside the glass unit attachment portion 118.

  By setting the glass unit attachment member 170 to rotate so that the protrusion 172 protrudes upward from the base 171, the protrusion 172 is more outward than the glass unit attachment portion 118 of the door frame base 110 in a rear view. The glass unit 190 can be inserted into the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110, or the glass unit 190 can be removed from the glass unit mounting portion 118.

  When the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated so that the protruding portion 172 protrudes downward from the base portion 171 with the glass unit 190 inserted in the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110, the protruding portion 172 is glass The unit 190 comes into contact with the rear side of the mounting piece 191a, and the rearward movement of the upper portion of the glass unit 190 is restricted, so that the glass unit 190 can be attached to the door frame base 110.

  In the glass unit attachment member 170, the projection 172 projects from the disk-like base 171 rotatably attached to the door frame base 110, so the center of gravity of the glass unit attachment member 170 is located in the projection 172 . From this, in a state where the glass unit mounting member 170 can freely rotate, the protruding portion 172 is stabilized in a state of protruding downward from the base portion 171. And, in the glass unit attachment member 170, since the projection 172 restricts the backward movement of the glass unit 190 at the rotational position where the projection 172 projects downward from the base 171, the glass unit attachment Even if vibration or the like acts on the member 170, the whole does not rotate so that the projecting portion 172 protrudes upward from the base portion 171, and the restriction on the backward movement of the glass unit 190 is naturally released. Absent.

  When the glass unit 190 is removed from the door frame base 110, the glass unit attachment member 170 is rotated so that the projection 172 protrudes upward from the base 171, and the projection 172 is attached to the attachment piece 191a of the glass unit 190. By moving the glass unit 190 to the outside, the upper side of the glass unit 190 can be moved rearward, and the glass unit 190 can be removed from the door frame base 110.

[3-1 g. Handle mounting member]
The handle mounting member 180 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. The handle attachment member 180 is for attaching the handle unit 300 to the front surface of the door frame base 110. As shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, the handle mounting member 180 extends outward in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the cylindrical portion 181 from the rear end of the cylindrical cylindrical portion 181 extending in the front-rear direction and the rear end of the cylindrical portion 181. A plurality of annular flanges 182 extending, and a plurality of protruding into the cylindrical portion 181 and extending over the entire axial length of the cylindrical portion 181 and disposed at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 181 ( In this example, the three protruding ridges 183 are provided, and the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 181 and the front surface of the flange portion 182 are connected to each other, and a plurality of reinforcing ribs 184 arranged in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 181 .

  The handle attachment member 180 is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 112 with screws in a state where the rear surface of the flange portion 182 is in contact with the front surface of the handle attachment seat surface 112 in the door frame base 110.

  The cylindrical portion 181 has an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the base portion 301 a of the handle base 301 in the handle unit 300. One of the three protrusions 183 is provided on the upper side in the cylindrical portion 181, and the remaining two are provided on the lower side in the cylindrical portion 181. These three protrusions 183 are formed at positions corresponding to the three groove portions 301 c in the handle base 301. Therefore, the handle attachment member 180 can insert the base portion 301a of the handle base 301 into the cylindrical portion 181 only in a state where the three protrusions 183 and the three groove portions 301c of the handle base 301 coincide with each other. The rotational position of the handle base 301 (handle unit 300) can be regulated with respect to the door frame base 110.

  The handle mounting member 180 is attached to the inclined handle mounting seat surface 112 of the door frame base 110 because the axis of the cylinder 181 extends perpendicularly to the rear surface of the flange 182. Thus, the handle unit 300 can be attached to the door frame base 110 in a tilted state.

[3-1 h. Glass unit]
The glass unit 190 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The glass unit 190 closes the through-hole 111 of the door frame base 110 so that the rear can be visually recognized from the front. The glass unit 190 has a frame-shaped glass frame 191 that is larger than the inner peripheral shape of the through-hole 111 of the door frame base 110 and can be attached to the glass unit attachment portion 118, and the outer periphery of the glass frame 191 is closed. And two transparent glass plates 192 attached to 191. The two glass plates 192 are attached to the front end side and the rear end side of the glass frame 191, respectively, and are spaced apart from each other so that a space is formed between them (see FIG. 26 and the like).

  The glass frame 191 has a pair of mounting pieces 191a extending flatly outward from a position lower than the front left and right upper corners, and a band projecting downward from the lower end and extending along the lower side A plate-like locking piece 191b. The mounting piece 191 a of the glass frame 191 can be brought into contact with the protruding portion 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170. The locking piece 191b can be inserted into a space between the door frame base 110 and the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130 (see FIG. 26).

  The glass unit 190 is inserted from above from the rear side of the door frame base 110 into the gap between the door frame base 110 and the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130 from above. The front end of the glass frame 191 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110, and the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated to make the projection 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170 a mounting piece 191a of the glass frame 191 It is attached to the door frame base 110 by bringing it into contact with the rear surface of the door frame.

  When the glass unit 190 is removed from the door frame base 110, it can be removed in the reverse procedure to the above. Thereby, the glass unit 190 is detachable with respect to the door frame base 110.

[3-1 i. Security cover]
The crime prevention cover 200 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The crime prevention cover 200 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 so as to cover the lower part of the rear surface of the glass unit 190, and is formed of a transparent synthetic resin. The security cover 200 is arranged with a flat plate-shaped main body portion 201 having an outer periphery formed in a predetermined shape, a flat plate-shaped rear protrusion piece 202 that protrudes rearward along the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 201, and is separated from the left and right. And a pair of locking pieces 203 that project forward relative to the main body 201 and are lockable on the rear side of the door frame base 110.

  The main body 201 of the security cover 200 is formed such that the lower end protrudes below the lower end of the glass unit 190 in a state of being attached to the door frame base 110. Further, the main body 201 is formed in a shape along the lower end of the game area 5 a in the game board 5 in a state where the upper end is assembled to the pachinko machine 1. More specifically, the upper end of the main body portion 201 is formed in a shape along a part of the inner rail 1002 of the front component 1000 described later, the out guiding part 1003, a part of the lower right rail 1004, and the right rail 1005 The pachinko machine 1 is assembled so as not to protrude into the game area 5a.

  The rear protrusion 202 is formed over substantially the entire outer periphery of the main body portion 201. Therefore, the crime prevention cover 200 is formed in the shape of a shallow box opened rearward by the main body portion 201 and the rear projecting piece 202, and the strength and the rigidity are high. Further, as shown in FIG. 33, the rear protruding piece 202 also protrudes rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 201 different from the outer peripheral edge of the main body 201. A rear projection 202 projecting rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 201 is formed along a part of the outer rail 1001 of the front component 1000 of the game board 5 in a state assembled in the pachinko machine 1 ing.

  The rear projection 202 is not formed at a portion of the game board 5 located between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in the state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1. As a result, the gaming ball passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 (the gaming ball launched by the ball launching device 680) does not abut the rear projection 202 of the security cover 200, and the inside of the gaming area 5a There is no hindrance to the game ball.

  The pair of locking pieces 203 is elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base 110. Thereby, the crime prevention cover 200 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base 110.

  When the security cover 200 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the front surface of the main body 201 is in contact with the rear surface of the glass unit 190 (the rear end of the glass frame 191) and protrudes backward from the lower side of the main body 201. The removed rear protrusion 202 is in a state of being inserted into a security recess 1008 of the front component 1000 described later. Further, the security cover 200 is in a state in which the rear protruding piece 202 protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body 201 protrudes rearward from the front surface of the front structural member 1000 so as to contact the lower surface of the front structural member 1000. . As a result, the space between the crime prevention cover 200 and the game board 5 (the front component 1000) is intricately bent by the rear projection 202 of the crime prevention cover 200 and the crime prevention recess 1008 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire enters the game area 5a through the space between the security cover 200 and the front structural member 1000 from below the front of the board 5, it will be blocked by the rear protrusion 202 and the security recess 1008. , And can prevent unauthorized tools from entering the gaming area 5a.

[3-1 j. Open / close cylinder unit]
The opening / closing cylinder unit 210 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The opening / closing cylinder unit 210 is attached from the rear side to the cylinder attachment portion 113 at a position between the through hole 111 and the handle attachment seat surface 112 near the right end of the door frame base 110 in front view, and cooperates with a locking unit 700 described later. It is used to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 and to open and close the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4.

  The opening / closing cylinder unit 210 has a keyhole 211a on the front surface and a cylindrical cylinder lock 211 extending in the front and rear direction, and a lock unit attached to the rear end of the cylinder lock 211 and locking operation of a key inserted in the keyhole 211a. A rotation transmission member 212 for transmitting to 700 key cylinders 710 and a cylinder mounting plate 213 for mounting the cylinder lock 211 to the door frame base 110 (reinforcing unit 130) are provided.

  The cylinder lock 211 can rotate a key by inserting a corresponding key (not shown) into the key hole 211a. If the key is a corresponding key, the cylinder lock 211 can be rotated clockwise or counterclockwise. Can also be rotated by a predetermined angle in this direction.

  The rotation transmitting member 212 is formed in a cylindrical shape with an open rear side (specifically, a conical cylinder shape whose diameter increases toward the rear side), and is directed forward from the rear end to a position facing the center axis. It has a pair of cutout portions 212a cut out. The rotation transmitting member 212 is formed such that the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from the rear, and the projection of the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 is inserted into the pair of cutouts 212a. Thus, the rotation of the rotation transmitting member 212 (the key inserted into the key hole 211a of the cylinder lock 211) can be transmitted to the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 to rotate the key cylinder 710.

  The cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 is formed by bending a single metal plate, and is formed in a convex shape whose shape in plan view protrudes forward. More specifically, the cylinder mounting plate 213 has a rectangular plate-like front plate portion 213a that extends vertically in a front view, and a pair of side plate portions 213b that extend in a flat plate shape rearward from both left and right sides of the front plate portion 213a. And a pair of mounting plate portions 213c extending in a flat plate shape in a direction away from the rear sides of each of the pair of side plate portions 213b. In the front plate portion 213a of the cylinder mounting metal plate 213, the cylinder lock 211 penetrates from the rear at a substantially central position in the vertical direction, and the rear end of the cylinder lock 211 is attached to the rear surface of the front plate portion 213a. In the pair of mounting plate portions 213c of the cylinder mounting plate 213, the mounting plate portion 213c on the left in front view is attached to the right end of the middle reinforcing plate 132 of the reinforcing unit 130, and the mounting plate portion 213c on the right in front view is of the reinforcing unit 130 Attached to the right reinforcing sheet metal 134. Accordingly, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 are connected by the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213.

  In the open / close cylinder unit 210 assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the front end of the cylinder lock 211 projecting forward from the front plate portion 213a of the cylinder mounting plate 213 is the cylinder insertion hole from the rear side of the door frame base 110. The front plate portion 213a and the pair of side plate portions 213b of the cylinder mounting plate metal 213 are accommodated in a box-like cylinder mounting portion 113 which is inserted into the housing 114 and protrudes forward of the door frame base 110. ing.

[3-1 k. Ball feed unit]
The ball feeding unit 250 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 34 and FIG. FIG. 34 (a) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 34 (b) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 35 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 35 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit with the back case removed and the tamperproof member removed. The ball feeding unit 250 can supply the game balls supplied from the upper plate 321 of the tray unit 320 to the ball launcher 680 one by one, and the game balls stored in the upper plate 321 can be used as the upper plate ball. It can be pulled out to the lower pan by operating the pull button 327.

  In the ball feed unit 250, the game balls stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 are supplied through the upper plate ball feed port 323d of the plate unit base 323 and the ball feed opening 115 of the door frame base 110 and penetrated in the front-rear direction. An entrance 251a, and a box-like front cover 251 having a ball outlet 251b opened to the lower side of the entrance 251a and opened at the rear, and a box closing the rear end of the front cover 251 and opening the front , A rear cover 252 having a hitting ball supply port 252a for supplying a game ball that has entered from the entrance 251a of the front cover 251 penetrating in the front-rear direction to the ball launcher 680, the rear cover 252 and the front cover A partition portion 253 that is pivotally supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between 251 and partitions between the entrance 251a and the ball outlet 251b on the rear side of the front cover 251. The game balls on the separating portion 253a of the ball removing member 253 are sent one by one to the ball hitting supply port 252a of the back cover 252, and between the front cover 251 and the rear cover 252 in the vertical direction A ball feeding member 254 supported so as to be rotatable around the extended axis, and a ball feeding solenoid 255 for rotating the ball feeding member 254 are provided.

  As shown in the figure, the ball feeding unit 250 has a ball feeding member 254 arranged on the right side of the entrance 251a in front view, and a ball removing member 253 on the left side of the ball feeding member 254. A ball feeding solenoid 255 is arranged on the right side.

  The front cover 251 of the ball feeding unit 250 is provided with an arc-shaped slit 251 c concentrically formed with respect to the rotation center of the ball removing member 253 on the left side of the ball outlet 251 b in front view. The actuating rod 253c of the ball removing member 253, which will be described later, is designed to extend forward. Further, the front cover 251 extends upward from the upper edge of the entrance 251a, and when the door frame 3 is assembled, the ball feed guiding path 323e of the pan unit base 323 and the upstream side of the ball removing guiding path 323f. It is formed so as to close from the rear side a site which is open to the rear at the end side.

  The ball removal member 253 includes a partition portion 253a that is divided below the entrance port 251a and between the entrance port 251a and the ball exit port 251b and whose upper surface is lowered toward the ball feed member 254, and a ball of the partition portion 253a. It extends downward from the end opposite to the feed member 254 and bends in the shape of a letter from the middle in the vertical direction toward the lower center of the ball outlet 251b and rotates around the axis whose lower end extends in the front-rear direction. A pivot collar 253b that is movably supported, a rod-shaped actuation collar 253c that protrudes forward from the upper end of the pivot collar 253b, and a side below the actuation collar 253c from the side surface of the pivot collar 253b. And a weight portion 253d protruding to the opposite side to the partition portion 253a. The operating rod 253c of the ball removal member 253 is formed so as to protrude forward through an arc-shaped slit 251c formed in the front cover 251 (see FIG. 34A). The operating rod 253 c comes into contact with the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 327 a that is operated by the pressing operation of the upper dish ball removal button 327 of the dish unit 320 through the ball feed opening 115 of the door frame base 110.

  The ball feed member 254 is directed toward the entrance 251a and the partitioning portion 253a of the ball removing member 253, and has a blocking portion 254a having a fan-like plan view centering on a rotation axis extending in the vertical direction, and a rear end of the blocking portion 254a. A sphere holding portion 254b that is recessed in an arc shape from the rotation axis to the rotation shaft core side, and a rod-like flange portion 254c that extends downward from the rear end of the sphere holding portion 254b. The blocking portion 254a and the ball holding portion 254b of the ball feeding member 254 are formed adjacent to each other within an angle range of about 180 ° around the rotation axis. Further, the ball holding portion 254b of the ball feeding member 254 has a size that can hold one game ball. The ball feed member 254 is pivoted about the axis of rotation by moving the collar portion 254 c disposed at a position eccentric to the axis of rotation by driving the ball feed solenoid 255 in the left-right direction.

  The ball feeding member 254 includes a supply position in which the blocking portion 254a faces the direction of the partition portion 253a and at the same time the ball holding portion 254b communicates with the hitting ball supply port 252a, and the ball holding portion 254b is in the direction of the partition portion 253a. It is designed to rotate between the holding position facing toward. When the ball feeding member 254 is in the supply position, the game ball held in the ball holding portion 254b is supplied from the hitting ball supply port 252a to the ball launching device 680 and enters the partition portion 253a from the entrance 251a. However, the blocking unit 254a blocks the movement toward the ball holding unit 254b (hit ball supply port 252a) and stays on the partition unit 253a. On the other hand, when the ball feed member 254 rotates to the holding position, the ball holding portion 254b faces the partition portion 253a, and the end of the ball holding portion 254b on the flange 254c side closes the hitting ball supply port 252a. Only one game ball on the partition portion 253a is held in the ball holding portion 254b.

  In addition, the ball feed unit 250 has a ball feed operating rod 256 whose tip is swung in the vertical direction by driving (energization) of a ball feed solenoid 255, and back and forth by the movement of the tip of the ball feed rod 256 moving in the vertical direction. And a ball feed crank 257 that rotates around an axis extending in the direction and rotates the ball feed member 254 around an axis extending in the vertical direction. The ball feed crank 257 is engageable with the vertically moving tip of the ball feed operating rod 256 and extends in the left and right direction from an engaging portion 257a and a side engaged with the ball feed operating rod 256 of the engaging portion 257a A shaft portion 257b disposed on the opposite side and pivotally supported about an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 251 and the rear cover 252 and extending upward from the shaft portion 257b A transmission portion 257c that engages with a rod-shaped flange portion 254c (see FIG. 35B) that protrudes downward from a position that is eccentric with respect to the rotation center of the member 254 is provided.

  The ball feed unit 250 transmits the movement of the ball feed actuating rod 256 which is rocked by the driving of the ball feed solenoid 255 which is advanced and retracted in the vertical direction by the ball feed actuating rod 256 and the ball feeding crank 257 It can be rotated. When the ball feed solenoid 255 is not driven (normal time), the ball feed operating rod 256 is separated from the lower end of the ball feed solenoid 255 so that the tip end is positioned downward. It will be in the state located. Further, when the ball feed solenoid 255 is driven, the ball feed operating rod 256 is attracted to the lower end of the ball feed solenoid 255 so that the tip is positioned upward, and the ball feed member 254 pivots to the holding position. That is, when the ball feed solenoid 255 is driven (ON state), the ball feed member 254 receives one gaming ball and the drive of the ball feed solenoid 255 is released (OFF state), the ball feed member 254 Can be sent (supplied) to the ball launcher 680 side. The driving of the ball feeding solenoid 255 in the ball feeding unit 250 is controlled by the firing control unit (not shown) of the payout control board 951 in synchronization with the drive control of the firing solenoid 682.

  In addition, the ball extraction member 253 rotatably supported on the ball feeding unit 250 is configured such that a moment is applied by the weight portion 253 d so as to rotate in a counterclockwise direction in a front view, but it protrudes forward The rotation of the actuating rod 253c is restricted by the contact of the actuating rod 253c with the upper end of the actuating transmission portion 327a which is operated by the pressing operation of the upper disc ball releasing button 327 of the disc unit 320. The parting part 253a of the part separates the entrance 251a and the ball outlet 251b, and the game ball does not enter the ball outlet 251b side.

  When the player presses the upper dish ball removal button 327 of the dish unit 320 downward, the upper dish ball removal slider 327b slides downward together with the operation transmission unit 327a, and the operation transmission unit 327a moves downward. Accordingly, the operating rod 253c also moves relatively downward. When the operating rod 253c moves downward together with the operation transmitting portion 327a, the ball removing member 253 rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, and the partition between the entrance 251a and the ball outlet 251b by the partition portion 253a is released. Be done. As a result, the game ball that has entered from the entrance 251a is discharged from the ball outlet 251b to the ball outlet guide path 323f of the tray unit 320 and discharged (supplied) to the lower tray 322 via the lower tray ball supply port 323c. be able to.

  The upper dish ball removal slider 327b formed with the action transmitting portion 327a with which the operation rod 253c of the ball removal member 253 contacts is urged upward by the upper dish ball removal spring 327c. Even if game balls are supplied vigorously, the impact can be absorbed by the upper dish ball removal spring 327c via the operating rod 253c, and the ball removal member 253 and the like can be prevented from being damaged. The game ball can be prevented from bouncing back at the partition portion 253a.

  The ball feeding unit 250 has a rectangular mounting recess 252b (see FIG. 35 (b) and the like) that is recessed forward in the upper right in the rear view of the hitting ball supply port 252a in the rear cover 252. The fraud prevention member 260 is mounted in the mounting recess 252b. The fraud prevention member 260 of the ball feeding unit 250 is formed of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is attached to the inside of the mounting recess 252b of the rear cover 252 so as to be detachable from the rear side.

  The fraud prevention member 260 is formed in a rectangular shape whose outer shape in front view extends to the left and right, and an upper piece 261 that is vertically separated at a substantially vertical center in a predetermined distance from the right side to the left. A lower piece portion 262, and an inclined portion 263 each formed in a C-chamfered shape on the tip end side (right end side in front view) of sides of the upper piece portion 261 and the lower piece portion 262 facing each other . The upper piece 261 of the anti-fraud member 260 is bent with respect to the general surface of the anti-fraud member 260 so that the right end in front view protrudes backward. The lower piece 262 extends on the same plane as the general surface of the tamper-proof member 260. Thereby, in a plan view, the upper piece portion 261 and the lower piece portion 262 form a V-shaped groove that expands toward the right.

  The fraud prevention member 260 is attached to the attachment recess 252b of the rear cover 252 so that the V-shaped groove formed by the upper piece 261 and the lower piece 262 communicates with the inside of the hit ball supply port 252a. Become.

  According to this fraud preventing member 260, the illegal gaming ball attached with the string is driven from the upper plate 321 through the ball feeding unit 250 into the game area 5a by the ball launching device 680 and attached to the illegal gaming ball When a cheating operation is performed such that an illegal game ball is moved into and out of the first starting opening 2002 etc. by operating the string, the force of the illegal game ball fired (hit ball) by the ball launching device 680 causes an illegal action. After a string attached to a simple game ball is inserted between the upper piece 261 and the lower piece 262, the V-shaped narrow formed by the upper piece 261 and the lower piece 262 is narrowed. It can be cut by the part, and it is possible to prevent an illegal act using an illegal game ball with a string attached.

[3-1 l. Foul cover unit]
The fowl cover unit 270 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 36 to 38. FIG. 36 (a) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 36 (b) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as seen from the back. FIG. 37A is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit viewed from the front with the lid member removed, and FIG. 37B is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit viewed from the rear with the lid member removed. Furthermore, FIG. 38 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the lid removed.

  As shown in the figure, the fool cover unit 270 is a shallow box-shaped unit body 271 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 and opened on the front side, and a flat cover member attached to the front of the unit body 271 272. The foul cover unit 270 penetrates back and forth at the upper left corner in a front view and connects the normal guiding path 861 of the lower full-ball passage unit 860 of the main body frame 4 and the upper ball supply port 323a of the plate unit 320 A full sphere receiving port 274 that opens toward the rear at the lower right side of the front sphere passage 273 and the through-sphere passage 273 and communicates with the full guide passage 862 of the lower full sphere route unit 860 of the main body frame 4. And.

  Further, the foul cover unit 270 opens upward on the right side of the full ball receiving port 274 when viewed from the front, and does not reach the game area 5a despite being fired by the ball launcher 680 of the main body frame 4. A foul ball receiving port 275 for receiving a game ball (foul ball), and a game ball opened to the front near the lower right corner of the front view and received in the full tank receiving port 274 and the foul ball receiving port 275 are moved forward. And a ball outlet 276 communicating with the lower ball feed port 323c of the tray unit 320.

  Further, the foul cover unit 270 is formed between the full ball receptacle 274 and the far ball receptacle 275 and the ball outlet 276 by the unit main body 271 and the lid member 272, and can store a predetermined amount of gaming balls. The storage passage 277 having a wide width, the flat plate-like movable piece 278 which constitutes a part of the inner wall of the storage passage 277 and whose lower end is rotatably attached to the unit main body 271, and the movable piece A full tank detection sensor 279 for detecting a rotation in a direction away from the storage passage 277 and a spring 280 biasing the movable piece 278 toward the center of the storage passage 277 are provided.

  In the far cover unit 270, when the lower plate 322 of the plate unit 320 is filled with gaming balls and the gaming balls are not released from the ball outlet 276 to the lower plate 322 side, a certain number of them are stored in the storage passage 277 The game balls can be stored. Then, when a certain number of game balls are stored in the storage passage 277, the upper end of the movable piece 278 moves away from the storage passage 277 against the biasing force of the spring 280 by the weight of the game balls. The movable piece 278 rotates, and the rotation is detected by the full tank detection sensor 279. As a result, it can be determined that the lower plate 322 is full of gaming balls, so that when full is detected by the full detection sensor 279, the payout of more gaming balls is stopped, This can be notified to the player or a person in charge at the game hall to urge that the lower tray 322 be completely filled.

  The foul cover unit 270 is attached to the rear side of the unit main body 271 and below the through ball passage 273, and the guide path opening / closing door of the lower full ball path unit 860 in the payout unit 800 described later of the main body frame 4 A door opening and closing contact portion 281 capable of being in contact with the operation projection 863 e of 863 is provided (see FIG. 112). The door opening / closing contact portion 281 is inclined so that the rear surface moves forward as it goes downward. The door opening / closing contact portion 281 is formed such that when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the operating projection 863 e of the guide path opening / closing door 863 contacts. When the operating projection 863e of the guideway opening / closing door 863 contacts the door opening / closing contact portion 281, the guideway opening / closing door 863 rotates and the downstream end (front opening) of the normal guideway 861 and the full tank guideway 862. ) Can be released.

[3-2. Handle unit]
The handle unit 300 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 39 and 40. 39A is a front view of the handle unit in the door frame, FIG. 39B is a perspective view of the handle unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 39B is a perspective view of the handle unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 40 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 40 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. The handle unit 300 is attached to the handle attachment member 180 of the door frame base unit 100, and operated by the player so that the game ball in the upper plate 321 can be driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5 It is.

  The handle unit 300 covers the handle base 301 attached to the cylindrical portion 181 of the handle attachment member 180 in the door frame base unit 100, the handle 302 rotatably attached to the front end of the handle base 301, and the front end side of the handle 302. And a handle cover 303 attached to the handle base 301.

  The handle unit 300 has an inner base 304 attached to the front surface of the handle base 301 on the rear side of the handle 302, a handle 302 attached to the front end, and a rotatable attachment by the inner base 304 and the handle base 301 on the outer periphery. A shaft member 305 having a drive gear portion 305a, a transmission gear 306 meshing with the drive gear portion 305a of the shaft member 305, a detection shaft 307a rotating integrally with the transmission gear 306, and a handle base 301 and an inner And a handle rotation detection sensor 307 held between the base and the steering wheel.

  Furthermore, the handle unit 300 is attached so that one end side is attached to the handle base 301 and the other end side is attached to the handle 302 so that the handle 302 is returned to the initial rotation position (rotation end in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front). One end side is attached to the inner base 304 and the other end side is attached to the transmission gear 306, and the detection shaft 307a of the handle rotation detection sensor 307 is rotated clockwise in front view via the transmission gear 306. The auxiliary spring 309 biased in the direction, the handle touch sensor 310 attached to the handle base 301 behind the inner base 304, and the tip side outward from the left side of the front end outer peripheral surface of the handle base 301 in front view. The handle is protruding and the base end is behind the inner base 304 A single button 311 that is rotatably mounted around a shaft extending in the front-rear direction of the case 301, and a single button operation sensor 312 that is attached to the handle base 301 by detecting a pressing operation of the single button 311. Yes.

  A handle base 301 of the handle unit 300 includes a cylindrical base portion 301a extending in the front-rear direction, a disk-shaped front end portion 301b protruding in a radial direction from the front end of the base portion 301a, and a hollow from the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical base portion 301a. And three grooves 301c extending in the axial direction and formed at irregular intervals in the circumferential direction. The outer diameter of the base portion 301 a of the handle base 301 is formed to be slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the cylindrical portion 181 of the handle attachment member 180. Further, the three groove portions 301 c are formed at positions corresponding to the three ridges 183 of the cylindrical portion 181 of the handle attachment member 180. Accordingly, the base 301a can be inserted into the cylindrical portion 181 of the handle mounting member 180 with the three groove portions 301c aligned with the three protrusions 183, and the protrusions 183 are respectively inserted into the three groove portions 301c. By being inserted, the handle base 301 can not be rotated relative to the handle attachment member 180.

  The handle 302 includes four first protrusions 302a, second protrusions 302b, third protrusions 302c, and fourth protrusions 302d that protrude outward in the circumferential direction from the outer peripheral surface, and a rotation shaft (shaft member 305). Two slits 302e extending in a circular arc shape as a center and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and projecting rearward from an inner position with respect to the rotation center with respect to the slit 302e, the other end side of the handle return spring 308 is locked. And a locking projection 302f.

  The four first protrusions 302a, the second protrusions 302b, the third protrusions 302c, and the fourth protrusions 302d are sequentially provided in the clockwise direction in front view. Specifically, the first protrusion 302a bulges so that the side surface in the clockwise direction of the front portion of the portion that protrudes most from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 302 bulges outward, and the opposite side is the opposite side. The side surface in the direction of is recessed (curled) so as to curve inward. The portion of the second protrusion 302b that protrudes most from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 302 is separated from the portion of the first protrusion 302a that protrudes most clockwise by a rotation angle of about 85 degrees. Is slightly lower. The second protrusion 302b bulges so that the side surface in the clockwise direction of the front projection of the second protrusion 302b bulges outward, and the side surface in the direction around the counter-tick that is the opposite side is curved inward. And is formed in a shape similar to the first protrusion 302a.

  In the third protrusion 302c, the most protruding portion from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 302 is separated from the most protruding portion of the second protrusion 302b in a clockwise direction by a rotation angle of about 70 degrees. It protrudes at about half height. The third protrusion 302c is inclined substantially linearly on both sides, and more gently than the side face in the counterclockwise direction where the side face in the clockwise direction is the opposite side. The fourth protrusion 302d has a portion that protrudes most from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 302 away from the most protruding portion of the third protrusion 302c in a clockwise direction by a rotation angle of about 55 degrees, and from the first protrusion 302a. It also protrudes slightly high. The fourth protrusion 302d is formed in a substantially isosceles triangle with side surfaces on both sides inclined substantially linearly.

  The handle cover 303 is provided with three mounting bosses 303a that have a round front center and bulge forward and project rearward. The three attachment bosses 303a are attached to the front surface of the handle base 301 through the slits 302e of the handle 302 from the front. Since the mounting boss 303a of the handle cover 303 passes through the slit 302e of the handle 302, the mounting boss 303a comes into contact with the circumferential end of the slit 302e, thereby restricting the rotation angle of the handle 302. In this example, the handle 302 can be rotated within a range of a rotation angle of about 120 degrees.

  The handle unit 300 is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 112 of the door frame base 110 via the handle attachment member 180. The handle mounting seat surface 112 of the door frame base 110 is inclined so that the right end side is positioned rearward of the left end side in plan view and faces the outside (open side). The handle unit 300 that is attached to the pachinko machine 1 is also inclined to the outside in a plan view (in other words, its tip is inclined to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line orthogonal to the front surface of the pachinko machine 1). It is attached and fixed to the door frame 3. As a result, the player can easily hold the handle 302 of the handle unit 300, and can make the user perform the turning operation without feeling a sense of discomfort.

  The handle rotation detection sensor 307 of the handle unit 300 is a variable resistor. When the handle 302 is rotated, the detection shaft 307 a of the handle rotation detection sensor 307 rotates via the shaft member 305 and the transmission gear 306. The internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 307 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft 307a, and the driving force of the firing solenoid 682 in the ball launching device 680 described later changes according to the internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 307. The game ball is driven into the game area 5a with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 302.

  The outer peripheral surfaces of the handle 302 and the handle cover 303 are conductively plated, and the handle touch sensor 310 detects contact when the player contacts the handle 302 or the like. When the handle 302 is rotated while the handle touch sensor 310 detects a player's contact, the detection of the handle rotation detection sensor 307 is accepted, and the firing solenoid has a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 302. The driving of 682 is controlled, and a game ball can be shot. That is, even if the player tries to drive the game ball into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 302 by some method without touching the handle 302, the firing solenoid 682 is not driven and the game ball can be driven. It can not be done. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from playing the game by rotating the handle 302 in a different way from the original, and to reduce the load (burden) on the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. .

  Further, in the handle unit 300, when the player presses the single button 311 while rotating the handle 302, the single button operation sensor 312 detects the operation of the single button 311, and the firing control unit (illustrated) of the payout control board 951 is shown. Is omitted to stop the rotational drive of the firing solenoid 682. This makes it possible to temporarily stop the playing of the game ball without returning the rotation operation of the handle 302 and to release the single button 311 before operating the single button 311 by releasing the pressing operation of the single button 311. The game ball can be reentered into the game area 5a by the strength.

  Further, the handle unit 300 includes four first protrusions 302a, second protrusions 302b, third protrusions 302c, and fourth protrusions 302d on the handle 302, and the handle 302 is most rotated in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. Thus, when the game ball is driven most strongly into the game area 5a (so-called “right-handed”), the position of the first protrusion 302a when the handle 302 is not rotated is the fourth protrusion 302d. Therefore, by changing the handle 302 with the fourth protrusion 302d as the first protrusion 302a, the player can maintain the handle 302 in the “right-handed” position in an easy state. It is possible to reduce the feeling of fatigue of the person and to suppress the decrease in interest for the game. However, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, if the player hits the right while in the normal gaming state, the player has difficulty in accepting the game balls at the various entrances although the handball consumption is large. It is disadvantageous for the player compared to the case.

[3-3. Overall configuration of dish unit]
The dish unit 320 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 45. FIG. 41 (a) is a perspective view of the plate unit of the door frame as viewed from the front right, and FIG. 41 (b) is a perspective view of the plate unit as viewed from the left front. FIG. 42 (a) is a perspective view of the pan unit as viewed from the upper right rear, and FIG. 42 (b) is a perspective view of the pan unit as viewed from the lower left rear. FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 44 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear. FIG. 45 is an enlarged explanatory view of a portion of the lower plate with the lower plate cover removed in the cross-sectional view of FIG. 28. The plate unit 320 is attached to the lower portion of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100, and the front surface bulges forward. An effect operation unit 400 described later is attached to the front surface of the dish unit 320.

  The dish unit 320 is provided with an upper dish 321 for storing gaming balls to be driven into the game area 5a, and gaming balls provided under the upper dish 321 and supplied from the upper dish 321 and the far cover unit 270. And a lower plate 322 which can be stored.

  The plate unit 320 is attached to a flat plate unit base 323 attached to the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 and to the upper front of the plate unit base 323, and the left side greatly protrudes forward from the left and right center An upper plate main body 324 forming the upper plate 321, and a lower plate main body 325 attached to the left side of the front lower portion of the plate unit base 323 more than the center left and right and bulging forward to form the lower plate 322. And a pan unit cover 326 attached to the front of the pan unit base 323 so as to cover the front sides of the upper pan body 324 and the lower pan body 325.

  Further, the dish unit 320 is provided with an upper disc ball removing button 327 mounted so as to be capable of pressing from above in the front view right side of the upper disc 321 on the upper surface of the disc unit cover 326; A ball lending button 328 mounted on the upper surface of the dish unit cover 326 on the right side, a return button 329 attached on the upper surface of the dish unit cover 326 on the right side in a front view of the ball lending button 328, and a ball lending button 328 Ball return indicator 330 attached to the upper surface of the plate unit cover 326 behind the and return button 329, and attached to the plate front decoration 326b on the front of the plate unit cover 326 in front of the upper plate 321 Projected forward from the front of the pan unit cover 326 in front of the production selection left button 331 and the production selection right button 332 and the lower tray 322 And it has and a, a lower tray ball vent button 333 which is mounted for pressing from the front.

[3-3a. Top plate]
The upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 41 and 44 and the like. The upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 is formed by the plate unit base 323 and the upper plate body 324, and is formed in a container shape in which the left side is larger than the center of the left and right sides when viewed from the front and is opened upward. Has been. In the upper tray 321 (upper tray main body 324), a portion about 1/3 of the width from the left end to the right with respect to the width in the left-right direction of the door frame 3 bulges forward most. As the upper plate 321 moves from the most bulged part to the right in the front view, the front end retreats backward, and a guide passage part 321a having a depth in the front-rear direction slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball is formed. Yes. The entire upper surface of the upper plate 321 including the guide passage portion 321a is inclined so that the right end side is lowered, and the right end side in front view of the guide passage portion 321a is the upper surface of the plate unit cover 326 (the upper plate ball removal button 327). (See FIG. 44).

  The upper plate 321 is assembled to the plate unit base 323, and the bottom surface of the upper plate 321 is a game ball from the position below the upper plate ball supply port 323a of the plate unit base 323 to the upper end of the upper plate ball feed port 323d. It is inclined to be lower towards the position slightly lower than the outer diameter of. Thereby, the game ball released forward from the upper plate ball supply port 323a can be received and stored in the upper plate 321, and the received game ball can be stored from the right end side of the guide passage portion 321a. The ball feed port 323d can be supplied.

  As described above, the upper plate 321 is formed such that the bottom surface of the upper portion 321 is lowered downward in the guide passage portion 321a in which the depth in the front-rear direction becomes narrow. That is, a part of the upper plate 321 protrudes from above into the mounting space 326j of the plate unit cover 326 to which a later-described effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is attached. Therefore, in the upper tray 321, a sufficient storage amount of gaming balls can be secured. The upper plate 321 (upper plate main body 324) protrudes into the mounting space 326j of the plate unit cover 326 so as not to contact the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A).

  The induction passage portion 321a is provided with a metal grounding member 321b electrically grounded (earthed) in the pachinko machine 1, and the game ball contacts (rolls) to make the game ball It can remove charged static electricity.

[3-3b. Lower plate]
The lower plate 322 of the plate unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 45 and the like. The lower dish 322 is disposed below the upper dish 321 and on the left side of the center of the dish unit 320 (door frame 3) in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. The lower tray 322 is formed in a container shape that can store a game ball, and is attached to the tray tray cover 326 and a lower tray ball removal hole 322a that penetrates the bottom wall portion 325a up and down to allow the game ball to be discharged. And an escape portion 322b for avoiding contact with the rendered production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A). The relief portion 322b of the lower plate 322 is formed such that the right front corner is recessed in an arc shape toward the rear.

  The lower plate 322 includes a lower plate main body 325 whose upper and rear sides are open, a lower plate cover portion 326k that covers the upper side from the left end side of the lower plate main body 325, and an open of the lower plate main body 325. A dish unit base 323 that is closed at the rear, and a lower dish cover 340 that covers the upper side of the portion of the lower dish body 325 that projects into the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a. The cover 326 faces outward from the lower plate opening 326d. As shown in FIGS. 28 and 45, the lower plate 322 has a quadrangular shape in which the outer peripheral shape in plan view extends to the left and right, and a trapezoid in which the front side of the quadrangle is the base and the upper side shorter than the base is disposed on the front side. Are curved so that the left and right sides of the trapezoid extending obliquely are recessed backward. The lower plate 322 is formed such that the width in the left-right direction increases as it goes from the front to the rear in plan view.

  As shown in FIGS. 43 and 44 and the like, the lower dish main body 325 is formed in a container shape whose upper and rear sides are open. The lower dish main body 325 has a flat bottom wall portion 325a, a main body standing wall portion 325b extending upward from an outer peripheral end excluding a rear end side of the bottom wall portion 325a, and a game ball passing through the bottom wall portion 325a. A lower dish ball removal hole 322a penetrating vertically in a possible size. The outer peripheral shape of the bottom wall portion 325a is curved so that the left and right sides extending left and right, and the front side of the quadrangle and the upper side shorter than the bottom side are arranged on the front side and the left and right sides extending obliquely are recessed backward. It is formed in the shape which combined the trapezoid and. The bottom wall portion 325a (the upper surface thereof) is inclined so as to become lower toward the lower dish ball removal hole 322a. The main body standing wall 325b rises upward from the bottom wall 325a at a height that is two to five times the diameter of the game ball. The lower dish ball removal hole 322a is formed at a position on the right side of the center in the left-right direction of the lower dish body 325 (bottom wall portion 325a). In the lower dish main body 325, the curved portion of the front right front corner of the bottom wall portion 325a and the main body standing wall portion 325b corresponds to the escape portion 322b.

  The lower tray cover 340 is formed to cover the upper right half of the lower tray main body 325. The lower cover 340 is, as shown in FIGS. 43 and 44, substantially formed from a cover upright wall 340a rising upward from the upper end of the main body upright wall 325b of the lower tray main body 325 and an upper end of the cover upright wall 340a. A ceiling portion 340b extending horizontally. The cover standing wall portion 340a rises from a portion from a part of the front side of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower dish main body 325 to the rear end of the right side. When the lower tray cover 340 is assembled to the tray unit 320, the rear ends of the cover standing wall portion 340a and the ceiling portion 340b are in contact with the front surface of the tray unit base 323. Further, the front end (the left end side of the front side) of the cover standing wall 340a is in contact with the right end side of the lower plate opening 326d of the plate unit cover 326. Furthermore, the left end of the ceiling part 340b is in contact with the right end of the lower dish cover part 326k of the dish unit cover 326. In the lower cover 340, a curved surface portion of the cover upright wall portion 340a and a portion obliquely extending between the cover upright wall portion 340a and the ceiling portion 340b on the rear side correspond to the relief portion 322b. There is.

  The lower plate 322 is covered with a plate unit cover 326 (rendering operation unit 400) from the vicinity of the left end in the front view near the left end of a portion extending short to the left and right with the front end side. Located behind. That is, the lower plate 322 is formed such that the right half thereof turns to the rear of the rendering operation unit 400. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 45, the lower tray 322 is a lower tray first area A1 (a cross hatch area in FIG. 45) located behind the lower tray opening 326d of the tray unit cover 326 described later Lower tray second area A2 (shaded in FIG. 45) located behind the right side of the opening 326 d (on the front end side of the rendering operation unit 400, the rendering operation unit attachment portion 326a of the pan unit cover 326, and the lower pan cover 340) Area). In other words, the lower plate 322 is half or more of the storage area (the area obtained by combining the lower plate first area A1 and the lower plate second area A2 corresponding to the storage area in plan view). It is located to the rear of the rendering operation unit 400. In FIG. 45, the area of the dotted hatching is the remaining space (area) of the mounting space 326j in the pan unit cover 326.

  In the lower plate 322, a lower plate ball supply port 323c that forms the rear wall is open to the right side of the center of the rear wall in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. More specifically, the lower tray ball supply port 323c of the lower tray 322 includes the rendering operation unit 400, the rendering operation unit mounting portion 326a (the right outside of the lower tray opening 326d) in the tray unit cover 326, and the front end of the lower tray cover 340. It is disposed in the lower tray second area A2 which is the rear of the side, etc. Accordingly, when the door frame 3 is viewed from the front, the lower tray ball supply port 323c is not visible from the player side through the lower tray opening 326d (see FIG. 19 and the like). Accordingly, the lower plate 322 is formed so as to bend toward the rear of the production operation unit 400 from the lower plate opening 326d on the left side surface of the plate unit 320 (the plate unit cover 326) bulging forward. The storage volume of the game ball is formed larger than the range viewed from the front. In other words, the lower tray 322 is formed larger in the lower tray second region A2 than in the lower tray first region A1. Thereby, when the lower plate 322 is viewed from the outside (player side), more game balls can be stored in the lower plate 322 than it looks.

  In the lower plate 322, the right half of the lower plate main body 325 in the left-right direction (lower plate second region A2) is, as shown in FIG. The lower plate cover 340 covers the upper side of the portion of the lower plate main body 325 projecting into the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a. The lower plate cover 340 prevents the fingertip from touching the rear side of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) when the player inserts a finger into the lower plate 322 from the lower plate opening 326d. can do.

  The lower dish 322 includes a lower dish ball removal hole 322a penetrating vertically in front of the lower dish ball supply port 323c in the lower dish second region A2. The bottom surface of the lower plate 322 is inclined to be lower toward the lower plate ball removal hole 322a. The lower dish ball removal hole 322a of the lower dish 322 is closed so as to be opened and closed by a lid member 334 that is operated by pressing the lower dish ball removal button 333. In the normal state, the lower dish 322 has a lower dish ball removal hole 322 a closed by a lid member 334, so that a game ball can be stored in the lower dish 322. When the lower plate ball removal button 333 is pressed to open the lid member 334, the game balls in the lower plate 322 can be discharged to the lower side of the plate unit 320 from the lower plate ball removal hole 322a.

  The lower countersink hole 322a of the lower tray 322 is disposed in front (directly in front of) the lower countersink supply port 323c of the tray unit base 323 which forms the rear wall of the lower tray 322. Therefore, in the state assembled to the door frame 3, the lower countersink hole 322a is located on the right side of the lower end opening 326d of the tray unit cover 326 and behind the frame unit 415 in the rendering operation unit 400, It can not be seen from the player (front) side.

  As described above, the lower plate 322 is formed such that the outer peripheral shape is a combination of a trapezoid whose front side is narrowed on the front side of the rectangular shape extending to the left and right, It is inclined to become lower toward Therefore, with the lid 334 open and the lower countersink hole 322a open, the gaming balls supplied from the lower countersink supply opening 323c into the lower tray 322 are directly in front of the lower countersink supply opening 323c. It is immediately discharged downward from the opened lower countersink hole 322a. The lower end of the lower ball ball extraction hole 322a is located slightly to the left of the left end of the lower ball ball supply port 323c, so the lower ball ball supply hole 322a is open. The gaming ball supplied from the mouth 323c to the lower plate 322 does not flow directly to the area on the left side of the lower plate ball removal hole 322a in the lower plate 322, and is discharged from the lower plate ball removal hole 322a. Become.

  On the other hand, since the right end of the lower dish ball discharge hole 322a is located to the left of the right end of the lower dish ball supply port 323c, the game supplied to the lower plate 322 from the vicinity of the right end of the lower dish ball supply port 323c. A ball | bowl will contact | abut to the site | part which forms the standing wall of the right side of the lower plate 322 in the main body standing wall part 325b. Since the standing wall on the right side of the lower plate 322 is curved obliquely with respect to the front-rear direction so as to face the direction of the lower plate ball removal hole 322a, the game ball supplied from the lower plate ball supply port 323c is When it comes into contact with the inclined portion, the light is reflected in the direction of the lower dish ball hole 322a, and is discharged from the lower dish ball hole 322a without going to the region on the left side of the lower dish ball hole 322a. (See FIG. 45).

  As described above, the lower plate 322 of the present embodiment is formed to guide the gaming balls supplied from the lower plate ball supply port 323c to the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a. In the open state, the game ball supplied from the lower ball supply opening 323c is immediately penetrated from the lower ball removal hole 322a without entering the area to the left of the lower ball removal hole 322a in the lower plate 322. It can be discharged downward (dollar box). As a result, when the lower ball ball removing hole 322a is kept open, the player can not see the game balls circulating on the lower plate 322, and the player is paid out from the upper plate 321 or the payout device 830. The player can play the game by making it difficult for the game balls, etc. to be discharged directly into the dollar box and making it difficult for the game balls to feel annoyance passing through the lower plate 322. And a production image, etc.), it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, the lower plate 322 of the present embodiment includes the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower tray main body 325 and the lower plate covers 340 and 340A extended upward from the upper end of the main body standing wall portion 325b. Even if the game ball is supplied to the inside and jumps up in the lower plate 322, the game ball can be prevented from intruding from the lower plate 322 into the mounting space 326j side, and the game ball in the lower plate 322 is It is possible to prevent the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) from coming into contact with the rear side. Therefore, it is possible that the gaming balls supplied in the lower plate 322 and the gaming balls stored in the lower plate 322 contact or press the rear side of the rendering operation unit 400 (second rendering operation unit 400A). It can prevent and it can prevent that the back side of the rendering operation unit 400 (2nd rendering operation unit 400A) is damaged by the game ball.

  Furthermore, since the lower dish 322 is provided with a lower dish ball removal hole 322a in front of the lower dish ball supply port 323c, when the lower dish ball removal hole 322a is opened, the lower dish ball supply hole 323c is discharged. Since the played game ball can be directly entered into the lower dish ball removal hole 322a and discharged downward (dollar box), it is difficult for the game ball to reach the front end side of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower dish body 325. Can. In addition, since the bottom wall portion 325a of the lower plate main body 325 near the front end of the lower plate 322 becomes higher toward the front, the game ball toward the front end side of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower plate main body 325 is inclined. The bottom surface is to be climbed, and the movement speed of the game ball can be attenuated. Therefore, the impact when the game balls released from the lower tray ball supply port 323c into the lower tray 322 abut against the lower tray covers 340 and 340A and the main body standing wall portion 325b can be reduced and damaged. It can be difficult.

  Note that, in the present embodiment, a lid member 334 that closes the lower disc ball extraction hole 322 a may be interlocked with the upper disc ball extraction button 327. Accordingly, when the upper dish ball removal button 327 is operated, the lid member 334 is also moved to open the lower dish ball removal hole 322a, so that the game balls discharged from the upper dish 321 to the lower dish 322 are further removed. It will be discharged | emitted from the hole 322a to the lower dollar box. That is, when the upper plate ball removal button 327 is operated to remove the game ball from the upper plate 321, the game ball of the upper plate 321 is discharged to the dollar box even though the lower plate ball removal button 333 is not operated. As a result, the player can be strongly illusoryed as if the gaming balls of the upper plate 321 are directly discharged to the dollar box, and the above-described effects can be further exhibited. The simultaneous release of the upper tray 321 and the lower tray 322 may be simultaneous release by driving a drive source such as a motor or a solenoid, or may be simultaneous release by a mechanical link mechanism.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the lower tray main body 325 and the lower tray cover 340 constituting the lower tray 322 are shown as separate parts which can be disassembled, but the lower tray main body 325 and the lower tray cover 340 are disassembled. It may be an impossible one. Also, although an example is shown in which the cover upright wall 340a of the lower tray cover 340 rises from the upper end of the main body upright wall 325b of the lower tray main body 325, the bottom wall 325a of the lower tray main body 325 The cover upright wall 340a may rise. In the example, the ceiling 340 b of the lower cover 340 extends substantially horizontally from the upper end of the cover upright wall 340 a, but the ceiling 340 b of the lower cover 340 is the main upright wall 325 b of the lower main body 325. It may be extended substantially horizontally from the upper end.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, although the example provided with the escape part 322b for avoiding the contact with the production operation unit 400 (2nd production operation unit 400A) of the lower plate 322 was shown, the escape part 322b is not provided. A lower plate 322 may be used.

  In the present embodiment, the lower plate 322 (the lower plate body 325, the lower plate cover 340, etc.) has a uniform surface shape without a through-hole, but a plurality of through holes through which game balls cannot pass are shown. It may have a perforated hole. Specifically, at least a part of the bottom wall portion 325a, the main body standing wall portion 325b, the cover standing wall portion 340a, the ceiling portion 340b, etc. of the lower plate 322 is formed in a fence shape having a gap through which a game ball cannot pass. It is good also as what was formed in the thing and net shape. It should be noted that a light emitter such as an LED may be disposed in the dish unit cover 326 (mounting space 326j) so that the interior of the lower dish 322 is illuminated (light-emitting decorated) through a fence-like or net-like gap of the lower dish 322. .

  In the present embodiment, the lower plate 322 is formed by the lower plate main body 325, the lower plate cover 340, the plate unit base 323, and the plate unit cover 326 (lower plate cover portion 326k) which are separately formed. However, the lower plate 322 may be formed by combining these four members in an appropriate combination. Specifically, the lower plate cover 340 and the lower plate body 325 are integrated, the lower plate cover 340 and the plate unit cover 326 are integrated, and the lower plate body 325 and the plate unit cover 326 are One united, one in which the lower plate cover 340 and the plate unit base 323 are integrated, one in which the lower plate main body 325 and the plate unit base 323 are integrally formed, the plate unit base 323 and the plate unit cover 326 The lower plate body 325, the lower plate cover 340, and the plate unit base 323 are integrated, or the lower plate body 325, the lower plate cover 340, and the plate unit cover 326 are integrally formed. A lower plate cover 340, a plate unit base 323 and a plate unit cover 326 integrated with each other; a lower plate body 325; a plate unit base 323; That the Tokaba 326 are integrated, that a lower tray body 325 and Shitasara cover 340 and tray unit base 323 and dish unit cover 326 is integrated, it may be like.

[3-3b-1. Ball guide part of lower plate]
An embodiment including a ball guiding portion 322c or the like for guiding the gaming ball from the lower ball feeding opening 323c to the lower ball dropping hole 322a in the lower plate 322 of the plate unit 320 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. . FIG. 46A is an explanatory diagram schematically showing an example in which the lower plate is provided with a ball guiding portion, and FIG. 46B is an explanatory diagram schematically showing an example in which the lower plate is provided with a ball guiding portion different from (a). It is a figure and (c) is an explanatory view showing roughly an example provided with another different ball guidance part. In FIG. 46, the same components as those described above are denoted by the same reference numerals.

  The example of the lower plate 322 in FIG. 46A is substantially the same as the diameter of the lower plate ball discharge hole 322a in the portion between the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball discharge hole 322a on the bottom surface of the lower plate 322. It has a pair of ball guiding parts 322c which are disposed to be separated left and right by a distance. The pair of ball guiding portions 322c are formed in a rail shape (protrusion) that extends back and forth in a state of protruding from the bottom surface of the lower plate 322. The lower plate 322 is inclined so that the bottom surface becomes lower toward the lower plate ball removal hole 322a. Accordingly, the game balls supplied from the lower dish ball supply port 323c into the lower dish 322 are guided to the lower dish ball extraction holes 322a by the pair of ball guide parts 322c without getting over the ball guide parts 322c, and the lower dish balls It is discharged downward (dollar box) from the hole 322a.

  Then, the lower tray 322 of this example is, similarly to the above, in the rear (lower tray second area A2) on the right side of the lower tray opening 326d of the tray unit cover 326, the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower tray ball The through holes 322a are arranged in a straight line in the front-rear direction. Therefore, the lower disc ball supply port 323c and the lower disc ball extraction hole 322a are located behind the covering wall such as the front end side of the lower disc cover 340 and the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the effect unit 400, the disc unit cover 326 It is not visible from the front.

  As described above, since the lower tray 322 of the present embodiment is provided with the pair of ball guiding portions 322c, the gaming ball supplied from the lower peripheral ball supply port 323c in the state where the lower counterball opening 322a is opened. Can be discharged from the lower countersink opening 322a downward (dollar box) immediately without entering the area on the left side of the lower countersink opening 322a in the lower tray 322. Then, since the gaming ball circulating on the lower plate 322 can not be seen from the player side, the gaming ball etc. paid out from the upper plate 321 and the payout device 830 is illusive as being directly discharged to the dollar box It is possible to make it difficult for the player to concentrate on the game (such as the operation for hitting the game ball and the effect image) by making it difficult for the game ball to feel annoyance passing through the lower plate 322 and to suppress the decrease in interest. Can.

  In the example of FIG. 46 (a), the ball guide portion 322c is rail-shaped, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the game ball is lowered like a groove extending toward the lower dish ball removal hole 322a. Any material that can be guided to the dishball hole 322a may be used.

  Next, in the example of the lower plate 322 shown in FIG. 46 (b), the gaming ball released to the right of the lower wall of the lower plate ball opening 322a in the lower plate 322 is diagonally forward right from the lower plate ball supply port 323c. In addition to being shaped in such a way as to reflect in the direction of the lower ball ball opening hole 322a, the buffer portion 322d is provided at a portion where the gaming ball abuts. The buffer 322d is formed of rubber, foam or the like.

  Similarly to the above, the lower plate 322 of this example has the lower plate ball removal hole 322a just in front of the lower plate ball supply port 323c, and the bottom surface of the lower plate 322 is lower toward the lower plate ball removal hole 322a. It is inclined to become. Therefore. The game ball released straight forward from the lower tray ball supply port 323c is discharged downward (dollar box) through the lower tray ball removal hole 322a. On the other hand, the gaming ball discharged to the right front from the lower ball supply opening 323c is reflected by the buffer portion 322d in the direction of the lower ball removal hole 322a, and is discharged downward (dollar box) from the lower plate removal hole 322a. Be done. At this time, since the game ball abuts on the buffer portion 322d and reflects, the collision sound at the time of reflection is reduced.

  Furthermore, the lower tray 322 in this example is also disposed at the rear of the lower right tray opening 326d of the lower tray unit cover 326 in the same manner as described above. The unit mounting portion 326a and the lower plate cover 340 are disposed behind the covering wall such as the front end side of the lower plate cover 340 so that they cannot be seen from the front.

  As described above, since the lower plate 322 in this example is provided with the buffer portion 322d on the wall that reflects the game balls, even if the game balls are not released forward from the lower ball supply opening 323c, The buffer portion 322d can be reflected in the direction of the lower dish ball removal hole 322a without any sound and discharged downward (dollar box). Therefore, when the game balls and the like paid out from the upper plate 321 and the payout device 830 are discharged to the dollar box, the clash is also directly discharged to the dollar box because the collision sound of the game balls is not heard from the lower plate 322 By making it difficult for the game ball to feel annoyance passing through the lower plate 322, it is possible to concentrate the player on the game (such as the operation for hitting the game ball and the effect image, etc.) and to suppress the decline in interest. It can be done.

  Subsequently, in the example of the lower plate 322 in FIG. 46 (c), a portion opposite to the lower plate ball supply port 323c with the lower plate ball removal hole 322a in the bottom surface (bottom wall portion 325a) of the lower plate 322 therebetween. , And a return portion 322e for reflecting the gaming ball having jumped over the lower ball ball release hole 322a to the lower ball ball release hole 322a side. In addition, the return part 322e may use the same material as the material forming the lower plate 322, or may use a shock absorbing material such as rubber or foam that reduces the collision noise at the time of reflection. Further, the return part 322e may not constitute the side wall of the lower tray 322, or may constitute a part of the side wall (main body standing wall portion 325b) of the lower tray 322.

  In the lower plate 322, the lower plate ball supply port 323c, the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a, and the return portion 322e are arranged in a straight line sequentially from the rear to the front, and the lower plate of the plate unit cover 326 Rearward on the right side of the opening 326d (at the rear of the covering wall such as the front end side of the lower operation cover 400, the operation operation unit 400 in the lower operation second area A2, the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a in the lower unit cover 326) It is placed and invisible from the front. In the lower dish 322, even if the game balls flowing from the lower dish ball supply port 323c to the lower dish ball removal hole 322a jump over the lower dish ball removal hole 322a, the return plate 322e causes the lower dish ball removal hole 322a side. And can be discharged downward (dollar box) from the lower dish ball removal hole 322a. Therefore, the same effect as the above can be achieved.

  In the present embodiment, the ball guiding portion 322c and the buffer portion 322d may be appropriately combined with the lower plate 322. Thereby, the same effect as the above can be exhibited.

[3-3b-2. Another embodiment of lower plate]
Another embodiment of the lower tray 322 of the tray unit 320 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 47 (a) is an explanatory view schematically showing the lower tray made dividable, and FIG. 47 (b) is a schematic view showing a state where the storage area of the lower tray is expanded according to the size of the space behind the rendering operation unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows, (c) is explanatory drawing which shows the lower tray of (b) by a schematic perspective view. The lower plate 322 shown in FIG. 47 is configured such that the lower plate main body 325 can be divided at a dividing line PL arranged in the lower plate second area A2. The region indicated by the dotted hatching in FIG. 47 indicates the remaining space of the mounting space 326j.

  First, the lower tray main body 325 (lower tray 322) shown in FIG. 47 (a) constitutes a part of the lower tray first area A1 and the lower tray second area A2 and has the lower countersink hole 322a. A main body portion 325A and a first extension portion 325B attached to the right of the main body portion 325A and constituting the remaining area of the lower tray second area A2 are provided. The first extension unit 325B further includes the remaining space (the production operation unit 400 and the second production operation unit 400A) of the installation space 326j in which the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) is accommodated, as compared with the main body unit 325A. It projects into the rear space). As shown in the figure, the first extension portion 325B is formed so that the width in the left-right direction increases from the front to the rear. Further, in the first extension portion 325B, a relief portion 322b for avoiding contact with the second effect operation unit 400A is formed at the right front corner.

  Next, in the examples of FIGS. 47 (b) and 47 (c), the rear end of the effect operation unit 400 does not protrude rearward from the front end of the lower plate 322, and is more than the example of FIG. 47 (a). The space behind the rendering operation unit 400 (the remaining space of the mounting space 326j) is widened. The lower tray main body 325 (lower tray 322) is a part of the lower tray first area A1 and the lower tray second area A2 and has a lower disc ball opening 322a, and a main body It is attached to the right side of the part 325A, constitutes the remaining area of the lower tray second area A2, and has a second extension part 325C larger than the first extension part 325B. As illustrated, the second extension portion 325C has a constant width in the left-right direction from the front end to the rear end, and a storage area of gaming balls is formed larger than the first extension portion 325B. Further, the lower plate 322 is attached with a lower plate cover 340A having a shape corresponding to the shape of the second extension portion 325C (see FIG. 47C).

  In the example shown in FIG. 47, by attaching the first extension part 325B and the second extension part 325C to the main body part 325A, the storage areas of the respective game balls become continuous (connected), and the storage areas of the game balls are stored. Expands. Further, the boundary between the main body portion 325A and the first extension portion 325B and the second extension portion 325C is a dividing line PL. Further, the first extension part 325B and the second extension part 325C in the lower platen main body 325 communicate with a predetermined gap (mounting space 326j) between the rear surface of the effect operation unit 400 and the second effect operation unit 400A. Space) is formed.

  As described above, in the above example, the lower tray main body 325 (lower tray 322) is configured to be splittable, and at least one of the divided members is replaceable. The reservoir area can be made larger or smaller as needed. Further, since the lower tray main body 325 (lower tray 322) is configured to be split, the projection operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A) attached to the tray unit cover 326 protrudes backward (in the mounting space 326j) An extension part (first extension part 325B or second extension part 325C) having a size corresponding to the amount can be attached.

  In the above embodiment, the dividing line PL is arranged in the lower dish second area A2 behind the effect operating unit 400 (second effect operating unit 400A). You may arrange | position on the boundary line of dish 1st area | region A1 and lower dish 2nd area | region A2, and may arrange | position in lower dish 1st area | region A1.

  Moreover, in said embodiment, although what provided the lower-disc ball extraction hole 322a in the main-body part 325A in the lower-disc main body 325 (lower plate 322) was shown, to the 1st extension part 325B and the 2nd extension part 325C You may make it provide the lower tray ball | bowl hole 322a.

  In the above-described embodiment, the first extension portion 325B and the second extension portion 325C are attached to the right side of the main body portion 325A of the lower dish main body 325. A flat plate-like closing member without a storage area may be attached.

  Furthermore, although the lower plate main body 325 in the lower plate 322 has been described in the above embodiment, the lower plate cover 340 can be divided similarly to the lower plate main body 325, or the first extension portion 325B and the second extension portion It may be shaped according to the size of 325C.

[3-3 c. Dish unit base]
The dish unit base 323 of the dish unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 44 and the like. The dish unit base 323 is attached to the lower side of the through-hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100, and extends in the left-right direction over the entire width of the door frame base 110 (the rear is opened). It is formed in a shallow box shape).

  The pan unit base 323 penetrates forward and backward in the vicinity of the upper left corner in a front view, and penetrates back and forth under the upper pan and ball supply port 323a, which extends cylindrically rearward. A speaker slit 323b composed of a plurality of elongated holes extending vertically, and a lower dish ball supply port 323c penetrating back and forth in the lower left portion from the left and right center in front view and extending in a cylindrical shape to the rear, The upper plate ball supply port 323c is provided with an upper plate ball feed port 323d that penetrates forward and backward on the upper right side of the lower plate ball supply port 323c and extends vertically and has an upper portion positioned at the right end of the upper plate body 324.

  Further, the bowl unit base 323 guides the gaming balls sent to the rear side of the bowl unit base 323 through the upper bowl ball feed port 323d and guides the ball to the entrance 251a of the ball feed unit 250; It extends in a substantially L shape so as to become lower toward the cylindrical right side view of the lower ball and ball supply port 323c after hanging down from the lower side of the feed guide path 323e, and from the ball outlet 251b of the ball feed unit 250. A ball extraction guide path 323f for guiding the released gaming ball to the lower ball supply port 323c, and a lower end of the ball feed guide path 323e and an upper end of the ball extraction guide path 323f in front view left of the ball feed guide path 323e And an operation transmitting portion 327a which abuts against the actuating rod 253c of the ball feeding unit 250 and which is operated by the upper disc ball removing button 327 so as to face the rear. And it includes an opening 323 g, a. The ball removal guide path 323f has a downstream end opening into a cylindrical portion of the lower ball feed port 323c.

  Furthermore, the plate unit base 323 penetrates back and forth at the lower right corner in a front view, and the handle insertion opening 323 h through which the cylindrical portion 181 of the handle mounting member 180 of the door frame base unit 100 is inserted And a cylinder insertion opening 323i through which the cylinder lock 211 of the open / close cylinder unit 210 is inserted.

  The upper bowl ball supply port 323a of the pan unit base 323 is assembled to the door frame 3, and the front end is opened to the rear wall of the upper pan 321, and the cylindrical rear end is an upper pan passage port for the door frame base 110 117 is penetrated from the front side and connected to the front end of the through-ball passage 273 of the foul cover unit 270. As a result, the gaming balls paid out from the payout unit 800 are supplied (paid out) into the upper tray 321 through the upper counterspin supply port 323a.

  The lower tray ball supply port 323c is assembled to the door frame 3, and the front end opens in the rear wall of the lower plate 322, and the cylindrical rear end penetrates the lower tray passage port 116 from the front side of the door frame base 110. Then, the front end of the ball discharge port 276 of the foul cover unit 270 is connected. As a result, the game balls circulating in the storage passage 277 of the far cover unit 270 are supplied into the lower plate 322 through the lower ball supply port 323c. The lower bowl ball supply port 323c is disposed at the rear of the stage operation unit 400, the stage operation unit attachment portion 326a (right outside of the lower plate opening portion 326d) in the plate unit cover 326, the front end side of the lower plate cover 340, etc. When the door frame 3 is viewed from the front, the player can not see through the lower plate opening 326d.

[3-3 d. Dish unit cover]
The dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 44 and the like. The pan unit cover 326 is attached to the front of the pan unit base 323 so as to cover the front sides of the upper pan body 324 and the lower pan body 325. The dish unit cover 326 has an effect operation unit mounting portion 326a in which the center in the left-right direction bulges forward and opens largely forward in the center in the left-right direction and to which the effect operation unit 400 is attached. A dish front upper decoration part 326b formed at substantially the same height as the upper dish 321 and a dish front lower decoration part 326c formed on the lower side of the left and right dish front decoration part 326b are provided. There is.

  The rendering operation unit attachment portion 326 a is formed to have a size of about 1/3 of the entire width in the left and right direction of the pan unit 320 in the left and right direction, and the vertical direction is substantially the same as the height in the vertical direction of the pan unit 320 It is formed at a height. In addition, the rendering operation unit attachment portion 326a is inclined so as to move rearward as the front end goes upward. Specifically, the front end of the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a is inclined at an angle of 27 degrees with respect to the vertical line.

  The front portion of the plate front upper decorative portion 326b moves rearward from the center side in the left-right direction of the plate unit cover 326 toward the left and right ends, and the end portion on the center side in the left-right direction of the plate unit cover 326 and the left and right sides The middle portion is formed in a curved surface shape slightly bulging forward with respect to a plane connecting the end portion of The upper front decorative portion 326b is inclined so that the lower end moves upward from the horizontal center side of the plate unit cover 326 toward the left and right ends, and the horizontal center side of the plate unit cover 326 ( It is formed so that the up-down direction may be narrowed toward the left and right both end sides from the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a side). The dish unit cover 326 has the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 attached to the plate front upper decorative portion 326b on the left in front view.

  The lower front portion of the dish lower decorative portion 326c moves rearward from the center in the left-right direction of the dish unit cover 326 toward the left and right ends, and the end in the left-right direction of the dish unit cover 326 and the left and right ends The intermediate portion is formed in a curved surface shape that is recessed rearward with respect to a plane connecting the end portion of

  A lower plate opening portion 326d penetrating in the front and rear direction is formed in the lower plate front decoration portion 326c on the left side in a front view, and the lower plate 322 faces the front from the lower plate opening portion 326d. In the lower front dished decorative portion 326c on the left side in a front view, a lower circular ball release button 333 protrudes forward from the lower front surface of the lower lower plate opening 326d. Further, a lower speaker port 326e made of punching metal is formed on the left side of the lower plate opening portion 326d in the lower plate front decoration portion 326c on the left side in a front view. The lower speaker port 326 e is located in front of the speaker slit 323 b of the dish unit base 323 in a state of being assembled to the dish unit 320.

  The handle insertion opening 326f which penetrates the back and forth in the lower right corner of the front view and into which the cylindrical portion 181 of the handle attachment member 180 of the door frame base unit 100 is inserted A cylinder insertion port 326g is formed which penetrates back and forth on the upper side of the handle insertion port 326f near the right corner and through which the cylinder lock 211 of the open / close cylinder unit 210 is inserted.

  The plate unit cover 326 has a plate-like top plate portion 326h extending from the upper end of the plate front upper decorative portion 326b on the right side in front view to the front end of the plate unit base 323, and the top plate portion 326h Covers the upper right side. An upper bowl ball release button 327, a ball loan button 328, a return button 329, and a ball loan return display unit 330 are attached to the top plate portion 326h.

  The pan unit cover 326 includes a flat plate-like bottom plate portion 326i extending from the lower end of the pan front lower decoration portion 326c to the front surface of the pan unit base 323. The bottom side of the dish unit 320 is closed by the bottom plate portion 326i. The bottom plate portion 326i is formed in a step shape so that a portion located below the lower plate 322 is recessed from below to above, and a lower plate ball removing base 335 described later is attached to the portion. Further, in the bottom plate portion 326i, a hole penetrating vertically is formed at a position corresponding to the lower countersink hole 322a of the lower tray 322.

  The pan unit cover 326 has a mounting space 326j which is opened forward at a portion of the rendering operation unit attachment portion 326a and into which the rear side of the rendering operation unit 400 (second rendering operation unit 400A) is inserted (accommodated). Further, the pan unit cover 326 extends in a plate shape rearward from the left side and the upper side of the lower pan opening 326 d, and includes a lower pan cover 326 k covering the lower pan 322 (see FIG. 44). . The lower end cover portion 326k is in contact with the left end at the upper end of the left side of the main body standing wall portion 325b in the lower end body 325, and the right end is in contact with the left end of the ceiling portion 340b in the lower end cover 340. Yes.

[3-3 e. Upper bowl ball release button]
The upper bowl and ball withdrawal button 327 of the bowl unit 320 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 41 to 44 and the like. The upper dish ball removal button 327 is attached to the top plate portion 326h of the dish unit cover 326 on the right side of the upper dish 321 when viewed from the front. It can be pulled out. Although the detailed illustration of the upper disc ball extraction button 327 is omitted, the rear end side is below the top board portion 326 h by the ball extraction button holder attached to the lower side of the top board portion 326 h of the dish unit cover 326. It is attached rotatably about an axis extending in the direction. An upper end of the ball-drawing lever which extends vertically is in contact with the lower surface of the front end of the upper disc ball-extracting button 327. The ball release lever is slidably mounted in the vertical direction by a ball removal base attached to the front of the plate unit base 323 below the upper plate ball release button 327.

  The ball release lever whose upper end is in contact with the lower surface of the front end of the upper ball ball extraction button 327 is in contact with the upper portion of the upper ball ball extraction slider 327b slidably mounted vertically by the disk unit base 323 from above. ing. The upper disc ball removal slider 327 b includes an operation transmission portion 327 a projecting rearward from the rear surface, and in a state where the door frame 3 is assembled, the operation transmission portion 327 a passes through the opening 323 g in the pan unit base 323. It projects rearward so as to face, and abuts on the operating rod 253c of the ball removing member 253 in the ball feeding unit 250 from below. The upper dish ball removal slider 327b is biased upward by an upper dish ball removal spring 327c, and the biasing force of the upper dish ball removal spring 327c causes the upper dish ball removal slider 327b and the ball removal lever to be biased. The upper bowl ball release button 327 is located at the rising end.

  Therefore, when the upper disc ball extraction button 327 is pressed downward against the biasing force of the upper disc ball extraction spring 327 c, the operation transmission portion 327 a of the upper disc ball extraction slider 327 b moves downward, and the operation transmission portion 327 a Since the actuating rod 253c of the ball removing member 253 in contact with the upper end side also moves relatively downward, the ball removing member 253 rotates in a counterclockwise direction in front view, and enters by the partition portion 253a. The partition between the opening 251a and the ball outlet 251b is released, and they are in communication with each other. As a result, the gaming balls in the upper tray 321 are discharged from the ball outlet 251b of the ball feed unit 250 to the ball outlet guiding path 323f of the tray unit 320, and are discharged to the lower tray 322 through the lower ball inlet 323c. (Supply).

  In addition, when the upper disc ball extraction button 327 is operated, the lid member 334 closing the lower disc ball extraction hole 322a may be moved in an interlocking manner. Accordingly, when the upper dish ball removal button 327 is operated, the lid member 334 is also moved to open the lower dish ball removal hole 322a, so that the game balls discharged from the upper dish 321 to the lower dish 322 are further removed. It will be discharged | emitted from the hole 322a to the lower dollar box. That is, when the upper bowl sphere removing button 327 is operated to pull out the gaming bowl from the upper plate 321, the gaming sphere of the upper plate 321 is discharged to the dollar box even though the lower bowl sphere extracting button 333 is not operated. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel strongly that the game balls on the upper plate 321 are discharged directly to the dollar box, making it difficult for the game balls to feel annoyance passing through the lower plate 322. A decrease in interest can be suppressed by concentrating the player on a game (such as a game ball hitting operation and an effect image). The simultaneous release of the upper tray 321 and the lower tray 322 may be simultaneous release by driving a drive source such as a motor or a solenoid, or may be simultaneous release by a mechanical link mechanism.

[3-3f. Ball rental button, return button, and ball rental return display section]
The ball lending button 328, the return button 329, and the ball lending return display unit 330 of the tray unit 320 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. The ball lending button 328, the return button 329, and the ball lending return display unit 330 are, as shown in the drawing, on the right side of the top dish ball removal button 327 in the top plate portion 326h of the dish unit cover 326 in the circular decoration. Installed on.

  The ball lending button 328 is used to insert a predetermined number of game balls into the ball lending machine (not shown) placed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 by inserting a cash or prepaid card and pressing it. The unit 320 is lent out (paid out) into the upper plate 321. When the return button 329 is pressed in a state in which cash or a prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine is inserted, the cash or the prepaid card is returned after subtracting the portion of the game ball which has been lent out.

  Although not shown, the ball rental return display unit 330 has a three-digit 7-segment LED disposed below the transparent surface, and the remaining number of cash and prepaid cards inserted into the ball rental machine, or It displays an error code etc. when the ball lending machine breaks down.

[3-3 g. Production selection left button and production selection right button]
The effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 of the dish unit 320 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. The effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 are attached near the right end of the dish unit cover 326 near the effect operation unit attachment part 326a in the front dish upper decoration part 326b on the left side when viewed from the front. The presentation selection left button 331 is formed in a triangular shape with one vertex directed to the left. The effect selection right button 332 is formed in a triangular shape with one vertex directed rightward on the right side of the effect selection left button 331.

  The effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 are provided to the player in the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 of the effect operation unit 400 arranged in the game area 5a in front view. On the other hand, when an effect image prompting selection is displayed, a pressing operation can be accepted, and a desired option is selected by operating the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 within a predetermined time. .

[3-3h. Bottom dish ball removal button]
The lower bowl sphere removing button 333 of the bowl unit 320 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 41 to 44 and the like. The lower dish ball removal button 333 protrudes forward from the front lower end of the front dish lower decorative part 326c on the left side when viewed from the front, below the lower dish opening 326d in the dish unit cover 326 in front of the lower dish 322. When the lower plate ball removal button 333 is pressed, the lid member 334 closing the lower plate ball removal hole 322a of the lower plate 322 can be rotated, and the lid member 334 is rotated. The lower bowl ball removal hole 322a is opened, and the gaming balls stored in the lower plate 322 can be discharged to the lower side of the bowl unit 320.

  The lower dish ball removal button 333 is slidable in the front-rear direction by a lower dish ball removal base 335 (see FIG. 42B) attached to the bottom plate portion 326i of the dish unit cover 326 on the lower side of the lower dish body 325. Installed on. The lower disc ball extraction button 333 is disposed on the left with respect to the lower disc ball extraction hole 322 a of the lower disc 322 (see FIG. 28 and the like).

  The bottom plate ball withdrawal base 335 is a bottom plate so that the bottom plate portion 326i of the plate unit cover 326 is housed in a step formed in a step shape so as to be recessed downward from below the lower plate 322. It is attached to the portion 326i. The lower countersinking base 335 has a discharge port 335a, which has the same size as the lower countersink opening 322a and is vertically penetrated, at a position immediately below the lower countersink opening 322a for the lower tray 322. . The lid member 334 is disposed between the lower disc main body 325 and the lower disc ball removing base 335, although the detailed illustration is omitted. As a result, when the lid member 334 closing the lower disc ball opening hole 322a of the lower plate 322 is opened, the discharge port 335a of the lower ball ball sink base 335 is also opened, and the lower ball ball outlet hole 322a and the discharge port 335a Are in communication with each other.

  Although not shown, the lid member 334 is attached to the lower countersink base 335 so as to be rotatable about a position on the left side of the lower countersink button 333 in plan view. The lower disc ball withdrawal button 333 is connected to a part between the part for closing the lower disc ball withdrawal hole 322 a in the lid member 334 and the part to which the lower disc ball withdrawal base 335 is rotatably attached. As a result, when the lower countersunk ball release button 333 is moved in the front-rear direction, the lid member 334 can pivot around an axis extending in the vertical direction to open and close the lower countersink spherical opening 322a (discharge port 335a).

  Although not shown, the lower dish ball removal base 335 includes a holding device that holds the lower dish ball removal button 333 when the lower dish ball removal button 333 is pushed backward and moved, and a lower dish ball removal button. A lower ball ball release spring biasing the 333 forward is attached. With the lower disc ball release button 333 projecting forward and closing the lower disc ball release hole 322a with the lid member 334, when the lower disc ball outlet button 333 is pressed and moved backward, the lid member 334 is rotated. The lower dish ball removal hole 322a is moved to move, and the lower dish ball removal button 333 is held by the holding device and remains in the rearward movement state. In this state, even if the lower dish ball removal button 333 is released, the lower dish ball removal button 333 does not move forward, and the lower dish ball removal hole 322a is maintained open. The game balls in the ball 322 can be discharged to the lower side of the dish unit 320 through the lower ball ball removal hole 322a and the discharge port 335a.

  Then, when the lower disk ball extraction button 333 is held in the holding device and the lower disk ball extraction hole 322a is open, when the lower disk ball extraction button 333 is pressed backward, the holding by the holding device is released. In this state, when the pressing of the lower ball releasing button 333 is released, the lower ball removing button 333 moves forward by the biasing force of the lower ball removing spring and returns to the protruded state, and the cover member 334 is rotated. The lower dish ball removal hole 322a (discharge port 335a) is closed. Thereby, the gaming balls can be stored in the lower plate 322.

  In addition, separately from the pressing operation of the lower disc ball extracting button 333, the lid member 334 closing the lower disc ball extracting hole 322 a (discharge port 335 a) is also moved by the pressing operation of the upper disc ball extracting button 327. The lower dish ball removal hole 322a may be opened. Thus, when it is desired to discharge the gaming balls stored in the upper tray 321 into the dollar box disposed below the tray unit 320, the dollar box via the lower tray 322 can be operated simply by operating the upper tray ball release button 327. Can be discharged to simplify the labor involved in ball removal. The simultaneous release of the upper tray 321 and the lower tray 322 may be simultaneous release by driving a drive source such as a motor or a solenoid, or may be simultaneous release by a mechanical link mechanism.

[3-4. Overall Configuration of Production Operation Unit]
The entire configuration of the effect operation unit 400 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 to 55 and the like. FIG. 48 (a) is a front view of the effect operation unit in the door frame, and FIG. 48 (b) is a right side view of the effect operation unit. FIG. 49 (a) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 49 (b) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 50 is an explanatory view of the effect operation unit as viewed from the extending direction of the central axis of the operation button. FIG. 51 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line D-D in FIG. 48 (a), and FIG. 52 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line E-E in FIG. 48 (b). Fig.53 (a) is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the FF line in FIG.48 (b), (b) is an enlarged view of the A section in (a). FIG. 54 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 55 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear. The rendering operation unit 400 is attached to the front of the plate unit 320 in the center in the left-right direction of the front view, and can be pressed by the player and can present a rendering image to the player It is.

  The production operation unit 400 has a circular outer shape and a transparent central portion excluding the outer periphery, and an operation button 410 that can be pressed by the player. The production operation unit of the dish unit cover 326 surrounds the outer periphery of the operation button 410. A frame-shaped frame unit 415 attached to the attachment portion 326a, a decorative substrate unit 420 disposed behind the operation button 410 and capable of emitting and decorating the outer peripheral edge of the operation button 410 and the frame unit 415; The base unit 430 attached to the rear side of the unit 415 and having the operation button 410 and the decoration board unit 420 attached to the front, and attached to the base unit 430 so as to be visible from the player side through the operation button 410 A door frame side effect display device 460 capable of displaying an image; Eteiru.

[3-4a. Manual operation button]
The operation buttons 410 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 53 to 56 and the like. FIG. 56 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button as seen from the front, and FIG. 56 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button as seen from the back. The operation button 410 is formed in a circular shape whose outer shape is slightly smaller in diameter than the height in the vertical direction of the dish unit 320, and the center side excluding the outer peripheral edge is formed to be transparent. The operation button 410 is formed on the front side of the outer periphery of the transparent button lens 411 and the outer periphery of the button lens 411, which are formed in a curved surface (a part of the spherical surface) so that the outer periphery is circular and the center side bulges forward. An annular button frame 412 is attached, and a cylindrical button base 413 is attached to the rear side of the button frame 412 so as to sandwich the outer periphery of the button lens 411. The button frame 412 and the button base 413 are formed of members that are difficult to transmit light.

  The button lens 411 is formed with a substantially constant thickness as a whole. Further, the button lens 411 is formed in a smooth curved surface with no irregularities on the surface side. The button lens 411 extends in a predetermined length from the back surface to the center side (inner side) at a position on the inner peripheral side of the button frame 412 in a W-shaped cross section, and is arranged in the circumferential direction. One button decoration part 411a and a line extending within a predetermined angular range in the circumferential direction while extending on the axis toward the center side in a state of being recessed in a circular arc shape from the back surface at a position on the outer peripheral side than the first button decoration part 411a And a plurality of (six) second button decoration parts 411b provided.

  The first button decorative portion 411a of the button lens 411 extends from the inner periphery to the center side of the button frame 412 in the assembled state to the operation button 410 as shown, and a group of both right and left sides is a group of upper and lower sides Longer than the center.

  The plurality of second button decorative portions 411 b of the button lens 411 each extend in an arc shape on the same circumference, and are formed three by three on each of the left and right sides. The second button decorative portion 411 b is formed to face the frame opening 412 a of the button frame 412, and protrudes forward so that the front side is substantially flush with the front surface of the button frame 412.

  The button lens 411 exhibits a lens effect in which light is refracted by the concave and convex portions having a W-shaped cross section or a circular arc shape formed on the back surface in the first button decorative portion 411a and the second button decorative portion 411b. Therefore, the rear side is not clearly visible.

  The button frame 412 is formed in an annular shape, and includes a plurality of (six) frame openings 412 a penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending in a circular arc shape with a predetermined length in the circumferential direction. The six frame openings 412 a are provided three each on the left and right sides, and correspond to the six second button decoration parts 411 b of the button lens 411. The button frame 412 is provided with a plated layer having a metallic gloss on the surface.

  The button base 413 includes a substantially cylindrical main body 413a that extends short in the front-rear direction, an annular flange 413b that protrudes outward from the front end of the main body 413a, and a main body 413a from the rear side of the flange 413b. Along the outer periphery of the main body 413a, and a plurality of (four) guide bosses 413c protruding rearward in a cylindrical shape along the outer periphery of the body and arranged at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction; A plurality of (three) detection pieces 413d projecting in the shape of a band plate to the rear and arranged in the circumferential direction and penetrating the flange portion 413b on the outer side than the main body portion 413a and having a predetermined length along the outer periphery And a plurality of (six) base openings 413e extending in the circumferential direction, and cylindrically extending forward from the front end of the main body 413a, and the front end is the inner surface of the button lens 411. And a, an inner extending portion 413f are narrowed inward (central side) along.

  The outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411 and the button frame 412 are attached to the outer peripheral surface of the inner extending portion 413f and the front surface of the flange portion 413b in the button base 413. The four guide boss portions 413c are respectively disposed at portions corresponding to the four corners of the upper, lower, left, and right with respect to the circumferential direction of the main body portion 413a. These four guide boss portions 413c are slidably inserted into the holding holes 431b of the unit base 431 in the base unit 430, respectively. The three detection pieces 413d are arranged at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction so as to be arranged two on the upper side and one on the lower side with respect to the circumferential direction of the main body 413a. These three detection pieces 413d are detected by the press detection sensor 440 of the base unit 430 when the operation button 410 is pressed.

  The six base openings 413 e are provided on each of the left and right sides, and correspond to the second button decoration part 411 b of the button lens 411 and the frame opening 412 a of the button frame 412. In the portion of the base opening 413e in the button base 413, a part of the main body 413a and the inner extension 413f is recessed inward from the outer peripheral side. The inner extension portion 413f has an inner diameter of the front end that is narrowed inward substantially equal to the inner diameter of the button frame 412.

  The operation button 410 has a front surface that bulges forward in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface) and is formed to be transparent, and the door frame side effect display device 460 disposed on the rear side. Can be viewed from the front. The operation button 410 has four guide boss portions 413 c slidably inserted into the holding holes 431 b of the unit base 431 in the base unit 430, and the operation button springs 438 inserted into the holding holes of the unit base 431 at 431 b. It is urged forward by. The operation button 410 is further prevented from moving forward by the urging force of the operation button spring 438 of the base unit 430, and the front side of the outer peripheral edge abuts on the frame unit 415. As a result, the rear end moves backward until it comes into contact with the front surface of the base unit 430. When the operation button 410 is pressed and moved backward, at least one of the three detection pieces 413d is detected by the press detection sensor 440 of the base unit 430. The operation button 410 is operated by the detection of the detection piece 413d by the pressure detection sensor 440.

  The operation button 410 is a first button decoration formed over the entire circumference so as to extend from the inner peripheral end of the button frame 412 to the center side in the transparent button lens 411 in a state where the production operation unit 400 is assembled. The gap between the inner peripheral surface of the button base 413 and the in-operation button decorative member 432 of the base unit 430 can be made less visible to the player by the portion 411a.

  Furthermore, the operation button 410 closes the front end opening of the cylindrical button base 413 by the button lens 411 and the button frame 412, and the operation button is operated by the button frame 412 attached to the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. With respect to the outer diameter of 410, a transparent portion whose rear side is visible is formed so as to be constricted inward from the outer periphery. The presence of the button frame 412 also makes it difficult for the player to see the gap between the inner peripheral surface of the button base 413 and the operation button interior decoration member 432 of the base unit 430.

  Further, in a state where the operation button 410 is assembled to the rendering operation unit 400, the rear end of the cylindrical button base 413 (main body portion 413 a) passes through the inner peripheral side of the decorative substrate unit 420 than the front surface of the decorative substrate unit 420. It will be in the state of protruding backward. Thus, the light emitted forward from the first LEDs 422a and 423a and the second LEDs 422b and 423b mounted on the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decoration substrate 42 of the decoration substrate unit 420 is a button The inside of the base 413 can be prevented from leaking inward, and the operation button left inner decoration substrate 433 of the base unit 430, the operation button right inner decoration substrate 434, the operation button upper inner decoration substrate 435, and the operation button lower area It is possible to prevent light emitted forward from the LED mounted on the decorative substrate 436 from leaking from the inside to the outside of the button base 413. Therefore, the first LED 422a, 423a and the second LED 422b, 423b of the decoration substrate unit 420 and the operation button left inner decoration substrate 433 of the base unit 430, the operation button right inner decoration substrate 434, the operation button upper decoration substrate 435, and the operation button The LEDs mounted on the lower inner decorative board 436 can prevent the portions other than the light emitting decoration target from being decorated with light emission, and can perform the light emission decoration with good appearance.

[3-4b. Frame unit]
The frame unit 415 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. The frame unit 415 is attached from the front to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326 a of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320 so as to surround the outer periphery from the front side of the operation button 410 and decorates the outside of the operation button 410. The frame unit 415 has an outer shape that matches the front end side of the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a.

  The frame unit 415 includes a frame-shaped frame body 416 having a circular central opening 416a attached to the rendering operation unit attachment part 326a of the dish unit cover 326 in the dish unit 320, and the frame main body 416 on the left and right sides of the central opening 416a. A pair of translucent frame side lenses 417 attached from the rear side, and a translucent frame top lens 418 attached from the front to the frame main body 416 above the central opening 416a. Yes.

  The frame body 416 has a circular central opening 416a that is smaller in diameter than the outer diameter of the operation button 410 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and penetrates in the front-rear direction on both the left and right sides of the central opening 416a. And a plurality of (six) peripheral opening portions 416b extending in an arc shape along the peripheral edge of the frame, and notches 416c cut out with a predetermined width on the upper front surface of the central opening portion 416a It is equipped with. The central opening 416 a is formed to have substantially the same size as the diameter of the outer periphery of the frame opening 412 a of the button frame 412 in the operation button 410. Thus, the front end side of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 can be in contact with the outer peripheral rear side of the frame opening 412a.

  Six outer peripheral openings 416b are provided in three each on the left and right outer sides of the central opening 416a, and are closed by a frame side lens 417 from the rear side. The notch 416c penetrates also in the front-rear direction, and the frame top lens 418 is fitted from the front side.

  The frame main body 416 includes a substantially cylindrical inner cylindrical portion 416d extending rearward from a position slightly outside the peripheral edge of the central opening 416a. The inner cylindrical portion 416d extends rearward from a position between the central opening 416a and the outer peripheral opening 416b, and a portion corresponding to the notch 416c is cut away. The inner cylinder portion 416d has the first LED 422a and 423a and the second LED 422b and 423b on the operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decorative substrate 423 of the decorative substrate unit 420 in a state where the effect operation unit 400 is assembled. And between the first LEDs 422a and 423a and the second LEDs 422b and 423b (see FIG. 52).

  Furthermore, the frame main body 416 extends outward at the left and right upper portions of the outer periphery, and includes a pair of attachment portions 416e attached to the rendering operation unit attachment portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320. The frame main body 416 (the production operation unit 400) is attached to the production operation unit attachment portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 at the left and right sides of the pair of attachment portions 416e and the cutout portion 416c.

  The frame main body 416 is substantially entirely metal on the entire surface except for a portion having the same width as the cutout 416c on the side opposite to the cutout 416c (the side on which the frame top lens 418 is attached) with the central opening 416a interposed therebetween. A glossy plating layer is formed.

  The frame side lens 417 closes the outer peripheral openings 416b formed on the left and right sides of the frame main body 416 from the rear side. The front side of the frame side lens 417 is formed on a smooth surface without irregularities, and a plurality of irregularities along the periphery of the central opening 416a are formed on the rear side (see FIGS. 53 and 63). The light is refracted by the plurality of irregularities so that the rear side of the frame side lens 417 cannot be seen.

  The frame top lens 418 has a substantially quadrangular outer shape so as to be fitted into the notch 416c of the frame body 416 from the front side. The frame top lens 418 is formed to be smooth on the front side. The frame top lens 418 has a plurality of projections and recesses extending in a zigzag shape along the periphery of the central opening 416a on the rear surface side in a plurality of rows in the radial direction of the central opening 416a (see FIGS. 51 and 63). reference). The light is refracted by the plurality of irregularities so that the rear side of the frame top lens 418 cannot be seen.

  The frame unit 415 is a state in which the production operation unit 400 is assembled, and a pair of frame side lenses 417 are arranged on the operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decorative substrate 423 of the decorative substrate unit 420, respectively. And the frame top lens 418 is located in front of the frame top lens decoration substrate 437 of the base unit 430, and the light emitting decoration is possible by the second LEDs 422b, 423b, etc. mounted on them. .

[3-4 c. Decorative substrate unit]
The decorative board unit 420 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. FIG. 57 is an exploded perspective view of the decorative substrate unit of the effect operation unit as seen from the front. The decorative board unit 420 is attached to the front surface of the base unit 430 below the frame unit 415, and can light-decorate the second button decoration part 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415. The operation unit 400 can be vibrated.

  The decorative substrate unit 420 includes a C-shaped substrate base 421 whose upper side is opened, and an operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and an operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 attached to the front of the left and right sides of the substrate base 421, respectively. A vibration motor 424 attached to the lower front portion of the substrate base 421, and a motor cover 425 attached to the front surface of the substrate base 421 so as to cover the front side of the vibration motor 424.

  The substrate base 421 is formed such that the inner peripheral side is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the cylindrical main portion 413 a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410, and the outer peripheral side is larger than the outer diameter of the flange portion 413 b of the button base 413. In addition, it is formed smaller than the outer diameter of the frame unit 415.

  The operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 extends in a circular arc along the front surface of the substrate base 421. The operation button left outer decorative board 422 has a plurality of first LEDs 422a mounted on the front side along the inner circumference of the board base 421, and a radially outer side of the plurality of first LEDs 422a on the inner circumference of the board base 421. And a plurality of second LEDs 422b mounted along. The operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 extends in a circular arc along the front surface of the substrate base 421. The operation button right outer decorative board 423 is provided on the front side with a plurality of first LEDs 423a mounted along the inner circumference of the board base 421, and on the inner circumference of the board base 421 at a radially outer side than the plurality of first LEDs 423a. And a plurality of second LEDs 423b mounted along the same. The operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are white on both front and rear sides.

  The vibration motor 424 has an eccentric weight 424a attached to the rotation shaft, and can generate vibration by rotating the weight 424a.

  When the decorative substrate unit 420 is assembled in the rendering operation unit 400, the rear end side of the cylindrical main body portion 413 a of the button base 413 in the operation button 410 is inserted inside the substrate base 421. In the decoration board unit 420, the first LEDs 422a and 423a of the operation button left outside decoration board 422 and the operation button right outside decoration board 423 are positioned behind the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410, respectively. The second LEDs 422 b and 423 b are located behind the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415. Moreover, in the state assembled in the rendering operation unit 400, a frame is formed between the respective first LEDs 422a and 423a of the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 and the respective second LEDs 422b and 423b. The inner cylindrical portion 416d of the unit 415 is located (see FIG. 52).

  Therefore, the decoration board unit 420 emits and decorates only the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 by the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a on the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the operation button right outer decoration board 423. In addition, only the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 can be illuminated and decorated by the light from the respective second LEDs 422b and 423b.

  In addition, the decorative substrate unit 420 can generate vibration by rotating the weight 424a of the vibration motor 424, and can vibrate the effect operation unit 400 as a whole.

[3-4 d. Base unit]
The base unit 430 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 58 (a) is a perspective view of the base unit of the effect operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 58 (b) is a perspective view of the base unit of the effect operation unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 59 is an exploded perspective view in which the base unit of the effect operation unit is disassembled and viewed from the front. FIG. 60 is an exploded perspective view in which the base unit of the effect operation unit is disassembled and viewed from behind. The base unit 430 of the effect operation unit 400 is attached to the rear side of the frame unit 415 while the operation button 410 is mounted so as to be movable back and forth.

  The base unit 430 includes four through holes 431 a attached to the rear side of the frame unit 415 and penetrating in a substantially rectangular shape extending vertically at the central portion, and a blind hole opened forward outside the through hole 431 a. A ring-shaped unit base 431 having a holding hole 431b, a translucent operation button decorative member 432 which is attached so as to cover the through-hole 431a on the front surface of the unit base 431, and which extends in a short tube shape in the front-rear direction; Of the operation button left inner decoration substrate 433 and the operation button right inner decoration substrate 434 which are respectively attached to the left and right sides of the through hole 431 a in the front of the unit base 431 behind the button inner decoration member 432 The operations attached to the upper and lower sides of the through hole 431a on the front surface of the unit base 431 at the rear. A button on the decorative substrate 435 and the operation buttons under the decorative substrate 436, and a frame top lens decorative board 437 attached to the upper front portion of the unit base 431, a.

  Further, the base unit 430 includes four operation button springs 438 respectively inserted into the four holding holes 431 b of the unit base 431, three sensor holders 439 attached to the front surface of the unit base 431, and each sensor holder Three pressing detection sensors 440 attached to 439 respectively for detecting pressing operation of the operation button 410, a rendering operation unit relay board 441 mounted on the rear side of the unit base 431, and a rendering operation unit relay board 441. A relay board cover 442 attached to the rear side of the unit base 431 so as to cover the rear side.

  The unit base 431 has a substantially circular outer shape and is slightly smaller than the outer shape of the frame unit 415. The unit base 431 penetrates back and forth at the center, and a substantially square through hole 431 a extending vertically is formed. The through hole 431a is sized to fit within the cylindrical main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410, and is sized to allow the display screen of the door frame side effect display device 460 to be inserted. A door frame side effect display device 460 is attached to the rear side of the unit base 431.

  The four holding holes 431b of the unit base 431 are formed at positions corresponding to the four guide boss portions 413c of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 at the four corners on the top, bottom, left, and right outside the through hole 431a. The inner diameter of each of the holding holes 431b is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the guide boss portion 413c, and the guide boss portion 413c can be inserted slidably.

  More specifically, the upper left holding hole 431b of the four holding holes 431b is from the center line extending vertically through the center of the unit base 431 (the center of the operation button 410) to the center of the unit base 431. It is formed at a position rotated about 30 degrees in the counterclockwise direction. Further, the holding hole 431b on the upper right side of the four holding holes 431b is clockwise with respect to the center of the unit base 431 from the vertically extending center line passing through the center of the unit base 431 (center of the operation button 410). It is formed at a position rotated about 47 degrees in the direction of. On the other hand, two holding holes 431b arranged on the lower side of the four holding holes 431b are respectively formed at positions opposite to the center of the unit base 431 with respect to the upper two holding holes 431b. .

  The unit base 431 is a light shielding wall portion 431 c projecting forward in the form of a flat plate from the portion on the upper front surface where the operation button inner decorative substrate 435 is attached and the portion on which the frame top lens decorative substrate 437 is attached. It has. The light shielding wall portion 431 c allows the light emitting decoration of the frame top lens 418 to be performed only by the frame top lens decoration substrate 437.

  The operation button inner decorative member 432 is formed in a curved surface shape so as to close the front end side of the substantially cylindrical peripheral wall portion 432a which extends in the front and rear direction and the peripheral wall portion 432a. A front plate portion 432b, a rectangular opening portion 432c penetrating the front plate portion 432b back and forth and extending vertically, a flange portion 432d extending outward from a rear end of the peripheral wall portion 432a, and a flange portion 432d And a plurality of mounting bosses 432e that are attached to the unit base 431.

  An outer diameter of the peripheral wall portion 432 a of the operation button inner decoration member 432 is formed to have substantially the same size as an inner diameter of the button frame 412 of the operation button 410. The opening 432 c penetrating the front plate 432 b is formed to have substantially the same size as the display screen of the door frame side effect display device 460.

  In the operation button inner decoration member 432, the outer peripheral surface of the peripheral wall portion 432a and the front surface of the front plate portion 432b are formed in a smooth surface without unevenness.

  The operation button inner decorative member 432 is formed on the inner peripheral surface of the peripheral wall portion 432a, is recessed in an arc shape and extends in the front-rear direction, and includes a plurality of first button inner decorative portions 432f provided in the circumferential direction. , Formed on the rear surface of the front plate portion 432b and bulging in an arc shape, extending in an octagonal shape centered on the center of the front plate portion 432b, and concentrically centered on the center of the front plate portion 432b A plurality of second button interior decoration portions 432g (see FIG. 63). The second in-button decoration 432 g is formed to have a portion extending in parallel with the four inner peripheries of the opening 432 c.

  The operation button inner decoration member 432 is formed of a transparent member. The rear end of the operation button inner decoration member 432 can not be clearly seen behind by the lens effect of the first button inner decoration portion 432f of the peripheral wall portion 432a and the second button inner decoration portion 432g of the front plate portion 432b. .

  The operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration board 436 are each mounted with a plurality of LEDs. By making it emit light, the decorative member 432 in the operation button can be decorated with light emission. By emitting and decorating the operation button inner decoration member 432, it is possible to cause the inside of the operation button 410 and the outside of the door frame side effect display device 460 to emit light and decorate.

  A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the frame top lens decoration substrate 437, and by emitting the LEDs, the frame top lens 418 in the frame unit 415 can be decorated to emit light.

  The LEDs mounted on the operation button left inner decoration substrate 433, the operation button right inner decoration substrate 434, the operation button upper inner decoration substrate 435, the operation button lower inner decoration substrate 436, and the frame top lens decoration substrate 437 are each full color LED It is said that. Also, the front of the operation button left inner decoration substrate 433, the operation button right inner decoration substrate 434, the operation button inner inner decoration substrate 435, the operation button lower inner decoration substrate 436, and the frame top lens decoration substrate 437 are white. .

  The operation button spring 438 is a coil spring, and is inserted from the front into the four holding holes 431 b in the unit base 431. The guide button spring 438 is a guide boss whose rear end is in contact with the bottom surface of the holding hole 431 b in a state assembled to the rendering operation unit 400 and whose front end protrudes rearward from the main portion 413 a of the button base 413 in the operation button 410 It is in contact with the rear end of the portion 413c. The operating button spring 438 biases the operating button 410 forward.

  The three pressure detection sensors 440 are disposed at positions corresponding to the three detection pieces 413 d of the button base 413 in the operation button 410. More specifically, in the front of the unit base 431, one of the three pressure detection sensors 440 is on the lower left side of the upper left holding hole 431b, and the other is on the lower right side of the upper right holding hole 431b, and the remaining one is lower left Are attached to the lower right side of the holding holes 431b via sensor holders 439, respectively. The three pressure detection sensors 440 are attached at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction centering on the center of the unit base 431. These three press detection sensors 440 can detect the three detection pieces 413 d of the operation button 410.

  The effect operation unit relay substrate 441 is attached to the left side (right side in front view) of the through hole 431 a in rear view on the rear side of the unit base 431. The production operation unit relay board 441 includes an operation button left outer decoration board 422, an operation button right outer decoration board 423, a vibration motor 424, an operation button left inner decoration board 433, an operation button right inner decoration board 434, and an operation button upper inner decoration board. 435, for relaying the connection between the operation button lower inner decoration substrate 436, the frame top lens decoration substrate 437, the press detection sensor 440, and the door frame side effect display device 460 and the door main body relay substrate of the door frame base unit 100 Is.

  The relay board cover 442 extends leftward from the lower end of the portion covering the rear side of the effect operation unit relay board 441, and includes a leg portion 442a attached to the lower rear portion of the unit base 431. The leg portion 442a of the relay substrate cover 442 has a lower surface extending substantially horizontally when assembled to the door frame 3, and between the bottom plate portion 326i forming the bottom surface of the plate unit cover 326 in the plate unit 320. Form a slight gap (see FIG. 26). Thus, when the operation button 410 or the frame unit 415 is strongly pressed downward or hit, the bottom surface of the leg portion 442a is in contact with the top surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the plate unit cover 326. The impact can be absorbed by bending the mounting portion 416e and the rendering operation unit mounting portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 downward. Then, after the lower surface of the leg portion 442a abuts on the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i, the movement of the effect operation unit 400 is restricted downward, and the attachment portion 416e of the frame unit 415 and the effect operation unit attachment portion of the plate unit cover 326 Unreasonable force can be avoided from acting on 326a and the like to prevent their breakage.

[3-4e. Door frame side effect display device]
The door frame side effect display device 460 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 54 and 55 and the like. The door frame side effect display device 460 is attached to the rear side of the unit base 431 so that the display screen faces forward from the opening 432 c of the decoration member 432 in the operation button in the base unit 430. The display screen can be viewed from the front side (player side) through the center portion, and the effect image can be displayed on the display screen.

  The door frame side effect display device 460 is attached to the rear side of the liquid crystal display device 461 having a square display screen on the front surface and the liquid crystal display device 461, and attached to the rear side of the unit base 431 of the base unit 430. And a bottomed square cylindrical mounting bracket 462. The liquid crystal display device 461 is a commercially available color liquid crystal display having an aspect ratio of 16: 9 and a diagonal length of about 4.3 inches. The mounting bracket 462 is formed so that the outer periphery thereof has the same shape as the outer periphery of the liquid crystal display device 461, and is attached so that the bottom of the bottomed cylindrical shape abuts on the rear surface of the liquid crystal display device 461.

  When the door frame side effect display device 460 is assembled in the effect operation unit 400, the liquid crystal display device 461 penetrates the through hole 431a of the unit base 431 from the rear side, and the inside of the peripheral wall portion 432a of the decoration member 432 in the operation button (See Figure 51). The front surface (display screen) of the liquid crystal display device 461 is located in the vicinity of the front end of the peripheral wall 432a of the in-operation button decorative member 432 and faces forward from the opening 432c penetrating the front plate 432b.

  The door frame side effect display device 460 can display a predetermined effect image based on the control signal from the periphery control board 1510 in the liquid crystal display device 461.

[3-4 f. Operation effect of production operation unit]
The effects of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 61 to 63 and the like. FIG. 61 is an explanatory diagram showing a state where an operation button is pressed in the cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit of FIG. FIG. 62 (a) is a view of the rendering operation unit as viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends, in which part of the operation button is cut away to hide it by the first button decoration portion of the operation button or the button frame It is explanatory drawing which shows a site | part, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the site | part which it is going to hide by the 1st button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. in sectional drawing of a rendering operation unit. FIG. 63 (a) is an explanatory view showing a perspective view of the appearance of the effect operation unit seen from the front, and FIG. 63 (b) is an explanatory view of the appearance of the effect operation unit seen from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends It is.

  The effect operation unit 400 according to the present embodiment can show the effect image to the player according to the game state which is changed by the game ball being hit into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and the player is operated. It is possible to entertain and entertain the player in the presentation presented to the player by operating the button 410.

  The production operation unit 400 has an overall height that is substantially the same as the height of the lower portion of the through-hole 111 of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3. In addition, the production operation unit 400 has a full width slightly larger than 1/3 of the full width of the door frame 3. The production operation unit 400 is arranged at the center in the left-right direction below the game area 5a (the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110) in the front view.

  In the rendering operation unit 400, the upper part of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 is attached to the rendering operation unit mounting portion 326 a of the dish unit cover 326 in the dish unit 320. When the rendering operation unit 400 is attached to the tray unit 320, the bottom surface of the leg portion 442a of the relay board cover 442 serving as the bottom surface is spaced from the top surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the tray unit cover 326 of the tray unit 320. Is formed. That is, only the upper part of the production operation unit 400 is attached to the dish unit 320 and is attached in a suspended state.

  Further, in the effect operation unit 400, the front surface of the frame unit 415 (the surface formed by the inner periphery of the front end of the central opening 416a of the frame main body 416) is parallel to the inclined surface of the front end opening of the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a. As installed. Thus, in the effect operation unit 400, the central axis line CL of the transparent operation button 410 bulging forward in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface) is at an angle of 63 degrees with respect to the vertical line It is inclined to move upward as it goes forward. Thus, when the player is seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 to play a game using the pachinko machine 1, the head of the player is disposed above the dish unit 320 (rendering operation unit 400) Since the game board 5 is positioned in front of the center of the game area 5a, the center axis CL of the operation button 410 passes near the head of the player. Therefore, when the player drops his eyes from the game area 5a to the rendering operation unit 400 (the operation button 410), the operation button 410 is as close as possible to the front view (the projection from the direction parallel to the central axis CL). The operation button 410 and the door frame side effect display device 460 or the like in the operation button 410 can be viewed in a good state.

  In the effect operation unit 400, the four guide boss portions 413c of the operation button 410 are slidably inserted into the four holding holes 431b of the base unit 430, and are urged forward by the operation button spring 438. In the normal state (when the operation button 410 is not pressed), the effect operation unit 400 has the front end of the flange portion 413 b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 by the biasing force of the operation button spring 438. It abuts on a portion near the central opening 416 a in the rear surface of the frame main body 416.

  In the normal operation state, the rendering operation unit 400 protrudes forward from the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 in the frame unit 415 from the vicinity of the inner periphery of the button frame 412 of the operation button 410 to the center side (center axis line CL side). Yes. In other words, in the transparent button lens 411 that bulges forward in a curved surface shape (substantially spherical shape) in the operation button 410, a portion that protrudes forward from the inner periphery (inside) of the button frame 412 is formed. , And protrudes forward from the central opening 416a of the frame main body 416 of the frame unit 415 (see FIG. 51 and the like).

  Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the diameter of the central opening 416a of the frame main body 416 in the frame unit 415 is about 15 cm, and the button lens 411 (the front end) with respect to the central axis CL direction of the operation button 410 is the frame unit. It protrudes about 4 cm forward from the front surface of 415.

  In the normal state, when the player presses the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400, the operation button 410 moves backward along the central axis CL against the biasing force of the operation button spring 438. Then, when the rear end of the operation button 410 comes into contact with the front surface of the unit base 431 of the base unit 430, the backward movement is restricted and the backward movement of the operation button 410 is stopped. When the player presses the operation button 410, the button lens 411 bulging forward in a curved surface shape (substantially spherical shape) is pressed.

  The operation button 410 is formed so that the outer diameter is very large compared to the operation button for effect provided in the conventional pachinko machine, and therefore the peripheral edge away from the central portion of the button lens 411 is pressed There is a high possibility of being. More specifically, the operation button for effect in the conventional pachinko machine is attached such that its central axis extends substantially parallel to the vertical line, while the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 of this embodiment is attached. Since the central axis CL is attached to be inclined with respect to the vertical line, when the player presses the operation button 410 from the upper side as in the conventional pachinko machine, as shown by the white arrow in FIG. The part away from the central axis line CL of the operation button 410 is pressed.

  By the way, the operation buttons for performance in the conventional pachinko machine are formed with a flat surface on which the player presses, so when the operation button is enlarged with the flat part being pressed When pressing a part out of the center of the operation button, the surface to be pressed is inclined so that the pressed part retreats first, and the operation button can not recede straight, and the operation button There is a possibility that the pressing operation cannot be performed.

  On the other hand, the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 of this embodiment has a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface) in which a portion (button lens 411) pressed by the player bulges forward. Therefore, when a pressing operation is performed at a position away from the center of the operation button 410, the force is distributed over the entire operation button 410, and the operation button 410 becomes difficult to tilt, and the operation button 410 moves rearward straightly. Can do. Therefore, even if any position on the front side of the operation button 410 is pressed, the operation button 410 can be smoothly retracted without being tilted, so that the pressing operation can be reliably detected, and the operation button 410 is pressed. The operation to operate can be fully enjoyed.

  Further, in the effect operation unit 400, the vibration motor 424 is attached to the lower front of the substrate base 421 in the decoration substrate unit 420, and as described above, only the upper portion is dished so that the effect operation unit 400 can be suspended. Since the vibration is generated by rotating the weight 424a by the vibration motor 424, the vibration is generated at a part farthest from the attached part because it is attached to the production operation unit attaching part 326a of the unit cover 326. The entire production operation unit 400 can be vibrated greatly (strongly), and the vibration can be transmitted to the player who is touching the production operation unit 400. In addition, since the vibration motor 424 is disposed immediately below the position where the player can easily perform the pressing operation (the position of the white arrow in FIG. 61), for the player pressing the operation button 410 Strong vibrations can be transmitted, and the player can be surprised and entertained.

  Furthermore, the rendering operation unit 400 is attached to the pan unit cover 326 in a suspended state, and the bottom surface of the leg portion 442a of the relay board cover 442 forming the bottom surface and the bottom plate of the pan unit cover 326 Since a gap is formed between the upper surface of the portion 326i and the lower surface of the leg portion 442a when the operation button 410 is strongly pressed downward or struck down, the frame is held between the abutment of the lower surface of the leg portion 442a with the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i. The impact can be absorbed by the mounting portion 416e of the unit 415, the rendering operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326, etc. being bent downward. Further, after the lower surface of the leg portion 442a contacts the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i, the downward movement of the rendering operation unit 400 is restricted, and the mounting portion 416e of the frame unit 415 and the rendering operation unit mounting of the dish unit cover 326 are restricted. It is possible to prevent an excessive force from acting on the portion 326a and the like, and it is possible to prevent the rendering operation unit 400 and the like from being damaged. Therefore, even when the player presses the operation button 410 with a strong force or when the player depresses the operation button 410, the operation button 410 or the effect operation unit is presented when an effect of pressing the operation button 410 of the operation unit 400 is presented to the player. Since 400 and the like are not damaged, it is possible to avoid interruption of the game due to the damage, to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player, and to increase the burden on the game hall side by making it difficult to break. Can be suppressed.

  As described above, the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 to be pressed by the player is formed in a curved surface shape projecting forward (a part of the shape of a substantially spherical surface), and thus a flat plate shape. Compared to the case, the strength and rigidity are high, and even if it is strongly struck, the impact can be distributed to the entire button lens 411 and is not easily damaged.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 63, since the button lens 411, the frame side lens 417, the frame top lens 418, and the operation member in the operation button 432 are made of transparent members, the effect operation unit 400 is composed of The decoration by unevenness such as the first button decoration 411a, the second button decoration 411b, the first button inner decoration 432f, and the second button inner decoration 432g formed on the back side is the front side (the player side Can be viewed from In addition, since the plate thickness is changed and light is complicatedly refracted at the portion where the decoration of the unevenness is formed, it is difficult to visually recognize the rear side through the portion where the decoration of the unevenness is formed .

  Since the rendering operation unit 400 includes the first button decoration portion 411a extending from the inner periphery to the center side of the button frame 412 of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410, the decoration of the unevenness of the first button decoration portion 411a Thus, it is possible to make it difficult to view the rear at a portion of the outer peripheral edge of the portion to be the inside of the button lens 411. Behind the portion where the first button decoration portion 411a is formed (backward in the direction of the central axis CL), the inner peripheral surface of the body portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the peripheral wall portion of the operation button inner decoration member 432 There is a gap between the outer peripheral surface of the operation button 432a and the outer periphery of the operation button inner decoration member 432 from the front side (player's side) by the first button decoration portion 411a located in front of the gap. It can be difficult to see. As a result, even if the operation button in-operation decoration member 432 whose position is fixed is provided in the depressible operation button 410, the appearance of the operation button 410 can be prevented from being deteriorated, and the operation button 410 is seen. While being able to prevent the player from having a sense of discomfort, the decorative member 432 in the operation button can be disposed within the transparent operation button 410 without any problem, and the appearance of the operation button 410 can be improved.

  More specifically, the effect operation unit 400 includes the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, and the button frame 412 of the button lens 411 in the operation button 410. The unit base 431 and the decorative board unit 420 on the rear side (back side) on the outer side are formed so as not to be seen from the player side through the transparent button lens 411. Specifically, in FIG. 62, the portion of the cross hatch surrounded by the alternate long and short dash line is made invisible from the player side. As described above, since the operation button 410 includes the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412, and the like, the outside and the back side of the operation button inner decoration member 432 are hidden and concealed It is possible to improve the appearance of the operation button 410 and, consequently, the entire rendering operation unit 400.

  Further, in the effect operation unit 400, the first button decoration portion 411a of the button lens 411 in the operation button 410 extends toward the central axis CL of the operation button 410 and is arranged in the circumferential direction. Thus, the second button interior decoration portion 432g formed on the front plate portion 432b of the operation button interior decoration member 432 disposed on the inner rear side of the operation button 410 extends in an odd octagonal shape centering on the central axis CL. As shown in FIG. 63, the concave and convex lines of the first button decorative portion 411a and the concave and convex lines of the second button decorative portion 432g intersect as shown in FIG. The decoration can be shown to the player.

  In addition, since the first button decoration part 411a and the second button decoration part 432g are separated from each other in the front-rear direction (the direction in which the central axis line CL extends), the effect operation unit 400 is separated from the first button decoration part 411a. By the second button interior decoration portion 432g, a three-dimensional geometric pattern with depth can be shown to the player, and the decoration including the inside of the operation button 410 can be enjoyed.

  Furthermore, in the effect operation unit 400, since the first button decorative portion 411a and the second in-button decorative portion 432g are separated in the front-rear direction, the unevenness of the first button decorative portion 411a occurs when the player's eyes move. Since the degree of overlap between the line and the concavo-convex line of the second button interior decoration portion 432g changes, a moving decoration can be shown to the player, and the player can be entertained.

  Thus, the effect operation unit 400 allows the player to have a three-dimensional decoration with movement by the first button decorative portion 411a of the operation button 410 and the second button inner decorative portion 432g of the operation button inner decorative member 432. Since it can be shown, a player's interest can be attracted strongly and it can be set as the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal power.

  Further, the production operation unit 400 is within the operation button 410 (inside the button frame 412) and behind the operation button inner decoration member 432, the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, and the operation button. The upper inner decoration board 435 and the operation button lower inner decoration board 436 are arranged, and by emitting a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front face thereof, the operation button inner decoration member 432 in the operation button 410 emits light. It can be decorated. That is, the operation button 410 can be illuminated and decorated by the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration board 436. The LEDs mounted on the front surfaces of the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration board 436 are as shown in FIG. As viewed from the direction in which the central axis CL extends, the light is transmitted from the light to the outside of the main portion 413a because it is disposed inside the cylindrical main portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410. Only the inside of the operation button 410 can be appropriately decorated with light emission.

  In addition, the rendering operation unit 400 has the operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 in the decorative substrate unit 420 behind the second button decorative portion 411b facing the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 located near the outer periphery of the operation button 410. The first LED 422a and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outer decoration board 423 are arranged, and the six second button decoration portions 411b of the operation button 410 are illuminated and decorated by causing the first LEDs 422a and 423a to emit light. Can do. As shown in FIG. 52, the first LED 422a of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are formed of a cylindrical main body 413a in the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and a frame unit. 415 is located between the cylindrical inner cylinder portion 416d of the frame main body 416, and the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a does not leak to the inside of the main body portion 413a or the outer side of the inner cylinder portion 416d. Only the second button decoration portion 411b of the button 410 can be lighted and decorated favorably.

  Further, the rendering operation unit 400 has the second LED 422b of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board behind the frame side lens 417 facing the six outer peripheral openings 416b of the frame body 416 in the frame unit 415. 423 2nd LED423b is arrange | positioned, The frame side lens 417 can be light-decorated by making these 2nd LED422b and 423b light-emit. The second LED 422b of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the second LED 423b of the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are disposed between the cylindrical inner cylinder 416d of the frame main body 416 of the frame unit 415 and the outer periphery of the frame main body 416. The light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b does not leak to the inside of the inner cylindrical portion 416d or the outside of the frame main body 416, and only the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 can be appropriately decorated to emit light. .

  Further, in the effect operation unit 400, a plurality of frame top lens decoration substrates 437 in the base unit 430 are disposed behind the frame top lenses 418 of the frame unit 415, and a plurality of them are mounted on the front surface of the frame top lens decoration substrates 437 By emitting the LED, the frame top lens 418 can be decorated. A flat light-shielding wall 431c projects forward from the lower side of the base unit 430 where the frame top lens decorative substrate 437 of the unit base 431 is attached to the vicinity of the rear of the lower end of the frame top lens 418. The light from the LED of the top lens decorative substrate 437 does not leak to the operation button 410 or the frame side lens 417 side, and only the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415 can be favorably decorated by light emission.

[3-4 g. Overall configuration of second embodiment of rendering operation unit]
Next, the second rendering operation unit 400A, which is the second embodiment of the rendering operation unit 400, will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 64 (a) is a front view of a second effect operation unit different from the effect operation unit of FIGS. 48 to 63 in the embodiment, and FIG. 64 (b) is a right side view of the second effect operation unit. FIG. 65A is a perspective view of the second performance operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 65B is a perspective view of the second performance operation unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 66 is an explanatory view of the second effect operation unit as viewed from the extending direction of the central axis of the operation button. FIG. 67 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line G-G in FIG. FIG. 68 is a cross-sectional view taken along line HH in FIG. 64 (b). 69A is a cross-sectional view taken along the line II in FIG. 64B, and FIG. 69B is an enlarged view of a portion A in FIG. FIG. 70 is an exploded perspective view of the second effect operation unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 71 is an exploded perspective view of the second effect operation unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear FIG.

  The second effect operation unit 400A can be attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the dish unit 320 in place of the effect operation unit 400 described above. Similar to the effect operation unit 400, the second effect operation unit 400A can be pressed by the player and can present an effect image to the player. Hereinafter, in the second effect operation unit 400A, the same components as those of the effect operation unit 400 will be described with the same reference numerals.

  The second rendering operation unit 400A has a circular outer shape and a transparent central portion excluding the outer periphery, and an operation button 410 that can be pressed by the player, surrounds the outer periphery of the operation button 410, and an effect of the dish unit cover 326. A frame-shaped frame unit 415 attached to the operation unit attachment portion 326a, a decorative substrate unit 420 disposed behind the operation button 410 and capable of illuminating and decorating the outer peripheral edge of the operation button 410 and the frame unit 415; The second base unit 450 is attached to the rear side of the frame unit 415, and the operation button 410 and the decorative board unit 420 are attached to the front surface. The second base unit 450 is visible from the player side through the operation button 410. The door frame side second effect table that can be displayed on the screen and can display effect images And apparatus 460A, a buffer unit 510 which is attached to the lower surface of the second performance display device 460A door frame side, and a.

  Further, the second effect operation unit 400A has a second effect operation unit relay board 515 attached to the right side surface in front view of the door frame side second effect display device 460A and the surface of the second effect operation unit relay board 515. And a relay board cover 516 attached to the right side surface of the door frame side second effect display device 460A in a front view so as to cover the door frame side second effect display device 460A. The second effect operation unit relay substrate 515 and the relay substrate cover 516 are attached to the right side surface of the projector attachment member 505 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A.

  The second effect operation unit relay substrate 515 includes an operation button left outer decoration substrate 422, an operation button right outer decoration substrate 423, a vibration motor 424, a pressure detection sensor 454, a frame top lens decoration substrate 482, a switching drive motor 492, a projector 500, And, it is for relaying the connection between the rotation detection sensor 507 and the door main body relay board of the door frame base unit 100.

[3-4 g-1. Manual operation button]
The operation button 410 of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 69 to 72 and the like. FIG. 72 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button of the second effect operation unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button of the second effect operation unit disassembled and viewed from the back FIG. The operation button 410 of the second effect operation unit 400A is formed in a circular shape whose outer shape is slightly smaller in diameter than the height in the vertical direction of the dish unit 320, and the center side excluding the outer peripheral edge is formed to be transparent. The operation button 410 has a transparent button lens 411 formed in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface) so that the outer periphery is circular and the center side bulges forward, and the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. An annular button frame 412 attached to the front side, and a cylindrical button base 413 attached to sandwich the outer periphery of the button lens 411 on the rear side of the button frame 412 The configuration is substantially the same as the operation button 410 of the operation unit 400.

  A specific difference is that the operation button 410 of the second effect operation unit 400A and the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 are different from the pattern of the first button decoration portion 411a of the button lens 411 and the guide boss of the button base 413. The shape of the part 413c is different.

  More specifically, as shown in the figure, the first button decoration portion 411a of the operation button 410 in the second effect operation unit 400A has one vertex toward the center of the button lens 411 at a portion in contact with the inner periphery of the button frame 412. And a button lens 411 in the truss-like pattern in which a plurality of rows of triangles and a triangle having one apex toward the opposite side of the center are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction over the entire circumference. A right triangle pattern comprising a bottom side facing the center side, a side extending from both ends of the base side to the center side of the button lens 411, and a hypotenuse extending from the tip of the side to the center of the base side And a hypotenuse of the right triangle pattern, a side extending from the center of the truss-like triangle base to the center side of the button lens 411 longer than the right triangle pattern, and a tip of the side And varying isosceles triangle pattern constituted by the side extending to the tip of the hypotenuse of each triangle-shaped pattern, in which is formed.

  That is, the first button decoration portion 411a is configured by a combination of a plurality of triangles. In addition, although illustration is abbreviate | omitted, each triangle which comprises the 1st button decoration part 411a has faced the direction from which each surface differs, and is formed in the polyhedron shape. Thereby, since the front surface side of the button lens 411 is formed in a smooth curved surface shape, the back surface side is formed in a polyhedral shape in the portion of the first button decoration portion 411a, so the first button decoration portion 411a. In this part, the plate thickness of the button lens 411 changes in a complicated manner, and the light passing through this part is irregularly refracted. Accordingly, at the site of the first button decoration portion 411a, a geometric pattern in which a plurality of triangles are combined can be shown to the player, and at the same time, the rear member can be made difficult to see due to irregular refraction.

  The guide boss portion 413c of the button base 413 of the second effect operation unit 400A is formed in a cylindrical shape whose rear is open. The guide boss portion 413c is inserted into the holding hole 451d of the second base unit 450, and the button shaft 452 held in the holding hole 451d of the unit base 451 in the second base unit 450 inside the cylindrical shape. Is slidably inserted. In this example, the operation button 410 is attached so as to be able to advance and retreat in the front-rear direction by the button shaft 452 of the second base unit 450 inserted from behind into the guide boss portion 413c.

[3-4g-2. Frame unit]
The frame unit 415 of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71 and the like. The frame unit 415 is attached from the front to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326 a of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320 so as to surround the outer periphery from the front side of the operation button 410 and decorates the outside of the operation button 410. The frame unit 415 has an outer shape that matches the front end side of the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a.

  The frame unit 415 of the second effect operation unit 400A has the same configuration as the frame unit 415 of the effect operation unit 400, and is given the same reference numerals and will not be described in detail.

[3-4 g-3. Decorative substrate unit]
The decorative board unit 420 of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 57, FIG. 69 to FIG. The decorative substrate unit 420 is attached to the front surface of the second base unit 450 below the frame unit 415, and can emit and decorate the second button decorative portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415. The second effect operation unit 400A can be vibrated.

  The decorative substrate unit 420 includes a C-shaped substrate base 421 whose upper side is opened, and an operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and an operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 attached to the front of the left and right sides of the substrate base 421, respectively. A vibration motor 424 attached to the lower front portion of the substrate base 421, and a motor cover 425 attached to the front surface of the substrate base 421 so as to cover the front side of the vibration motor 424.

  The decorative board unit 420 of the second presentation operation unit 400A has the same configuration as the decoration board unit 420 of the presentation operation unit 400, and is given the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof is omitted.

[3-4 g-4. Second base unit]
The second base unit 450 of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. 73 and the like. FIG. 73 is a perspective view of the second base unit of the second rendering operation unit as viewed from the front. The second base unit 450 of the second effect operation unit 400A has the operation button 410 attached so as to be able to advance and retreat in the front-rear direction, the door frame side second effect display device 460A is attached, and is attached to the rear side of the frame unit 415. It is

  The second base unit 450 includes a unit base 451 attached to the rear side of the frame unit 415, and protrudes from the front surface of the unit base 451. The second base unit 450 is rearward in the four cylindrical guide boss portions 413c of the button base 413 of the operation button 410. Operation button spring which inserts four cylindrical cylindrical button shafts 452 which are respectively slidably inserted from the inside and four button shafts 452 are inserted to urge the rear end of the guide boss portion 413c of the operation button 410 forward. (Not shown) and three press detection sensors 454 that are attached to the front surface of the unit base 451 and detect the three detection pieces 413d of the button base 413 in the operation buttons 410, respectively.

  The unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 includes an annular main body 451a, a cover 451b that protrudes hemispherically from the inner periphery of the main body 451a to the rear, and a direction perpendicular to the front surface of the main body 451a. A through hole 451c which penetrates the cover portion 451b back and forth in a substantially rectangular shape extending up and down when viewed, four holding holes 451d which are recessed backward from the front surface of the main portion 451a, and a main portion 451a An upper bearing 451e recessed in a semicircle (U-shape) from the front to the rear in the upper part of the upper part, and a semicircle coaxial with the upper bearing 451e from the front to the rear in the lower part of the main body 451a The lower bearing portion 451f recessed in a (U-shape) and the upper front surface of the main body portion 451a are formed on the left and right sides of the upper bearing portion 451e, and the screen unit 470 rotates And a, a pair of rotation restricting portion 451g to regulate.

  The annular main body portion 451a of the unit base 451 is formed to have substantially the same size as the substrate base 421 of the decorative substrate unit 420 in which the inner circumference and the outer circumference are formed in a C-shape. The decorative board unit 420 is attached to the front surface of the main body 451a. Cover portion 451b is formed in a size that can be accommodated without contact when screen unit 470 of door frame side second effect display device 460A rotatably attached by upper bearing portion 451e and lower bearing portion 451f rotates. There is. The through hole 451 c is formed in a size that allows the projector 500 of the door frame side second effect display device 460 </ b> A to pass from the rear.

  The four holding holes 451d of the unit base 451 are formed at positions corresponding to the four guide boss portions 413c of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 at the upper, lower, left and right corners of the front surface of the main body portion 451a. These holding holes 451d are formed so that the inner diameter is larger than the outer diameter of the guide boss portion 413c, and the guide boss portion 413c can be inserted. In the four holding holes 451 d, a button shaft 452 is attached coaxially with the central axis. The front end of the button shaft 452 attached to the holding hole 451 d protrudes more forward than the front surface of the main body 451 a. By inserting the button shaft 452 attached to the holding hole 451d into the cylindrical guide boss portion 413c of the operation button 410, the operation button 410 is attached to be slidable in the front-rear direction via the guide boss portion 413c. Can.

  Of the four holding holes 451d, the upper left holding hole 451d is counterclockwise with respect to the center of the unit base 451 from a center line extending vertically through the center of the unit base 451 (the center of the operation button 410). It is formed at a position rotated about 30 degrees in the direction. The holding hole 451 d on the upper right side of the four holding holes 451 d is clockwise with respect to the center of the unit base 451 from the vertically extending center line passing through the center of the unit base 451 (center of the operation button 410). It is formed at a position rotated about 47 degrees in the direction of. On the other hand, the two holding holes 451d arranged on the lower side of the four holding holes 451d are respectively formed at positions opposite to the center of the unit base 451 with respect to the upper two holding holes 451d. .

  In addition, operation button springs (not shown) are respectively inserted into the four holding holes 451 d, and the front ends of these operation button springs abut on the rear ends of the guide boss portions 413 c, whereby the operation buttons are formed via the guide boss portions 413 c. The 410 is urged forward.

  The upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f of the unit base 451 are formed in a U-shape that is open frontward and extends rearward. The upper bearing portion 451 e and the lower bearing portion 451 f are coaxially located at the center of the portion extending in a semicircular arc shape. The upper bearing portion 451 e and the lower bearing portion 451 f are inserted with the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474 of the door frame side second effect display device 460 A from the front, and then the upper bearing member 480 and the lower bearing member 485 from the front side. Is attached to the front surface of the main body 451a, so that the screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A can be rotatably supported.

  The pair of rotation restricting portions 451g of the unit base 451 has their respective front surfaces passing through the central axis of the semicircular portion of the upper bearing portion 451e whose extension line (surface) is recessed backward in a U shape. It is formed in the same manner, and is separated in the circumferential direction at a predetermined angle around the central axis. The pair of rotation restricting portions 451g regulates the rotation range of the screen unit 470 when the stopper 475b of the operation gear member 475 in the screen unit 470 is in contact with the second effect operation unit 400A. There is. In the present embodiment, the rotation range of the screen unit 470 is restricted to an angle range of 90 degrees by the pair of rotation restricting portions 451g.

  Although not shown, magnets are embedded in the pair of rotation restricting portions 451g and magnetically contact the iron plate attached to the stopper 475b to abut the rotation restricting portions 451g. The stopper 475b is made difficult to separate from the rotation restricting portion 451g. Accordingly, the screen unit 470 is in the first position with the main screen 471 facing forward, or the sub-screen 472 is directed forward with the magnet in the rotation restricting portion 451g and the iron plate of the stopper 475b. The screen unit 470 can be held in any of the position states, and the movement by which the screen unit 470 tries to rotate is suppressed by the pressing operation of the operation button 410 or the vibration by the vibration motor 424 etc. The effect image by the second effect display device 460A can be enjoyed in a good state.

  The three pressing detection sensors 454 are attached to the front surface of the main body 451 a of the unit base 451 at a position corresponding to the three detection pieces 413 d of the button base 413 in the operation button 410. More specifically, three pressing detection sensors 454 are left on the front surface of the main body 451a of the unit base 451, one on the lower left side of the upper left holding hole 451d and the other on the lower right side of the upper right holding hole 451d. One of them is attached to the lower right side of the lower left holding hole 451d. The three pressure detection sensors 454 are attached at substantially equal intervals circumferentially around the center of the unit base 451. These three pressure detection sensors 454 can detect three detection strips 413 d of the operation button 410.

[3-4 g-5. Door frame side second effect display device]
The door frame side second effect display device 460A of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 70, FIG. 71 and the like. The door frame side second effect display device 460 </ b> A is attached to the second base unit 450, and can display the effect image to the player through the transparent portion of the operation button 410. The door frame side second effect display device 460A includes a screen unit 470 attached to the second base unit 450 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending vertically by the upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f, and the second base unit 451A. An upper bearing member 480 attached to the upper front portion of the unit 450 and rotatably attached to the upper side of the screen unit 470 in cooperation with the second base unit 450, and attached to the lower front portion of the second base unit 450. And a lower bearing member 485 rotatably mounted on the lower side of the screen unit 470 in cooperation with the second base unit 450.

  Further, the door frame side second effect display device 460 </ b> A rotates the screen unit 470 and is attached to the upper part of the second base unit 450 and the cover unit 451 b of the second base unit 450. The projector 500 that is disposed and capable of projecting and displaying an effect image on the screen unit 470 from the rear, and the projector 500 are attached, and the rear surface of the unit base 451 is attached so as to cover the cover portion 451b of the second base unit 450 from the rear side. A box-shaped projector mounting member 505 that is open at the front, and is mounted so as to cover the operation gear member 475 of the screen unit 470 from above on the left side of the rotation drive unit 490 at the top of the second base unit 450. Upper cover 506 and upper part And two rotation detecting sensor 507 for detecting the rotational position of the screen unit 470 is attached to the bar 506 (rotational position), and a.

[3-4g-5a. Screen unit]
The screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. The screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A is attached to the second base unit 450 so as to be rotatable about the axis extending vertically, and the effect image is projected from the projector 500. The effect image can be displayed (projected) so as to be visible from the player.

  The screen unit 470 is formed in a semi-cylindrical shape, and has a milky white light transmitting main screen 471 and a disk shape whose one end side in the axial direction of the main screen 471 is a part of the outer periphery, and the central portion is an axis A sub-screen 472 that is curved so as to bulge outward in the direction, milky white and translucent, and protrudes in a cylindrical shape from the axial center of both ends of the main screen 471 outward in the direction perpendicular to the axis. The upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474, the working gear member 475 which is attached to the tip of the upper shaft member 473 and has gear teeth 475a formed over substantially the outer circumference, and the sub-screen 472. A transparent sub-screen decoration member 476 (see FIG. 74, FIG. 75, etc.) formed in a relief shape imitating a predetermined character (skull), and a sub-screen A sub-screen decoration board 477 (see FIG. 75 and the like) on which a plurality of LEDs 477a are mounted on the surface facing the sub-screen 472 attached to the back side of the sub-screen 472, and the sub-screen 472 on the opposite side of the main screen 471 And a semicircular arc-shaped peripheral decoration member 478 extending short from the end of the main screen 471 toward the central axis of the main screen 471.

  The semi-cylindrical main screen 471 of the screen unit 470 has a radius smaller than the inner diameter of the annular main body 451a of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450. The main screen 471 is formed such that its axial length is about 4/3 times as large as the semi-cylindrical radius. The main screen 471 is decorated so that both ends in the axial direction are edged by the peripheral decorative portion 472a of the sub screen 472 and the peripheral decorative member 478.

  The sub screen 472 is formed in a circular shape whose outer shape matches the radius of the semi-cylindrical main screen 471 when viewed from the direction in which the central axis extends (see FIG. 74 (b)). . The sub-screen 472 is formed in an annular shape with a predetermined width from the outer periphery to the center side, and includes a peripheral decorative portion 472a in which a plurality of quadrangular pyramid-shaped irregularities are arranged in the circumferential direction, and an inner side of the peripheral decorative portion 472a is closed. And a curved screen portion 472b. The peripheral decorative portion 472a of the sub screen 472 is formed in a truncated cone shape so that the inner peripheral side protrudes in a direction away from the main screen 471. The screen portion 472 b bulges in a spherical shape having a radius larger than the radius of the semi-cylindrical main screen 471 in a direction away from the main screen 471. A through-hole is formed in the screen portion 472b of the sub-screen 472, and a sub-screen decoration member 476 is attached so as to close the hole.

  The upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474 are inserted from the front into the upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f of the unit base 451 in the second base unit 450, respectively, and are rotatably mounted.

  The actuating gear member 475 is engaged with the second transmission gear 495 of the rotational drive unit 490 and protrudes outward from one of the gear teeth 475a formed substantially along the circumference and the circumferential end of the gear tooth 475a. A stopper 475b is provided, and a detection piece 475c projecting outward in the form of a flat plate from the side opposite to the stopper 475b at the circumferential end of the gear tooth 475a. The stopper 475 b of the actuating gear member 475 is located in the recess 481 a of the upper bearing member 480 which is recessed in a circular arc centering on the axis of the upper shaft member 473 in a state assembled to the second rendering operation unit 400A. The rotation range of the screen unit 470 is restricted by coming into contact with the pair of rotation restriction parts 451g of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 located at both ends in the concave part 481a.

  Although not shown in detail, an iron plate is attached to a portion of the stopper 475b that comes into contact with the rotation restricting portion 451g, and this iron plate can be magnetically attached to a magnet embedded in the rotation restricting portion 451g. It is like that.

  The screen unit 470 can rotate between a first position with the main screen 471 facing forward and a second position with the sub screen 472 facing forward. The detection piece 475 c is detected by a rotation detection sensor 507 attached to the upper cover 506.

  The sub screen decoration member 476 is attached to the screen portion 472 b of the sub screen 472. The sub screen decoration member 476 is formed in a relief shape imitating a skull by a transparent member, and since the plate thickness is complexly changed, transmitted light is irregularly refracted in a complex manner, and the rear is viewed It is difficult. In addition, although detailed illustration is abbreviate | omitted, the character of "PUSH" is formed in the relief which imitated the sub screen decoration member 476 in the shape of a skull.

  The sub screen decoration substrate 477 is attached on the back side of the sub screen 472 so that a gap is formed between the sub screen 472 and the sub screen 472, and a plurality of LEDs 477 a are provided on the front side (the side facing the sub screen 472). Has been implemented. The sub-screen decoration substrate 477 has an outer shape smaller than that of the sub-screen decoration member 476 and has a white surface. By emitting the LED 477a of the sub screen decoration substrate 477, the sub screen decoration member 476 and the sub screen 472 can be lighted and decorated. More specifically, the sub-screen decoration substrate 477 emits the LED 477a so that the “eye” portion of the skull and the “PUSH” character portion can be strongly illuminated.

  Further, since the sub-screen decorative substrate 477 is disposed relatively close to the sub-screen 472 and does not have a member for diffusing light between the sub-screen 472 and the sub-screen 472, the LED 477 a emits light. , And the point light source of the LED 477a can be recognized by the player. Further, the sub screen decoration substrate 477 can block the light from the projector 500. Therefore, the projector 500 can project the shadow of the sub-screen decoration substrate 477 on the sub-screen 472.

  The peripheral decorative member 478 is formed in the same shape as a part of the peripheral decorative portion 472a of the sub screen 472. Similar to the peripheral decorative portion 472a, a plurality of quadrangular pyramidal concavities and convexities are arranged in the circumferential direction of the arc. .

[3-4g-5b. Upper bearing member and lower bearing member]
The upper bearing member 480 and the lower bearing member 485 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 70 and 71. The upper bearing member 480 and the lower bearing member 485 close the front side of the upper bearing portion 451 e and the lower bearing portion 451 f which are open forward of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450. It is attached to the front surface of 451a. In the state where the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474 of the screen unit 470 are inserted from the front into the upper bearing portion 451 e and the lower bearing portion 451 f of the unit base 451, respectively. The upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474 can be rotatably attached to the second base unit 450 by being attached to the front surface of the unit base 451.

  The upper bearing member 480 includes a bearing member 481 attached to the upper portion of the body portion 451a of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 so as to close the front side of the upper bearing portion 451e whose front side is open, and a bearing member And a frame top lens decoration substrate 482 attached to the upper front surface of 481. The bearing member 481 has a recess 481a that is recessed in an arc shape from the rear surface to the front so that the center in the left-right direction is deepest. The concave portion 481a of the bearing member 481 in the upper bearing member 480 is recessed in an arc shape centered on the axis of the upper shaft member 473 of the screen unit 470 in the state assembled to the second rendering operation unit 400A. The stopper 475b of the operating gear member 475 in the unit 470 is inserted and disposed, and a pair of rotation restricting portions 451g of the unit base 451 are located at both ends of the arc of the recess 481a. Due to the concave portion 481a that is recessed in an arc shape, the stopper 475b of the operating gear member 475 can be favorably rotated between the pair of rotation restricting portions 451g.

  The frame top lens decorative substrate 482 of the upper bearing member 480 has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface side, and is located behind the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415 in a state assembled to the second rendering operation unit 400A. ing. Thereby, the frame top lens 418 can be decorated with light emission by causing the LED of the frame top lens decoration substrate 482 to emit light.

  The lower bearing member 485 is formed substantially in a flat plate shape, and is attached to the front surface of the main body 451 a of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 so as to close the front of the lower bearing portion 451 f. The lower shaft member 474 is attached to the front surface of the unit base 451 by inserting the lower shaft member 474 of the screen unit 470 into the lower bearing portion 451 f of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450. Can be mounted rotatably.

[3-4g-5c. Rotation drive unit]
The rotation drive unit 490 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The rotation drive unit 490 is attached to the upper surface of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 and can drive the screen unit 470 to rotate. The rotary drive unit 490 is mounted on the upper surface of the unit base 451 and has a hollow unit case 491 inside, and the switching drive motor 492 mounted on the lower surface of the unit case 491 and having a rotary shaft protruding into the unit case 491. A spur gear-like drive gear (not shown) fixed to the rotation shaft of the switching drive motor, and a spur gear-like first gear engaged with the drive gear and rotatably mounted in the unit case 491 The transmission gear (not shown) and the first transmission gear are meshed with the gear teeth 475a of the operation gear member 475 of the screen unit 470 and rotatably mounted in the unit case 491. And a second transmission gear 495 in the form of a spur gear.

  The second transmission gear 495 meshes with the gear teeth 475 a of the actuating gear member 475 in the screen unit 470 in a state where the rotational drive unit 490 is assembled to the second rendering operation unit 400A. The rotational drive unit 490 rotates the switching drive motor 492 to rotate the screen unit 470 back and forth around the axis via the drive gear, the first transmission gear, the second transmission gear 495, and the gear teeth 475a. It can be turned.

[3-4 g-5 d. projector]
The projector 500 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. 70, FIG. 71 and the like. The projector 500 is disposed in a hemispherical cover portion 451 b of the unit base 451 in the second base unit 450, and is attached to the rear side of the unit base 451 through a projector attachment member 505. The projector 500 can project and display the effect image on the main screen 471 or the sub screen 472 by emitting the effect image toward the main screen 471 or the sub screen 472 of the screen unit 470.

  The projector 500 includes a cubic projector main body 501 attached to the projector attachment member 505, and a lens unit 502 that projects forward from the projector main body 501 in a columnar shape and that irradiates an effect image forward from the front end.

  In the projector 500, the rear portion of the projector main body 501 is attached to the projector attachment member 505, and the lens portion 502 and the projector main body 501 are disposed in the cover portion 451b through the through hole 451c of the unit base 451 from the rear side. Installed as follows.

  The projector 500 can project effect images over substantially the front surfaces of the main screen 471 and the sub screen 472 of the screen unit 470, and can project and display still images and moving images as effect images. The projector 500 is a commercially available liquid crystal projector and has an autofocus function.

[3-4 g-5 e. Projector mounting member]
The projector mounting member 505 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. The projector attachment member 505 is formed in a box shape with an open front, and the projector 500 is attached to the inside and attached to the rear side of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450. The projector attachment member 505 can be attached to the rear side of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450, thereby covering the cover portion 451b of the unit base 451 and the rear side of the projector 500.

  The projector mounting member 505 has a bottom wall extending in the horizontal direction and a rear wall extending in the vertical direction, so that the projector 500 can be mounted in an inclined state so as to coincide with the inclination of the operation button 410. . A plurality of slits 505a penetrating in the front-rear direction are formed on the rear wall of the projector mounting member 505, and heat released from the projector 500 can be discharged to the outside through the slits 505a.

  A second effect operation unit relay substrate 515 and a relay substrate cover 516 are attached to the right side surface of the projector attachment member 505 in a front view.

[3-4g-5f. Upper cover and rotation detection sensor]
The upper cover 506 and the rotation detection sensor 507 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The upper cover 506 is attached to the upper surface of the main body 451a of the unit base 451 in the second base unit 450 so as to cover the upper part of the operating gear member 475 of the screen unit 470. The rotation detection sensors 507 are for detecting the rotational position of the screen unit 470, and are attached to the lower surface of the upper cover 506 in a state of being separated from each other.

  Although not shown in detail, the two rotation detection sensors 507 are mounted at positions separated by a rotational angle of 90 degrees in the circumferential direction around the rotation axis of the screen unit 470, and the operating gear in the screen unit 470 The detection piece 475c of the member 475 can be detected. Specifically, the two rotation detection sensors 507 have a detection piece 475c at a first position where the main screen 471 of the screen unit 470 faces the front, and a second position where the sub screen 472 faces the front. The time detection piece 475c can be detected respectively. The rotational drive of the switching drive motor 492 of the rotational drive unit 490 is controlled based on the detection signal of the detection piece 475 c by the two rotation detection sensors 507.

[3-4g-6. Buffer unit]
The buffer unit 510 of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The buffer unit 510 is attached to the lower surface of the door frame side second effect display device 460A, and reduces the impact when the second effect operation unit 400A is hit from above, so that the dish unit cover in the dish unit 320 is provided. 326 is transmitted to the bottom plate portion 326i.

  The buffer unit 510 is in contact with the elastically deformable flat buffer member 511 which is in contact with the lower surface of the projector attachment member 505 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A, and the lower surface of the buffer member 511. A buffer base 512 that is mounted so as to be relatively close to the lower surface of the projector mounting member 505.

  The buffer base 512 of the buffer unit 510 has a flat plate-like main body portion 512a that abuts on the lower surface of the buffer member 511, and leg portions protruding downward from both left and right sides of the main body portion 512a in a front view 512b. The leg portion 512 b of the buffer base 512 is in contact with the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326 i of the pan unit cover 326 in the pan unit 320 when assembled to the door frame 3.

  In the buffer unit 510, the projector mounting member 505 attached to the base unit 430 compresses the buffer member 511 in the buffer unit 510 when the operation button 410 and the frame unit 415 are strongly pressed downward or hit down. Move down to The shock absorbing member 511 is compressed to absorb an impact. Then, when the projector mounting member 505 is further moved downward, the lower surface of the projector mounting member 505 abuts on the upper surface side of the main body 512 a of the buffer base 512. Since a gap is formed between the main body portion 512a and the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the plate unit cover 326 by the left and right leg pieces 512b, the projector attachment member in contact with the upper surface side of the main body portion 512a When the 505 further moves downward, the flat plate-like body portion 512a is bent, and the impact can be absorbed also by the bending of the body portion 512a. Furthermore, when the projector mounting member 505 moves downward, the lower surface of the downwardly bent main body portion 512a abuts the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the pan unit cover 326, and further bending of the body portion 512a is restricted. The impact is transmitted to the dish unit cover 326. Thus, when the operation button 410 and the frame unit 415 are strongly hit from the upper side, the impact can be absorbed in multiple steps, and the attaching portion 416 e of the frame unit 415 and the effect operation unit attaching portion of the plate unit cover 326 It is possible to prevent an undue force from acting on 326a and the like and to prevent them from being damaged.

[3-4 g-7. Operation effect of the second rendering operation unit]
The operational effects of the second performance operation unit 400A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 74A is an explanatory view of the second effect operation unit as viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends with the main screen of the screen unit facing forward, and FIG. 74B is a sub view of the screen unit. It is explanatory drawing which looked at the 2nd production operation unit from the direction where the central axis of the operation button has extended in the state which turned the screen ahead. 75 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line JJ in FIG. 74 (a), and FIG. 75 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line KK in FIG. 74 (b). FIG. 76 (a) shows the second rendering operation unit with the main screen facing forward, as viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends, and is hidden by the first button decoration portion, button frame, etc. of the operation button. It is explanatory drawing which shows the site | part which is going to be shown, (b) shows the site | part which is going to hide by the 1st button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. in sectional drawing of the 2nd production operation unit of the state of (a). FIG. FIG. 77 (a) shows the second rendering operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends with the sub-screen facing forward, and is hidden by the first button decoration portion, button frame, etc. of the operation button. It is explanatory drawing which shows the site | part which is going to be shown, (b) shows the site | part which is going to hide by the 1st button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. in sectional drawing of the 2nd production operation unit of the state of (a). FIG.

  The second effect operation unit 400A of the present embodiment changes the decoration in the operation button 410 or changes the operation button 410 according to the game state that changes when the game ball is driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5. The effect image can be displayed in 410 and the player can be entertained, and the player can be operated by operating the operation button 410 so that the player can participate in the effect presented to the player. is there.

  The second effect operation unit 400A is formed such that the entire height thereof is substantially the same as the height of the lower portion of the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3. In addition, the entire width of the second effect operation unit 400 </ b> A is formed to be slightly larger than 1⁄3 of the entire width of the door frame 3. The second effect operation unit 400A is disposed at the center in the left-right direction below the game area 5a (the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110) in a front view.

  In the second effect operation unit 400A, the upper part of the frame main body 416 of the frame unit 415 is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 in the dish unit 320. The second effect operation unit 400A, when attached to the dish unit 320, is between the lower end of the leg portion 512b of the buffer base 512 of the buffer unit 510 and the upper surface of the bottom plate 326i of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320. There is a gap in the That is, only the upper part of the second effect operation unit 400A is attached to the plate unit 320, and is attached in a suspended state.

  Further, in the second effect operation unit 400A, the front surface of the frame unit 415 (the surface formed by the inner periphery of the front end of the central opening 416a of the frame main body 416) is parallel to the inclined surface of the front end opening of the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a. It is attached to become. Thereby, in the second effect operation unit 400A, the central axis line CL (see FIG. 67) of the transparent operation button 410 bulging forward in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface) is a vertical line. It is inclined at an angle of 63 degrees to move upward as it goes forward. Thus, when the player is seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 to play a game using the pachinko machine 1, the head of the player is disposed above the plate unit 320 (second effect operation unit 400A) The central axis CL of the operation button 410 passes near the head of the player, because the central axis CL of the operation button 410 is located in front of the center of the game area 5a in the game board 5 being played. Therefore, when the player drops his / her line of sight from the game area 5a to the second effect operation unit 400A (the operation button 410), the operation button 410 is as close as possible to the front view (the projection from the direction parallel to the central axis CL). The door frame side second effect display device 460A or the like in the operation button 410 or the operation button 410 can be visually recognized in a good state.

  In the second effect operation unit 400A, the button shafts 452 held in the four holding holes 451d of the unit base 451 in the second base unit 450 are slid on the four cylindrical guide boss portions 413c of the operation buttons 410, respectively. It is inserted in a movable manner and biased forward by an operation button spring (not shown). In a normal state (a state where the operation button 410 is not pressed), the second effect operation unit 400A causes the front end of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 to be in the frame unit 415 by the urging force of the operation button spring. A portion of the rear surface of the frame main body 416 near the central opening 416a.

  In the second effect operation unit 400A, in the normal state, the center side (center axis line CL side) of the inner periphery of the button frame 412 in the operation button 410 goes forward from the central opening 416a of the frame main body 416 in the frame unit 415. It protrudes. In other words, in the transparent button lens 411 bulging forward in a curved surface (a part of the shape of a substantially spherical surface) of the operation button 410, the portion projecting forward from the inner periphery (inner side) of the button frame 412 is , And protrudes forward from the central opening 416a of the frame main body 416 of the frame unit 415 (see FIG. 67 and the like).

  Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the diameter of the central opening 416a of the frame main body 416 in the frame unit 415 is about 15 cm, and the button lens 411 (the front end) with respect to the central axis CL direction of the operation button 410 is the frame unit. It protrudes about 4 cm forward from the front surface of 415.

  In a normal state, when the player presses the operation button 410 of the second effect operation unit 400A, the operation button 410 moves rearward along the central axis CL against the urging force of the operation button spring. When the rear end of the operation button 410 comes into contact with the front surface of the main body 451a of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450, the backward movement is restricted and the backward movement of the operation button 410 is stopped. When the player presses the operation button 410, the button lens 411 bulging forward in a curved surface shape (substantially spherical shape) is pressed.

  The operation button 410 is formed so that the outer diameter is very large compared to the operation button for effect provided in the conventional pachinko machine, and therefore the peripheral edge away from the central portion of the button lens 411 is pressed There is a high possibility of being. More specifically, while the operation buttons for effects in the conventional pachinko machine are attached so that the central axis extends substantially parallel to the vertical line, the operation of the second effect operation unit 400A of the present embodiment is performed. Since the button 410 is attached with the central axis CL inclined with respect to the vertical line, when the player presses the operation button 410 from above like the conventional pachinko machine, the button 410 is separated from the central axis CL of the operation button 410. The region will be pressed (see FIG. 61).

  By the way, the operation buttons for performance in the conventional pachinko machine are formed with a flat surface on which the player presses, so when the operation button is enlarged with the flat part being pressed When pressing a part out of the center of the operation button, the surface to be pressed is inclined so that the pressed part retreats first, and the operation button can not recede straight, and the operation button There is a possibility that the pressing operation cannot be performed.

  On the other hand, the operation button 410 of the second effect operation unit 400A of the present embodiment has a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface) in which a portion (button lens 411) pressed by the player bulges forward. Since the shape of the operation button 410 is pressed away from the center of the operation button 410, the force is dispersed to the entire operation button 410 and the operation button 410 becomes difficult to tilt, and the operation button 410 moves straight backward. can do. Therefore, even if any position on the front side of the operation button 410 is pressed, the operation button 410 can be smoothly retracted without being tilted, so that the pressing operation can be reliably detected, and the operation button 410 is pressed. The operation to operate can be fully enjoyed.

  In addition, in the second effect operation unit 400A, the vibration motor 424 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the substrate base 421 in the decoration substrate unit 420, and as described above, the second effect operation unit 400A is suspended. Since only the upper part is attached to the production operation unit attachment part 326a of the dish unit cover 326, when vibration is generated by rotating the weight 424a by the vibration motor 424, vibration is generated at a part farthest from the attached part. Since it generate | occur | produces, the whole 2nd rendering operation unit 400A can be vibrated large (strongly), and a vibration can be transmitted to the player touching the 2nd rendering operation unit 400A. In addition, since the vibration motor 424 is disposed immediately below the position where the player can easily perform the pressing operation (near the upper portion of the operation button 410), the vibration is strong against the player pressing the operation button 410 Can be transmitted to surprise the player and enjoy the presentation.

  Furthermore, the second effect operation unit 400A is attached to the dish unit cover 326 in a suspended state, and the projector mounting member 505 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A and the bottom plate of the dish unit cover 326. A buffer unit 510 is disposed between the upper surface of the portion 326i. The buffer unit 510 includes an elastically deformable buffer member 511, and a gap is formed between the main body portion 512 a with which the buffer member 511 is in contact with the upper surface and the bottom plate portion 326 i of the dish unit cover 326. Therefore, when the operation button 410 or the frame unit 415 is strongly pressed or struck down, the impact is caused in multiple stages by elastic deformation (compression) of the buffer member 511 or bending of the main body 512a of the buffer base 512. Can be absorbed, and it can be avoided that an excessive force acts on the mounting portion 416e of the frame unit 415, the rendering operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326, etc., and the second rendering operation unit 400A or the like is damaged. Can be prevented. Therefore, even if the operation button 410 or the frame unit 415 is pressed or hit with a strong force when the player is presented with an effect of pressing the operation button 410 of the second effect operation unit 400A, the operation is not performed. Since the button 410, the second performance operation unit 400A, and the like are not damaged, it is possible to avoid the interruption of the game due to the damage, to suppress the lowering of the player's interest, and to make the damage difficult. An increase in the burden on the game hall side can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 pressed and operated by the player is formed in a curved surface (a part of the shape of a substantially spherical surface) projecting forward, compared with the case where it is flat. In addition to high strength and rigidity, even if it is strongly struck, the impact can be distributed over the entire button lens 411, making it difficult to break.

  Further, in the second effect operation unit 400A, since the button lens 411, the frame side lens 417, and the frame top lens 418 are made of transparent members, the first button decorative portion formed on the back side thereof Decorative decorations such as 411a and second button decoration portion 411b can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) (see FIG. 63). In addition, since the plate thickness is changed and light is complicatedly refracted at the portion where the decoration of the unevenness is formed, it is difficult to visually recognize the rear side through the portion where the decoration of the unevenness is formed .

  Since the second effect operation unit 400A includes the first button decoration portion 411a extending from the inner periphery of the button frame 412 to the center side of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410, a plurality of the first button decoration portions 411a are provided. It is possible to make it difficult to see the rear at the outer peripheral portion of the portion that is the inside of the button lens 411 by the uneven decoration combined with the triangle. Behind the portion where the first button decoration portion 411a is formed (backward in the direction of the central axis CL), the inner peripheral surface of the body portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the door frame side second effect display device A gap between the outer periphery of the screen unit 470 of 460A is located, but the first button decoration portion 411a located in front of the gap from the front side (player side) to the outside or rear side of the screen unit 470 Can be obscured. Thereby, even if the operation button 410 capable of being pressed is provided with the door frame side second effect display device 460A, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the operation button 410 from deteriorating. It is possible to prevent discomfort and to arrange the door frame side second effect display device 460A in the transparent operation button 410 without any problem, and to improve the appearance of the operation button 410.

  More specifically, the second effect operation unit 400A includes the first button decoration part 411a, the second button decoration part 411b, and the button frame 412 of the button lens 411 in the operation button 410, and the second effect display unit 460A. The second base unit 450, the upper shaft member 473, the lower shaft member 474, and the like located on the rear side (back side) outside the outer periphery of the main screen 471, the sub screen 472, etc. It is formed so that it cannot be seen. Specifically, in the first position with the main screen 471 of the screen unit 470 facing forward, the top and bottom outside of the main screen 471, the left outside of the peripheral decorative portion 472a of the sub screen 472, and the right of the peripheral decorative member 478 The outer part (in FIG. 76, the part of the cross hatch surrounded by an alternate long and short dash line) is made invisible from the player side.

  On the other hand, in the second position in which the sub screen 472 of the screen unit 470 is directed forward, the portion outside the annular peripheral decoration 472 a of the sub screen 472 (the portion of the cross hatch surrounded by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. ) Is hidden from the player side. As described above, since the operation button 410 includes the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412, and the like, it is difficult to see the outside or the back side of the main screen 471 or the sub screen 472. It is possible to hide, and the appearance of the operation button 410 and by extension, the second performance operation unit 400A as a whole can be improved.

  In the first position where the main screen 471 is facing forward, the first button decoration part 411a, the second button decoration part 411b of the button lens 411, the button frame 412 and the like, the screen part 472b of the sub-screen 472. The sub screen decoration member 476 and the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474 are less visible (see FIG. 76). This makes it difficult for the player to notice the presence of the sub-screen 472, the main screen 471 being rotatable, etc., so that when the screen unit 470 is rotated to switch from the main screen 471 to the sub-screen 472, A movement beyond the player's expectation in the button 410 can be made to have a strong impact on the player, and the player can be entertained to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, in the second position where the sub screen 472 faces forward, the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft are formed by the first button decoration 411a, the second button decoration 411b, the button frame 412, etc. of the button lens 411. The member 474 is obscured (see FIG. 77). This makes it difficult for the player to notice that the sub screen 472 (the sub screen decoration member 476) can be rotated, thereby increasing the impact when the sub screen 472 (the screen unit 470) is rotated, The player can be entertained.

  Further, the second effect operation unit 400A has a center side from the inner periphery of the button frame 412 in the button lens 411 that can visually recognize the door frame side second effect display device 460A disposed on the rear side of the operation button 410. The door frame side second effect display that is provided with a polyhedral first button decoration portion 411a that is a combination of a plurality of triangular surfaces within a predetermined width range and that is disposed on the inner rear side of the operation button 410. The apparatus 460A is provided with a peripheral decoration portion 472a of a sub screen 472 in which a plurality of square weights are arranged, and a peripheral decoration member 478. As a result, the triangle decoration (first button decoration part 411a) arranged on the front side and the square decoration arranged on the rear side (periphery decoration part 472a and peripheral decoration member 478) overlap so as to intersect. As a result, the player can show a complicated geometric pattern to the player, improve the appearance, and suppress a decrease in the interest of the player.

  Further, as described above, since the first button decoration 411a mainly composed of a triangle, and the peripheral decoration 472a mainly consisting of a square and the peripheral decoration member 478 are separated in the front-rear direction, the eyes of the player When the position moves, the degree of overlapping of them changes, so that the geometric pattern that is seen overlapping changes, and it is possible for the player to show the decoration with motion, and the player to make the decoration with a three-dimensional feeling with depth. Can be shown to the player and entertain the player.

  Further, in the door frame side second effect display device 460A disposed on the inner rear side of the operation button 410, the screen unit 470 is rotated by driving the switching drive motor 492 so that the main screen 471 is directed forward, or the sub screen. 472 can be directed forward, and the decoration consisting of a plurality of squares can be changed. More specifically, in the state where the main screen 471 is directed forward, as shown in FIG. 74 (a), the peripheral decorative portion 472a and the peripheral decorative member 478 are separated from each other in the horizontal direction and extend vertically. A geometric pattern decoration in which the decoration composed of a plurality of square pyramids arranged in a row vertically intersects the decoration composed of a plurality of triangles arranged in a ring shape of the first button decoration portion 411a of the button lens 411. It can be shown to the player. On the other hand, in the state where the sub-screen 472 is directed forward, as shown in FIG. 74 (b), the peripheral decoration part 472a is in an annularly extending state, and the decoration is composed of a plurality of square weights arranged in an annular shape. However, it is possible to show the player the decoration of the geometric pattern that overlaps the decoration made of a plurality of triangles arranged in a ring shape of the first button decoration portion 411a in the button lens 411. Accordingly, by rotating the screen unit 470, the decoration (physical decoration) of the operation button 410 can be changed. Therefore, the player's interest can be attracted to the operation button 410 by the decoration change, The change can cause the player to suggest the arrival of a chance, etc., and the player can be entertained to prevent a decrease in interest.

  Further, the second effect operation unit 400A has a screen (a main screen 471 and a sub screen 472) that can be switched on the door frame side second effect display device 460A provided in the operation button 410. Since the unit 470 and the projector 500 that projects and displays the effect image on the screen unit 470 are provided, an effect image completely different from the display of the effect image by the liquid crystal display device can be displayed, which has a strong impact on the player. You can entertain and entertain. More specifically, the screen unit 470 includes a semi-cylindrical main screen 471 and a sub-screen 472 having a disc-shaped relief-shaped sub-screen decoration member 476 in the center, and the center of the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474. A rotation angle of 90 degrees around the axis is provided in the circumferential direction.

  Then, in the first position where the main screen 471 of the screen unit 470 is directed forward in the door frame side second effect display device 460A, the semi-cylindrical central axis is positioned to extend in the left-right direction, When viewed from the front, it looks like a rectangle (rectangle) extending vertically (see FIG. 74 (a)). When the effect image is irradiated forward from the projector 500 disposed behind the main screen 471, the effect image is projected on the rear surface of the main screen 471 (see FIG. 75A), and is translucent milky white. The effect image projected from the front side can be visually recognized through the main screen 471 of FIG. Since the main screen 471 is formed in a semi-cylindrical shape with a smooth surface, the effect image is also curved in a semi-cylindrical shape on the display screen. Thus, while the display screen of the general liquid crystal display device is flat, the display screen of the main screen 471 is curved in a semi-cylindrical shape, so that the conventional display screen appears to the player And the player can be surprised, the player can be made to pay attention to the main screen 471, and the effect image projected and displayed on the main screen 471 can be entertained. be able to.

  On the other hand, in the second position where the sub screen 472 of the screen unit 470 is directed forward, the disk-like central axis substantially coincides with the central axis of the operation button 410, and the circular operation button 410 A sub-screen decoration member 476 that imitates a skull appears in the center (see FIG. 74 (b)). In this state, when the effect image is irradiated forward from the projector 500 disposed behind, the effect image is projected on the rear surface of the sub screen 472. By the way, since a flat and opaque subscreen decoration substrate 477 is attached to the back side of the subscreen 472, the effect image (light) emitted from the projector 500 at the portion of the subscreen decoration substrate 477 And the shadow of the subscreen decorative substrate 477 is projected on the central part of the rear surface of the subscreen 472 (see FIG. 75 (b)). Therefore, in the sub screen 472, the effect image from the projector 500 is projected and displayed on the outer peripheral portion excluding the central portion on which the shadow of the sub screen decorative substrate 477 is projected. At this time, when the LED 477a mounted on the front surface of the sub screen decoration substrate 477 is made to emit light, the central portion of the sub screen 472 can be made to emit light by the light, and the sub provided in the center of the sub screen 472 The screen decoration member 476 can be decorated with light emission. In addition, by making the LED 477a of the sub screen decoration substrate 477 emit light, the shadow of the sub screen decoration substrate 477 projected on the rear surface of the sub screen 472 can be obscured by the light from the projector 500. The entire side can be brightly decorated.

  The door frame side second effect display device 460A emits the LED 477a of the sub screen decoration substrate 477 with the sub screen 472 of the screen unit 470 directed forward, and the effect image (moving image) forward from the projector 500. When illuminated, the effect image is displayed on the portion of the sub screen 472 where the shadow of the sub screen decoration substrate 477 is not projected, that is, the portion outside the sub screen decoration member 476 consisting of the decoration imitating a skull The sub screen decoration member 476 which becomes the inner side of the light emitting decoration is emitted by the LED 477 a of the sub screen decoration substrate 477. In this state, the outside of the light emission decoration of the fixed sub screen decoration member 476 is decorated by the effect image (moving image), and a decoration effect which is completely different from the light emission decoration of the decoration member in the conventional pachinko machine While being able to show to a player and giving a strong impact to a player, a player can be made to pay attention to the subscreen 472 strongly. Further, in this state, the light of the LED 477a is brighter (at high brightness) than the brightness of the effect image inside the effect image, and thus a partially high-intensity effect image which can not be achieved by the conventional liquid crystal display device Can be displayed, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted and, at the same time, it is possible to display an effect image that makes the player more entertaining.

  Thus, the second effect operation unit 400A includes the first button decorative portion 411a of the operation button 410 and the decoration (the peripheral decorative portion 472a and the peripheral decorative member 478) of the screen unit 470 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A. Since the player can show the player a decoration with a three-dimensional effect by the movement, the player's interest can be strongly attracted and the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal can be obtained.

  Further, the second effect operation unit 400A can irradiate light such as an effect image to the front of the sub-screen decorative board 477 having the LED 477a mounted on the front surface behind the operation button 410 (inside the button frame 412). The door frame side second effect display device 460A having the projector 500 is provided, and the inside of the operation button 410 can be favorably decorated by the door frame side second effect display device 460A.

  In addition, the operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 in the decorative substrate unit 420 is located behind the second button decorative portion 411b facing the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 located near the outer periphery of the second effect operation unit 400A and the operation button 410. The first LED 422a and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outer decoration board 423 are arranged, and the six second button decoration portions 411b of the operation button 410 are illuminated and decorated by causing the first LEDs 422a and 423a to emit light. be able to. As shown in FIG. 68, the first LED 422a of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outer decorative board 423 include a cylindrical main body 413a in the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and a frame unit. 415 is located between the cylindrical inner cylinder portion 416d of the frame main body 416, and the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a does not leak to the inside of the main body portion 413a or the outer side of the inner cylinder portion 416d. Only the second button decoration portion 411b of the button 410 can be appropriately decorated for light emission.

  Furthermore, the second effect operation unit 400A is located behind the frame side lens 417 facing from the six outer peripheral openings 416b of the frame main body 416 in the frame unit 415, the second LED 422b of the operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 and the operation button right outside The second LED 423b of the decorative substrate 423 is disposed, and the frame side lens 417 can be illuminated and decorated by causing the second LEDs 422b and 423b to emit light. The second LED 422b of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the second LED 423b of the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are disposed between the cylindrical inner cylinder 416d of the frame main body 416 of the frame unit 415 and the outer periphery of the frame main body 416. The light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b does not leak to the inside of the inner cylindrical portion 416d or the outside of the frame main body 416, and only the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 can be appropriately decorated to emit light. .

  In the second effect operation unit 400A, the frame top lens decorative substrate 482 of the upper bearing member 480 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A is disposed behind the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415. By emitting a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the top lens decorative substrate 482, the frame top lens 418 can be favorably decorated with light emission.

  Further, the second effect operation unit 400A has display screens different in form from each other by rotating the screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A disposed behind the inside of the operation button 410. An effect image can be displayed by switching to the main screen 471 or the sub screen 472, and an effect that cannot be achieved by a conventional pachinko machine in which the shape of the display screen changes (changes) can be presented to the player. Can give the player a strong impact and enjoy it.

[3-5. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 530 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 78 to 81. Fig. 78 (a) is a front view of the door frame left side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the front, and (c) is a rear view of the door frame left side unit It is the perspective view seen from. FIG. 79 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 80 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the rear. 81 is a cross-sectional view taken along line LL in FIG. The door frame left side unit 530 covers the front side of the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 161 and the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 162 (door frame left side decorative substrate 160) above the plate unit 320. It is attached to the front left portion on the left side of the through hole 111 at 100. The door frame left side unit 530 is for decorating the left side of the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 in a front view.

  The door frame left side unit 530 includes a band plate-like left unit base 531 extending vertically and attached to the front side of the through-hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100, and a left unit base 531 A transparent strip-shaped left unit diffusing lens member 532 attached to the front surface and a translucent material disposed in front of the left unit diffusing lens member 532 and having a polyhedral decoration at the front end. A left unit decorative lens member (not shown) and a left unit decorative lens member mounted on the front upper part of the left unit base 531 from the front side of the left unit decorative lens member, projecting forward in a cylindrical frame shape and extending vertically The decorative base 534 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the left unit base 531 from the front side of the left unit decorative lens member. The left unit lower decorative base 535 that protrudes forward in a frame shape shorter than the decorative base 534 and the front end side of the left unit decorative lens member from the front side of the left unit upper decorative base 534 and the left unit lower decorative base 535 are covered. A transparent left unit decorative cover 536 mounted on the front side of the left unit base 531 and a plurality of decorative members 537 mounted on the front side of the left unit decorative cover 536.

  The left unit base 531 of the door frame left side unit 530 is formed in a shallow box shape whose rear side is opened, and has a plurality of openings 531 a penetrating in the front and rear directions on the front surface. The plurality of openings 531a have circular holes and rectangular holes extending vertically as shown. The left unit base 531 includes the LEDs 161a and 162a mounted on the front of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 (the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 161 and the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 162) from the plurality of openings 531a. It is attached to the front left side of the door frame base 110 so as to face the front. Each of the openings 531a of the left unit base 531 is formed such that the respective LEDs 161a and 162a of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 are positioned substantially at the center in the vertical direction when assembled to the door frame 3. The left unit base 531 is formed of an opaque member.

  The left unit diffusion lens member 532 is formed of a transparent member, and is divided into an upper diffusion lens member 532A and a lower diffusion lens member 532B. The left unit diffusion lens member 532 has a square lens 532a in a front view, which corresponds to the circular opening 531a in the left unit base 531, and a square in a front view, which corresponds to a square opening 531a. And a lens unit 532b. In the state where the door frame left side unit 530 is assembled to the door frame 3, the respective LEDs 161a and 162a of the door frame left side decoration substrate 160 are positioned immediately after the centers of the circular lens portion 532a and the square lens portion 532b. It is formed.

  The circular lens portion 532a of the left unit diffusion lens member 532 is formed in a convex lens shape with smooth front and rear surfaces. The light from the LEDs 161a and 162a disposed at the rear can be emitted forward in a point-like manner by the circular lens portion 532a. The circular decorative portion of the left unit decorative lens member can be illuminated and decorated by the light irradiated forward from the circular lens portion 532a.

  The rectangular lens portion 532b of the left unit diffusing lens member 532 includes a central diffusing reflection portion 532c that is recessed backward in a conical shape at the center of the front surface, and a front diffusing lens portion 532d that is formed outside the central diffusing reflection portion 532c on the front surface. An input lens portion 532e that bulges backward in a curved surface shape at the center of the rear surface (immediately after the central diffuse reflection portion 532c), and forward as the distance from the input lens portion 532e increases as a whole outside the input lens portion 532e on the rear surface. And a front reflector 532 f inclined to move.

  The front diffusing lens portion 532d of the rectangular lens portion 532b is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves that are divided in the circumferential direction by lines extending radially around the central diffusive reflecting portion 532c. More specifically, the front diffusing lens portion 532d has a cross-sectional shape when cut along the radial direction, and the groove portion is recessed backward in an arc shape, and the mountain portion between the grooves is forward. It bulges in an arc shape, and the front surface is formed in a smooth wave shape. The front diffusing lens portion 532d is formed so that the groove portions and the mountain portions are alternately positioned in the circumferential direction with the radially extending lines divided in the circumferential direction as a boundary.

  The front reflection portion 532f of the rectangular lens portion 532b is formed of a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves divided in the circumferential direction by a line extending radially around the input lens portion 532e. The plurality of grooves are recessed in a V shape from the rear to the front, and the deepest part is formed in an arc shape. The front reflection portion 532 f is formed in a sawtooth shape in which a cross-sectional shape when cut along the radial direction is formed into a triangular shape in which a mountain portion between the grooves is pointed rearwardly. The front reflecting portion 532f is formed such that the groove and the mountain portion move forward as the distance from the center increases. Further, the front reflecting portion 532f is formed so that the groove portions and the mountain portions are alternately positioned in the circumferential direction, with the radially extending lines divided in the circumferential direction as a boundary. The radially extending lines divided in the circumferential direction coincide with the radially extending dividing lines in the front diffusion lens portion 532d.

  When the rectangular lens portion 532b is assembled to the door frame 3, the LEDs 161a and 162a corresponding to the door frame left side decorative board 160 are positioned immediately after the input lens portion 532e.

  In the rectangular lens unit 532b, light emitted forward from the LEDs 161a and 162a is input from the input lens unit 532e into the rectangular lens unit 532b. Since the input lens portion 532e bulges back in a curved surface (convex lens shape), the light spreading forward from the LEDs 161a and 162a is refracted so as to travel in parallel forward, and the input light Substantially all can be directed to the conical central diffuse reflector 532c. The light guided to the central diffuse reflection portion 532c is parallel to the front surface of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 in a direction perpendicular to the front and rear axes by the inclined conical surface of the central diffuse reflection portion 532c. In the square lens portion 532b, and travels from the center side to the outer side along the front surface. The light reflected by the central diffuse reflection part 532c travels from the center side to the outside (in the direction away from the center line of the central diffuse reflection part 532c) over the entire thickness of the rectangular lens part 532b in the front-rear direction.

  When the light reflected from the center side toward the outside substantially parallel to the front surface of the door frame left side decorative board 160 reaches the saw-like front reflection part 532f, the front side of the front reflection part 532f moves forward. Reflect to the side. At this time, since the front reflection portion 532f is inclined so that the rear surface moves forward as the rear surface moves away from the central diffuse reflection portion 532c, the thickness in the front-rear direction of the square lens portion 532b becomes thinner as it goes away from the center (See Figure 81). As a result, light reflected toward the outside over the entire thickness in the front-rear direction of the square lens portion 532b in the central diffuse reflection portion 532c is sequentially moved forward by the front reflection portion 532f as it goes from the center side to the outside. Can be reflected.

  The light reflected forward by the front reflecting portion 532f is irradiated forward from the rectangular lens portion 532b through the front diffusion lens portion 532d. At this time, since the front surface diffusing lens portion 532 d is formed to have a wave-like cross section, it can diffuse light reflected forward by the front reflecting portion 532 f in various directions, and the prismatic lens portion 532 b It is possible to irradiate the front (the rear surface of the left unit decorative lens member) with light substantially uniformly from the front surface.

  In the front lens unit 532d and the front reflection unit 532f, the rectangular lens unit 532b is formed by dividing a plurality of concentric circular grooves by a plurality of radially extending lines, and then a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves with the dividing lines as a boundary. Since the concentric arc-shaped grooves are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction by shifting in the radial direction, the light irradiated forward from the front surface of the square lens portion 532b has the density of the concentric striped pattern. It is possible to avoid becoming light and to irradiate light with more uniform light and shade forward. As a result, the multi-sided decorative part in front of the rectangular lens part 532b in the left unit decorative lens member can be illuminated and decorated substantially uniformly.

  A left unit decorative lens member (not shown) is formed along the front surface of the left unit decorative cover 536. The left unit decorative lens member is located in front of the circular decorative portion formed in the front position of the circular lens portion 532 a of the left unit diffusion lens member 532 and the front of the square lens portion 532 b of the left unit diffusion lens member 532 And a multifaceted decorative part formed on the part. The circular decorative portion is formed in a shape including a plurality of triangular ribs in the circumferential direction on the outer periphery of a cylindrical portion whose front surface is short and extends forward and backward. In the multifaceted decorative part, a plurality of quadrangular pyramidal parts are arranged in the vertical direction on the front of a rectangular solid extending in the vertical direction, and a plurality of triangular polyhedrons are arranged in the vertical direction on the left and right sides of the rectangular solid. It is formed in the same shape. The circular decorative portion and the multi-sided decorative portion are formed in the same shape as the circular decorative portion 561 a and the multi-sided decorative portion 561 b of the right unit decorative lens member 561 in the door frame right side unit 550.

  The left unit decorative lens member can be viewed from the front side (player side) through the transparent left unit decorative cover 536. In the left unit decorative lens member, the multi-faced decorative portion is directed forward from the square lens portion 532 b of the left unit diffusion lens member 532 by the light irradiated forward from the circular lens portion 532 a of the left unit diffusion lens member 532. Each of the lights is decorated by light emitted.

  The left unit upper decoration base 534 is a rectangular shape extending in the vertical direction in a front view, and is formed in a square tube shape extending in the front and rear direction. In the left unit upper decoration base 534, a portion constituting the lower surface in the outer periphery is inclined so as to protrude downward as going from the front end side to the rear end side, and the lower portion of the portion penetrates forward and backward. The left unit upper decoration base 534 is formed of a light-impermeable member.

  The left unit lower decorative base 535 is formed in a U-shape which is opened upward in a front view. The left unit lower decoration base 535 is inclined from the substantially vertical center at the front end to the rear end so that the upper side moves upward as it goes upward. The left unit lower decoration base 535 is formed of a light-impermeable member.

  The left unit decorative cover 536 extends up and down over the entire height of the door frame left side unit 530. The left unit decorative cover 536 is bent so that the middle portion in the vertical direction is recessed rearward, and the lower portion of the left unit upper decorative base 534 is bent backward along the front end of the left unit upper decorative base 534; A V-shaped portion whose upper part is bent backward along the front end of the unit lower decorative base 535 and a lower end of the upper V-shaped portion and an upper end of the lower V-shaped portion are connected And a linear portion.

  The left unit decoration cover 536 has upper and lower ends attached to the front surface of the left unit upper decoration base 534 and the front surface of the left unit lower decoration base 535, respectively. The left unit decorative cover 536 is formed of a transparent member, and the left unit decorative lens member disposed on the rear side can be viewed from the front side.

  The decoration member 537 extends vertically short and is attached to the front of the left unit decorative cover 536 at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. The decoration member 537 is formed of an opaque member.

[3-6. Door frame right side unit]
The door frame right side unit 550 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 82A is a front view of the door frame right side unit in the door frame, FIG. 82B is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 82C is the rear view of the door frame right side unit. It is the perspective view seen from. FIG. 83 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 84 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 85 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line M-M in FIG. FIG. 86 (a) is a cross-sectional view cut along the line NN in FIG. 82 (a), and FIG. 86 (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along the line O-O in FIG. 82 (a). The door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the right side of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 320.

  The door frame right side unit 550 includes a box-shaped right unit base 551 extending vertically and attached to the right side of the through-hole 111 in front of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100, and a front surface of the right unit base 551. The door frame right side decorative board 552 is attached to the front side of the right side of the right side of the right unit base 551 on the front side of the door frame right side decorative board 552 and extends in the vertical and front-rear directions. A transparent flat plate-shaped right unit left diffusing lens member 553, a sheet-like right unit left decorative member 554 attached to the left side surface of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553, and a right unit left decorative member A transparent flat plate-like right unit left cover attached to the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 so as to cover the left side of 554. Includes a over 555, the.

  Further, the door frame right side unit 550 includes a right diffuser and a right unit left diffusing lens from the front center of the front of the right unit base 551 on the front side of the door frame right side decorative board 552 and on the right side of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553. A transparent flat light unit right diffusion lens member 556 attached to the member 553 and extending in the vertical and longitudinal directions and a right unit side of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 are decorated and decorated A sheet-shaped right unit right decoration member 557, and a transparent flat plate right unit right cover and 558 attached to the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 so as to cover the right side of the right unit right decoration member 557; Yes.

  Furthermore, the door frame right side unit 550 is disposed between the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusing lens member 556, and extends in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction in which the front and right sides are opened. A box-shaped light-impermeable right unit left light-shielding member 559 and a light-opaque light attached to the left side of the right unit right light-diffusing lens member 556 so as to close the open right side of the right unit left light-shielding member 559. And a right unit right light shielding member 560 in the form of a flat plate.

  The door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the front ends of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusing lens member 556, and has a translucent right having a polyhedral decoration at the front end. The unit decorative lens member 561 is attached to the front surface of the right unit base 551 so as to cover the left and right sides of the right unit decorative lens member 561 and the front end sides of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. A frame-shaped right unit decoration base 562 penetrating front and rear, a transparent right unit cover 563 attached to the front side of the right unit decoration base 562 so as to close a front end opening of the right unit decoration base 562, and a right unit cover And a plurality of decorative members 564 mounted on the front side of 563. Although illustration is omitted, the door frame right side unit 550 is attached so as to vertically penetrate the right unit base 551, and the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100 and the door frame of the door frame top unit 570. A connection cable for connecting the top unit relay substrate 589 is provided.

  The right unit base 551 of the door frame right side unit 550 is a rectangular shape which is elongated in the vertical direction in a front view, extends in a short and short rectangular tube shape, and is formed in a box shape closed near the center in the longitudinal direction. Has been. The right unit base 551 is formed of an opaque member.

  The door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is formed in the shape of a vertically extending band plate. The door frame right side decorative board 552 is mounted on the left side of the front left-right center of the plurality of left LEDs 552a, on the front side of the right LED 552b mounted on the right side of the left-right center, and mounted on the front side of the left-right center. And a plurality of middle LEDs 552c. The left LED 552 a of the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 is for emitting and decorating the right unit left decoration member 554 via the right unit left diffusion lens member 553. The right LED 552 b is for emitting and decorating the right unit right decoration member 557 through the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The middle LED 552 c is for emitting and decorating the right unit decorative lens member 561.

  Both front and rear sides of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 are formed in white. The door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is divided up and down into an upper door frame right side upper decorative substrate 552A and a lower door frame right side lower decorative substrate 552B. Although illustration is omitted, the door frame right side lower decorative board 552B is connected to the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100, and the door frame right side upper decorative board 552A is the door frame right side lower decorative board 552B. It is connected to the.

  The right unit left diffusing lens member 553 includes a flat plate-like main body portion 553a extending in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction, a rear wall portion 553b protruding in a flat plate shape from the rear side of the main body portion 553a to the right in front view, and A right unit left decorative member on the left side of the main body 553a when viewed from the front side of the main body 553a, and a plurality of cutouts 553c that are cut in a square shape from the right end of the rear wall 553b to the left when viewed from the front. A receiving recess 553d that is shallowly recessed to receive 554, a plurality of input lens portions 553e that protrude rearward from the rear end surface of the main body portion 553a, and a right side surface in front view of the main body portion 553a. And a plurality of side reflectors 553f arranged in the vertical direction so that the input lens portion 553e is at the center in the vertical direction.

  The main body portion 553a of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 has a shape in a side view in which the upper corner of the front end of the quadrangle that extends vertically is obliquely cut out in a C-chamfered shape and the lower side is directed upward as it goes forward It is formed in the shape which inclines so that it may move to. Further, as shown in FIG. 86, the whole of the main body portion 553a moves with respect to the vertical line on the front surface of the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 so as to move to the right in front view from the rear end side. Slightly inclined. The front end of the main body portion 553a protrudes forward more than the front end of the door frame left side unit 530 in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3.

  The rear wall portion 553b is assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, and the right end thereof extends to the center of the right unit base 551 in the left-right direction. The left end of the rear wall 556b of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 abuts on the right end of the rear wall 553b.

  A plurality of notches 553c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and a part thereof corresponds to the LED 552c in the door frame right side decorative board 552. When assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 faces forward from the plurality of cutouts 553c, and the plurality of middle LEDs 552 c favorably emit the right unit decoration lens member 561 Can be decorated.

  The bottom of the accommodation recess 553 d is formed to be a flat surface, and the shape of the outer periphery substantially matches the outer shape of the right unit left decorative member 554. Thereby, the right unit left decorative member 554 can be accommodated.

  The plurality of input lens portions 553e protrude rearward from the rear end surface of the main body portion 553a in the vertical direction at a predetermined interval. More specifically, the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 is formed substantially at the center in the vertical direction when the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 is divided into six equal parts in the vertical direction. Although not shown in detail, the input lens portion 553e is recessed toward the front so as to be curved in a spherical shape from a rectangular parallelepiped portion in which a vertically extending quadrangle protrudes rearward and the rear surface of the rectangular parallelepiped portion. There is a site. The input lens portions 553 e are respectively located immediately in front of the left LED 552 a of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 in a state assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. Thereby, the light from the left LED 552a can be input so as to be diffused widely in the main body 553a.

  A plurality of (six) side surface reflection portions 553 f are provided in the vertical direction. Each side surface reflection portion 553f is formed of a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves divided in the circumferential direction by radially extending lines centering on the input lens portion 553e. In each of the plurality of concentric circular arc grooves, the surface closer to the input lens portion 553e is inclined with respect to the surface of the main body portion 553a, and the surface farther from the input lens portion 553e is the main body portion It extends perpendicularly to the plane of the surface 553a, and the deepest portion is formed in an arc shape. The side surface reflection portion 553f is formed in a triangular shape whose cross-sectional shape is sharp when cut in the radial direction centering on the input lens portion 553e, with the mountain portion between the grooves facing the center side. The whole is formed in a saw shape. Further, the side surface reflection portion 553f is formed so that the groove portion and the mountain portion are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction, with the radial lines dividing the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves in the circumferential direction as boundaries. ing.

  In the right unit left diffusion lens member 553, light emitted forward from the left LED 552 a of the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 enters the main portion 553 a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 from the rear surface of the input lens portion 553 e. Incident. Since the rear end of the input lens portion 553e is curved in a curved shape toward the front, the light from the left LED 552a is refracted so as to be spread by the curved surface, and in the main portion 553a, each input lens portion 553e Will diffuse radially forward from the center.

  The main body portion 553a is slightly inclined with respect to a line extending perpendicularly from the front surface of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 so that the whole moves toward the right in front view as it goes forward, the door frame The light emitted from the left LED 552a mounted on the front surface of the right side decorative substrate 552 and incident from the input lens portion 553e into the main portion 553a strikes the flat left surface in the main portion 553a. However, direct light from the left LED 552a is not radiated to the outside from the left surface of the main portion 553a due to the incident angle with respect to the left surface of the main portion 553a, but is reflected to the side surface reflecting portion 553f on the inner surface of the left surface. It becomes.

  Then, the light incident forward from the input lens portion 553e into the main body portion 553a is reflected leftward when viewed from the front by hitting the saw-like side surface reflection portion 553f, and outward from the left surface of the main body portion 553a. It will be irradiated. Light is also emitted outward (rightward in front view) from the right surface (side surface reflection portion 553f) of the main body 553a, but the right unit left light-shielding member 559 disposed on the right side of the main body 553a is white. Since it is a member, the left surface of the right unit left light shielding member 559 is brightly illuminated, and the indirect light reflected by the right unit left light shielding member 559 is irradiated to the left side through the main body 553a. . Therefore, from the left surface of the main body portion 553a, the light reflected leftward by the side surface reflection portion 553f in the main body portion 553a and the left surface of the right unit left light-shielding member 559 are irradiated to the right from the side surface reflection portion 553f. Since the light that has been reflected and passed through the main body portion 553a is irradiated leftward, the right unit left decorative member 554 attached to the left side of the main body portion 553a can be decorated with light emission with good brightness. it can.

  Further, in the side surface reflection portion 553f, the concentric circular grooves are divided into a plurality of radially extending grooves, and then the concentric circular arc grooves are shifted in the radial direction with the dividing line as a boundary. Are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction, so that light irradiated to the outside (left) from the left surface of the main body portion 553a is prevented from becoming light having concentric stripes and shading. It is possible to irradiate light with more uniform light to the left. Thus, the right unit left decoration member 554 housed in the housing recess 553 d on the left surface of the main body portion 553 a can emit and decorate substantially uniformly.

  In addition, since the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 is formed of a transparent member, the side surface reflection formed on the opposite side from the left side in the front view of the main body portion 553a (the side on which the accommodation recess 553d is formed) A pattern consisting of a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves in the portion 553f and radially extending lines can be visually recognized. Therefore, when a transparent portion is formed in the right unit left decorative member 554, the pattern of the side reflection portion 553f of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 can be visually recognized through the transparent portion. This part can be decorated by the side reflection part 553f.

  The right unit left decoration member 554 is formed in a thin sheet shape, and the decoration such as the maker logo of the pachinko machine 1 or the logo along the concept of the presentation presented to the player on the game board 5 is translucent. It is given to have. The right unit left cover 555 protects the outer surface of the right unit left decoration member 554 when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550.

  The right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is formed substantially symmetrically with the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and has the same configuration. More specifically, the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 has a flat main body portion 556a extending in the vertical and longitudinal directions, and a rear wall short in a plan view left from the rear side of the main body portion 556a. A portion 556b and a plurality of notches 556c which are cut out in a square shape from the left end side in the front view of the rear wall portion 556b to the right and are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction A front view of the main body portion 556a, an accommodation concave portion 556d recessed so as to be able to accommodate the unit right decorative member 557, an input lens portion 556e projecting backward from the rear end surface of the main body portion 556a A plurality of side surface reflecting portions 556f are disposed in the vertical direction so that each input lens portion 556e is at the center in the vertical direction on the left side.

  The main portion 556a of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 has a shape in a side view, with the upper corner of the front end side of the rectangular shape extending up and down being beveled in a C-chamfered shape and the lower side going upward as it goes forward The outer shape of the main unit 553a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 is substantially the same. 86. As shown in FIG. 86, the main body 556a is entirely moved with respect to the vertical line on the front surface of the door frame right side decorative board 552 so as to move leftward as viewed from the rear end side toward the front. Slightly inclined. The front end of the main body 556a projects forward more largely than the front end of the door frame left side unit 530 in a state assembled to the door frame 3.

  The rear wall 556b is assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, and the left end of the rear wall 556b extends to the center of the right unit base 551 in the left-right direction. The right end of the rear wall portion 553b of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 contacts the left end of the rear wall portion 556b.

  The plurality of cutouts 556c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and a part thereof corresponds to the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552. The plurality of cutouts 556 c are formed at positions corresponding to the plurality of cutouts 553 c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553. Therefore, in the state assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, a square opening which is penetrated back and forth by the notch 553c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the notch 556c of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 The middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 faces forward from the opening, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 can be favorably decorated with light emission by the plurality of middle LEDs 552c.

  The bottom surface of the accommodation recess 556 d is formed to be a flat surface, and the shape of the outer periphery substantially matches the outer shape of the right unit right decoration member 557. Thereby, the right unit right decoration member 557 can be accommodated.

  The plurality of input lens portions 556 e project rearward from the rear end surface of the main body portion 556 a at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. Specifically, they are formed substantially at the center in the vertical direction when the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is equally divided into six in the vertical direction. Although not shown in detail, the input lens portion 556e is recessed toward the front so as to be curved in a spherical shape from a rectangular parallelepiped portion in which a vertically extending quadrangle protrudes rearward and the rear surface of the rectangular parallelepiped portion. There is a site. These input lens portions 556 e are respectively located immediately in front of the right LED 552 b of the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 in a state assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. Thereby, the light from the right LED 552b can be input so as to be widely diffused in the main body portion 556a.

  A plurality (six) of side reflecting portions 556f are provided in the vertical direction. Each of the side surface reflecting portions 556f is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves that are divided in the circumferential direction by lines extending radially around the input lens portion 556e. In each of the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves, the surface closer to the input lens portion 556e is inclined with respect to the surface of the main portion 556a in each groove, and the surface remote from the input lens portion 556e is the main portion It extends perpendicularly to the surface of 556a, and the deepest part is formed in an arc shape. The side surface reflecting portion 556f is formed in a triangular shape whose cross-sectional shape is sharp when cut in the radial direction centering on the input lens portion 556e such that a mountain portion between the groove and the groove is directed to the center side. , The whole is formed in a saw shape. In addition, the side surface reflecting portion 556f is formed so that the groove portion and the mountain portion are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction, with radial lines dividing the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves in the circumferential direction. ing.

  In the right unit right diffusing lens member 556, the light irradiated forward from the right LED 552b of the door frame right side decorative board 552 enters the main body 556a of the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 from the rear surface of the input lens portion 556e. Incident. Since the rear end of the input lens portion 556e is recessed in a curved shape toward the front, it is refracted so that the light from the right LED 552b spreads by the curved surface, and each input lens portion 556e in the main body portion 556a. Will diffuse radially forward from the center.

  The main body portion 556a is slightly inclined with respect to a line extending vertically from the front surface of the door frame right side decorative board 552 so that the entire body portion 556a moves to the left as viewed from the front as it goes forward. The light irradiated from the right LED 552b mounted on the front surface of the right side decorative board 552 and incident on the main body 556a from the input lens portion 556e hits the flat right surface in the main body 556a. However, the direct light from the right LED 552b is not emitted from the left surface of the main body 556a to the outside because of the incident angle with respect to the right surface of the main body 556a, but is reflected to the side reflecting portion 556f side by the inner surface of the right surface. It becomes.

  Then, the light incident forward from the input lens portion 556e into the main body portion 556a is reflected rightward when viewed from the front by hitting the saw-like side surface reflection portion 556f, and outward from the right surface of the main body portion 556a. It will be irradiated. Light is also emitted outward (leftward in front view) from the right surface (side surface reflection portion 556f) of the main body 556a, but the right unit right light shielding member 560 disposed on the left side of the main body 556a is white. Therefore, the right surface of the right unit right light shielding member 560 is brightly illuminated, and the indirect light reflected by the right unit right light shielding member 560 is irradiated to the right side through the main body 556a. . Therefore, from the right surface of the main body portion 556a, the light reflected to the right by the side surface reflection portion 556f in the main body portion 556a and the right side of the right unit right light shielding member 560 are irradiated to the left from the side surface reflection portion 556f. Since the light that has been reflected and passed through the main body portion 556a is irradiated to the right, the right unit right decorative member 557 attached to the right side of the main body portion 556a can be illuminated and decorated with good brightness. it can.

  Further, in the side surface reflecting portion 556f, the concentric circular grooves are divided by the radially extending plural lines, and then the concentric circular arc grooves are shifted in the radial direction with the dividing line as a boundary to form concentric circular arc grooves. Are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction, so that light irradiated outward (rightward) from the right surface of the main body portion 556a is prevented from becoming light having concentric stripes and shading. Can be emitted to the right with more uniform light. Thereby, the right unit right decoration member 557 housed in the housing recess 556d on the right surface of the main body 556a can be illuminated and decorated substantially uniformly.

  In addition, since the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is formed of a transparent member, the side surface reflection formed on the opposite side from the right side in the front view of the main body portion 556a (the side on which the accommodation recess 556d is formed) A pattern composed of a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves of the part 556f and a radially extending line can be visually recognized. Therefore, when a transparent portion is formed in the right unit right decoration member 557, the pattern of the side reflection portion 556f of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 can be seen through the transparent portion, and the transparent in the right unit right decoration member 557 Parts can be decorated by the side reflectors 556f.

  The right unit right decoration member 557 is formed in a thin sheet shape, and the decoration such as the manufacturer logo of the pachinko machine 1 and the logo in accordance with the concept of presentation presented to the player on the game board 5 is translucent. Is applied to have. The right unit right cover 558 protects the outer surface of the right unit right decoration member 557 in the state assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. The right unit right decoration member 557 and the right unit right cover 558 are formed substantially symmetrically with the right unit left decoration member 554 and the right unit left cover 555. Further, the decorations provided to the right unit left decoration member 554 and the right unit right decoration member 557 may be the same decoration or different decorations.

  The right unit left light-shielding member 559 is formed in substantially the same shape as the side view of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 in side view. The right unit left light blocking member 559 is formed in a shallow box shape whose front and right sides are open. The right unit left light-shielding member 559 includes a flat plate-like main body portion 559a extending in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction, a rear wall portion 559b protruding in a flat plate shape from the rear side of the main body portion 559a to the right in front view, The wall portion 559b is cut out to the left from the right end side in front view in a square shape, and a plurality of cutout portions 559c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and the body portion 559a extends from the right surface to the right and is rearward. And a plurality of flat plate-like reinforcements 559 d extending from the wall 559 b to the front end of the main body 559 a.

  The main unit 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559 has a shape in a side view in which the upper corner on the front end side of the vertically extending rectangular is notched obliquely in a C-chamfered shape, and the lower side is upwardly directed toward the front It is formed in a shape inclined so as to move, and its outer shape is formed in substantially the same shape as the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the main body portions 553a and 556a of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556.

  The left end of the rear wall 559 b extends to the right more than the approximate center of the right unit base 551 in the left-right direction when assembled in the door frame right side unit 550. The left surface of the right unit right light shielding member 560 abuts on the right end of the rear wall portion 559b.

  The plurality of cutouts 559c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and a part thereof corresponds to the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552. The plurality of cutouts 559 c are formed at positions corresponding to the plurality of cutouts 553 c and 556 c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. Therefore, in the state assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 faces forward from the plurality of notches 559c, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 emits light well by the plurality of middle LEDs 552c. It can be decorated.

  The plurality of reinforcing portions 559d are provided as a pair of a pair of reinforcing portions 559d that are substantially the same height as the left and right widths and are spaced apart in the vertical direction, and are separated by a predetermined distance in the vertical direction. Each set of reinforcing portions 559 d is formed at a position behind the decorative member 564 attached to the right unit cover 563. The plurality of reinforcing portions 559d enhance the overall strength and rigidity of the door frame right side unit 550.

  The right unit right light shielding member 560 has a shape in a side view such that the upper corner on the front end side of the vertically extending square is notched like a C-chamfer and the lower side moves upward as it goes forward It is formed in an inclined shape, and is formed in substantially the same shape as the main body portion 559 a in the right unit left light shielding member 559. The right unit right light-shielding member 560 closes the right-side opening opened to the right of the right unit left light-shielding member 559 formed in a shallow box shape in a state assembled to the door frame right side unit 550.

  The right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are each formed of a white member. The right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are assembled to the door frame right side unit 550 as shown in FIG. 86, and the main unit 559a and the right unit right light shielding member 560 The left diffusion lens member 553 and the main body portions 553a and 556a of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 are disposed in proximity to each other. Thus, the main unit 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are separated in the left-right direction, and form a space extending in the vertical direction and the front-back direction with a predetermined width in the left-right direction. . The light emitted forward from the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 through the space formed between the main unit 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 is the right unit decoration The light is irradiated to the rear side of the lens member 561.

  In addition, the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are formed of non-light transmitting members, and are emitted forward from the left LED 552a, the middle LED 552c, and the right LED 552b in the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 respectively. Left light 552a, right LED 552b, and the right unit left decoration member 554, the right unit right decoration member 557, and the right unit decoration lens member 561, respectively. The light can be decorated only by the middle LED 552c.

  Furthermore, the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are arranged behind the respective divided spaces because the internal space is divided into four in the vertical direction by the three sets of reinforcing portions 559 d. The light can be prevented from interfering between the spaces by the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 which is located, and a portion located in front of each space of the right unit decoration lens member 561 can be , Each can be independently illuminated. That is, on the front end side of the door frame right side unit 550, it is possible to divide into plural (four) areas in the vertical direction and emit and decorate each of them independently.

  The right unit decorative lens member 561 is formed in a shape along the front end shape of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusing lens member 556. The right unit decorative lens member 561 includes a circular decorative portion 561a that is formed in a circular shape when viewed from the front, and a polyhedral decorative portion 561b that extends vertically and has a plurality of polyhedrons. The circular decorative portion 561a is formed in a shape in which a plurality of triangular ribs are provided in the circumferential direction on the outer periphery of a cylindrical portion whose front surface is short and extends shortly before and after. The polyhedral decorative portion 561b has a plurality of quadrangular pyramid-shaped portions arranged in the vertical direction on the front surface of the rectangular parallelepiped extending vertically, and a plurality of polyhedrons composed of a plurality of triangles on the left and right sides of the rectangular parallelepiped portion in the vertical direction. It is formed in the shape as provided.

  More specifically, the right unit decorative lens member 561 includes a plurality of circular decorative portions 561a and a multi-surface decorative portion 561b divided into four by three sets of reinforcing portions 559d in the right unit left light shielding member 559. In the three parts from the top in the part located in the front, one multi-face decoration part 561b is arranged on each of the upper and lower sides of the circular decoration part 561a arranged in the center in the vertical direction, and in the lowermost part, the multi-face decoration Only the portion 561 b is formed.

  The right unit decorative lens member 561 is attached to the front end of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusing lens member 556. The right unit decorative lens member 561 can be viewed from the front side (player side) through the transparent right unit cover 563. The right unit decorative lens member 561 is decorated with light emission by the LED 552c in the door frame right side decorative board 552 arranged on the rear side.

  The right unit decoration base 562 is formed in the shape of a cylindrical frame penetrating in the front-rear direction. The right unit decoration base 562 is formed in a shape along the shape of the front end and the upper end of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit decorative base 562 is formed so as to be able to cover both the left and right outer sides near the front end of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 and the left and right sides of the right unit decorative lens member 561. When assembled in the door frame right side unit 550, the front end of the right unit decorative lens member 561 slightly protrudes forward from the front end of the right unit decorative base 562. The right unit decorative base 562 is formed of an opaque member.

  The right unit cover 563 is formed to be able to close the front end opening of the right unit decorative base 562. The right unit cover 563 is formed of a transparent member, and can visually recognize the right unit decorative lens member 561 disposed on the rear side from the front side.

  The decorative member 564 extends short in the vertical direction, and is attached to the front surface of the right unit cover 563 at a predetermined interval in the vertical direction. The decoration member 564 is formed of an opaque member. The three decorative members 564 divide the right unit cover 563 (the right unit decorative lens member 561) into four parts in the vertical direction.

  The door frame right side unit 550, when assembled to the door frame 3, projects in a large plate shape forward than the door frame left side unit 530, and projects slightly forward from the front end of the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320. Yes. The door frame right side unit 550 includes a right unit left decorative member 554 and a right unit right decorative member 557 provided on the left and right sides of the protruding left side, and a right unit decorative lens member 561 provided on the front end, respectively. And can be decorated with light emission.

  Since the door frame right side unit 550 is plate-like and protrudes greatly forward, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in an island facility of the game hall, the door frame right side unit 550 is adjacent to the right side of the pachinko machine. An effect like a partition can be exhibited. As a result, a player who plays with the pachinko machine 1 can have an illusion that he / she is playing in a private room, and the game can be played in a relaxed atmosphere without hesitation of other players around. Can.

  In addition, since the door frame right side unit 550 largely protrudes forward, in the game hall where the pachinko machines 1 are installed side by side, even if it is not located in front of the pachinko machine 1, an island facility The pachinko machine 1 can be made visible in the game hall in which a large number of pachinko machines are arranged in a row. Therefore, when the right unit left decoration member 554 and the right unit right decoration member 557 on the left and right sides of the door frame right side unit 550 are lighted and decorated, the present from a distance even if not positioned near the front of the pachinko machine 1 The presence of the pachinko machine 1 can be notified, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made highly appealing to the player.

  Further, in the door frame right side unit 550, when a defect such as ball clogging or an error occurs in the pachinko machine 1, the right unit left decorative member 554, the right unit right decorative member 557, and the right unit decorative lens on both the left and right sides. By making the member 561 and the like illuminate in a unique manner, the attendant of the game hall can be immediately notified of the occurrence of the problem and recognized, and the problem can be quickly dealt with. Therefore, the interruption of the game by the player can be solved at an early stage, and the player can feel frustration and suppress the decrease in the interest for the game.

[3-7. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 570 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 87 to 90 and the like. 87 (a) is a front view of the door frame top unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit viewed from the front, and (c) is a view of the door frame top unit from the back. It is a perspective view. FIG. 88 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 89 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit as seen from the back. FIG. 90 is a cross-sectional view taken along line PP in FIG. The door frame top unit 570 is attached to the upper side of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 above the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550.

  The door frame top unit 570 is attached to the left and right sides of the center base 571 and the center base 571 attached to the center in the left-right direction above the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100. A pair of side bases 572 attached to the front surface of the door frame base 110, a pair of upper speakers 573 respectively attached to the front surfaces of the pair of side bases 572, and the center in the left-right direction project forward. A pair of openings 574a penetrating front and rear at a front position of the pair of upper speakers 573 in a box shape with the rear open, and from a position closer to the center in the left-right direction than the pair of openings 574a to the vicinity of the center A plurality of (three each on the left and right) slips extending in each direction and penetrating in the front-rear direction and spaced apart from each other. The unit main body 271 that has 574b and is attached to the front side of the central base 571 and the pair of side bases 572 and the front side of the pair of upper speakers 573, respectively, and closes the pair of openings 574a. And a speaker cover 575 made of punching metal attached to the rear side of the unit main body 271.

  Further, the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the front surface at the center in the left-right direction of the unit main body 271 and is attached to the rear side of the top middle decorative member 576 and the top middle decorative member 576. A door frame top middle decorative board 577 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front face thereof, and a plurality of slits 574b respectively attached to the front face of the unit main body 271, and the left and right ends of the top middle decorative member 576 being closed. A plurality of transparent flat plate-like light guide members 578 extending from the vicinity to the vicinity of both left and right ends of the unit main body 271 across the opening 574a, and a top middle decorative member 576 on the front surface of the unit main body 271. The top left decorative lens member 579 and the top left decorative lens member 579 that are respectively attached to the left and right sides and respectively cover the front surfaces of a plurality of (three) light guide members 578. The top right decorative lens member 580, the top left decorative lens member 579, and the top right decorative lens member 580 are respectively attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 from the front side thereof, and the openings 574a from both the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576. And a top middle left decorative member 581 and a top middle right decorative member 582 that extend to the vicinity of the center side end portion.

  Furthermore, the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the inside of both right and left side surfaces of the unit main body 271, and the LED is mounted on the plurality of (three) light guide members 578 at the portions facing the lateral outer end. The door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and the door frame top right decorative substrate 584, and a plurality of (three) slits 574b formed respectively on the left and right sides of the center of the unit main body 271 in the left and right direction A door with a pair of substrate bases 585 attached to each of the parts and a front face of the pair of substrate bases 585 with a plurality of LEDs 586a, 587a mounted at positions behind the slits 574b of the unit body 271 Frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 and door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587, and door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 And a, a pair of light blocking members 588 which are respectively attached to the rear side of the unit body 271 at the front side of the door frame top right in decorative substrate 587.

  Further, the door frame top unit 570 is provided on the center base 571 so as to cover the front surface of the door frame top unit relay substrate 589 attached to the front surface of the center base 571 in the unit body 271 and the door frame top unit relay substrate 589. The relay board cover 590 attached, the upper cover 591 attached to the unit body 271 so as to close the upper opening 574c of the unit body 271, and the unit so as to close the lower opening 574d of the unit body 271 And a lower cover 592 attached to the main body 271.

  The central base 571 of the door frame top unit 570 is formed in a rectangular shape extending in the left and right direction in a front view. The central base 571 is formed in a box shape opened rearward, and has a plurality of irregularities on the front surface. The pair of side bases 572 are respectively attached to the left and right ends of the center base 571. A pair of upper speakers 573 are attached to the front of each side base 572 respectively. The pair of upper speakers 573 are attached to the door frame top unit 570 in an oblique manner so that the front surfaces of the upper speakers 573 move rearward on the side close to the center in the left-right direction of the door frame top unit 570. The pair of upper speakers 573 are full-range cone-shaped speakers capable of outputting sound in a wide frequency band.

  The unit main body 271 is formed in a shape as viewed from the front, such that the lower part in the vicinity of the left and right ends of the square extending in the left and right direction bulges downward. In other words, the unit main body 271 is formed in such a shape that the shape of the front view is cut out of a quadrangle extending left and right by a trapezoid that is narrowed upward from the lower end side. The unit main body 271 has a rectangular shape in plan view extending from the left and right and a half of the width (length in the left-right direction) about the center in the left-right direction on the front end side of the quadrangle. It is formed in the shape which combined the trapezoid which protruded forward, and the quadrangle which protruded short for the front by making the front end side of the trapezoid into a long side. Accordingly, the unit main body 271 is a line in which both sides of a portion projecting forward at the center in the left-right direction on the front face connect the left-right end portion of the unit main body 271 and the left-right end portion of the front end of the front-projecting portion. It is located behind (it is depressed).

  In the unit main body 271, openings 574 a penetrating in the front-rear direction are formed at positions on the front surface from the both ends in the left-right direction to positions outside the portions protruding forward. Further, the unit body 271 is a plurality of slits extending in the vertical direction at a predetermined height in the vertical direction and penetrating in the front-rear direction at a diagonally extending portion of the front side projecting in a trapezoidal shape in the front. 574b is formed. The plurality of slits 574b extend from the vicinity of the front end of the portion extending obliquely forward to the front surface of the unit main body 271 to the vicinity of the opening 574a. The plurality of slits 574b are formed on the both sides of the center of the unit main body 271 in the left-right direction so as to be spaced apart from each other by three.

  Further, the unit body 271 has an upper opening 574c which is notched in a square from the rear end to the front in the horizontal direction on the upper surface and a lower opening 574d which is notched forward from the rear end in the horizontal direction on the lower surface. And. The upper opening 574 c of the unit body 271 is closed by the upper cover 591. The lower opening 574 d is closed by the lower cover 592.

  The unit body 271 further includes a top left decorative portion 574e and a top right decorative portion 574f extending vertically at the left and right ends. The front surface of the top left decorative portion 574e is formed at substantially the same position as the front surface of the portion where the opening 574a is formed. The top right decoration 574f is formed such that its front surface is located forward of the front surface of the portion where the opening 574a is formed. The unit main body 271 is formed of an opaque member.

  The top middle decorative member 576 is attached to the front end of the portion projecting forward at the center in the left-right direction on the front surface of the unit main body 271. The top middle decorative member 576 has a front pentagonal shape that is bent so that the central part of the lower side of the substantially square is positioned downward, and extends outward from the upper ends of the left and right sides of the pentagon. It is formed in the shape which combined the substantially right-angled triangle which connected the front-end | tip of the edge and the lower end of the right and left of a side pentagon. The top middle decoration member 576 is inclined such that the front pentagonal portion moves backward as it goes downward. The top middle decorative member 576 is formed in a three-dimensional shape as a whole and has translucency.

  The front middle decorative board 577 of the door frame is rearward of the top middle decorative member 576 in a state in which the front surface is inclined so as to move backward as it goes downward along the front surface of the deformed pentagonal portion of the top middle decorative member 576. Mounted on the side. A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the door frame top middle decoration substrate 577, and by making the LEDs emit light, it is possible to make the top middle decoration member 576 emit light and decorate.

  The light guide member 578 is formed of a transparent member. The light guide member 578 is formed in a shape along the shape on both the left and right sides of the front end of the portion projecting forward on the front surface of the unit main body 271. When the side close to both ends in the left-right direction of the unit main body 271 is described as the end side, and the side close to the center as the center side, the light guide member 578 is a straight part that extends straight from side to side toward the center side. 578a, and an arc portion 578b extending in an arc shape having a large radius so as to move forward from the end portion on the center side of the straight portion 578a toward the center side. The light guide member 578 has a depth in the front-rear direction smaller than the height in the vertical direction at the straight portion 578a, and a depth in the front-rear direction larger than the height in the vertical direction at the arc portion 578b. The light guide member 578 is formed such that the vertical portion 578a has a constant height in the vertical direction, and the arc portion 578b is formed so that the height in the vertical direction decreases toward the center. In the state where the light guide member 578 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the straight portion 578a is positioned immediately before the opening 574a of the unit main body 271, and the arc portion 578b closes the slit 574b of the unit main body 271 from the front. Yes.

  The light guide member 578 includes a diffuse reflection portion 578c formed of a saw-like unevenness formed on the rear surface of the straight portion 578a, a diffusion input portion 578d formed of a plurality of unevennesses formed on the rear surface side of the arc portion 578b, It has.

  In the light guide member 578 assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the end portions on both outer sides in the left-right direction face the LED frame 583a and 584a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 or the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 At the same time, the diffusion input unit 578d faces the left decoration substrate 586 in the door frame top or the LEDs 586a and 587a of the right decoration substrate 587 in the door frame top. When light from the LEDs 583a and 584a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 584 or the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 is incident on the light guide member 578 from the ends on both outer sides in the left-right direction, the light enters the direct portion 578a. The inside of the straight portion 578a is sequentially reflected forward from the end portion by the diffuse reflection portion 578c formed on the rear surface of the straight portion 578a, and light is irradiated forward from the entire front surface of the straight portion 578a. A top left decorative lens member 579 or a top right decorative lens member 580 is disposed in front of the light guide member 578, and a portion that is in front of the straight part 578a is decorated with light emission.

  The light guide member 578 receives light from the LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 or the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 from the diffusion input portion 578d formed on the rear surface of the arc portion 578b. Then, the light is widely diffused into the arc portion 578b by the unevenness of the diffusion input portion 578d, and the light is emitted forward from the entire front surface of the arc portion 578b. Thus, the portion located in front of the circular arc portion 578 b in the top left decorative lens member 579 or the top right decorative lens member 580 can be illuminated and decorated.

  As described above, the light guide member 578 includes the door frame top left decoration substrate 583 and the LEDs 583 a and 586 a of the door frame top middle left decoration substrate 586 or the door frame top right decoration substrate 584 and the door frame top middle decoration substrate 587. The light from the LEDs 584a and 587a can be guided to emit and decorate the entire top left decorative lens member 579 or the top right decorative lens member 580 disposed in the front in a good (uniform) state.

  The top left decorative lens member 579 is attached to the front surface of the unit body 271 so as to cover the front of the three light guide members 578 arranged on the left side of the front surface of the unit body 271 in the left-right direction. The top left decorative lens member 579 has three decorative lens portions 579a that accommodate the three light guide members 578 independently from the front. The decorative lens portion 579a of the top left decorative lens member 579 is formed in a shape that follows the light guide member 578, and covers the front surface and the upper and lower surfaces of the light guide member 578. On the front surface of each decorative lens portion 579a, projections and depressions of a square frustum projecting forward are arranged in a row on the left and right.

  The top left decorative lens member 579 extends from the left end of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570 to the right end of the top left decorative portion 574e of the unit body 271. That is, the top left decorative lens member 579 decorates substantially the entire left side of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570. The top left decorative lens member 579 is lighted and decorated by the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and the LEDs 583a and 586a of the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 via the three light guide members 578.

  The top right decorative lens member 580 is attached to the front of the unit body 271 so as to cover the front of the three light guide members 578 disposed on the right side of the center of the front of the unit body 271 in the left-right direction. The top right decorative lens member 580 has three decorative lens portions 580a each accommodating three light guiding members 578 independently from the front. The decorative lens portion 580a of the top right decorative lens member 580 is formed in a shape that follows the light guide member 578, and covers the front surface and upper and lower surfaces of the light guide member 578. On the front surface of each decorative lens portion 580a, projections and depressions of a square frustum projecting forward are arranged in a row on the left and right.

  The top right decorative lens member 580 extends from the right end of the top middle decoration member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 to the left end of the top right decoration portion 574 f of the unit body 271. That is, the top right decorative lens member 580 decorates substantially the entire right side of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570. The top right decorative lens member 580 is illuminated and decorated by the LEDs 584a and 587a of the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 and the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 via the three light guide members 578.

  The top middle left decoration member 581 is attached to the front of the unit body 271 from the front of the top left decoration lens member 579 between the left opening 574a in the front of the unit body 271 and the top middle decoration member 576. The top middle left decorative member 581 is mounted so as to fill the space between the three decorative lens portions 579a of the top left decorative lens member 579 when assembled to the door frame top unit 570, and the center of the front surface is the top left The decorative lens member 579 projects forward from the front surface. The top middle left decorative member 581 is formed of an opaque member.

  The top middle right decorative member 582 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 from the front of the top right decorative lens member 580 between the right opening 574a on the front surface of the unit main body 271 and the top middle decorative member 576. The top middle right decorative member 582 is mounted so as to fill the space between the three decorative lens portions 580a of the top right decorative lens member 580 in a state assembled to the door frame top unit 570, and the center of the front side is closer to the top right. The decorative lens member 580 protrudes forward from the front surface. The top middle right decorative member 582 is formed of an opaque member.

  The door frame top left decorative substrate 583 is attached to the inside of the left side surface (top left decorative portion 574e) in the unit main body 271 with the surface on which the LED 583a is mounted facing rightward. On the door frame top left decorative substrate 583, an LED 583a is mounted at a position facing the left end surfaces of the three light guide members 578 attached to the left front surface of the unit body 271 in the left-right direction center (see FIG. 90). ). The three LEDs 583a can each emit light independently. A portion of the top left decorative lens member 579 positioned in front of the left opening 574a of the unit main body 271 via the straight portions 578a of the three light guide members 578 by the LED 583a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583. It can be decorated to emit light.

  The door frame top right decorative board 584 is attached to the inside of the right side surface (top right decorative portion 574f) in the unit main body 271 with the surface on which the LED 584a is mounted facing leftward. On the door frame top right decorative substrate 584, an LED 584a is mounted at a position facing the right end surfaces of the three light guide members 578 attached to the front surface on the right side of the unit body 271 in the left-right direction center (see FIG. 90). ). The three LEDs 584a can each emit light independently. A portion of the top right decorative lens member 580 positioned in front of the right opening 574a of the top right decorative lens member 580 via the straight portions 578a of the three light guide members 578 is set by the LED 584a of the door frame top right decorative substrate 584. It can be decorated to emit light.

  The pair of substrate bases 585 is attached to the rear side of the unit main body 271 in which the plurality of slits 574 b are formed. The pair of substrate bases 585 are formed substantially symmetrical to each other. The substrate base 585 has a side wall having a substantially square side view having sides extending up and down and back and forth, a rear wall of a front view rectangular shape extending outward at right angles from the rear side of the side wall, and the front end of the upper side of the side wall The upper wall of a substantially right triangle with the upper side of the side wall and the rear wall connecting the upper side of the side wall as the hypotenuse and the lower side of the side wall with the lower wall And a bottom wall of a right triangle, and is formed in a triangular prismatic box shape in which the upper and lower hypotenuses are open. The substrate base 585 is attached to the unit body 271 so that the open part is closed by the unit body 271. The substrate base 585 is attached with the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 or the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 so that the opened part is closed.

  The door frame top center left decorative substrate 586 is attached to the substrate base 585 so as to close a box-shaped open portion from the front in the substrate base 585 attached to the rear side on the left side of the left and right center of the unit main body 271. Be The door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 is attached to the front surface of the substrate base 585 so that the front surface moves forward as it goes to the center side in the left-right direction of the unit main body 271 with respect to the laterally extending surface It will be in the inclined state. As a result, the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 is a surface of a portion where the front side of the door frame top unit 570 is formed with three slits 574b on the left side of the unit body 271 in the left-right direction center. Approximately parallel to the

  The door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 has a plurality of LEDs 586 a mounted at positions corresponding to the three slits 574 b of the unit main body 271. As a result, the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 is in a state in which the plurality of LEDs 586a face forward from the three slits 574b on the left side of the center of the unit body 271 in a state assembled to the door frame top unit 570. The door frame top middle left decorative board 586 emits a plurality of LEDs 586a to emit and decorate a portion near the top middle decorative member 576 of the top left decorative lens member 579 via the arc portion 578b of the light guide member 578. be able to.

  The right decorative substrate 587 in the door frame top is attached to the substrate base 585 so as to close the box-like open part from the front in the substrate base 585 attached on the rear side on the right of the left and right center in the unit body 271 It is done. The right decoration substrate 587 is attached to the front surface of the substrate base 585 in the door frame top, so that the front surface moves toward the center side in the left-right direction of the unit body 271 with respect to the horizontally extending surface Inclined state. Thus, in the state where the right decorative substrate 587 in the door frame top is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the front surface is a surface of a portion where three slits 574b right of the center of the unit body 271 in the left and right direction are formed. It becomes a state substantially parallel to.

  A plurality of LEDs 587 a are mounted at positions corresponding to the three slits 574 b of the unit body 271 on the door frame top middle right decoration substrate 587. As a result, the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is in a state in which the plurality of LEDs 587a face forward from the three slits 574b on the right side of the center of the unit main body 271 in a state assembled to the door frame top unit 570. The door frame top middle right decorative board 587 emits a plurality of LEDs 587a to emit light and decorate a portion near the top middle decorative member 576 of the top right decorative lens member 580 via the arc portion 578b of the light guide member 578. be able to.

  The pair of light shielding members 588 is attached to the front rear side of the unit body 271 at a position between the door frame top middle left decoration substrate 586 and the door frame top middle middle decoration member 587 and the unit body 271. The pair of light shielding members 588 are formed substantially in left-right symmetry with each other by an opaque member. A light shielding member 588 is provided between the upper and lower sides of a plurality of LEDs 586 a and 587 a of a left decorative substrate 586 in the door frame top and a plurality of right decorative substrates 587 in the door frame top arranged in a row corresponding to the three slits 574 b in the unit main body 271. Partitioning. With this light shielding member 588, light can be guided forward by the light guiding member 578 only by the LEDs 586a and 587a located immediately after each light guiding member 578, and the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decoration Luminescent decoration can be performed in a state where the respective decorative lens portions 579a and 580a of the lens member 580 are independent of each other.

  The door frame top unit relay substrate 589 is attached to the front of the center base 571. The door frame top unit relay substrate 589 includes a pair of upper speakers 573, a door frame top middle decoration substrate 577, a door frame top left decoration substrate 583, a door frame top right decoration substrate 584, a door frame top middle left decoration substrate 586, and a door The connection between the frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 and the door main body relay substrate of the door frame base unit 100 is relayed. The door frame top unit relay board 589 is connected to the door body relay board via a connection cable (not shown) provided in the door frame right side unit 550. The front side of the door frame top unit relay substrate 589 is covered by a relay substrate cover 590.

  The door frame top unit 570 includes a top middle decoration member 576 projecting forward at the center in the left-right direction, and is curved such that the front surfaces on the left and right sides of the top middle decoration member 576 turn to the rear. Therefore, it is possible to make the player illusion that only the top middle decorative member 576 protrudes largely forward, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the pachinko machine 1.

  Further, the door frame top unit 570 includes a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 that decorate the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 disposed at the center, and the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576. It is formed to extend from the both sides to the top left decoration portion 574e and the top right decoration portion 574f formed on the left and right ends of the unit body 271. Thereby, the front upper portion of the door frame 3 can be totally decorated by the door frame top unit 570.

  At this time, in the door frame top unit 570, the front surface is protected by a speaker cover 575 made of punching metal behind each of the left and right ends near the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580. The speaker cover 575 faces the front from between the three decorative lens portions 579a and 580a that are separated from each other above and below the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580. The sound output from the left and right upper speakers 573 can be made to be heard by the player in a good state, and a good stereo sound can be enjoyed.

  Further, the door frame top unit 570 is a door frame top left decoration substrate 583 and a door frame top right decoration by a plurality of light guide members 578 provided on the rear side of the top left decoration lens member 579 and the top right decoration lens member 580 The light from the substrate 584, the door frame top middle left decoration substrate 586, and the door frame top middle right decoration substrate 587 can be guided to the top left decoration lens member 579 and the top right decoration lens member 580, and the top left decoration lens member The entire front surface of 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 can be decorated with good light emission. Therefore, the door frame top unit 570 can decorate the entire front surface of the upper part of the door frame 3 including the front of the left and right upper speakers 573 with light emission.

[3-8. Effect of door frame]
The effects of the door frame 3 will be described. The door frame 3 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has the through holes 111 penetrating the front and rear of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 larger in the vertical and horizontal directions than in the conventional pachinko machine. The heights of the plate unit 320 and the door frame top unit 570 in the vertical direction are reduced according to the enlargement of the through hole 111, and the width of the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 in the left and right direction. Is made smaller. Thereby, the front of the game board 5 (game area 5a) attached to the main body frame 4 can be made as wide as possible visible to the player (forward) through the through hole 111 (glass unit 190). This corresponds to the game board 5 having a wide game area 5a.

  The door frame 3 has a large hemispherical operation button 410 at the center in the left-right direction of the plate unit 320 bulging forward on the lower side of the through hole 111 (second effect operation unit 400A) And the front half of the lower half (the lower part of the upper plate 321) on the left and right sides of the rendering operation unit 400 (the front of the lower front decoration part 326c) is recessed to turn backward (dish unit The front surface of both left and right sides of the rendering operation unit 400 is formed in a concave shape so that the front surfaces of both left and right sides of the rendering operation unit 400 are positioned backward from the straight line connecting the front ends of the left and right ends of 320 and ing. As a result, the rendering operation unit 400 attached to the front in the center in the left-right direction of the plate unit 320 appears to be largely protruded forward, so that the rendering operation unit 400 is highlighted and emphasized for the player. It is possible to pay attention to the production operation unit 400.

  The door frame 3 tilts the presentation operation unit 400 disposed on the front surface of the dish unit 320 below the through-hole 111 so that the large hemispherical transparent operation button 410 faces obliquely upward and forward. Therefore, when the player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1, the operation button 410 faces the player's head (face), and the player drops his line of sight and moves the rendering operation unit 400. When viewed, the operation button 410 can be seen in a state substantially close to the front, the large and round operation button 410 can be visually recognized strongly, and an expectation can be enhanced for the effect using the operation button 410. At the same time, the effect image displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460 arranged in the transparent operation button 410 can be visually recognized in a good state, and the effect image can be sufficiently enjoyed. Maseru can be.

  Further, the door frame 3 includes an operation button 410 having a diameter substantially the same as the overall height of the plate unit 320 and bulging forward, so that when the operation button 410 is operated, the hand frame can be moved by a short distance. It is possible to touch any part of the operation button 410, and "early pressing" of the operation button 410 can be performed relatively easily. In addition, since the operation button 410, which has a large diameter and bulges forward, is mounted in an inclined state, it can be pressed from above like the operation buttons of a conventional pachinko machine, and can be operated to the left or right. The operation button 410 can be operated satisfactorily or from the front, and the operation buttons 410 having good operability can be more enjoyed.

  In addition, the door frame 3 is mounted with the stage operation unit 400 in a suspended state by the dish unit 320 and includes a vibration motor 424 that generates vibration at the lower part of the stage operation unit 400. When vibration is generated by rotating the vibration motor 424 in accordance with the state, strong vibration can be transmitted to the player's hand touching the upper part of the operation button 410, and the player can be surprised by the operation button. The presentation using the 410 can be further enjoyed.

  Furthermore, since the door frame 3 is provided with a large operation button 410 (rendering operation unit 400) across the entire height of the plate unit 320 at the front center of the plate unit 320, the upper plate 321 is compared with a conventional pachinko machine. Since the lower plate 322 below is not noticeable, it can be made easy to make the player who is familiar with the conventional pachinko machine clearly recognize that it is clearly different, and the player's attention is strongly attracted A powerful pachinko machine 1 can be obtained.

  Further, the door frame 3 forms the lower plate 322 so as to wrap around the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 with respect to the lower plate opening portion 326 d opened on the left side of the effect operation unit 400 in the front surface of the plate unit 320 Therefore, the volume of the lower plate 322 can be increased relative to the size of the lower plate opening portion 326d, and the number of game balls stored in the lower plate 322 can be sufficiently secured. In addition, since the rear of the lower plate 322 turns to the rear side of the effect operation unit 400, when the player puts the left hand in the lower plate 322 or places the left finger on the lower plate opening 326d. Since it is difficult for the fingertip to touch the wall behind the lower plate 322, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel discomfort, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest for the game and to reduce the size of the lower plate opening 326d. It can also be recognized that the volume of the lower plate 322 is larger than the height by touch.

  Further, the door frame 3 is a lower portion for pulling out the gaming balls of the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower tray 322 from the upper tray 321 to the lower tray 322 into the lower portion of the tray unit 320 or the like. The countersink holes 322a are arranged linearly in the front and rear direction, and are arranged on the right outside (right side of the left end of the frame unit 415 of the rendering operation unit 400) of the lower plate opening 326d in front view. That is, the lower bowl ball supply port 323c and the lower bowl ball extraction hole 322a, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a (right outer side of the lower plate opening portion 326d) in the effect operation unit 400 and the plate unit cover 326, the front end of the lower plate cover 340 Since the player is disposed behind the side, etc., the player can not see the lower ball supply port 323c and the lower ball removal hole 322a, and the appearance of the plate unit 320 (pachinko machine 1) can be refreshed. The appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

  Further, in the lower frame 322, since the lower countersink hole 322a is disposed below (in front of) the lower plate ball supply port 323c in the lower tray 322, the lower frame ball opening 322a is opened. Then, the gaming balls discharged from the upper plate 321 or the like to the lower plate 322 are immediately discharged from the lower plate ball removal hole 322a to the lower dollar box or the like when they enter the lower plate 322. At this time, since the lower bowl ball supply port 323c and the lower bowl ball removal hole 322a can not be seen from the player side, the flow of gaming balls discharged from the upper plate 321 or the like through the lower plate 322 to the dollar box is also I can not see it. In this way, it is possible to give the illusion that the game balls and the like paid out from the payout device 830 in a state that the game balls of the upper plate 321 and the upper plate 321 are full for the player are directly discharged to the dollar box. Since it is possible to make it difficult for the game ball to feel the troublesomeness of passing through the lower plate 322, it is possible to concentrate the player on the game (such as the operation to hit the game ball and the effect image) and to suppress the decrease in interest. it can.

  Further, in the lower frame 322, the door frame 3 has the lower flat ball opening hole 322a at the front left position of the lower flat ball supply opening 323c, and the lower plate 322 stands upright on the right side of the lower flat ball opening 322a. Since the upper wall portion is bent obliquely so as to face the lower ball ball extraction hole 322a, the gaming ball supplied from the lower ball ball supply port 323c to the lower plate 322 is directly moved to the lower ball ball. The light can be guided to the hole 322a, or can be reflected to the right side wall and indirectly guided to the lower circular ball hole 322a. Thus, in the state where the lower ball ball extraction hole 322a is open, the gaming ball supplied from the lower ball ball supply port 323c to the lower plate 322 is a region on the lower plate 322 on the left side of the lower ball ball extraction hole 322a. (The lower plate first area A1) can be discharged downward from the lower plate ball removal hole 322a without entering the lower plate 322 without showing the gaming balls circulating in the lower plate 322 to the player. The game ball can be discharged downward (dollar box), and the same effect as described above can be exhibited.

  Further, the door frame 3 includes a lower plate opening 326d of the plate unit cover 326 facing the front of the lower plate 322 between the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a (the effect operation unit 400) and the lower speaker opening 326e. Therefore, even if the player puts his hand on the lower plate opening 326d or puts his hand on the lower plate 322, the front of the lower speaker opening 326e is not blocked by the player's hand. The sound from the speaker 921 in the substrate unit 900 can be output well forward, and the sound from the pachinko machine 1 can be enjoyed. In addition, when the player places a hand on the lower plate 322 or moves close to it, the player can tactilely feel the vibration due to the deep bass from the speaker 921 which is output forward from the lower speaker port 326e. Can entertain people and control the decline in interest.

  In addition, since the door frame 3 is provided with the door frame right side unit 550 which is plate-shaped and protrudes forward largely from the right side of the through hole 111, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed on the island facility of the game hall, the door Since the frame right side unit 550 can exert an operation effect such as a partition between the pachinko machine adjacent to the right side, the player playing a game with this pachinko machine 1 can play a game in a private room It is possible to give an illusion of a feeling of being present, and to play the game in a relaxed atmosphere without hesitation to other players around.

  Furthermore, since the door frame 3 can emit light and decorate the front end and both the left and right sides of the door frame right side unit 550 that is plate-shaped and largely protrudes forward, the game hall installed with the pachinko machines 1 lined up Even if the pachinko machine 1 is not located in front of the pachinko machine, the pachinko machine 1 can be informed of the presence of the pachinko machine even from a distance from the side along the island facility, and the pachinko machine has a high appeal for the player. Machine 1 can be used.

  In the door frame top unit 570 on the upper side of the through hole 111, the door frame 3 includes a top middle decorative member 576 projecting forward at the center in the left-right direction, and front surfaces on both left and right sides of the top middle decoration member 576 A shape recessed so as to be turned backwards (A top middle decoration member in the door frame top unit 570 than a straight line connecting the front ends of the left and right ends of the door frame top unit 570 and the front ends of the left and right ends of the top middle decoration member 576 The front surfaces of the left and right sides of the 576 are formed in a concavely curved shape so as to be positioned rearward. As a result, only the decorative member 576 at the top of the door frame top unit 570 appears to be projected forward largely, so that the decorative member 576 can be made to be highlighted and highlighted to the player, The medium decorative member 576 can be strongly noted.

  By the way, a pair of upper speakers spaced apart from each other are provided on the upper part of the door frame in the conventional pachinko machine, and the two upper speakers are conspicuous. On the other hand, in the door frame top unit 570 attached to the upper side of the through hole 111, the door frame 3 of the present embodiment has a pair of upper portions whose front surfaces are protected by the speaker cover 575 made of punching metal at the left and right ends. A top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 extending from the left and right sides of the central top middle decorative member 576 to the left and right direction ends are provided with the speaker 573, The entire front surface of the left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 can be decorated with light emission. As a result, since the front upper portion of the door frame 3 can be entirely decorated, the pair of upper speakers 573 becomes inconspicuous at the upper portion of the door frame 3, and a decoration distinctly different from conventional pachinko machines is provided It is possible to make the player recognize at a glance that it is present, and it is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal to the player, and to entertain the player with high-quality stereo sound by the pair of upper speakers 573. it can.

  As described above, in the door frame 3 of this embodiment, the rendering operation unit 400 attached to the plate unit 320 and the top middle decorative member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 are provided below and above the through hole 111. Because each of the left and right direction is largely projected forward, it is possible to show the player a decoration having a sense of unity in the upper and lower sides where the virtual line passing through the left and right direction center is noticeable, and by the refined decoration. The pachinko machine 1 can be made more conspicuous than other pachinko machines and has a high appealing power.

  Further, the door frame 3 projects the top middle decorative member 576 and the effect operation unit 400 of the door frame top unit 570 disposed vertically at the center in the left-right direction, and thus the top middle decorative member 576. When the lighting operation unit 400 is decorated with light emission, the player can show a light emission line that extends vertically at the center in the left-right direction on the front surface of the door frame 3, and the player's line of sight is arranged in the center in the left-right direction. It can be guided to the operation button 410 or the like of the effect operation unit 400.

[4. Overall configuration of body frame]
The main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 to 94. FIG. 91 is a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 92 is a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the rear. FIG. 93 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. FIG. 94 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. As shown in the figure, the main body frame 4 of the present embodiment is formed in a box shape whose front is open, and the game board 5 is removably accommodated therein. The body frame 4 is attached to the frame-like outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall at the top and bottom of the front left side front end so that it can be opened and closed, and the door frame 3 is closed so that the opened front side is closed. It is attached openably and closably.

  The main body frame 4 of the present embodiment includes a frame-shaped main body frame base 600 that can be partially inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the main body frame base 600. It is attached to upper and lower ends of the left side of the front view and is rotatably attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 and the door frame upper hinge member 140 of the door frame 3 and the door frame The lower side hinge member 150 comprises a body frame upper hinge member 620 and a body frame lower hinge member 640 rotatably mounted, and a reinforcing frame 660 attached to the left side of the body frame base 600 in a front view. .

  In addition, the main unit frame 4 is attached to the lower front of the main unit frame base 600, and a ball launcher 680 for hitting a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5; And a locking unit 700 for locking between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 and is attached to the rear side along the front view upper side and left side of the main body frame base 600 A reverse L-shaped payout unit 800 for paying out gaming balls to the cage player side, a substrate unit 900 attached to the lower portion of the rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and an openable / closable attached to the rear side And a back cover 980 covering the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 600.

[4-1. Body frame base]
As shown in FIGS. 91 to 94, the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment is formed in a rectangular shape whose front view extends vertically. The body frame base 600 penetrates back and forth in a range of about 3/4 of the height from a position slightly lower than the upper end, and the game board insertion slot 601 in which the game board 5 is inserted from the front side A game board placement part 602 that forms the lower side of the board insertion slot 601 and on which the game board 5 is placed, and protrudes upward from the center in the left-right direction of the game board placement part 602 and is located at the left and right of the lower end of the game board 5 And a game board control unit 603 for restricting the backward movement.

  In addition, the main unit frame base 600 is a launch device attachment portion 604 for attaching the ball launch device 680 formed on the lower right side of the game board placement portion 602 in front view, and a front view right side of the launch device attachment portion 604 The cylinder insertion port 605 which penetrates back and forth and into which the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 is inserted, and penetrates back and forth from the left and right center from the front left and right center of the game board mounting portion 602 A circular opening which penetrates the front and rear of the game board mounting portion 602 in the front opening left side of the game board mounting portion 602 and which has the speaker unit 920 of the board unit 900 facing forward. And a speaker opening 607.

  Further, the main body frame base 600 extends in a plate-like shape from the right side of the game board insertion slot 601 to the rear, so that the locking unit 700 is attached to the right side, and the back cover 980 is rotatable at the rear end. A rear extension 608 is provided for attachment. The main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 4 is formed in the vicinity of the upper and lower ends at the left end of the front view on the rear surface, and the upper hinge attachment for attaching the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 is provided. A portion 609 and a lower hinge attachment portion 610 are provided.

  In addition, the main frame base 600 is rotatably attached at a position slightly lower on the left side than the front left and right center of the game board mounting portion 602 in an opening cover 615 closing the opening for connection 606 openably and closably. And a game board lock member 616 capable of restricting the forward movement of the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion slot 601.

[4-2. Body frame upper hinge member and body frame lower hinge member]
The main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 to 94. The body frame upper hinge member 620 and the body frame lower hinge member 640 are attached to the upper hinge attachment portion 609 and the lower hinge attachment portion 610 of the body frame base 600.

  An upper hinge main body 621 in which a rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate member is bent in an L shape downward, and a cylindrical shape projecting upward from a front end of the upper hinge main body 621 A body frame upper hinge pin 622 pivotally supported by the cage outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and an upper hinge main body 621 in front view left side of the body frame hinge pin 622 penetrate the door frame side upper hinge member 140 And an upper hinge hole 623 for a door frame. The body frame side upper hinge member 620 is attached to the upper hinge attachment portion 609 of the body frame base 600 at a portion bent downward in the upper hinge body 621.

  The lower hinge member 640 on the body frame side vertically penetrates at the front end of the lower hinge first main body 641 and the lower hinge first main body 641 in which the rear portion of the plate material extending horizontally is bent upward in an L shape. And an outer frame lower hinge hole (not shown) supported by the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 and a horizontally extending flat plate disposed on the upper side of the lower hinge first main body 641 The lower hinge second main body 643 in which the rear portion of the plate material is bent upward in an L shape, and the upper end of the lower hinge second main body 643 vertically penetrate and the door frame lower lower hinge member 150 of the door frame 3 The door frame 3 extends upward from the left end on the rear side of the door frame hinge hole 644 for pivotally supporting the door frame and the door frame hinge hole 644 at the horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge second main body 643. And a restriction piece 645 for restricting the rotation range of the .

  The lower hinge second body 643 has a horizontally extending portion spaced upward from the horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge first body 641 and a portion bent upward is a first lower hinge first body. It is in contact with the front surface of the portion bent upward of the main body 641. The main frame side lower hinge member 640 is attached to the lower hinge attachment portion 610 of the main frame base 600 by bending the lower hinge first main body 641 and the lower hinge second main body 643 upward.

[4-3. Reinforcement frame]
The reinforcing frame 660 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 to 94. The reinforcing frame 660 is attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 600. The cross section of the reinforcing frame 660 in plan view is formed in a U shape whose right side is open, and extends vertically with a constant cross section. In addition, the reinforcing frame 660 restricts movement of the game board 5 inserted in the game board insertion slot 601 of the main body frame base 600 to the front and up and down to the rear side of the part extending rightward from the front end. The left positioning member 661 is mounted in a pair at vertically spaced positions.

  The reinforcement frame 660 can reinforce the hinge side (left side in front view) of the main body frame base 600 and enter the main body frame 4 (game board 5) from the left side passing between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is possible to prevent incorrect insertion of tools.

[4-4. Ball launcher]
The ball firing device 680 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 91, 93 and 94. The ball launcher 680 is a device for driving a game ball stored in the upper plate 321 of the tray unit 320 into the game area 5 a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4. In the ball launching device 680, the strength of the game ball is changed in accordance with the rotation angle of the handle 302 of the handle unit 300 at the lower right front corner of the door frame 3.

  The ball launcher 680 is attached to a flat launch base 681 attached to the launcher attachment portion 604 of the main body frame base 600 and to the rear surface of the right side of the launch base 681 in a front view. A firing solenoid 682 formed of a rotary solenoid extending forward and penetrating, a hitting ball 683 having a base end attached to the rotation shaft of the firing solenoid 682 and a tip end extending diagonally upward from the tip of the hitting ball 683 And a launch rail 684 mounted on the front of the launch base 681 so that the game balls can roll.

  In this ball launching device 680, a game ball is supplied from the ball feed unit 250 of the door frame 3 to the upper right end of the launch rail 684, and a game ball is supplied to the upper right end of the launch rail 684. When the handle 302 is turned, the firing solenoid 682 is driven with a strength corresponding to the turning operation angle, and a game ball is hit by the hitting ball 683. Then, the game ball hit by the hitting ball 683 is guided by the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 through the launch rail 684 and driven into the game area 5a.

  If the hit game ball does not reach the game area 5a due to the strength of the game ball, the space between the launch rail 684 and the game board 5 (the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002). From the lower foul cover unit 270 to the foul ball receiving port 275, passes through the foul cover unit 270, and is discharged to the lower plate 322.

[4-5. Locking unit]
The locking unit 700 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 to 94. The locking unit 700 of the present embodiment is attached to the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 4 and can lock between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2. The locking unit 700 is attached to the right side surface of the rear extension 608 of the main body frame base 600 and extends vertically. The locking unit 700 protrudes forward from the unit base 701 and can be locked to the door frame 3. A door frame ridge 702, a plurality of outer frame ridges 703 projecting rearward from the unit base 701 and latchable with the outer frame 2, and projecting in a cylindrical shape forward from the lower portion of the unit base 701; A protrusion protrudes from the front end portion in a direction perpendicular to the axis, and the rotation of the cylinder lock 211 is transmitted by engaging with the rotation transmitting member 212 of the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 of the door frame 3, and the door according to the rotation direction of the key. And a key cylinder 710 for unlocking the locking of either the frame wedge 702 or the outer frame wedge 703.

[4-6. Disbursement unit]
The dispensing unit 800 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 95 to 113. FIG. 95 is a perspective view of the dispensing unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 96 is a perspective view of the dispensing unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 97 is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled into main components and viewed from the front, and FIG. 98 is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled into main components and viewed from the rear. FIG. 99 (a) is a perspective view of the ball guiding unit of the dispensing unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 99 (b) is a perspective view of the ball guiding unit as viewed from the rear. Furthermore, FIG. 100 is an exploded perspective view of the ball guiding unit. FIG. 101 (a) is a perspective view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 101 (b) is a perspective view of the dispensing device as viewed from the rear. FIG. 102 is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing device as viewed from the front, and FIG. 103 is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing device as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 104 (a) is a front view of the dispensing device, and FIG. 104 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line QQ in FIG. Further, FIG. 105 (a) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the ball drawing passage is closed by the ball drawing movable piece in the dispensing device, and FIG. 105 (b) is an explanatory view showing a state It is.

  FIG. 106 (a) is a front perspective view of the upper full ball passage unit in the dispensing unit, and FIG. 106 (b) is a rear perspective view of the upper full ball passage unit. FIG. 107 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the upper full tank path unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 107 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the upper full tank path unit disassembled and viewed from the rear is there. Further, FIG. 108 (a) is a front perspective view of the lower full ball passage unit in the dispensing unit, and FIG. 108 (b) is a rear perspective view of the lower full ball passage unit. Further, FIG. 109 is an exploded perspective view of the lower full tank passage unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 110 is an exploded perspective view of the lower full cylinder passage unit as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 111 (a) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the guideway opening / closing door is closed in the lower full tank route unit, and (b) is an explanatory view showing a state where the guideway opening / closing door is open. . FIG. 112 is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the door cover full cover unit and the lower full ball unit. FIG. 113 is an explanatory view showing a flow of gaming balls in the payout unit.

  As shown in FIGS. 95 and 96, etc., the dispensing unit 800 of this embodiment is attached to the inverted L-shaped dispensing unit base 801 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 and the top of the dispensing unit base 801. Ball tank 802 for storing gaming balls supplied from an island facility of a game hall (not shown) in a box shape extending upward and downward and attached to the payout unit base 801 below the ball tank 802 And a tank rail 803 extending to the left and right for guiding the game ball in the cage ball tank 802 leftward as viewed from the front. Within the tank rail 803, the game balls are aligned in the front and rear two rows by a ball leveling member 804 (see FIG. 113) swingably suspended from above while guiding the game balls to the left.

  In addition, the payout unit 800 is attached to the rear surface of the top left side of the payout unit base 801 in front view and guides the gaming balls from the tank rail 803 downward in a meandering manner; A payout device 830 which dispenses the gaming balls removably attached from the payout unit base 801 and guided by the ball induction unit 820 one by one based on an instruction from the payout control substrate 951 accommodated in the payout control substrate box 950. And. From the tank rail 803 to the payout device 830, gaming balls are distributed in two rows, and from the payout device 830, the gaming balls are paid out one by one.

  Further, the payout unit 800 is attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 and guides the game balls paid out by the payout device 830 downward, and the game balls according to the storage state of the game balls on the upper plate 321 in the tray unit 320. Is discharged from either the normal discharge port 850d or the full tank discharge port 850e, and is discharged from the normal discharge port 850d of the upper full ball path unit 850 attached to the lower end of the dispensing unit base 801. Normal guidance path 861 that guides the game ball forward from the front end to the through-ball passage 273 of the door frame 3, guides the game ball released from the full tank outlet 850e to the front of the door frame 3 from the front end. A full frame guide path 862 for guiding to the full tank receiving port 274, and the front end openings of the normal guide path 861 and the full tank guide path 862 are arranged in the body frame. And a, a lower full sphere path unit 860 having a taxiway door 863 to be opened or closed in response to opening and closing of the door frame 3 against.

[4-6a. Ball guidance unit]
The ball guiding unit 820 of the dispensing unit 800 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 99 and 100. The ball guiding unit 820 includes a box-shaped front case 821 that extends vertically and has a rear side open, a box-shaped rear case 822 that is attached to the rear side of the front case 821 and has a front side open, and a front case 821 and the rear case 822, and a flat partition plate 823 that partitions the front case 821 and the rear case 822. The front and rear ends of the partition plate 823 penetrate the front case 821 and the rear case 822. A rod-shaped shaft member 824 that is attached, and a pair of movable piece member front 825 and a rear piece of the movable piece member that are rotatably attached by the shaft member 824 and are disposed in the front case 821 and the rear case 822, respectively. 826 and a ball breakage detection sensor 827 which is attached in the front case 821 and can detect the rotational position of the pair of movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826. To have.

  The front case 821 has a ball guiding inlet 821a at the upper right side where game balls are open for passage and a ball induction outlet where game balls are open at a position closer to the right than the center of the bottom in the left-right direction. 821 b, and a guiding passage 821 c which communicates the ball guiding inlet 821 a with the ball guiding outlet 821 b and through which the game balls can flow. The guide passage 821c includes an introduction portion 821d that extends obliquely from the ball guide entrance 821a to the vicinity of the left end at a small angle with respect to the horizontal, and a center of height along the left side of the front case 821 from the introduction portion 821d. The detection portion 821e extends straight downward to the vicinity, and the meandering portion 821f extending in a meandering manner from the detection portion 821e with the left and right widths of the front case 821. Further, the front case 821 is provided with a notch 821g on the wall on the right side in a front view of the detection portion 821e in the guiding passage 821c.

  The rear case 822 has a ball guiding inlet 822a at the upper right side where game balls are open for passage, and a ball induction outlet where game balls are open at a position closer to the right than the center of the bottom in the left-right direction. A guide passage 822c is provided, which communicates the ball guiding inlet 822a with the ball guiding outlet 822b and through which the game balls can flow. The guide passage 822c includes an introduction portion 822d that extends obliquely from the ball guide entrance 822a to the vicinity of the left end at a small angle with respect to the horizontal, and a center of height along the left side of the rear case 822 from the introduction portion 822d. The detection unit 822e extends straight downward to the vicinity, and a meandering portion 822f extends in a meandering manner from the detection unit 822e to the left and right width of the rear case 822. Further, the rear case 822 is provided with a notch 822g on the right side wall of the detection portion 822e in the guiding passage 822c in a front view.

  The rear case 822 is substantially symmetrical to the left and right with respect to the front case 821, and is formed so that the guide passage 821c and the guide passage 822c are aligned in the front-rear direction when assembled in the ball guide unit 820. Yes.

  The front and rear ends of the shaft member 824 are attached to positions below the upper ends of the notches 821g and 822g in the front case 821 and the rear case 822 and outside the induction passages 821c and 822c.

  The movable piece member front 825 is a flat movable piece 825a extending vertically, a shaft hole 825b which penetrates back and forth at the upper end of the right side surface of the movable piece 825a, and the movable piece 825a into which the shaft member 824 is inserted An extending portion 825c extending rightward from the upper end of the movable piece 825a at a right angle with respect to the right surface of the movable piece 825a; an extending portion 825c and the movable piece 825a; and fanning around the shaft hole 825b A connecting portion 825d, a weight attaching portion 825e having a through hole which protrudes outward from around the center of the upper portion of the extending portion 825c and the outer periphery of the connecting portion 825d and which penetrates back and forth, and an extending portion 825c A detection piece 825f extending outward from the right end in a flat plate shape and detectable by the broken ball detection sensor 827 and extending outward from a position near the movable piece 825a on the outer periphery of the connecting portion 825d Is provided with a stopper piece 825g, the.

  When the shaft member 824 passes through the shaft hole 825b, the movable piece front 825 rotates so that the weight attachment portion 825e protruding from the outer periphery of the connecting portion 825d is positioned directly below the shaft hole 825b by its own weight. The movable piece 825a extends obliquely downward from the shaft hole 825b. Therefore, in the assembled state of the ball guiding unit 820, the connecting portion 825d is inserted through the notch 821g of the front case 821, and the lower end of the movable piece 825a protrudes into the guiding passage 821c, and the stopper piece 825g It will be in the state contact | abutted to the outer wall of the guidance channel | path 821c (detection part 821e). When the stopper piece 825g abuts on the outer wall of the guiding passage 821c, the lower end of the movable piece 825a is restricted from further rotation in the direction (left direction in front view) projecting into the guiding passage 821c. In addition, when the movable piece member front 825 rotates the lower end of the movable piece 825a in a direction (right direction in front view) approaching the wall of the guiding passage 821c, the left side surface of the movable piece 825a becomes the guiding passage 821c. It matches the inner surface. In this state, the detection piece 825f in front of the movable piece member 825 is in a non-detection state with respect to the ball breakage detection sensor 827. That is, when there is a game ball in the guide passage 821c, the ball break detection sensor 827 is not detected.

  The movable piece member back 826 is a flat plate-like movable piece 826a extending vertically and a shaft hole 826b which is penetrated back and forth at the upper end of the right side surface of the movable piece 826a and through which the shaft member 824 is inserted, and the movable piece 826a Extending from the upper end of the movable piece 826a to the right surface of the movable piece 826a at right angles with the extending portion 826c and the movable piece 826a, and fan-shapedly extending around the shaft hole 826b A connecting portion 826d, a weight attaching portion 826e having a through hole which protrudes outward from around the center of the upper portion of the extending portion 826c and the outer periphery of the connecting portion 826d, and which penetrates back and forth A detection piece 826f which extends outward in a flat plate shape from the right end and can be detected by the broken ball detection sensor 827, and extends outward in a flat plate shape from a position near the movable piece 826a on the outer periphery of the connecting portion 826d. Is provided with a stopper piece 826g, the.

  When the movable piece member rear 826 passes the shaft member 824 through the shaft hole 826b, the weight attaching portion 826e protruding from the outer periphery of the connecting portion 826d is rotated by its own weight so as to be positioned immediately below the shaft hole 826b. The movable piece 826a extends obliquely downward from the portion of the shaft hole 826b. Therefore, in the assembled state of the ball guiding unit 820, the connecting portion 826d is inserted into the notch 822g of the rear case 822, and the lower end of the movable piece 826a protrudes into the guiding passage 822c, and the stopper piece 826g It will be in the state contact | abutted to the outer wall of the guidance path 822c (detection part 822e). When the stopper piece 826g abuts against the outer wall of the guide passage 822c, the lower end of the movable piece 826a is restricted from further rotating in the direction protruding into the guide passage 822c (left direction in front view). Further, when the movable piece member rear 826 rotates the lower end of the movable piece 826a in a direction approaching the wall of the guide passage 822c (right direction in front view), the left side surface of the movable piece 826a is moved to the guide passage 822c. I agree with the inside. In this state, the detection piece 826f after the movable piece member 826 is in a non-detection state with respect to the ball breakage detection sensor 827. That is, when there is a game ball in the induction passage 822c, the out-of-ball detection sensor 827 is not detected.

  In the ball guiding unit 820 of the present embodiment, a plurality of gaming balls are supplied in a row in the back and forth direction by the tank rail 803, and the front case 821 and the rear case are provided in a state in which the plurality of gaming balls are aligned. By 822, it is possible to guide to the lower dispensing device 830 in two rows before and after (see FIG. 113). At this time, since the front case 821 and the rear case 822 are separated by the partition plate 823, the gaming balls flowing through the respective guide passages 821c and 822c do not interfere with each other, and are well distributed. Can do.

  Further, when the game ball flows through the guide passages 821c and 822c of the ball guide unit 820, the game ball comes into contact with the movable pieces 825a and 826a of the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826, and the movable pieces 825a and 826a are moved. The movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 rotate in a direction coinciding with the wall surfaces of the guide passages 821c and 822c. Thereby, the detection pieces 825f and 826f of the movable piece front 825 and the movable piece back 826 are in a non-detection state with respect to the out-of-ball detection sensor 827, and it can be seen that gaming balls are present in the guide paths 821c and 822c.

  When the game ball is paid out by the payout device 830 on the downstream side of the ball guidance unit 820, the game balls in the guide passages 821c and 822c flow downstream. When a game ball flows through the guide passages 821c and 822c, the momentum of the game ball flowing through the introduction portions 821d and 822d is increased, and the game ball flowing through the introduction portions 821d and 822d is movable pieces above the detection portions 821e and 822e. It will rebound to the 825a, 826a side, and will abut on the movable piece 825a, 826a. Since the movable pieces 825a and 826a vibrate due to the abutment of the game ball, the movable pieces 825a and 826a vibrate between the movable pieces 825a and 826a and the notches 821g and 822g of the guide passages 821c and 822c. It is possible to remove dust, dust, etc., and the movable pieces 825a and 826a can be rotated favorably by their own weight or the like.

  In addition, the ball guiding unit 820 detects the game balls circulating in the guiding passages 821c and 822c by means of the movable piece front 825 and the movable piece back 826 respectively, and the movable piece front 825 and Since each detection piece 825f, 826f of the movable piece member 826 is detected by one ball breakage detection sensor 827, when the game ball in any of the guide paths 821c, 822c disappears, the movable piece member front is removed. The movable pieces 825a and 826a of the back 825 or movable piece member 826 rotate so as to protrude into the guiding passages 821c and 822c, and the detection pieces 825f and 826f on the side where the game ball is lost are detected by the out-of-ball detection sensor 827 The Therefore, the game balls can be detected early, so that the game balls can be quickly replenished, and by reducing the time for interrupting the game as much as possible, the player's interest can be reduced. Can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, the weight of the movable piece front 825 and the movable piece back 826 and the weight can be obtained by screwing in and attaching a metal screw as a weight to the weight attachment portions 825e and 826e of the movable piece front 825 and movable back 826 Thus, the lower ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a can be easily rotated in the direction of protruding into the guide passages 821c and 822c. In addition, the upper end of the movable piece 825a, 826a is rotatably attached outside the induction passage 821c, 822c, and the lower end side protrudes in the induction passage 821c, 822c, so dust in the induction passage 821c, 822c No dust or the like adheres to the upper end or the lower end of the movable pieces 825a, 826a. Therefore, even if the movable pieces 825a, 826a turn to the wall side of the guide passage 821c, 822c, dust and dirt do not get caught between the lower ends of the movable pieces 825a, 826a and the wall, so their own weight etc. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem that the movable pieces 825a and 826a do not rotate.

  As described above, the ball guiding unit 820 of the present embodiment has the movable piece front 825 and the movable pieces 825a and 826a behind the movable piece member 826 projecting into the guide passages 821c and 822c through which the game balls flow due to their own weight. By attaching weights made of metal screws to weight attachment portions 825e, 826e on the opposite side of the surface that comes into contact with the game ball, the movable piece member 825 and the movable piece member rear part 826 are moved according to their own weight and weight weight. The lower end side of 825a, 826a can be easily rotated (projected) into the guide passages 821c, 822c. In addition, the upper end of the movable piece 825a, 826a is rotatably attached outside the induction passage 821c, 822c, and the lower end side protrudes in the induction passage 821c, 822c, so dust in the induction passage 821c, 822c No dust or the like adheres to the upper end or the lower end of the movable pieces 825a, 826a. Therefore, even if the movable pieces 825a and 826a rotate to the wall side of the guide passages 821c and 822c, dust, dust, or the like does not bite between the lower ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a and the wall. Accordingly, the movable pieces 825a and 826a (the movable piece members 825 and 826) can be prevented from rotating.

  In addition, in order to screw and attach a metal screw as a weight to weight attachment portions 825e and 826e as through holes, the weight is fixed even if the front of movable piece 825 and the rear of movable piece 826 rotate frequently. The movable piece front 825 and the movable piece back 826 can be maintained in a good state for a long time without coming off from the movable piece front 825 and the movable piece back 826 (weight attachment parts 825 e, 826 e) . In addition, since the weight can be easily attached to the movable piece front 825 and the movable piece back 826 simply by screwing a metal screw into the weight attachment portions 825 e and 826 e, the process of attaching the weight can be simplified. The cost of assembling the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

  Further, in the guide passages 821c and 822c, introduction portions 821d and 822d for guiding the game ball toward the movable pieces 825a and 826a are provided on the upstream side of the portion where the movable pieces 825a and 826a protrude inside. Since the game balls flow in the guide passages 821c and 822c, the game balls come into contact with the movable pieces 825a and 826a. Therefore, the movable pieces 825a and 826a can be vibrated by the contact of the game balls. Accordingly, the vibrations of the movable pieces 825a and 826a can remove dust or dirt that is sandwiched or invaded between the movable pieces 825a and 826a and the walls of the guide passages 821c and 822c. The front member 825 and the rear movable member 826 can be rotated well.

  Therefore, since the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 can be rotated well, the state (presence / absence) of the game ball in the guide passages 821c and 822c can be detected reliably, and the game ball It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a defect due to a false detection or the like. In addition, even if the game balls supplied to the payout device 830 disappear from the guide passages 821c and 822c, the presence or absence of the guide passages 821c and 822c can be reliably detected via the movable pieces 825a and 826a. The game ball can be replenished to the player, and the time at which the game is interrupted can be shortened as much as possible, thereby suppressing a decrease in the interest of the player.

[4-6 b. Dispensing device]
The dispensing device 830 of the dispensing unit 800 in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 101 to 105. The payout device 830 has a box shape whose rear side is open, and the payout opening 831a where the gaming ball is open at the center in the left-right direction on the upper surface, and the gaming ball is open near the left end in front view Payout outlet 831b, ball outlet outlet 831c where gaming balls are open for passage near the right end of the front view in the bottom surface, payout opening 831a and payout outlet 831b are communicated and the payout passage 831d through which gaming balls can flow , And a dispensing passage 831 d branched from the middle and communicated with the ball outlet 831 c and has a ball out passage 831 e through which gaming balls can flow, and is attached to the back side of the front box 831 The game ball is open near the left end of the top view in the bottom view in the bottom of the payout opening 832a where the game ball is open so that the game ball can pass in the center in the left-right direction on the upper surface. A payout opening 832b which is overly open, a ball outlet 832c which allows gaming balls to pass in the vicinity of the right end in the front view on the bottom, a payout opening 832a and a payout outlet 832b are communicated, and the gaming balls are distributed It has a possible payout passage 832d and a rear box 832 branched from the middle of the payout passage 832d and communicating with the ball removal outlet 832c and having a ball removal passage 832e through which game balls can flow.

  The payout device 830 is attached to the front side of the front box 831 and has a shallow box-like front cover 833 that is open on the rear side, and is attached to the front box 831 so that the rotary shaft passes through the front box 831. The payout motor 834 extending into the front cover 833, the drive gear 835 attached to the rotating shaft of the payout motor 834, and the drive gear 835 meshing with the front box 831 and the front cover 833 are rotatable. A spur gear-shaped intermediate gear 836 attached to the intermediate gear 836, a driven gear 837 meshing with the intermediate gear 836, the driven gear 837 penetrates rotatably, the front end is attached to the front cover 833, and the rear A shaft member 838 having an end passing through the front box 831 and attached to the rear box 832, a shaft member 838 passing through the shaft member 838 and rotatably attached to the front box 831 and the rear box 832. A blade rotation detection sensor 840 disposed in the passages 831 d and 832 d and disposed between the front box 831 and the rear box 832 and detecting a rotation of the discharge blade 839. And have.

  Furthermore, the dispensing device 830 is a flat-plate-like partition plate 841 attached between the front box 831 and the rear box 832 to separate the dispensing passage 831 d of the front box 831 and the dispensing passage 832 d of the rear box 832; And a rear box 832, and a payout detection sensor 842 for detecting a gaming ball discharged from the payout outlets 831b and 832b by the rotation of the payout blade 839, the payout passage 831d and 832d, and the ball release passage 831e, 832e is a portion where it is bifurcated and is rotatably attached by the front box 831 and the rear box 832, and it is possible to close the ball removal passage 831e, 832e, the ball extraction movable piece 843, the front box 831 and the rear And a ball pulling lever 844 slidably mounted up and down on the upper right side surface of the box 832 so as to make the ball pulling movable piece 843 pivotable or non-rotatable It is equipped with a.

  The dispensing passage 831d of the front box 831 obliquely extends from the dispensing inlet 831a toward the ball removing outlet 831c to the lower right of the front view, and descends at a height of about 1/3 from the upper surface to the entire height of the front box 831 To extend vertically to the left, and bend to extend substantially horizontally to the left near the center of the height, then extend vertically downward again approximately 1/3 from the left end of the width of the front box 831 It is bent in a crank shape and extends vertically to the discharge outlet 831b so as to be positioned just above the discharge outlet 831b at a height of about 1/4 from the bottom with respect to the entire height of the front box 831. Dispensing vanes 839 are arranged in the portion of the dispensing passage 831d that is bent in a crank shape.

  On the other hand, the ball removal passage 831e further extends a portion of the dispensing passage 831d that obliquely extends from the dispensing inlet 831a to the lower right, and is approximately 1/3 from the top surface with respect to the total height of the front box 831. It branches off to the height near the center.

  Further, the front box 831 is formed on the upper part of the right side surface when viewed from the front, and a guide shelf 831f that protrudes rearward in a portion extending vertically toward the payout outlet 831b in the payout passage 831d. And a lever attaching portion 831g for slidably attaching the ball removing lever 844 up and down.

  The payout passage 832d of the rear box 832 extends obliquely to the lower right in front view so as to go from the payout inlet 832a to the ball outlet 832c, and is downward at a height of about 1/3 from the upper surface with respect to the total height of the rear box 832. It bends so as to extend vertically to the left, and is bent so as to extend substantially horizontally to the left near the center of the total height, and then extends vertically downward again at about 1/3 from the left end with respect to the left and right widths of the rear box 832. It is bent in a crank shape and extends vertically to the payout outlet 832b so as to be positioned immediately above the payout outlet 832b at a height of about 1/4 of the total height of the rear box 832. Dispensing blades 839 are arranged in the portion of the dispensing passage 832d that is bent in a crank shape.

  On the other hand, the ball removal passage 832e is a form further extending a portion obliquely extending from the discharge port 832a to the lower right in the discharge passage 832d, and is about 1/3 height from the upper surface to the entire height of the rear box 832 It branches off to the height near the center.

  Further, the rear box 832 is formed on the upper part of the right side surface when viewed from the front, and a guide shelf 832f that protrudes forward as it goes downward in a portion that extends vertically toward the payout outlet 832b in the payout passage 832d. And a lever mounting portion 832g for slidably mounting the ball release lever 844 in the vertical direction.

  The discharge passages 831d and 832d and the ball removal passages 831e and 832e of the front box 831 and the rear box 832 are formed in the same shape. The payout passages 831d and 832d are partitioned by a partition plate 841 up to the upstream side of the portion where the payout vanes 839 are arranged. Further, a payout detection sensor 842 is attached between the guide shelves 831f and 832f and the payout outlets 831b and 832b. In other words, the game balls that have flowed through the payout passage 831d of the front box 831 and the game balls that have flowed through the payout passage 832d of the rear box 832 are moved forward and backward between the front box 831 and the rear box 832 by the respective guide shelves 831f and 832f. It is brought close to the boundary and detected by one payout detection sensor 842.

  The driven gear 837 is a spur gear-like gear portion 837a meshing with the intermediate gear 836, and projects radially from the rear surface of the gear portion 837a at an angular interval of 60 degrees, and can be detected by the blade rotation detection sensor 840. A plurality of detection pieces 837b, and a connecting portion 837c that protrudes in a cylindrical shape from the center of the gear portion 837a to the rear and has an unevenness on the peripheral surface of the rear end and can be connected to the discharge vane 839. .

  The delivery blade 839 extends in a cylindrical shape from the front to the back, and projects in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the base cylinder 839a at regular intervals from the front end of the base cylinder 839a into which the shaft member 838 is inserted and the front end of the base cylinder 839a. (A plurality of (three) front blades 839b, and a plurality of (three) projecting from the rear end of the base cylindrical portion 839a in a direction perpendicular to the axial direction of the base cylindrical portion 839a at regular intervals in the circumferential direction so as to alternate with the front blades 839b The third part of the rear blade 839c, and a connected part projecting cylindrically forward from the front end of the base cylindrical part 839a and having projections and depressions that can be connected to the connecting part 837c of the driven gear 837 on the peripheral surface of the front end And 839 d.

  Three front blades 839b and three rear blades 839c of the discharge blade 839 are provided at intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction, and the rear blades 839c are arranged around the front blades 839b so as to be staggered. It is extended outward at an angle of 60 degrees in the direction. The payout blade 839 of the present embodiment is connected by a circular arc that is recessed toward the center between the three front blades 839b (rear blades 839c), and the diameter of the circular arc is the same as or slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, between the front blades 839b (rear blades 839c), a ball housing portion 839e capable of housing only one game ball is formed.

  Further, the diameter D1 of the outer circumference of the three front blades 839b and the rear blades 839c with respect to the axis of the base cylindrical portion 839a is formed to be 1 to 1.4 times the outer diameter of the gaming ball. In addition, the diameter D2 centered on the axis of the base cylindrical portion 839a to the portion closest to the axis of the base cylindrical portion 839a in the portion (ball housing portion 839e) of the arc between the front blades 839b (rear blades 839c) Is formed about 0.3 to 0.4 times the outer diameter of the game ball. That is, the depth [(diameter D1-diameter D2) / 2] from the outer periphery of the front blade 839b and the rear blade 839c to the most recessed portion of the ball housing portion 839e is 0.1 to 0. 0 of the outer diameter of the gaming ball. It is supposed to be 4 times.

  Therefore, about 3/10 (between 1/4 and 1/3) of the outer circumference of the gaming ball may be held by the portion (ball housing portion 839e) of the arc between the front blades 839b (the rear blades 839c). it can. In other words, a depth of about 1/5 (1/7 to 1/4) of the outer diameter of the gaming ball can be accommodated. As a result, the gaming balls in the payout paths 831d and 832d can be quickly stored in the space (ball housing portion 839e) between the front blades 839b (rear blades 839c).

  With the dispensing blade 839 of the present embodiment, the front blade 839b is located in the dispensing passage 831d of the front box 831 and the rear blade 839c is located in the dispensing passage 832d of the rear box 832 in a state where the dispensing device 830 is assembled. The game balls in the payout paths 831 d and 832 d can be paid out respectively. In addition, the payout blade 839 is disposed in a portion bent in a crank shape below the center of the total height of the front box 831 and the rear box 832 in the payout passages 831d and 832d. Specifically, in the payout passages 831d and 832d, the center of rotation of the payout vane 839 is located immediately below a portion extending vertically downward from near the center of the total height of the front box 831 and the rear box 832. In the portion of the discharge passages 831d and 832d that are bent in a crank shape, the wall (inner wall) on the side far from the discharge blade 839 is centered on the rotation center of the discharge blade 839, and from the outer periphery of the front blade 839b and the rear blade 839c. It is formed in an arc shape separated by a distance S smaller than the outer diameter of the game ball. In the present embodiment, the distance S is 0.7 to 0.9 times the outer diameter of the gaming ball. In other words, the distance from the most recessed portion of the ball housing portion 839e to the portion formed in the arc shape of the payout paths 831d and 832d is 1.03 to 1.1 times the outer diameter of the gaming ball. .

  Thus, the payout device 830 passes the crank-shaped portions of the payout passages 831 d and 832 d when the gaming balls having flowed down onto the payout blades 839 abut the outer periphery of the front blade 839 b and the rear blade 839 c. And can not be discharged downward from the delivery outlets 831 b and 832 b. On the other hand, when the gaming ball is housed in the ball housing portion 839e, it moves along with the rotation of the payout blade 839, and can pass through the cranked portion of the payout passage 831d, 832d, and from the payout outlet 831b, 832b Released downwards.

  In the payout device 830, the diameter D1 of the front blade 839b and the rear blade 839c is about 1.2 to 1.4 times the outer diameter of the game ball, and the ball housing portion 839e has a diameter 1 of the game ball. Since the depth of / 7 to ¼ is accommodated, the time required to accommodate the game ball can be shortened while reducing the outer diameter of the payout vane 839 as much as possible. Thereby, even if the payout blade 839 is rotated rapidly, the game ball can be accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 839e and sent to the payout outlets 831b and 832b. Therefore, the number of game balls paid out per unit time can be increased more than in the past, and the time taken to pay out the game balls can be shortened.

  The ball-removable movable piece 843 extends in a plate shape in the vertical and front / rear direction, and a lower portion is bent to form a body shape in a front view, and extends in a cylindrical shape in the front / rear direction at the upper end of the main body portion 843a. A shaft tube portion 843b whose both ends are rotatably attached to the front box 831 and the rear box 832 respectively, a projecting portion 843c projecting from the upper portion of the outer side surface of the main body portion 843a, and a main body portion 843a. A weight attaching portion 843d (see FIG. 105) including a through-hole penetrating in the front-rear direction in a lower portion bent in a square shape.

  In the assembled state of the dispensing device 830, the ball removal movable piece 843 is oriented such that the lower portion of the main body 843a extends obliquely to the lower left in front view, and the upper cylindrical portion 843b dispenses the front box 831 and the rear box 832 In the passages 831d and 832d, it is possible to turn at a position that extends obliquely from the pay-out entrances 831a and 832a to the lower right in the front view, and slightly outside the wall on the right in the front view that is slightly above the part that bends downward. Is attached to

  In the normal state, the payout device 830 of the present embodiment is configured such that the ball removal lever 844 is slid downward, and the lower portion of the ball removal lever 844 contacts the protrusion 843c of the ball removal movable piece 843 from the right side in front view. It touches. Thereby, the pivoting movable piece 843 is restricted from turning counterclockwise in a front view (see FIG. 105A).

  In this normal state, in the main portion 843a of the ball-extracting movable piece 843 bent in the V-shape, the upper side of the bent portion extends vertically, and the lower side of the bent portion is a front left lower left It extends to. And the lower end of the main-body part 843a is located in the vicinity of the site | part which the payout channel | paths 831d and 832d and the ball extraction channel | paths 831e and 832e branch. Therefore, the ball removal passages 831e and 832e are closed by the ball removal movable piece 843 (main body portion 843a), and the surface facing the left side of the main body portion 843a forms a part of the wall of the discharge passages 831d and 832d. doing.

  The unrolling movable piece 843 of this embodiment is formed so that the center of gravity of the unpunching movable piece 843 is located on the left side in a front view of a vertical line passing through the center of the axial cylinder portion 843b in a normal state. Although a force to rotate counterclockwise as viewed from the front acts on the anti-clockwise rotation by the ball removal lever 844, the normal state is maintained.

  When the ball removal lever 844 is slid upward from the normal state, the lower portion of the ball removal lever 844 moves away from the protruding portion 843c of the ball removal movable piece 843, and the ball removal movable piece 843 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front. Motion restrictions are lifted. Therefore, the ball removing movable piece 843 is pivoted counterclockwise by its own weight so that the center of gravity is positioned immediately below the shaft cylinder portion 843 b. The ball removal movable piece 843 rotates counterclockwise until the lower right side surface of the main body portion 843a contacts the left surface of the member forming the right side surface of the front box 831 and the rear box 832. (See FIG. 105 (b)). As a result, the ball releasing passages 831e and 832e are opened, and the gaming balls entering from the payout openings 831a and 832a contact the main body 843a of the ball releasing movable piece 843 in the middle of the payout passages 831d and 832d. The ball removing movable piece 843 is pivoted counterclockwise in a front view to open the ball removing passages 831e and 832e, and flows through the opened ball removing passages 831e and 832e and discharged downward from the ball removing outlets 831c and 832c. The Rukoto.

  In the present embodiment, since the ball removal movable piece 843 includes the weight attachment portion 843d, the ball attachment lever 844d is slid upward by screwing and attaching a weight made of a metal screw to the weight attachment portion 843d. Thus, when the restriction of the counterclockwise rotation in front view is released, the lower end of the ball removal movable piece 843 protrudes into the ball removal passages 831e and 832e due to the weight of the ball removal movable piece 843 and the weight of the weight. It is possible to facilitate rotation in a direction (counterclockwise in a front view).

  Further, in a normal state in which the ball extracting lever 844 is slid downward to close the ball extracting passages 831e and 832e, the gaming ball entering from the payout opening 831a and 832a is attached to the main body 843a of the ball releasing movable piece 843. Since the contact is made, the ball removal movable piece 843 can be vibrated by the contact of the game ball. Accordingly, dust or dirt sandwiched or invaded between the lower end of the ball removal movable piece 843 and the inner surfaces of the ball removal passages 831e and 832e can be removed by the vibration of the ball removal movable piece 843. It is possible to prevent the ball removal movable piece 843 from becoming unable to rotate by biting or dust.

  Further, since a metal screw as a weight can be screwed into and attached to the weight attaching portion 843d that is a through hole, the weight is removed from the ball-moving movable piece 843 even if the ball-moving movable piece 843 rotates frequently. The ball removal movable piece 843 can be maintained in a good state over a long period of time without being disengaged from the (weight attaching portion 843d). Further, since the weight can be easily attached to the ball removing movable piece 843 simply by screwing the metal screw into the weight attaching portion 843d, the labor for attaching the weight can be simplified, and the pachinko machine 1 can be assembled. The cost which concerns on can be reduced.

  By the way, when the ball removing passage 843e closes the ball removing passages 831e and 832e for a long period of time, fine dust adheres to the rotating shaft of the ball removing movable member 843 and the rotating shaft is rusted. The removal movable piece 843 may be difficult to rotate. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the game balls that have entered from the payout entrances 831a and 832a are brought into contact with the main body portion 843a of the ball removal movable piece 843. Therefore, the ball removal passage 831e is formed by the ball removal movable piece 843. , 832e from the closed state, when the ball release lever 844 for releasing the closure is slid upward to release the lock, the game ball comes into contact with the ball release movable piece 843, so that the impact of the contact The ball removal movable piece 843 can be rotated, and the ball removal passages 831 e and 832 e can be reliably opened.

  Therefore, when the ball removal lever 844 is operated to open the ball removal passages 831e and 832e, the ball removal movable piece 843 can be rotated favorably, so that the game ball can be removed with certainty. Workability at the time of maintenance can be improved.

[4-6 c. Upper full ball path unit]
The upper full ball path unit 850 of the payout unit 800 in this embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 106 and 107. FIG. The upper full tank path unit 850 is attached to the lower side of the dispensing device 830 in the dispensing unit base 801. The upper full tank path unit 850 is attached to the dispensing unit base 801 and has a box-like upper full tank base 851 open at the rear side, and is attached to the rear side of the upper full tank base 851 and the front side is open. A box-shaped upper full tank cover 852 and a discharge device pressing member 853 which is rotatably attached to the rear side of the upper full cover 852 and can press the discharge device 830 upward are provided.

  Also, the upper full-ball-path unit 850 has an upper outlet ball socket 850a which is open upwards so that gaming balls can pass upward in a region from the left-right center to the left in front view on the upper surface, and Is formed between the upper full base 851 and the upper full cover 852 which are opened upward so that game balls can pass therethrough and received by the upper payout ball receiving port 850a. An upper sphere storage passage 850c having a predetermined size for the game balls to circulate, a normal discharge port 850d opened downward at a position immediately below the upper payout ball receiving port 850a at the lower end of the upper sphere storage passage 850c, and an upper sphere storage A full tank discharge port 850e opening downward at a portion excluding the normal discharge port 850d at the lower end of the passage 850c, a normal discharge port 850d and a full tank discharge port 850e And a, and a partition piece 850f, which partitions the lower portion to the left and right in the upper sphere reservoir passage 850c protrudes upward from between.

  The upper full ball path unit 850 includes an upper ball passage 850g that guides a game ball that has entered from the upper ball removal inlet 850b downward, and an upper portion that opens downward at the lower end of the upper ball removal passage 850g. And a ball outlet 850h. The upper full sphere path unit 850 has a normal discharge port 850d, a full tank discharge port 850e, and an upper ball discharge outlet 850h arranged in order from the left side when viewed from the front and opened downward. In addition, the upper full tank path unit 850 includes a back cover attachment portion 854 for attaching the back cover 980 to the right end of the upper full tank base 851.

  The upper full ball passage unit 850 is assembled to the discharge unit 800, and the upper discharge ball socket 850a is located directly below the discharge outlets 831b and 832b of the discharge device 830, and the upper ball removal inlet 850b. However, it is located directly under the ball outlets 831c and 832c of the payout device 830. Also, when the upper full-tank passage unit 850 is assembled to the delivery unit 800, the normal outlet 850d, the full-tank outlet 850e, and the upper ball outlet 850h are normally guided paths of the lower full-tank passage unit 860. 861, a full tank guide path 862, and a lower ball-out guide path 865 are respectively opened immediately above the rear end openings (see FIG. 113).

  In the upper full ball path unit 850, the game balls that have been paid out by the payout device 830 and discharged downward from the payout outlets 831b and 832b enter the upper ball storage passage 850c from the upper payout ball receiving port 850a. In a state where the normal discharge port 850d at the lower end of the upper ball storage passage 850c is not closed, the gaming ball that has entered into the upper ball storage passage 850c from the upper discharge ball socket 850a opens immediately below the upper discharge ball socket 850a. The normal outlet 850d is released.

  When the inside of the upper tray 321 of the door frame 3 is filled with gaming balls and the gaming balls can not be stored, and furthermore, the inside of the normal guiding path 861 of the lower full ball path unit 860 is filled with gaming balls The outlet 850d is in a closed state. When the gaming ball enters into the upper ball storage passage 850c in this state, it is normally stored above the discharge port 850d. When the amount of gaming balls stored above the normal discharge port 850d becomes higher than that of the dividing pieces 850f, the gaming balls that have newly entered the upper ball storage passage 850c overcome the dividing pieces 850f and become full. It will be discharged downward from the tank discharge port 850e, and will be sent to the lower plate 322 through the full tank guide path 862 of the lower full ball path unit 860.

  In this manner, the upper full-tan ball path unit 850 automatically lowers the gaming balls paid out from the payout device 830 from the upper tray 321 according to the storage amount of the gaming balls in the upper tray 321 in the door frame 3. It can be distributed to the dish 322.

[4-6 d. Lower full tank path unit]
The lower full sphere path unit 860 of the payout unit 800 in the present embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. The lower full tank path unit 860 is attached to the lower side of the upper full path path unit 850 in the payout unit base 801. The lower full-ball path unit 860 guides the game balls released from the normal discharge port 850d of the upper full-ball path unit 850 forward and guides the game balls from the front end to the through-ball path 273 of the door frame 3. A full tank guide path 862 that guides the game ball released from the full tank discharge port 850e of the upper full ball path unit 850 forward and guides the game ball from the front end to the full tank reception port 274 of the door frame 3; A guideway opening / closing door 863 for opening and closing the front end opening of the induction passage 861 and the full induction passage 862 according to the opening / closing of the door frame 3 with respect to the main frame 4 And a closing spring 864 urging the front end opening of the

  In addition, the lower full-tan ball path unit 860 guides the gaming balls discharged from the upper ball outlet 850h of the upper full-tan ball path unit 850 forward and from above the center right end in the front-rear direction on the substrate unit base 910 of the substrate unit 900. A lower ball out guideway 865 is provided for release into.

  In the lower full ball path unit 860, a normal guide path 861, a full tank guide path 862, and a lower ball guide path 865 are arranged in order from the left side to the right side in a front view. The normal guiding path 861, the full tank guiding path 862, and the lower ball guiding path 865 have rear ends that open upward. The normal guiding path 861 and the full tank guiding path 862 have a width in which a plurality of game balls are arranged on the left and right sides, and extend forward to the vicinity of the front end of the main body frame 4 so that the front end side is lowered. Further, the full tank guide path 862 extends forward at a position lower than the normal guide path 861. As shown in the drawing, the normal guiding path 861, the full tank guiding path 862, and the lower ball guiding path 865 are formed by an upper case 866 and a lower case 867 that can be divided vertically.

  The guideway opening / closing door 863 is rotatably attached to a portion between the normal guideway 861 and the full guideway 862 at the front end of the lower case 867 and is rotated clockwise by a closing spring 864. It is energized. More specifically, a full tank guide path 862 that opens to the right of the front end opening of the normal guide path 861 in front view at the front end of the lower full sphere path unit 860 is one game for the normal guide path 861. It is placed at a lower position by the height of the ball. The guideway opening / closing door 863 is attached to the lower side of the normal guideway 861 and to the left side of the full tank guideway 862 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending in the front-rear direction.

  The guideway opening / closing door 863 includes a disk-like base portion 863a that is rotatably mounted, a first door plate portion 863b that extends obliquely from the base portion 863a to the upper left side and that can close the front end opening of the normal guideway 861. A second door plate portion 863c extending rightward from the base portion 863a and closing the front end opening of the full guide path 862, and an extending portion 863d extending from the base portion 863a obliquely to the lower left side in a flat plate shape. And an operating protrusion 863e that protrudes forward from the front surface of the distal end of the extending portion 863d and that can contact the door opening / closing contact portion 281 of the foul cover unit 270 in the door frame 3.

  Here, closing the front end openings of the normal guiding path 861 and the full tank guiding path 862 means that it is not necessary to seal the openings, and it is sufficient that the game ball cannot pass. The operating protrusion 863e is formed in a short arc shape with the base 863a as the center when viewed from the front, and the front end surface is inclined so as to protrude forward as it approaches the end in the counterclockwise direction. doing.

  The guide path opening / closing door 863 is urged clockwise by a closing spring 864, and the second door plate portion 863 c is located below the front end opening of the full tank guide path 862 at the front end of the lower case 867. By being in contact with the boss portion 867a protruding forward, rotation in the clockwise direction is restricted.

  In the lower full tank path unit 860 of the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, and the front end of the lower full tank path unit 860 is a through ball passage 273, a full tank receiving port 274, and a door opening / closing door in the foul cover unit 270 of the door frame 3. It is attached at a position facing the contact portion 281 (see FIG. 112). Since the guide path opening / closing door 863 is not in contact with the operating protrusion 863e when the door frame 3 is open with respect to the main body frame 4, the guide path opening / closing door 863 is biased by the closing spring 864. Thus, the second door plate 863 c is rotated in the clockwise direction as viewed from the front, and is stopped in a state where the second door plate 863 c is in contact with the boss 867 a of the lower case 867. In this state, the first door plate portion 863b and the second door plate portion 863c are positioned in front of the front end openings of the normal guide path 861 and the full tank guide path 862, and close the front end openings (FIG. 111). (See (a)). Therefore, in this state, the gaming balls in the normal induction passage 861 and the full induction passage 862 can not move forward from the front end opening, and even when the door frame 3 is opened, the normal induction passage 861 and full induction There are no spills of gaming balls from the road 862.

  Then, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the door open / close contact portion 281 of the far cover unit 270 in the door frame 3 abuts on the front end face of the operation projection 863e of the guideway opening / closing door 863 The inclination of the front end face of the projection 863 e acts on the urging force of the closing spring 864 to turn the guide path opening / closing door 863 in the counterclockwise direction in a front view. As a result, the first door plate 863 b and the second door plate 863 c that normally closed the front end opening of the induction passage 861 and the full induction passage 862 rotate in the direction away from the front end opening. In addition, the front end opening of the full tank guide path 862 is opened (see FIG. 111B). In this state, as shown in the figure, the first door plate portion 863b is positioned below the front end opening of the normal guide passage 861, and the second door plate portion 863c is positioned above the front end opening of the full tank guide passage 862. .

  In the state where the front end opening of the normal induction passage 861 and the full induction passage 862 is opened, the door frame 3 is completely closed with respect to the main body frame 4, and the normal induction passage 861 and the full The through ball passage 273 and the full ball receiving hole 274 of the far cover unit 270 in the door frame 3 are located on the front side of the front end opening of the guide passage 862 and penetrated from the side of the normal guide passage 861 and the full guide passage 862 A game ball can be delivered to the ball passage 273 and the full tank receiving port 274 side.

  In this way, the front end openings of the normal guideway 861 and the full tank guideway 862 are made different in the vertical direction, and the front end openings of the normal guideway 861 and the full tank guideway 862 are made by turning the guideway opening / closing door 863. Since opening and closing is performed, the operation range of the guideway opening / closing door 863 can be made as narrow as possible, and the opening / closing mechanism of the normal guideway 861 and the full-way guideway 862 can be downsized. Therefore, the space for other members can be relatively enlarged, and the internal space of the pachinko machine 1 can be used more effectively.

  In the payout unit 800 of the present embodiment, more gaming balls from the payout device 830 in a state where the upper tray 321 of the door frame 3 is full of gaming balls and can not release the gaming balls to the upper tray 321. When the player pays out, the game balls can be stored until the inside of the normal guiding path 861 of the lower full-tan ball path unit 860 is full of game balls. Then, when the game ball is further paid out from the payout device 830 in a state where the normal guide path 861 is full of game balls, the game ball is normally released in the upper ball storage passage 850c of the upper full tank path unit 850. If it stays above the outlet 850d and exceeds the partition piece 850f, it flows to the full tank outlet 850e side, and the full tank channel 862 of the lower full tank path unit 860 from the full tank outlet 850e, The payout of the game ball is automatically switched to the lower plate 322 through the foul cover unit 270. Thereafter, when the game balls are further paid out from the payout device 830 and the lower plate 322 is filled with the game balls in addition to the upper plate 321, the foul cover unit 270 is not able to supply the game balls to the lower plate 322. A game ball is stored in the storage passage 277. The upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 are filled with gaming balls when the movable piece 278 is rotated by the storing passage in the storage passage 277 and detected by the full detection sensor 279. Is notified, and the payout of the gaming ball by the payout device 830 is temporarily stopped until the detection of the movable piece 278 by the full tank detection sensor 279 is cancelled.

  The game ball is stored until the movable piece 278 is detected in the storage passage 277 of the far cover unit 270, for example, when the payout device 830 stops the payout of the game ball in response to the detection of the movable piece 278 by the full tank detection sensor 279. In such a state, it is possible to fill the upstream storage passage 277, the full tank guide path 862 of the lower full sphere path unit 860, and the upper sphere storage path 850c of the upper full tank path unit 850. When the game ball is paid out, the payout of the game ball by the payout device 830 may be stopped. As a result, more game balls can be stored than in conventional pachinko machines, so that in a gaming state in which many game balls are paid out, such as during a big hit game, the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 are released by the game balls being paid out. It is possible to reduce the need to worry about being filled with game balls, and to allow the player to concentrate on the big hit game and have fun.

[4-7. Substrate unit]
The board | substrate unit 900 of the main body frame 4 in this embodiment is demonstrated with reference to FIG. 91 thru | or FIG. The board unit 900 of the main body frame 4 includes a board unit base 910 that is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600, and a speaker for bass that is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 on the left side when viewed from the front of the board unit base 910. A speaker unit 920 having 921, a power supply board box 930 that is attached to the right side of the front view on the rear side of the board unit base 910 and accommodates a power supply board therein, and is attached to the rear side of the speaker unit 920. The interface control board box 940 in which the interface control board is housed, and the payout control board 951 that is mounted across the power supply board box 930 and the interface control board box 940 and controls the payout of the game ball is housed inside. A payout control board box 950 .

  The board unit 900 includes a door frame relay board 911 attached to the front face of the board unit base 910 so as to face forward from the connection opening 606 of the main body frame base 600. The door frame relay board 911 relays the connection between the payout control board 951, the main control board 1310, and the peripheral control board 1510, and the door body relay board attached to the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3. Is for. The payout device 830 is controlled by the payout control board 951 housed in the payout control board box 950.

[5. Overall configuration of the game board]
Next, the overall configuration of the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 114 to 120 and the like. FIG. 114 is a front view of the game board. 115 and 116 are diagrams for explaining an internal passage through which a game ball received in the ordinary electric winning award 2011 flows down. 117 is a front view of the game board excluding the front unit and the back unit, FIG. 118 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of FIG. 117 as seen from the front, and FIG. 119 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled and was seen from the back. FIG. 120 is an explanatory diagram showing, in an enlarged manner, a part of the function display unit from the front in a state where the game board is attached to the pachinko machine.

  The game board 5 has a game area 5a in which a game ball is hit when the player operates the handle 302 of the handle unit 300. In addition, the game board 5 is attached to the front component 1000 which divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a and the outer shape is substantially square in a front view, and is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000. Rows are attached by inserting a game ball into the game area 5a which is attached to the plate-shaped game panel 1100 to be partitioned, the substrate holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100, and the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 And a main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 for controlling the game contents to be played. A plurality of obstacle nails that come into contact with the game ball are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement (not shown) in a portion that is in the game area 5a on the front surface of the game panel 1100.

  In addition, the game board 5 displays a game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a function display unit 1400 that is attached to the lower left corner of the front component member 1000 so as to be visible to the player side, and a game panel A peripheral control unit attached to the rear side of 1100, and a game board side effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a in front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image. ing. In addition, the game board side effect display device 1600 is attached to the back surface of the game board 5, and the peripheral control unit is attached to the back surface of the game board side effect display device 1600.

  The gaming panel 1100 is formed so that the outer periphery is slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000 and holds the outer periphery of the transparent flat panel panel 1110 and the panel plate 1110. And a frame-like panel holder 1120 to which the back unit is attached at the rear surface. The back unit is a box attached to the back surface of the panel holder 1120 and open at the front, and is attached to the back box having a square opening in the back wall or to the back surface of the back box. A lock mechanism or the like for removably attaching the effect display device 1600 is provided.

  More specifically, the back unit is a back left middle decoration unit mounted at the front end in the back box at an upper position from the vertical center on the left side in front view, and the back box below the opening in the back box Back mounted in the vicinity of the rear wall of the back, and a back up left movable effect unit mounted on the left in a front view above the opening in the back box, and a front view of the opening in the back box The rear left movable production unit attached to the left side, the rear middle movable production unit installed from the center in the left-right direction to the right end in front view above the opening in the back box, and the opening in the back box And a front and rear movable presentation unit attached to the front of the back and rear and rear movable presentation unit.

[Game board configuration]
Hereinafter, the board surface configuration of the game board will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 114 to 116.

  As shown in FIG. 114, a game board side effect display device 1600 having a liquid crystal display type display area is disposed substantially at the center of the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1. In the game board side effect display device 1600, a variation game in which a plurality of kinds of decoration symbols respectively included in a plurality of symbol rows (three rows in this embodiment) are variably displayed is performed, and executed in relation to the variation game. The various display effects are displayed as images.

  As will be described later, the function display unit 1400 provided at the lower left of the game board 5 includes a first special symbol display 1403 including eight LEDs, a second special symbol display 1405 including eight LEDs, and the like. Has been. In the first special symbol display unit 1403 and the second special symbol display unit 1405, symbol variation is performed in which the special symbol is varied and displayed. The special symbol is a symbol for notification showing the result of the judgment (big hit judgment) whether or not the big hit. In the present embodiment, the variation game using the decorative symbol is stopped after the symbol variation for displaying the special symbol on the first special symbol display unit 1403 or the second special symbol display unit 1405 is started. The game is played as a single game. Hereinafter, symbol variation performed in the first special symbol display 1403 may be referred to as "first side symbol variation", and symbol variation performed in the second special symbol indicator 1405 is referred to as "second side symbol variation" Sometimes.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when a symbol change is started, which of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is used to determine the big hit using the special symbol Is to be selected. Then, when the big hit determination using the special symbol on the selected side is performed, the control for starting the symbol variation on the symbol display corresponding to the special symbol on the selected side based on the result of the big hit determination is performed. (Main control board 1310). In the symbol variation started in this way, the big hit symbol (big hit display result) which is the stop mode of the special symbol that can recognize the big hit after maintaining the fluctuating state for only the variation time selected based on the result of the big hit judgment The player will recognize whether they have won the big hit or lost (losing) by stopping in the form of one of the off-line symbols (out-of-line display results) that is a special symbol stop mode that can recognize Will be able to When the jackpot symbol is stopped in the appearance, a jackpot game is awarded by the player for which it is possible to obtain a winning ball.

  On the other hand, the game board side effect display device 1600 is configured with a display area larger than each of the symbol displays 1403 and 1405, and each of the plurality of symbol rows (three rows in the present embodiment) in the display region. A plurality of types of decorative symbols (a plurality of types of numbers) included are displayed larger than the special symbols.

  The game board side effect display device 1600 displays display results corresponding to the display results of the symbol displays 1403 and 1405. More specifically, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display unit 1403 or the second special symbol display unit 1405, the game board side effect display device 1600 also displays a special symbol combination (all rows). The game board side effect display device 1600 is displayed when the symbol combination is the same symbol, the symbol combination etc.) is determined and stopped, and the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 is dislocated. The symbol combination at the time of losing (such as a symbol combination in which the symbols in all rows are not the same symbol) is displayed in a fixed stop state. As a result, the player can more easily recognize whether the player has won the big hit or lost (losing) by confirming the variation game played on the game board side effect display device 1600.

  Further, in the game board side effect display device 1600, the variation display of the decorative symbol is stopped in the order of left row → right row → middle row when viewed from the player side, and two specific rows (in this embodiment) When the same decorative pattern is temporarily displayed in the form of being preceded by 2 lines on the left and right, the reach state is formed. In the present embodiment, among the plurality of symbol columns, the left column is the first stop column, the right column is the second stop column, the middle column is the third stop column, and the left and right columns form a reach state. It becomes.

  Here, the "temporary display" may appear during the period when the special symbol is maintained in the changing state in the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405, This is a state in which a specific decorative design is displayed in a swinging fluctuation state within the display area of the effect display device 1600. On the other hand, “definite stop display” can appear when the special symbol is stopped on the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 or after that, and is displayed on the game board side. In the display area of the effect display device 1600, any decorative symbol does not fluctuate and is stopped.

  As will be described later, the function display unit 1400 further includes a first special hold number indicator 1404 including two LEDs for displaying the number of holds related to the reception of the game ball in the first start port 2002, A second special hold number indicator 1406 consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of reservations pertaining to the acceptance of the game ball to the second start port 2004, and a normal judgment result judged by the passage of the game ball against the gate part 2003 A normal symbol display 1402 consisting of four LEDs and a normal storage indicator 1408 consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of reservations related to the passage of the game ball to the gate portion 2003 are provided.

  Here, the first special number-of-retentions display 1404 informs the player of the number of stored big hit determinations on the first special symbol side (hereinafter also referred to as the first number of pending storages) which has been suspended in an unexecuted state. To do. While the first reserved memory number is incremented by one when the game ball is won in the first starting opening 2002 disposed in the game board 5, the first side symbol variation is started, and the number is "1". Subtracted. Accordingly, when a game ball is received in the first start port 2002 within the period in which the first side symbol variation is performed, the first reserved memory number is further added and a predetermined upper limit number (first upper limit number, In the present embodiment, "4" is accumulated.

  In addition, the second special number-of-retentions display 1406 informs the player of the number of stored big hit determinations on the second special symbol side (hereinafter also referred to as the second number of pending storages) which is being held in an unexecuted state. Is. The second reserved memory number is incremented by “1” when a game ball wins the second starting port 2004 arranged on the game board 5, while “1” by starting the second side symbol variation. Subtracted. Therefore, when the game ball is received in the second start port 2004 within the period during which the second side symbol variation is being performed, the second reserved storage number is further added and the predetermined upper limit number (the second upper limit number, In the present embodiment, "4" is accumulated.

  Further, in the normal symbol display 1402, when it is determined whether or not it is a normal hit (normal determination), normal symbol variation is performed to vary a plurality of types of normal symbols based on the result of the normal determination. The normal symbol variation is a normal hit symbol (ordinary hit display result) which is a normal symbol stop mode capable of recognizing the normal hit after maintaining the fluctuation state for the fluctuation time selected based on the result of the normal judgment, Normally, the player is stopped in the form of one of the normal symbols that can be recognized as a normal symbol (the result of the error display). You will be able to recognize what you did. In addition, when it stops in the form which a normal winning symbol appears, the below-mentioned normal electric prize winning opening 2011 is made into an open state.

  Also, the normal hold indicator 1408 informs the player of the number of stored normal determinations (hereinafter also referred to as a general drawing hold number) in the unexecuted state. While the common drawing reserve memory number is added by “1” when the game ball is received by the gate unit 2003 disposed on the game board 5, “1” is subtracted by normal symbol fluctuation being started. Therefore, if a game ball is received by the gate unit 2003 (individually, the gate unit 2003a or the gate unit 2003b) within a period during which the normal symbol variation is performed, the number of the reserved figure storage is further added and the predetermined number of Is accumulated up to the upper limit number (the upper limit number of the common drawing, “4” in the present embodiment).

  Moreover, in this embodiment, it is comprised so that the 1st side symbol change and the 2nd side symbol change may not be performed simultaneously, and the symbol change using the special symbol (the 1st side symbol change or the 2nd side symbol change) If the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number are both equal to or greater than “1”, the second side symbol variation based on the second reserved memory number is executed with priority. Moreover, in the present embodiment, symbol variation (first symbol variation or second symbol variation) using a special symbol and a normal symbol variation can be simultaneously performed.

  Here, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the first starting opening 2002 is configured to include, for example, a first starting winning opening 2002a and a first non-electric starting winning opening 2002b.

  The first start winning opening 2002a is provided as a receiving opening that is always opened immediately below the game board side effect display device 1600 so that game balls can always be received. A switch for detecting a game ball is provided as a first starting opening sensor 4002 (see FIG. 123).

  The first non-electric start winning opening 2002b is arranged as a receiving port having a first driven member operable between an open state and a closed state at the lower right of the game board side effect display device 1600, A switch for detecting a game ball that has won a prize is provided as a first starting opening sensor 4002 (see FIG. 123) also in the back of the receiving port. The switch in the first start winning opening 2002a and the switch provided in the first non-electric start winning opening 2002b are separately provided, and the first non-electric start winning opening 2002b is opened (predetermined number). It is desirable to monitor the relationship between the number of accepted game balls and the number of accepted game balls to determine an error. It should be noted that while the first non-electric start winning opening 2002b can receive the right-handed game ball when in the open state, it does not receive the game ball by any game method when in the closed state. They are arranged in a structure (see FIG. 114).

  Note that, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the first non-electric start winning prize port 2002b uses the weight of the game ball received at the other receiving port to bring the first driven member into the open state. It is provided to operate or keep open until the limit time for keeping open is not fixed and a predetermined number (for example, 1 or 2) of game balls can be received. It has the following structure, which will be described later.

  When a game ball is received by the first start port 2002 (the first start winning port 2002a or the first non-electric start winning port 2002b) and the first start port sensor 4002 detects the game ball, the first reserved memory is stored. On the condition that the number does not reach the upper limit, the jackpot determination on the first special symbol side is newly put on hold (more precisely, the random numbers on the first special symbol side acquired when detected) ) Is performed, and a process of increasing the number of first pending storages by “1” is performed (main control board 1310). At this time, a process of paying out a predetermined number of prize balls (game balls) is also performed (payout control board 951).

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the second start port 2004 is provided as, for example, a second non-electric start winning port.

  That is, the second start port (second non-electric start start winning port) 2004 has a second follower member that can operate between the open state and the closed state at the lower right of the game board side effect display device 1600. A switch arranged as an entrance and detecting a winning game ball is provided as a second starting opening sensor 4004 (see FIG. 123) also in the back of the receiving port. It should be noted that the second non-electric start winning opening 2004 can accept a right-handed game ball when in the open state, but does not accept any game ball when in the closed state. They are arranged in a structure (see FIG. 114).

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the second starting port (the second non-electric start winning opening) 2004 also uses the own weight of the game ball received in the other receiving port to follow the second follower. The member operates in the open state, and the open time is maintained until the limit time for maintaining the open state is not fixed and a predetermined number (for example, one or two) of game balls are accepted And other special structures, which will be described later.

  Then, when the game ball is received by the second start opening (the second non-electric start winning opening) 2004 and the game ball is detected by the second start opening sensor 4004, the second reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value As a result, a process of placing a new jackpot determination on the second special symbol side on hold (more precisely, storing various random numbers on the second special symbol side obtained when detected) is performed, A process of increasing the second pending storage number by "1" is performed (main control board 1310). At this time, a process of paying out a predetermined number of prize balls (game balls) is also performed (payout control board 951).

  In addition, on the lower side of the game board 5 flowing between the first non-electric start winning opening 2002b and the second starting opening (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004, the gate portion 2003a through which the game ball can pass Is provided. The gate portion 2003a is provided with a switch for detecting a passed game ball as a gate sensor 4003 (see FIG. 123). In the illustration of FIG. 114, the gate portion 2003a is arranged below the first non-electric start winning opening 2002b and the second non-electric start winning opening 2004. However, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, The arrangement position of the gate part 2003a is not limited to this, and it is only necessary to be disposed at a position where a right-handed game ball can pass, such as above the normal electric winning opening 2011.

  Further, a gate portion 2003b through which a game ball can pass is disposed on the left side of the center combination 2500 in the game board 5 and in the middle of a flow path that flows down toward the first start winning opening 2002a. The gate unit 2003b is also provided with a switch for detecting the passing game ball as a gate sensor (not shown). Such an arrangement position of the gate 2003b is an example, but in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the gate portion 2003a is in a right-handed game (specifically, a short-time game state or a probable game state). While the game ball is disposed at a position where it can pass, the gate unit 2003b can be disposed at a position where the game ball can pass during a left-handed game (specifically, the normal game state) . In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the gate unit 2003 is disposed at a position where the game ball can pass either right or left (that is, the game medium passes through the gate in the short game state or the normal game state) If possible, the number of gate portions 2003 may be one (the gate portions 2003a and 2003b may not be provided separately).

  When the game ball passes through the gate unit 2003 (gate units 2003a and 2003b) and the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 4003, the normal determination is newly made on the condition that the number of common drawing reserve memories has not reached the upper limit. While the processing to put on hold (more precisely, storing various random numbers of the normal symbol acquired when detected) is performed, the processing to increase the number of common drawing reservations by "1" is performed. (Main control board 1310). However, at this time, processing of paying out a predetermined number of winning balls (game balls) is not performed. In the following description, a series of processes including the acquisition of various random numbers of normal symbols and the execution of the normal determination as described above may be referred to as a normal lottery.

  As will be described later, in the game area 5a provided in the game board 5, on the right side of the center role 2500, when the normal lottery is won as a result of the normal symbol change, the open state is displayed. A normal electric winning hole 2011 is provided which has movable members (a pair of movable pieces) which can operate as described above, and the gaming ball can be received when the movable member is in the open state. As described above, the normal symbol variation is performed in order to derive the determination result (whether or not the normal winning is achieved) whether or not the movable member of the normal electric winning award 2011 is in the open state. Then, it becomes easy to win the game ball in the normal electric winning opening 2011.

  By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the first start winning opening 2002a is on the right side of the center accessory 2500 rather than when the game ball rolls (left-handed) from the left side of the center accessory 2500. The game ball is arranged to be more difficult to win when the game ball is rolled (right-handed) (in the present embodiment, the player can only win when left-handed). On the other hand, in the first non-electric start winning opening 2002b, the second start opening (second non-electric start starting winning opening) 2004, the gate portion 2003a, and the normal electric winning opening 2011, a game ball is placed from the left side of the center accessory 2500. It becomes easier to win when the game ball is rolled (right-handed) from the right side (specific area) of the center character 2500 than when it is rolled (left-handed) (in this embodiment, right-handed) It is arranged to be able to win only at the time).

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, as described above, since the gate unit 2003b is disposed on the left side of the center role 2500, even when a left-handed game is performed (for example, the normal gaming state), the gate unit When a game ball passes through 2003 b, a normal lottery is performed, and when the result of the normal hit is derived, the normal electric winning hole 2011 is opened. However, in order to win the game ball in the ordinary electric winning opening 2100 opened in this manner, it is also necessary to hit the right.

  In addition, in the game board 5 according to the present embodiment, a plurality of general winning ports 2001, the first start port 2002, or the second start port that are always open so as to be able to receive game balls that are driven into the game area 5a. When the big hit is decided as a result of the big game decision based on the acceptance of the game ball to 2004, when it wins to the big hit it collects the big game winning port 2005 which reception of the game ball is made possible, and the game ball which flowed down to the lowest end An out port 1003 for discharging the game area 5a is provided.

  Here, as illustrated in FIG. 114, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the large winning opening 2005 is disposed in the lower part on the right side of the center of the game board 5. By arranging the big winning opening 2005 at such a position, the game ball hit by the right hand can reach the vicinity of the big winning opening 2005, so the big winning game in which the big winning opening 2005 is opened. In the state, a right-handed game is recommended.

[About the first non-electric start winning opening 2002b, the second starting opening (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004, and the normal electric winning opening 2011]
As shown in FIG. 114, the normal electric winning award port 2011 includes a movable member 2011a that opens and closes by an operation of a universal solenoid 2107 (see FIG. 123), and the movable member 2011a operates to an open state. By doing this, it becomes easy to receive the game ball hit to the right. Further, a switch for detecting a winning game ball is provided as a general electric prize sensor 4006 (see FIG. 123) in the back of the normal electric prize opening 2011, and it is predetermined that it is detected by the general electric prize sensor 4006. A process of paying out the winning balls (game balls) of the determined quantity is performed (payout control board 951).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 115, the first passage 2011 d, the second passage 2011 e, and the third passage 2011 c are branched into three branches in the back (downstream side) of the common electric winning sensor 4006 of the ordinary electric winning hole 2011. It is formed in parallel as a path. In the first passage 2011d, a switch for detecting a game ball flowing down the first passage 2011d is arranged as a first side operation sensor, and it is detected that a game ball that has won a prize in the normal electric winning opening 2011 has passed the first passage 2011d. Is possible. On the other hand, the second passage 2011e is provided with a switch for detecting a game ball flowing down the second passage 2011e as a second operation sensor, and the game ball that has won the normal electric winning opening 2011 has passed through the second passage 2011e. Can be detected. In addition, a switch for detecting a game ball flowing down the third passage 2011c is disposed as a third operation sensor, and the game ball winning a prize in the ordinary electric winning hole 2011 has passed through the third passage 2011c. Can be detected.

  In addition, the game ball that has won the ordinary electric winning hole 2011 between the general electric winning sensor 4006 and the first passage 2011d, the second passage 2011e, and the third passage 2011c is the first passage 2011d, the second passage 2011e, the second The distributing member 2011b which distributes to any of the three passages 2011c is disposed.

  The distributing member 2011b is shown in the first position (FIG. 115A) which blocks the second passage 2011e and the third passage 2011c but does not block the first passage 2011d by the operation of the distributing solenoid 2109 (see FIG. 123). The second passage (the position shown in FIG. 115B) that blocks the first passage 2011d and the third passage 2011c but not the second passage 2011e, and the first passage 2011d and the second passage 2011e. It is disposed so as to be displaceable between a third position (a position shown in FIG. 115C) that blocks the third passage 2011c but blocks the third passage 2011c. In the following description, another term may be used for the arrangement of the sorting member 2011b when indicating the first position to the third position. That is, the first position is described as "rightward", the second position as "leftward", and the third position as "inward" based on the direction in which the game ball is guided, or a series of flows by the guidance of the game ball (( The first position is described as “special route 1”, the second position as “special route 2”, and the third position as “off route”, based on the variation game of the special symbol given an acquisition opportunity by the details described later). Do.

  Also, a first actuation trigger area (not shown) is provided in the first passage 2011d, and a second actuation trigger area (not shown) is provided in the second passage 2011e. The game ball passing through the first passage 2011d always passes through the first operation trigger area, and the game ball passing through the second passage 2011e necessarily passes through the second operation trigger area. And the game ball which passes the 3rd channel | path 2011c cannot pass either a 1st operation opportunity area | region or a 2nd operation opportunity area | region. For convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the third passage 2011c is provided with a “separation operation region”. However, even if a game ball passes through the separation operation region, no special operation is actually performed.

  Therefore, when the sorting member 2011b is disposed at the first position (FIG. 115A), the passage of the game ball to the second passage 2011e and the third passage 2011c is restricted, while the first passage Passage of the gaming ball to 2011 d is permitted, and the gaming ball is guided to the first actuation trigger area (see FIG. 116 (A)). Further, when the sorting member 2011b is disposed at the second position (FIG. 115B), the passage of the game ball to the first passage 2011d and the third passage 2011c is restricted while the second passage 2011e. The game ball is allowed to pass through to the second operation opportunity region (see FIG. 116B), and the sorting member 2011b is disposed at the third position (FIG. 115C). If it is, the passage of the game ball to the first passage 2011d and the second passage 2011e is restricted while the passage of the game ball to the third passage 2011c is allowed. It is guided to a route that does not pass through either the first operation trigger region or the second operation trigger region (see FIG. 116C).

  That is, the distributing member 2011b distributes whether the game ball winning the ordinary electric winning hole 2011 passes the first operation trigger area or the second operation trigger area or does not pass any operation trigger area. It will be.

  In other words, the first passage 2011d in the ordinary electric prize winning port 2011 is provided so as to extend at least to a position facing the first non-electric start winning prize opening 2002b in the front-rear direction using the space behind the panel plate 1110. There is. And the said 1st operation opportunity area | region (not shown) is provided in this opposing position, The game ball which flows down in this 1st operation opportunity area | region is a predetermined member (1st operation mechanism) with the dead weight. Is employed to move the driven member of the first non-electric start winning opening 2002b to the open state (so-called special route 1).

  More specifically, a first operating mechanism (not shown) is provided on the back side of the first non-electric start winning award port 2002b. The first operating mechanism is configured to open a first non-electric opening / closing blade (not shown) by following a game ball passing through a first operation trigger area in the first passage 2011d, and to follow the first non-operating blade. By opening the driven member of the electric start winning opening 2002b, the first non-electric start winning opening 2002b is opened, and winning of the game ball is permitted. That is, on the condition that the gaming ball has passed through the first actuation trigger area in the normal motorized winning opening 2011, the first non-electric opening / closing blade can be mechanically opened according to the passage of the gaming ball. It is supposed to work.

  Further, the first operation mechanism is in contact with the upper limit number (the first upper limit number, two in this embodiment as an example in the present embodiment) of game balls winning in the first non-electric start winning opening 2002b. Is closed, and the first non-electric start start winning opening 2002b is closed, so that winning of the game ball is prohibited. That is, the first non-electric open / close blade is mechanical when the game ball wins the first non-electric start winning opening 2002b with the first upper limit number determined in advance as the upper limit after the game ball passes through the first operation trigger area It is supposed to operate in the closed state.

  On the other hand, the second passage 2011e in the normal motorized winning opening 2011 is positioned opposite to the second starting opening (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004 in the front-rear direction using the back side space of the panel plate 1110 It is provided to extend at least up to. And the said 2nd operation opportunity area | region (not shown) is provided in this opposing position, The game ball which flows down in this 2nd operation opportunity area | region is a predetermined member (2nd operation mechanism) with the dead weight. A structure is adopted in which the driven member of the second start port (second non-electric start winning port) 2004 is moved to the open state by moving the second start port (the second route).

  More specifically, a second operation mechanism (not shown) is provided on the back side of the second start port (second non-electric start winning port) 2004. The second actuation mechanism opens the second non-electric open / close blade (not shown) by coming into contact with the game ball passing through the second actuation trigger area in the second passage 2011e and follows the second actuation. By opening the driven member of the mouth (second non-electric start winning prize opening) 2004, the second start opening (second non-electric start winning prize opening) 2004 is opened and the winning of the game ball is allowed. Ru. That is, the second non-electric opening / closing blade can be mechanically opened in accordance with the passage of the game ball on the condition that the game ball has passed through the second operation opportunity area in the normal electric winning award port 2011. It is supposed to work.

  In addition, the second operation mechanism contacts the gaming balls of the upper limit number (the second upper limit number, two as an example in the present embodiment) winning in the second starting opening (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004. The second non-electric opening / closing blade is closed, and the second starting port (second non-electric starting start winning port) 2004 is closed, so that winning of the game ball is prohibited. In other words, the second non-electric opening and closing blade plays a game in the second start opening (second non-electric start winning opening) 2004 with the second upper limit number predetermined in advance after the game ball passes through the second operation trigger area as the upper limit When the ball wins, it is mechanically operated in a closed state.

  On the other hand, unlike the first passage 2011d and the second passage 2011e described above, the third passage 2011c in the normal motorized winning opening 2011 is not related to the operation mechanism for operating any non-electric opening and closing blade, and the game When the ball passes through the third passage 2011c, a predetermined winning ball is paid out as a mere winning of the ordinary electric winning hole 2011 (a so-called off route). In addition, also when a game ball passes the 1st passage 2011d and the 2nd passage 2011e, the above-mentioned predetermined prize ball is paid out.

  The distribution of such game balls in the normal motorized winning opening 2011 may be made visible to the player. Specifically, by forming the front surface of the ordinary electric prize winning port 2011 (at least the front surface from the sorting member 2011b to the entrance of the first passage 2011d, the second passage 2011e, and the third passage 2011c) with a visible material. Since the flow path of the game ball in the normal electric winning opening 2011 can be viewed from the player, it is possible to enhance the fun of the game.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, as illustrated in FIG. 115 (A) and the like, on the respective paths of the first passage 2011d, the second passage 2011e, and the third passage 2011c in the ordinary electric winning award port 2011. There may be provided sensors 2011g-2011i for detecting the passing gaming balls, and the number of gaming balls passing through each passage can be detected by such sensors 2011g-2011i. If the main control board 1310 compares the total number of game balls detected by the sensors 2011g to 2011i with the number of game balls detected by the general power prize sensor 4006, the result of the comparison is consistent. In this case, it can be determined that the operation is normal, and if it does not match (that is, if the number of balls entered into the ordinary electric winning hole 2011 does not match the number of detected game balls) It can be determined that the abnormal state due to It is preferable to notify an error when it is determined that the state is abnormal. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the player's profit fluctuates depending on which path the game ball passes in the normal electric winning award port 2011, the provision of the sensors 2011g to 2011i in this way makes it illegal or By making it possible to determine the detection of an abnormal state due to a failure, the security of the gaming machine can be enhanced.

  As described above, the first passage 2011d, the first operation trigger area, the first non-electric start start winning port 2002b, the first start port sensor 4002, and the first side operation sensor respectively correspond as mechanisms relating to the first side symbol variation. It is provided as. Further, the second passage 2011e, the second operation opportunity region, the second start port (second non-electric start start winning port) 2004, the second start port sensor 4004, and the second side operation sensor are related to the second side symbol variation. It is provided to correspond as a mechanism. And the passage of the game ball to each passage 2011d, 2011e (each operation opportunity area) can be independently detected by a plurality of systems.

  Further, the first non-electric start winning opening 2002b according to the present embodiment is a non-electric accessory, and includes a first non-electric opening / closing blade that operates in an open state by the operation of the first operation mechanism described above. It has become. The non-motorized part is a part other than the motorized part that is operated by electric power, and the driven member of the first non-motorized start winning opening 2002b is opened by the operation of the first non-motorized opening / closing blade. By operating to the state, the game ball is easily received in the first non-electric start start winning opening 2002b.

  Similarly, the second non-electric start winning opening 2002b is also a non-electric accessory, and includes a second non-electric opening / closing blade that operates in an open state by the operation of the second operation mechanism. . The non-motorized part is a part other than the motorized part that operates by electric power, and the driven member of the second non-electric start winning opening 2002b is opened by the operation of the second non-electric opening / closing blade. By operating to a state, a game ball becomes easy to be received in the second non-electric start winning prize opening 2002b.

  And, as described above, the first non-electric start winning opening 2002b and the second non-electric starting winning opening 2002b are limited to maintain the open state once their driven members operate to the open state. The open state is maintained only until the predetermined number (two in this case) of game balls is accepted because the time is not fixed. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the first non-electric start winning opening 2002b and the second non-electric starting winning opening 2002b in the open state even after the later-described short time gaming state ends and the normal gaming state is controlled. It will be possible to enjoy the playability and the presentation using this.

[5-1. Front component]
Next, the front component 1000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 118 and 119 and the like. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape in a front view, an inner shape penetrating in a substantially circular shape in the front-rear direction, and the outer periphery of the game area 5a is divided by the inner shape of the inner shape. The front component 1000 is an outer rail 1001 which extends in an arc shape along the circumferential direction clockwise from the lower end on the left side to the left side in front view and extends to the upper right oblique side passing through the upper end in the left and right direction in front view; The inner rail 1002 disposed inside the front component 1000 substantially along the outer rail 1001 and extending in an arc shape from the center lower portion in the front view left-right direction to the upper left diagonal upper part And an out guiding portion 1003 which is formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and is inclined to be lower toward the rear.

  Further, the front component 1000 includes a lower right rail 1004 and a lower right rail 1004 which are linearly inclined such that the right end is slightly higher from the right end in front view of the out guiding portion 1003 to the vicinity of the right side of the front component 1000. The right rail 1005 extending from the right end of the front component member 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 along the right side of the front component member 1000, and the upper portion being curved inward of the front component member 1000, and the upper end of the right rail 1005 and the outer rail A stop portion 1006 is connected to the upper end of the base 1001 and is in contact with the game ball rolled along the outer rail 1001.

  Further, the front component member 1000 is pivotally supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1002, and has a closed position and a front-view clock extending upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close the space between the front rail and the outer rail 1001. A backflow prevention member that is rotated by a spring (not shown) so as to be able to rotate only between the open position where the outer rail 1001 is opened by rotating in the rotating direction and to return to the closed position side. It has 1007.

  Furthermore, the front component 1000 is located outside the portion of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 which extends substantially perpendicularly from the lower end, the lower side of the out guiding portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and the outer side of the right rail 1005, In each part, it has a crime prevention recess 1008 recessed rearward from the front end. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the crime prevention recess 1008 has a rear projection 202 protruding to the rear of the crime prevention cover 200 in the door frame 3. It will be in the inserted state. As a result, the space between the crime prevention cover 200 and the game board 5 (the front component 1000) is intricately bent by the rear projection 202 of the crime prevention cover 200 and the crime prevention recess 1008 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire enters the game area 5a through the space between the security cover 200 and the front structural member 1000 from below the front of the board 5, it will be blocked by the rear protrusion 202 and the security recess 1008. , And can prevent unauthorized tools from entering the gaming area 5a.

  The front component member 1000 includes a plurality of positioning protrusions 1009 that protrude rearward from the rear end of the inner rail 1002. By inserting these positioning projections 1009 into the inner rail fixing holes 1116 formed in the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, the inner rails 1002 can be positioned and fixed on the front surface of the panel plate 1110.

  Further, the front component 1000 includes a plurality of mounting bosses 1010 projecting rearward from the rear surface. The plurality of mounting bosses 1010 can be inserted into the mounting holes 1128 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100 to position between the panel holder 1120 (game panel 1100).

  Further, the front component member 1000 includes a notch 1011 that is notched upward from the lower end in the lower left corner when viewed from the front. The notch 1011 coincides with the notch 1127 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the notch 1011 and 1127 pass through the lower full ball path. The front end openings of the normal guideway 861 and the full guideway 862 of the unit 860 are adapted to face forward.

[5-2. Game panel]
Next, the gaming panel 1100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 115 and 116, 118 and 119, and the like. The gaming panel 1100 has a flat panel panel 1110 having an outer periphery formed slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000 and formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and holds the outer periphery of the panel board 1110. And a frame-like panel holder 1120 attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and to which the back unit 3000 is attached on the rear surface.

  The panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed of a synthetic resin plate such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, and methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. The thickness of this panel board 1110 is thinner than the panel holder 1120 (game panel 1150), and the minimum necessary thickness that can be sufficiently held even if the obstacle nail is planted on the front or the front unit 2000 is attached. (8 to 10 mm). In this example, the panel board 1110 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin board.

  The panel board 1110 is formed with an out recess 1111 that is recessed upward from the lower end at the lowest position in the game area 5a. Further, the panel plate 1110 is formed with a plurality of openings 1112 penetrating in the front-rear direction for attaching the front unit 2000.

  Further, panel plate 1110 is provided with a plurality of fitting holes 1113 arranged in the vicinity of the outer periphery and made up of round holes penetrating in the front-rear direction, and long holes 1114 arranged in the vicinity of the outer periphery of the lower left portion It is equipped with. The fitting hole 1113 and the long hole 1114 are disposed outside the game area 5 a and perform positioning with the panel holder 1120. Further, the panel plate 1110 is provided with stepped engagement steps 1115 having a front side depressed at both ends of the upper side and both ends of the lower side. These engagement steps 1115 are not cut to about half of the thickness of the panel plate 1110, and are disposed outside the game area 5a, similarly to the fitting holes 1113 and the long holes 1114, This is for engaging and fixing the panel plate 1110 to the panel holder 1120.

  Further, the panel plate 1110 is provided with a plurality of inner rail fixing holes 1116 at predetermined positions. The inner rail 1002 can be fixed at a predetermined position by fitting and fixing a positioning projection 1009 projecting from the rear side of the inner rail 1002 into the inner rail fixing hole 1116.

  The panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 has a size including the panel plate 1110 and a substantially square outer shape, and is formed thicker (about 20 mm in this example) than the panel plate 1110. The panel holder 1120 is formed of a synthetic resin (for example, a thermoplastic synthetic resin). The panel holder 1120 detachably holds the panel plate 1110 and has a holding step portion 1121 recessed from the front side toward the rear side, and has a size substantially equal to that of the game area 5a inside the holding step portion 1121 in the front-rear direction And a through-hole 1122 that penetrates through.

  The depth of the holding step portion 1121 of the panel holder 1120 is substantially the same as the thickness of the panel plate 1110 from the front surface, and the front surface of the panel plate 1110 held in the holding step portion 1121 is the panel holder 1120 It is almost flush with the front surface. Further, the front inner peripheral surface of the holding step portion 1121 is formed in a size such that a predetermined amount of clearance is formed with respect to the outer peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110. By this clearance, even if the panel board 1110 relatively expands and contracts due to a temperature change and a temporal change, the expansion and contraction can be absorbed.

  Further, the panel holder 1120 is disposed at a position corresponding to the fitting hole 1113 and the long hole 1114 formed in the panel plate 1110 held by the holding step portion 1121, and forward from the front surface of the holding step portion 1121. A plurality of projecting pins 1123 which are extended and which can be fitted and inserted into the fitting holes 1113 and the long holes 1114 of the panel plate 1110 are provided. By fitting and inserting these protruding pins 1123 into the fitting holes 1113 and the long holes 1114 of the panel plate 1110, the panel holder 1120 and the panel plate 1110 can be positioned relative to each other.

  Furthermore, the panel holder 1120 is provided with an engagement claw 1124 and an engagement piece 1125 which engage with the engagement step 1115 at a position corresponding to the engagement step 1115 of the panel plate 1110. More specifically, the engaging claw 1124 is disposed on the upper side of the holding step 1121 of the panel holder 1120, corresponds to the upper engaging step 1115 of the panel plate 1110, and extends from the front of the holding step 1121 to the front. It projects toward the end and resiliently engages with the engagement step 1115. The engagement claw 1124 is sized so as not to protrude from the front surface of the panel holder 1120.

  The engagement piece 1125 of the panel holder 1120 is disposed below the holding step 1121 of the panel holder 1120, and corresponds to the lower engagement step 1115 of the panel plate 1110. The engagement piece 1125 is formed on the upper side along the front surface of the panel holder 1120 in a state where a gap of a size that allows the engagement step portion 1115 of the panel plate 1110 to be inserted is formed between the engagement piece 1125 and the front surface of the holding step portion 1121. A predetermined amount extends toward the center side. The panel plate 1110 is detachably held to the panel holder 1120 by engaging the engagement step portion 1115 of the panel plate 1110 with the engagement claws 1124 and the engagement piece 1125.

  Further, the panel holder 1120 includes an out port 1126 penetrating in the front-rear direction at the lowest position in the game area 5a. In the panel holder 1120, the lower rear side of the out port 1126 has the same width as the out port 1126 and is recessed forward to the lower end.

  Further, the panel holder 1120 includes a notch 1127 that is notched upward from the lower end in the lower left corner when viewed from the front. The notch 1127 coincides with the notch 1011 of the front component member 1000, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the notch 1011 and 1127 penetrate through the notch 1011 and 1127. The front end openings of the normal guiding path 861 and the full tank guiding path 862 face forward.

  Further, the panel holder 1120 includes a plurality of mounting holes 1128 penetrating in the front-rear direction at positions corresponding to the plurality of mounting bosses 1010 in the front component member 1000. By inserting the mounting boss 1010 of the front component member 1000 into the plurality of mounting holes 1128, the panel holder 1120 can be mounted on the rear side of the front component member 1000, and between the front component member 1000, the panel holder 1120 (game panel 1100) can be positioned.

  Further, the panel holder 1120 is provided with a square insertion hole 1129 penetrating in the front-rear direction above the cutout 1127. The rear end of the function display unit 1400 is inserted through the insertion hole 1129.

  When the gaming panel 1100 is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000, the out port 1126 of the panel holder 1120 is opened to the rear side of the out guide part 1003 of the front component member 1000. Thereby, the game ball that has flowed down to the lower end of the game area 5a is guided to the rear out port 1126 by the out guiding unit 1003, and is discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1126.

5-2a. Second embodiment of game panel]
Next, a gaming panel 1150 according to an embodiment different from the gaming panel 1100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 121 and 122. FIG. 121 is an exploded perspective view of the game panel having a form different from that of FIG. 117, as viewed from the front together with the front component, the substrate holder, and the main control unit. FIG. 122 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 121 viewed from behind. The game panel 1150 is formed of a wood plate material such as veneer plywood having a predetermined thickness (for example, 18 mm to 21 mm). The game panel 1150 is formed to have the same thickness as the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 described above.

  The outer shape of the game panel 1150 is substantially the same as the outer shape of the front component 1000. The game panel 1150 includes an out-port 1151 that penetrates in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the out-guiding portion 1003 of the front component member 1000 at a lower portion substantially in the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. In the game panel 1150, the lower side of the rear surface of the out port 1151 is recessed forward to the lower end with the same width as the out port 1151.

  Further, the game panel 1150 penetrates horizontally in the front-rear direction on the left side when viewed from the lower end and is opened downward. And a square insertion hole 1153 through which the rear end of the function display unit 1400 is inserted.

  In addition, the game panel 1150 includes a plurality of inner rails penetrating in the front and rear directions in which the positioning projections 1009 can be fitted at positions corresponding to the plurality of positioning projections 1009 projecting rearward from the inner rails 1002 of the front component member 1000. A fixing hole 1154 is provided. In addition, the game panel 1150 includes a plurality of mounting holes 1155 penetrating in the front-rear direction at positions corresponding to the plurality of mounting bosses 1010 in the front component member 1000. By inserting the mounting boss 1010 of the front component member 1000 into the plurality of mounting holes 1155, the game panel 1150 can be mounted on the rear side of the front component member 1000, and the game panel can be connected to the front component member 1000. 1150 can be positioned.

  Furthermore, although the illustration is omitted, the game panel 1150 is provided with a plurality of openings which are penetrated back and forth for attaching the front unit 2000 like the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110 in the above-mentioned game panel 1100. ing.

  When the game panel 1150 is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000, the out port 1151 is opened on the rear side of the out guiding portion 1003 of the front component 1000. Thereby, the game ball flowing down to the lower end of the game area 5a is guided to the rear out port 1151 by the out guiding part 1003, and is discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1150 through the out port 1151.

[5-3. Substrate holder]
Next, the substrate holder 1200 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 118 to 119 and the like. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in a horizontally long box shape that is open at the top and front, and is inclined so that the bottom surface becomes lower toward the center in the left-right direction. The substrate holder 1200 can cover the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the lower side in the assembled state to the game board 5. Thus, the game balls discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1126 and the game balls discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 can all be received and formed on the bottom surface The discharged discharge part 1201 can be discharged downward.

[5-4. Main control board unit]
Next, the main control unit 1300 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 118 to 119 and the like. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 for controlling game contents and payout of game balls, and a main control board box 1320 which accommodates the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200. .

  The main control board box 1320 includes a plurality of sealing mechanisms. When the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism, the sealing mechanism is then destroyed to open the main control board box 1320. It is necessary to leave a trace of the opening and closing of the main control board box 1320. Therefore, by observing the trace of opening and closing, it is possible to discover unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrent against unauthorized actions on the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

  The various substrate boxes 930, 950, 1320, 1520 and 3042 including the main control board box 1320 are all provided as members having transparency so as to allow visual confirmation from the outside. There is. That is, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, surface mounting that is inferior in fraud suppression performance particularly in the payout control board 951 in the payout control board box 950 and the main control board 1310 in the main control board box 1320. Since the area is provided, it is important to secure such transparency in order to obtain various effects related to the below-mentioned fraud measures.

[5-5. Function Display Unit]
Next, the function display unit 1400 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 118 to 120 and the like. As shown in the figure, the function display unit 1400 is attached to the lower left corner of the front component member 1000 outside the game area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be viewed from the front (player side) through the through-hole 111 of the door frame 3 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 (see FIG. 120). The function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on a control signal from the main control board 1310 to display a gaming state (playing status), an ordinary lottery result, a special lottery result, and the like.

  As shown in FIG. 120, the function display unit 1400 has a status indicator 1401 consisting of one LED for displaying the gaming status, and four LEDs for displaying the result of the regular lottery that is drawn by passing the gaming ball against the gate portion 2003. , A normal hold indicator 1408 consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of reservations pertaining to the passage of the game ball to the gate part 2003, and drawing by the reception of the game ball to the first start opening 2002 The first special symbol display 1403 consisting of eight LEDs for displaying the first special lottery results, and the first special reservation consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of reservations pertaining to the reception of the game ball to the first starting opening 2002 From a number indicator 1404 and eight LEDs for displaying a second special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball to the second start port 2004 A second special symbol display 1405, a second special reservation number display 1406 comprising two LEDs for displaying the number of reservations relating to the acceptance of the game ball to the second starting port 2004, and the first special lottery result or the first The second special lottery result mainly includes a round indicator 1407 consisting of three LEDs for displaying the number of repetitions (the number of rounds) of the opening and closing pattern of the special winning opening 2005 when the result is "big hit" or the like.

  The function display unit 1400 can display the number of holdings, a symbol, and the like by appropriately turning on, off, and blinking the provided LEDs.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
Next, the peripheral control unit will be described with reference to FIG. The peripheral control unit is attached to the rear side of the game board side effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The peripheral control unit includes a peripheral control board 1510 that controls an effect presented to the player based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board box 1520 that houses the peripheral control board 1510. Yes. Although not shown, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit for controlling a light emission effect, a sound effect, a movable effect, and the like, and an effect display control unit for controlling an effect image. .

[5-7. Game board side effect display device]
Next, the game board side effect display device 1600 will be described with reference to FIG. The game board side effect display device 1600 is disposed at the center of the game area 5a in a front view, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box of the back unit. Specifically, the game board side effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the substantially center of the rear wall of the back box. The game board side effect display device 1600 can be viewed from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled. The game board side effect display device 1600 is a full color liquid crystal display device using a white LED as a backlight, and can display still images and moving images.

[6. Game contents]
Next, game contents by the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

[6-1. Game development with the flow of gaming balls]
In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the player rotates the handle 302 of the handle unit 300 disposed at the front lower right corner of the door frame 3, so that the gaming balls stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 The game board 5 is driven into the upper portion of the game area 5a through the space between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002, and the game with the game ball is started. The game ball driven into the upper part in the game area 5a flows down either the left side (left) or the right side (right) of the center character 2500 depending on the driving strength. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the left hitting is recommended in the normal gaming state, and the right hitting is recommended in the advantageous gaming state such as the big hit gaming state or the time saving gaming state. The strength of the game ball can be adjusted according to the amount of rotation of the handle 302. The game ball can be driven more strongly as it is rotated in the clockwise direction. A game ball can be shot at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

  In the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) with a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions are implanted on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110). By the contact, the flow-down speed of the gaming ball is suppressed, and various movements are given to the gaming ball, and the movement can be enjoyed. Further, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail, a windmill (not shown) rotated by the contact of the game ball is provided at a suitable position.

  The gaming ball driven into the upper part of the center character 2500 contacts a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) when entering the left side in a front view than the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the center character 2500, The region to the left of the center character 2500 will flow down. Then, when the gaming ball flowing down the area on the left side of the center character 2500 enters the warp inlet 2520 opened on the outer peripheral surface of the center character 2500, it is supplied from the warp outlet 2522 to the stage 2530.

  The game balls supplied to the stage 2530 roll on the stage 2530 and move back and forth and are discharged forward. When the game ball is released into the game area 5a from the center of the stage 2530, since it is positioned immediately above the first start winning opening 2002a, it is accepted with high probability into the first start winning opening 2002a. When a game ball is received in the first start winning opening 2002a, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 321 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. Ru.

  When the gaming ball rolling on the stage 2530 is released from outside the center into the gaming area 5a, it flows down toward the starting opening unit 2100. The game ball released from the stage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 into the game area 5a may be received by the first start opening 2002 of the start opening unit 2100, the open big winning opening 2005, or the like.

  By the way, when the game ball which has flowed down to the left side of the center character 2500 does not enter the warp inlet 2520, it is moved to the center side in the left-right direction by the side unit upper 2300, and the general winning opening 2001 of the lower side unit 2200 or the first There is a possibility of being accepted by the start winning opening 2002a and the like. When a game ball is received in the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 321 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. .

  On the other hand, when the game ball hit in the upper part of the center character 2500 in the game area 5a enters the right side of the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the center character 2500 (so-called right strike), An area (a specific area) where the first non-electric start winning opening 2002b, the second starting opening (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004, the gate unit 2003a, the ordinary electric winning opening 2011, etc. are provided downstream thereof Will flow down.

  When the right-handed game ball passes through the gate portion 2003a, a normal lottery is performed on the main control board 1310. In this normal lottery, if the winning is normally hit and the selection is indicated in the normal symbol variation, the movable member 2011a of the ordinary electric winning hole 2011 is opened, and the game ball is accepted to the ordinary electric winning hole 2011 Is possible. Then, when the gaming ball is received in the ordinary electric winning hole 2011, the first gaming ball depending on which of the first passage 2011d and the second passage 2011e in the ordinary electric winning hole 2011 flows down. One of the non-electric start winning opening 2002b and the second start opening (second non-electric start winning opening) 2004 operates in the open state. If the game ball received in the normal electric winning opening 2011 does not flow down either the first passage 2011d or the second passage 2011e, it will flow down the third passage 2011c. In this case, the first non-electricity None of the start winning opening 2002b or the second non-electric start winning opening 2004 operates to the open state, and the award balls are paid out with the winning to the normal electric winning opening 2011.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, there is a possibility that the gaming ball passes through the gate portion 2003b when the game is performed by hitting the left. When the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003b, a normal lottery is performed on the main control board 1310 as in the case where the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003a. As described above, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is configured to be provided with the opportunity of the normal lottery even in the normal gaming state.

  In the main control board 1310 according to the present embodiment, when the normal hit is won, the movable member 2011a of the normal electric winning opening 2011 is moved to the open state after the normal symbol stops in the normal hit mode. However, even if the predetermined opening time has not elapsed since the operation to the open state, even when a predetermined upper limit number of game balls are received in the ordinary electric winning award 2011, At this point, the movable member 2011a of the normal electric winning hole 2011 is returned to the closed state.

  In addition, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the first start port 2002 (first start winning port 2002a, first non-electric start start port 2002b) or second start port (second non-electric start start port). ) When a game ball is received in 2004, an advantageous game state advantageous to the player (for example, “hit game state”, “probability variation state”, “time-short game state”, etc.) is generated on the main control board 1310. A big hit judgment (the first special symbol side or the second special symbol side) about whether or not is performed. When the big hit determination is performed in this way, after the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) is variably displayed for the variation time selected based on the result of the big hit determination, the symbol mode corresponding to the result is displayed. By stopping the special symbol with (big hit symbol, lost symbol), the player can be recognized.

  As a result, if the stopped special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) is not the big hit symbol, the starting condition for the next big hit judgment will be satisfied, and the main control board 1310 has not been executed. Among the special symbols (first special symbol or second special symbol) held in the state of, the jackpot determination with the highest digesting order will be digested (executed).

  On the other hand, if the stopped special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) is a big hit symbol, a big hit game that allows the player to win a prize is performed on the main control board 1310. At the time of execution of the big hit game, first, an opening period in which an opening effect indicating the start of the big hit game is performed is generated. Then, when the opening period ends, the round game in which the special winning opening 2005 is opened is performed a plurality of times with the predetermined number of defined rounds (upper limit number of rounds) as the upper limit. In one round game, opening and closing of the big winning opening 2005 is performed a predetermined number of times (one time in the present embodiment), and the specified number (winning upper limit number) in the large winning opening 2005 during one round game. The game ball is released until the game ball wins, or until the prescribed time (round game time) has elapsed. In round games, round effects are performed. When the round game of the specified number of rounds is completed, an ending period in which an ending effect indicating the end of the big hit game is generated is generated, and when the ending period ends, the big hit game is ended.

  Further, in the main control board 1310 according to the present embodiment, a probability variation gaming state (hereinafter, also referred to as “probability variation state”) that is advantageous to the player may occur after the big hit game ends. The definite change state is provided on the condition that the type of the stopped big hit symbol (special symbol) is a predetermined fixed change symbol, regardless of the type of gaming state at the time of winning the big hit the next time Until the jackpot game occurs, a probability change state advantageous to the player is maintained. This probability change state occurs when the winning probability of the big hit is changed from the low probability state to the high probability state after the big hit game is finished, and the probability of winning the big hit in the big hit judgment is changed to a high probability and the big hit is increased. Since it is easy to be generated, it is advantageous for the player, and the player will play the game while expecting to be in a definite change state. In the present embodiment, a big hit that is given a definite change state after the end of a big hit game may be referred to as a positive change big hit, and a big hit where a positive change state is not given may be referred to as a non-positive change big hit.

  In addition, in the main control board 1310 according to the present embodiment, after the end of the big hit game, time saving game state (hereinafter, also referred to as "time saving state") is generated. In this short time state, the variation time of the special symbol tends to be shortened compared to a non-short time state in which the short time state does not occur (normal game state etc.). The variation time of the normal symbol variation which derives the result of the normal lottery (ordinary judgment) whether or not to make it easy to win is shortened in comparison with the non-short time state. Further, in the time saving state, the winning probability of the normal hit shifts from the low probability state to the high probability state. Also, in the short-time state, when the normal win is won in the normal lottery, the operation pattern different from the non-time-short state (including the case where the distribution of the operation patterns of which operation patterns are executed is different) The movable member 2011a of the normal electric winning hole 2011 can be opened and closed.

  Note that the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment not only makes it easier for a game ball to enter the ordinary electric winning opening 2011 in the shorter time state than in the non-timeless state, but also at least in the non-timeless state, It is preferable that the game ball be configured to easily enter a state in 2011.

  Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 114 to FIG. 116, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the first opening in which the game ball received in the ordinary electric winning opening 2011 easily passes through the first operation opportunity area. A pattern, a second opening pattern in which gaming balls accepted in the normal electric winning opening 2011 are likely to pass through the second actuation trigger area, and a gaming ball accepted in the ordinary electric winning opening 2011 in the first actuation opportunity area and the second Three opening patterns (operation patterns) of the third opening pattern that are difficult to pass through any of the operation trigger areas are prepared.

  When a normal hit is achieved in the short-time state, the game ball is easily passed through a predetermined operation trigger area by being assigned to the first release pattern or the second release pattern. In the present embodiment, it is assumed that the first time-short state and the second time-short state are prepared as a plurality of types of time-short state. In the first short time state and the second short time state, different distribution is performed on the opening pattern of the movable member 2011a in the normal hitting, for example, in the case of the normal hitting in the first time short state, the first open The distribution ratio of the pattern is high (may be 100%), and the distribution ratio of the second open pattern is high (may be 100%) in the case where a normal hit occurs in the second short state.

  On the other hand, in the case of a normal hit in the non-short time state, the game ball has a predetermined actuation trigger area by adding not only the first open pattern and the second open pattern but also the distribution of the third open pattern. One of an opening mode (first opening pattern, second opening pattern) which is easy to pass and an opening mode (third opening pattern) in which the game ball is hard to pass through the predetermined actuation trigger area are executed. That is, when a normal hit is made in a non-time-short state, there is a possibility that the game ball is guided to the off-route. Details of the time saving state and the release pattern will be described later with reference to FIGS. 191 to 193 and the like.

  Then, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment having the above-described configuration, in the short time state, the winning probability per normal is increased and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened as compared with the case of the non-short time state. Thereby, the movable member 2011a of the normal motorized winning opening 2011 can be brought into an open state to improve the ball entry rate. In the short state at this time, when the player continues to make a right turn, the game ball is accepted by the ordinary electric winning award port 2011, and the normal symbol variation according to the ordinary determination is easily performed, and as a result, the first non-electric start winning award port 2002b. There is a tendency that the game ball is received in the second start opening (the second non-electric start winning combination opening) 2004 and the symbol variation of the special symbol according to the big hit judgment tends to be executed.

  In the present embodiment, the time-short state is always generated after the end of the jackpot game, but the next jackpot game is generated when the type of the stopped jackpot symbol (special symbol) is a predetermined probability variation symbol. On the other hand, when the type of stopped jackpot symbol (special symbol) is not a predetermined probability variation symbol, the symbol variation of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (here, 100 times). When it comes to

  In addition, the specification example in the pachinko machine 1 in this embodiment is as follows. Eight kinds of numbers [1] to [8] are adopted as decorative symbols, and [111] [222] [333] [444] [555] [666] [777] [888] as jackpot symbols. Is adopted. Further, as the jackpot winning probability, 165/65536 in the low probability state and 1650/65536 in the high probability state are respectively defined. 16384/65536 in the low probability state and 65535/65536 in the high probability state are respectively defined as the winning probability of the normal hit. Further, as the number of winning balls for the game ball, the first start winning opening 2002a, the first non-electric starting winning opening 2002b, the second starting opening (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004, and the ordinary electric winning opening 2011 Three for each, and 15 for the big winning opening 2005 are respectively defined. In addition, “10 balls” is defined as the upper limit number of winning combinations which is the closing condition of the movable member 2011 a of the normal motor winning opening 2011. Further, in each round game, “1” is set as the number of times the big winning opening 2005 is opened, and “8 balls” is set as the maximum number of winnings.

[6-2. Big hit game]
A jackpot game defined in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described below with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 190, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a big hit is won, a big hit symbol random number (hereinafter referred to as a symbol random number (first special symbol random number, second special symbol random number) acquired at the time of entering the ball )) Is determined to which of the five types of jackpots is allocated, and gaming benefits corresponding to the determined type of jackpot (determined jackpot type) (the jackpot game and the gaming state after the jackpot game) Is to be granted. In addition to the game board side effect display device 1600, the first special reserve number indicator 1404 where the symbol variation related to the big hit determination on the first special symbol side appears, and the symbol variation related to the big hit determination on the second special symbol side appears first Also in the second special symbol display 1405, a display mode (type of big hit symbol) that can recognize which type of big hit is obtained appears.

  Here, when the big hit symbol corresponding to “4R probability variation big hit A”, “4R probability variation big hit B”, “4R normal big hit” on the first special symbol side is stopped and displayed on the first special reserved number display 1404. In the jackpot game, the winning prize opening 2005 is opened in such a manner that the total number of prize balls that can be obtained by the player is relatively reduced (for example, 500 prize balls).

  Of these, when it is determined that either of the “4R probability variation big hit A” or “4R probability variation big hit B” on the first special symbol side has been obtained based on the design random number, After execution, a probability change state and a short time state (first short time state for 4R positive variable big hit A and second short time state for 4R positive variable big hit B) that are continued until the next big hit game is generated are given. It has become so. On the other hand, when it is determined that the first special symbol side "4R normal big hit" is obtained based on the symbol random number, the symbol variation of the special symbol is 100 times after the big hit game for 4 rounds is executed. If the next big hit game does not occur until it is executed, the short time state (first short time state) is given and the definite change state is not given.

  On the other hand, in the jackpot game that is given when the jackpot symbol corresponding to “16R probability variation jackpot” on the second special symbol side, “16R normal jackpot” is stopped and displayed on the second special holding number display 1405, by the player The big winning opening 2005 is opened in a mode (for example, 2000 winning balls) in which the total number of winning balls that can be obtained is relatively large. In the main control board 1310 according to the present embodiment, the number of round games is increased or decreased ("4R probability variation big hit A", "4R probability variation big hit B", "4R normal big hit" four round games) Although it is decided to realize some of the total number of prize balls that can be acquired by the player by "16R probability variation big hit" and "16R regular big hit", the round game is executed 16 times). For example, the total number of winning balls that can be obtained by the player may be realized by other methods such as making a difference in the opening mode of the round game itself.

  Of these, when it is determined that the “16R probability variable big hit” on the second special symbol side is obtained based on the random number of symbols, after the big hit game for 16 rounds is executed, until the next big hit game is generated The probability variation state and the short time state (second short time state) to be continued are respectively given. On the other hand, when it is determined that the “16R normal jackpot” on the second special symbol side is obtained on the basis of the random number of symbols, after the 16-round jackpot game is executed, the symbol variation of the special symbol is 100 times. If the next big hit game does not occur until the game is executed, a time-short state (second time-short state) is given, and a probability variation state is not given. In the present embodiment, the determination of the winning type using such a symbol random number is made at the time of jackpot determination, and the result of the determination (or the value of the determined symbol random number) fluctuates the special symbol. It is also used to determine the fluctuation time when making

  In addition, “25 (seconds)” for each jackpot game as the maximum time of each round game, “1” as the number of times of opening of the big winning opening 2005 in each round game “ "8 balls" are set respectively. In each big hit game, "10 (seconds)" as opening time, "2 (seconds)" as interval time between rounds (interval between rounds), "15 (seconds)" as ending time, respectively Is set.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, the first side symbol variation and the second side symbol variation, the amount of benefits for the player is different for the control regarding the number of prescribed rounds and gaming state in the big hit game, the first side symbol variation It is more advantageous when the big hit design appears in the second side symbol variation than when the big hit design appears.

  In the main control board 1310 according to the present embodiment, even if it is determined that "4R probability variation big hit A" and "4R normal big hit" on the first special symbol side are obtained based on the symbol random number, When the gaming state at the time of determination is the second short time state, as shown in FIG. 190 (A), the short time state occurring after the end of the big hit game is not set to the first short time state, but the second It may be made to be in a time saving state. That is, in this case, the second short time state is maintained rather than being shifted from the second short time state to the first time short state, so even in the second time short state where the second special lottery is at the center, Even if the first special lottery is performed, for example, when the game ball enters the first start winning opening 2002a and the first special symbol side is a big hit, the first disadvantageous than the second short time state Without giving the player the disadvantage of shifting to the short-time state, the bonus (bonus game) can be provided by the jackpot, and the player's interest can be suppressed from decreasing.

[6-3. Normal design related control]
As illustrated in FIG. 190, the main control board 1310 according to the present embodiment can select the time-short state controlled after the end of the jackpot game and the number of continuations thereof based on the type of winning jackpot. Therefore, depending on the type of the big hit, the control related to the normal symbol in the game after the big hit game is finished can be changed. It is possible to change the operation.

  Below, with reference to FIGS. 191 to 193, the control related to the normal symbol in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described in detail.

  FIG. 191 is a diagram for describing an outline of control related to a normal symbol. According to FIG. 191, when the probability is low (for example, the normal gaming state), the winning probability per normal is 1/99, and when the probability is high (the first short time state, the second short time state), the normal winning probability is It is supposed to be 98/99. As an example of a symbol type selected at the time of normal winning, a winning symbol 1, a winning symbol 2, and a winning symbol 3 are prepared, and depending on which winning symbol is selected, an opening pattern of the normal electric winning award opening 2011 (strictly speaking, For example, the operation pattern related to the opening and closing operation of the movable member 2011a is associated.

  Further, according to FIG. 191, the variation time (ordinary symbol variation time) in the symbol variation of the normal symbol is determined based on the gaming state of the low probability or the high probability. Is 10 seconds and high probability is 1 second. In addition, the operation pattern of the distributing member 2011b in the normal motorized winning opening 2011 is a constant fixed operation pattern regardless of the game state or winning.

  In addition, as illustrated in FIG. 191, the opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 2011 associated with the type of symbol (symbol type) selected at the time of normal hit is different between the low probability and the high probability. It is set to be different from the first short time state and the second short time state.

  Specifically, first, at the low probability, when the winning symbol 1 is selected, the first release pattern (distribution to the special 1 route) is executed, and when the winning symbol 3 is selected, the second releasing pattern ( Since a special ball is distributed to the ordinary electric prize winning hole 2011, a non-electric start prize winning opening corresponding to each route (first non-electric start prize winning opening 2002b, No. 1) is executed. 2) It can be expected to open the non-electric start winning opening 2004). However, if the hit symbol 2 is selected, the third opening pattern (sorting to the off route) will be executed, so even if the game ball is won in the ordinary electric winning opening 2011, the above non-electric start I can not expect to open the winning opening.

  In other words, when it is a normal hit at a low probability (normal game state), the degree of advantage in the subsequent development differs depending on what the winning symbol is, so the player's interest can be enhanced . More specifically, the hit symbol 3 connected to the special 2 route has the highest advantage, the hit symbol 1 connected to the special 1 route has the next highest advantage, and the hit symbol 2 connected to the off-route has the lowest advantage. .

  On the other hand, at the time of high probability, the first opening pattern or the second opening pattern is executed regardless of which one of the winning symbols 1 to 3 is selected. It can be expected to open either the first non-electric start winning opening 2002 b or the second non-electric starting winning opening 2004. Here, focusing on the difference due to the time saving state, in the case of a normal hit in the first time shorting state, the first opening pattern is always executed, so it can be expected to open the first non-electric start winning opening 2002b (that is, the first 1) You can get a chance to make a big hit decision on the special symbol side). On the other hand, in the case of a normal hit in the second short-time state, the second opening pattern is always executed, so that it can be expected to open the second non-electric start winning opening 2004 (that is, an opportunity for determining a big hit on the second special symbol side). Can win).

  About the fixed operation | movement pattern by the distribution member 2011b, and each opening pattern by the movable member 2011a, an example of a detailed movement is demonstrated later, referring FIG.

  As described above, in FIG. 191, the normal symbol variation time is determined based on the gaming state of low probability or high probability. However, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, based on more conditions. Normal symbol variation time may be determined. The “condition” here specifically includes, for example, a normal lottery win or a type of winning symbol.

  FIG. 192 is an example of a table used when normal symbol fluctuation time is determined based on a plurality of conditions. FIG. 192 (A) shows an example of a normal symbol variation time determination table used when a winning result is derived at a low probability (normal gaming state), and the distribution varies depending on the type of the winning symbol. And three variation patterns (variation time is 10 seconds, 12 seconds, and 15 seconds). FIG. 192 (B) shows an example of a normal symbol variation time determination table used when a deviation result is derived at a low probability (normal game state), and it has a variation time of 10 seconds uniformly. A variation pattern is selected.

  When using the tables illustrated in FIG. 192 (A) and FIG. 192 (B), in the normal gaming state, since the varying time is selected depending on the result of the normal lottery (winning or symbol type), the symbol variation of the normal symbol It is possible to diversify from the start of the game to the stop, and it is possible to enhance the fun of the game for the variation game of the normal symbol. Specifically, for example, in the case of a deviation, only a 10-second variation time is selected, so that when the variation of the normal symbol exceeds 10 seconds, it is possible to provide a situation where the normal hit is confirmed before the variation stops. It is possible to enhance the fun of the game. Also, for example, in the case of the longest variation time of 15 seconds, there is a high probability that the stop symbol will hit and the symbol 3 will be reached more than when other variation time is selected. Stopping the winning symbol 3 in the normal gaming state is the most advantageous winning symbol because it leads to special 2 route allocation, and the player's expectation can be enhanced as the time from the start of the normal symbol variation increases. .

  FIG. 192 (C) shows an example of a normal symbol variation time determination table used when a winning result is derived at a high probability (first short time state, second short time state). Regardless of the type, it is selected from among two types of fluctuation patterns (the fluctuation time is 10 seconds and 12 seconds). FIG. 192 (D) shows an example of a normal symbol variation time determination table used when a deviation result is derived at a high probability (first short time state, second short time state). It is selected from among the fluctuation patterns (the fluctuation time is 1 second and 2 seconds).

  In the case of using the tables illustrated in FIGS. 192C and 192D, if the result of the normal lottery is out in the first short time state or the second short time state, the time is relatively 1 second or 2 seconds. By selecting the short normal symbol variation time, it is possible to suppress the proportion of the period in which the normal electric winning award 2011 is not opened.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 193, the fixed operation pattern by the sorting member 2011b and each opening pattern by the movable member 2011a will be described in detail. Each of these operations is controlled by, for example, the main control board 1310.

  The movable member 2011a of the ordinary electric winning hole 2011 performs an operation capable of taking an open state and a closed state in accordance with an open pattern determined based on the game state of the normal lottery, the hit type of the normal hit, and the like. Specific opening patterns are, for example, the first opening pattern to the third opening pattern described with reference to FIG. 191, and in the non-time-short state, the first opening pattern to the third opening are based on the normal winning stop pattern (winning symbol). One of the opening patterns is selected and operated. In the first short-time state, the first opening pattern operates based on the normal hit. In the second short-time state, the second opening pattern is operated based on the normal hit. Works.

  In FIG. 193, how the opening / closing operation (first opening pattern to third opening pattern) by the movable member 2011a and the distributing operation (fixed operation pattern) by the distributing member 2011b operate as time progresses. The details are shown. Note that in FIG. 193, each series of operations is performed with one cycle of 6 seconds. This means that the normal winning game at the normal electric winning award 2011 when the normal winning is obtained is played in 6 seconds. However, this time is an example, and the time required for a series of opening and closing operations by the movable member 2011a is a game state (during low probability or high probability?) Any) may be variable. Specifically, for example, in high probability time, it may be set longer than low probability time on average. As described above, even if various times are set for the opening / closing operation of the movable member 2011a, the distribution operation by the distribution member 2011b is not changed at any normal hit, and the normal hit game It is controlled to operate with one kind of fixed operation pattern (fixed operation pattern) always from the start time as a starting point. Further, in the present embodiment, when the upper limit number of game balls wins the normal electric winning award opening 2011 (for example, 8), the opening / closing control by the movable member 2011a is ended even in the middle of the opening / closing control (in the closed state). Will be

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, a waiting time of a predetermined time may be provided after the normal winning is determined and before the normal winning game at the normal electric winning prize opening 2011 is started. In particular, in a normal gaming state where left-handed is recommended, it is necessary to switch to right-handed in order to play a normal hit game, so that even if the player switches from left-handed to right-handed, it will be in time for the normal hit game. It is preferable to leave some predetermined time. In addition, in order to appropriately perform such switching, the game board side effect display device 1600 or the like may perform an effect of teaching or giving notice of a normal hit, or an effect of recommending a temporary switching to the right strike. You may control.

  The symbols Ta to Tg shown in FIG. 193 indicate timings when predetermined time has elapsed when the start time of the normal hit game in the normal electric winning prize port 2011 is 0 seconds, and specifically, Ta is 0 After second (start time), Tb is 0.05 seconds, Tc is 1 second, Td is 1.05 seconds, Te is 2 seconds, Tf is 4 seconds, Tg is 6 seconds (end time) It is.

  First, with reference to FIG. 193, the fixing operation pattern by the distributing member 2011b will be described. As shown in FIG. 115 and FIG. 116, the distributing member 2011b is a member which is disposed inside the normal electric winning hole 2011 and is capable of rotating a predetermined range. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 116 (A), the sorting member 2011b guides the gaming ball to the first passage 2011d. The stop position "right position" for the special route 1 ("right" in FIG. 193) Description) and the stop position “left position” (denoted as “left” in FIG. 193) for the special route for guiding the gaming ball to the second passage 2011e as shown in FIG. 116 (B) In the middle of such a pivoting range, as shown in FIG. 116 (C), the movable ball is guided to the third passage 2011c, and the stop position “middle position” for the takeoff route (in FIG. 193) Described as "middle".

  The stop position (initial position) when the sorting member 2011b does not perform the sorting operation is the right position for the special 1 route, but may be the middle position for the off-route. Further, in FIG. 193, since the displacement of the stop position (left, middle, right) by the distribution member 2011b is shown in a model form, the middle of switching of the stop position is omitted. For example, in FIG. 193, when it is shown that the stop position is instantaneously switched from “right” to “left”, in practice, the “middle” stop position is passed during the switching. However, by increasing the rotational speed or devising the shape, the sorting member 2011b is practically also guided (ie, guided to the third passage 2011c) by the stop position of the "middle" stop position It is difficult. In addition, even if the game ball is guided to an unintended passage (in the above example, the third passage 2011c in "middle"), then in the intended passage (in the above example, the "left" second passage 2011e) Since the game ball is guided stably toward the target, it is possible to cover the disadvantages caused by entering the third path 2011c off the route.

  The sorting member 2011b moves from the right position (FIG. 115 (A)) to the left position (FIG. 115 (B)) at the start of the normal hit game of Ta (0 seconds). Then, after an elapsed time of 50 ms, at Tb, it moves from the left position to the right position again. Note that the stay time of 50 ms in the left position is a time when it is difficult for the game ball to pass even if the movable member 2011a is in the open state during this time, and the game ball is actually guided to the second passage 2011e. It can hardly be assumed that it is done.

  The sorting member 2011b moves to the right position at Tb and then stops at the right position until Te, and moves to the middle position at Te. Then, it moves to the left position at Tf after stopping for 2 seconds at the middle position, and moves to the initial position (right position) at Tg after stopping for 2 seconds to complete a series of fixing operations. After the series of fixing operations are completed, the distributing member 2011b is maintained at the initial position (right position) until the next normal hit game is started.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 193, each opening pattern by the movable member 2011a will be described in the order of the first opening pattern, the second opening pattern, and the third opening pattern. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the normal hit game, while the distributing member 2011b operates in the fixed operation pattern, the movable member 2011a operates in any of the plurality of open patterns, so that the ordinary electric winning hole 2011 is opened. It is possible to control the entering game ball and to control which of the first passage 2011d, the second passage 2011e and the third passage 2011c the entering game ball passes.

  In the description of the sorting operation of the sorting member 2011b, it is assumed that the passing of the game ball is practically almost impossible at the left stop position of Ta to Tb for 50 ms, but the opening / closing operation of the movable member 2011a is also 50 ms. The same can be said in the open state. That is, for example, during the 50 ms open state (Ta to Tb, Tc to Td) shown in the middle of the second release pattern and the third release pattern, the movable member 2011a is released for a moment, but the game ball is normally It becomes difficult to enter the electric winning award 2011. Therefore, hereinafter, the description will be made assuming that the game ball does not substantially enter the normal electric winning opening 2011 in the opened state in the above Ta to Tb and Tc to Td. Even if the game ball may be received in the ordinary electric winning award 2011 between Ta and Tb in the period, the distribution member 2011b in the period is at the left stop position. It can prevent being guided to the advantageous second passage 2011e.

  First, in the case of the first opening pattern, the game ball enters the ordinary electric winning hole 2011 and opens and closes to facilitate passing through the first passage 2011d (which may be replaced with the first operation trigger area). (Special 1 route allocation).

  The operation of the first opening pattern shown in FIG. 193 will be described in detail. The movable member 2011a operates from the closed state to the opened state at Ta which is the start time of the normal hit game. Then, after 2 seconds, it operates from the open state to the closed state at Te, and maintains the closed state thereafter.

  According to such a first opening pattern, the period during which the right-handed gaming ball can enter the normal motorized winning opening 2011 is limited to Ta to Te (after 0 seconds to 2 seconds). Then, in consideration of the fixed operation pattern of the distributing member 2011b at this time, the gaming ball entering the ordinary electric winning hole 2011 is almost certainly in the first passage 2011d by the distributing member 2011b stopped at the right stop position. It is induced. Then, since the game ball passes through the first passage 2011d, it passes through the first operation trigger area, so the first non-electric start winning opening 2002b is opened. As a result, when the player causes the first non-electric start winning opening 2002b to enter, it is possible to receive the first special lottery at any timing.

  That is, when the movable member 2011a operates in the first opening pattern, the right-handed game ball is easily entered into the ordinary electric winning opening 2011 during the period of Ta to Tb. It is possible to control the game ball so that it can easily pass through the first operation opportunity area, and as a result, not only the winning to the ordinary electric winning opening 2011 but also the open state of the first non-electric starting winning opening 2002b is easy. Can be realized.

  In the above description, “the game ball is almost surely guided to the first passage 2011d”, but strictly speaking, the ball passes through the movable member 2011a at the timing immediately before Te and enters the ordinary electric winning award 2011. When the displacement of the stop position of the distributing member 2011b starts, the gaming ball may be guided to the middle route (outgoing route) and pass through the third passage 2011c. However, since such a case is rare and does not affect many people, the description of the same case will be omitted hereinafter.

  Next, in the case of the second opening pattern, the opening / closing operation for making the gaming ball enter the ordinary electric winning hole 2011 and to easily pass through the second passage 2011e (which may be replaced with the second operation trigger area) is It will be held (special 2 route distribution).

  The operation of the second opening pattern shown in FIG. 193 will be described in detail. When the normal hit game starts, the movable member 2011a temporarily moves from the closed state to the opened state for 50 ms from Ta to Tb. Then, the closed state is maintained from Tb to Tc, and temporarily operates again from the closed state to the open state for 50 ms from Tc to Td. Thereafter, the operating member 011a maintains the closed state from Td to Tf. However, as described above, it is rare for a game ball to enter the normal electric winning award 2011 during such a 50 ms open period.

  Thereafter, at Tf 4 seconds after the normal hit game starts, the movable member 2011a operates in the open state, and after 2 seconds up to Tg, the open state is maintained, and then the state shifts to the closed state. End the operation.

  According to such a second opening pattern, the period during which a right-handed game ball can enter the normal electric winning opening 2011 is limited to approximately Tf to Tg (after 4 seconds to 6 seconds). Then, in consideration of the fixed operation pattern of the sorting member 2011b at this time, the gaming ball entering the ordinary electric winning hole 2011 is almost certainly in the second passage 2011e by the sorting member 2011b stopped at the left stop position. It is induced. Then, since the game ball passes through the first passage 2011e, it passes through the second operation trigger area, so that the second non-electric start winning opening 2004 is in the open state. As a result, the player can receive the second special lottery at an arbitrary timing by causing the player to enter the second non-electric start winning opening 2004.

  That is, when the movable member 2011a operates in the second opening pattern, the right-handed game ball is easily entered into the ordinary electric winning opening 2011 during the period of Tf to Tg, and further, It is possible to control the game ball so that it can easily pass through the second operation opportunity area, and as a result, not only the winning to the ordinary electric winning award 2011 but also the open state of the second non-electric start winning award 2004 is easy. Can be realized.

  Next, in the case of the third opening pattern, an opening / closing operation is performed to make it easy for the gaming ball to enter the normal motorized winning opening 2011 and pass through the third passage 2011c (off route distribution).

  The operation of the third opening pattern shown in FIG. 193 will be described in detail. When the normal hit game starts, the movable member 2011a temporarily moves from the closed state to the opened state for 50 ms from Ta to Tb. Then, the closed state is maintained from Tb to Tc, and temporarily operates again from the closed state to the open state for 50 ms from Tc to Td. Thereafter, the operating member 011a maintains the closed state at Td to Tfe. However, as described above, it is rare for a game ball to enter the normal electric winning award 2011 during such a 50 ms open period.

  Thereafter, the movable member 2011a operates in the open state at Te after 2 seconds from the start of the normal hit game, and after being maintained in the open state for 2 seconds until Tf, the movable member 2011a is moved to the closed state, and thereafter closed. Maintain state.

  According to such a third opening pattern, the period during which the right-handed gaming ball can enter the normal motorized winning opening 2011 is limited to approximately Te to Tf (after 2 seconds to 4 seconds). Then, in consideration of the fixed operation pattern of the sorting member 2011b at this time, the gaming ball entering the ordinary electric winning hole 2011 is almost certainly in the third passage 2011c by the sorting member 2011b stopped at the middle stop position. It is induced. And since the game ball passing through the third passage 2011c does not pass through either the first operation trigger area or the second operation trigger area, only the winning balls for entering the ball of the ordinary electric winning hole 2011 are Be paid out.

  That is, when the movable member 2011a operates in the third opening pattern, the right-handed gaming ball is made to easily enter the ordinary electric winning hole 2011 in the period of Te to Tf, and further, the ball entering the said ball The game ball can control any operation trigger area so that it is difficult to pass, and it is possible to realize a mere winning of the ordinary electric winning hole 2011.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, by selecting the opening operation by the movable member 2011a based on the normal lottery game state, the normal hit type, and the like, the normal electric winning award 2011 in the normal hit game. It is possible to control the timing at which the game ball can enter the ball and the flow-down path (the first passage 2011d, the second passage 2011e, and the third passage 2011c) of the entered game ball.

  In addition, you may make it employ | adopt another method about the time etc. which the movable member 2011a of the normal electric prize winning opening 2011 maintains an open state. However, regardless of how much the movable member 2011a of the ordinary electric winning opening 2011 is to maintain the open state, the ordinary electric winning opening 2011 is previously set in the ordinary electric winning opening 2011 from the time when the ordinary opening is made open. When a predetermined number of game media are accepted, no matter how short the open state is maintained, the closed state is operated at that time.

[6-4. Game state transition]
Next, the transition of the gaming state in the present embodiment will be collectively described below based on the operation of the ordinary electric winning hole 2011 and the like described above with reference to FIG.

  According to FIG. 194, the gaming state can be broadly classified into a normal gaming state (non-short-time state) and a short-time gaming state (short-time state), and the first short-time state among the short-time gaming states. And the second short time state. In addition, it can be classified that the special game state is included in the normal game state.

  First, in the non-short-time state (normal game state), the normal lottery is performed with a low probability, and therefore, the chance of opening the normal electric winning opening 2011 as a normal hit is less than in the short-time state. The first non-electric start winning opening 2002b and the second non-electric start winning opening 2004 are basically in a closed state. A right-handed game is effective when aiming at these ordinary electric winning holes 20111, the first non-electric starting winning opening 2002b, and the second non-electric starting winning opening 2004 (see FIG. 114). In the normal gaming state, games that are mainly right-handed have little profit. Therefore, in the normal gaming state, basically, a game technique is adopted in which a game ball is awarded to the first start winning opening 2002a by left-handed, and a big win is determined by the big special determination on the first special symbol side. It is beneficial. However, in this case, the defined round number is “4 times” even if a big hit game is made after winning the big hit and the first side symbol variation is executed. In this non-time-short state, it is determined that it is a non-probable change state.

  However, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment has a feature that even when the player is left-handed in the normal gaming state, a normal lottery is performed when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003b. When the normal hit is obtained, the normal electric winning opening 2011 is opened in such a manner that a game ball can enter (see FIGS. 191 and 193). Therefore, at such an opening timing, even in the normal game state, a game technique in which a game ball is inserted into the ordinary electric winning opening 2011 by right-handed is also useful.

  Of the cases where the normal winning is obtained in the normal gaming state as described above, when the first opening pattern or the second opening pattern is selected as the opening operation by the movable member 2011a of the normal electric winning opening 2011, it is normal by right-handed The first non-electric start winning opening 2002b or the second non-electric start start winning opening is made by controlling the game ball that has entered the electric winning opening 2011 to pass through the first operation trigger area or the second operation trigger area. 2004 can be opened ("special state" shown in FIG. 194). In such a special state, the player can perform a special lottery by making a right turn at an arbitrary timing and causing a game ball to enter the open non-electric start winning opening.

  Here, in particular, when a normal win is obtained in the normal gaming state and the second opening pattern by the movable member 2011a of the normal electric winning opening 2011 is selected, the game ball that has entered the normal electric winning opening 2011 by right-handed hitting It is controlled to pass through the second actuation trigger area, and as a result, the second non-electric start winning opening 2004 can be put in the open state. In such a situation, the second non-intrusive state that is in the open state in spite of the normal gaming state that aims to win a big hit in the first special symbol side jackpot determination (first side symbol fluctuation). By making a right-handed game ball enter the electric start winning opening 2004, the second side symbol variation which is more advantageous than the first side symbol variation can be executed at an arbitrary timing. It is possible to realize a special game opportunity to aim for a big hit on the special symbol side.

  Next, in the first time-short state, the game ball is more likely to have a chance to have the ordinary electric winning hole 2011 opened more frequently than in the non-time-short state. In addition, the game ball which entered the normal electric winning a prize mouth 2011 in the 1st time short state is guided to the 1st passage 2011d (1st operation opportunity field) by special route distribution. Therefore, the player causes the game ball to win a prize at the ordinary electric winning opening 2011 by right-handing, and the game ball is brought into the open state by passing the first actuation trigger area, and the first non-electric start winning opening 2002b By winning the game ball by further right-handing, it is useful to adopt a gaming method aiming to win a big hit in the big hit judgment on the first special symbol side. However, in this case, the defined round number is “4 times” even if a big hit game is made after winning the big hit and the first side symbol variation is executed. In the first short time state, there is a possibility that a certain variation state is given.

  Next, in the second time-short state, as in the first time-short state, the game ball is more likely to win a game ball with more opportunities to open the ordinary electric winning hole 2011 than in the non-time short state. In addition, the game ball which entered the normal electric winning a prize mouth 2011 in the 2nd time short state is guided to the 2nd passage 2011e (the 2nd operation opportunity field) by the special 2 route distribution. Therefore, the player causes the game ball to win a prize in the normal electric winning opening 2011 by right-handing, and the second non-electric start winning opening 2004 is brought into an open state by the game ball passing the second actuation trigger area. It is useful to adopt a gaming method aiming to win a big hit by the big hit judgment on the second special symbol side by winning the game ball by further right hitting. However, in this case, the prescribed round number is “16 times” when a big hit game occurs after winning a big hit and the second side symbol variation is executed. In the second time-short state, there is a possibility that a positive change state is given.

  In this way, there are a time-saving state and a non-time-saving state, and even when the time-saving state is given in the same way, the game ball won in the ordinary electric winning opening 2011 passes through the first operation opportunity area. Different games can be provided depending on whether it is the easy first time-short state or the second short-time state where it is easy to pass the second operation trigger area.

  In the non-time-short state or the first time-short state, the first side symbol variation is executed. Therefore, when the big hit is won, the second time is shortened with a probability of 30% (see FIG. 190 (A), 4R probability variable big hit B). The state transitions to the first short time state with a probability of 70% (see FIG. 190 (A), 4R probability variation big hit A, 4R normal big hit). Further, out of 70% to shift to the first short-time state, the short-time state and the probability variation state are given until the next big hit with a probability of 50% (see FIG. 190 (A), 4R probability variation big hit A), and the probability of 20% ( See FIG. 190 (A), 4R normal jackpot) is given a predetermined number of time saving states, and no definite change state is given. On the other hand, since the second side symbol variation is executed in the second short time state, if the big hit is won, the second probability is 100% (see FIG. 190 (B), 16R probability variation big hit, 16R normal big hit). The time saving state is maintained. When the second short-time state is maintained, the short-time state and the probability variation state are given until the next big hit with an 80% probability (see FIG. 190B, 16R probability variation big hit), and a 20% probability (FIG. 190 ( Refer to B), 16R normal big hit) is given a predetermined number of time saving states, and no definite change state is given.

  As described above, in the second time saving state, the total number of winning balls that can be obtained in the big hit game when the big hit is obtained is larger than in the case where the short time status and the first time short status are controlled. Since the possibility of being controlled to the second short time state after the big hit ends is high, it is considered to be a game condition that is significantly more advantageous than the non-short time state or the first short time state. Further, in the first and second time-short states, when transitioning to the non-time-short state when a predetermined number of fluctuation games end, this is the case where a probability change state is not provided, and the gaming state is maintained. When it is determined, it is determined that a definite change state is given.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, while the first side pattern variation is promoted by selecting the first opening pattern in the normal time in the first time short state, the normal time in the second time short state Since the second side pattern variation is promoted by selecting the second opening pattern, it is easy to be continuously controlled to the second time-short state once it is controlled to the second time-short state once and it is very advantageous. It is a game condition. Specifically, when controlled to the second time-short state, after the big hit game winning the "16R normal big hit" by the second side symbol variation, even if the special symbol changes 100 times, the next big hit The second time saving state is continued unless a game is developed that the player can not win.

  In this way, after winning the big hit in the non-short time state and shifting to the first short time state and suppressing the decrease in gaming balls, the big hit is won while the first short time state is granted, and the second time short Transitioning to the state is a realistic game flow where many balls can be obtained. Of course, there may be a transition from the non-short time state directly to the second short time state, while in the first short time state or the second short time state, the short time state of a predetermined number of times is ended without winning a big hit. May shift to a non-time-saving state. In particular, according to the present embodiment, a part (specifically, a probability of 20% that the hit symbol 3 is selected) in the case where the hit is obtained in the normal lottery in the non-short time state (normal game state), Since the normal motorized winning opening 2011 is controlled to perform the opening operation by the special 2 route distribution, the opportunity of the second side symbol fluctuation can be given as a realistic possibility, and the second special symbol side which is extremely advantageous The player can be expected to have a big hit with

  In addition, a special lottery is made by receiving game balls at the first start opening 2002 (first start winning opening 2002a, first non-electric start winning opening 2002b) and second start opening (second non-electric start winning opening) 2004. If the lottery result (the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result) is a special lottery result that generates an advantageous gaming state, the special winning opening 2005 accepts game balls in a predetermined opening / closing pattern after the special variation time has elapsed. Will be possible. When a game ball is received in the special prize opening 2005 when the special prize opening 2005 is in the open state, a predetermined number of gaming balls are paid out to the upper plate 321 by the main control board 1310 and the payout board. Therefore, when the large winning opening 2005 can receive the game ball, by causing the large winning opening 2005 to receive the game ball, many game balls can be paid out, and the player can be entertained.

  In the present embodiment, the game ball is specially received by the first starting opening 2002 (first starting winning opening 2002a, first non-electric starting winning opening 2002b) and the second starting opening (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004. The first start opening 2002 (the first start winning opening 2002a, the first non-electric start winning opening 2002b) and the second start opening (the second non-opening) until the special drawing result drawn from the start of the drawing is suggested Since the suggestion of the special lottery result can not be started when the game ball is accepted in the electric start winning combination opening 2004, the suggestion of the special lottery result is started until the suggestion of the special lottery result drawn earlier is completed. Be put on hold. The number of pending special lottery results is the first start opening 2002 (first start winning opening 2002a, first non-electric starting winning opening 2002b) and the second starting opening (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004 On the other hand, the upper limit is 4 each, and the first start port 2002 (first start prize port 2002a, first non-electric start prize port 2002b) and second start port (second non-electric start prize) are exceeded. M) Even if a game ball is accepted in 2004, the special lottery result is not put on hold and discarded. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the game hall side by accumulating the hold.

[6-5. Others]
The suggestion of the special lottery result described above is performed by the function display unit 1400 and the game board side effect display device 1600. The function display unit 1400 is directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest a special lottery result. The suggestion of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 causes the plurality of LEDs to blink for a predetermined time by repeatedly turning on and off, and thereafter suggests the special lottery result by the combination of the lit LEDs.

  On the other hand, in the game board side effect display device 1600, based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, it is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 and suggestion of a special lottery result is performed as an effect image. The effect image suggesting the special lottery result on the game board side effect display device 1600 is displayed in a variable manner by changing each symbol sequence in a state where three symbol sequences composed of a plurality of symbols are displayed side by side in the horizontal direction. Each symbol row is stopped and displayed so that the symbol rows in the symbol row are sequentially stopped and displayed, and the symbols of the three symbol rows displayed in a stopped state become a combination corresponding to the special lottery result. If the special lottery result is other than "loss", after the three symbol rows are stopped and each symbol is stopped and displayed, a finalized image indicating the special lottery result is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, An advantageous gaming state (for example, a big hit game or the like) corresponding to the special lottery result selected is generated.

  In addition, on peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by gaming board side effect display device 1600, effect operation unit 400 in door frame 3 according to the selected special lottery result. Operation buttons 410 and door frame side effect display device 460, various ornaments of center character 2500, various ornaments of back unit, back lower back movable effect unit, back upper left movable effect unit, back left movable effect unit, back side It is possible to perform a luminous effect, a movable effect, a display effect, etc. by suitably using the upper middle movable effect unit, the lower back movable effect unit, etc., and also to entertain the player by various effects. It is possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from being reduced.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 (or the second effect operation unit 400A) attached to the front of the plate unit 320 bulging forward in the door frame 3. When the button lens 411 is viewed from the outside, the first button decoration 411a and the second button inner decoration 432g of the operation button inner decoration 432 (or the rim of the screen unit 470 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A A decoration in which the decoration part 472a, the sub screen decoration member 476, the peripheral decoration member 478, etc. overlaps, a decoration in which the first button decoration part 411a and the door frame side effect display device 460 overlap, etc. Because it is possible to show the player a decoration full of a sense of decoration, it can attract the player's attention strongly, It can be pachinko machine 1 highly appealing capable to differentiate between pachinko machines.

  In addition, the decoration member 432 in the operation button (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A (screen unit 470)), the door frame side effect display device 460, etc. are arranged in the moving direction of the button lens 411 (operation button 410). In addition, since the button lens 411 is supported by the unit base 431 (unit base 451) so that it can be moved by the player's operation, the player operates (presses) the button lens 411 to move it. Then, the first button decoration 411a and the second button inner decoration 432g (or the peripheral decoration 472a, the sub screen decorative member 476, the peripheral decoration member 478, etc.) move closer to or further from each other. The first button decoration 411a and the second button decoration 432g (or the peripheral decoration 472a, sub The first button decorative part 411a and the second in-button decorative part 432g (or the peripheral decorative part 472a, the sub screen decorative member 476, the peripheral decorative member 478) according to a change in the distance to the clean decorative member 476, the peripheral decorative member 478, etc.) , Etc.) can be changed, and the first button decoration 411a and the second button inner decoration 432g (or the peripheral decoration 472a, the sub screen decorative member 476, the peripheral decoration) can be changed. The decoration (cross mode) by the member 478, etc. can be changed by the player himself, and the player can be entertained and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Further, since the center of the button lens 411 is bulged outwardly on the side opposite to the operation button interior decoration member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A), Since a space is formed between the second decorative body and the player, the distance from the button lens 411 to the first button decorative portion 411a and the second button of the operation button internal decorative member 432 when viewed from the player. The distance to the inner decorative portion 432g (or the peripheral decorative portion 472a of the screen unit 470, the sub-screen decorative member 476, the peripheral decorative member 478, etc.) will vary greatly, and the button lens 411 is operated and moved. Even if the player's eyes move, the first button decoration 411a and the second button decoration 432g (or the peripheral decoration 472a, sub Clean decorative member 476, the peripheral edge decorative member 478, etc.) crossing embodiment (degree of overlap with) for changes, it is possible to show a movement decorated player can strongly attract the attention of the player.

  Further, since the first button decoration part 411a having a radial decoration toward the center is provided on the outer peripheral edge of the transparent button lens 411, the center side of the button lens 411 where the first button decoration part 411a is not provided. The operation button inner decoration member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A) and the door frame side effect display device 460 can be satisfactorily viewed through and the radial shape of the first button decoration part 411a can be seen through. The player's line of sight can be directed to the center of the button lens 411 by the decoration of the operation button, and the operation button internal decoration member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A) and the door frame are passed through the center of the transparent button lens 411. The player's interest can be strongly directed toward the side effect display device 460.

  In addition, since the operation button inner decoration member 432 includes the second button inner decoration portion 432g having a plurality of concentric polygonal decorations centered on the center, the button lens 411 is viewed from the outside. The decoration of the first button decoration 411a and the decoration of the second button decoration 432g of the operation button decoration member 432 intersect each other, and the first button decoration 411a and the second button decoration 432g The pachinko machine 1 having a high appealing power to the player by making the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button inner decoration portion 432g stand out can be surely exhibited. it can.

  Further, since the decoration of the second button interior decoration portion 432g of the operation button interior decoration member 432 has a plurality of concentric polygonal decorations centered on the center, the second button interior decoration portion 432g By decorating, the player's line of sight and interest can be directed to the door frame side effect display device 460 seen in the center of the operation button interior decoration member 432, and the decoration (effect image) of the door frame side effect display device can be enjoyed. it can.

  Further, the operation button left inner decoration substrate 433, the operation button right inner decoration substrate 434, the operation button upper inner decoration substrate 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration substrate 436 are mounted on each LED (or sub screen decoration substrate 477). When the LED 477a) is made to emit light, the light can be decorated by the light in the operation button inner decoration member 432 (or the sub screen decoration member 476), and furthermore, the button lens 411 can also be made to emit light decoration. In addition to the decoration of the button decoration part 411a and the second button internal decoration part 432g (or the sub-screen decoration member 476), the player can be entertained by the light emission decoration. At this time, the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button lower inner area by the second button inner decoration portion 432 g (or the sub-screen decoration member 476). Since the light from each LED (or LED 477a) of the decoration substrate 436 can be diffused, in the second button inner decoration portion 432g, the operation button left inner decoration substrate 433, the operation button right inner decoration substrate 434, the operation button While the inner decoration board 435 and the operation button lower inner decoration board 436 are illuminated and decorated by direct light from each LED (or LED 477a), the first button decoration section 411a has the second button inner decoration. The light is adorned by indirect light diffused by the portion 432 g (or the sub screen decoration member 476). Since the first button decoration 411a is weakly decorated while the second button inner decoration 432g (the sub screen decoration member 476) is strongly lighted and decorated, the operation button left inner decoration substrate 433, With each LED (or LED 477a) of the operation button right inner decoration substrate 434, the operation button upper inner decoration substrate 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration substrate 436 lit, the first button decoration portion 411a and the first button decoration portion 411a Looking at the two-button inner decoration 432g (or the sub-screen decoration member 476), it is possible to show the player a decoration with a more emphasized sense of appearance, and it is an appealing ability that strongly attracts the player's attention. It can be a high pachinko machine 1.

  Further, since the operation button interior decoration member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A) is arranged in the moving direction of the button lens 411, the button lens 411 and the operation button interior decoration member 432 (or the door). It is not necessary to secure a space for the button lens 411 to move outside the outer periphery of the frame side second effect display device 460A), and the button lens 411 or the operation button interior decoration member 432 (or the door frame). The side second effect display device 460A) can be widened to the outside and made as large as possible, and the button lens 411 and the operation button internal decoration member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device can be enlarged). 460A) can stand out. Further, as described above, since it is not necessary to secure a space for movement outside the button lens 411, the frame unit 415 is disposed outside the button lens 411, so that the entire pachinko machine 1 is arranged. The decorativeness can be enhanced, the appearance can be improved, and the pachinko machine 1 can have high appeal that can strongly attract the player's attention.

  In addition, since the center of the button lens 411 bulges outward, when the player hits the button lens 411 and applies an impact to a part of the surface, the button lens 411 is made flat. Compared with the case, since the applied impact force is easily dispersed throughout the button lens 411, the button lens 411 can be made difficult to break (hard to break). Therefore, the button lens 411 is broken during the game, so that the game is interrupted, and it can be avoided that the player feels frustrated and lowers the interest, and the button lens 411 is damaged. By becoming difficult, it is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side in which the present pachinko machine 1 is installed.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the door frame 3 that allows the game area 5a of the game board 5 arranged in the main body frame 4 to be visually recognized through the through-hole 111 from the front, On the unit base 431 (second base unit 450) of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) attached to the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 bulging forward on the side, the outer diameter is 10 cm. An operation button 410 that is movable (advancing and retreating) by a player's operation in a circular shape of about 15 cm within a range of ˜30 cm, and an operation button interior that can be visually recognized from the front through the transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410 The member 432, the door frame side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A), and the operation button 410 are disposed in the frame The frame-shaped frame unit 415 is attached to the effect operation unit 400 having the operation button 410 as large as possible at the position where the storage ball of the game ball is conspicuous in the conventional pachinko machine (the second Since the production operation unit 400A) is visible, the player can recognize that the player is different from the conventional pachinko machine at a glance, and the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal can be obtained. The frame unit 415 includes a frame side lens 417 having translucency, and a second button decoration having translucency on the outer edge of the operation button 410 (button lens 411) so as to be adjacent to the frame side lens 417. The operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decorative substrate 423 are provided on the unit base 431 (second base unit 450) on the rear side of the frame side lens 417 and the second button decorative portion 411b. The frame side lens 417 and the second button are provided with the first LEDs 422a and 423a for emitting and decorating the second button decoration portion 411b and the second LEDs 422b and 423b for emitting and decorating the frame side lens 417. Inside the frame body 416 that partitions the decoration portion 411b Since the cylinder portion 416d, and the main body portion 413a and the inner extension portion 413f of the button base 413 that divides the second button decorative portion 411b from the center side of the button lens 411 are provided, the inner cylindrical portion 416d and the main body portion Light from the first LED 422a, 423a illuminates the center side of the frame side lens 417 or the button lens 411 due to the 413a and the inner extension portion 413f, and light from the second LED 422b, 423b makes the second button decorative portion 411b. It can be prevented from being illuminated, and the adjacent frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration portion 411b can be made to emit light and be decorated independently. Therefore, the frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration part 411b can be light-emittingly decorated, respectively, and a light-emitting effect with a good appearance can be performed. In addition, various patterns of light emission effects can be performed by appropriately combining light off, lighting, blinking, brightness, color, and the like with the adjacent frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration portion 411b. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to get bored, to entertain the player, and to suppress a decrease in interest for the player's game.

  In addition, the first LED 422a and 423a emitting and decorating the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the second LED 422b and 423b emitting and decorating the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 are one operation button left outer decoration Since the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 are attached to the unit base 431 (second base unit 450), the second button decoration portion is provided on the substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decoration substrate 423. Compared with the case where the substrate is provided on the 411b (the operation button 410), the first LEDs 422a and 423a can be kept as far as possible from the second button decoration part 411b, and the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a is sufficiently It can be irradiated to the second button decoration part 411b in a diffused state . Therefore, since the second button decoration portion 411b can be uniformly emitted and decorated, the appearance of the light emission decoration of the second button decoration portion 411b and the frame side lens 417 can be improved, and the interest of the player is strongly drawn. In addition, it is possible to entertain the player, and to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player.

  Further, since the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are attached to the unit base 431 (second base unit 450), the operation button left outer decorative board 422 is moved forward and backward. And the wiring connected to the operation button right outer decorative substrate 423 is not bent or extended, and the disconnection of the wiring due to fatigue can be eliminated. Therefore, even if the operation button 410 (second button decoration portion 411b) is moved, the wiring is not disconnected. Therefore, the operation button 410 can be moved (operation), the frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration portion 411b can be operated. The player can entertain the light-emitting decoration without any problem, and the decrease in the player's interest can be suppressed.

  Further, since the second button decoration portion 411b is provided on the outer edge of the transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410, the operation button inner decoration member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 on the rear side through the transparent button lens 411 are provided. When the (door frame side second effect display device 460A) is viewed, the outer edge of the operation button internal decoration member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) is attached to the second button decoration part 411b. Can be decorated, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved. And by making 1st LED422a, 423a and 2nd LED422b, 423b emit light suitably, the transparent member in which the in-operation button interior decoration member 432 and the door frame side effect display 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be seen behind Since the second button decoration portion 411b and the frame side lens 417 decorating the outer edge of the button lens 411 can be illuminated with various patterns as described above, the player's interest is controlled by the operation buttons 410 and The door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be strongly attracted, and the light emission effect, operation of the operation button 410, and door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second display device 460A). The effect image etc. by the effect display device 460A) can be enjoyed to suppress the decrease in interest.

  In addition, since the player can operate the button lens 411 (operation button 410) having the second button decoration portion 411b at the outer edge, the player can operate the operation button 410 while the player participation type effect is being executed. By causing the player to operate, the player can enjoy the operation of the operation button 410 (player participation type effect), and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game. Then, at the time of execution of the player participation type effect, the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 may be lighted and decorated to attract the player's interest to the operation button 410. Therefore, it is possible to prompt the player to operate the operation button 410 and to entertain the player by participating in the player participation type effect.

  Further, since the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 is provided with a light-transmitting main body portion 413a and an inner extension portion 413f that can be decorated with the first LEDs 422a and 423a, the second button decoration portion 411f of the operation button 410 is provided. A portion closer to the center than the button decoration portion 411b is not illuminated (illuminated) by the first LEDs 422a and 423a, and the operation button 410 (button lens 411) is arranged at the rear side by becoming brighter. It can prevent that the decorative member 432 in the operation button and the door frame side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A) are hard to see from the front. Accordingly, the second button decoration portion 411b can be decorated with light emission in a good state, and the operation button inner decoration member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect are provided) through the transparent button lens 411. The display device 460A) can be visually recognized in a good state, and the player can enjoy the decoration, the light emission effect and the like sufficiently to suppress the decrease in the interest for the game.

  Further, since the inner cylindrical portion 416 d extends from the rear side of the frame unit 415 provided with the frame side lens 417, the second side of the frame side lens 417 and the operation button 410 is decorated on the rear side of the frame unit 415. The inner cylindrical portion 416d can completely separate the portion 411b from the portion 411b. On the other hand, at the end (rear end) near the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 in the inner cylindrical portion 416d, the light from the first LED 422a, 423a or the second LED 422b, 423b Since the rear end of the inner cylindrical portion 416d is positioned closer to the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 than the diffusion range, the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right outside Even if a gap is formed between the front surface of the decorative substrate 423, the light from the first LED 422 a, 423 a illuminates the frame side lens 417, or the light from the second LED 422 b 423 illuminates the second button decoration 411 b Never do. Therefore, light can be reliably blocked by the inner cylindrical portion 416d, and the pachinko machine 1 that reliably achieves the above-described effects can be realized.

  Further, since the main body portion 413a and the inner extension portion 413f of the button base 413 extend from the rear side of the operation button 410 (the button lens 411), on the rear side of the operation button 410, the second button decoration portion 411b And the center side of the button lens 411 can be completely partitioned by the main body 413a and the inner extension 413f. On the other hand, at the end (rear end) on the side closer to the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 in the main body 413a, the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 Since the light from the first LED 422a, 423a does not go behind the rear end of the main body portion 413a, it completely blocks the entry of light to the center side of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410. Can do. Therefore, the first LED 422a, 423a can be used to decorate the second button decoration portion 411b in a favorable state, and the rear operation button interior decoration member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (through the transparent button lens 411). The door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be viewed in a good state, and the player can enjoy the decoration, the light emission effect, and the like sufficiently to suppress a decrease in interest for the game.

  In addition, when viewed from the front, the second button decoration in front of the region outside the operation button inner decoration member 432 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) disposed behind the operation button 410 (button lens 411) Since the part 411b is positioned, the decorative member 432 (door frame side second) is arranged from the gap between the button lens 411 and the decorative member 432 in the operation button (door frame side second effect display device 460A). The members on the outside of the effect display device 460A and the rear side (the back side) can be made less visible by the second button decoration portion 411b, and the appearance of the operation button 410 can be prevented from being deteriorated. At this time, if the second button decoration portion 411b is illuminated with the first LEDs 422a and 423a, the operation button internal decoration member 432 (the door frame side second effect is produced with respect to the brightness of the second button decoration portion 411b. Since the outer side and the rear side of the display device 460A are relatively darkened, the members on the outer side and the rear side of the in-operation button decorative member 432 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be made less visible. Therefore, the appearance of the operation button 410, the frame unit 415, the operation member in the operation button 432, the door frame side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A), etc. can be further improved. A decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Further, since the outer peripheral shape of the operation button 410 is circular, the second button decoration portion 411b provided on the outer edge of the operation button 410 (button lens 411) and the frame adjacent to the second button decoration portion 411b. The side lens 417 has a form extending in an arc shape. Therefore, by appropriately causing the first LEDs 422a and 423a and the second LEDs 422b and 423b to emit light, light emission effects such as light rounds the outer edge of the operation button 410, and light emission such that light spreads from the inside to the outside of the operation button 410 Since it is possible to show the player an effect or light emission effect in which light converges from the outside to the inside of the operation button 410, etc., it is possible to make the player less likely to get bored by various light emission effects. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the upper plate 321 used for the game is obtained by placing the game balls stored in the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 in the door frame 3 into the game area 5a. At the same time, the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) is detachably attached to the front side and the lower side of the upper plate 321, and a predetermined installation space is provided behind the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A). The remaining space of 326j is formed, and a portion corresponding to the lower plate first area A1 in the lower plate body 325 is disposed on the left side of the remaining space of the mounting space 326j, and the remaining space of the mounting space 326j from the portion. A portion corresponding to the lower tray second area A2 in the lower tray main body 325 is extended inside to attach the lower tray 322 capable of storing gaming balls. Therefore, when viewed from the front, the lower plate 322 looks small, the lower plate 322 can be made inconspicuous, and the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) can be made relatively easy to stand out. . Therefore, when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front, the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) can be seen at a position where the upper plate and the lower plate were seen side by side in the conventional pachinko machine. The pachinko machine 1 having a high appeal that can make the player recognize that it is different from the conventional pachinko machine at first glance and can attract the player's interest strongly. it can.

  Further, at the portion of the lower tray second region A2 in the lower tray main body 325 of the lower tray 322, it extends upward from the upper end of the main body standing wall portion 325b extending upward from the outer periphery, to the remaining space side of the mounting space 326j. The lower bowl cover 340, 340A for restricting the movement of the gaming ball prevents the gaming ball in the lower tray 322 from coming in contact with the rear side of the rendering operation unit 400 (the second rendering operation unit 400A) The game balls supplied in the lower plate 322 and the game balls stored in the lower plate 322 contact or press the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). Can be prevented. Therefore, the gaming ball does not abut on the rear side of the rendering operation unit 400 (the second rendering operation unit 400A), and the gaming ball does not damage the rear side of the rendering operation unit 400 (the second rendering operation unit 400A) Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from being reduced by interrupting the game due to the breakage of the rendering operation unit 400 (the second rendering operation unit 400A), and the pachinko machine 1 is installed. An increase in the burden on the game hall side can be suppressed.

  In addition, lower dish cover 340, 340A which restricts the movement of the gaming ball to the remaining space side of main body standing wall portion 325b and mounting space 326j in the lower dish second region A2 portion of lower dish main body 325 of lower dish 322. And the game ball can be prevented from invading (spilling) from the lower plate body 325 into the remaining space of the mounting space 326j. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling lost or feeling unpleasant by intruding into the remaining space of the mounting space 326j by the game ball being inserted into the remaining space of the mounting space 326j, and the player's interest in the game Can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the lower plate cover 340, 340A covers the lower plate second region A2 of the lower plate main body 325 in the lower plate 322, the game ball supplied into the lower plate 322 splashes in the lower plate 322. Even if it jumps up, it can be reliably prevented from invading the remaining space side of the mounting space 326j, and the above-described effects can be reliably achieved. Further, since the lower plate cover 340, 340A covers the lower plate second region A2 of the lower plate main body 325, the player can use the lower plate first region A1 side (lower plate opening portion of the lower plate main body 325). 326d), when the hand is put into the portion of the lower plate second area A2, the lower plate covers 340, 340A can prevent the fingertips or the like from entering the remaining space side of the mounting space 326j. Can prevent the player from being injured by touching the lower surface of the upper plate 321 or the rear side of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A), etc., and allowing the player to play in a safe state. Can do.

  Furthermore, since there is a gap between the lower plate cover 340, 340A and the effect operation unit 400 (the second effect operation unit 400A), the impact, pressure, etc. by the contact of the game ball to the lower plate cover 340, 340A Is not transmitted from the lower cover 340, 340A to the rendering operation unit 400 (the second rendering operation unit 400A), and the breakage of the rendering operation unit 400 (the second rendering operation unit 400A) is assured. It can be prevented.

  Further, since the lower disc ball opening hole 322a is provided in front of the lower ball ball supply port 323c at the lower dish second region A2 in the lower dish main body 325 of the lower dish 322, the lower ball ball extraction hole 322a is opened. In this state, the gaming ball discharged from the lower ball feeding hole 323c can be made to enter the lower ball dropping hole 322a as it is and discharged downward (dollar box), and the gaming ball can be discharged to the main body of the lower plate main body 325 It is possible to make it difficult to reach the front end side of the standing wall portion 325b. Even if the game ball jumps over the lower ball ball release hole 322a, as described above, the lower ball cover 340, 340A is provided, so that the game ball is of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) Since it is possible to prevent contact with the rear side, damage to the rendering operation unit 400 (the second rendering operation unit 400A) can be prevented, and interruption of the game is reduced to reduce the interest of the player in the game Can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the bottom wall portion 325a of the lower plate main body 325 near the front end of the lower plate 322 becomes higher toward the front, the game ball toward the front end side of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower plate main body 325 is inclined. The bottom surface is to be climbed, and the movement speed of the game ball can be attenuated. Therefore, since the speed of the gaming ball in contact with the lower plate cover 340, 340A can be reduced, movement of the gaming ball to the remaining space side of the mounting space 326j is surely restricted by the lower plate cover 340, 340A. In addition to the above, it is possible to reduce the impact when the game balls abut on the lower plate covers 340 and 340A and the main body standing wall portion 325b and to suppress them from being broken.

  Further, since at least the lower plate cover 340, 340A is a separate member, when the lower plate cover 340, 340A is damaged, it can be easily repaired by simply replacing the lower plate cover 340, 340A. It is possible to reduce the increase in the burden on the gaming hall side where 1 is installed.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the center in the left-right direction on the front is swelled forward most below the game area 5a of the game board 5 where a game ball is received in the general prize opening 2001 or the like. The tray unit cover 326 of the tray unit 320 that has been taken out is provided with the stage operation unit 400 and the second stage operation unit 400 </ b> A detachably attached to the most bulging portion of the tray unit 320, and the upper plate 321 is attached to the dish unit cover 326. And a lower plate 322, and the storage plate (upper plate 321 and lower plate 322) is provided with a storage bowl capable of storing game balls, and is viewed outward of the rendering operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) in front view A space at the rear of the mounting space 326j which is the rear of the rendering operation unit 400 (the second rendering operation unit 400A) in the lower tray first region A1 located and the front view Because the lower tray second region A2 is positioned at the front panel, the rendering operation unit 400 (second rendering operation unit 400A) can be made more visible when viewed from the front, and the storage tray (upper tray 321) And the lower plate 322) can be made small to make it less noticeable. Therefore, since the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) that is conspicuous can be seen in the portion where the upper plate and the lower plate were seen in the conventional pachinko machine, the game machine different from the conventional pachinko machine to the player The pachinko machine 1 can be made to have a high appeal that can make it possible to recognize at a glance that it is, and can attract the player's attention strongly.

  Further, since the rendering operation unit 400 (the second rendering operation unit 400A) is attached to the center of the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 in the left-right direction, the portion of the surface of the plate unit cover 326 where the lower plate 322 is open is The first lower pan body 325 having a lower pan second region A2 located in the rear space of the attachment space 326j that is behind the rendering operation unit 400 (second rendering operation unit 400A) in front view is smaller. Since the expansion unit 325B, the second expansion unit 325C, and the lower plate covers 340 and 340A are provided, it is possible to store the game balls in a range (the lower plate second region A2) that cannot be seen from the front in the lower plate 322. it can. Therefore, the storage amount of the game balls can be secured sufficiently against the appearance from the front, so the player can concentrate on the game without worrying about the remaining amount of the game balls in the lower plate 322. It is possible to make the game enjoyable and suppress the decline in interest.

  Further, the lower plate body 325 and the main body 325A having the lower plate first area A1, the lower plate covers 340 and 340A having the lower plate second area A2, the first extension part 325B and the second extension. Since the lower plate 322 is configured by attaching (combining) the portion 325C, a plurality of lower plate covers 340 and 340A having different sizes, the first extension portion 325B, the second extension portion 325C, and the like are prepared in advance. The lower plate cover 340, 340A or the first extension portion 325B and the second extension portion 325C have a size corresponding to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 and the size of the mounting space 326j in the tray unit cover 326, etc. The volume of the dish 322 can be optimized. Further, as described above, by rearranging (changing) the lower cover 340, 340A, the first extension portion 325B, and the second extension portion 325C, it is possible to cope with the size of the rear portion of the mounting space 326j. Since the width of the rear space depends on the rearward projecting amount of the rendering operation unit 400 (second rendering operation unit 400A), various rendering operation units 400 (second It can be set as the lower plate 322 which can respond to production operation unit 400A), and the versatility of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

  Further, since the lower plate 322 is provided with the bottom wall portion 325a and the main body standing wall portion 325b rising from the outer peripheral end of the bottom wall portion 325a, the lower plate 322 becomes a container shape recessed downward, Can be stored reliably. Further, since the lower plate cover 340, 340A has the cover upright wall 340a rising from the upper end of the main body upright wall 325b of the lower plate main body 325, the lower plate cover 340, 340A of various shapes is prepared in advance. In addition, it is made to correspond to various forms by combining (attaching) the lower plate covers 340 and 340A according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 and the size (shape) of the space at the rear of the mounting space 326j. It is possible to achieve the same function and effect as described above.

  Further, in the lower plate 322 composed of the lower plate main body 325 and the lower plate covers 340 and 340A, the lower plate covers 340 and 340A are combined (attached) to the upper end of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower plate main body 325. Thus, since the portion of the lower plate 322 on which the gaming balls are placed is the lower plate main body 325, the portion of the lower plate main body 325 and the lower plate covers 340 and 340A The boundary (joint, dividing line PL) is never located. Therefore, since the weight of the stored gaming balls is received only by the lower tray main body 325, the force is such that the lower tray covers 340 and 340A are pulled away from the lower tray main body 325 even if many gaming balls are stored. It does not act and can prevent the lower cover 340, 340A from being removed from the lower main body 325.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, an upper plate capable of storing game balls below and in front of the game area 5a of the game board 5 in which a game is performed to receive a game ball at the general winning opening 2001 etc. The lower bowl ball supply port 323c and the lower bowl ball opening hole 322a in the lower plate 322 are provided by the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) provided with the lower plate 322 and the lower plate 322 and arranged at the center in the left-right direction. And the lower plate 322 is difficult to see from the front (player) (it is difficult to see), so the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be made clear and the appearance can be improved, and the player's interest Can be made a pachinko machine 1 having a high appealing power. In addition, since it is difficult to visually recognize the game ball going from the lower ball supply opening 323c to the lower ball removal hole 322a by the effect operation unit 400 (the second effect operation unit 400A), the player can play the game in the lower plate 322 This makes it difficult to notice the flow of the sphere and can prevent distraction, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest in the game.

  In addition, the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower plate on the bottom surface of the lower plate 322 for guiding the game ball from the lower plate ball supply port 323c to the lower plate ball release hole 322a by the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A). Since it is difficult to see the game ball guided by the guiding means such as the ball guiding hole 322a, the ball guiding part 322c and the buffering part 322d, the lower dish ball hole 322a remains open. The game balls supplied from the lower tray ball supply port 323c to the lower tray 322 are guided by the guiding means and discharged smoothly (immediately) downward from the lower tray ball removal hole 322a. An illusion can be made that the game balls are discharged to the lower side (dollar box) of the lower plate 322 without passing through the lower plate 322. This makes it difficult for the player to feel the annoyance of the game ball passing through the lower plate 322, and makes it possible for the player to concentrate on the game and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, since the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) makes it difficult to see more than half of the lower plate 322 including the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball removal hole 322a from the front, it is probable. The lower counter ball supply port 323c, the lower counter ball removal hole 322a, and the like are located behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). In other words, since more than half of the lower plate 322 is circulated to the rear of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A), the actual lower plate with respect to the size of the lower plate 322 seen from the front. Since the size (capacity) of 322 is large, it is possible to secure a sufficient storage amount of gaming balls in the lower plate 322 as compared to the appearance.

  Further, in the state where the lower dish ball removal hole 322a is opened, the game balls released from the lower dish ball supply port 323c into the lower dish 322 are transferred to the lower dish ball supply port 323c and the lower dish ball on the bottom surface of the lower dish 322. Since it can be smoothly guided to the lower dish ball extraction hole 322a by the guiding means such as the part between the extraction hole 322a, the ball guiding part 322c and the buffering part 322d, and discharged to the lower part (dollar box) of the lower dish 322. The game balls can be prevented from circulating around the lower plate 322, and the game balls circulating in the lower plate 322 can be reliably made difficult to visually identify from the front (player). Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the flow of the game balls in the lower tray 322, and it is possible to prevent the player from being distracted and to suppress the decrease in interest for the game.

  Further, when the lower ball ball extraction hole 322a is kept open, the ball guide portion 322c etc. immediately sends the game ball supplied from the lower ball ball supply port 323c to the lower plate 322 without causing the player to notice it. Since it is possible to discharge the lower balls from the lower ball ball removal holes 322a downward, it is possible for the player to illusion that the game balls are discharged to the lower side (dollar box) of the lower plate 322 without passing through the lower plates 322. Can. This makes it difficult for the player to feel the annoyance of the game ball passing through the lower plate 322, and makes it possible for the player to concentrate on the game and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, the rendering operation unit 400 (the second rendering operation unit 400A) makes it difficult to visually recognize from the front half or more of the storage area (storage area) of the gaming ball in plan view of the lower tray 322. The actual size of the lower tray 322 is more than twice the size of the visible one with respect to the size of 322. Therefore, as with the lower tray of the conventional pachinko machine, it is possible to secure a sufficient storage amount of gaming balls.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the door frame 3 bulges forward under the front view of the game area 5a of the game board 5 in which a game is received such that the game ball is received in the general winning opening 2001 or the like. A production operation unit for attaching a large production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) having the same height as the overall height of the plate unit cover 326 at the center in the left-right direction of the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 And a dish front lower decoration portion 326c below the center in the vertical direction on both the left and right sides of the production operation unit mounting portion 326a on the front surface of the dish unit cover 326. Because it has a shape, the rendering operation unit 400 (second rendering operation unit 400A attached to the rendering operation unit attachment portion 326a But it can be able to show as to protrude greatly forward to stand out staging operation unit 400 (second staging operation unit 400A). Therefore, since the large-sized production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) is seen in an emphasized state at the position where the upper plate and the lower plate were seen side by side in the conventional pachinko machine, At first glance, it can be recognized that it is different from the conventional pachinko machine, and the pachinko machine 1 can have high appeal. Then, the lower dish 322 is recessed backward from the dish front lower decoration part 326c that is recessed rearward on the left and right outer sides of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) on the front surface of the dish unit cover 326. A portion of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) is circulated to the rear, and the amount of game balls stored in the lower plate 322 (the volume of the lower plate 322) can be sufficiently secured. It is not necessary to play while worrying that the lower plate 322 is filled with game balls, the player can be dedicated to the game, the game can be enjoyed, and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  In addition, since a part of the lower plate 322 wraps around the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A), when the player puts his hand into the lower plate 322 from the front, the fingertip is placed on the lower plate. It is possible to make it difficult to touch the rear wall 322 (the front of the plate unit base 323), the lower plate cover 340, and the like. This allows the player to recognize that a sufficient amount of game balls has been secured even by tactile sense, and in the state where the game balls are stored in the lower plate 322, Since it is possible to recognize that a large number of game balls are stored, it is possible to give a sense of satisfaction to the player, to entertain the game, and to suppress a decrease in interest. In addition, since the finger of the hand put in the lower plate 322 is hard to touch the back wall of the lower plate 322, the lower plate cover 340, etc., it gives the player the same feeling as the lower plate in the conventional pachinko machine. Therefore, the player who is used to the conventional pachinko machine can be prevented from giving a sense of incongruity, and the player can be relieved and a decrease in interest for the game can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, since the lower plate 322 is formed so as to become wider toward the back side (backward), a sufficient amount of game balls can be secured even when the front side is small. In other words, since the part of the front end side of the lower plate 322 is made small, the lower plate 322 is made inconspicuous on the front surface (the front plate lower decorative portion 326c) of the plate unit cover 326 where the lower plate 322 is open. Thus, the rendering operation unit 400 (the second rendering operation unit 400A) can be made relatively conspicuous. Therefore, the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) can be provided while sufficiently securing the amount of game balls stored in the lower plate 322, and the appealing power to the player can be enhanced. You can entertain and suppress the decline of interest.

  In addition, the player covers the lower plate 322 because the lower plate cover 340 covers the side and the upper part of the part of the lower plate 322 which is located behind the effect operation unit 400 (the second effect operation unit 400A). When putting a hand, it is possible to prevent a finger tip or the like from touching the inner surface of the dish unit cover 326 or the rear surface of the rendering operation unit 400 (the second rendering operation unit 400A) etc. It can be played in a safe state. In addition, the lower plate cover 340 can prevent the game ball from intruding (spinning) from the lower plate 322 into the plate unit cover 326.

  Furthermore, since the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) is arranged at the center in the left-right direction on the front surface of the dish unit cover 326, the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) is placed from the player side. The pachinko machine 1 can be made more conspicuous and can attract the player's interests, and the appealing power of the pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced, and the decoration by the stage operation unit 400 (second stage operation unit 400A) can be easily seen. Then, the decoration and production of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) can be enjoyed to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player.

  Further, since the lower plate 322 is provided with a lower plate ball supply port 323c that can communicate with the upper plate 321, and a lower plate ball hole 322a that is vertically opened and closed, the conventional pachinko machine is provided. Because the player has the same function as the lower plate in the game, the player who is used to the conventional pachinko machine will not be confused with the function of the lower plate 322 when playing with the pachinko machine 1, and it will be the same as in the past. It is possible to play the game with a feeling like this, and allow the player to concentrate on the game and enjoy the game. Further, since the lower dish ball supply port 323c and the lower dish ball removal hole 322a are respectively arranged behind the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A), when viewed from the front, the lower plate ball supply port 323c and The lower dish ball hole 322a is not visible from the player side, can improve the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 by making the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 clear, and can attract the player's attention strongly. Machine 1 can be used.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, below the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 facing the game area 5 a in the door frame 3, the plate unit 320 bulges forward. In the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) attached to the plate unit cover 326, the door frame side effect display device 460 capable of presenting effects to the player While attaching the in-operation button inner decoration member 432 (the screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A) decorating the outer side, the outer diameter so as to surround the outer periphery of the operation button inner decoration member 432 (screen unit 470) Is about 15 cm and the center bulges outward (outward) from the base unit 430 (second base unit 450). The operation button 410 having the transparent button lens 411 is attached, and the first button decorative portion 411a, the second button decorative portion 411b, and the button frame 412 are provided on the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. Since the cylindrical button base 413 protruding from the 411 side to the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) side is provided, the button lens 411 and the decoration in the operation button are made by the first button decoration portion 411a, the button base 413, etc. Reduces the visibility of the outer edge and back side (rear side) of the in-operation button decorative member 432 (the screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A) etc. from the gap between the member 432 (screen unit 470) And the appearance of the operation button 410 can be improved. Therefore, the appearance of the operation button 410, the operation button internal decoration member 432 provided inside, the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A), and the like can be further improved, and the player's appearance can be improved. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

  Further, the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412, and the button base 413 in the operation button 410 are separated from the gap between the button lens 411 and the operation button internal decoration member 432 (screen unit 470). Since it is possible to make it difficult to see the outer edge and the back side of the operation button inner decoration member 432 (screen unit 470), the outer diameter of the operation button 410 is increased to increase the button lens 411 and the operation button inner decoration member 432 (screen unit). 470), even if the gap between them is relatively large, the first button decoration portion 411a and the like can be favorably concealed, so that a large operation button having an outer diameter of about 15 cm can be prevented while preventing the appearance from deteriorating. 410 (button lens 411) can be embodied without problems. Therefore, since the operation button 410 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be enlarged, the pachinko machine 1 can be made conspicuous, and the player is strongly interested. The pachinko machine 1 with high appeal can be attracted.

  Furthermore, since the button base 413 (body part 413a) cylindrically protruding from the button lens 411 side to the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) side is provided, the button lens 411 and the decoration member 432 in the operation button When the gap between the screen units 470) is viewed obliquely, the inner wall of the button base 413 can shield and hide anything outside the operation member inner decoration member 432 (screen unit 470), The appearance of the button 410 can be further improved.

  Further, since the transparent button lens 411 has a three-dimensional shape (hemispherical shape) bulging in a direction (outward) away from the base unit 430 (second base unit 450), the button lens 411 is located near the outer periphery of the button lens 411. The surface is a plane formed by the opening on the front end side of the button base 413 (a plane orthogonal to the direction in which the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) and the button lens 411 are arranged, that is, the forward / backward direction of the operation button 410 The light is likely to be refracted when viewed from the player side, since the light is inclined with respect to the plane orthogonal to Accordingly, the first button decoration part 411a, the second button decoration part 411b, and the button frame 412 and the button base 413 provided on the outer peripheral edge are combined to form the button lens 411 and the operation button decoration member 432 (screen unit 470). ), The outer edge and the back side of the operation button inner decoration member 432 (screen unit 470) can be made difficult to see, and the above-described operational effects can be reliably achieved.

  In addition, since the button lens 411 is formed in a three-dimensional shape which bulges outward, the volume in the operation button 410 is increased, so the decoration member 432 in the operation button and the door frame disposed in the operation button 410 It becomes possible to make the side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A) larger and easier to move, and the door frame side effect display device in which the player can be enjoyed by the operation button 410 It is possible to facilitate the provision of the 460 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A), and it is possible to embody the pachinko machine 1 that can further entertain the player.

  Furthermore, since the button lens 411 is formed in a three-dimensional shape, designability (decorability) is given to the operation button 410. Therefore, the operation button 410 in the present pachinko machine 1 is made conspicuous to interest the player. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as a pachinko machine to be played.

  Further, in the first button decorative portion 411a, the second button decorative portion 411b, and the button frame 412 provided on the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411, the button frame 412 is opaque. It is possible to reliably hide that the back side of the operation button 410 or the operation member in the operation button 432 (screen unit 470) can be seen from the gap between the lens 411 and the operation member in the operation button 432 (screen unit 470). It is possible to improve the appearance by reducing the deterioration of the appearance of the button 410 and the like.

  Further, the button lens 411 is provided with an opaque button frame 412 with a predetermined width inward from the outer peripheral end of the button lens 411, and in cooperation with the first button decoration part 411a and the second button decoration part 411b, Since the gap between the main body part 413a of the button base 413 and the operation button internal decoration member 432 (screen unit 470) in the operation button 410 can be made difficult to see from the side, the main body part 413a and the operation button internal decoration member 432 ( The space between the screen unit 470) and the screen unit 470) can be increased, and accordingly, a space for moving the operation button 410 and the screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A can be easily secured. Can be moved well.

  Furthermore, since the outer periphery of the button lens 411 is cylindrical, the operation button 410 can be easily moved smoothly because the outer periphery has no directivity compared to the polygonal shape. Therefore, even if the size of the operation button 410 is increased, it is possible to perform a pressing operation without any problem, and it is possible to surely entertain the player participation type effect using the operation button 410 and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, since the operation button 410 is enlarged, it is easy to operate without confirming the position of the operation button 410 when performing a player participation type effect that causes the player to operate the operation button 410. Since it is possible to make the player easily touch the operation button 410 to perform a pressing operation, it is possible to make it easier for the player to participate in the player participation type effect using the operation button 410, and to entertain the player and reduce the interest. Can be suppressed.

  Further, since the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) is provided in the operation button 410, the player's interest is manipulated by presenting the effect image according to the gaming state. The door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) in the button 410 can be strongly attracted, and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) is used. It is possible to entertain an effect, and it is possible to prompt the player to operate the operation button 410 by an effect image, a light emission effect, or the like by the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A). A drop in interest can be suppressed by making the player actively participate in the player participation type effect and have fun. In addition, by performing the production within the operation button 410, it can be thought that there is something good depending on the player, and the expectation for the game is raised and the decrease in the interest is suppressed. Can do.

  Further, the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be visually recognized through the transparent button lens 411 of the large operation button 410 (portion inside the first button decoration portion 411a). Therefore, the player can immediately recognize that the operation button 410 of the pachinko machine 1 is clearly different from the operation button of the conventional pachinko machine, and has high appeal to the player. The pachinko machine 1 can be used, and the player's operation button 410 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A) in the operation button 410 are enhanced. It is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's interest.

  The present invention has been described with reference to preferred embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various modifications can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention as described below. And design changes are possible.

  That is, in the above embodiment, the game machine applied to the pachinko machine 1 is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this. Even in this case, the same effect as described above can be obtained.

  In the above embodiment, the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 has the first button decoration portion 411a formed on the inner peripheral side of the button frame 412. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The button lens 411 in which the first button decoration portion 411a is not formed may be used.

  In the above embodiment, the opaque button frame 412 is attached to the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411 in the operation button 410. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the button frame 412 is not attached. You may make it form the decoration part for concealing a rear side over the perimeter in the site | part corresponding to the button frame 412 in the lens 411. FIG.

  Furthermore, in the above embodiment, in the operation button 410, the base unit 430 (ie, the entire periphery of the outer periphery of the in-operation button decorative member 432 and the door frame side second effect display device 460A is surrounded from the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411) Although the thing provided with the button base 413 (main-body part 413a) which protruded cylindrically to the 2 base unit 450 side was shown, it is not limited to this, but the decoration member 432 in the operation button and the door frame side second production At least one base unit 430 (second base unit 450) may be protruded so as to surround only part of the entire outer periphery of the display device 460A. The shape of the button base 413 may be a shape along the outer periphery of the button lens 411 or a shape not along the outer periphery of the button lens 411. The button base 413 may have a decoration (a flat decoration by sticking or printing a seal, a three-dimensional decoration by unevenness such as relief, etc.) on at least the inner wall side. Further, the button base 413 may be translucent or non-translucent. The button base 413 may be colored or colorless and transparent. In addition, when the button base 413 is transparent, it is desirable to perform light diffusion processing such as a texture, a slit, and a prism on at least one of the inner wall side and the outer wall side.

  In the above-described embodiment, the lower plate 322 is shown as an example in which the lower plate 322 is recessed backward only from the left outer portion of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326. It is not limited to this, but a lower dish that is recessed backward from the left and right sides of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) and is connected to each other behind the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A). 322, or only recessed from the right outer portion of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A), and a part of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) wraps behind. It may be

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the shape (the shape of the front end of the lower plate 322) where the lower plate 322 is recessed backward on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 (the shape of the front end of the lower plate 322) is curved backward. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be a polygonal column surface or a front surface recessed in a polyhedron shape.

  Moreover, although said example showed the example which attached the presentation operation unit 400 (2nd presentation operation unit 400A) in the front surface of the plate unit cover 326, it does not limit to this, "an operation dial, a touch panel etc. "Having the operation device of", "having the rotating body having the decoration on the surface", "having the decoration having the decoration and the movable device for moving the decoration", "the game "Equipped with a decorative body that three-dimensionally imitates characters, items, logos, and scenes (diorama) etc. according to the machine concept", "characters, items, logos and predetermined patterns according to the game machine concept , Etc., which are decorated by stickers, printing, or the like ", or a member such as a panel or a panel provided with the above may be attached. Further, the number of members attached to the attachment space 326j (rendering operation unit attachment portion 326a) need not be one, and a plurality of (two or more) members may be attached. For example, separate members may be attached such as a member attached to the upper half of the mounting space 326j and a member attached to the lower half of the mounting space 326j.

  In the above embodiment, the pan unit cover 326 is formed with the rendering operation unit mounting portion 326a that opens forward to mount the rendering operation unit 400 (second rendering operation unit 400A). The plate unit cover (for example, a panel-like cover portion) does not have an opening (effect operation unit mounting portion 326a) for mounting the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). A space corresponding to the mounting space 326j (or the remaining space of the mounting space 326j) may be formed in the rear of the pan unit cover. In addition, it is desirable to apply decoration such as characters, items, logos, predetermined patterns, etc. in accordance with the concept of the gaming machine to the front surface of such a dish unit cover by sticking, printing, attaching decorative members, etc. .

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, an area slightly larger than half of the storage area (reserved area) of the game ball in the plan view of the lower plate 322 is provided by the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) as a covering portion. Although an example in which it is difficult to visually recognize from the front is shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and an area less than half of the storage area of the game balls in the lower plate 322 may be difficult to visually recognize from the front. You may make it difficult to visually recognize the whole plate 322 from the front.

  In the above-described embodiment, the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 are shown in an arc shape partially provided in the circumferential direction. The second button decoration portion 411b and the frame side lens 417 may be in an annular shape extending over the entire circumference.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the decoration having a plurality of concentric polygons centered on the center is shown as the second button decoration element 432g of the operation button decoration member 432 in the effect operation unit 400. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the second button interior decoration portion 432g may be a decoration having a plurality of concentric circles (including an ellipse) centered on the center.

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the in-operation button decorative member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 disposed on the rear side through the transparent button lens 411 (front member) of the operation button 410 and the second effect on the door frame side Although a rear member such as the display device 460A is always visible, the present invention is not limited to this, and at least one of the front member and the rear member disposed in front and rear (or upper and lower) under predetermined conditions It is good also as a structure which has the variable light transmission means which a rear side becomes visible by satisfying. Here, as the variable light transmitting means, "a device such as a magic mirror that allows the rear side to be visible due to the difference in brightness between the front side and the rear side", and "such as a liquid crystal film, transparent when the power is turned on / off. Or the like so that the rear side can be visually recognized. " The front member and the rear member may be relatively movable or may not be relatively movable.

  By providing the variable light transmitting means in at least one of the front member and the rear member, in the normal state, only the front member or the front and rear members can be viewed. It is possible to show the player the decoration of the visible member. And in a special state, by satisfying a predetermined condition, a rear member (a rear member or a member arranged on the rear side of the rear member) that could not be seen in a normal state can be seen. The members and the back member, or the front and back members and the members on the back side of the back member can show the overlapping decoration. Therefore, various decorations (decoration effects) can be shown to the player using the front member and the rear member, so that the player can be made hard to get tired, and the player can be entertained. It is possible to suppress the decline in the interest of

  Specifically, for example, when the front member has variable light transmitting means such as a magic mirror, in the normal state, only the decoration of the front member is made by darkening the rear side of the front member. It can be made visible to the player. Then, when the space between the front member and the rear member or the rear side of the rear member is brightened by the light of the light emitting part such as an LED, the satisfaction condition of the variable light transmitting means in the front member is satisfied, and the rear is passed through the front member. The members become visible, and it is possible to show the player the decoration in which the decoration of the front member and the decoration of the rear member overlap.

  Alternatively, if the front member is transparent and the rear member has variable light transmission means such as a magic mirror, the surface of the rear member can be seen through the front member in a normal state. It is possible to show the player the decoration by the surface of the player. When the rear side of the rear member is brightened by the light from the light emitting part such as an LED, the satisfaction condition of the variable light transmitting means in the rear member is satisfied, and the rear side can be visually recognized through the rear member. Through the members, it is possible to show the player a member on the rear side of the rear member (for example, a display device, a decorative body such as a character).

  Furthermore, when both the front and rear members are provided with variable light transmitting means such as a magic mirror, in the normal state, only the decoration of the front member can be shown to the player, and When the space between the rear member and the rear member is brightened by the light from the light emitting unit such as an LED, the condition for satisfying the variable light transmission means in the front member is satisfied, and the surface of the rear member can be viewed through the front member. The player can show the decoration with the rear member. On the other hand, the rear side of the rear member is brightened by the light of the light emitting portion such as an LED (or the space between the front and rear members and the rear side of the rear member are simultaneously brightened by the light of the light emitting portion such as LED ) And the satisfying conditions of the respective variable light transmitting means in the front member and the rear member are satisfied, and the rear member of the rear member (for example, a decorative body such as a display device or a character) is passed through the front member and the rear member. Can be shown to the player. Thus, by appropriately selecting the site to be brightened by the light of the light emitting portion, the range that can be viewed can be changed in multiple steps, and a player can enjoy various decorations.

  In the above example, since the variable light transmitting means is like a magic mirror, it looks like a mirror in the state where the rear side is darkened. You can show the glittering decorations to the players.

  Further, in the above specific example, the variable light transmitting means has been described as a magic mirror. However, even when the variable light transmitting means is a liquid crystal film, similar effects can be obtained. In addition, when a variable light transmitting means such as a liquid crystal film is used, light can be transmitted even in an opaque state (having translucency), so that it can be provided between the front member and the rear member or between the rear member and the rear member. If the rear side of the member can be brightened (or light-decorated) by the light from the light-emitting unit such as an LED, it is possible to show the player various effects such as light-emitting effects and decoration effects. .

[7. Main control board, payout control board and peripheral control board]
Next, a control board for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 123 is a block diagram of the main control board, the payout control board, and the peripheral control board, FIG. 124 is a block diagram showing the continuation of FIG. 123, and FIG. 125 is the payout control board, CR unit and frequency constituting the main board. FIG. 126 is a schematic diagram of various detection signals input / output to / from a lending device connection terminal board such as a game ball that relays electrical connection with the display board, FIG. 126 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 123, and FIG. FIG. 128 is a block diagram showing an outline of the peripheral control MPU, and FIG. 128 is a block diagram around the sound source built-in VDP in the liquid crystal display control unit.

  As shown in FIG. 123, the pachinko machine 1 includes a first control unit MCG that performs control related to a game including payout of prize balls, in addition to generation processing of a control power source (for example, +5 V). And a second control unit SCG that performs an effect relating to a game that is progressed by the first control unit MCG.

  More specifically, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment adopts a structure in which various controls are shared by preparing a plurality of substrates, and as the first control unit MCG, a main control substrate 1310, A payout control board 951 and a power supply board 931 are provided, and a peripheral control board 1510 is provided as the second control unit SCG. Hereinafter, in describing the control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, first, the first control unit MCG will be described in the order of the main control board 1310, the payout control board 951, and the power supply board 931, and then the second control board. The control unit SCG (peripheral control board 1510) will be described.

[7-1. Main control board]
Of the first control unit MCG, the main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game controls the power-on process executed when the power is turned on and a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on, as shown in FIG. A main control MPU 1310a, which is a microprocessor that has a built-in ROM for storing various control programs such as a main control program for controlling a game operation and a command, a ROM for storing various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. A main control input circuit 1310b to which a detection signal from the detection switch is input, a main control output circuit 1310c for outputting various signals to an external substrate, etc., and a main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d for driving various solenoids A power failure monitoring circuit 1310e for monitoring a sign of a power failure or a momentary power failure of a predetermined voltage, It has been.

  The main control MPU 1310a includes a built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in RAM”) and a built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in ROM”). Further, a watchdog timer 1310af (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in WDT 1310af”) for monitoring the operation (system), a function for preventing fraud, and the like are also incorporated.

  Further, the main control MPU 1310a has a built-in nonvolatile RAM. In this non-volatile RAM, a unique ID code to which a unique code (a code that exists only one in the world) for identifying an individual is attached by a maker who manufactured the main control MPU 1310a is stored in advance. Since this once assigned ID code is stored in the non-volatile RAM, it can not be rewritten even using an external device. The main control MPU 1310a can extract an ID code from a non-volatile RAM and can refer to it.

  The main control MPU 1310a also uses a hardware random number circuit 1310an (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in") to update a big hit determination random number for use in determining whether or not to generate a big hit gaming state among various random numbers related to the game. Hard random number circuit 1310 an ′ ′) is incorporated. The main random number circuit 1310an with built-in main control generates a random number within a predetermined numerical range (in this embodiment, a numerical range of a value 0 to a maximum value 32767 is preset as a minimum value), A predetermined value is not fixed as the initial value (that is, the initial value is not fixed), and the circuit configuration is such that a different value is set each time the main control MPU 1310a is reset. Specifically, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the main random number built-in hard random number circuit 1310an first sets a clock signal (input to the main control MPU 1310a as an initial value within a predetermined numerical range). Based on the clock signal output from the main control crystal oscillator (to be described later), other values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another without duplication, and all values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted. When the process is completed, one value in the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and other values in the predetermined numerical range are not duplicated at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. Extract one after another. The main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an repeatedly performs such a high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU 1310a wins the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an at the time of acquiring a value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an. It is set as a judgment random number.

  The main control input circuit 1310b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information whose detection signals from various detection switches are input to the various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the main control input circuit 1310 b is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is not input. That is, the main control input circuit 1310b does not reset the information based on the detection signals from the various detection switches input to the various input terminals by a main control system reset to be described later. It is configured as a circuit output from the output terminal.

  The main control output circuit 1310 c is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and various signals for outputting various signals to an external substrate or the like are input to the various input terminals. The main control output circuit with reset function 1310 ca having a reset function provided with a reset terminal for forcing reset of the stored information, and the reset function main control output circuit 1310 cb not having a reset function not provided with a reset terminal And consists of. The main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is input. That is, the main control output circuit with reset function 1310 ca has information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external substrate etc. by being reset by a main control system reset described later. Is configured as a circuit that does not output any signal from the various output terminals. On the other hand, the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is not input. That is, the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb has the information for outputting the various signals inputted to its various input terminals to the external substrate etc. not reset by the main control system reset described later. The signal based on this is comprised as a circuit from which the various output terminals are output.

  114, a first start port sensor 4002 that detects a game ball that has entered the first start port 2002, a second start port sensor 4004 that detects a game ball that has entered the second start port 2004, and general A detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 4020 that detects a game ball that has entered the winning opening 2001 or a signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is input to a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b. Has been entered. 114, a gate sensor 4003 that detects a game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2003, a count sensor 4005 that detects a game ball that has entered the big prize opening 2005, and a game that has been received by the normal electric prize opening 2011. A detection signal from a general electric prize sensor 4006 that detects a ball and a magnetic detection sensor 4024 that is attached to the back unit 3000 shown in FIG. 9 and detects fraud using a magnet is a panel attached to the game board 5. It is inputted to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310 a through the relay board 4161 and the main control input circuit 1310 b.

  The main control MPU 1310a outputs a drive signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function based on the detection signals from these switches, so that the main control output circuit with reset function is output. A control signal is output from 1310ca to the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, and a drive signal is output from the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d to the general drawing solenoid 2107, the attacker solenoid 2108, and the distribution solenoid 2109 via the panel relay board 4161 By outputting a drive signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function, the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function passes through the panel relay board 4161 and the function display unit 1400. Drives to special symbol display 1403, second special symbol display 1405, first special reserved number display 1404, second special reserved number display 1406, normal symbol display 1402, status display 1401, and round display 1407 Output a signal.

  In addition, the main control MPU 1310a outputs various information (game information) relating to the game from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function, thereby performing payout control from the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function. By outputting various information (game information) about the game to the substrate 951 or outputting a signal (power failure clear signal) to the main control output circuit with reset function 1310 ca from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, the main function with reset function A signal (power failure clear signal) is output from the control output circuit 1310ca to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e.

  In the present embodiment, the first start port sensor 4002, the second start port sensor 4004, the gate sensor 4003, and the count sensor 4005 use non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switches. For the general prize opening sensors 4020 and 4020, contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switches are used. This is because game balls frequently enter the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 and frequently pass through the gate portion 2003, so the first start port sensor 4002, the second start port sensor 4004, and Detection of game balls by the gate sensor 4003 also frequently occurs. Therefore, proximity switches with a long lifetime are used as the first start opening sensor 4002, the second start opening sensor 4004, and the gate sensor 4003. Further, when a big hit gaming state that is advantageous to the player occurs, the big winning opening 2005 is opened and game balls are frequently entered, so that the detection of the game balls by the count sensor 4005 also occurs frequently. Therefore, a proximity switch having a long life is also used for the count sensor 4005. On the other hand, detection by the general winning opening sensors 4020 and 4020 does not frequently occur in the general winning openings 2001 and 2201 where the gaming balls do not enter frequently. For this reason, mechanical switches having a shorter lifespan than the proximity switch are used for the general prize opening sensors 4020 and 4020.

  Further, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands related to payout as serial data from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function, thereby performing payout control from the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function. Various commands are transmitted to the board 951 as serial data. When the payout control board 951 completes normal reception of various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, the payout control board 951 outputs a signal (payment ACK signal) to that effect to the main control board 1310. This signal (payer ACK signal) is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b.

  Further, the main control MPU 1310a receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 951 as serial data by the main control input circuit 1310b, thereby inputting the predetermined serial input port from the main control input circuit 1310b. Various commands are received as serial data at the terminal. Main control MPU 1310a, upon completion of normal reception of various commands from payout control board 951 as serial data, main control output with reset function from the output terminal of the predetermined output port (a main payment ACK signal) notifying that. The signal is output to the circuit 1310ca, and a signal (main payment ACK signal) is output from the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca to the payout control board 951.

  Further, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands related to control of the game effect and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 as serial data from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function. There is no reset function, and various commands are transmitted as serial data from the main control output circuit 1310 cb to the peripheral control board 1510.

  Here, the main cycle serial transmission port for transmitting various commands as serial data to the peripheral control board 1510 will be briefly described. The main control MPU 1310a is mainly configured of the main control CPU core 1310aa, and in addition to the main control built-in RAM, the main cycle serial transmission port 1310ae etc., which is one of various main control serial I / O ports, Circuit connection (see FIG. 133). The main rotation serial transmission port 1310 ae transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 1510 as main rotation serial data, and mainly includes a transmission shift register 1310 aea, a transmission buffer register 1310 aeb, and a serial management unit 1310 aec (see FIG. 133). When the main control CPU core 1310 aa sets a command in the transmission buffer register 1310 aeb and outputs a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 1310 aec, the serial management unit 1310 a ec sets the command set in the transmission buffer register 1310 aeb from the transmission buffer register 1310 aeb The data is transferred to the transmission shift register 1310 aea to start transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 as main cycle serial data. In the present embodiment, the transmission buffer register 1310aeb has a storage capacity of 32 bytes. The main control CPU core 1310aa continuously transmits a plurality of commands to the peripheral control board 1510 by setting a plurality of commands in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb and then outputting a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 1310aec.

  The power supply substrate 931 for supplying various voltages to the main control substrate 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control substrate 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. And BCO (see FIG. 129). The main control MPU 1310 can store various information in the main control built-in RAM in the power-off process even when the power is shut off by the capacitor BC0. Various information stored in the main control built-in RAM is an operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 954 when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 described later is operated within a predetermined period after power-on. Is output from the payout control board 951 and input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, and when this occurs, the main control MPU 1310a completely erases it from the main control built-in RAM. (Clear).

7-2. Disbursement control board]
Of the first control unit MCG, a payout control board 951 for controlling the payout of game balls, etc., as shown in FIG. 124, a payout control unit 952 that performs various controls relating to payout, and an operation switch 954 that also has various functions. And an error LED indicator 860 b for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1. Further, the operation switch 954 having a function as a RAM clear switch is described as a RAM (hereinafter, referred to as “main control built-in RAM”) built in the main control MPU 1310 a based on a detection signal outputted by being operated. Outputs a RAM clear signal for completely erasing the information stored in ..).

[7-2-1. Payout control section]
As shown in FIG. 124, the payout control unit 952 that performs various controls related to payout controls the power-on process executed at the time of power on and the payout of gaming media executed after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time of power on. A payout control MPU 952a, which is a microprocessor incorporating various control programs including a payout control program for controlling the operation and a ROM storing various commands and a ROM temporarily storing various commands, and detection from various detection switches related to payout In order to output a drive signal to a payout control input circuit 952b to which a signal is input, a payout control output circuit 952c for outputting various signals to an external substrate or the like, and a payout motor 834 of the payout device 830 shown in FIG. Exchange various signals between the payout motor drive circuit 952 d and the CR unit 6 It includes a CR unit output circuit 952e of the. The payout control MPU 952a includes a built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as “payout control built-in RAM”) and a built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as “payout control built-in ROM”). In addition, a watchdog timer for monitoring the operation (system) and a function for preventing fraud are incorporated.

  The payout control program serializes a variety of game information from the main control board 1310 and various commands for payout from the main control board 1310 as a main payout serial data reception signal through the payout control input circuit 952b under the control of the payout control MPU 952a. To receive serial data. Further, the payout control program generates a frame state 1 command (corresponding to a first error occurrence command) triggered by the occurrence of an error in the payout operation of the gaming ball, or operates the operation switch 954 as an error release unit. Based on the signal (detection signal), a 16-bit (2-byte) error cancellation navigation command (corresponding to the first error cancellation command) is created, and these error generation command and error cancellation navigation command are transmitted to the serial serial data of the payer. As a serial signal, a signal is output to the reception port of the main control board 1310 via the payout control I / O port 952b (command transmission means). In addition, the payout control program pays out after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on, that is, after the payout control unit main processing is executed or the payout control unit timer interrupt processing is executed and the payout control is started. When an error occurs in the operation, the error is canceled based on the detection signal generated in response to the operation of the operation switch 954, and the output of the warning information corresponding to the error is stopped (error cancellation control means).

  The payout control program outputs a door frame opening command (first door opening command) when a detection signal (door frame opening detection signal) associated with the opening operation is input from the door frame opening switch 618. When a detection signal (body frame opening detection signal) accompanying the opening operation is input from the body frame opening switch 619, a body frame opening command (first body frame opening command) is output. On the other hand, the payout control program also receives the door frame closing command (first door frame closing command) when the detection signal (the door frame closing detection signal) is input from the door frame opening switch 618 according to the closing operation. While outputting, when the detection signal (main frame closing detection signal) accompanying the closing operation is input from the main frame opening switch 619, the main frame closing command (first main frame closing command) is output.

  The payout control input circuit 952b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information to which detection signals from various detection switches are respectively input to the various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the payout control input circuit 952b is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset described later is not input. That is, the payout control input circuit 952b does not reset information based on detection signals from the various detection switches inputted to the various input terminals by the payout control system reset described later, so that various signals based on the information are variously reset. It is configured as a circuit output from the output terminal.

  The payout control output circuit 952c is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and various signals for outputting various signals to an external substrate or the like are input to the various input terminals. And a reset function dispensing control output circuit 952 ca having a reset function provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the stored information and a reset function non-dispense control output circuit 952 cb not having a reset function and not provided with a reset terminal And consists of. The payout control output circuit 952 ca with a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset described later is input. That is, the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca has information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external substrate etc. by being reset by a payout control system reset described later. Are constructed as a circuit in which the signals based on are not output at all from the various output terminals. On the other hand, the non-resetting function dispensing control output circuit 952 cb is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a dispensing control system reset described later is not input. That is, since the information for outputting the various signals input to the various input terminals to the external substrate etc. is not reset by the later-described payout control system reset, the payout function-free payout control output circuit 952cb does not reset the information. It is configured as a circuit in which a signal based on the signal is output from its various output terminals.

  Out-of-balls detection sensor 827 for detecting out-of-balls of gaming balls in the supply passage of ball induction unit 820 of payout unit 800, and payout detection sensor 842 for detecting gaming balls discharged from payout outlets 831b and 832b of payout device 830. The detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 840 that detects the rotation of the payout blade 839 is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control input circuit 952b. In the following description, the blade rotation detection sensor 840 is simply referred to as a rotation detection sensor 840 in this specification.

  Further, a detection signal from a door frame opening switch 618 for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and a main frame opening switch 619 for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 To the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

  In addition, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279, which detects whether or not the storage space of the fal cover unit 270 shown in FIG. The signal is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the substrate 931 and the payout control input circuit 952b.

  The payout control MPU 952a receives various commands related to the payout from the main control board 1310 via the payout control input circuit 952b at the input terminal of the serial input port in the serial data mode, or operates the operation signal of the operation switch 952 (detection Signal) is output to the main control board 1310 via the payout control input circuit 952b. When the payout control MPU 952a normally receives various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, a payout control output with a reset function is sent from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. By outputting to the circuit 952 ca, a signal (payout ACK signal) is outputted from the payout control output circuit with reset function 952 ca to the main control board 1310.

Further, the payout control MPU 952a transmits various commands for indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 as serial data to the reset function-free payout control output circuit 952cb from the output terminal of the serial output port, whereby the payout function-free payout control is performed. Various commands are transmitted as serial data from the output circuit 952 cb to the main control board 1310.
When the main control board 1310 completes normal reception of various commands from the payout control board 951 as serial data, the main control board 1310 outputs a signal to that effect (main payout ACK signal) to the payout control board 951. This signal (main payment ACK signal) is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control input circuit 952b.

  In addition, the payout control MPU 952a outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 834 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function, so that the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function is output. Is output to the payout motor drive circuit 952d, the drive signal is output from the payout motor drive circuit 952d to the payout motor 834, and the state of the pachinko machine 1 is indicated by an error LED indicator from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. By outputting a drive signal for displaying on 860b to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function, the drive signal is output from the reset control payout control output circuit 952ca to the error LED indicator 860b.

  The error LED indicator 860b is a segment indicator, and displays the state of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters, figures, and the like. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display 860b include the following. For example, when the figure “-” is displayed, it is informed that it is “normal”, and when the numeral “0” is displayed, it is indicated that “connection is abnormal” (specifically, with the main control board 1310). The fact that there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the board and the payout control board 951 is notified, and when the number “1” is displayed, it is “out of the ball” (specifically, out of the ball) Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 827, a notification is made that there is no game ball in the supply passage of the payout device 830, and when the number “2” is displayed, it means that “ball is seen” (specifically, Is based on a detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840, and the payout rotator and the game ball are meshed in the vicinity of the entrance at the entrance of the distribution space communicating with the supply passage of the payout device 830, making it difficult for the payout rotator to rotate. To notify that When “3” is displayed, the fact that it is a “payout detection sensor error” (specifically, a problem has occurred in the payout detection sensor 842 based on a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 842) is notified. When the number “5” is displayed, the fact that it is a “retry error” (specifically, the fact that the number of retries of the payout operation has reached a preset upper limit value) is notified, and the number “6” When it is displayed, it is “full” (specifically, the game ball in which the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 270 is stored is full based on the detection signal from the full detection sensor 279) When the number “7” is displayed, it means that “CR is not connected” (the electrical connection is cut off from either the payout control board 951 to the CR unit 6). When the number “9” is displayed, it is “in stock (awarded ball stock (not paid out))” (specifically, the number of game balls that have not been paid out is determined in advance). Informing that it has reached the number of balls).

  Further, the payout control MPU 952a outputs the number of balls of the gaming ball actually paid out, etc. to the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, whereby the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca The number of game balls actually paid out is output to the external terminal board 784 through a resistor (not shown).

Further, the payout control board 951 outputs various information (game information) about the game from the main control board 1310 to the external terminal board 784 through a resistor (not shown). The external terminal plate 784 is provided with a plurality of photocouplers (not shown) (including an infrared LED and a photo IC built in), and the game arcade (hall) is provided via the plurality of photocouplers. The number of balls of the game ball, etc. and various information (game information, details of errors or errors relating to the payout operation of the game ball) are transmitted to the hall computer installed in.
The external terminal board 784 and the hall computer are electrically insulated by a plurality of photo couplers, and an abnormal voltage is applied to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784 of the pachinko machine 1 and the hall The computer does not malfunction or break down, and the main control board 1310 which advances the game from the hall computer via the external terminal board 784 of the pachinko machine 1 and the payout control board 951 which controls the payout etc. An abnormal voltage is applied to cause malfunction or failure. The hall computer monitors the game of the player by grasping the number of balls of the gaming balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1.

  The ball lending request signal of the game ball from the ball lending button 328 and the return request signal of the prepaid card from the return button 329 are firstly the frequency display board 365, the main door relay terminal board 880, and the game ball lending device connection terminal board It is input to the CR unit 6 via 869. The CR unit 6 transmits a signal specifying the number of gaming balls to be lent according to the ball lending request signal in a serial manner to the payout control board 951 via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, and this signal is a CR unit The data is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a through the input / output circuit 952e. In addition, the CR unit 6 updates the remaining degree of the prepaid card inserted according to the number of the lent game balls, and at the same time, the game ball displays a signal for displaying the remaining degree on the ball rental return display unit 330. The signal is output to the ball lending return display unit 330 by outputting the signal to the lending device connection terminal plate 869, the main door relay terminal plate 880, and the frequency display plate 365. In addition, the CR unit lamp 365d adjacent to the ball rental return display unit 330 is configured such that the supply voltage from the CR unit 6 is input through the game ball connection device connection terminal board 869 and the main door relay terminal board 880. ing.

  The power supply board 931 for supplying various voltages to the payout control board 951 includes a capacitor BC1 (see FIG. 129) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the payout control board 951 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. Yes. With this capacitor BC1, the payout control MPU 952a can store various types of information in the payout control built-in RAM (payout storage unit) in the power-off process even when the power is shut off. Various kinds of information stored in the payout control built-in RAM are stored in the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control input circuit 952b when the operation switch 954 is operated within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on. The payout control MPU 952a input to the input terminal of the input port determines as a RAM clear signal for completely erasing the information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, and triggered by this from the payout control built-in RAM by the payout control MPU 952a. It is completely erased (cleared). This operation signal (RAM clear signal) is output to the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function, and is output to the main control board 1310 from the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function.

7-2-2. Exchange of various signals with the game device connection terminal board for game balls etc.]
Here, the exchange of various signals between the payout control unit 952 and the CR unit 6 and the exchange of various signals between the CR unit 6 and the frequency display board 365 will be described with reference to FIG. In addition to relaying the electrical connection between the CR unit 6 and the payout control board 951, as shown in FIG. 125, the gaming ball lending device connection terminal board 869 also includes the CR unit 6 and the frequency display board 365. It also relays the electrical connection between the boards (precisely, the game ball connection device board 869 is electrically connected with the frequency display board 365 via the main door relay board 880 , CR unit 6 and the game ball connection device board 869 are electrically connected, the game ball connection device board 869 and the main door relay terminal board 880 are electrically connected, and the main door relay Terminal board 880 and frequency display board 365 are electrically connected). Between the substrate of CR unit 6 and the game device connection terminal board 869, between the game device connection terminal board 869 and the payout control substrate 951, the game device connection terminal board 869 and main door relay The board between the terminal board 880 and the board between the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869 and the frequency display board 365 are electrically connected by wiring (harness), respectively. Further, an AC 24 V described later from the power supply substrate 931 is supplied to the CR unit 6 through the game ball and the like lending device connection terminal plate 869. The CR unit 6 is generated from the supplied AC 24 V to a predetermined voltage VL (in the embodiment, DC +12 V (DC +12 V, hereinafter referred to as “+12 V”)) by a built-in voltage generation circuit (not shown). The game balls are supplied to the payout control board 951 through the loan device connection terminal plate 869, while the game balls are supplied to the frequency display plate 365 through the game device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880 .

  The frequency display board 365 has a ball lending button 328 that is a push button switch mounted on the component surface at a position corresponding to the ball lending button 328, and a push button switch at a position corresponding to the return button 329 of the lending unit 360. A return button 329, which is a segment display unit, is mounted at a position corresponding to the remaining lending display portion 363 of the rental ball unit 360.

  The ball rental button 328 and the return button 329 are electrically connected to the ground LG from the CR unit 6 via a game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and a main door relay terminal plate 880. When the ball lending button 328 is pressed, the ball lending button 328 is switched on (turned on), and the ball lending operation signal TDS from the ball lending button 328 is the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game It is inputted to the CR unit 6 through a ball lending device connection terminal board 869. When the return button 329 is pressed, the switch of the return button 329 is turned on (turned on), the return operation signal RES from the return button 329 is connected to the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game ball connection device The signal is input to the CR unit 6 through the terminal board 869.

  The ball rental return display unit 330 has three segment indicators arranged in a line, and the three-digit segment indicator is driven by a so-called dynamic lighting system that sequentially drives each one-digit segment indicator. The segment display of the digit is controlled to be lit. By such lighting control, the sphere rental return display unit 330 displays the remaining amount of the prepaid card inserted in the CR unit 6 or displays an error of the CR unit 6. The ball rental return display unit 330 includes digit signals DG0 to DG2 (a total of three signals) for designating a one-digit segment indicator among the three-digit segment indicators, and the designated one-digit segment indicator. The segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G (7 signals in total) for designating the contents to be displayed by turning on the LED, and the lending device connection terminal plate 869 such as a game ball from the CR unit 6 and the main door relay terminal When input via the board 880, according to the input digit signals DG0 to DG2 and segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G, a one-digit segment indicator is sequentially emitted, and these three-digit segment displays. The contents of the light emitted from the container can be visually recognized through the lending remaining display portion 363.

  A CR unit lamp 365 d is mounted on the frequency display board 365 adjacent to the ball rental return display unit 330. The CR unit lamp 365d is supplied with a predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 via a game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and a main door relay terminal plate 880. The predetermined voltage VL is input to the CR unit 6 as a ball lending available signal TDL through a current limiting resistor mounted on the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 via the CR unit lamp 365d. The CR unit 6 creates a predetermined voltage VL from the AC 24 V supplied from the power supply board 931 by the built-in voltage creation circuit, and the ball lending button 328 and the return button 329 are in a valid ball lending state. Controls the logic of the ball lending available signal TDL to cause the CR unit lamp 365d to emit light, and this light emission can be visually recognized through the lending remaining display portion 363. The segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G are input to the ball lending return display unit 330 through the current limiting resistor mounted on the gaming ball lending device connection terminal board 869.

  In the CR unit 6, the ball lending button 328 is pressed and the ball lending operation signal TDS from the ball lending button 328 is from the frequency display plate 365 through the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal plate 869. When it is input, it is configured to output BRDY, which is a rental ball request signal, to the payout control board 951 (the payout control MPU 952a) via the gaming ball rental device connection terminal plate 869. And CR unit 6 is a single payout operation start request signal to pay out a predetermined number of balls to be rented (in this embodiment, it is 25 balls and corresponds to 100 yen as the amount of money) in one payout operation. Is output to the payout control board 951 (the payout control MPU 952a) through the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. The payout control board 951 (the payout control MPU 952a) to which BRDY and BRQ are input, sends EXS, which is a signal for notifying that the one payout operation has started or ended, to the gaming ball lending device connection terminal board 869. , A signal indicating that it is possible or impossible to output to the CR unit 6 or that a payout operation for paying out a rental ball is possible, such as a gaming ball lending device connection terminal board 869 to the CR unit 6 or the like. In addition, for example, when a store clerk or the like in the hall sets in advance in the CR unit 6 that the gaming ball for 200 yen is paid out when the ball rental button 328 is pressed, one payout operation Will be performed twice in a row, and if 25 balls for 100 yen are paid out, then 25 balls for 100 yen will be paid out continuously, and 50 balls for a total of 200 yen will be paid out Become.

  In the CR unit 6, the return button 329 is pressed and a return operation signal RES from the return button 329 is input from the frequency display board 365 through the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869. The prepaid card is discharged from an insertion slot (not shown) and returned. The returned prepaid card stores the remaining amount obtained by subtracting the amount corresponding to the number of game balls paid out as a result of the ball lending button 328 being pressed.

[7-3. Power supply board]
Next, the power supply substrate 931 in the first control unit MCG will be briefly described. The power supply board 931 is supplied from the Pachinko Island facility, and can be electrically connected to or disconnected from AC 24 volts (AC24V), and a power supply control unit 935 that generates various power supplies. The launch control unit 953 performs launch control by the launch solenoid 682 of the hit ball launcher 650 shown in FIG. 5 and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 255 of the ball feed unit 250 shown in FIG.

[7-3-1. Power control unit]
The power supply control unit 935 improves the power factor of the power rectified by the synchronous rectification circuit 935 a and the synchronous rectification circuit 935 a that rectifies the AC 24 V (AC 24 V) supplied from the pachinko island facility when the power switch 934 is operated. A power factor correction circuit 935b, a smoothing circuit 935c for smoothing power whose power factor is improved by the power factor correction circuit 935b, and various DCs for supplying power smoothed by the smoothing circuit 935c to various substrates A power generation circuit 935d for generating a power supply.

7-3-2. Launch control unit]
A launch control unit 953 that performs launch control by the launch solenoid 682 and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 255 mainly includes a launch control circuit 953a. The firing control circuit 953a includes an operation signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 307 that electrically adjusts the strength (launch strength) at which the game ball is launched toward the game area 5a according to the rotational position of the handle 302, and a palm on the handle 302. And a single button operation sensor 312 for detecting whether or not the game ball launching (launching) is forcibly stopped by the player's will and a detection signal from the handle touch sensor 310 for detecting whether or not the finger is touching. The detection signal from is input via the handle relay terminal plate 315. In addition, when the CR unit 6 and the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 are electrically connected to each other, the launch control circuit 953a receives a CR connection signal to that effect via the payout control board 951. .

  The firing control circuit 953a adjusts the driving current for launching (playing) the gaming ball toward the gaming area 5a based on the operation signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 307 and performs control to output to the firing solenoid 682 While the ball feed member of the ball feed unit 250 receives one ball stored in the upper plate 321 of the dish unit 320 by outputting a constant current to the ball feed solenoid 255 via the handle relay terminal plate 315; Control is performed to send the game balls received by the ball transport member to the ball striking device 650 side.

[7-4. Peripheral control board]
In the peripheral control board 1510 of the second control unit SCG, effect control is performed on such a first control unit MCG based on various commands from the main control board 1310 as shown in FIG. 19, an effect display drive board 4450 for drawing a display area of the door frame side effect display device 460, a peripheral control unit 1511 for exchanging control commands and various information (various data), a game board side effect display device 1600, and a door A liquid crystal display control unit 1512 performing sound control of music, sound effects, etc. flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 while performing drawing control of the frame side effect display device 460, calendar information specifying the date, hour and minute second A real-time clock (hereinafter referred to as “RTC”) control unit 4165 that holds time information for specifying the And a, and volume adjustment volume 1510a be adjusted by turning operation of the knob portion volume such as music or sound effects flowing from Part speaker 573.

7-4-1. Peripheral control unit]
As shown in FIG. 126, the peripheral control unit 1511 that performs effect control controls the peripheral control MPU 1511a as a microprocessor and the power-on process executed when the power is turned on, and after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on. Various control programs such as a sub-control program that is executed and controls the production operation, a peripheral control ROM 1511b that stores various data, various control data, and various schedule data, and a VDP 1512a built in a sound source of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 described later Various information continued across the peripheral control unit steady process executed each time a blank signal is input (for example, schedule data for defining a screen to be drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600, and light emission modes such as various LEDs) Manage schedule data that defines Peripheral control RAM 1511c for storing information, etc., and various types of information continued across days (for example, information for managing a history of occurrence of a big hit gaming state, information for managing special performance flags, etc.) And a peripheral control external watchdog timer 1511 e (hereinafter referred to as “peripheral control external WDT 1511 e”) for monitoring whether or not the peripheral control MPU 1511 a is operating normally. Have.

  The peripheral control RAM 1511c can not hold the stored content only for the time when the instantaneous power failure occurs and the power is restored immediately, and the power is cut off for a long time (when a long time power interruption occurs In the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, the backup power is supplied by the large capacity electrolytic capacitor (hereinafter referred to as "electrolytic capacitor for SRAM") (not shown) provided on the power supply substrate 931. By this, it is possible to hold the stored content for about 50 hours. Since the SRAM electrolytic capacitor is provided on the power supply board 931, when the game board 5 is removed from the pachinko machine 1, the backup power is not supplied to the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, so the peripheral control SRAM 1511d stores the stored contents. You can not hold it and lose its contents.

  The peripheral control external WDT 1511e is a timer for monitoring whether or not the system of the peripheral control MPU 1511a is running out of control. When this timer expires, it is reset by hardware. That is, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a does not output a clear signal for clearing the timer of the peripheral control external WDT 1511e to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e within a predetermined period (until the timer is up), the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset. When the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e within a certain period, the peripheral control external WDT 1511e can restart the timer count of the peripheral control external WDT 1511e, so that no reset is applied.

  The peripheral control MPU 1511a incorporates a plurality of parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, and the like, and upon receiving various commands from the main control board 1310, based on these various commands, each decorative board of the game board 5 The game board side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs etc. provided in the lamp is outputted from the serial I / O port for lamp driving board via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown). The game board side motor drive data to be sent to the drive board 4170 or to output a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid for operating various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 is serialized for the motor drive board. It is transmitted to the motor drive board 4180 from the I / O port through the peripheral control output circuit, or the electric Door side motor drive data for outputting a drive signal to the general drive source from the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port to the peripheral control output circuit, frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 The door-side light emission data for transmitting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration board of the door frame 3 is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via The frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O port transmits the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the peripheral control output circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882.

  Various commands from the main control board 1310 are input to the serial I / O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown). Also, from the detection signal from the rotation detection switch for detecting the rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit 401 provided in the rendering operation unit 400 and the press detection switch for detecting the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 This detection signal is serialized by the door side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate 194, and this serialized rendering operation unit detection data is transmitted from the door side serial transmission circuit to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. , The frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the peripheral control input circuit, are input to the rendering operation unit detection serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

  Detection signals from various detection switches (for example, a photo sensor etc.) for detecting the original position and movable position of various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 are provided on the motor drive board 4180 (not shown) The serialized movable body detection data serialized by the serial transmission circuit is input from the gaming board side serial transmission circuit to the motor control board serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a through the peripheral control input circuit. Yes. The peripheral control MPU 1511a exchanges various data between the peripheral control board 1510 and the motor drive board 4180 by switching the input / output of the motor drive board serial I / O port.

  The peripheral control MPU 1511a has a built-in watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as “peripheral control built-in WDT”). It is diagnosed whether or not.

7-4-1a. Peripheral control MPU]
Next, the peripheral control MPU 1511a which is a microcomputer will be described. As shown in FIG. 127, the peripheral control MPU 1511a has a peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, a peripheral control DMA (abbreviation of Direct Memory Access) controller 1511ac, a peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, a peripheral control various serial I, and the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa. / O port 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511ag, peripheral control analog / digital converter (hereinafter referred to as peripheral control A / D converter) 1511ak, and the like.

  Peripheral control CPU core 1511aa reads / writes various data to / from peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab and peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac via internal bus 1511ah, while peripheral control various serial I / O ports 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, Various data are read from and written to peripheral control various parallel I / O port 1511 ag and peripheral control A / D converter 1511 ak via internal bus 1511 ah, peripheral control bus controller 1511 ad, and peripheral bus 1511 ai.

  The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa reads various data from the peripheral control ROM 1511b via the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the external bus 1511h, while reading from the peripheral control RAM 1511c and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. Various data are read and written via the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the external bus 1511h.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac includes storage devices such as peripheral control built-in RAM 1511 ab, peripheral control ROM 1511 b, peripheral control RAM 1511 c, and peripheral control SRAM 1511 d, peripheral control various serial I / O ports 1511 ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511 af, peripheral control various parallel I DMA0 is a dedicated controller that performs data transfer independently between peripheral devices such as I / O port 1511ag and peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak without using peripheral control CPU core 1511aa. ~ It has four channels called DMA3.

  Specifically, peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac is a storage device of peripheral control built-in RAM 1511 ab built in peripheral control MPU 1511 a, peripheral control various serial I / O port 1511 ae built in peripheral control MPU 1511 a, and WDT 1511 af In order to transfer data independently between the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511ag and the input / output devices such as the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak without the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa. The peripheral control built-in RAM 1511 ab reads and writes via the internal bus 1511 ah while peripheral control various serial I / O port 1511 ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511 af, peripheral control various parallel I / O port 1511 g, and the peripheral control A / D converter input and output devices such as 1511Ak, via the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and peripheral bus 1511Ai, reading and writing.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac is a peripheral control various types of serial I / s built in the peripheral control MPU 1511 a and storage devices such as the peripheral control ROM 1511 b, the peripheral control RAM 1511 c, and the peripheral control SRAM 1511 d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511 a. Without the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa between the devices such as the O port 1511ae, the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511ag, and the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak and the like. In order to perform data transfer independently, peripheral control bus controller 1511 ad and external bus 1511 h are provided to storage devices such as peripheral control ROM 1511 b, peripheral control RAM 1511 c, and peripheral control SRAM 1511 d. The peripheral control serial I / O port 1511ae, the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, the peripheral control various parallel I / O port 1511ag, the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak, etc. Reading and writing are performed via the control bus controller 1511 ad and the peripheral bus 1511 ai.

  Peripheral control bus controller 1511 ad controls internal bus 1511 ah, peripheral bus 1511 ai, and external bus 1511 h to control the central processing unit of peripheral control MPU core 1511 aa, peripheral control built-in RAM 1511 ab, peripheral control ROM 1511 b, peripheral control RAM 1511 c, and peripheral control Various devices such as storage devices such as SRAM 1511 d, peripheral control various serial I / O ports 1511 ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511 af, peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511 ag, and peripheral control A / D converter 1511 ak etc It is a dedicated controller that exchanges various data between them.

  Peripheral control various serial I / O port 1511ae includes a lamp drive board serial I / O port, a motor drive board serial I / O port, a frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port, and a frame decoration drive amplifier board LED. Serial I / O port, frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port, main control board serial I / O port, and rendering operation unit information acquisition serial I / O port.

  The peripheral control built-in watchdog timer (peripheral control built-in WDT) 1511af is a timer for monitoring whether the system of the peripheral control MPU 1511a is running out of control. It has become. That is, if the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa starts the watchdog timer, the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa resets if it does not output a clear signal for clearing the timer to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af within a certain period (until the timer expires). It will take When the peripheral CPU core 1511aa starts the watchdog timer and outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af within a certain period, the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa can restart the timer count and therefore does not reset.

  The peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511ag output various latch signals such as a game board side motor drive latch signal and a door side motor drive light emission latch signal, and also output a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e, The detection signals from various detection switches for detecting the original position and movable position of various movable bodies provided on the board 5 are serialized by a game board side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180, and this serial The movable body information acquisition latch signal for receiving the converted movable body detection data from the serial transmission circuit on the game board side by the serial I / O port for the motor drive board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a is output. This LED is a high-intensity white LED and serves as a confirmation notification lamp for informing that the occurrence of the big hit gaming state has been confirmed. In the present embodiment, by adopting a configuration in which the LED and the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511ag are electrically connected directly, the path between the LED and the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511ag is shortened. Therefore, it is possible to take noise countermeasures for lighting control of the LED having a significant meaning in games. In addition, about lighting control of LED, it is performed in peripheral control part 1 ms timer interrupt processing mentioned later, and other LEDs etc. except this LED are performed in peripheral control part steady processing mentioned later It has become.

  The peripheral control A / D converter 1511 ak is electrically connected to the volume adjustment volume 1510 a, and the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510 a is rotated to change the resistance value, and the resistance at the rotation position of the knob is The voltage divided by the value is converted from an analog value to a digital value and converted into 1024 steps of values from 0 to 1023. In the present embodiment, the values of 1024 levels are divided into seven and managed as substrate volumes 0-6. The substrate volume 0 is set to mute, the substrate volume 6 is set to the maximum volume, and the volume is set to increase from the substrate volume 0 toward the substrate volume 6. The liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (a sound source built-in VDP 1512a to be described later) is controlled so that the volume set to the substrate volume 0 to 6 is obtained, and music and sound effects flow from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. In this way, music and sound effects flow from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by adjusting the volume based on the turning operation of the knob portion.

  In the present embodiment, in addition to music and sound effects, notification sounds for notifying the store clerks in the hall of occurrences of malfunctions of the pachinko machine 1 and cheating against the pachinko machine 1 and contents concerning a game effect and the like are notified. (For example, to make the screen unfolded on the game board side effect display device 1600 more powerful, or to announce that there is a high possibility of shifting to a game state advantageous to the player). The notification sound also flows from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but the notification sound and the notification sound flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob at all, and from the mute to the maximum volume The volume can be adjusted by controlling a liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (a sound source built-in VDP 1512a described later) by a program. The volume adjusted by this program can be changed smoothly from the muffling to the maximum volume, unlike the substrate volume divided into the seven steps described above.

  Thus, for example, even when a hall clerk or the like rotates the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a to set the volume to a low level, production sounds such as music and sound effects that flow from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 However, when a malfunction occurs in the pachinko machine 1 or when the player is cheating, a notification sound set to a high volume (in this embodiment, the maximum volume) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the clerk or the like in the hall from becoming aware of the occurrence of a malfunction or the player's fraudulent act by the notification sound. Also, based on the current substrate volume set by the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion, the volume of the advertisement sound is reduced to prevent interference with music and sound effects. In addition to music and sound effects, there is a possibility that the screen unfolded on the game board side effect display device 1600 will be rendered more powerful, or a game state that is advantageous to the player may be entered. You can also announce that it is expensive.

[7-4-1b. Peripheral control ROM]
The peripheral control ROM 1511b stores in advance various control programs, various data, various control data, and various schedule data for controlling the peripheral control unit 1511, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, the RTC control unit 4165, and the like. The various schedule data includes screen generation schedule data for generating screens to be drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, light emission mode generation schedule data for generating light emission modes of various LEDs, music There are sound generation schedule data for generating sound effects and the like, and electric drive source schedule data and the like for generating a drive mode of an electric drive source such as a motor and a solenoid. The screen generation schedule data is configured by arranging screen data for defining the screen configuration in time series, and the order of the screens to be drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is specified. Has been. The light emission mode generation schedule data is configured by arranging light emission data defining the light emission modes of various LEDs in time series. The sound generation schedule data is configured by arranging sound command data in time series, and defines the order in which music and sound effects flow. The sound command data includes an output channel number for instructing which output channel to use among a plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 described later, and the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. Of the plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source, track numbers for specifying which track to incorporate sound data such as music and sound effects are defined. The electrical drive source schedule data is configured by arranging drive data of electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids in time series, and defines the operation of electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids.

  The various control programs stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b may be read out directly from the peripheral control ROM 1511b and executed, and copied when the power is turned on in various control program copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 1511c described later. Some are read and executed. When various data, various control data and various schedule data stored in peripheral control ROM 1511b are also directly read from peripheral control ROM 1511b, when power is turned on to various control data copy areas of peripheral control RAM 1511c described later, etc. In some cases, the copied one is read out.

  In addition, the peripheral control ROM 1511b, as one of various control programs for controlling the RTC control unit 4165, corrects the luminance of the game board side effect display device 1600 according to the usage time of the game board side effect display device 1600. A brightness correction program is included. This brightness correction program corrects a decrease in brightness due to aging of the game board side effect display device 1600 when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is an LED type. The date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on, the current date and time, the luminance setting information, and the like are acquired from the internal RAM of the RTC control unit 4165, which will be described later, and the acquired luminance setting information is based on the correction information. To correct. This correction information is stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 1511b. As will be described later, the luminance setting information includes luminance adjustment information for adjusting the range of the luminance of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, from 100% to 70% in increments of 5%, The brightness of the LED that is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 that is set is included. For example, the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on and the current date and time From the date when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on, when six months have already passed, the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, and the brightness When the brightness of the LED included in the setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on, the correction information acquired for this 75% is used. On the game board side, the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness is further increased by 5%. When December has already passed since the date when the effect display device 1600 was first turned on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, and the LED included in the brightness setting information When the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on at a luminance of 75%, the luminance setting is set so that the luminance is 85% which is further increased by 10% which is the correction information acquired with respect to this 75%. Based on the brightness adjustment information included in the information, the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted and lighted.

[7-4-1c. Peripheral control RAM]
As shown in FIG. 127, the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a is a backup that exclusively stores information to be backed up among various information updated by executing various control programs. The management target work area 1511ca, the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc for storing a copy of various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511ca, and the peripheral control ROM 1511b Control data copy area 1511cd for storing a copy of various control programs exclusively, and various data, various control data, and various schedule data stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b Control data copy area 1511ce for storing a copy of the information, and backup non-management for storing information not updated as a backup among various information updated by executing various control programs A target work area 1511cf is provided.

  When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (including a momentary power failure or a power failure due to a power failure), the value 0 is forcibly written into the backup unmanaged object work area 1511 cf and cleared to zero, while the backup is performed. For the work area 1511ca to be managed, the first backup area 1511cb, and the second backup area 1511cc, the power-on state command (see FIG. 143) from the main control board 1310 when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on starts the RAM clear effect. And the game state (for example, it instructs the start of the effect when the operation switch 954 shown in FIG. 123 is operated within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on) Sometimes it is cleared to zero.

  The backup management target work area 1511ca is effect information (1fr) that is various information updated in the peripheral control unit steady process that is executed each time a V blank signal is input from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 described later. ) Is stored exclusively as a backup target, and production information (1 ms) which is various information updated in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt described later occurs is backed up. Bank 0 (1 ms) that is stored exclusively as a target. Here, the names of Bank 0 (1 fr) and Bank 0 (1 ms) will be briefly described. “Bank” is a minimum management unit representing the size of a storage area for storing various types of information. The subsequent “0” means a storage area that is normally used for storing various information updated by executing various control programs. That is, “Bank 0” means that the size of the storage area that is normally used is the minimum management unit. In addition, “Bank1,” “Bank2,” “Bank3,” and “Bank4” provided in an area from the backup first area 1511cb to the backup second area 1511cc, which will be described later, are in the same storage area as “Bank0”. It means that it has a size. As described later, “(1fr)” indicates that when the sound source built-in VDP 1512a outputs drawing data for one screen (one frame) to the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, the peripheral control MPU 1511a. Since the V blank signal indicating that the screen data can be received from the peripheral control MPU 1511a is output to the peripheral control MPU 1511a, every time the V blank signal is input, in other words, one frame (1 frame) Since the peripheral control unit steady process is executed every time, “Bank 0”, “Bank 1”, “Bank 2”, “Bank 3”, and “Bank 4” are respectively added (effect information (1fr) and an effect described later) The backup information (1fr) is also used in the same meaning). As described later, “(1 ms)” indicates that “Bank0”, “Bank1”, “Bank2”, “Bank3”, “Bank0”, “Bank1”, “Bank3”, and the like are executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs. And “Bank 4”, respectively (the effect information (1 ms) and the effect backup information (1 ms) described later are also used in the same meaning).

  Bank 0 (1fr) includes a lamp drive substrate side transmission data storage area 1511 caa, a frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side LED transmission data storage area 1511 cab, a reception command storage area 1511 cac, an RTC information acquisition storage area 1511 cad, and a schedule data storage area 1511 cae Etc. are provided. In the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration board of the game board 5 is provided. In the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, lighting signals, blink signals or gradation lighting to a plurality of LEDs etc. provided on each decoration substrate of the door frame 3 are set. It is a storage area in which door side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting a signal is set, and the received command storage area 1511cac receives various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310, and the received various commands are received. It is a storage area to be set, and an RTC information acquisition storage area 1511 cad includes an RTC control unit 4165 (an RTC information storage Various information acquired from the TC built-in RAM 4165aa) is set in a storage area, and the schedule data storage area 1511cae corresponds to the received command based on the command received from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a). This is a storage area in which various schedule data are set. In the schedule data storage area 1511cae, some schedule data copied from the peripheral control ROM 1511b to the various control data copy area 1511ce are read and set, and various schedule data are directly read from the peripheral control ROM 1511b. Some are set.

  Bank 0 (1 ms) includes a frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side motor transmission data storage area 1511 caf, a motor drive substrate side transmission data storage area 1511 cag, a movable object information acquisition storage area 1511 cah, and a rendering operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511 cai, A drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511 cak and the like are provided. In the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf, door side motor drive data STM-DAT for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a dial drive motor 414 provided in the door frame 3 is stored. This is a storage area to be set, and a motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag is used to output a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid for operating various movable bodies provided in the game board 5. This is a storage area where the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set. The movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah is provided in the game board 5 based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the game board 5. This is a storage area in which various information obtained by acquiring the original position and the movable position of various movable bodies is set, and an effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511 is set. ai includes various pieces of information (for example, a presentation operation) obtained from the rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit 401 and the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the presentation operation unit 400. A storage area in which rotation (rotation direction) history information of the dial operation unit 401 created based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the unit 400, operation history information of the pressing operation unit 405, and the like is set. If the effect display drive substrate 4450 receives drawing data from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the peripheral control substrate 1510 in the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak, and determines that the received drawing data is abnormal data, Peripheral control board 1510 and effects based on a LOCKN signal, which will be described later, output to convey the effect A storage area in which various information acquired defect frequency and bug occurrence between connection of the shown drive substrate 4450 is set.

  The lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 caa of Bank 0 (1 fr) and the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511 cab, and the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511 caf of Bank 0 (1 ms) The motor drive substrate side transmission data storage area 1511 cag is divided into two areas of a first area and a second area.

  In the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, when the peripheral control unit steady process described later is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa. When the next peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa. Every time the processing is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the lamp drive substrate side transmission data storage area 1511caa. For example, when the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa in the current peripheral control part steady process, When the control unit steady process is executed, the process proceeds based on the game board side light emission data SL-DAT set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa.

  When the peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab has the door-side emission data STL in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab. When -DAT is set and the next peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the door-side emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab. Each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the door side light emission data STL-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab. The For example, when the door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab in the current peripheral control part steady process, When the previous peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the process proceeds based on the door side light emission data STL-DAT set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED transmission data storage area 1511cab. It has become.

  The frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf is connected to the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf when a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later is executed. When the side motor drive data STM-DAT is set and the next peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the door side motor drive data STM is stored in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf. -DAT is set, and each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the door side is connected to the first area and the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf. Motor drive data STM-DAT are alternately set. The peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. For example, in this peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT is stored in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511 caf. When set, the door-side motor drive data STM-DAT set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf when the previous peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed It is designed to proceed with the process based on it.

  In the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag, when the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the first area of the motor drive board transmission data storage area 1511 cag When the next peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag, Each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board motor drive data SM-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag. Peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed, for example, game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second region of motor drive substrate side transmission data storage area 1511 cag in the current peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing At the time, when the previous peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the process proceeds based on the game board motor drive data SM-DAT set in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag. It is like that.

  Next, the backup first area 1511cb and backup second area 1511cc that store specially copied production information which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511ca will be described. In the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc, two pairs of two banks as one pair are managed as one page. The effect information (1 fr), which is the content stored in Bank 0 (1 fr), which is a storage area normally used, is used as effect backup information (1 fr) each time peripheral control unit steady processing is executed every one frame (1 frame) The effect information (1 ms) which is the content to be copied to the backup first area 1511 cb and the backup second area 1511 cc at a high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac and stored in the normally used storage area Bank 0 (1 ms) Each time a 1 ms timer interrupt is generated as effect backup information (1 ms), the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed to execute the peripheral control DMA controller 15 in the backup first area 1511 cb and the backup second area 1511 cc. It is copied to the high speed by 1ac. The consistency of one page is determined by whether or not the contents of two banks constituting the page match.

  Specifically, the backup first area 1511cb is managed as a pair of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) as one pair and Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) as one pair. ing. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, are the peripheral control DMA in Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1frame). The memory copied at high speed by the controller 1511 ac and stored in the normally used storage area Bank 0 (1 ms) is stored each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed each time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs. The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies the data to Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) at high speed. The consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) match. Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 ( It carried out by whether or not the contents of the ms) are the same.

  Also, in the backup second area 1511 cc, a total of 2 pairs, where Bank 3 (1 fr) and Bank 4 (1 fr) form one pair and Bank 3 (1 ms) and Bank 4 (1 ms) as one pair, are managed as one page in total. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, are the peripheral control DMA in Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1frame). The memory that is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac and stored in Bank0 (1 ms), which is a storage area that is normally used, is stored every time a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs. The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies the data to Bank3 (1 ms) and Bank4 (1 ms) at high speed. The consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) match. Bank 3 (1 ms) and Bank 4 ( It carried out by whether or not the contents of the ms) are the same.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the backup first area 1511cb has one pair of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr), and one pair of Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms). It is an area to manage as a page, and the backup second area 1511cc has a total of two pairs, with Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) as one pair and Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) as one pair. It is an area for managing as one page. Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and end of each page, that is, at the beginning and end of the backup first area 1511cb and backup second area 1511cc.

  In the present embodiment, the production information (1fr) that is the content stored in Bank0 (1fr) that is a storage area that is normally used is the production control information (1fr), and the peripheral control unit for each frame (1frame). Every time the steady process is executed, the contents are copied to the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac and stored in Bank0 (1 ms) which is a storage area normally used. The production information (1 ms) is the backup first area 1511 cb and the backup second area 1511 cc each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interruption process is executed every time a 1 ms timer interruption occurs as production backup information (1 ms). Peripheral control Although designed to be copied at a high speed by the MA controller 1511Ac, a program for executing a fast copy from these peripheral control DMA controller 1511Ac are common. That is, in the present embodiment, the effect information (1 fr) and the effect information (1 ms) are managed by a common management method (execution of a common program).

[7-4-1d. Peripheral control SRAM]
A peripheral control SRAM 1511d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a includes a backup management target work area 1511da that exclusively stores information to be backed up among various information updated by executing various control programs. A backup first area 1511db and a backup second area 1511dc are provided for storing a copy of various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511da. The content stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511 d is a power on state command from the main control board 1310 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (including a momentary power failure or a power failure due to a power failure) (see FIG. 143). Is an instruction to start the RAM clear effect and the game state (for example, to instruct start of effect when the operation switch 954 shown in FIG. 123 is operated within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on) Is not cleared to zero. This is completely different from the point that the backup management target work area 1511ca, the backup first area 1511cb, and the backup second area 1511cc of the peripheral control RAM 1511c are cleared to zero. Further, if the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. It has come to be. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 according to the setting mode screen, each content (item) stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d (for example, the history of occurrence of the big hit gaming state) The contents (items) stored in the peripheral control RAM 1511c are not displayed at all, and cannot be cleared in the setting mode. Also in this point, the peripheral control RAM 1511 c and the peripheral control SRAM 1511 d are completely different.

  The backup management target work area 1511da is effect information (SRAM) which is various information continued across the day (for example, information for managing the history of occurrence of the big hit gaming state, and for managing a special effect flag Information) and the like are stored in a dedicated manner as a backup target. Here, the name of Bank 0 (SRAM) will be briefly described. As described above, “Bank” is a minimum management unit indicating the size of a storage area for storing various types of information. The subsequent “0” means that the storage area is normally used for storing various information updated by executing various control programs. That is, “Bank 0” means that the size of the storage area that is normally used is the minimum management unit. “Bank1,” “Bank2,” “Bank3,” and “Bank4” provided in an area from the backup first area 1511db to the backup second area 1511dc, which will be described later, are in the same storage area as “Bank0”. It means that it has a size. Since “(SRAM)” is a backup target of various information stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a, “Bank0”, “Bank1”, “Bank2”, “Bank3” , And “Bank 4” (also used for the effect information (SRAM) and effect backup information (SRAM) described later have the same meaning).

  Next, a first backup area 1511 db and a second backup area 1511 dc for exclusively storing the copy of the effect information (SRAM) which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511 da will be described. The backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc are managed with two banks as one pair, and this one pair as one page. The effect information (SRAM), which is the content stored in Bank 0 (SRAM), which is a storage area normally used, is used as effect backup information (SRAM) each time peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame (1 frame). The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc at high speed. The consistency of one page is determined by whether or not the contents of two banks constituting the page match.

  Specifically, in the backup first area 1511db, Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) are managed as one pair, and this one pair is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank 0 (SRAM), which is a storage area normally used, are peripheral control DMAs to Bank 1 (SRAM) and Bank 2 (SRAM) each time peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame (1 frame). This page is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) match.

  In the backup second area 1511dc, Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) are managed as one pair, and this one pair is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank 0 (SRAM), which is a storage area normally used, are peripheral control DMAs to Bank 3 (SRAM) and Bank 4 (SRAM) each time peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame (1 frame). This page is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) match.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the backup first area 1511 db is an area for managing one pair as one page, in which Bank 1 (SRAM) and Bank 2 (SRAM) form one pair, and the backup second area 1511 dc is an area for managing Bank 3 (SRAM) and Bank 4 (SRAM) as one pair, and managing this one pair as one page. Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and the end of each page, that is, at the beginning and the end of the backup first area 1511 db and the backup second area 1511 dc.

7-4-2. Liquid Crystal Display Controller]
A liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that performs drawing control of the game board side effect display device 1600 and door frame side effect display device 460 and sound control such as music and sound effects flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 is as shown in FIG. In addition, a sound source for controlling sound such as music and sound effects is built in (hereinafter referred to as “built-in sound source”) and drawing control of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is performed. Sound source built-in VDP (Video Display Processor) 1512a and various sound data such as music and sound effects in addition to various character data on the screen displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 Liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b for storing data, and serialized music and sound effects as audio data Audio data transmission IC 1512c to be transmitted toward the decoration drive amplifier board 194, and door frame side effect display attached to the right side of the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 with the serialized drawing data to the door frame side effect display device 460. Serial data output from door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d which is arranged near the lower part of device 460 and transmitted toward effect display drive board 4450 housed in dish unit 320, and peripheral control MPU 1511a of peripheral control unit 1511 In addition to the signal output from the differential circuit 1512e that differentiates the LOCKN signal output request data into a plus signal and a minus signal and the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, the signal from the difference circuit 1512e Is input, and the signal from the differential circuit 1512e is When the signal is input, the circuit is connected so as to transmit this signal. On the other hand, when the signal from the differential circuit 1512e is not input, the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is transmitted. And a forced switching circuit 1512 f for circuit connection. The liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b displays, for example, annular image data used for displaying a ring-shaped display object (annular display object), and an operation menu background image described later as sprite data used for displaying a screen or an image described later. Operation menu background image data to be used, selection display object image data used for displaying at least one selection display object described later, tone adjustment background image data used for displaying a volume adjustment screen including a volume scale described later, and a volume adjustment icon described later In addition to volume setting icon image data used for display, display of main body frame rear surface image data and service mode screen used for display of main body frame rear image in which the position of each part on the rear surface of main body frame 4 can be viewed when viewed from the player Mode screen image data used for the display, break timer used for displaying the break timer setting screen Ma setting screen image data, and, during breaks screen image data used for displaying the break in the screen is stored. Note that the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b also stores suggestion display object image data used for displaying the suggestion display object for prompting the user to operate the pressing operation unit 405 (operation unit) of the effect operation unit 400.

  Peripheral control MPU 1511a of peripheral control unit 1511 extracts screen generation schedule data corresponding to the command from main control board 1310 from peripheral control ROM 1511b of peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of peripheral control RAM 1511c. The screen data at the top of the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, various types of peripheral control ROM 1511b or peripheral control RAM 1511c of the peripheral control unit 1511 After extracted from the control data copy area 1511ce and output to the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source, schedule data is triggered by the input of a V blank signal described later. The next screen data following the top screen data is extracted from the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the peripheral control RAM 1511c according to the screen generation schedule data set in the storage area 1511cae Output to VDP 1512a. In this manner, the peripheral control MPU 1511a receives the V blank signal every time the screen data arranged in time series in the screen generation schedule data is input according to the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511 cae. The VDP 1512a with built-in sound source is output one by one from the top screen data.

  Also, the peripheral control MPU 1511a receives the sound command data at the head of the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the command from the main control board 1310 from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. Extracted and set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, the head sound command data of the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae is the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the peripheral After extracting from the various control data copy area 1511ce of the control RAM 1511c and outputting to the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source, the schedule data recording is triggered by the input of the V blank signal. In accordance with the sound generation schedule data set in the area 1511cae, the next sound command data following the head sound command data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the sound source Output to the built-in VDP 1512a. As described above, the peripheral control MPU 1511a receives the sound command data arranged in time series in the sound generation schedule data according to the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, and the V blank signal is input. Each time, the head sound command data is output to the built-in sound source VDP 1512a one by one.

[7-4-2a. Sound source built-in VDP]
The sound source built-in VDP 1512a receives the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a in addition to the above-mentioned built-in sound source, as shown in FIG. 128, based on the input screen data, from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b Extract side character data and upper dish character data to create sprite data and generate drawing data of one screen (one frame) to be displayed on game board side effect display device 1600 and door frame side effect display device 460 The VRAM for this purpose is also built-in (hereinafter referred to as "built-in VRAM"). Of the drawing data generated on the built-in VRAM, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a outputs drawing data for the game board side effect display device 1600 from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600, and for the door frame side effect display device 460. Drawing data is transmitted from the channel CH2 via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown), a frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, a peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and an effect display drive board 4450 stored in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. By outputting (transmitting) the door frame side effect display device 460, synchronization between the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is achieved.

  The drawing data output from the channel CH1 is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side effect display device 1600, whereas the drawing data output from the channel CH2 is relayed from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay A terminal board 868, a peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and a display on the lower side of the door frame side effect display device 460 mounted on the right side of the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 and stored in the dish unit 320 It is output (sent) to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the drive substrate 4450. As described above, since the drawing data output from the channel CH1 is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side effect display device 1600 as described above, the peripheral control board 1510 and the game board side effect display device 1600 Although the wiring length required for the route from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600 is short because they are respectively attached to the game board 5, the drawing data output from the channel CH2 is the periphery as described above. The peripheral control board 1510 is attached to the game board 5 because it is output from the control board 1510 to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the effect display driving board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. Whereas the effect display drive board 4450 is housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. The wiring length from the channel CH2 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 is extremely long compared to the channel CH1 and thus is extremely susceptible to noise. Become. Therefore, for channel CH2 in which the length of the wiring for sending drawing data is extremely long compared to channel CH1, in the door frame side rendering transmitter IC 1512d, “V-by-One (Sine Electronics Co., Ltd.) By adopting a differential communication called “registered trademark”, the system is less susceptible to noise.

Channel CH1 is LVDS (Low Voltage Differential)
The channel CH2 uses an interface according to the parallel method, while the serial interface according to the Signaling method is used. The drawing data output from the channel CH2 is composed of three video signals of a red video signal, a green video signal and a blue video signal, and three synchronization signals of a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal and a clock signal. It is serialized by the door frame side effect transmitter IC 4610d and stored in the peripheral control output circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 (not shown). It is transmitted to the effect display drive substrate 4450. The various serialized signals are restored to parallel signals in the effect display drive board 4450 and output to the door frame effect display device 460.

  Thus, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs screen data of one screen (one frame) displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a The character data is extracted from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b based on the input screen data to create sprite data and displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (1 The drawing data of the frame) is generated on the built-in VRAM, and of the generated drawing data, the image data for the game board side effect display device 1600 is output from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600 and The image data for the effect display device 460 is illustrated from the channel CH2. Output to the door frame side effect display device 460 through the peripheral control output circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. (Send. That is, “screen data for one screen (for one frame)” means drawing data for one screen (for one frame) displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. This is the data to generate above.

  The sound source built-in VDP 1512a outputs drawing data for one screen (for one frame) from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600, and also displays image data for the door frame side effect display device 460 from the channel CH2. Output to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. After (transmission), a V-blank signal is transmitted to the peripheral control MPU 1511a to indicate that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a can be received. In this embodiment, since the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps per second, a V blank signal is output. The interval is about 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). The peripheral control MPU 1511a is configured to execute peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which will be described later, in response to the V blank signal being input. Here, the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes somewhat depending on the liquid crystal size of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. In addition, even in the manufacturing lot of the peripheral control board 1510 on which the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the sound source built-in VDP 1512a are mounted, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may change somewhat.

  The sound source built-in VDP 1512a employs a frame buffer method. In this "frame buffer method", drawing data of one screen (one frame) to be drawn on the screens of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is held in a frame buffer (built-in VRAM) The drawing data of one screen (one frame) held in the frame buffer (built-in VRAM) is output to the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460.

  When the sound command data described above is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a based on a command from the main control board 1310, the built-in sound source VDP 1512a receives music stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b as shown in FIG. And sound data such as sound effects are extracted and the built-in sound source is controlled to incorporate sound data such as music and sound effects into the track according to the track number specified in the sound command data, and used according to the output channel number An output channel is set, and music, sound effects and the like flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 are serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c.

  Note that the sound command data also includes sub-volume values for adjusting the volume of the track into which the sound data is to be incorporated, and the plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the built-in sound source VDP 1512a include effects such as music and sound effects. In addition to the sound data and the sub-volume value to adjust the volume, adjust the sound data of the notification sound and its volume to notify the store clerk etc. of the occurrence of the trouble of the pachinko machine 1 or the cheating on the pachinko machine 1 Subvolume value to be included. Specifically, for the effect sound, the substrate volume adjusted by rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a described above is set as the sub volume value, and for the notification sound, the volume adjustment is performed. The maximum volume is set as the sub volume value without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion of the volume 1510a. The sub-volume value of the effect sound can be shifted to a setting mode to be described later and adjusted by operating the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400.

  The sound designation data also includes a master volume value for adjusting the volume of the channel to be output, and a plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the built-in sound source VDP 1512a include a plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the built-in sound source VDP 1512a. Of the tracks, the sound data of the effect sound incorporated into the used track and the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the effect sound incorporated into the track used are synthesized, and the volume of this synthesized effect sound is In practice, the master volume value that is the volume flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 is amplified, and the amplified effect sound is serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512 c.

  In the present embodiment, the master volume value is set to a constant value, and the volume flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 is amplified to the master volume value when the volume of the combined effect sound is the maximum volume. Is set to be the maximum allowable volume. Specifically, for the production sound, among the multiple tracks, the sound data of the production sound incorporated in the track to be used and the sub-volume value that adjusts the volume of the production sound incorporated in the track to be used The set volume adjustment volume 1510a is rotated to adjust the substrate volume, and the synthesized volume of the effect sound is actually set to the volume flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. The amplified production sound is serialized and output to the audio data transmission IC 1512c as audio data. For the notification sound, the sound data of the notification sound incorporated in the track to be used and the use Volume adjustment buttons set as sub-volume values to adjust the volume of the notification sound built into the track to be played The volume of the combined notification sound is actually the volume flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by combining the maximum volume without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion of the knob 1510a. It amplifies to the master volume value, serializes the amplified notification sound, and outputs it to the audio data transmission IC 1512c as audio data.

  Here, when the presentation sound is flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the control of the notification sound is simplified to notify the store clerk or the like of the occurrence of the malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or the cheating on the pachinko machine 1 To explain, first, the sub-volume value of the track into which the effect sound is incorporated is forcibly set to mute, and the sound data of the track into which the effect sound is incorporated, the sub-volume value set to the mute, and the notification sound Is synthesized with the sub-volume value in which the volume of the notification sound is set to the maximum volume, and the volume of the combined effect sound and the volume of the notification sound is actually combined with the speaker 921. And the master volume value that is the volume flowing from the upper speaker 573, and the amplified production sound and notification sound are serialized to obtain audio data. And it outputs the audio data transmitted IC1512c as data.

  That is, in actuality, only the notification sound of the maximum volume flows from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. At this time, since the effect sound is muted, the effect sound proceeds in accordance with the sound generation schedule data described above, although it does not flow from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. In this embodiment, the notification sound is made to flow from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 for a predetermined period (for example, 90 seconds), and after this predetermined period, for sound generation forcibly set to mute so far The volume of the effect sound proceeding according to the schedule data is again set as the sub volume value by adjusting the substrate volume adjusted by turning the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510 a (at this time, the dial operation of the effect operation unit 400 When the mode is shifted to the setting mode and adjusted by operating the section 401 or the pressing operation section 405, the sub volume value of the adjusted effect sound is set), and the signal flows from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. It has become.

  As described above, when the notification sound flows to notify the store clerk or the like in the hall of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or the fraudulent action against the pachinko machine 1 when the presentation sound is flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. Although the volume of the sound is muffled and the notification sound flows from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, this muffled effect sound is progressing according to the sound generation schedule data, so the notification sound has passed for a predetermined period. When no sound flows from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the effect sound does not start to flow again from the point where the notification sound starts to flow, but proceeds according to the sound generation schedule data until the predetermined time elapses after the notification sound starts to flow. It starts to flow again from.

7-4-2 b. Liquid Crystal and Sound Control ROM]
As shown in FIG. 128, the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512 b draws game board side character data for drawing in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460. The upper plate side character data is stored in advance, and various sound data such as music, sound effects, notification sounds, and notification sounds are also stored in advance.

7-4-2 c. Audio data transmission IC]
When the audio data transmission IC 1512c receives the serialized audio data from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, the audio data transmission IC 1512c converts the right audio data as a positive signal and a negative signal as differential serial data and outputs a peripheral control output circuit and frame peripheral relay (not shown). A peripheral control output circuit (not shown) is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and as differential serial data with the left audio data as a positive signal and a negative signal. Then, the frame is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882. Thereby, music, sound effects, etc. adapted to various effects are reproduced in stereo from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

  The audio data transmission IC 1512c outputs audio data as serial data of the left and right differential methods between the boards extending from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, for example, a positive signal of the left audio data, Even when the negative signal is affected by noise, the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 combines the noise component riding on the plus signal and the noise component riding on the minus signal into one left audio data. Since noise components are canceled by canceling each other, noise countermeasures can be taken.

7-4-2 d. Transmitter IC for door frame side effect]
As shown in FIG. 128, drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source is input to the door-frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512d. As described above, the channel CH2 uses a parallel interface. The drawing data is composed of three video signals, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, and three synchronization signals, a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal. The green video signal and the blue video signal are each composed of 8 bits, for a total of 24 bits. In the present embodiment, the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal that can be input to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d are 6 bits each, for a total of 18 bits, and therefore the upper 6 bits in each video signal are the door frame. It is input to the side effect transmitter IC 1512d. Since the lower 2 bits are extremely weak color information that is difficult for human eyes to discriminate, the lower 2 bits including the weak color information are invalidated although they are output from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a.

  Three synchronization signals, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, which are drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, and three synchronization signals, a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal Is input to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d receives three video signals of a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, a horizontal synchronization signal, and a vertical synchronization. Three synchronization signals, signals and clock signals, are serialized into a differential serial signal (serial data) called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" of Zine Electronics Co., Ltd. and only one differential pair cable These various signals are sent from the peripheral control board 1510 around the frame. Terminal plate 868, near the door relay terminal plate 882, and transmitted to effect display driving board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3.

  As described above, the drawing data output from the channel CH1 of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side effect display device 1600, and therefore the path from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600. Although the length of the wiring required for the (first path) is short, the drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a includes the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the door from the peripheral control board 1510. Since it is output (transmitted) to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the effect display drive substrate 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the frame 3, the route from the channel CH 2 to the door frame side effect display device 460 (first) The length of the wiring required for the second path) is extremely longer than the length of the wiring required for the first path. The effect of the noise is extremely susceptible.

  Specifically, since the door frame 3 is pivotally supported so as to be openable and closable with respect to the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 1, it is opposite to the locking unit 700 shown in FIG. 5 along the open side of the main body frame 4. On the closed side which is the side, for example, on the side of the main body frame 4 such as the effect display drive board 4450 accommodated in the dish unit 320 provided in the door frame 3 from the peripheral control board 1510 provided in the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 It is necessary to pass through various wirings which electrically connect the various substrates provided and the various substrates provided on the door frame 3 side. However, on the closed side of the main body frame 4, in addition to the payout device 830, the game balls paid out by the payout device 830 can be guided to the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320, and the upper plate 321 is a game ball. A full tank branching unit 770 that can branch and guide the paid-out game ball to the lower plate 322 side when the tank is full is arranged.

  Further, below the main body frame 4, a payout unit 800 shown in FIG. 5, which is a unitized power source board 931 and the like shown in FIG. 6 to which power is supplied from the pachinko island facility, is disposed. As described above, the various wirings for electrically connecting the various substrates provided on the main body frame 4 and the various substrates provided on the door frame 3 are drawn near the dispensing device 830, the full branch unit 770, the power supply substrate 931 and the like. In addition to the noise caused by driving the payout motor 834 provided in the payout device 830, the power supply line supplied from the pachinko island facility where the noise due to electrostatic discharge by the game ball and the pachinko machine 1 are installed It is in the environment which receives the noise etc. which invaded.

  For this reason, for the channel CH2 in which the length of the wiring for sending drawing data is extremely longer than that of the channel CH1, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 provides “ By adopting the differential communication of V-by-One (registered trademark), the system is less susceptible to noise. In this embodiment, a door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510, a door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 described later provided in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, As described above, the differential 1 pair cable is used as a wire for electrically connecting between the connection of the transmitter, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver, but this differential 1 pair cable has two wires Is not a parallel line merely provided in parallel, but a twisted pair cable. The twisted pair cable is a cable in which two wires are twisted together and is also called a twisted pair wire.

  Here, the case where a parallel line is adopted as a differential one pair cable electrically connecting between the transmitter and the receiver will be briefly described. In contrast to the channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source in which the wiring length for sending drawing data becomes extremely long compared to the channel CH1 of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source Even if a differential-type communication system called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" of the corporation is adopted to make it hard to be affected by noise, the configuration by such hardware alone is due to electrostatic discharge of the game ball When serial data in a parallel line is affected by noise, noise entering a power supply line supplied from a pachinko machine with pachinko machine 1 installed, effect display stored in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3 For door frame side effects on drive board 4450 Since the noise is not canceled (removed) when received by Shiba ICSDIC0, it will be received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 with the serial data affected, and output from channel CH2 of VDP1512a with built-in sound source Image data is received from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 as a disordered one different from the normal one, and in the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460, an image like a so-called sandstorm is displayed to indicate what image There is a problem that it cannot be recognized at all.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the door frame side provided in the peripheral control board 1510 with respect to the channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source that the wiring length for sending drawing data becomes extremely long compared to the channel CH1 with VDP 1512a with built-in sound source In addition to the configuration using such hardware, while adopting a differential system communication called “V-by-One (registered trademark)” of Sine Electronics Co., Ltd. in the transmitter IC 1512 d for effect, the system is less susceptible to noise. The transmitter and receiver are electrically connected to each other through a twisted pair cable capable of canceling (eliminating) the noise on the receiving side even if differential serial data is affected by the noise that has entered the wiring. It was adopted as a differential 1 pair cable. As a result, even if serial data is affected in the twisted pair cable by noise due to electrostatic discharge of the game ball, noise entering the power supply line supplied from the pachinko island facility where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, etc., the door frame The noise is canceled (removed) when received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive substrate 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of 3 and thus the channel of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source The drawing data output from CH2 is reliably received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive substrate 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, and is output to the door frame side effect display device 460 Liquid crystal display control unit 151 in door frame side effect display device 460. Image source built VDP1512a has generated a can be reliably displayed. By canceling (removing) the noise, it is possible to prevent the door frame side effect display device 460 from displaying an image that can not be recognized at all what the image is like sandstorm. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play due to the influence of noise.

  In the present embodiment, a door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and a door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC 0 described later provided in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. A frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and a peripheral door relay terminal board 882 intervene between the connection of, and between the transmitter and the receiver. This is because the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are not configured integrally, but a structure in which the door frame 3 is attached to the main body frame 4 after being assembled separately is adopted. After the operation of attaching the door frame 3 to the door 4, electrically connect various wirings such as harnesses and twist cables from various boards provided on the door frame 3 side to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 provided on the main body frame 4 side. Thus, various substrates provided on the main body frame 4 side and various substrates provided on the door frame 3 side can be electrically connected. With such a configuration, after the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4 and various wirings are removed, the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 can be maintained by removing the door frame 3 from the main body frame 4. If the problem that occurred in the door frame 3 cannot be resolved, another door frame 3 ′ is attached to the main body frame 4 instead of the defective door frame 3, and the door frame 3 By electrically connecting various wiring from various substrates provided on the side to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 provided on the main body frame 4 side, various substrates provided on the main body frame 4 side and various types provided on the door frame 3 'side The substrate can be electrically connected.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, in the transmitter IC 1512d for door frame side effect provided in the peripheral control substrate 1510, the differential communication of “V-by-One (registered trademark)” of Sine Electronics Co., Ltd. is adopted. In addition to the structure that is not easily affected by noise, in addition to the configuration using such hardware, even if the serial data by the differential method is affected by the noise that has invaded the wiring, that noise is canceled (removed The twisted-pair cable that can be used as a differential one-pair cable that electrically connects the transmitter and the receiver. Specifically, between the boards of peripheral control board 1510 and frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, between the frame peripheral frame of relay terminal board 868 and the board of peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and with peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and effect display driving The board 4450 and the board 4450 are each electrically connected by a twisted pair cable, while the power supply wiring and other lines for transmitting various signals are electrically connected by a harness. As a result, in addition to the video transmission wiring pattern for transmitting the serial data by the differential method transmitted by the door frame side rendering transmitter IC 1512 d to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, A power supply wiring pattern and various signal wiring patterns for transmitting various other signals are mixed. For this reason, the above-described video transmission wiring patterns are formed on the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 by being separated from the power supply wiring pattern and various signal wiring patterns by a predetermined dimension. A plurality of relay terminal boards such as a frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and a peripheral door relay terminal board 882 are straddled along the route from the transmitter to the receiver. Between the input and output of the wiring pattern, a part of the signal transmitting the serial data according to the differential system transmitted by the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is reflected to become noise, or the output level of the signal decreases. Will occur. Therefore, in this embodiment, impedance matching is performed on the video transmission wiring patterns formed on the plurality of relay terminal boards.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, between the peripheral control board 1510 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, between the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the peripheral door relay. Between the board of the terminal board 882 and the production display drive board 4450, each is electrically connected by a twisted pair cable, whereas in the wiring for transmitting power supply wiring and other various signals, each is electrically connected by a harness. Although one of the twisted pair cables is red and the other is gray, the wiring that supplies power is red and the other multiple wirings are gray. . Note that the wiring for supplying power may be yellow instead of red.

[7-4-2e. Forced switching circuit, differential circuit]
Signals output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d are sent to the forced switching circuit 1512f, the peripheral control output circuit (not shown), the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3. It is transmitted to the stored effect display drive board 4450. The forced switching circuit 1512f includes LOCKN signal output request data which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 in addition to the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. Is differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differencing circuit 1512e. The differential circuit 1512e serializes the LOCKN signal output request data into a differential serial signal (serial data). This LOCKN signal output request data is displayed during the period when the start-up screen at the time of power-on of the pachinko machine 1 is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, or in the state of waiting for the customer and the demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600. During the period of time, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510, and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 described later provided in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3; Is transmitted as an operation confirmation request of the door frame side effect display device 460 in order to confirm whether or not there is a problem in the connection between the transmitters, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver. The forcible switching circuit 1512f is connected to the circuit so as to transmit the two signals that are differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differentiation circuit 1512e, while transmitting the two signals. When the two signals differentiated into the plus signal and the minus signal are not inputted in the merging circuit 1512e, the circuit configuration is such that the circuit is connected so as to transmit the signal outputted from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. Has been. As a result, when two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input in the differential circuit 1512e, the two signals are connected to each other so as to transmit the two signals. The peripheral control board 1510 transmits the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3, while the differential circuit 1512e When two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are not input, a circuit is connected so as to transmit a signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. Signals output from the IC 1512d are transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 8. 2, and transmitted to the effect display driving board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. The peripheral control MPU 1511a is performing a demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600 during a period when the start-up screen when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, or in a waiting state. In the period, the LOCKN signal output request data is transmitted toward the effect display drive board 4450 (actually, the differential circuit 1512e provided in the peripheral control board 1510) housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3.

  The effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 receives various serialized signals when receiving a serial signal (serial data) from the peripheral control board 1510 by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 described later. The liquid crystal module circuit 4450V that restores the signal to a parallel signal and outputs the parallel signal to the door frame side effect display device 460 is mainly configured.

  The door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 receives the drawing data from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, and if it is determined that the received drawing data is abnormal data, the LOCKN signal described later is transmitted to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. Then, the data is output to the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. The LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510. When a predetermined condition is satisfied based on the LOCKN signal input, the peripheral control MPU 1511a controls the sound source built-in VDP 1512a to generate an image for notifying that effect and outputs the image to the game board side effect display device 1600 Is displayed on the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and notified.

  When the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 determines that the two received signals are LOCKN signal output request data, the LOCKN signal described later is transmitted to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. It is output to the peripheral control board 1510 via The LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a does not have a problem with the connection between the transmitter and the receiver when the LOCKN signal is input as a response signal to the transmission of the LOCKN signal output request data. It can be determined that no problem has occurred in the effect display drive substrate 4450 housed in the 320, but a failure has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver when the LOCKN signal is not input. It is determined that a defect has occurred in the effect display drive board 4450 stored in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, and a notification image (for example, “a defect has occurred in the upper dish side liquid crystal display device” is reported. Please call the store clerk. "), The sound source built-in VDP1512a is controlled by the game board side In addition to being output to the display device 1600, a notification sound indicating that effect (for example, “a defect has occurred in the upper plate side liquid crystal display device”) is output to the audio data transmission IC 1512c by controlling the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source. As a result, a notification sound flows from the speaker provided in the door frame 3. Thereby, notification can be performed by the notification image displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the notification sound that repeatedly flows from the speaker or the like provided on the door frame 3. At this time, all of the LEDs for light emission decoration provided in the door frame 3 and the various LEDs mounted on various decoration substrates provided in the game board 5 may be lighted.

7-4-3. RTC control unit]
As shown in FIG. 126, the RTC control unit 4165 that holds the calendar information that specifies the date and time and the time information that specifies the hour, minute, and second are configured around the RTC 4165a. The RTC 4165a has a built-in RAM 4165aa that holds calendar information and time information (hereinafter referred to as “RTC built-in RAM 4165aa”). The RTC 4165a is supplied with power from a battery 4165b (in this embodiment, a button battery is used) as a driving power source and a backup power source for the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa. That is, the RTC 4165a is not supplied with any power from the peripheral control board 1510 (pachinko machine 1), but is supplied with power from the battery 4165b independently of the peripheral control board 1510 (pachinko machine 1). Thereby, even if the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, the RTC 4165a can update and hold calendar information and time information by supplying power from the battery 4165b.

  The peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 acquires calendar information and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a, sets the information in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and stores the acquired calendar information and time information. An effect based on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 can be unfolded. Examples of such effects include a Christmas tree or reindeer screen on December 25 on the game board side effect display device 1600 and door frame side effect display device 460, or a New Year countdown on New Year's Eve. The screen to be executed may be unfolded on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. Calendar information and time information are set at the time of factory shipment.

  In addition to calendar information and time information, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa stores and holds LED brightness setting information when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is an LED type. There is. The peripheral control MPU 1511a obtains luminance setting information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa and adjusts the luminance of the backlight by PWM control when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is LED type. . The luminance setting information includes luminance adjustment information for adjusting the range of the luminance of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, from 100% to 70% in increments of 5%, and the currently set game. The brightness of the LED which is the backlight of the board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is included.

  In addition to calendar information, time information and brightness setting information, calendar information, time information, and brightness setting information are first stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa as date and time information of the hour, minutes, and seconds. Input date and time information is also stored.

  When the backlights of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 are attached with a cold cathode tube type, the peripheral control MPU 1511a turns ON / OFF control of the backlight or ON only. It is supposed to be.

  Various types of information such as calendar information, time information, brightness setting information, and input date and time information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa are set in the manufacturing line of the gaming machine maker. In the production line, for example, in order to perform various tests such as a display test of the game board side effect display device 1600, the year when the input date information is input on the production line as the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on. Set to the date and time of manufacture, which is the date and time.

  As described above, in addition to calendar information and time information, brightness setting information when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is attached to the LED type, input date information, etc. , It is possible to store and hold information that needs to be maintained independently of model information of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the probability of occurrence of a big hit gaming state with low probability and high probability).

  In addition, the brightness setting information and the like stored and held in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa may be too bright for the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 set as the manufacturing date depending on the environment of the hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. It may be too dark. Therefore, by operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400, it is possible to shift to the setting mode and adjust the brightness of the backlight to a predetermined brightness. After turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1, when the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 In addition, when the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the rendering operation unit 400 is operated during a demonstration in which the gaming board side effect display device 1600 is in a waiting state, the setting mode is performed. Is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. Calendar information and time information are reset by operating the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 according to the screen of this setting mode, and the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is desired. Or adjust the brightness. The adjusted desired brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is overwritten (updated and stored) as the brightness of the LED stored in the brightness setting information.

  In the setting mode, the peripheral control MPU 1511a executes the brightness correction program described above, thereby providing a game board side effect when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is equipped with an LED type. The decrease in luminance due to the secular change of the display device 1600 is corrected. The peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires input date and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, identifies the date and time when the gaming board side effect display device 1600 is first powered on, and specifies calendar information and date. Acquire the time information to specify minutes and seconds to specify the current date and time, adjust the range over which the brightness of the LED of the game board side effect display device 1600 is 100% to 70% in 5% steps Luminance setting information having luminance adjustment information to be used and the luminance of the LED which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 currently set is acquired. The acquired luminance setting information is corrected based on correction information stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 1511b.

  For example, if the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on and the current date and time, and June has already passed since the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on, When the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1511b and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on when the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75%, the 75% The luminance of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted based on the luminance adjustment information included in the luminance setting information so that the luminance is further increased by 5%, which is the correction information acquired with respect to. And when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on, December has already passed. When the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is acquired from 1b and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on when the luminance of the LED included in the luminance setting information is 75%, The luminance of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted based on the luminance adjustment information included in the luminance setting information so that the luminance is further increased by 10% which is the correction information acquired in this way. Light.

  The current date and time may be specified by directly acquiring calendar information for specifying the date and time information for specifying the hour, minute, and second from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165. Current calendar information set in the calendar information storage unit in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511 cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511 c and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 1510 in the current time information acquisition processing of step S 1002 in the control unit power on processing. And the current time information set in the time information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 1510 may be acquired to identify the current date and time.

7-4-4. Volume adjustment volume]
As described above, the volume adjustment volume 1510a can adjust the volume of music, sound effects, and the like flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by rotating the knob portion. As described above, the volume adjustment volume 1510a is configured such that the resistance value can be varied by turning the knob portion, and the electrically connected peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak is a portion of the knob portion. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and converted into a value in 1024 steps from 0 to 1023. In the present embodiment, as described above, the values of the 1024 steps are divided into seven and managed as the substrate volumes 0 to 6. Mute is set for substrate volume 0, and maximum volume is set for substrate volume 6, and the volume is set to increase from substrate volume 0 to substrate volume 6. The liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (sound source built-in VDP 1512a) is controlled so that the volume is set to the substrate volume 0 to 6, and music and sound effects flow from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

  In this way, music and sound effects flow from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by adjusting the volume based on the turning operation of the knob portion. Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, in addition to music and sound effects, notification sounds for notifying a store clerk or the like in the hall of an occurrence of a problem with the pachinko machine 1 or cheating against the pachinko machine 1, (For example, the screen developed on the game board side effect display device 1600 is displayed as more powerful, or it is notified that there is a high possibility of transition to an advantageous gaming state for the player. Etc.) also flows from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but the notification sound and the notification sound flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob at all, The volume up to the maximum volume can be adjusted by controlling the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (with built-in sound source VDP 1512a) by a program.

  The volume adjusted by this program can be changed smoothly from the muffling to the maximum volume, unlike the substrate volume divided into the seven steps described above. Thus, for example, even when a hall clerk or the like rotates the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a to set the volume to a low level, production sounds such as music and sound effects that flow from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 However, when a malfunction occurs in the pachinko machine 1 or when the player is cheating, a notification sound set to a high volume (in this embodiment, the maximum volume) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the clerk or the like in the hall from becoming aware of the occurrence of a malfunction or the player's fraudulent act by the notification sound.

  Also, based on the current board volume set by volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob part, the volume of the advertisement sound is reduced so as not to interfere with the music and sound effects. To increase the volume of the sound to make the screen being displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 more powerful in addition to music and sound effects, or advantageous for the player It is also possible to notify that there is a high possibility that the game state will be entered.

  In this embodiment, in addition to adjusting the volume of music and sound effects by turning the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a, the dial operation unit 401 of the rendering operation unit 400 and the like. By operating the pressing operation unit 405, it is possible to shift to the setting mode and adjust the volume of music and sound effects. After turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1, when the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 In addition, when the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the rendering operation unit 400 is operated during a demonstration in which the gaming board side effect display device 1600 is in a waiting state, the setting mode is performed. Is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 according to the setting mode screen, the volume of music and sound effects can be adjusted to a desired volume. Specifically, the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak converts the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position of the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a from an analog value to a digital value. The value of the substrate volume can be increased or decreased by adding or subtracting a predetermined value in accordance with the operation of the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the rendering operation unit 400. Yes. The adjusted volume is set and updated as a sub-volume value for a track incorporating sound data of a rendering sound such as music or sound among a plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source. Although it is reflected in the adjustment of the volume of the above, it is not reflected in the adjustment in the volume of the notification sound and the notification sound described above.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the volume of music or sound effects is adjusted by directly rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a, and the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400. There are two methods of adjusting the volume of music and sound effects by increasing or decreasing the value of the substrate volume by adding or subtracting a predetermined value in accordance with the above operation. Since the volume adjustment volume 1510a is mounted on the peripheral control board 1510, it is necessary to make the main body frame 4 always open from the outer frame 2. Then, the hall clerk can turn the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a. However, at the volume adjusted by the store clerk in the hall, the player may feel small and may not be able to hear music and sound effects, or the player may feel large and feel loud music and sound effects. Therefore, after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 are operated within a predetermined time, or a customer waiting state is entered and a demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600 is performed. When the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the production operation unit 400 is operated during the period being performed, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side production display device 1600, By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 according to the setting mode screen, the volume of music and sound effects can be adjusted to a desired volume. Thus, the player can adjust the volume of the music and sound effects to a desired volume. Therefore, when the volume of the hall clerk feels low and it is difficult to hear the music and sound effects, the production operation unit 400 The dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be operated to increase the volume to a desired level. When the volume adjusted by the hall clerk feels loud and music or sound effects are felt, the production operation unit The dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of 400 can be operated to reduce the volume to a desired level.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the state in which the pachinko machine 1 is not playing a game is continued for a predetermined time, and when waiting for a customer and the demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600 is repeatedly performed (for example, 10 times) The volume adjusted by the player who was sitting on the front surface of the pachinko machine 1 and playing the game last time is canceled, and the volume is initialized. In this initialization of the volume, the volume adjusted by the store clerk in the hall, that is, the volume adjusted by the store clerk in the hall directly rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a is adjusted. As a result, when it is difficult for the player who was sitting on the front of the pachinko machine 1 to feel the volume adjusted by the player who was playing the game, and to hear the music and sound effects, this time, he sits on the front of the pachinko machine 1 The player who plays the game can operate the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 to increase the volume to a desired volume, and play the game by sitting on the front of the pachinko machine 1 last time If the player who is playing feels loud and the music and sound effects are felt loudly, the player who is sitting on the front of the pachinko machine 1 and plays the game plays the dial operation unit 401 of the effect operation unit 400 or The pressing operation unit 405 can be operated to reduce the volume to a desired level.

[8. Power system]
Next, the power supply system of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 129 and 130. FIG. 129 is a block diagram showing a power supply system of a pachinko machine, and FIG. 130 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. First, the power supply board 931 will be described, and then the power supplied to each control board will be described. The grounds (GND) of various substrates and the grounds (GND) of various terminal boards are electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the power supply substrate 931 and are the same ground (GND).

[8-1. Power supply board]
The power supply substrate 931 is electrically connected to the power supply cord, and the plug of the power supply cord is inserted into the power outlet of the pachinko facility. When the power switch 934 is operated, the power supplied from the pachinko island facility is supplied to the power supply board 931 and the pachinko machine 1 can be turned on.

  As shown in FIG. 129, the power supply board 931 includes a power supply control unit 935 and a launch control unit 953. The power control unit 935 is a circuit that creates various DC voltages from AC 24 volts (AC 24 V) supplied from the pachinko island facility, and supplies backup power to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. The part 953 is a circuit for driving and controlling the firing solenoid 682 of the hitting and launching apparatus 650 shown in FIG. 5 and the ball feeding solenoid 255 of the ball feeding unit 250 shown in FIG.

  The power supply control unit 935 includes a synchronous rectification circuit 935a, a power factor correction circuit 935b, a smoothing circuit 935c, a power generation circuit 935d, and capacitors BC0 and BC1. The AC 24V supplied from the pachinko island facility is supplied to the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 via the power supply board 931 and also to the synchronous rectifier circuit 935a. The synchronous rectification circuit 935a rectifies 24 volt (AC24V) supplied from the Pachinko Island facility and supplies the rectified current to the power factor correction circuit 935b. The power factor improvement circuit 935b improves the power factor of the rectified power, creates DC +37 V (DC +37 V, hereinafter, described as "+37 V"), and supplies it to the smoothing circuit 935 c. The smoothing circuit 935c removes the supplied + 37V ripple, smoothes + 37V, and supplies the smoothed + 37V to the launch control circuit 953a and the power generation circuit 935d of the launch control unit 953.

  The capacitor BC0 supplies backup power to a RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the capacitor BC1 is built in the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control unit 952 in the payout control board 951. A backup power source is supplied to the RAM (payout control built-in RAM).

  The launch control circuit 953a of the launch control unit 953 uses the + 37V supplied from the smoothing circuit 935c as a driving power supply, and the game area 5a shown in FIG. While controlling the drive current for launching (firing) toward the direction and outputting it to the firing solenoid 682, the constant current is output to the ball feed solenoid 255 of the ball feed unit 250 to thereby control the ball of the ball feed unit 250. The feeding member receives one game ball stored in the upper plate 321 of the dish unit 320, and controls to send the game ball received by the ball feeding member to the hitting ball hitting device 650.

  The power supply generation circuit 935d is supplied from the smoothing circuit 935c with + 37V to DC + 5V (DC + 5V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 5V”), DC + 12V (DC + 12V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 12V”), and DC. +24 V (DC + 24 V, hereinafter, described as “+24 V”) is respectively created and supplied to the payout control board 951 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. The power supply system supplied with + 5V is the + 5V power supply line, the power supply system supplied with + 12V is supplied with the + 12V power supply line, and the power supply system supplied with + 24V is supplied with the + 24V power supply line.

  + 5V generated by the power supply generation circuit 935d is supplied to the payout control board 951 as described later. The +5 V supplied to the payout control board 951 is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control filter circuit 951a and is also applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control internal RAM via the diode PD0. ing. The +12 V generated by the power supply generation circuit 935 d is supplied to the +5 V generation circuit 1310 g of the main control substrate 1310 through the payout control substrate 951. The +5 V production circuit 1310 g produces +5 V which is a control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310 a from +12 V from the payout control board 951. The +5 V created by the +5 V creation circuit 1310 g is supplied to the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310 a via the main control filter circuit 1310 h and is also supplied to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM via the diode MD0. ing.

  The negative terminal of the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 931 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the positive terminal of the capacitor BC1 is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control board 951, and is paid out. The cathode terminal of the diode PD0 of the control substrate 951 is also electrically connected. In other words, + 5V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 causes a current to flow toward the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, and the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM, which is forward by the diode PD0, and the capacitor BC1. The current flows to the plus terminal. As described above, the capacitor BC1 has an electrical connection method in which + 5V generated by the power generation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 returns to the payout control board 951, and then returns again from the payout control board 951 to the power supply board 931. Is supplied and can be charged. As a result, when + 5V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d is not supplied to the payout control board 951, the charge charged in the capacitor BC1 is supplied to the payout control board 951 as payout VBB. Therefore, although the current is blocked by the diode PD0 and does not flow to the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 952a and the payout control MPU 952a does not operate, the stored contents are retained by supplying the payout VBB to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM. It has become so.

  The negative terminal of the capacitor BC0 of the power supply substrate 931 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0 is electrically connected to the power control terminal of the main control built-in RAM of the main control substrate 1310 via the payout control substrate 951. And the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 of the main control substrate 1310. That is, +5 V created by the +5 V creation circuit 1310 g causes a current to flow toward the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310 a and causes the diode MD0 to forward the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM and the plus terminal of the capacitor BC0, An electric current flows toward. As described above, the capacitor BC0 is charged by being supplied with +5 V by the electrical connection method in which +5 V created by the +5 V creation circuit 1310 g is supplied from the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 to the power supply board 931. Can be done. As a result, +12 V created by the power supply creation circuit 935 d of the power supply substrate 931 is not supplied to the +5 V creation circuit 1310 g of the main control substrate 1310 via the payout control substrate 951, and the +5 V creation circuit 1310 g can create +5 V When the main control substrate 1310 is depleted, the charge stored in the capacitor BC0 is supplied to the main control substrate 1310 via the payout control substrate 951 as the main VBB, so the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is a diode. Although the main control MPU 1310a does not operate because the current is blocked by the MD0 and the main control MPU 1310a does not operate, the main VBB is supplied to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM so that the stored contents are held. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the backup power supply circuit that supplies backup power to the main control built-in RAM is configured by the diode MD0 and the capacitor BC0.

[8-2. Voltage supplied to each control board etc.]
Next, an outline of the voltage supplied to each control board and the like will be described, and subsequently, the voltage supplied mainly to the payout control board and the voltage supplied to the main control board will be described.

  Three types of voltages of +5 V, +12 V, and +24 V created by the power source creation circuit 935 d of the power source board 931 are supplied to the payout control board 951 as shown in FIG. Two types of voltages of +24 V are supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. Also, three types of voltages, + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V, created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 are supplied to the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and through the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, peripheral It is supplied to the control board 1510 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, respectively.

  Three types of voltages of +5 V, +12 V, and +24 V supplied to the peripheral control substrate 1510 are, as shown in FIG. It is supplied to 4180a respectively. The lamp drive circuit 4170a of the lamp drive board 4170 outputs various signals such as lighting signals, blinking signals and gradation lighting signals to various decoration boards of the game board 5, and the drive source drive circuit 4180a of the motor drive board 4180 A drive signal is output to an electrical drive source such as a motor or solenoid of the panel 5.

  Peripheral control board 1510 is provided with +3.3 V creation circuit 1510 b for creating +5 V to 3.3 V DC (DC +3.3 V, hereinafter referred to as “+3.3 V”) supplied from frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868. ing. The +3.3 V produced by the +3.3 V production circuit 1510 b is supplied to the liquid crystal module 1600 a of the game board side effect display device 1600. Further, +12 V supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 is supplied to the backlight power supply 1600 b of the game board side effect display device 1600.

  On the other hand, three types of voltages of +5 V, +12 V, and +24 V supplied to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are supplied to the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate 194 as shown in FIG. 130 (b). The frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 includes a + 9V creation circuit 194a that creates DC + 9V (DC + 9V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 9V”) from + 12V supplied from the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. A total of four voltages of +5 V, +12 V, and +24 V supplied from the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are supplied to various decoration substrates of the door frame 3 together with +9 V created by the +9 V creation circuit 194 a.

  Further, + 12V supplied to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 is supplied to the upper plate side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x. The upper-disc-side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x creates +12 V to +3.3 V. In addition to being supplied to the various electronic components constituting the liquid crystal module circuit 4450 V shown in FIG. 128, +3.3 V produced by the upper dish liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450 x is also supplied to the upper dish liquid crystal module backlight power circuit 4450 y. And the door frame side effect display device 460 is supplied. The voltage generated by the upper-plate-side liquid crystal module backlight power supply circuit 4450 y is supplied to the door frame-side effect display device 460.

[8-2-1. Voltage supplied to dispensing control board]
As shown in FIG. 129, the payout control board 951 includes a payout control filter circuit 951a in addition to the payout control MPU 952a. The payout control filter circuit 951a is supplied with + 5V from the power supply board 931 and removes noise from the + 5V. In addition to being supplied to the capacitor BC1 of the power supply substrate 931 via the diode PD0, this + 5V is supplied to, for example, the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control unit 952. For example, +12 V from the power supply substrate 931 is supplied to the payout control input circuit 952 b of the payout control unit 952 and the like, and is also supplied to the external communication circuit 784 a of the external terminal board 784 via the payout control substrate 951. The external communication circuit 784a of the external terminal board 784 is a circuit that outputs a signal for transmitting the number of balls of the gaming ball paid out by the pachinko machine 1, gaming information of the pachinko machine 1, etc. to the hall computer installed in the game hall. It is. The hall computer monitors the game of the player by grasping, from the signal output from the external communication circuit 784a, the number of balls of the gaming balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1, gaming information of the pachinko machine 1, and the like. Note that +24 from the power supply board 931 is supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951 without being used in the payout control board 951 at all.

8-2-2. Voltage supplied to main control board]
As shown in FIG. 129, the main control board 1310 includes a + 5V creation circuit 1310g, a main control filter circuit 1310h, a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, and the like in addition to the main control MPU 1310a. The + 5V creation circuit 1310g is supplied with + 12V from the power supply board 931 via the payout control board 951, and creates + 5V that is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a from this + 12V. In the main control board 1310, a power supply system to which +5 V generated by the +5 V generation circuit 1310 g is applied and supplied is a +5 V power supply line. In the present embodiment, the + 5V power supply line created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 and the + 5V power supply line created by the + 5V creation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 are not electrically connected. Thus, the + 5V power supply line created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 is not electrically connected to various electronic components of the main control board 1310, and the + 5V of the main control board 1310 is not connected. The +5 V power supply line created by the creation circuit 1310 g is not electrically connected to various electronic components such as other boards except the main control board 1310.

  The main control filter circuit 1310h is supplied with + 5V created by the + 5V creation circuit 1310g, and removes noise from this + 5V. In addition to being supplied to the capacitor BC0 of the power supply substrate 931 via the diode MD0, this + 5V is supplied to, for example, the main control MPU 1310a. For example, + 12V from the payout control board 951 is supplied to the main control input circuit 1310b and the like, and + 24V from the payout control board 951 is supplied to the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d and the like, for example.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 1310 e is supplied with +12 V and +24 V from the power supply substrate 931 via the payout control substrate 951, and monitors the signs of the +12 V and +24 V power failure or short interruption. The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e outputs a power failure warning signal to the main control MPU 1310a as a power failure warning when detecting a sign of + 12V and + 24V power failure or instantaneous power failure. The power failure notice signal is input to the payout control MPU 952a via the main control board 1310 and the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control board 951. In addition, the power failure notice signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control board 1310. Further, the power failure warning signal is input to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 through the peripheral control board 1510, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 as shown in FIG. At the same time, they are input to the decoration substrate of the door frame and the like through the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate 194.

  In the present embodiment, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310 e applies the voltage to one of the +12 V power line or the +24 V power line by monitoring the voltages applied to the two power lines of the +12 V power line and the +24 V power line. Compared with the case where the voltage to be monitored is monitored, it is possible to more accurately grasp the sign of power interruption such as a power failure or a momentary power failure.

[9. Main control board circuit]
Next, the circuit and the like of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 123 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 131 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit of the main control board, FIG. 132 is a circuit diagram showing a power failure monitoring circuit, and FIG. 133 is a circuit showing an interface circuit for communication between the main control board and the peripheral control board FIG. First, the main control filter circuit 1310h shown in FIG. 129 will be described, and then the power supply created by the main control board 1310, main control system reset, main control crystal oscillator, main control input circuit, power failure monitoring circuit, main control MPU Various input / output signals to and from, and an interface circuit for communication between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 will be described.

  The main control board 1310 includes the main control MPU 1310a, the main control input circuit 1310b, the main control output circuit 1310c, the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, the + 5V creation circuit 1310g, and the main control MPU 1310a, In addition to the control filter circuit 1310h, as a peripheral circuit, as shown in FIG. 131, a main control system reset MIC1 that outputs a reset signal, a main control crystal oscillator MX0 that outputs a clock signal (in this embodiment, 24 megahertz (MHz) ) Is mainly composed.

[9-1. Main control filter circuit]
As shown in FIG. 131, the main control filter circuit 1310h mainly includes a main control three-terminal filter MIC0. This main control three-terminal filter MIC0 is a T-type filter circuit, and has excellent attenuation characteristics magnetically shielded with ferrite. In the main control three-terminal filter MIC0, + 5V generated by the + 5V generating circuit 1310g is applied to the first terminal, the second terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and noise components are removed from the third terminal. + 5V is output. + 5V applied to the first terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC0 whose one end is connected to the ground (GND), so that the ripple (AC component superimposed on the voltage) is first removed. Smoothed.

  + 5V output from the third terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC1 and the electrolytic capacitor MC2 (capacitance: 470 microfarad (μF) in this embodiment), one end of which is grounded with the ground (GND). The ripple is further removed and smoothed by being connected to. The smoothed +5 V is applied to the power supply terminal of the main control system reset MIC1, the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, and the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. It should be noted that when the power supply from the pachinko facility is cut off due to a power failure or momentary interruption at the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, the electric charge in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 becomes a power failure or an instantaneous stop It is applied as +5 V over a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the occurrence.

  One end of the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC3 which is grounded to the ground (GND), and + 5V applied to the VDD terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples. The VSS terminal, which is the ground terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is grounded to the ground (GND).

  Further, the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is electrically connected to the anode terminal of the diode MD0 in addition to being electrically connected to the capacitor MC3. A cathode terminal of the diode MD0 is electrically connected to a VBB terminal which is a power supply terminal of a RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 1310a, and a capacitor MC4 whose one end is grounded with the ground (GND) Is electrically connected to the other end. In addition to being electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 and the other end of the capacitor MC4, the VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM is connected to the plus of the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 129 via the resistor MR0. It is electrically connected to the terminal. That is, +5 V smoothed by removing noise components by the main control filter circuit 1310h is applied to the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and the VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM and the capacitor BC0 via the diode MD0. Is applied to the plus terminal of the As a result, as described above, +12 V created by the power creation circuit 935 d of the power supply substrate 931 shown in FIG. 129 is not supplied to the +5 V creation circuit 1310 g of the main control substrate 1310 via the payout control substrate 951 and created +5 V When the circuit 1310g cannot create + 5V, the electric charge charged in the capacitor BC0 is supplied to the main control board 1310 as the main VBB, so that the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a has Although the current is blocked by the diode MD0 and does not flow and the main control MPU 1310a does not operate, the stored contents are held by applying the main VBB to the VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM.

9-2. Main control system reset]
As shown in FIG. 131, +5 V smoothed by removing noise components by the main control filter circuit 1310 h is applied to the power supply terminal of the main control system reset MIC 1. The main control system reset MIC1 resets the main control MPU 1310a and the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function, and has a built-in delay circuit. The delay capacitance terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 is electrically connected to ground (GND) and the other end of the capacitor MC5 connected to ground, and the delay time by the delay circuit is set by the capacitance of the capacitor MC5 It can be done. Specifically, when +5 V input to the power supply terminal reaches a threshold (eg, 4.25 V), the main control system reset MIC1 outputs a system reset signal from the output terminal after the delay time has elapsed.

  The output terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 is electrically connected to the SRST terminal that is a reset terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the reset terminal of the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function. The output terminal is an open collector output type, and one end is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR1 electrically connected to the +5 V power supply line, and one end is a capacitor connected to ground (GND) It is electrically connected to the other end of MC6. Ripple is removed and smoothed by the capacitor MC6. When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is larger than the threshold value, the output terminal is pulled up to + 5V by the pull-up resistor MR1 and the logic becomes HI. This logic is the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the main control output with reset function. When the voltage inputted to the reset terminal of the circuit 1310ca is lower than the threshold value, the logic becomes LOW, and this logic becomes the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function. Each is input to the reset terminal. Since the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the reset terminal of the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function are negative logic inputs, respectively, the main control MPU 1310a and the reset function when the voltage input to the power supply terminal is smaller than the threshold value. The attached main control output circuit 1310ca is reset. The power supply terminal is electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the capacitor MC7 whose one end is grounded, and +5 V input to the power supply terminal is smoothed by removing the ripple. The ground terminal is grounded to ground (GND), and the NC terminal is not electrically connected to the outside.

[9-3. Main control crystal oscillator]
As shown in FIG. 131, +5 V smoothed by removing noise components by the main control filter circuit 1310 h is applied to the VDD terminal which is a power supply terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0. The VDD terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC8 whose one end is grounded (GND), and + 5V input to the VDD terminal is smoothed by further removing ripples. In addition to the VDD terminal, the smoothed + 5V is also applied to the A terminal, B terminal, C terminal, and ST terminal, which are output frequency selection terminals. The main control crystal oscillator MX0 outputs a clock signal of 24 MHz from the F terminal which is an output terminal by applying + 5V to these A terminal, B terminal, C terminal and ST terminal.

  The F terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0 is electrically connected to the CLK terminal, which is the clock terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and a 24 MHz clock signal is input. Note that the GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, is grounded to the ground (GND), and the D terminal that outputs the divided frequency of the F terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0 is not electrically connected to the outside. It is in a state.

[9-4. Main control input circuit]
The main control input circuit 1310b is detected from the general winning opening sensors 4020 and 4020, the first starting opening sensor 4002, the second starting opening sensor 4004, the magnetic detection sensor 4024, the count sensor 4005, and the gate sensor 4003 shown in FIG. In addition to the signals, it is a circuit to which an operation signal (RAM clear signal) or the like from the operation switch 954 provided on the payout control substrate 951 shown in FIG. 124 is input. The circuit configuration to which the detection signal from each switch is input is the same, so here, the circuit to which the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 954 is input will be described.

[9-4-1. A circuit to which an operation signal (RAM clear signal) is input from the operation switch]
First, as described above, the operation switch 954 is a RAM (dispense control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control substrate 951 within a predetermined period from the time of power on, and main control of the main control substrate 1310 It is operated when clearing the RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the MPU 1310a, or when it is notified of an error after the power is turned on, it is operated to cancel the error, A function to clear the RAM within a predetermined period from the time of power on and an error release after power on (after a period of playing the function as a RAM clear, ie after a predetermined period from the time of power on) And the ability to Since the main control board 1310 does not have the function of canceling the error that the payout control board 951 has, when the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is input within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on, the main control A process of clearing the main control built-in RAM is performed as a RAM clear signal for clearing the built-in RAM.

  When the operation switch 954 is not operated, an operation signal whose logic is LOW is input to the main control board 1310 from the payout control board 951, while when the operation switch 954 is operated, the logic from the payout control board 951 is input. The operation signal in which HI becomes HI is input from the payout control board 951 (detailed description of this point will be described later).

  As shown in FIG. 131, the transmission line for transmitting the operation signal from the operation switch 954 provided in the payout control board 951 within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on is pulled up with one end electrically connected to the + 12V power line. It is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR2 and to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0 via the resistor MR3. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor MR3, the base terminal of the transistor MTR0 is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR4 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR0 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR5 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5 V power supply line and is a non-inverting buffer ICMIC 10 (non-inverted buffer ICMIC 10 includes eight non-inverted buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs without inverting the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (MIC 10 A).) Main control It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the MPU 1310a.

  The circuit that outputs the operation signal from the operation switch 954 in the payout control board 951 is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and transmission that transmits the operation signal from the operation switch 954 The line is pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor MR2. In the main control board 1310, when the operation switch 954 is not operated, the operation signal from the payout control board 951 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic is input LOW, while the operation switch 954 is operated. When this is the case, the operation signal from the payout control board 951 is pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor MR2, and the logic is input as HI.

  A circuit composed of the resistors MR3 and MR4 and the transistor MTR0 is a switch circuit that is turned ON / OFF by an operation signal from the operation switch 954.

  When the operation switch 954 is not operated, the operation signal whose logic is LOW is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, whereby the transistor MTR0 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled up to +5 V by the resistor MR5, and the operation signal from the operation switch 954 whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. Be done. When the logical value of the operation signal from operation switch 954 input to input terminal PA0 is HI, main control MPU 1310a does not instruct to perform the RAM clear for erasing the information stored in the main control internal RAM. to decide.

  On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is operated, an operation signal pulled up to the +12 V side by the pull-up resistor MR2 and the logic becomes HI is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, and the transistor MTR0 is turned on to switch the switch The circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the logic becomes LOW. The operation signal from the operation switch 954 is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. Is done. The main control MPU 1310a instructs the RAM clear to erase the information stored in the main control built-in RAM when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 inputted to the input terminal PA0 is LOW. Judge.

  The operation signal from the operation switch 954 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2. This is because an operation signal from the operation switch 954 is input via the payout control board 951. That is, between the boards of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951, it is higher than the control reference voltage + 5V in order to suppress the influence of noise entering the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the boards. The reliability of the signal is enhanced by using + 12V which is a voltage. Therefore, in the present embodiment, detection signals from the general winning opening sensor 4020, the first starting opening sensor 4002, and the second starting opening sensor 4004, which are directly input to the main control board 1310, are on the +5 V side by pull-up resistance. While being pulled up, detection signals from the magnetic detection sensor 4024, the count sensor 4005, the general winning opening sensor 4020, and the gate sensor 4003 which are input through the panel relay substrate 4161 shown in FIG. Since it is not directly input, it is pulled up to the + 12V side by a pull-up resistor, similarly to the operation signal from the operation switch 954.

9-5. Blackout monitoring circuit]
As shown in FIG. 129, the main control board 1310 is supplied with two voltages of +12 V and +24 V from the power supply board 931 via the payout control board 951, and +12 V and +24 V are input to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. ing. The blackout monitoring circuit 1310e monitors the signs of blackouts or instantaneous blackouts of + 12V and + 24V, and detects a blackout notice signal as a blackout notice, in addition to the main control MPU 1310a, when it detects a blackout or a blackout indication. This is output to the payout control MPU 952a of 951 and the peripheral control board 1510. Here, the configuration of the power failure monitoring circuit will be described first, followed by the monitoring of the + 24V power failure or instantaneous power failure, the + 12V power failure or instantaneous power failure, and the output of the power failure warning signal.

[9-5-1. Configuration of blackout monitoring circuit]
As shown in FIG. 132, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e mainly includes a shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20, an open collector output type comparator MIC21, a D-type flip-flop MIC22, and transistors MTR20 to MTR23.

  The REF terminal which is a reference voltage input terminal of the shunt stabilized power supply circuit MIC20 and the K terminal which is a cathode terminal are electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR20 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5 V power supply line + 5V is applied, and the current input to the REF terminal is limited by the resistor MR20. The K terminal outputs a reference voltage Vref (in this embodiment, 2.495 V is set), which is a comparison reference voltage of the comparator MIC21. The K terminal is electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the capacitor MC20 grounded at one end, and the reference voltage Vref output from the K terminal is rippled by the capacitor MC20 AC component is removed and smoothed. The A terminal, which is the anode terminal of the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20, is grounded to the ground (GND).

  The comparator MIC21 includes two voltage comparison circuits, one of which (MIC21A) is used for comparing the monitor voltage V1 of + 24V and the reference voltage Vref, and the other one (MIC21B). , + 12V monitor voltage V2 and reference voltage Vref are used for comparison. The monitor voltage V1 of +24 V is applied to the third terminal which is the plus terminal of the MIC 21A, and the reference voltage Vref is applied to the second terminal which is the minus terminal of the MIC 21A. The monitor voltage V2 of +12 V is applied to the fifth terminal which is the plus terminal of the MIC 21B, and the reference voltage Vref is applied to the sixth terminal which is the minus terminal of the MIC 21B. These comparison results are input to the D-type flip-flop MIC22. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 includes two D-type flip-flop circuits, one of which (MIC22A) is used in the present embodiment. The Vcc terminal which is a power supply terminal of the comparator MIC21 is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC21 whose one end is grounded (GND), and + 5V applied to the Vcc terminal which is the power supply terminal of the comparator MIC21 is Ripple is removed and smoothed by the capacitor MC21, and the GND terminal which is the ground terminal of the comparator MIC21 is grounded to the ground (GND).

[9-5-2. Monitoring of +24 V blackout or momentary interruption]
As described above, the monitoring of the + 24V power failure or instantaneous power failure is performed by the MIC 21A of the comparator MIC21 comparing the + 24V monitoring voltage V1 with the reference voltage Vref. As shown in FIG. 132, the third terminal, which is the plus terminal of the MIC 21A of the comparator MIC 21 to which the + 24V monitoring voltage V1 is applied, has one end connected to the + 24V power line and the other end of the resistor MR21. Is connected to the ground (GND), the other end of the resistor MR22 is electrically connected and the other ends of the resistors MR21 and MR22, and the other end of the capacitor MC23 is grounded to the ground (GND). Are electrically connected. The + 24V monitoring voltage V1 applied to the third terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, is divided by + 24V by the resistance ratio of the resistors MR21 and MR22, and the ripple is removed by the capacitor MC23 and is smoothed. . The values of the resistors MR21 and MR22 are preset to the power failure detection voltage V1pf (in the present embodiment, set to 21.40V) when + 24V has a power failure or a momentary power failure, and the voltage starts dropping from + 24V. The monitoring voltage V1 of + 24V is set to be the same value as the reference voltage Vref.

  The first terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC 21 A of the comparator MIC 21, is an open collector output, and one end thereof is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR 23 electrically connected to the +5 V power supply line, One end is electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the capacitor MC24, and is electrically connected to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip flop MIC22. The capacitor MC24 plays a role as a low pass filter.

  When the + 24V voltage is higher than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, the + 24V monitoring voltage V1 becomes higher than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the first terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 is + 5V by the pull-up resistor MR23. The signal which is pulled to the side and the logic becomes HI is input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22.

  On the other hand, when the + 24V voltage is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, the + 24V monitoring voltage V1 becomes smaller than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the first terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC 21A of the comparator MIC21, is ground (GND). The signal with the logic level LOW is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

[9-5-3. Monitoring of + 12V power failure or instantaneous power failure]
As described above, the + 12V power failure or instantaneous power failure is monitored by the MIC 21B of the comparator MIC21 comparing the + 12V monitor voltage V2 with the reference voltage Vref. As shown in FIG. 132, the fifth terminal, which is the plus terminal of the MIC 21 B of the comparator MIC 21 to which the monitor voltage V 2 of +12 V is applied, has one end and the other end of the resistor MR 24 electrically connected to the +12 V power supply line, Is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR25 which is grounded to the ground (GND), and the other ends of the resistors MR24 and MR25, and the other end of the capacitor MC25 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND) Are electrically connected. The +12 V monitoring voltage V2 applied to the fifth terminal which is the plus terminal of the MIC 21 B of the comparator MIC 21 is +12 V divided by the resistance ratio of the resistors MR 24 and MR 25 and the ripple is removed by the capacitor MC 25 and smoothed. . The values of the resistors MR24 and MR25 become a power failure detection voltage V2pf (in this embodiment, set to 10.47 V) which is set in advance when the +12 V causes a power failure or a momentary power failure and the voltage starts dropping from the +12 V. At this time, the monitor voltage V2 of +12 V is set to the same value as the reference voltage Vref.

  The 7th terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, is an open collector output and is electrically connected to the 1st terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21A, so that one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power line. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 is preset by being electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR23 that is electrically connected, and one end being electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC24 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The terminal is electrically connected to the PR terminal. As described above, the capacitor MC24 plays a role as a low-pass filter.

  When the voltage of + 12V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the monitoring voltage V2 of + 12V becomes larger than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the seventh terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 is + 5V by the pull-up resistor MR23. The signal which is pulled to the side and the logic becomes HI is input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22.

  On the other hand, when the voltage of +12 V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2 pf, the monitor voltage V2 of +12 V becomes smaller than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the seventh terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC 21 B of the comparator MIC 21 is ground (GND) The signal with the logic level LOW is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

[9-5-4. Output of power failure warning signal]
The D-type flip flop MIC22 stores the value (logic) of the signal input to the D input terminal 1D terminal by the change of the edge of the clock signal input to the clock input terminal 1CK terminal, and this stored value (Logic) is output from the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal, and a value obtained by inverting the stored value (logic) is output from the negative logic 1Q terminal that is the output terminal. In addition, when a signal whose logic is LOW is input to the CLR terminal which is a clear terminal, the D type flip-flop MIC22 releases the latch state and the logic of the signal input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal is The inverted signal is output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal (at this time, the same as the logic of the signal inverted from the logic of the signal output from 1Q, that is, the signal input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal. On the other hand, when a signal whose logic is HI is input to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal, the latch state is set. Also, when the D type flip-flop MIC22 is configured to input a signal whose logic is HI to the CLR terminal which is a clear terminal to set the latch state, the logic is LOW to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal. When the signal that is input is input, the state in which the signal whose logic is HI is output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal is maintained (at this time, the signal obtained by inverting the logic of the signal output from 1Q is negative logic The state of outputting from the 1Q terminal is maintained).

  In the D-type flip-flop MIC22, in this embodiment, the 1D terminal that is the D input terminal and the 1CK terminal that is the clock input terminal are grounded to the ground (GND). The circuit is configured so that there is no change in the edge of the input clock signal, and the value (logic) of the signal input to the 1D terminal that is the D input terminal is stored and not output from the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal. ing. As described above, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 has a signal from the first terminal that is the output terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 that monitors the + 24V power failure or the instantaneous power failure, and the + 12V power failure. Alternatively, a signal from the 7th terminal that is the output terminal of the MIC 21B of the comparator MIC 21 that monitors the instantaneous power failure is input, and a signal is output from the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal based on these signals. The Vcc terminal, which is a power supply terminal, is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC22 whose one end is grounded (GND), and is applied to the Vcc terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. + 5V is smoothed by removing the ripple by the capacitor MC22, the GND terminal as the ground terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and the negative logic 1Q terminal that inverts the logic of the 1Q terminal as the output terminal is electrically connected to the outside. It is in an unconnected state.

  In this embodiment, in the D-type flip-flop MIC22, a power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a is input to a CLR terminal which is a clear terminal via a main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function. The power failure clear signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed after the main control side power-on process described later performed by the main control MPU 1310a. Since the CLR terminal is a negative logic input, the power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a is input to the CLR terminal with the logic being LOW via the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function. When the power failure clear signal is input to the CLR terminal, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 cancels the latch state. At this time, the logic input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal is inverted and the output terminal Is output from the 1Q terminal.

  On the other hand, when the output of the power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a is stopped, the logic thereof becomes HI via the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca, and is input to the CLR terminal. When the power failure clear signal is not input to the CLR terminal, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 sets the latch state, and latches the state where the logic is LOW at the PR terminal.

  The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to input terminal PA1 of input port PA of main control MPU 1310a through main control input circuit 1310b, and is the output terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22 A signal output from the 1Q terminal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a as a power failure warning signal. The 1Q terminal that is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is electrically connected to the main control output circuit 1310cb having no reset function, and resets the signal output from the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. The functionless main control output circuit 1310cb outputs a payout power failure notice signal to the payout control board 951 and also outputs it to the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power failure notice signal.

  The main control input circuit 1310b electrically connecting the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22 to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a is, as shown in FIG. The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC 22, is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR26, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 via the resistor MR27. It is connected. The base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to the resistor MR27, and also electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the resistor MR28 which is grounded. The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR20 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR29, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Main control via ICMIC 23 (non-inverted buffer ICMIC 23 includes eight non-inverted buffer circuits, and the signal waveform input to one (MIC 23A) is shaped and output without being inverted). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the MPU 1310a.

  The circuit composed of the resistors MR27 and MR28 and the transistor MTR20 is a switch circuit that is turned ON / OFF by a signal output from the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

  When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22 is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the transistor MTR20 turns off. The switch circuit is also turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal outputted from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22 is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled up to +5 V side, and the transistor MTR20 is turned on. The switch circuit is also turned on.

  When both the condition that the voltage of + 24V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the signal whose logic is HI is preset in the D-type flip-flop MIC22. Since the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip flop MIC22, is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 because the logic thereof is LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20. Turn off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled up to +5 V by the resistor MR29, and the power failure notice signal whose logic becomes HI via the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23 is the input terminal of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a Input to PA1.

  On the other hand, when either one of the condition that the voltage of + 24V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic is LOW is D Since the signal is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 becomes the logic HI and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20. As a result, the transistor MTR20 is turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the power failure notification signal whose logic becomes LOW via the non-inverting buffer ICMIC 23 is the input terminal of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a Input to PA1.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 132, the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function that outputs a signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the payout control board 951 as a payout blackout signal is opened. The circuit is configured as a collector output type, and the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is electrically connected to the resistor MR26 of the main control input circuit 1310b described above, and the transistor MTR21 of the previous stage is connected via the resistor MR30. It is electrically connected to the base terminal. The base terminal of the transistor MTR21 of the previous stage is electrically connected to the resistor MR30, and also electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the resistor MR31 which is grounded. The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR21 of the previous stage is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 of the previous stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR32 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5 V power supply line At the same time, it is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the rear stage via the resistor MR33. The base terminal of the rear-stage transistor MTR22 is electrically connected to the resistor MR33, and also electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the resistor MR34 which is grounded. The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the rear stage is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the rear stage is electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the capacitor MC26 grounded. It is electrically connected to the payout control board 951 via the (harness). When the collector terminal of the subsequent transistor MTR22 is electrically connected to the payout control board 951 via a wiring (harness), the payout control input of the payout control unit 952 shown in FIG. In the circuit 952b, one end of the circuit 952b is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the + 12V power line, and the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a shown in FIG. Connected.

  A circuit composed of the resistors MR30 and MR31 and the preceding transistor MTR21 is a preceding switch circuit, and a circuit composed of the resistors MR33 and MR34 and the succeeding transistor MTR22 is a succeeding switch circuit, and is a D-type flip-flop. It is turned on / off by a signal output from the 1Q terminal which is an output terminal of the MIC 22.

  When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22 is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 of the previous stage is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the transistor of the previous stage The MTR 21 is turned off, and the switch circuit in the previous stage is also turned off, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage, which is the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage, is pulled up to +5 V by the resistor MR32. As a result, the transistor MTR22 in the rear stage is turned on, and the switch circuit in the rear stage is also turned on. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal outputted from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22 is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 is pulled up to +5 V side, and the transistor MTR21 is turned on. The switch circuit in the previous stage is also turned on, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage, which is the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage, is lowered to the ground (GND) side. The transistor MTR22 is turned off, and the switch circuit in the subsequent stage is also turned off.

  When both the condition that the voltage of + 24V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the signal whose logic becomes HI is preset by the D type flip flop MIC22 Because the signal is input to the PR terminal, which is the terminal, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes logic LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage. The transistor MTR21 is turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the former-stage transistor MTR21 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor MR32 and applied to the base terminal of the latter-stage transistor MTR22, thereby turning on the latter-stage transistor MTR22. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the subsequent transistor MTR22 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side on the payout control board 951 via the wiring (harness), so that the payout power failure warning signal whose logic is LOW is issued. It is input to the control board 951.

  On the other hand, when either one of the condition that the voltage of + 24V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic is LOW is D Since the signal is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes logic HI and becomes the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage. The transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is turned ON by being input. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the preceding transistor MTR21 is pulled down to the ground (GND) and applied to the base terminal of the succeeding transistor MTR22, thereby turning off the succeeding transistor MTR22. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the latter stage is pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor in the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952 in the payout control substrate 951 via the wiring (harness). A payout blackout notice signal whose logic is HI is input to the payout control board 951.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 132, the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function that outputs a signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power failure warning signal is opened. The circuit is configured as a collector output type, and the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22 is electrically connected to the resistor MR26 of the main control input circuit 1310b described above, and the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 via the resistor MR35 And are electrically connected. The base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the resistor MR35, and also electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the resistor MR36 which is grounded. The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR23 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via a wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via a wiring (harness), a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control unit 1511 in the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. In FIG. 1, one end is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line, and is electrically connected to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. Connected.

  The circuit composed of the resistors MR35 and MR36 and the transistor MTR23 is a switch circuit that is turned ON / OFF by a signal output from the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

  When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor MTR23 is turned OFF. The switch circuit is also turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is raised to the + 5V side, and the transistor MTR23 is turned on. The switch circuit is also turned on.

  When both the condition that the voltage of + 24V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the signal whose logic is HI is preset in the D-type flip-flop MIC22. Since the signal is output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, the logic becomes LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23. Turn off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor in the payout control input circuit of the peripheral control unit 1511 in the peripheral control substrate 1510 via the wiring (harness). The peripheral power failure warning signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510.

  On the other hand, when either one of the condition that the voltage of + 24V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic is LOW is D Since the signal is input to the PR terminal that is the preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 becomes the logic HI and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23. As a result, the transistor MTR23 is turned ON. As a result, the peripheral power failure notice signal whose logic is LOW is generated when the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the peripheral control board 1510 via the wiring (harness). It is input to 1510.

  Thus, the main control input circuit 1310 b which transmits the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22 to the main control MPU 1310 a as a power failure notice signal, and the 1 Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22 The main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb outputs the signal output from the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power failure notice signal, and there is one transistor in each, and the power failure notice signal input to the main control MPU 1310a and peripheral While the logic with the peripheral power failure notice signal input to the control board 1510 is the same logic, the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22 is dispensed to the payout control board 951 Reset function to output as a power failure notice signal The output circuit 1310cb has two transistors, a former stage and a latter stage, and the logic of the payout blackout notice signal is the logic of the blackout notice signal input to the main control MPU 1310a and the peripheral blackout notice signal input to the peripheral control board 1510 Is different from the logic of the power failure warning signal and the logic of the peripheral power failure warning signal.

  The collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR29, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and the main control MPU 1310a via the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23. The collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 at the subsequent stage of the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control board via wiring (harness). In the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952 in 951, one end is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line, and the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function is connected. The collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is connected Through the harness), the payout control input circuit of the peripheral control unit 1511 in the peripheral control board 1510, which is a pull-up resistor electrically connected to one end of which is connected + 12V power supply line and electrically. This is because the transistor MTR20 and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control input circuit 1310b are connected to the main control board between the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b and the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. Since it is implemented in 1310, the main control board 1310 and the payout control board are used to perform the power outage notice by the logic (ON / OFF signal) of the power outage notice signal using + 5V which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a. The main control MPU 1310a, between the boards 951 and between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, in order to suppress the influence of noise entering the wiring (harness) electrically connecting the boards. Control of the payout control MPU 952a and the peripheral control MPU 1511a It is the reference voltage + doing power failure notice by the logic of the power failure warning signal with certain + 12V at a higher voltage (ON / OFF signals) than 5V.

[9-6. Various input / output signals to main control MPU]
Next, various input / output signals to the main control MPU 1310a will be described with reference to FIG. The RXA terminal which is the serial data input terminal of the serial input port of the main control MPU 1310a receives serial data from the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 123 as a payer serial data reception signal via the main control input circuit 1310b. . On the other hand, the TXA terminal and the TXB terminal, which are serial data output terminals of the serial output port of the main control MPU 1310a, receive the serial data transmitted from the TXA terminal to the payout control board 951 as the main payout serial data transmission signal and have no reset function. A main payment serial data transmission signal is transmitted to the payout control board 951 from the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function to the circuit 1310cb, and the serial data to be sent to the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. The peripheral serial data transmission signal is transmitted to the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function, and the main peripheral serial data transmission signal is transmitted from the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function to the peripheral control board 1510.

  In addition to the operation signal (RAM clear signal) described above being input to each input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a, for example, a payout that indicates the completion of normal reception of the main payment serial data reception signal described above A payer ACK signal from the control board 951 is input through the main control input circuit 1310b, and detection signals from various switches such as the first start port sensor 4002 shown in FIG. 123 are input through the main control input circuit 1310b. Each is entered.

  On the other hand, from each output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a, for example, a main payment ACK signal notifying the completion of normal reception of the above-described payee serial data reception signal is output to the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function. The main control output circuit with reset function 1310 ca outputs a main payment ACK signal to the payout control board 951, and for the general drawing solenoid 2107 shown in FIG. 123, the drive signal to the main control output circuit with reset function 1310 ca The main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca outputs a drive signal to the common drawing solenoid 2107 via the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, and various displays such as the first special symbol display 1403 shown in FIG. Drive signal to the main control output circuit 1310 ca with reset function. To output various driving signals from the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function to various displays, and various information (game information) regarding the game to the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function and the main function with reset function The control output circuit 1310 ca outputs various information (game information) relating to the game to the payout control board 951 or the like.

9-7. Interface circuit for communication between main control board and peripheral control board]
Next, a communication interface circuit between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 will be described with reference to FIG. The main control board 1310 is supplied with +12 V from the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 129 through the payout control board 951, and the +5 V creation circuit 1310 creates +5 V which is a control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a from this +12 V. ing. The main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 is influenced by noise entering the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, the reliability is enhanced by using + 12V, which is a voltage higher than + 5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a.

  Specifically, the main control board 1310 causes the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function to function as a communication interface circuit, and the communication interface circuit mainly includes a resistor MR50, resistors MR51 and MR52, and a transistor MTR50. It is done. On the other hand, in the peripheral control substrate 1510, as a communication interface circuit, a diode AD10, an electrolytic capacitor AC10 (in the present embodiment, electrostatic capacity: 47 μF), and a photocoupler AIC10 (infrared LED and photo IC) are incorporated. Is mainly configured.).

+ 12V supplied from the power supply board 931 is applied to the anode terminal of the diode MD50 of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951, and the minus terminal is grounded to the ground (GND) to the cathode terminal of the diode MD50. It is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50 (in the present embodiment, the capacitance: 220 microfarads (.mu.F)). The cathode terminal of the diode MD50 is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, and electrically connected to the anode terminal (No. 1 terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control substrate 1510 via a wiring (harness). It is connected to the.
Thereby, for example, when the power from power supply substrate 931 is not supplied to main control substrate 1310 via discharge control substrate 951 due to a power failure or a momentary stop, the charge stored in electrolytic capacitor MC50 is generated. + 12V can be continuously applied from the main control board 1310 to the anode terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510.

  As described above, when a power failure or an instantaneous stop occurs in the power supply terminal VDD of the main control MPU 1310a, the electrolytic capacitor MC2 (in the present embodiment, the capacitance: 470 μF) shown in FIG. 131 is charged. The main charge serial transmission port 1310 ae incorporated in the main control MPU 1310 a is at least at least a command for which the main control CPU core 1310 aa has been set in the transmission buffer register 1310 aeb. The data can be transferred to the transmission shift register 41 aea by the unit 1310 aec and transmission complete as main cycle serial data from the transmission shift register 1310 aea.

  As described above, the main cycle serial data transmission signal transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 is to the wiring (harness) electrically connecting the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. In order to suppress the influence of intruding noise, the reliability is enhanced by transmitting using +12 V which is a voltage higher than +5 V which is a control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310 a.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC50 is applied as + 12V from the main control board 1310 to the anode terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a transfers the command set by the main control CPU core 1310aa in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb to the transmission shift register 41aa by the serial management unit 1310aec. When transmission is performed from the shift register 1310aea as main circumference serial data, a main circumference serial data transmission signal having a logic level of HI can be transmitted from the collector terminal of the transistor MTR50 by + 12V.

  In this embodiment, the storage capacity of the transmission buffer register 1310aeb of the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a has 32 bytes, and one packet is composed of 3 bytes of data. Therefore, data for 10 packets at the maximum is stored in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb. In this embodiment, the transfer bit rate of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control MPU 1310a is set to 19200 bps.

  The cathode terminal (third terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR50 of the main control substrate 1310 via the resistor AR10 and its wiring (harness). The resistor AR10 of the peripheral control substrate 1510 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing to the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10.

  The TXB terminal for outputting a serial data transmission signal in the main cycle from the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. 131 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR50 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5 V power supply line and the resistor MR51 It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 through the same. The base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is electrically connected to the resistor MR51, and also electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the resistor MR52 which is grounded. The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR50 is grounded to the ground (GND).

  The circuit composed of the resistors MR51 and MR52 and the transistor MTR50 is a switch circuit. When the logic of the main serial data transmission signal is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is on the ground (GND) side. As a result, the transistor MTR50 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, forward current does not flow through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10 on the peripheral control board 1510, so that the photocoupler AIC10 is turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the main serial data transmission signal is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled up to + 5V by the resistor MR50, turning on the transistor MTR50 and turning on the switch circuit. . As a result, a forward current flows through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510, so that the photocoupler AIC10 is turned on.

  + 5V supplied from the power supply board 931 is applied to the anode terminal of the diode AD10 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the cathode terminal of the diode AD10 is connected to the ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10 to be grounded. The cathode terminal of the diode AD10 is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10, and also electrically connected to the Vcc terminal (the sixth terminal) which is a power supply terminal of the photocoupler AIC10. The emitter terminal (No. 4 terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal (No. 5 terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10. It is pulled up to + 5V by AR11 and is electrically connected to the input terminal of the serial I / O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. When the photocoupler AIC10 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 changes, and the signal is used as a main cycle serial data transmission signal, and the serial I / O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a Is input to the input terminal of.

  Thereby, as described above, for example, when +5 V supplied from the power supply substrate 931 is not supplied to the peripheral control substrate 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 by a power failure or a momentary power failure, The electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor AC10 can be continuously applied to the Vcc terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 as + 5V. The main cycle serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510 by applying +5 V from the electrolytic capacitor AC10 to the main control MPU 1310a when a power or momentary interruption occurs is generated. The data set in the transmission buffer register 1310 aeb of the built-in main cycle serial transmission port 1310 ae can be completely transmitted, and the main cycle serial data transmission signal during transmission, that is, the main cycle serial data is cut off. The peripheral control board 1510 reliably receives the signal without being lost or missing.

  When the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510 is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the transistor Since the photocoupler AIC10 is turned off when the MTR50 is turned off, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor AR11, and the logic becomes HI. The serial data transmission signal is input to the input terminal of the serial I / O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a, while the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510. When is LOW Is applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 because the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled up to + 5V by the resistor MR50 and the transistor MTR50 is turned on so that the photocoupler AIC10 is turned on. The main peripheral serial data transmission signal whose logic is LOW by the pulled voltage being pulled down to the ground (GND) side is input to the input terminal of the serial I / O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. Thus, the logic of the main circumference serial data transmission signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 is the same as the logic of the main circumference serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510. It is the logic of

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the +5 V power supply line to which +5 V as the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310 a is applied, and the +12 V power supply line to which +12 V as the communication voltage applied via the diode MD50 is applied. Measures are taken when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and the control reference voltage and the communication voltage drop. That is, for the main cycle serial transmission port 1310 ae incorporated in the main control MPU 1310 a, a +5 V power supply line, and the plus terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 using the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control filter circuit 1310 h as the first auxiliary power, Are electrically connected in parallel, so that even if a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and the control reference voltage applied from the + 5V power supply line decreases, the electrolytic capacitor of the main control filter circuit 1310h as the first auxiliary power supply By applying the control reference voltage from the plus terminal of MC2, the state in which the control reference voltage is applied can be maintained, and is configured from resistance MR50, resistance MR51, MR52, and transistor MTR50. Main function without reset function to function as a communication interface circuit For the output circuit 1310cb, +12 V applied to the +12 V power supply line is applied to the anode terminal of the diode MD50 as a communication voltage, and the cathode terminal of the diode MD50 and the plus of the electrolytic capacitor MC50 which is the second auxiliary power supply Even if a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and the communication voltage applied from the + 12V power supply line via the diode MD50 is reduced by the terminals being electrically connected in parallel, the second auxiliary power supply is provided. By applying the communication voltage from the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, the state where the communication voltage is applied can be maintained. As a result, it is possible to prevent the command being transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 from being cut off, and to prevent omission of the command. Therefore, the peripheral control board 1510 can reliably receive the command being transmitted. can do. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the missed command immediately after the occurrence of a power failure or during a momentary power failure.

  Further, a plurality of commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb of the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a are all composed of a resistor MR50, resistors MR51 and MR52, and a transistor MTR50 as main periphery serial data. 470 μF is set as the electrostatic capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control filter circuit 1310h so that transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 can be completed via the reset function-free main control output circuit 1310cb that functions as a communication interface circuit. 220 μF is set as the capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor MC50. As a result, even if a power failure or momentary stoppage occurs during transmission from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, all the commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310 aeb are reset to function as interface circuits as main cycle serial data. Since the transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 can be completed via the function-free main control output circuit 1310 cb, the peripheral control board 1510 may drop without dropping or disconnecting a plurality of commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310 aeb. And can be received reliably.

[10. Circuit of payout control board]
Next, a circuit and the like of the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 124 will be described with reference to FIGS. 134 to 139. 134 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit and the like of the payout control unit, FIG. 135 is a circuit diagram showing the payout control input circuit, FIG. 136 is a circuit diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 135, and FIG. FIG. 138 is a circuit diagram showing the CR unit input / output circuit. FIG. 139 is an input / output diagram showing various input / output signals to / from the main control board and various output signals to the external terminal board. It is. First, the payout control filter circuit will be described, and then the payout control circuit, various input / output signals with the main control board, and various output signals to the external terminal board will be described.

10-1. Dispensing control filter circuit]
As shown in FIG. 134, the payout control filter circuit 951a mainly includes a payout control three-terminal filter PIC0. This payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 is a T-type filter circuit, and has excellent attenuation characteristics magnetically shielded with ferrite. The first terminal of the payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0 is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC0, to which + 5V from the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. The capacitor (PC0) first removes +5 V from the power supply substrate 931 from the ripple (AC component folded in voltage) and smoothes it. The second terminal of the payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0 is grounded with the ground (GND), and the third terminal of the payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0 outputs +5 V from which the noise component is removed.

  The third terminal of the payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0 has one end connected to ground (GND), the other end of the capacitor PC1 and the other end of the electrolytic capacitor PC2 (in the present embodiment, electrostatic capacity: 180 microfarads (μF)) By being electrically connected to each other, ripples are further removed from +5 V output from the third terminal of the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 and smoothed. The smoothed + 5V is applied to a power supply terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1, a VCC terminal that is a power supply terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0, a VDD terminal that is a power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, and the like. . In addition, when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and the power supply from the Pachinko Island facility is shut off, the charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor PC2 is a power failure or a momentary power failure at the VDD terminal that is the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 952a. After generation, it is applied as +5 V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms).

  The VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 952a is electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the capacitor PC3 whose one end is grounded, and +5 V applied to the VDD terminal is smoothed by removing further ripples by the capacitor PC3. ing. The VSS terminal, which is the ground terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, is grounded to the ground (GND).

  Further, the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 952a is electrically connected to the anode terminal of the diode PD0 in addition to being electrically connected to the capacitor PC3. The cathode terminal of the diode PD0 is electrically connected to the VBB terminal, which is a power supply terminal of a RAM (payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU 952a, and one end of the capacitor PC4 is grounded to the ground (GND). Is electrically connected to the other end. Besides being electrically connected to the cathode terminal of diode PD0 and the other end of capacitor PC4, the VBB terminal of the built-in discharge control RAM is a positive terminal of capacitor BC1 of power supply substrate 931 shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the terminal. In other words, + 5V smoothed by removing noise components by the payout control filter circuit 951a is applied to the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, and via the diode PD0, the VBB terminal of the payout control built-in RAM and the capacitor BC1. Are applied to the positive terminal. Thus, as described above, when +5 V generated by the power generation circuit 935 d of the power supply substrate 931 shown in FIG. 129 is not supplied to the payout control substrate 951, the charge stored in the capacitor BC1 is paid off VBB. Since the current is blocked by the diode PD0 and does not flow to the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, the payout control MPU 952a does not operate. The stored contents are kept by applying a payment VBB. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the backup power supply circuit that supplies the backup power to the payout control built-in RAM includes the diode PD0 and the capacitor BC1.

10-2. Circuit of payout control section]
The payout control unit 952 is reset as a peripheral circuit as shown in FIG. 134 in addition to the payout control MPU 952a, the payout control input circuit 952b, the payout control output circuit 952c, the payout motor drive circuit 952d and the CR unit input / output circuit 952e. A payout control system reset PIC1 that outputs a signal and a payout control crystal oscillator PX0 (8 MHz in this embodiment) that outputs a clock signal are mainly configured. Here, the payout control system reset will be described first, followed by the payout control crystal oscillator, the payout control input circuit, the payout motor drive circuit, the CR unit input / output circuit, and various input / output signals to the payout control MPU.

[10-2-1. Payment control system reset]
As shown in FIG. 134, +5 V smoothed by removing the noise component by the payout control filter circuit 951a is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1. The payout control system reset PIC1 resets the payout control MPU 952a and the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, and has a built-in delay circuit. One end of the delay control terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1 is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC5 grounded to the ground (GND), and the delay time by the delay circuit is set by the capacitance of the capacitor PC5. Be able to. Specifically, the payout control system reset PIC1 outputs a system reset signal from the output terminal after the delay time elapses when + 5V input to the power supply terminal reaches a threshold value (for example, 4.25V).

  The output terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1 is electrically connected to the SRT0 terminal which is the reset terminal of the payout control MPU 952a and the reset terminal of the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function. The output terminal is an open collector output type, and one end thereof is electrically connected to the other end of pull-up resistor PR1 electrically connected to the +5 V power supply line, and one end is a capacitor connected to ground (GND) The other end of the PC 6 is electrically connected. The capacitor PC6 plays a role as a low-pass filter. When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is larger than the threshold value, the output terminal is pulled up to + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR1, and the logic becomes HI. This logic is the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU952a and the payout control output with reset function. When the voltage inputted to the reset terminal of the circuit 952ca is smaller than the threshold value, the logic becomes LOW when the voltage inputted to the power supply terminal is smaller than the threshold value. This logic is the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU 952a and Each is input to the reset terminal. Since the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU 952a and the reset terminal of the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function are negative logic inputs, respectively, the payout control MPU 952a and the reset function when the voltage input to the power supply terminal is smaller than the threshold value. Reset is applied to the payout control output circuit 952ca. The power supply terminal is electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the capacitor PC7, and +5 V input to the power supply terminal is smoothed by removing the ripple. The ground terminal is grounded to ground (GND), and the NC terminal is not electrically connected to the outside.

[10-2-2. Dispensing control crystal oscillator]
As shown in FIG. 134, + 5V smoothed by removing the noise component by the payout control filter circuit 951a is input to the VCC terminal which is the power supply terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0. The VCC terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC8, one end of which is grounded (GND), and + 5V input to the VCC terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples. In addition to the VCC terminal, the smoothed + 5V is also applied to an OE terminal that is an output enable terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0. The payout control crystal oscillator PX0 outputs an 8 MHz clock signal from the OUT terminal, which is an output terminal, by applying +5 V to its OE terminal.

  The OUT terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0 is electrically connected to the MCLK terminal that is the clock terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, and an 8 MHz clock signal is input to the payout control MPU 952a. The GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0, is grounded with the ground (GND).

[10-2-3. Dispensing control input circuit]
The payout control input circuit 952b receives the payout blackout notice signal from the door frame open switch 618, the main body frame open switch 619 shown in FIG. 124, and the blackout monitor circuit 1310e included in the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 124, a circuit to which a detection signal from a full tank detection sensor 279 is input through the power supply substrate 931, and a circuit to which an operation signal from an operation switch 954 is input. . First, the circuit to which the detection signal from the door frame opening switch is input will be described, then the circuit to which the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch will be input, the circuit to which the payout power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit will be input, A circuit to which a detection signal from a full tank detection sensor is input and a circuit to which an operation signal from an operation switch is input will be described. Various detection switches such as the full tank detection sensor 279 and the out-of-ball detection sensor 827, the payout detection sensor 842 and the rotation detection sensor 840 shown in FIG. 124 have various types of detection because the output terminal is an open collector output type. Since the circuit configuration to which the detection signal from the switch is input is almost the same, here, the circuit to which the detection signal from the full sensor is input will be described.

[10-2-3 (a). Circuit where detection signal from door frame opening switch is input]
The door frame open switch 618 uses a normally closed type (normally closed (NC)), and when the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4 as shown in FIG. The switch is turned off (disconnected) in a state in which 3 is closed to the main body frame 4. The second terminal of the door frame open switch 618 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the first terminal of the door frame open switch 618 is other than the pull-up resistor PR20 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5 V power supply line. It is electrically connected to the end and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 via the resistor PR21. The base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is electrically connected to the resistor PR21, and one end thereof is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR22 that is grounded to the ground (GND). Further, the first terminal of the door frame open switch 618 is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR20, and also electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the capacitor PC20 which is grounded. . The emitter terminal of transistor PTR20 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of transistor PTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of resistor PR23, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5 V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer ICPIC 20 (non-inverted buffer ICPIC 20 includes eight non-inverted buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs without inverting the logic of the signal waveform input to one of the (PIC 20 A)) payout control The MPU 952a is electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA. When the transistor PTR20 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 changes, and the signal is input as the door open signal to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

  The first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20 and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 through the resistor PR21, and the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20. And is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 via the resistor PR24. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR24, one end of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR25 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR21 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the external terminal plate 784 via a wiring (harness). Note that when the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the external terminal plate 784 via a wiring (harness), one end of the external terminal plate 784 is electrically connected to the + 12V power line. It is electrically connected to the other end of the up resistor. When the transistor PTR21 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 changes, and the signal is input to the external terminal board 784 as an outer end frame door open information output signal.

  Further, the first terminal of the door frame open switch 618 is pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor PR20 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 through the resistor PR21, and on the +5 V side by the pull-up resistor PR20. And is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 through the resistor PR24, and is pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor PR20 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 through the resistor PR26. ing. The base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the resistor PR26, and also electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the resistor PR27 which is grounded. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR22 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 123 via a wiring (harness). Note that when the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via wiring (harness), one end of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) electrically connected to the line. As the transistor PTR22 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 changes, and the signal is input to the main control board 1310 as a main frame door open signal.

  The circuit composed of the pull-up resistor PR20 and the capacitor PC20 is a switch signal generation circuit, and when the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4 or when the door frame 3 is closed by the main body frame 4. It is configured as a circuit that also has a function of absorbing voltage fluctuations from the door frame opening switch 618 due to a fluttering phenomenon in which the contacts constituting the door frame opening switch 618 are repeatedly turned on and off for a short time.

  A circuit constituted by resistors PR21 and PR22 and a transistor PTR20, a circuit constituted by resistors PR24 and PR25 and a transistor PTR21, and a circuit constituted by resistors PR26 and PR27 and a transistor PTR22 are a door frame opening switch. It is a switch circuit which is turned on / off by a detection signal from 618.

When the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is ON, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 20 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, so that the transistor PTR 20 The switch circuit is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR23, and the door frame opening signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a. The Further, when the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is ON, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, thereby causing the transistor The PTR 21 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off.
As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled up to + 12V side by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal board 784 via the wiring (harness), and the outer end frame door opening information output signal whose logic becomes HI. Is input to the external terminal board 784. Further, when the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is turned on, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, whereby the transistor The PTR 22 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is pulled up to + 12V side by the pull-up resistor of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. A door open signal is input to the main control board 1310.

  On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is OFF, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20. Thus, the transistor PTR20 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the door frame opening signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. In addition, when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is OFF, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled up to the + 5V side to turn on the transistor PTR21. The switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW, and the outer end frame door open information output signal is input to the external terminal plate 784. In addition, when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is OFF, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is pulled up to the + 5V side to turn on the transistor PTR22. The switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the main frame door opening signal in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the main control board 1310.

  As described above, when the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4, the door frame open signal whose logic is HI is an input terminal of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952 a by turning on the door frame open switch 618. While the outer frame door opening information output signal that is input to PA0 and logic is HI is input to the external terminal board 784, the main frame door opening signal that is logic HI is input to the main control board 1310, In the state where the door frame 3 is closed to the main body frame 4, when the door frame open switch 618 is turned OFF, a door frame open signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. The outer frame door opening information output signal whose logic is LOW is input to the external terminal board 784, and the main frame door opening signal whose logic is LOW is input to the main control board 1310.

[10-2-3 (b). A circuit to which the detection signal from the body frame opening switch is input]
The body frame opening switch 619 uses a normally closed type (normally closed (NC)), and the switch is turned on (conducted) with the body frame 4 opened from the outer frame 2 shown in FIG. When 4 is closed to the outer frame 2, the switch is turned off (disconnected). The second terminal of the main frame opening switch 619 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the first terminal of the main frame opening switch 619 is the other of the pull-up resistor PR28 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5 V power supply line. It is electrically connected to the end and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 through the resistor PR29. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR29, one end of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR30 that is grounded to the ground (GND). In addition to being electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR28, the first terminal of the body frame opening switch 619 is also electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC21 that is grounded to the ground (GND). . The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR23 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 described above, and connected with the external terminal plate 784 via a wiring (harness). Electrically connected. When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the external terminal board 784 through a wiring (harness), one end of the external terminal board 784 is electrically connected to the +12 V power supply line, and not shown. It is electrically connected to the other end of the up resistor. When the transistor PTR23 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 changes, and the signal is input to the external terminal plate 784 as the outer end frame door opening information output signal.

  The No. 1 terminal of the body frame open switch 619 is pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor PR28 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 through the resistor PR29, and on the +5 V side by the pull-up resistor PR28. And is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 via the resistor PR31. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR31, one end of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR32 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR24 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 described above and shown in FIG. 123 via a wiring (harness). It is electrically connected to the main control board 1310. Note that when the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via a wiring (harness), one end of the collector terminal of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. The other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the line is electrically connected. When the transistor PTR24 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 changes, and the signal is input to the main control board 1310 as the main frame door opening signal.

  A circuit composed of the pull-up resistor PR28 and the capacitor PC21 is a switch signal generation circuit, and when the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 or when the main body frame 4 is closed by the outer frame 2, The contacts constituting the body frame opening switch 619 are configured as a circuit that also has a function of absorbing fluctuations in voltage from the body frame opening switch 619 due to a fluttering phenomenon in which the contacts that repeatedly turn ON / OFF repeatedly.

  A circuit composed of the resistors PR29 and PR30 and the transistor PTR23 and a circuit composed of the resistors PR31 and PR32 and the transistor PTR24 are switch circuits that are turned on / off by a detection signal from the body frame opening switch 619.

  When the main frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2, the main frame opening switch 619 is ON, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, whereby the transistor PTR23 is turned off. The switch circuit is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. Thus, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal board 784 through the wiring (harness), and the outer end frame door open information output signal whose logic is HI Is input to the external terminal board 784. Further, in a state where main body frame 4 is opened from outer frame 2, since main body frame open switch 619 is ON, the voltage applied to the base terminal of transistor PTR24 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side. The PTR 24 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. Thereby, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistance of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. A door open signal is input to the main control board 1310.

  On the other hand, when the main body frame 4 is closed by the outer frame 2, the main body frame opening switch 619 is OFF, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR28. Thus, the transistor PTR23 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the external terminal board 784 via the wiring (harness), and the outer frame door opening information output signal whose logic becomes LOW is output. It is input to the external terminal board 784. When the main body frame 4 is closed by the outer frame 2, the main body frame opening switch 619 is OFF, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR28. As a result, the transistor PTR24 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the main frame door open signal whose logic is LOW is generated in the main control board. 1310 is input.

  As described above, when the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2, when the main body frame open switch 619 is turned ON, the outer end frame door open information output signal whose logic is HI is input to the external terminal board 784 The main frame door open signal whose logic has become HI is input to the main control board 1310, while the main frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2, the main frame open switch 619 is turned OFF to Is output to the external terminal board 784, and the main frame door open signal whose logic is LOW is input to the main control board 1310.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, one or both of the state in which the door frame 3 is closed to the main body frame 4 and the state in which the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2. Even in this case, since the main frame door open signal is input to the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. Although it can not be determined whether the door frame 3 is released from the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2 based on the above, the door frame 3 and / or It can be determined that a state where the player does not occur during normal game that the main frame 4 is open has occurred, and an external terminal frame 784 has an outer end frame door open information output signal. Because it is supposed to be entered Whether the frame door open information output signal is transmitted to the hall computer through the external terminal board 784 and the hall computer is in a state where the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4 based on the outer end frame door open information output signal Although it is impossible to determine whether the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2, a state in which the player that the door frame 3 and / or the main body frame 4 are opened does not occur during normal games. Can be determined.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the door frame opening switch 618 and the main body frame opening switch 619 are normally closed, so that the door frame opening switch 618 is short-circuited for some reason and the switch is turned on ( Even if the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4 even if it is in a conductive state, the main body frame opening switch 619 is short-circuited for some reason and the switch is turned on (conductive). 4 is released from the outer frame 2. Thus, by adopting a normally closed switch for the door frame opening switch 618 and the main body frame opening switch 619, a main frame door opening signal can be output to the main control board 1310 even at the time of a short circuit, and the outer end A frame door open information output signal can be transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784.

  When the door frame opening switch 618 and the body frame opening switch 619 are changed from a normally closed switch to a normally open type (normally open (NO)) switch (door frame opening switch 618 ′ and body frame opening switch 619 ′). The door frame opening switch 618 ′ is turned on (conductive) when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, and is turned off (cut) when the door frame 3 is opened to the main body frame 4. . When the main body frame 4 is closed from the outer frame 2, the switch is turned on (conductive) and when the main body frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2, the switch is turned off (disconnected). Then, even if the door frame opening switch 618 ′ is disconnected due to some cause and the switch is turned off (cut), the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4, and the main body due to some cause. Even when the frame opening switch 619 ′ is disconnected and the switch is turned off (cut), the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2. In this way, the door frame opening switch 618 ′ and the main body frame opening switch 619 ′ can output a main frame door opening signal to the main control board 1310 even when a normally open switch is used, or at the time of disconnection, An outer end frame door opening information output signal can be transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784.

[10-2-3 (c). A circuit that receives a power outage warning signal from the power outage monitoring circuit]
A transmission line for transmitting a power failure notice signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e provided on the main control board 1310 is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR40, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line, and the resistor. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40 via PR41. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR41, one end of the transistor PTR40 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR42 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR40 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR43, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Dispensing control via ICPIC 40 (non-inverted buffer ICPIC 40 includes eight non-inverted buffer circuits, and the signal waveform input to one (PIC 40A) is shaped and output without being inverted). The MPU 952a is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA. When the transistor PTR40 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 changes, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a as a payout power failure notice signal.

  A circuit composed of the resistors PR41 and PR42 and the transistor PTR40 is a switch circuit that is turned ON / OFF by a payout power failure notice signal from a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e provided in the main control board 1310.

  As described above, the blackout monitoring circuit 1310e monitors the signs of blackouts or instantaneous blackouts of two voltages of +12 V and + 24V from the power supply substrate 931, and when it detects signs of blackouts or blackouts, there is no reset function. A payout blackout notice signal is output to the payout control board 951 as a blackout notice via the main control output circuit 1310cb. The blackout monitoring circuit 1310e monitors the signs of blackouts or instantaneous blackouts of the + 12V and + 24V voltages, and as described above, the condition that the + 24V voltage is larger than the blackout detection voltage V1pf, and the + 12V voltage is higher than the blackout detection voltage V2pf When both conditions of large condition are satisfied, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the payout control substrate 951 through the wiring (harness), and the logic is LOW. While the paid out blackout notification signal is input to the payout control board 951, one of the conditions that the voltage of + 24V is smaller than the blackout detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the blackout detection voltage V2pf When the condition is met, the output of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is Payout power failure warning signal which logic becomes HI by the voltage applied to the data terminal is pulled + 12V side by the pull-up resistor PR40 described above via wiring (harness) is input to the payout control board 951.

  When both the condition that the voltage of + 24V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, that is, there is no sign of power failure or instantaneous interruption of the voltages of + 12V and + 24V. Sometimes, since a payout power failure warning signal whose logic is LOW is input to the payout control board 951, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side to turn off the transistor PTR40. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor PR43. As a result, the payout blackout notification signal whose logic has become HI from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

  On the other hand, when either one of the condition that the voltage of + 24V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, that is, the voltage of + 12V and / or + 24V When there is an indication of a power outage or a momentary power failure, a payout power failure notice signal whose logic is HI is input to the payout control board 951 and is applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 40 by the payout power failure notice signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. Is pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor PR40, the transistor PTR40 is turned on, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the payout blackout notification signal in which the logic of the collector terminal of the transistor PTR 40 becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

  Thus, when there is an indication of a power failure or instantaneous power failure at a voltage of +12 V and / or +24 V, a payout power failure notice signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a, When there is no sign of + 12V or + 24V power failure or instantaneous power failure, a payout power failure notice signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. As described above, when there is an indication of a power failure or instantaneous power failure at a voltage of + 12V and / or + 24V, a power failure warning signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. On the other hand, when there is no sign of + 12V and + 24V power failure or instantaneous power failure, a power failure warning signal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. The logic of the payout blackout signal input to the payout control MPU 952a and the logic of the blackout notice signal input to the main control MPU 1310a are the same logic.

[10-2-3 (d). Circuit where detection signal from full tank detection sensor is input]
A detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 provided in the fal cover unit 270 shown in FIG. 1 is a payout control board 951 via the handle relay terminal board 315 shown in FIG. 1 and the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. Has been entered. The output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and one end of the payout control board 951 is electrically connected to the +12 V power supply line. It is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR44a and to the first terminal of the three-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor. The three-terminal filter PIC50 for full tank detection sensor is a T-type filter circuit, and is excellent in attenuation characteristics magnetically shielded by ferrite.

  The second terminal of the full terminal detection sensor three-terminal filter PIC50 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the third terminal of the full tank detection sensor three terminal filter PIC50 is connected to the full tank detection sensor 3 via the resistor PR44b. It is electrically connected to the first terminal of the terminal filter PIC50 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 via the resistor PR45. As a result, the detection signal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 41 after the noise component is removed in the full terminal detection sensor three-terminal filter PIC50. In addition to the resistor PR45 being electrically connected, the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR46 that is grounded to the ground (GND), and has one end connected to the ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC40 which is electrically connected. The capacitor PC40 plays a role as a low pass filter. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR41 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR47, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Payout control via ICPIC 40 (non-inverted buffer ICPIC 40 includes eight non-inverted buffer circuits, and the signal waveform input to one (PIC 40B) is shaped and output without being inverted). The MPU 952a is electrically connected to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA. When the transistor PTR41 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 changes, and the signal is input as a full signal to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

  The circuit configured of the resistors PR45 and PR46 and the transistor PTR41 is a switch circuit that is turned on / off by a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279.

  As described above, the full tank detection sensor 279 detects whether or not the storage space in the second ball passage of the foul cover unit 270 is full with the stored game balls. In the present embodiment, when the storage space is not full with the stored game balls, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is transmitted via the handle relay terminal plate 315 and the power supply board 931. When the payout control board 951 is pulled up to + 12V by the pull-up resistor 44a and the logic becomes HI, the signal is input to the payout control board 951, while the game ball in which the accommodation space is stored is full. The signal applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the payout control board 951 via the handle relay terminal board 315 and the power supply board 931, and the logic becomes LOW. Is input to the payout control board 951.

  When the storage space is not filled with gaming balls stored, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full detection sensor 279 is applied to the payout control board 951 via the handle relay terminal plate 315 and the power supply substrate 931. The transistor PTR41 is turned on by inputting the signal pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor 44a and the logic becomes HI, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW, the full signal is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

  On the other hand, when the storage space is full of stored game balls, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is supplied to the payout control board via the handle relay terminal board 315 and the power supply board 931. In 951, when the signal that is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and becomes logic LOW is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 described above, the transistor PTR41 is turned OFF and the switch circuit is also turned OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is pulled up to +5 V by the resistor PR47, and a full signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

  In the present embodiment, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 is input to the switch circuit including the resistor PR45, the resistor PR46, and the transistor PTR41 via the full tank detection sensor three-terminal filter PIC50. The detection signal from the various detection switches such as the ball breakage detection sensor 827 and the payout detection sensor 842 shown in FIG. 124 is applied to a T-type filter circuit such as a full-terminal detection sensor three-terminal filter PIC50. It has a circuit configuration that is directly input to each switch circuit without intervention. Since the full tank detection sensor 279 is provided in the foul cover unit 270 attached to the door frame 3, it is compared with the ball breakage detection sensor 827, the payout detection sensor 842, etc. provided in the payout device 830 attached to the main body frame 4. The path for transmitting the detection signal is extremely long and extremely susceptible to noise.

  The full tank detection sensor 279 detects whether or not the storage space in the second ball passage of the far cover unit 270 is full with the gaming balls stored, and the payout control MPU 952a is a full tank detection sensor Based on the detection signal from 279, when it is determined that the storage space is full by storing the gaming space, the drive control of the payout motor 834 is forcibly stopped and the payout of the gaming ball by the payout rotating body is stopped. It comes to perform control. That is, when noise intrudes into the transmission path (transmission line) for transmitting the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279, the payout control MPU 952a is not full of the gaming balls with the storage space stored, but In some cases, the drive control is forcibly stopped and the payout of the gaming balls by the payout rotating body is stopped, and it is possible to drive the payout motor 834 despite the fact that the storage space is full with the reserved gaming balls. When the game ball is filled up to the upstream side of the above-mentioned winning ball passage by controlling and rotating the payout rotary body and continuing the payout of the gaming ball, the payout rotary body itself can not rotate and the payout motor 834 Load is applied abnormally, and the discharge motor 834 is overloaded to generate abnormal heat and malfunction, or the rotation shaft of the discharge motor 834 is transmitted to the rotational movement of the discharge rotor. Sometimes referred to 構等 is or failure. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in order to prevent such a problem from occurring, the circuit configuration is first selected so that noise components are removed from the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 in the three terminal filter PIC50 for full tank detection sensor. Adopted.

[10-2-3 (e). Circuit to which operation signal from operation switch is input]
The 1st and 2nd terminals which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954 are grounded to the ground (GND), and the 3rd and 4th terminals which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954 are on the +5 V side by the pull-up resistor PR48. It is pulled up and electrically connected to the base terminal of the previous-stage transistor PTR42 via the resistor PR49. The base terminal of the previous-stage transistor PTR42 is electrically connected to the resistor PR49, and also electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the resistor PR50 whose ground is grounded. Further, the fourth terminal, which is an output terminal of the operation switch 954, is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR48, and also electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the capacitor PC41 which is grounded. ing. The emitter terminal of transistor PTR42 in the previous stage is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of transistor PTR42 in the previous stage is electrically connected to the other end of resistor PR51 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5 V power supply line At the same time, it is electrically connected to the base terminal of the subsequent transistor PTR43 via the resistor PR52. The base terminal of the rear-stage transistor PTR43 is electrically connected to the resistor PR52, and also electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the resistor PR53 whose ground is grounded. The emitter terminal of the rear stage transistor PTR43 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the rear stage transistor PTR43 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR54 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5 V power supply line And the non-inversion buffer ICPIC 40 (the non-inversion buffer ICPIC 40 includes eight non-inversion buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one (PIC 40 C) without inverting it). Via the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. The logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the rear stage is changed by turning on / off the transistors PTR42 and PTR43 in the front and rear stages, and the signal becomes an RWMCLR signal as the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. Is input to

  In addition, the third and fourth terminals, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954, are pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48 and are electrically connected to the base terminal of the previous transistor PTR42 through the resistor PR49. The voltage is pulled up to + 5V by the pull-up resistor PR48 and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR44 via the resistor PR55. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR55, one end of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR56 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR44 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via a wiring (harness). Note that when the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via a wiring (harness), one end of the collector terminal of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 131 is + 12V. It is electrically connected to the other end of pull-up resistor MR2 that is electrically connected to the power supply line. When the transistor PTR44 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 changes, and the signal is input as the RAM clear signal to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a.

  The circuit composed of the pull-up resistor PR48 and the capacitor PC41 is a switch signal generating circuit, and when the operation switch 954 is pressed, the contact constituting the operation switch 954 repeats ON / OFF for a short time. The circuit is also configured as a circuit having a function of absorbing fluctuations in voltage from the operation switch 954.

  The circuit composed of the resistors PR49 and PR50 and the transistor PTR42 is a switch circuit at the former stage, and the circuit composed of the resistors PR52 and PR53 and the transistor PTR43 is a switch circuit at the latter stage, and the resistors PR55 and PR56 and the transistor PTR44 Is a switch circuit that is turned ON / OFF by an operation signal from the operation switch 954.

  As described above, the operation switch 954 is connected to the RAM (payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control board 951 and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on. It is operated when clearing the built-in RAM (main control built-in RAM), or when an error is reported after the power is turned on, it is operated to cancel the error. A function for clearing RAM within a predetermined period from the time and canceling an error after the power is turned on (after a period during which the function is performed as a RAM clear has elapsed, that is, after a predetermined period has elapsed since the power was turned on) It has a function. The operation signal from the operation switch 954 becomes a RAM clear signal in the function of performing a RAM clear within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on. On the other hand, after turning on the power (after a predetermined period has elapsed since the power is turned on) In the function to perform the error cancellation in the above, it becomes an error cancellation signal.

  When the operation switch 954 is not operated, the third and fourth terminals, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954, are pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor PR48. The transistor PTR42 of the previous stage is turned ON while the switch circuit of the previous stage is also turned ON, and is applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR43 of the previous stage, which is a voltage applied to the base of the transistor PTR43 of the subsequent stage. When the voltage is lowered to the ground (GND) side, the transistor PTR 43 in the rear stage is turned off, and the switch circuit in the rear stage is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR43 at the subsequent stage is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor PR54, and the RWMCLR signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. The payout control MPU 952a performs the RAM clear for erasing the information stored in the payout control internal RAM when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is HI within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on. It is determined that the instruction is not to be issued, and the error is canceled when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is HI after power on (after a predetermined period has elapsed from the time of power on). Judge not to indicate.

  Further, when the operation switch 954 is not operated, the operation signal of which the third and fourth terminals which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954 are pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor PR48 and the logic becomes HI is the transistor PTR44. The transistor PTR44 is turned on and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, a RAM clear signal whose logic becomes LOW is pulled down to the main control board 1310 when the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR 44 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness). Entered. When the RAM clear signal whose logic is LOW is input within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has the logic shown in FIG. When the RAM clear signal is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, the transistor MTR0 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the RAM clear signal in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled up to +5 V by the resistor MR5 and the logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. When the logic of the RAM clear signal input to the input terminal PA0 is HI, the main control MPU 1310a determines that it does not instruct to perform the RAM clear for erasing the information stored in the main control internal RAM.

  On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is operated, the third and fourth terminals which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954 are pulled down to the ground (GND) side, so that the operation signal whose logic is LOW becomes the transistor of the previous stage. The transistor PTR42 at the front stage is turned off and the switch circuit at the front stage is also turned off when input to the base terminal of the PTR42, and is applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR42 at the front stage. As a result, the subsequent transistor PTR43 is turned on and the subsequent switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the RWMCLR signal whose voltage is lowered to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW is applied to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. The payout control MPU 952a performs the RAM clear for erasing the information stored in the payout control internal RAM when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is LOW within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on. It is determined that the command is to be issued, and the error is canceled when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is LOW after the power is turned on (after a predetermined period has elapsed from the time of power on). Judge that it is something to indicate

  In addition, when the operation switch 954 is operated, the operation becomes logic LOW by the third and fourth terminals which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954 being pulled down to the ground (GND) side by the pull-up resistor PR48. A signal is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR44, the transistor PTR44 is turned OFF, and the switch circuit is also turned OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor MR2 of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. A clear signal is input to the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310 receives the logic HI shown in FIG. 131 as described above when the RAM clear signal whose logic is HI is input within a predetermined period from the time of power on. When the RAM clear signal is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, the transistor MTR0 is turned on and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the RAM clear signal in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. When the logic of the RAM clear signal input to the input terminal PA0 is LOW, the main control MPU 1310a determines that it instructs to perform the RAM clear for erasing the information stored in the main control internal RAM.

[10-2-4. Dispensing motor drive circuit]
Next, a payout motor drive circuit 952d for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 834 of the payout device 830 shown in FIG. 5 will be described. As shown in FIG. 137, the payout motor drive circuit 952 d mainly includes a voltage switching circuit 952 da and a drive IC PIC 60. The power input terminals 1 and 2 of the voltage switching circuit 952da are electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line and the + 5V power supply line, respectively, and +12 and + 5V are applied, respectively. The ground terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da is the ground (GND). Grounded. A voltage switching signal is input to a power switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da. This voltage switching signal is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function, and is output from the reset control payout control output circuit 952ca to the power switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da. It has come to be. The power supply output terminal of voltage switching circuit 952da is electrically connected to the third and tenth terminals which are the cathode terminals of drive IC PIC 60 via Zener diode PZD 60, and electrically connected to the power supply terminal of payout motor 834. No. 3 which is the cathode terminal of the drive IC PIC 60 via the Zener diode PZD60 with +12 V or +5 V as the motor drive voltage based on the voltage switching signal connected to the voltage switching circuit 952 da. While supplying to the terminal and the 10th terminal respectively, it supplies to the payout motor 834.

  The drive IC PIC 60 includes four Darlington power transistors. In the present embodiment, the sixth and seventh terminals, which are the emitter terminals of the drive IC PIC 60, are grounded to ground (GND) and are the base terminals of the drive IC PIC 60. The payout motor drive signal is input to the first terminal, the fifth terminal, the eighth terminal, and the twelfth terminal through the resistors PR60 to PR63, respectively. The second, fourth, ninth, and eleventh terminals of the drive IC PIC 60, which are collector terminals, are the first, fifth, eighth, and twelfth terminals of the drive IC PIC 60, respectively. When the payout motor drive signal is input to the 1st terminal, the 5th terminal, the 8th terminal and the 12th terminal which are the base terminals of the drive IC PIC 60 respectively via the resistors PR60 to PR63, the excitation signal is used. A certain drive pulse is output to each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) corresponding to the dispensing motor 834. The payout motor drive signal is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function, and from the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function via the resistors PR60 to PR63, the drive ICPIC60. The signal is output to the first terminal, the fifth terminal, the eighth terminal, and the twelfth terminal, which are base terminals. These drive pulses are performed by switching the excitation current flowing through each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) of the dispensing motor 834 to rotate the dispensing motor 834. Note that a back electromotive force is generated when the drive pulse (excitation signal) of each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) is cut off by this switching. If this back electromotive force exceeds the withstand voltage of the drive IC PIC 60, the drive IC PIC 60 is damaged. Therefore, as protection, the zener diode PZD0 described above is electrically connected to the third stage and the tenth stage of the cathode terminal of the drive IC PIC 60. Adopted the circuit configuration.

[10-2-5. CR unit input / output circuit]
Next, a CR unit input / output circuit 952e for inputting / outputting various signals to / from the CR unit 6 shown in FIG. 125 will be described. As described above, the payout control board 951 receives the BRDY as a ball rental request signal and the BRQ as a single payout operation start request signal via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, as described above. , And a predetermined voltage VL (+12 V) and a ground LG created from the AC24V supplied from the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. Via the terminal board 869, an EXS signal that indicates that one payout operation has been started or ended, and a PRDY signal that indicates that a payout operation for paying out a rental ball is possible or impossible. And are output. As shown in FIG. 138, the input / output circuit for inputting / outputting these various signals mainly includes photocouplers PIC70 to PIC74 (infrared LEDs and phototransistors are incorporated).

  The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 via the resistor PR70. The cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the ground LG from the CR unit 6. The resistor PR60 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing to the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC70. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 turns ON, but the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 In some cases, the photocoupler PIC 70 is turned off. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR70 via the resistor PR71, and also via the resistor PR72 It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the PTR 71. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR71, the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR73 that is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line.

  The base terminal of the transistor PTR70 is electrically connected to the resistor PR71, and also electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the resistor PR74 which is grounded. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR70 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR75 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5 V power supply line and a non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 (non-inverted buffer ICPIC80 includes eight non-inverted buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs without inverting the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC80A)) FIG. 134 It is electrically connected to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a shown in FIG. As the transistor PTR70 turns ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 changes, and that signal is input as the CR connection signal 1 to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

  On the other hand, the base terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the resistor PR72 and one end is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR76 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR71 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the power supply substrate 931 via a wiring (harness). Note that when the collector terminal of the transistor PTR 71 is electrically connected to the power supply substrate 931 via a wiring (harness), one end of the collector terminal of the power supply substrate 931 is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line (not shown). Electrically connected to the other end of the As the transistor PTR71 turns ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 changes, and the signal is input to the power supply substrate 931 as a CR connection signal.

  A circuit configured of the resistors PR71 and PR74 and the transistor PTR70 is a switch circuit that is turned on / off by turning on / off the photocoupler PIC70.

  When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned off, and pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor PR73, thereby turning on the transistor PTR70 and switching circuit It will turn on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR 70 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the CR connection signal 1 whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

  On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned on, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR70 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the transistor PTR70 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PTR75, and the CR connection signal 1 whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a. The

  The circuit composed of the resistors PR72 and PR76 and the transistor PTR71 is also a switch circuit that is turned on / off by turning on / off the photocoupler PIC70.

  When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned off and pulled up to the +5 V side by the pull-up resistor PR73 to turn on the transistor PTR71 and also the switch circuit It will turn on. Thus, the CR connection signal in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR 71 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the power supply substrate 931 via the wiring (harness) and the logic becomes LOW is input to the power supply substrate 931. The

  On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned ON, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side As a result, the transistor PTR 71 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled up to + 12V side by the pull-up resistor of the power supply board 931 via the wiring (harness), and the CR connection signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the power supply board 931. Is done.

  The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied not only to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 but also to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 via the resistor PR77. The BRDY from the CR unit 6 is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71. The resistor PR77 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC71. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC71 turns ON, When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the coupler PIC 71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC 71 is turned off. Yes. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR78 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. A non-inverted buffer ICPIC 80 (the non-inverted buffer ICPIC 80 includes eight non-inverted buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC 80B) without inverting it). To the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. When the photocoupler PIC71 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 changes, and the signal is input as a BRDY signal to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

  When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the BRDY logic from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned on. The BRDY signal whose logic is set to LOW when the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the coupler PIC71 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the BRDY logic from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned off. The BRDY signal whose logic is HI is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR78 and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. Thus, the logic of the BRDY signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is the same logic as the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6.

  The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 via the resistor PR79 in addition to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 and the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71. The BRQ from the CR unit 6 is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72. The resistor PR79 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing to the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC72. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photo coupler PIC 72 and the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photo coupler PIC 72 is turned on, while the photo When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the coupler PIC 72 and the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC 72 is turned off. There is. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR80 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. A non-inverted buffer ICPIC 80 (the non-inverted buffer ICPIC 80 includes eight non-inverted buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC 80C) without inverting it). To the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. When the photocoupler PIC72 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 changes, and the signal is input as a BRQ signal to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

  Since the photocoupler PIC72 turns ON when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6 is LOW, The BRQ signal in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the coupler PIC 72 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned off. The BRQ signal in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor PR80 and the logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. Thus, the logic of the BRQ signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is the same logic as the logic of the BRQ from the CR unit 6.

  An EXS signal indicating that one payout operation has started or ended from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a is output to the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function, and the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR81. The anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR82 whose one end is electrically connected to the +12 V power supply line. The resistor PR82 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing to the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC73. EXS output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function when + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82. When the logic of the signal is LOW, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned on, while + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82, and a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a. When the logic of the EXS signal output from the output terminal via the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function is HI, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned OFF. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is grounded to the ground LG from the CR unit 6, and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is connected to the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 by the pull-up resistor PR83. The voltage is raised to a predetermined voltage VL and electrically connected to the built-in control device. When the photocoupler PIC73 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 changes, and the signal is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6 as EXS.

  When +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82, EXS is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the reset function-free payout control output circuit 952cb When the logic of the signal is LOW, the photocoupler PIC73 turns ON, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic goes LOW. 6 built-in control device. On the other hand, when +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82, the signal is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the reset function-free payout control output circuit 952cb When the logic of the EXS signal is HI, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned off, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is pulled up to a predetermined voltage VL by the pull-up resistor PR83 and the logic is HI EXS is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6. Thus, the logic of the EXS output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC 73 is the logic of the EXS signal output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control output circuit 952cb without the reset function. It has the same logic.

  The PRDY signal which indicates that the dispensing operation for dispensing the lent ball from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a is possible or impossible is the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR84. Has been entered. The anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR85 whose one end is electrically connected to the +12 V power supply line. The resistor PR85 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC74. When +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, PRDY is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the reset function-free payout control output circuit 952cb When the logic of the signal is LOW, the photocoupler PIC74 turns ON, and +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, and a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a The photocoupler PIC74 is turned off when the logic of the PRDY signal output from the output terminal via the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function is HI. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is grounded to the ground LG from the CR unit 6, and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is connected to the inside of the CR unit 6 by a pull-up resistor PR86 via a game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. At a predetermined voltage VL and electrically connected to the built-in control device. When the photocoupler PIC74 turns ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 changes, and the signal is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6 as PRDY.

  When +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, PRDY is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the reset function-free payout control output circuit 952cb When the logic of the signal is LOW, the photocoupler PIC74 turns ON, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic goes LOW. 6 is input to the built-in control device. On the other hand, when +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, it is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the reset function-free payout control output circuit 952cb When the logic of the PRDY signal is HI, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned off, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is pulled up to a predetermined voltage VL by the pull-up resistor PR86 and the logic is HI PRDY is input to the built-in control unit of the CR unit 6. As described above, the logic of PRDY output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is the logic of the PRDY signal output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the reset function-free payout control output circuit 952cb It is the same logic.

[10-2-6. Various input / output signals to the payout control MPU]
Next, various input / output signals input / output from the input / output terminals of the various input / output ports of the payout control MPU 952a will be described.

  The RXD terminal which is the serial data input terminal of the serial input port of the payout control MPU 952a receives serial data from the main control board 1310 as a main pay serial data reception signal via the payout control input circuit 952b as shown in FIG. Be done. On the other hand, serial data to be transmitted to the main control board 1310 is transmitted as a payment serial data transmission signal to the payout control output circuit 952 cb without reset function from the TXD terminal which is the serial data output terminal of the serial output port of the payout control MPU 952a. A payer serial data transmission signal is transmitted from the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function to the main control board 1310.

  The above-mentioned RWMCLR signal, payout blackout notification signal, door open signal, full tank signal, various signals from CR unit 6 (BRQ signal, BRDY signal, CR connection) are connected to each input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. In addition to the input of the signal 1 and the like), for example, a main payment ACK signal from the main control board 1310 that informs the completion of normal reception of the payer serial data reception signal is sent via the payout control input circuit 952b. 124, and detection signals from the ball break detection sensor 827, the payout detection sensor 842, the rotation detection sensor 840, and the like shown in FIG. 124 are input via the payout control input circuit 952b.

  On the other hand, the EXS signal and the PRDY signal described above are respectively output to the payout control output no payout control output circuit 952cb from the output terminals of the predetermined output ports of the payout control MPU 952a, and the EXS signal from the reset function no payout control output circuit 952cb The PRDY signal is output to the CR unit input / output circuit 952e, or the voltage switching signal described above is output to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, and the voltage switching signal is output from the reset control payout control output circuit 952ca to the voltage switching circuit 952da. Output the payout motor drive signal to the payout control output circuit 952 ca with reset function, and output the payout motor drive signal from the payout control output circuit 952 ca with reset function to the payout motor 834 through the payout motor drive circuit 952 d In addition to The main control of the payout ACK signal from the payout control output circuit 952 ca with the reset function is outputted to the payout control output circuit 952 ca with reset function, the payment ACK signal notifying the completion of the normal reception completion of the main payment serial data reception signal described above. The drive signal of the error LED indicator 860b shown in FIG. 124 is output to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, and the drive signal is output from the reset control payout control circuit 952ca as an error LED indicator 860b. Output to etc.

10-3. Various input / output signals with the main control board and various output signals to the external terminal board]
Next, various input / output signals between the payout control board 951 and the main control board 1310 and various output signals from the payout control board 951 to the external terminal board 784 will be described with reference to FIG.

[10-3-1. Various input / output signals with the main control board]
The payout control board 951 exchanges various input / output signals with the main control board 1310. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 139 (a), the payout control board 951 includes the above-described payee serial data transmission signal, payer ACK signal, operation signal (RAM clear signal), main frame door open signal, etc. Are output to the main control board 1310. These output signals are pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor of the main control input circuit 1310 b of the main control board 1310.

  On the other hand, the payout control board 951, in addition to the main pay serial data reception signal, the main pay ACK signal, and the operation signal (RAM clear signal) described above, a main prize ball number information output signal, a 15 round jackpot information output signal, And 2 round big hit information output signal such as big hit information output signal, probability fluctuation in progress information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, time short information output signal, game such as starting opening winning information output signal A game information signal, a payout blackout notice signal, etc. are input from the main control board 1310. These input signals are pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor of the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952 of the payout control board 951.

[10-3-2. Various output signals to external terminal board]
The payout control board 951 outputs various signals to the external terminal board 784. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 139 (b), in addition to the above-described outer end frame door opening information output signal, the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 834 as award balls reaches 10 balls. The winning ball number information output signal that is output every time, the main winning ball number information output signal from the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951, the big hit information of the 15 round big hit information output signal and the two round big hit information output signal Game information signals such as an output signal, a probability changing information output signal, a special symbol display information output signal, a normal symbol display information output signal, a short time information output signal, and a start opening prize information output signal are output to the external terminal board 784. To do. These output signals are pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistance of the external terminal plate 784. In other words, two signals are outputted to the external terminal board 784, the outer end frame door open information output signal from the payout control board 951 side and the prize ball number information output signal, and the main prize ball number from the main control board 1310 side. Information output signal, 15 round jackpot information output signal, 2 round jackpot information output signal, probability changing information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, short and medium time information output signal, and start opening prize information Eight signals called output signals are outputted (passed) through the payout control board 951.

  A signal output from the external terminal board 784 is transmitted to a hall computer installed in a game hall (not shown), and the hall computer monitors the player's game or the like. When the 15 round jackpot information output signal or the 2 round jackpot information output signal is output to the hall computer as one jackpot information output signal, the hall computer counts the number of jackpots (two round jackpots). The number of times of occurrence of the jackpot), the number of times of big hit when the round has become 15 times (number of times of occurrence of big hit of 15 rounds), and the sum is the number of jackpots of the pachinko machine 1. For this reason, the hall computer cannot grasp the number of occurrences of 2 rounds of big hits or the number of occurrences of 15 land big hits from the combined number of big hits. It is impossible to grasp whether it is a big hit of 2 rounds or a big hit of 15 rounds. In addition, a data counter (not shown) is arranged above the pachinko machine 1, and a player selects whether or not to play a game with reference to the number of occurrences of the big hit gaming state displayed on the data counter. Some people do.

  However, the number of occurrences of the jackpot gaming state displayed in the data counter may actually be biased to the number of occurrences of two rounds of big hits, so even if the player starts the game, only two rounds of big hits will occur. 15 round hits may not occur easily. As described above, the number of occurrences of the jackpot gaming state displayed on the data counter can give the player a sense of expectation, but may cause the player to be more eager than necessary.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the hall computer generates two rounds of big hit occurrences by separately outputting 15 round big hit information output signals and two round big hit information output signals to the hole computer as big hit information output signals. The number of occurrences of 15 round big hits can be accurately grasped. Therefore, the hall computer can grasp whether the number of big hits actually generated by the pachinko machine 1 is the 2 round big hit or the 15 round big hit, and the data counter has 15 rounds. The number of occurrences of the big hit and the number of occurrences of the 2 round big hit can be displayed separately or only the number of occurrences of the 15 round big hit can be displayed as the number of occurrences of the big hit gaming state. Absent.

  In the present embodiment, the 2-round big hit information output signal is output to the hall computer in the period until the 2 round big hit occurs and ends, and the 15 round big hit information output signal is also 15 round big hits. It is in a state of being output to the hall computer during the period from occurrence to termination. As in the present embodiment, in addition to the method of outputting the 2 round big hit information output signal and the 15 round big hit information output signal to the hall computer, for example, when 2 round big hit occurs, the 2 round big hit information output signal is only for a predetermined period. Such a two round big hit information output signal and 15 round big hit information such that the 15 round big hit information output signal is output to the hole computer for a predetermined period when it is output to the hole computer and 15 round big hit occurs A method of outputting the output signal to the hall computer for the same predetermined period can also be mentioned.

[11. Output terminal arrangement of external terminal board]
Next, an arrangement of output terminals of the external terminal board 784 for outputting various signals to a hall computer installed in a game arcade (hall) will be described with reference to FIG. The external terminal board 784 is attached to the rear surface of the award ball base attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and the rear side is covered by the external terminal board cover 786. FIG. 140 is a diagram showing an arrangement of output terminals of the external terminal board.

  As described above, the external terminal board 784 includes an outer end frame door open information output signal, a prize ball number information output signal, a main prize ball number information output signal, a 15 round big hit information output signal and a 2 round big hit information output signal. When the big hit information output signal, the probability fluctuation in-progress information output signal, the special symbol display information output signal, the normal symbol display information output signal, the time in-short information output signal, and the starting opening winning information output signal are input from the payout control board 951, This is output to the outside of the pachinko machine 1.

  Briefly explaining these various signals, the outer end frame door opening information output signal is not generated during a normal game by a player that the door frame 3 and / or the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 1 is opened. A prize ball number information output signal is a signal indicating that a state has occurred, and the payout ball number information output signal shown in FIG. 5 is generated every time the number of balls of the gaming balls actually paid out as the winning balls reaches 10 balls. The main prize ball number information output signal shown in FIG. 8 is a variety of winning openings such as the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the general winning openings 2001 and 2201, and the special winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. It is a signal that tells you that the number of gaming balls scheduled to be paid out as winning balls based on the gaming ball entered to 10 reaches 10, and the 15 round big hit information output signal is a 15 round big hit In a state 2 round big hit information output signal is a signal to tell that it is in the state where 2 round big hit is occurring, the information output signal during probability fluctuation is in the state where probability fluctuation occurs The special symbol display information output signal ends the variation display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. The normal symbol display information output signal is a signal indicating that it is in a stopped state, and the variation display of the normal symbol is ended (stopped) on the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. The signal indicating that there is a time-shortage is a signal indicating that a time-short state has occurred, and the start-port winning information output signal is the first start-port 2 shown in FIG. 02 or game ball to the second start hole 2004 is a signal for transmitting this fact each time ball entrance.

  As shown in FIG. 140, on the external terminal board 784, the output terminals PT1 to PT10 are arranged horizontally in line. The output terminal PT1 is provided in white and outputs an award ball number information output signal. As described above, the award ball number information output signal is a signal to notify that every time the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 834 shown in FIG. In the embodiment, the signal is output from the output terminal PT1 for 0.105 seconds. When the award ball number information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer receives 10 as the prize ball for the payout motor 834 of the pachinko machine 1 every time the award ball number information output signal is input. It is possible to grasp that the game balls of the balls are paid out as prize balls, and it is possible to grasp the total number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 by counting the number of game balls paid out.

  The output terminal PT2 is provided in green and outputs an outer end frame door opening information output signal. As described above, the outer end frame door opening information output signal has a state in which the player does not generate a normal game when the door frame 3 and / or the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 1 is opened. In this embodiment, the signal is output while the door frame 3 and / or the main body frame 4 are opened from the output terminal PT2. When the outer end frame door opening information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer outputs the door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 and the pachinko machine 1 while the outer end frame door opening information output signal is input. It is possible to grasp that the body frame 4 is open.

  The output terminal PT3 is provided in gray to output a special symbol display information output signal. As described above, the special symbol display information output signal ends (stops) the variation display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. It is a signal that indicates that it is in the state, and in this embodiment, the end (the stop) of the variation display of the special symbol in the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 from the output terminal PT3. Sometimes it is output for 0.128 seconds. When the special symbol display information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer receives the special symbol display information output signal, the first special symbol of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1 It is possible to grasp that the variation display of the special symbol has ended (stopped) on the display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405, and counting the number of times, the first special of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1 It is possible to grasp the total number of times the special symbol is variably displayed on the symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405.

  The output terminal PT4 is provided in yellow to output a starting opening winning combination information output signal. As described above, the starting opening winning combination information output signal is a signal that indicates the fact that the game ball enters the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 shown in FIG. 8 and, in this embodiment, Each time a game ball enters the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 from the output terminal PT4, it is output for 0.128 seconds. When the starting opening winning combination information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hole computer receives the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening of the pachinko machine 1 every time the starting opening winning combination information output signal is input. It is possible to grasp that a game ball has entered the start port 2004 and count the number of times the start port winning information output signal is input to the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 of the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to grasp the total number of balls of the game ball which has entered the ball.

  The output terminal PT5 is black and outputs a 15 round big hit information output signal. As described above, the 15 round big hit information output signal is a signal indicating that 15 round big hit is occurring, and in the present embodiment, while the 15 round big hit is generated from the output terminal PT5, It is supposed to be output. When the 15 round big hit information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hole computer generates 15 round big hits in the pachinko machine 1 while the 15 round big hit information output signal is being input. While being able to grasp that it is a state, it is possible to count the number of times that the 15 round big hit information output signal is input, and to grasp the total number of times the 15 rounds of big hit have occurred in the pachinko machine 1.

  The output terminal PT6 is colored pink and outputs a 2-round jackpot information output signal. The two-round big hit information output signal is a signal that indicates that a two-round big hit has occurred, as described above, and in the present embodiment, while a two round big hit is generated from the output terminal PT6, It is supposed to be output. When the 2-round jackpot information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer generates a 2-round jackpot in the pachinko machine 1 while the 2-round jackpot information output signal is input. While being able to grasp that it is a state, it is possible to count the number of times the two-round big hit information output signal is input, and to grasp the total number of times the pachinko machine 1 has generated two round big hits.

  The output terminal PT7 is provided in blue and outputs a normal symbol display information output signal. As described above, the normal symbol display information output signal is a signal indicating that the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 10 has ended (stopped) the variation display of the normal symbol, In this embodiment, output is performed for 0.128 seconds from the output terminal PT7 at the end (stop) of the variation display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400. When the normal symbol display information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer receives the normal symbol display information output signal, the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1 In 1402, it is possible to grasp that the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is finished (stopped), and the number of times is counted, and the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1 The number of times can be grasped.

  The output terminal PT8 is provided in red and outputs an information output signal for a short time. The time-shortening information output signal is a signal that indicates that the time-shortening state is occurring, as described above, and in the present embodiment, is outputted from the output terminal PT8 while the time-shortening state is occurring. ing. When an information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer recognizes that the pachinko machine 1 is generating a time-spacing state when the information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input. In addition, the total number of times that the time-short state has occurred in the pachinko machine 1 can be grasped by counting the number of times the time-short-time information output signal is input.

  The output terminal PT9 is provided with an orange color and outputs a probability changing information output signal. As described above, the probability fluctuation information output signal is a signal indicating that probability fluctuation is occurring, and in the present embodiment, is outputted while the probability fluctuation is occurring from the output terminal PT9. It has become so. When the information output signal during probability fluctuation from the external terminal plate 784 is input to the hall computer, the hole computer generates a probability fluctuation in the pachinko machine 1 when the information output signal during probability fluctuation is input. While being able to grasp a certain thing, it is possible to count the number of times the information output signal during probability fluctuation is input, and to grasp the total number of times that the pachinko machine 1 has a probability fluctuation.

  The output terminal PT10 is light blue and outputs a main prize ball number information output signal. As described above, the main winning ball number information output signal is input to various winning ports such as the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, the general winning ports 2001, 2011, and the big winning port 2005 shown in FIG. This is a signal to notify that every time the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10 based on the game balls that have been balled, and is output from the output terminal PT10 for 0.128 seconds in this embodiment. It has become so. When the main prize ball number information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer receives 10 balls as the prize ball every time the main prize ball number information output signal is input. While being able to grasp that it is planned to pay out the game ball as a prize ball, counting the number of balls of the game ball which is due to be paid out, it grasps the total number of balls of the game ball which is intended to be paid out by the pachinko machine 1 can do. In addition, for example, game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls based on game balls entered in various prize openings such as the first start opening 2002, the second start opening 2004, the general winning openings 2001, 2011, and the big winning opening 2005. When the number of balls reaches 20 or more and the main award ball number information output signal is output a plurality of times, the main award ball number information output signal is 0.256 (= 0.128 seconds × 2 times) seconds, As with one continuous signal, it is output with an interval of 0.128 seconds.

  Among the output terminals PT1 to PT10 of the external terminal plate 784, the output terminals PT1 and PT2 output various signals output on the payout control board 951 side, whereas the output terminals PT3 to PT10 have the main control board. Various signals output on the 1310 side are arranged so as to be output (passed) via the payout control board 951. Each of the output terminals PT1 to PT10 is colored, and by electrically connecting wirings having connectors colored in the same colors as these colors to the output terminals PT1 to PT10, other wirings are mistakenly electrically connected. Connection can be prevented. Then, various signals output on the payout control board 951 side are transmitted to the hall computer so that various signals output on the payout control board 951 side and various signals output on the main control board 1310 side are not mixed. Output terminals PT1 and PT2 are arranged in a row on the left side of the external terminal board 784, and output terminals PT3 to PT10 for transmitting various signals output on the main control board 1310 side to the hall computer are provided on the external terminal board 784. By arranging in a line from the center left side toward the right side, also in this respect, wiring for transmitting various signals output on the payout control board 951 side to the hall computer and various outputs output on the main control board 1310 side. Incorrect wiring to transmit signals to the hall computer And it is capable to prevent the connection.

  In the present embodiment, the prize ball number information output signal output on the payout control board 951 side and the main prize ball number information output signal output on the main control board 1310 are respectively halls from the external terminal board 784 It is configured to communicate to a computer. This is because, for example, the gaming ball stored in the prize ball tank 720 in a state where the gaming ball from the pachinko island equipment side is not supplied to the prize ball tank 720 shown in FIG. When the jackpot happens to hit 15 rounds on the pachinko machine 1 by chance, the number of gaming balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 for paying out the gaming balls as prize balls runs out, so payout is made (If, for example, a ball clogged or a ball clogged in the payout device 830, the game ball can not be paid out if it can not be eliminated). Then, as described above, the winning ball number information output signal outputted on the payout control board 951 side reaches 10 balls the number of gaming balls actually paid out as the winning balls by the payout motor 834 shown in FIG. Since it is a signal that indicates that each time, the payout control board 951 can output the prize ball number information output signal and can transmit it to the hall computer through the external terminal board 784 by not being able to pay out the gaming balls. become unable. When the gaming ball is not paid out, the player calls a store clerk or the like in the hall. A clerk in the hall, for example, checks a hose-like supply nozzle or the like for supplying gaming balls from the pachinko island facility to the prize ball tank 720, and specifies the position of the ball jam (also, for example, occurs in the dispensing device 830). In this case, the game ball is returned to a state in which the game ball is paid out.

  However, even if a store clerk or the like in the hall is working, since the game by the main control board 1310 is in progress, the game ball is paid out by the work of the store clerk or the like after 15 rounds of big hit When it returns to the ready state, the payout control board 951 will pay out unpaid gaming balls one after another, and even though it is a time when 15 rounds of big hits have ended and 15 rounds of big hits have not occurred, the payout control boards 951 Outputs an award ball number information output signal to notify that effect each time the number of game balls actually paid out as a prize ball reaches 10 balls by the payout motor 834 and transmits it to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784 It will be. Then, although it is a time when 15 rounds of jackpots are not generated, a very large number of game balls will be paid out, so the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 and the number of balls of the game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 There arises a problem that the hall computer cannot accurately grasp the relationship.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, regardless of whether or not the payout motor 834 is driven and controlled by the payout control substrate 951 to actually pay out as a winning ball, that is, different from the prize ball number information output signal output by the payout control substrate 951. As shown in FIG. 8, the main control board 1310 receives the game balls that have entered the various winning ports such as the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, the general winning ports 2001, 2011, and the big winning port 2005 shown in FIG. Each time the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10 balls, a main prize ball number information output signal is output as a signal to that effect, and the payout control board 951 and the external terminal board 784 are set. The system of passing to the hall computer was adopted. As a result, even if the above-described trouble (ball clogging in the supply nozzle, ball clogging in the payout device 830, ball clogging, etc.) occurs, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 and the payment in this gaming state The relationship between the number of game balls to be released and the relationship with the hall computer can be accurately transmitted. Therefore, the hole computer can accurately grasp the relationship between the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 and the number of gaming balls paid out in the gaming state.

[12. Circuit of effect display drive board]
Next, a circuit of the effect display drive substrate 4450 for drawing the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460 will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the effect display drive substrate 4450 is disposed in the vicinity of the lower side of the door frame side effect display device 460 attached to the right side of the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 and is housed in the plate unit 320, A liquid crystal module circuit 450V that draws a display area of the door frame side effect display device 460 is mainly configured. FIG. 141 is a circuit diagram showing a liquid crystal module circuit for drawing a display area of the upper dish side liquid crystal display device.

12-1. Liquid crystal module circuit]
As shown in FIG. 141, the liquid crystal module circuit 450V of the effect display drive substrate 4450 mainly includes a door frame side effect receiver ICSDDIC0.

  The liquid crystal module circuit 450V receives a serial signal (serial data) from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d of the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 128 by the differential method “V-by-One (registered trademark)” of Zain Electronics Co., Ltd. Is transmitted to the common mode choke coil SDL0 via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, respectively, and the common mode choke coil SDL0 Noise can be separated from the negative signal. The plus signal and minus signal from which noise has been separated are respectively input to the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0. A resistor SDR0 is electrically connected between the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN− terminal. The resistor SDR0 is a termination resistor (terminator), which prevents the plus signal and the minus signal from being reflected at the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN− terminal, respectively, and prevents the serial signal from being disturbed.

  The door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 has three video signals, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, based on serial signals (serial data) respectively input to the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN− terminal. Restore to three synchronization signals (horizontal synchronization signal, vertical synchronization signal, and clock signal) (that is, parallel signals before being serialized). The red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal are, as described above, those in which the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal output from the channel CH2 of the built-in VDP 1512a are each 8 bits. Since the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal that can be input to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d are each 6 bits, for a total of 18 bits, they are upper 6 bits in each video signal.

  The liquid crystal module circuit 450V is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 as described above, in addition to the signal from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d of the peripheral control board 1510. Two signals in which certain LOCKN signal output request data are differentiated into plus signal and minus signal in the differentiation circuit 1512 e of the peripheral control board 1510 are also input. As described above, the forced switching circuit 1512f of the peripheral control board 1510 transmits these two signals when the differential circuit 1512e receives two signals that are differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal. On the other hand, when two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are not input in the differential circuit 1512e, a signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is transmitted. The circuit is configured to connect as shown in FIG. As a result, when two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input in the differential circuit 1512e, the two signals are connected to each other so as to transmit the two signals. The peripheral control board 1510 is transmitted to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the liquid crystal module circuit 450V of the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, while the difference When two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are not input in the activation circuit 1512e, the circuit connection is made so as to transmit the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. A signal output from the frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal. 868, near the door relay terminal plate 882, and transmitted to the liquid crystal module circuit 450V of the effect display driving substrate 4450 which is housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3.

  The forced switching circuit 1512 f is a signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d when the two signals differentiated into the plus signal and the minus signal in the differentiation circuit 1512 e are not input, that is, the door frame A serial signal (serial data) based on a differential method called “V-by-One (registered trademark)” of “S-Electronics Inc.'s“ V-by-One (registered trademark) ”from the transmitter IC 1512 d for side effect as a plus signal and minus signal And 868, and are input to the common mode choke coil SDL0 via the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 and to the RXIN + and RXIN- terminals of the door frame side rendering receiver ICSDIC0, respectively, while the differential circuit 1512e In When the two signals differentiated into the source signal and the negative signal are input from the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, these two signals are common. The signal is input to the mode choke coil SDL0, and then input to the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0. The door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 determines that it is an output request for the LOCKN signal when two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input in the differentiating circuit 1512e, A LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal described later to the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. The LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510.

  As described above, the LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, produces the start screen on the game board side when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on During a period displayed on the display device 1600 or a period in which a demonstration is performed by the gaming board side effect display device 1600 in a customer waiting state, a door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and effect display The door frame side effect display device 460 of the door frame side effect display device 460 in order to confirm whether or not a failure has occurred in the connection between the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the drive substrate 4450 and the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. It is sent as an operation confirmation request. Although the LOCKN signal output request data in this embodiment is differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differentiating circuit 1512e, the signal output from the door frame side rendering transmitter IC 1512d, that is, the above-mentioned Shine Electronics Co., Ltd. The data format is completely different from that of the company's “V-by-One (registered trademark)” differential serial signal (serial data). Therefore, when the LOCKN signal output request data is received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, it is determined that the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is not a signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, which is abnormal. Assuming that it is data, the LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal described later. In other words, in the present embodiment, the LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal described later using the function of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that outputs the LOCKN signal when it is determined that the received data is abnormal data. In order to forcibly output, LOCKN signal output request data having a data format different from that of the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d is sent from the peripheral control MPU 1511 a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510. By outputting, it is possible to confirm whether or not the device called door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is operating normally. This makes it possible to check whether or not there is a failure in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

  The VDD terminal, VDDO terminal, LVDSVDD terminal, PLLVDD terminal, and PDWN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 are respectively supplied with +3.3 V created by the upper-plate-side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x shown in FIG. The GND terminal, the GNDO terminal, the LVDSGND application paper, the PLLGND terminal, the EDGE terminal, the OE terminal, the MODE0, and the MODE1 terminal of the frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 are each grounded.

  The VDD terminal is a power supply terminal for a digital circuit, and a capacitor SDC0 is electrically connected between the terminal to the GND terminal serving as the ground for the digital circuit, and a +3.3 V power supply supplied to the VDD terminal High frequency noise is removed from the line.

  The VDDO terminal is a power supply terminal for TTL (Transistor-Transistor Logic) output, and the capacitor SDC1 is electrically connected between the terminal and the GNDO terminal serving as the ground for the TTL output, and is supplied to the VDDO terminal. High frequency noise from the +3.3 V power supply line.

  The LVDSVDD terminal is a power supply terminal for LVDS (Low Voltage Differential Signaling) input, and a capacitor SDC2 is electrically connected between the terminal and the LVDSGND terminal which is the ground for this LVDS input, and is supplied to the LVDSVDD terminal. High frequency noise from the +3.3 V power supply line.

  The PLLVDD terminal is a power supply terminal for a PLL (Phase Locked Loop) circuit, and a capacitor SDC3 is electrically connected between the terminal and the PLLGND terminal serving as the ground for the PLL circuit, and is supplied to the PLLVDD terminal. High frequency noise is removed from the + 3.3V power line.

  The PDWN terminal tells that the logic is HI when + 3.3V is supplied (applied), and that the normal operation is performed, while the supply of +3.3 is stopped and the logic becomes LOW and the power down. It is a terminal to transmit. The PDWN terminal is supplied with +3.3 V via the resistor SDR1 and is electrically connected to the other end of the varistor SDZ0 whose one end is grounded. The varistor SDZ0 suppresses noise and over voltage of the +3.3 V power supply line supplied via the resistor SDR1.

  The EDGE terminal transmits various signals output from various output terminals (DE terminal, SYNC0 terminal to SYNC2 terminal, and D0 terminal to D17 terminal) based on a clock signal DCLK output from the CLKOUT terminal, which will be described later. This terminal is used to designate either (when the logic transitions from LOW to HI) or a falling edge (when the logic transitions from HI to LOW), and in the present embodiment, the terminal As such, the falling edge is specified by grounding the EDGE terminal to ground. Incidentally, when the EDGE terminal is connected to +3.3 V, the rising edge can be specified.

  The OE terminal instructs whether to allow the output of various output terminals (DE terminal, SYNC0 terminal to SYNC2 terminal, D0 terminal to D17 terminal, and CLKOUT terminal) to be described later. As described above, the output is always possible by grounding the OE terminal to the ground. By the way, if the OE terminal is connected to + 3.3V, it cannot be output.

  The MODE0 terminal and the MODE1 terminal are terminals for selecting an operation mode, and the operation mode can be selected by grounding both to ground. The operation mode includes a normal mode and a shake hand mode. In the normal mode, three video signals (18-bit video signal) of a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal based on serial signals (serial data) respectively input at the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal. And a normal operation mode in which the door frame side receiver ICSDIC0 restores to a parallel signal composed of three synchronization signals (three-bit synchronization signal), a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal. is there. In the shake hand mode, the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC 0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver In this mode, the LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirmation (recovery). This shake hand mode is designed to be switched automatically.

  For example, three video signals (18-bit video signal) of a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal based on serial signals (serial data) respectively input at the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal, For some reason, the door frame-side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is restored to a parallel signal composed of three synchronization signals (three-bit synchronization signal): a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal. When it is difficult to draw on the door frame side effect display device 460 with simple data, the normal mode is automatically switched to the shake hand mode, and the LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal. This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the resistor SDR2, which is a damping resistor, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510 is input to the peripheral control board 1510. Via the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control MPU 1511a, when a predetermined condition is established based on the inputted LOCKN signal, transmits a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d to notify the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d of that fact. Is output. When this connection confirmation signal is input to the INIT terminal, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is connected between the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver. A predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for recovering the image from the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 is used for the door frame side effect included in the effect display drive board 4450. Transmit to the receiver ICSDIC0. By receiving such a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver can be easily recovered. The predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is stored in advance in the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. It should be noted that the INIT terminal of the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 include the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the peripheral door You may electrically connect directly via the relay terminal board 882.

  As described above, the LOCKN terminal is connected between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d provided on the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC 0 provided on the effect display drive substrate 4450, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver. It is a terminal that outputs a request to transmit a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (restoring) the connection between them. The LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal is input to the peripheral control substrate 1510 via the resistor SDR2 which is the damping resistance of the effect display drive substrate 4450, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the periphery The peripheral control MPU 1511 a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 is input via the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the control board 1510.

  The SYNC0 to SYNC2 terminals output three synchronization signals, a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal, which are restored based on serial signals (serial data) input at the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal, respectively. It is a terminal. In this embodiment, since the three synchronization signals of the horizontal synchronization signal, the vertical synchronization signal, and the clock signal restored are not used, the SYNC0 terminal to the SYNC2 terminal are unconnected terminals.

  The DE terminal is a terminal that outputs a DE signal that reports that a clock signal output from the CLKOUT terminal and data output from the D0 to D17 terminals, which are data output terminals, are valid or invalid, which will be described later. The DE signal output from the DE terminal is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the resistor SDR3 that is a damping resistor.

  The CLKOUT terminal is a terminal for outputting a clock signal DCLK generated by a PLL circuit built in the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0. The clock signal DCLK output from the CLKOUT terminal is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the resistor SDR4 which is a damping resistor.

  Terminals D0 to D17 are three video signals (18 red, green and blue video signals restored on the basis of serial signals (serial data) input to the RXIN + and RXIN− terminals, respectively (18 It is a data output terminal that outputs a bit video signal). Blue video signals B0 to B5 (6 bits) are output in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK from 6-bit data output terminals such as D0 to D5 terminals, and each signal line of the blue video signals B0 to B5 is a damping resistor. Each is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the ladder resistor SDRA0. The green video signals G0 to G5 (6 bits) are output in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK from 6-bit data output terminals D6 to D11, and each signal line of the green video signals G0 to G5 is a damping resistor. Each is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the ladder resistor SDRA1. The red video signals R0 to R5 (6 bits) are output in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK from the 6-bit data output terminals D12 to D17, and the signal lines of the red video signals R0 to R5 are damping resistors. Each is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the ladder resistor SDRA2.

  The grounds of the peripheral control board 1510, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, the effect display drive board 4450, and the door frame side effect display device 460 are electrically connected to each other. It has become.

[Mounting mode of each electronic component included in the first control unit MCG and the second control unit SCG]
Incidentally, it is generally known that when electronic components are surface-mounted, it is beneficial in that the hardware circuit can be suitably downsized by integration. However, in the case of integrated circuit components (components encapsulated in a relatively large package in the form of integration of multiple types of single function elements (such as resistance elements, diode elements, or capacitor elements)), By nature, a package is naturally larger than a discrete component (a component in which a single functional element is enclosed in a relatively small package), thus creating a relatively large space on the back side of the package. In addition, the space on the back side of such a package becomes a place (a place where electronic parts (illegal parts) are easily mounted illegally) that is difficult to visually confirm in a surface-mounted state. For this reason, in the field of gaming machines, electronic components have been inserted and mounted on a base plate (so-called base substrate or the like) for many years instead of surface mounting.

  That is, the electronic component to be inserted and mounted tends to generate a relatively large gap between the package and the base plate. Therefore, by inserting and mounting the electronic component, it is possible to maintain the space on the back side of the package as a spot that can be easily confirmed visually even in the mounted state, whereby the illegal component can be mounted. It is made to suppress suitably.

  However, in recent years, in the field of gaming machines, the size of the space provided for presentation has been further increased, and the hardware circuit has been miniaturized while maintaining the security performance against unauthorized mounting of electronic components. There is a need to plan.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, of the first control unit MCG and the second control unit SCG shown in FIG. In view of the fact that the player is not directly related to the benefits that the player obtains and is not likely to be fraudulent, first, the second control unit SCG is configured by surface mounting.

  That is, as described above, the second control unit SCG according to the present embodiment is configured to include the peripheral control board 1510 as shown in FIG. The second control unit SCG uses the various integrated circuit parts mounted on the base board of the peripheral control board 1510 and the various discrete parts to perform the progression of effects according to the result of the above-mentioned game progression process. Can be executed.

  Here, examples of various integrated circuit components mounted on the base substrate of the peripheral control substrate 1510 include a peripheral control MPU 1511a and a peripheral control ROM 1511b shown in FIG. Also, examples of various discrete components mounted on the base substrate of the peripheral control substrate 1510 include resistors AR10 and AR11, a diode AD10, an electrolytic capacitor AC10, etc. shown in FIG.

  In this regard, in the second control unit SCG according to the present embodiment, the lead portions of various electronic components are placed on the surface of the base plate on the base plate (here, the base substrate of the peripheral control board 1510). Only the surface mounting area to be mounted is formed. That is, in this case, surface mount type components (SMD) are also used as the various electronic components described above that the peripheral control substrate 1510 has. However, since these electronic components are not directly related to the benefits obtained by the player and are not subject to fraud, the security performance against the unauthorized loading of the electronic components is not degraded. The hardware circuit mounted on the pachinko machine 1 can be miniaturized.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 123, the first control unit MCG according to the present embodiment includes the main control board 1310, the payout control board 951, and the power supply board 931. The first control unit MCG uses various integrated circuit components and various discrete components mounted on the base substrates of these substrates 1310, 951, and 931 to control the power supply for control (for example, + 5V). It is possible to execute processing related to a game including generation processing and payout of prize balls. However, since such processing on the first control unit MCG side is directly linked to the player's privilege provision, the first control unit MCG is likely to be illegal. Therefore, although it is required to reduce the size of the hardware circuit, if the first control unit MCG is simply integrated by surface mounting, the security performance against illegal mounting of electronic components will be significantly reduced, and amusement entertainment The decline is inevitable.

  However, on the other hand, even such a first control unit MCG is mounted on the base plate (the base substrate of the main control board 1310, the base board of the payout control board 951, the base board of the power supply board 931). Of the various electronic components, the discrete component has a smaller package than the integrated circuit component, and even if the electronic component is illegally mounted on the back side, it can be easily confirmed by visual recognition. It can be said that this is a component having relatively high performance as security performance against illegal mounting of electronic components.

  That is, the inventor found that among the electronic components mounted on the first control unit MCG, components having high security performance against fraud (discrete components) and components having low security performance against fraud (integrated circuit components) are mixed. If attention is paid to the fact that further integration as a hardware circuit is achieved only with components (discrete components) with high security performance against fraud, the above-mentioned first control unit MCG side that is easily subject to fraud also It has been found that it is possible to miniaturize the hardware circuit while maintaining the security performance against unauthorized mounting of electronic components.

  FIG. 188 is a diagram schematically showing a state in which integration is achieved only in components (discrete components) with high security performance against fraud in the first control unit MCG. Hereinafter, referring to FIG. 188, the hardware circuit can be miniaturized while maintaining the security performance against the illegal mounting of the electronic component on the side of the first control unit MCG which tends to be a target of the illegality. This is explained.

  As shown in FIG. 188, the first control unit MCG according to the present embodiment is configured to include a base plate BB and various electronic components D mounted on the base plate BB. Incidentally, FIG. 188 is only a schematic view for explaining the principle of the characteristic technology according to the present application, and for example, the base plate BB is actually a base substrate of the main control substrate 1310 and a payout control substrate A base substrate 951 and a base substrate of the power supply substrate 931 are provided, and an example in which the characteristic technique according to the present application is applied to such an embodiment will be described later. As a matter of fact, here, for convenience of explanation, first, it will be described on the assumption that they are configured by one base substrate.

Here, the base plate BB is
An insertion mounting area TH which is mounted in a form in which a lead portion provided in an electronic component is inserted into the base plate BB and which is inferior in integrated performance but excellent in fraud suppression performance;
A surface mounting region SM that is mounted in a manner in which the lead portion provided on the electronic component is placed on the surface of the base plate BB and has excellent integration performance due to multi-layered wiring patterns, etc., but is inferior in fraud suppression performance. Both are provided separately.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to mount an electronic component that is not easily targeted for fraud in the surface mounting area SM, but the electronic component for which fraud suppression should be pursued rather than integration is implemented in the insertion mounting area TH side While making it possible to miniaturize the hardware circuit, it is possible to preferably maintain the suppression performance for the mounting of the illegal part.

That is, as described above, in the first control unit MCG according to the present embodiment, as the various electronic components D,
· An integrated circuit component D1 having a low security performance against improper mounting, in which multiple types of single-function devices are integrated in a relatively large package.
The single function element is only enclosed in a relatively small package, and is provided with a discrete component D2 with high security performance against improper mounting.

  In this respect, as the first characteristic technology according to the present invention, in the first control unit MCG according to the present embodiment, the integrated circuit component D1 having low security performance is subjected to the insertion mounting area TH and the surface mounting. In the surface mounting area SM, which is inferior in fraud suppression performance, only the discrete components having high security performance are mounted in the area SM. This makes it possible to reduce the size of the hardware circuit while maintaining the security performance against unauthorized mounting of electronic components on the first control unit MCG side that is likely to be fraudulent.

  Further, in the first control unit MCG according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 188, surface mount type discrete components D2a mounted in the surface mount area SM as the discrete components D2 with high security performance, And an insertion mounting type discrete component D2b mounted in the insertion mounting area TH.

  That is, as described above, with regard to the electronic components, generally, the use of the surface mounting type, rather than the insertion mounting type, can achieve integration. However, when both the insertion mounting area TH and the surface mounting area SM are provided separately as the base plate BB, for example, the position where the integrated circuit component D1 to be electrically connected is provided in circuit design. In view of the balance with the space provided with the wiring pattern related to this, it is possible to reverse the integration by arranging the electronic components not in the surface mounting area SM but in the insertion mounting area TH. Cases can also arise.

  In this regard, in the first control unit MCG according to the present embodiment, not all of the discrete components D2 are used as the surface mount type discrete components D2a, but one of them is set to be the most suitable mode for integration. It is decided to use an insertion mounting type discrete component D2b in a part. As a result, it is expected that miniaturization of the hardware circuit can be more suitably achieved while maintaining the security performance against unauthorized mounting of the electronic component.

  Further, in the first control unit MCG according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 188, even in the discrete component D2 having the high security performance, the capacitor element having a large capacitance value among the capacitor elements (backup power supply). For example, in view of the relatively larger shape than other elements (such as resistor elements and diode elements, capacitor elements with a small capacitance value (such as for filter circuits)), the surface mounting area SM Instead of being used as the surface mount type discrete component D2a mounted on the chip, it is prepared only as the insertion mount type discrete component D2b-C mounted in the insertion mounting area TH. As a result, when miniaturizing the hardware circuit, it is possible to more suitably maintain the security performance against unauthorized mounting of the electronic component.

  However, although the capacitor element having a large capacitance value is larger than other elements (discrete components), there is no case where a very large gap is generated between the package and the base plate as compared with the integrated circuit component D1. . Therefore, the capacitor element may be used as a surface mount type discrete component D2a mounted in the surface mount area SM, and even in this case, the security performance against illegal mounting of electronic components is maintained. Is possible.

  Moreover, the first control unit MCG according to the present embodiment incorporates a characteristic second technique based on a viewpoint different from the characteristic first technique according to the present application described above. Yes.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 188, in the first control unit MCG according to the present embodiment, one hardware circuit intended to exhibit a specific electrical function (for example, a backup power supply function) is provided. , And a discrete circuit (hardware circuit not using the integrated circuit component D1) DHC electrically configured by the discrete components D2. However, this discrete circuit DHC is provided with an electrical structure constituted by a plurality of discrete components D2 which are respectively mounted in an insertion mounting area TH and a surface mounting area SM.

  That is, in this case, although it is one discrete circuit DHC aiming to exhibit a specific electrical function (for example, a backup power supply function), mounting on the insertion mounting area TH is performed on the base plate BB. An electronic component D2b having a shape that can be mounted and an electronic component D2a having a shape that can be mounted on the surface mounting region SM are mixed. Therefore, when a third party views the base plate BB of the first control unit MCG, they have an electrical close role to exert a specific electrical function (for example, a backup power supply function). It is possible to make it difficult to recall the current situation, and it is expected that fraud can be suppressed even if the difficulty in understanding the circuit is increased. Further, by mounting a part of the electronic component on the surface mounting region SM, it is possible to expect a reduction in the size of the hardware circuit.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, it is possible to miniaturize the hardware circuit while suppressing fraud with respect to the electronic component.

  However, as described above, the example shown in FIG. 188 is for explaining the principle of two characteristic techniques according to the present application. Next, an example in which each of the above techniques is applied to the embodiment of the present application. explain.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, first, the base plate BB of the first control unit MCG includes the base substrate of the main control substrate 1310, the base substrate of the payout control substrate 951, and the base substrate of the power supply substrate 931. The three base substrates are configured. Then, both the insertion mounting area TH and the surface mounting area SM are provided on these base substrates.

  However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, only the insertion mounting area TH is formed on the power supply substrate 931 of the three base substrates, and the base substrate of the main control substrate 1310 In addition, in the base substrate of the above-described delivery control substrate 951, both the insertion mounting area TH and the surface mounting area SM are provided separately.

  Then, among the various electronic components D mounted on the base plate BB of the first control unit MCG, the diode MD0 of the above-mentioned "backup power supply circuit for supplying backup power to the main control built-in RAM" (FIG. 129) Is mounted on the surface mounting area SM of the base substrate of the main control substrate 1310 as a surface mounting type discrete component D2a. Similarly, the diode PD0 (see FIG. 129) in the above-mentioned “backup power supply circuit for supplying backup power to the payout control built-in RAM” is mounted on the surface of the base board of the payout control board 951. In the region SM, the surface mount type discrete component D2a is to be mounted.

  According to such a configuration, of the integrated circuit component D1 with low security performance and the discrete component D2 with high security performance, only the discrete component D2 (diode MD0, diode PD0) is a surface mount type discrete component D2a. It comes to be mounted on the surface mounting area SM (main control board 1310, payout control board 951). This makes it possible to reduce the size of the hardware circuit while maintaining security performance against unauthorized mounting of electronic components even on the first control unit MCG side that is likely to be fraudulent. A characteristic first technique according to the present application).

  In addition, in the example applied to this embodiment, the surface mount region SM formed on the base plate BB of the first control unit MCG has a specific type of discrete component (here, both the diode MD0 and the diode PD0 are Schottky). Only a plurality of diode elements will be mounted. That is, in this case, since all the electronic components mounted on the surface mounting region SM that is inferior in fraud suppression performance have the same shape, it is expected that the effort required for fraud confirmation is saved.

  Further, in the above configuration, discrete components (electronic components that bear a part of the power supply function) that the power supply board 931 should originally have are mounted on a board (main control board 1310) side different from the power supply board 931. I have to. That is, even if there is not enough space to form the surface mounting region SM on the power supply substrate 931, the surface mounting region SM is formed on another substrate and mounted as a surface mounting type discrete component D2 there. As a result, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in circuit design of the first control unit MCG as a whole.

  Furthermore, in the above configuration, a single discrete circuit DHC (backup power supply circuit) having a plurality of discrete components D2 (here, a capacitor element and a Schottky diode element) for the purpose of exhibiting a backup power supply function. The plurality of discrete components D2 constituting the discrete circuit DHC are mounted separately in an insertion mounting area TH (capacitor element) and a surface mounting area SM (Schottky diode element). I am going to do that.

  According to such a configuration, in spite of the single discrete circuit DHC (backup power supply circuit) intended to exhibit the backup power supply function, the insertion mounting region TH (power supply board) is formed on the base plate BB. 931) and an electronic component D2a having a shape enabling mounting on the surface mounting area SM (main control board 1310, payout control board 951) are mixed. become. Therefore, when a third party visually recognizes the base plate BB of the first control unit MCG, they have an electrical close role in order to exhibit a specific electrical function (for example, a backup power supply function). It is possible to make it difficult to recall the situation, and it is possible to expect fraud suppression even if the difficulty of understanding the circuit is increased (the second characteristic technique according to the present application).

  In addition, in the example applied to this embodiment, a plurality of discrete components D2 included in one discrete circuit DHC (backup power supply circuit) for the purpose of exhibiting a backup power supply function are inserted and mounted region TH (capacitor element). And the surface mounting region SM (Schottky diode element), and the discrete component D2 is divided into two different boards (main control board 1310, payout control board 951 (Schottky diode element), power supply board) In this case, electronic components D2a and D2b mixed for surface mounting and insertion mounting are mounted on different base boards, respectively. As a result, the difficulty of understanding the circuit has increased. So incorrect suppression can be further expected.

  In the above embodiment, as is clear from FIG. 188, the mounting surface of the surface mounting region SM on the base plate BB of the first control unit MCG is the same as the insertion mounting region TH on the base plate BB of the first control unit MCG. The area is smaller than the mounting surface. Therefore, it becomes difficult for a third party to notice that the surface mounting area SM inferior to the fraud suppression performance is provided, and it becomes possible to expect fraud suppression.

  In the above embodiment, as is clear from FIG. 188, the number of types of electronic components mounted on the surface mounting region SM in the base plate BB of the first control unit MCG is the base plate of the first control unit MCG. It is provided to be smaller than the number of types of electronic components mounted in the insertion mounting area TH in BB. Therefore, the types of electronic components that are subject to a visual check for whether or not fraudulent acts have been performed on the electronic components mounted on the surface mounting region SM that is relatively inferior in security performance are relatively reduced. Thus, the visual check can be facilitated.

  Further, in the above embodiment, as is apparent from FIG. 188, the total number of electronic components mounted in the surface mounting area SM in the base plate BB of the first control unit MCG is the number in the base plate BB of the first control unit MCG. It is provided to be smaller than the total number of electronic components mounted in the insertion mounting area TH. Therefore, the total number of electronic components that are subject to a visual check for fraudulent acts on electronic components mounted on a surface mounting area that is relatively inferior in security performance is relatively reduced. , It will be possible to reduce the load on the visual check.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the surface mounting area SM is provided on the base substrate of the main control substrate 1310 and the base substrate of the dispensing control substrate 951, respectively. May be.

  Further, the surface mounting region SM is formed only on a specific base substrate, and the surface mount type discrete component D2 that should be originally mounted on the other base substrate is also collectively arranged on the specific base substrate. Also good. According to such a configuration, when confirming whether or not unauthorized mounting has been performed, it is only necessary to focus on the surface mounting region SM formed on a specific base substrate. It is expected that the time and effort required can be saved.

  However, in view of the fact that the integrated circuit component D1 is mounted on any of the above three base substrates, at least the insertion mounting region TH must be formed on any of the three base substrates in order to preferably prevent fraud. I must.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the base plate BB of the first control unit MCG includes the base substrate of the main control substrate 1310, the base substrate of the payout control substrate 951, and the base substrate of the power supply substrate 931. Although it is configured by two base substrates, as schematically shown in FIG. 188, they may be collectively configured on one base substrate.

  Further, the “base plate BB of the first control unit MCG” according to the present application only needs to divide the surface mounting area SM and the insertion mounting area TH, and this is provided by a plurality of base substrates. It may be provided by one base substrate.

  For example, the base board of the main control board 1310 includes a first base board in which only the insertion mounting area TH is formed, and a second base board in which only the surface mounting area SM is formed, and the second base board By inserting and mounting the board on the insertion mounting area TH of the first base board, the electronic components inserted and mounted on the first base board are maintained while maintaining security performance against unauthorized mounting of electronic components. It may be assumed that a structure in which the component and the electronic component surface-mounted on the second base substrate are electrically connected to each other is adopted, but in this case, the “base of the first control unit MCG” “Plate BB” is a concept including at least a first base substrate in which only the insertion mounting area TH is formed and a second base substrate in which only the surface mounting area SM is formed. . That is, such an aspect is also one of the aspects such as “in the base plate BB of the first control unit MCG, both the insertion mounting area TH and the surface mounting area SM are provided separately.” It is included as an aspect.

  That is, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the discrete component is an electronic component sealed in a relatively small package as a component (surface mounted component) mounted in the surface mounting area SM inferior to the fraud suppression performance. By using only parts, it is possible to miniaturize the hardware circuit while eliminating the space for mounting the illegal parts (reducing the space on the back side).

  However, even with such discrete components (surface mount components) with excellent security performance, there are places on the back side that are difficult to confirm by visual inspection when mounted on the surface mount region SM, although it is a small space. It is still left. Therefore, the hall side that operates and manages the pachinko machine 1 understands that “there is no space left on the back side of the discrete parts (surface mounted parts) to mount unauthorized parts”. However, in the situation where it is difficult to check by anxiety, such as “an extremely small illegal part may be created and this may be illegally installed”, it is difficult to confirm by visual inspection. There is a concern that the operation and management of the pachinko machine 1 become complicated, such as being forced to confirm.

  Therefore, it is more desirable to provide each base substrate of the main control substrate 1310 and the payout control substrate 951 in the following manner instead of the above-described manner.

[Modified Example of Each Base Substrate of Main Control Substrate 1310 and Dispensing Control Substrate 951]
FIG. 189 is a view showing a partial region of the base substrate MB of the main control substrate 1310 according to the modification. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 189, a modification of the base substrate MB of the main control substrate 1310 will be described. Although the description of the modification of the base substrate of the payout control board 951 is omitted, it can be modified with the same contents as the base board MB of the main control board 1310 described below.

  As shown in FIG. 189, the base substrate MB of the main control board 1310 according to this modification is configured to include at least an insertion mounting board THB that is inferior in integration performance but excellent in fraud suppression performance.

  Then, also in the insertion mounting substrate THB according to the modification, as in the insertion mounting substrate TH of the above-described embodiment, a plurality of types of electronic components (insertion mounting components) are mounted in a form of being inserted. Also, similarly, among the electronic components (insertion mounting components), both the integrated circuit component D1 with low security performance and the discrete component D2b with high security performance are included.

  However, as apparent from FIG. 189, in the base board MB of the main control board 1310 according to this modification, the insertion mounting board THB and the insertion mounting lead portion are inserted into the insertion mounting board THB. The electronic components to be mounted in this way are only provided. That is, although the base substrate MB of the main control substrate 1310 according to this modification has both the surface mounting area and the surface mounting components mounted in the area, any of them may be It is decided to adopt a special mounting structure that does not seem to be provided.

  More specifically, the base board MB of the main control board 1310 according to this modification is not limited to the integrated circuit part D1 and the discrete part D2b as the above-described mounting parts, but also the special mounting part D3 (in the figure, the special mounting part). D3a, special mounting component D3b). Although this special mounting component D3 contains an electronic component (surface mounting component) mounted in a surface mounting region inferior in fraud suppression performance, it is hidden from the insertion mounting substrate THB. It is inserted and mounted through a special insertion mounting lead TL described later.

  According to such a special mounting component D3, despite the fact that the surface mounting area described later and the electronic component (surface mounting component) mounted on the surface mounting area are respectively provided therein, fraud suppression It is expected to be removed from the target parts for fraudulent purposes by malicious persons because it has an appearance shape that looks like it is one insertion mounting part mounted on the high performance insertion mounting board THB. Can be done. In the base board MB of the main control board 1310 according to this modification, the surface mounting parts are mounted on the part of the insertion mounting board THB where the special mounting parts D3 are inserted and mounted. It will function as an area.

  In addition, in the base board MB of the main control board 1310 according to this modification, such special mounting components D3 are not arranged in one place (adjacent) but are arranged at a plurality of places on the base board MB. In addition, at least one of the special mounting components D3 (in the drawing, the special mounting component D3a) is arranged so as to be surrounded by a relatively large region (insertion mounting region) where the insertion mounting components D1 and D2b are inserted and mounted. We are going to establish.

  That is, in this case, the surface mount area inferior to the fraud suppression performance and the electronic components (surface mount parts) mounted on the surface mount area are subdivided and become inconspicuous, and the fraud suppression performance is combined with the above-described external shape. The surface mounting area exists when a malicious person views the base board MB of the main control board 1310 because it is well mixed in the insertion mounting area provided as a relatively large area. In particular, it is possible to make the hardware circuit more difficult to notice, and thus, it is expected to reduce the size of the hardware circuit while maintaining the suppression performance against mounting of unauthorized parts more appropriately.

  Although described later, a diode MD0 (see FIG. 129) as the surface mount type discrete component D2a shown in FIG. 188 is enclosed in the special mounted component D3a according to this modification. As described above, such a diode MD0 is used in one discrete circuit (backup power supply circuit) for the purpose of exhibiting a backup power supply function. Nevertheless, also in this modification, the insertion mounting area (capacitor element (capacitor BC0)) and the surface mounting area (Schottky diode element) for a plurality of discrete components constituting one discrete circuit (backup power supply circuit) (Diode MD0)) and mounted separately. Moreover, for the capacitor element (capacitor BC0) inserted and mounted in the insertion mounting area, a position (such as the power supply substrate 931) not adjacent to the special mounting component D3a incorporating the Schottky diode element (diode MD0) in the insertion mounting area It is made to be implemented with.

  As described above, it is made difficult to recall that the electronic component incorporated in the special mounting component D3a exerts a specific electrical function (backup power supply function), thereby enhancing the difficulty of circuit understanding. Thus, even if it is noticed that there is a surface mounting area inferior to the fraud suppression performance, fraud suppression can be expected.

  Next, an example of the structure of the special mounting component D3a according to this modification will be described. In FIG. 189, for convenience of explanation, the portion where the special mounting component D3a is mounted is enlarged, and the outer package OP of the special mounting component D3a is partially omitted so that the internal structure is exposed. The figure (portion surrounded by a dotted line) is included.

  As is shown together with the explanatory view, the special mounting component D3a according to this modification is a special surface mounting substrate SMB as a surface mounting substrate on which a surface mounting type electronic component (surface mounting component) is mounted, Surface mount type discrete components D2a mounted on the special surface mount substrate SMB, and special insert mounting lead portions as insertion mount lead portions inserted into through holes (specific insertion holes) of the insertion mount substrate THB It comprises TL and an outer package OP which molds each of these portions with a mold resin.

  Here, the special surface mounting substrate SMB electrically connects the surface mounting lead portion SL provided on the electronic component (surface mounting type discrete component D2a) mounted on the substrate and the special insertion mounting lead portion TL. The wiring patterns HP are formed so as to be connected to each other, and the mounting surface thereof is provided so as to be substantially orthogonal to the mounting surface of the insertion mounting board THB.

  The surface area of the mounting surface of the special surface mounting substrate SMB is limited to a size that allows the surface mounting type discrete component D2a to be mounted. For example, it is necessary when mounting an integrated circuit component constituting the main control MPU 1310a. The mounting surface has an area smaller than the assumed area. In other words, in the insertion mounting board THB, even when all the electronic components required for operating the pachinko machine 1 are mounted, there is a surplus space for further mounting other electronic components. In the surface mount substrate SMB, in order to reduce the size, there is not enough space to mount another electronic component when the electronic component to be mounted (surface mount type discrete component D2a) is mounted. Not left.

  According to such a configuration, since it becomes difficult to perform any fraud on the special surface mounting board SMB, further downsizing of the hardware circuit can be achieved while suppressing the mounting of the fraudulent parts. Expected.

  The surface mount type discrete component D2a itself has a package structure (inner package) molded by a molding resin. Then, inside thereof, a Schottky diode element (diode MD0) included in one discrete circuit (backup power supply circuit) is electrically connected to the surface mounting lead portion SL by a bonding wire. That is, the surface mount type discrete component D2a is provided with the surface mount lead portion SL formed to be drawn to the outside of the inner package (mold resin), and the surface mount lead portion SL is By electrically connecting to the special insertion mounting lead portion TL via the wiring pattern HP formed on the special surface mounting substrate SMB, and other electronic components mounted on the insertion mounting substrate THB The Schottky diode element (the diode MD0) is electrically connected to perform processing in cooperation with each other.

  Furthermore, the surface mount type discrete component D2a is provided in a flat outer shape (package shape), and is soldered in a form in which the flat surface faces the special surface mount substrate SMB. By surface mounting. However, as described above, the mounting surface of the special surface mounting board SMB on which the discrete component D2a of the surface mounting type is mounted has a relation substantially orthogonal to the mounting surface of the insertion mounting board THB. Therefore, the discrete component D2a of the surface mounting type provided in the special mounting component D3 is not a flat surface but a surface (thin surface) on the thin side facing the insertion mounting substrate THB. It will be implemented to be a form.

  In such a configuration, a thin surface having a relatively small area is opposed to the insertion mounting board THB, not a flat surface having a relatively large area. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 189, in insertion mounting substrate THB, only a small area (for two through holes) such that only one discrete component (insert mounting type) can be mounted is left. Even under such a situation, the special mounting component D3 can be disposed for the small area (for two through holes).

  Note that the size of the surface mount type discrete component D2a itself (the length in the horizontal direction in the figure) according to this modification is when the special mount component D3a is mounted on the insertion mounting board THB. The pitch is smaller than the pitch between the through holes into which the special insertion mounting lead portions TL are inserted (specific insertion hole installation interval).

  The special insertion mounting lead portion TL has a bifurcated structure in which one end side sandwiches the special surface mounting substrate SMB from both sides thereof, and the wiring pattern HP is formed in the special surface mounting substrate SMB. By being soldered at the same place, it is fixed to the special surface mounting substrate SMB, and is electrically connected to the surface mounting lead SL through the wiring pattern HP. . On the other hand, the other end side is soldered in a state of being inserted into the through hole of the insertion mounting substrate THB so that it is fixed to the insertion mounting substrate THB and the insertion mounting substrate THB side They are electrically connected to various electronic components through the wiring pattern of

  Further, the outer package OP has a package structure (inner package) in which the surface mount type discrete component D2a itself is molded by a mold resin, but is different from the mold resin. Thus, the surface mount type discrete component D2a is further molded (double-molded) together with the special surface mount substrate SMB to be mounted.

  With such a configuration, it is extremely difficult to perform any fraud on a surface-mount substrate that is inferior in fraud suppression performance.

  In particular, in the special mounting component D3a according to this modification, the appearance shape produced by the outer package OP of the double mold is different from the appearance shape of the specific type of surface mounting component itself internally surface-mounted. . That is, in this case, since the discrete component D2a can be mounted in a state of concealing the external appearance of itself, it is possible that the surface mounting component of the specific type embedded in the special mounting component D3a is not mounted. It becomes more difficult to understand the circuit, and can be expected to suppress fraud.

  Moreover, the outer package OP has only the special insertion mounting lead portion TL out of the special insertion mounting lead portion TL and the surface mounting lead portion SL provided in the outer package OP (mold resin). The surface mount type discrete component D2a is integrally molded together with the special surface mount substrate SMB so as to be drawn out to the outside of the lead, and the special mount component D3a is inserted into the lead portion for insertion mounting (special insertion mounting). It is designed to be mounted on the insertion mounting board THB as one electronic component having a lead portion TL).

  According to such a configuration, the special mounting component D3a can be provided despite the fact that the surface mounting substrate and the electronic component (surface mounting component) mounted on the substrate, which are inferior in fraud suppression performance, are provided therein. It is expected to be excluded from the target of fraudulent's fraudulent purpose because it can be functioned as if it is one insertion packaging part implemented in an insertion packaging area excellent in fraud suppression performance. It can be done. In addition, since it is possible to treat it equally as a single insertion mounting type discrete component also in the physical distribution and mounting, it can be said that such ease of handling is excellent.

  Still further, the outer package OP is mounted on the surface mount type discrete component D2a having a width smaller than the pitch between the through holes by a mold resin different from the mold resin of the discrete component D2a itself. By integrally molding together with the target special surface mounting substrate SMB, the external shape as one electronic component having a size that does not fit within the pitch between through holes is obtained.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 188, when the surface mount type discrete component is kept in the external shape smaller than the pitch between through holes in the insertion mounting area (the installation distance of the insertion holes), the main control board It becomes easy for a third party to notice that a surface mounting region inferior in fraud suppression performance is provided in the base board MB of 1310, which may promote fraud.

  In this respect, in the above configuration, the surface mount type discrete component D2a, which has a width smaller than the pitch between through holes, is an electronic component having a size that does not fall within the pitch between through holes. It is made to be implemented after giving an appearance shape. That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 189, there is no electronic component having an external shape having a lateral width smaller than the pitch between the through holes on the base substrate MB of the main control board 1310. Since it can appear as if only a type of electronic component (insertion mounting component) is mounted, it is possible to improve the suppression performance for mounting of the illegal component.

  Furthermore, the external shape produced by such an outer package OP is different from the external shape of the electronic components mounted on the surface, and all the insertion mounted components mounted on the insertion mounting board THB (special It is considered as a unique appearance shape different from any of the electronic components except the mounting component D3. That is, in the specially mounted component D3a according to this modification, excessive security performance such as protection by a double mold resin with respect to a mere discrete component D2a having only a limited function as compared with the arithmetic processing device etc. Once applied, it has a unique and relatively large appearance as a form of appearance that attracts the malicious person's attention (trap).

  According to such a configuration, the excess security performance applied on the base substrate MB of the main control substrate 1310 can be shown to a third party, thereby reducing the will to commit fraud. Can be expected.

  Furthermore, an identification number indicating the type of the electronic component as the special mounting component D3a is attached to the outer package OP. In this modification, the content of the identification number (◯ 3213) is assigned to the inner package ( It is made to differ from the content (SD) of the identification number given to the surface mount type discrete component D2a) mounted on the special surface mount substrate SMB.

  According to such a configuration, since the content (SD) of the identification number attached to the specific type of surface mounted component does not appear, the external package OP is externally surface-mounted with the appearance shape generated by the external package OP. This difference from the external shape of the specific type of surface mounted component (in combination with the structure of the double mold) makes it possible to make it appear that the specific type of surface mounted component is not mounted. In addition, it can appear as if only the insertion mounting type electronic component (insert mounting component) is mounted, and the suppression performance for mounting of the illegal component can be improved.

  Further, in the special mounting component D3a according to this modification, the length in the thickness direction of the special surface mounting board SMB is made smaller than the length in the thickness direction of the surface mounting type discrete component D2a. Then, on this, the mounting surface on which the electronic component and the wiring pattern are provided is formed only on one side of the flat surface of the special surface mounting substrate SMB, and the mold resin is directly applied on the back surface side It has become.

  That is, by adopting such a configuration, an insertion mounting type in which the length in the thickness direction of the special mounting component D3a is mounted in the insertion mounting area TH as well as forming a unique and asymmetric appearance shape This is smaller than the length in the thickness direction of the discrete component D2b. Thus, in combination with the above-described structure in which the mounting surfaces are orthogonal to each other, there is no need to secure a special mounting space or the like when mounting the special mounting component D3a to the insertion mounting substrate THB. The special mounting component D3a can be inserted while the insertion mounting component is mounted.

  As described above, the special mounting component D3a according to this modified example appears as one insertion mounting type discrete component in appearance. And D2a is included in the inside. That is, in the special mounting component D3a, the special insertion mounting lead portion TL is fixed to the special surface mounting substrate SMB inside and electrically connected to the surface mounting lead portion SL via the wiring pattern HP. In contrast, the insertion mounting component has a structure in which the insertion mounting lead portion is electrically connected to a specific electronic component by a bonding wire.

  Further, in the base substrate MB of the main control board 1310 according to this modification, as shown in FIG. 189, a Schottky diode element (diode MD0) is internally provided as a special mounting component D3 having such an internal structure. In addition to the special mounting component D3a to be surface mounted, a special mounting component D3b to internally surface mount a capacitor element having a small capacitance value is provided.

  That is, the special mounting component D3b according to this modification is a filter for a specific data line between the discrete component D2b provided as a resistance element among the insertion mounting type discrete components D2b mounted in the insertion mounting region TH. It forms a circuit. Even in such a filter circuit configuration, it is recalled that the electronic components included in one discrete circuit have an electrical close role in order to exert a specific electrical function (filter function). It is possible to make it difficult to suppress the fraud. By increasing the difficulty of understanding the circuit, fraud can be suppressed.

  As for the special mounting component D3b, both the resistance element and the capacitor element constituting the filter circuit may be surface-mounted on the special surface mounting substrate SMB, respectively. However, in this case, the electronic components having the highest height among the electronic components (insertion mounting components) inserted and mounted on the insertion mounting board THB (for example, the electronic components are arranged side by side in a line) For example, in order to reduce the size of the base board MB of the main control board 1310, it is desirable to keep the appearance shape lower than that of the capacitor element omitted in the drawing.

  In addition, the special mounting component D3 may be one in which a plurality of types of electronic components are built in this way, or a plurality of one type of electronic components may be built in. In any case, in the case where a plurality of electronic components are incorporated, the plurality of electronic components are surface-mounted on one special surface mounting substrate SMB side by side and in a line, and the electronic components are mounted. It is desirable that the parts and the special surface mounting substrate SMB be collectively molded by a molding resin and packaged.

  However, when a plurality of electronic components are built in the special mounting component D3, the external shape naturally becomes large, and “it is an electronic component of a type that can be inserted and mounted with this size and shape. There is a concern that it may not be possible to expect a dazzling effect using a preconception, such as a discrete component of the insertion mounting type. Therefore, in order to suitably obtain such a dazzling effect using preconceptions, a single surface mount type discrete component is used alone, and its external shape is made different by the structure of the double mold described above, and its thinness is reduced. It is desirable to mount the surface so that the surface faces the insertion mounting substrate TH.

  In addition to forming the above-mentioned double mold outer package OP with a non-transparent material such as mold resin, the outer package is an identification number different from the identification number given to the surface mount type discrete component itself. It can be said that it is also important to increase the difficulty of circuit understanding by adding OP.

  The special mounting component D3 according to this modification is a structure having “one surface mounting type discrete component” smaller than “one insertion mounting type discrete component” in the inside thereof. The size when double-molded is about the same size as “one insert mounting type discrete component”, and it can be expected that the above-described excellent operational effects can be expected. . Therefore, in a configuration in which “one insert mounting type discrete component” is included and double-molded, the size is larger than “one insertion mounting type discrete component”. Since it is clear, it can not be expected that the above-mentioned excellent effects can be achieved.

  Next, technical ideas that can be grasped from the above-described embodiment and modifications will be described below.

[Technical thought 1-1]
It has a base plate on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted, and includes a specific control unit that can execute control power generation processing and game progression processing by using these electronic components,
It is a gaming machine capable of providing a bonus to a player when a special game result is obtained as a result of execution of the game progression process.
The base plate of the specific control unit is
An insertion mounting area where the lead portion provided on the electronic component is mounted in a manner to be inserted into the base plate,
And a surface mounting area mounted on the surface of the base plate in such a manner that leads provided on the electronic components are placed on the surface of the base plate.
Among the plurality of electronic components, at least one of the surface mount components mounted on the surface mount region is formed by molding the surface mount component itself with a mold resin. A game machine characterized in that the surface mounting area to be mounted is also molded with another mold resin.

[Technology 1-2]
A first control unit having a base plate on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted, and by using the electronic components, generation processing of a control power source and progress processing of a game can be respectively executed;
And a second control unit having a base plate on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted, and by using the electronic components, progression processing of an effect according to a result of the progression processing of the game can be executed;
It is a gaming machine capable of providing a bonus to a player when a special game result is obtained as a result of the game progress processing,
The base plate of the second control unit includes an insertion mounting area in which a lead portion provided on the electronic component is mounted in a manner inserted into the base plate, and a lead portion provided on the electronic component Of the surface mounting area mounted on the surface of the surface, only the surface mounting area is provided,
The base plate of the first control unit is provided with both the insertion mounting area and the surface mounting area,
Of the plurality of electronic components, the first side surface mounting component mounted on the surface mounting area provided on the base plate of the first control unit, and the surface mounting area provided on the base plate of the second control unit Although all of the second side surface mounting components to be mounted are themselves molded by a molding resin, it is possible to use one of the first side surface mounting components and the second side surface mounting components. The gaming machine according to the present invention, wherein the first side surface mounting component is further molded on the surface mounting region together with a molding resin different from the molding resin of the first side surface mounting component itself.

  According to such technical ideas 1-1 and 1-2, although the surface mounting component mounted in the surface mounting area which is inferior in the fraud suppression performance is itself molded by the molding resin, Since the mold resin separately from the mold resin is molded integrally with the surface mounting area to be mounted, the surface mounting area inferior in fraud suppression performance may be subjected to some injustice. It will be extremely difficult.

[Technology 2]
It has a base plate on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted, and includes a specific control unit that can execute control power generation processing and game progression processing by using these electronic components,
It is a gaming machine capable of providing a bonus to a player when a special game result is obtained as a result of execution of the game progression process.
The base plate of the specific control unit is
An insertion mounting board on which an insertion mounting lead portion provided on an insertion mounting component of the electronic components is inserted and mounted;
And a surface mounting board mounted on the surface in a form in which the surface mounting lead portion provided on the surface mounting part of the electronic components is placed on the surface,
In the surface mounting board,
At least a special surface mounting board having a special insertion mounting lead portion formed so as to extend outward from the surface mounting board and be inserted into the insertion mounting board is included,
On the special surface mount board,
A wiring portion formed to electrically connect the surface mounting lead portion of the surface mounting component mounted on the special surface mounting board and the special insertion mounting lead portion;
Surface mount components mounted on the special surface mount board are:
Of the surface mounting lead portion and the special insertion mounting lead portion, only the special insertion mounting lead portion is integrally molded with the special surface mounting plate so as to be drawn out of the mold resin, A gaming machine that is mounted on the insertion mounting board as one electronic component having a special insertion mounting lead portion.

  In this technical idea 2, the surface mounting component mounted in the surface mounting area inferior to the fraud suppression performance is caused to function as if it is one insertion mounting component mounted in the insertion mounting area superior in the fraud suppression performance. It will be possible to be excluded from the target of the fraudulent purpose of the malicious party.

[Technical thought 3]
It has a base plate on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted, and includes a specific control unit that can execute control power generation processing and game progression processing by using these electronic components,
It is a gaming machine capable of providing a bonus to a player when a special game result is obtained as a result of execution of the game progression process.
The base plate of the specific control unit is
An insertion mounting board on which an insertion mounting lead portion provided on an insertion mounting component of the electronic components is inserted and mounted;
And a surface mounting board mounted on the surface in a form in which the surface mounting lead portion provided on the surface mounting part of the electronic components is placed on the surface,
For the surface mounted components,
It includes at least discrete surface mount components in which a single function element is molded with a mold resin,
The discrete surface mount components are
The discrete surface mount component has a relatively large external shape by being integrally molded with a surface mount plate to be mounted by a mold resin different from the mold resin of the discrete surface mount component itself, and the base of the specific control unit A gaming machine having an appearance shape different from any of all electronic components mounted on a board.

  In such technical idea 3, an excessive security performance such as protection with a double mold resin is applied to a mere discrete surface mount component that can only have a limited function as compared with an arithmetic processing unit or the like. It has a unique and relatively large appearance as an appearance that attracts the attention of a malicious person (trap). That is, in this case, since it becomes possible to show the third party the excessive security performance performed in the specific control unit, it is possible to expect a decrease in the willingness to perform fraudulent acts.

[Technical thought 4]
It has a base plate on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted, and includes a specific control unit that can execute control power generation processing and game progression processing by using these electronic components,
It is a gaming machine capable of providing a bonus to a player when a special game result is obtained as a result of execution of the game progression process.
The base plate of the specific control unit is
An insertion mounting area where the lead portion provided on the electronic component is mounted in a manner to be inserted into the base plate,
And a surface mounting area mounted on the surface of the base plate in such a manner that leads provided on the electronic components are placed on the surface of the base plate.
In the base plate of the specific control unit, the surface mounting areas are dispersedly provided at a plurality of places so that the respective areas become relatively small areas, whereas the insertion mounting areas are dispersed. A gaming machine, wherein the gaming machine is provided as a relatively large area surrounding at least one of the provided surface mounting areas.

  According to the technical idea 4 described above, the surface mounting area inferior to the fraud suppression performance is not concentrated at one place, but is divided into portions by dispersing it and made inconspicuous, and is relatively excellent in the fraud suppression performance and relatively large. It is arranged in such a way as to be embedded in an insertion mounting area provided as an area. Therefore, when a malicious person looks at the base plate of the specific control unit, it becomes difficult to notice that the surface mounting area exists, while maintaining the suppression performance against mounting of unauthorized parts, It is expected to reduce the size of the hardware circuit.

[Technical thought 5]
It has a base board on which a plurality of electronic circuits are formed, and by using those electronic circuits, it is provided with a specific control unit which can respectively execute generation processing of control power source and progress processing of the game.
It is a gaming machine capable of providing a bonus to a player when a special game result is obtained as a result of execution of the game progression process.
In the plurality of electronic circuits,
A backup power supply circuit for supplying a backup power to a predetermined storage unit when the control power supply is shut off is included as a discrete circuit including at least a capacitor and a diode, which are electronic components of single function elements. ,
The base plate of the specific control unit is
An insertion mounting area where the lead portion provided on the electronic component is mounted in a manner to be inserted into the base plate,
And a surface mounting area to be mounted in such a manner that leads provided on electronic components are placed on the surface of the base plate.
The insertion mounting area is
The electronic component mounted in the surface mounting area is provided as a relatively large area surrounding the surface mounting area so as to be adjacent to some of the electronic components mounted in the insertion mounting area,
The backup power circuit is
Although provided as a discrete circuit having a backup power supply function of supplying a backup power supply to a predetermined storage unit when the control power supply is shut off, the capacitor and the diode included in the discrete circuit One of the electronic components is mounted on the surface mounting area surrounded by the insertion mounting area, and the other electronic component is mounted on the surface mounting area of the insertion mounting area. A game machine characterized in that it is mounted at a position not adjacent to a part.

  According to the technical idea 5 as described above, although it is a discrete circuit intended to exhibit a specific electrical function (backup power supply function), it can be mounted on an insertion mounting area on the base plate. Electronic components having a shape to be standardized and electronic components having a shape to be capable of being mounted on the surface mounting region are mixed. Therefore, it is recalled that when a third party visually recognizes the base plate of a specific control unit, they have a close electrical role to perform a specific electrical function (backup power supply function). It becomes possible to make it difficult, and by increasing the difficulty of understanding the circuit, fraud can be suppressed.

  Moreover, a specific electrical function (backup power supply) is disposed after arranging the surface mounting area inferior to the fraud suppression performance into the insertion mounting area provided as a relatively large area excellent in the fraud suppression performance. The capacitor and the diode included in one discrete circuit intended to exert the supply function) are arranged so as not to be adjacent to each other. Therefore, it is possible to make it hard to notice the presence of the surface mounting area which is inferior to the fraud suppression performance, and the electronic component mounted on the surface mounting area cooperates with other electronic components even when the presence is noticed. It is then possible to make it difficult to recall what kind of electrical function is implemented to exhibit, and by further increasing the difficulty of understanding such circuits, it is preferable to suppress fraud. It can be expected.

[Technology 6]
It has a base plate on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted, and includes a specific control unit that can execute control power generation processing and game progression processing by using these electronic components,
It is a gaming machine capable of providing a bonus to a player when a special game result is obtained as a result of execution of the game progression process.
The base plate of the specific control unit is
An insertion mounting board on which an insertion mounting lead portion provided on an electronic component is mounted in a form of being inserted;
A surface mounting board mounted on the surface in a form in which the surface mounting lead portion provided on the electronic component is placed on the surface;
In the surface mounting board,
At least a special surface mounting board having a special insertion mounting lead portion formed so as to extend outward from the surface mounting board and be inserted into the insertion mounting board is included,
The special surface mount board is
While having a wiring portion formed to electrically connect the surface mounting lead portion of the electronic component mounted on the special surface mounting board and the lead portion for special insertion mounting to the insertion mounting board The special insertion mounting lead portions are inserted into the insertion mounting plate and disposed such that the mounting surfaces are substantially orthogonal to each other.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  In general, the components mounted on the surface mounting board often have a flat shape. In this regard, in the technical idea 6 described above, the special surface mounting board is arranged so that the mounting surfaces of the insertion mounting board are substantially orthogonal to each other. That is, in this case, an electronic component is mounted as an insertion mounting board because a thin surface having a relatively small area is opposed to the insertion mounting board instead of a flat surface having a relatively large area. The special surface mounting board can be arranged even in a situation where only a few possible areas (surface areas) are left.

[Technical thought 7]
It has a base plate on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted, and includes a specific control unit that can execute control power generation processing and game progression processing by using these electronic components,
It is a gaming machine capable of providing a bonus to a player when a special game result is obtained as a result of execution of the game progression process.
The base plate of the specific control unit is
An insertion mounting board on which an insertion mounting lead portion provided on an electronic component is mounted in a form of being inserted;
And a surface mounting board mounted on the surface of the base board in the form of being mounted on the surface of the base board.
Among the plurality of electronic components, the surface mount component mounted on the surface mount plate includes a specific surface mount component having a size that fits within an installation interval of a specific insertion hole provided in the insertion mount plate. Are
The specific surface mount components are:
Although the size is within the installation interval of the specific insertion hole, the specific surface mounting component itself is integrally formed with the surface mounting board to be mounted by the molding resin different from the molding resin of itself. A gaming machine having an appearance shape as one electronic component having a size that does not fit within an installation interval of the specific insertion hole by being molded.

  That is, when a specific surface mounting component is kept in an external shape smaller than the installation distance of the insertion holes in the insertion mounting board, the specific control unit is provided with a surface mounting area which is inferior in fraud suppression performance. It can be easily noticed by a third party, which may in turn encourage fraud.

  In this regard, in the above technical idea 7, a specific surface mount component is integrally molded with a surface mount plate to be mounted by a mold resin different from the mold resin of the specific surface mount component itself. Since the appearance shape as one electronic component having a size that does not fit within the installation interval of the specific insertion hole appears, a surface mounting region inferior in fraud suppression performance is provided in the specific control unit. This makes it difficult for third parties to notice this.

[13. Various commands related to sending and receiving of main control board]
Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951 and various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 142 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board, and FIG. 143 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board. Fig. 143 is a table showing the continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board in Fig. 143, and Fig. 145 is a table showing one example of various commands from the payout control board received by the main control board. First, the prize ball command which is a command related to the payout transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board will be described, and subsequently, various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board will be described, and the main control board receives The various commands from the payout control board will be described.

13-1. Various commands sent from the main control board to the payout control board]
The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is detected from various winning switches such as the general winning opening sensors 4020 and 4020, the first starting opening sensor 4002, the second starting opening sensor 4004, and the count sensor 4005 shown in FIG. When a signal is input, based on these detection signals, a prize ball command for delivering a gaming ball of a predetermined number of balls as a prize ball is transmitted to the payout control board. This prize ball command is a command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits). In this embodiment, the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322, which are storage trays, are driven by driving the dispensing motor 834 of the pachinko machine 1 (dispensing device 830) by communicating with the pachinko machine 1 and the CR unit 6 (pachinko machine 1). When an apparatus for paying out game balls as a rental ball is electrically connected (such a pachinko machine is referred to as "CR machine"), as shown in FIG. 142 (a), the main control board Commands 10H to 1EH ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) are prepared for the prize ball command to be transmitted to the payout control board 951 from 1310, and one prize ball is designated in the command 10H, and the command 11H Then, two prize balls are designated,..., And fifteen prize balls are designated in command 1 EH. The payout control board 951 controls the payout motor 834 to control the payout of the gaming balls by the designated number of winning balls.

  Also, a pachinko machine 1 and a ball lending machine (a device that directly pays out game balls as lending balls to the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322) are installed adjacent to the game hall (hall). When the ball lending machine is electrically connected to 1 (such a pachinko machine is referred to as a “general machine”), as shown in FIG. 142 (b), the payout control board 951 from the main control board 1310. Command 20H to command 2EH are prepared as the prize ball commands to be transmitted to the command. One prize ball is designated by the command 20H, two prize balls are designated by the command 21H,... 15 spheres are designated. The payout control board 951 controls the payout of game balls by driving the payout motor 834 for the designated number of prize balls.

  As shown in FIG. 142 (c), a command 30H is prepared as a command common to the CR machine and the general machine, and a self check is designated in this command 30H. The transmitting side transmits the command 30H and checks whether or not the ACK signal is input, when the ACK signal to be output as acknowledgment of reception of the command is not input from the receiving side for a predetermined period after the command transmission. Check the connection status. In the case of the CR machine in the present embodiment, the payout control board 951 confirms the connection state with the CR unit 6.

[13-2. Various commands sent from the main control board to the peripheral control board]
Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 will be described. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 1510 based on the progress of the game. These various commands are commands having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits), and as shown in FIGS. 143 and 144, status indicating the type of command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), And a mode indicating a variation of the effect having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits).

  As shown in FIG. 143 and FIG. 144, various commands are related to special figure 1 synchronized production, special figure 2 synchronized production related, jackpot related, power-on, general drawing synchronized production related, ordinary electric role production related, notification display, status Classified into display and other.

[13-2-1. Special Figure 1 Entrainment Production]
Special figure 1 tuning effect related is based on the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 4002 shown in FIG. 123, and in that section, as shown in FIG. 143, the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. The first special symbol display 1403 is composed of commands named special figure 1 synchronized effect start, special symbol 1 designation, special figure 1 synchronized effect end, and variable state designation. These various commands are assigned "A * H" as the status and "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number) , And is predetermined by the specification contents of the pachinko machine 1).

  The special figure 1 synchronized production start command instructs the start of the special figure synchronized production with the production pattern designated in the mode, and the special symbol 1 designated command designates the off, specific big hit, and non-specific big hit. The special figure 1 tuning effect end command is for instructing the special figure 1 tuning effect end, and the fluctuation state specifying command is for specifying the probability and the time saving state. Note that the probability and short-time state include a low-probability short-time state that indicates a low-probability state and a short-time state, a high-probability time-short state that indicates a high-probability state and a short-time state, and low It is composed of a low probability non-short state indicating that it is a probability state but not a short state (a low probability non-short state is set as a normal gaming state). Here, the high probability state is a state in which the probability of winning a big hit is set higher than the low probability state (normal gaming state), and the time saving state is, for example, a normal by the normal symbol display 1402 shown in FIG. The time for fluctuating display of symbols is shortened compared to the non-short time state (normal gaming state), and stopped and displayed with the light emission pattern corresponding to the normal lottery result, so that the ordinary lottery result by the ordinary lottery in a predetermined time will be described. The number of stop display times is increased compared to the non-short time state, and the period for opening and closing the pair of movable pieces shown in FIG. 8 is further extended compared to the non-short time state (normal gaming state). State that it is possible to obtain the lottery opportunity of the special symbol without reducing balls by raising the acceptance rate (ball entry rate) of the game ball to the 2nd starting opening 2004 which is shown (in other words, non-short time state In addition, the decision to open / close the pair of movable pieces is increased, and in the case of opening / closing the pair of movable pieces, the period of the opening / closing operation of the pair of movable pieces is lengthened so that the normal electric prize is awarded. It is a state which raises the acceptance rate (ball entering rate) of the game ball to the mouth 2011). It should be noted that even when the time saving state is ended and the normal gaming state (non-time saving state) is controlled when the normal electric winning award 2011 is in the open state, the normal electric winning award 2011 is predetermined. When the number of game balls is not accepted, the open state can be maintained even after being controlled to the normal game state (non-short state). However, when the predetermined closing condition (a predetermined number of game balls have been accepted or a predetermined opening time has elapsed) is satisfied in the normal gaming state (non-time-short state), the maintained opening is maintained. The state ends and is closed.

  However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, even when it is controlled to the short-time state (the first short-time state, the second short-time state), the normal electric winning award 2011 or the first An expected value acquisition probability value of winning balls expected to be paid out based on the game ball being accepted in the winning opening such as the non-electric starting winning opening 2002b, the second starting opening (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004, and the expected value It is set such that the consumption amount of holding balls is larger when compared with the consumption amount of holding balls required to obtain the expected value of winning ball acquisition. Therefore, when controlled to the short-time state (the first short-time state, the second short-time state), for example, the big hit determination that is put on hold (the second special symbol side big hit determination in the second short-time state) In the situation where the winning jackpot is included and the number of holds for jackpot determination (the number of holds on the second special symbol side in the second short-time state) has reached the upper limit, It can be said that it is desirable for the player not to make a new launch. In particular, when a big win is won in the first short time state, it may be possible to make a big hit determination on the second special symbol side by shifting to the second short time state. It can be said for the player that it is desirable for the player not to make a new launch of the gaming ball even if the number of reservations for) has not reached the upper limit. Therefore, when an effect in which it is clearly shown that the jackpot has been won during the symbol change of the special symbol appears, the launch of the game ball is interrupted because there is a concern that the new launch of the game ball is undesirable for the player. It is beneficial for the player to do so.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special symbol 1 tuning effect start command is transmitted at the start of the special symbol 1 variation, and the special symbol 1 designation command is transmitted immediately after the start of the special symbol 1 tuning effect. The effect end command is transmitted when the special symbol 1 fluctuation time elapses (when the special symbol 1 is determined), and the fluctuation state state designation command is transmitted immediately after the special symbol falling information designation. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control timer interrupt process described later.

[13-2-2. Special figure 2 synchronized production]
Special figure 2 tuning effect related is based on the detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 4004 shown in FIG. 123, and in that section, as shown in FIG. 143, the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. The second special symbol display 1405 is composed of commands named special figure 2 synchronization effect start, special symbol 2 designation, and special figure 2 synchronization effect end. These various commands are assigned “B * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). , And is predetermined by the specification contents of the pachinko machine 1).

  The special figure 2 tuning effect start command is an instruction to start special figure tuning effect with the effect pattern designated in the mode, and the special symbol 2 designation command is for designating disapproval, specific big hit, non specific big hit The end of the special figure 2 synchronization effect instructs the end of the special figure 2 synchronization effect.

  As transmission timing of these various commands, special figure 2 tuning effect start command is transmitted at the time of special symbol 2 fluctuation start, special symbol 2 designated command is sent immediately after special figure 2 tuning effect start, special figure 2 tuning The effect end command is transmitted when the special symbol 2 variation time has elapsed (when the special symbol 2 is confirmed). Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[13-2-3. Jackpot related]
As shown in FIG. 143, the jackpot-related category includes a jackpot opening, a grand prize opening 1 open Nth display, a big prize opening 1 closing display, a big prize opening 1 count display, a jackpot ending, a jackpot symbol display, a small hit opening , A small hit open indication, a small hit count indication, and a command named small hit ending. For these various commands, "C * H" is assigned as the status, and "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number) , And is predetermined by the specification contents of the pachinko machine 1).

  The jackpot opening command is an instruction to start the jackpot opening, and the N-th display command for the big winning opening 1 is started during the first to sixteenth rounds of opening the big winning opening 1 (the start opening unit 2100 shown in FIG. 8). The grand prize opening 1 closing display command indicates that the grand prize opening 1 is closed during the round (the start opening unit 2100 is large). It indicates that the closing of the winning opening 2005 between the rounds or the closing start), and the large winning opening 1 count display command indicates that the number of balls from 0 to 10 game balls has been counted (shown in FIG. 123). The big hit ending command is for sending the big hit ending command, which is the number of gaming balls entered into the big winning opening 2005 detected by the count sensor 4005). Is intended to instruct the bindings start, big hit symbol display command is for instructing the big hit symbol information display.

  The small hit opening command is for instructing the start of the small hit opening, and the small hit opening display command is for starting the small hit opening (during opening of the big winning opening 2005 of the start opening unit 2100 at the small hit or The small hit count display command is a small hit medium large winning opening winning combination effect (in the small hit, when the gaming ball entered the large winning opening 2005 is detected by the count sensor 4005) The small hit ending command is an instruction to start small hit ending.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the big hit opening command is sent at the beginning of the big hit opening, and the big winning opening 1 open Nth display command is 1 to 16 round of big winning opening 1 open (starting opening unit 2100 Sent at the opening of the N round of the winning opening 2005), the large winning opening 1 closing display command is sent at the closing time of the winning opening 1 (start closing of the winning opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100), Large winning opening 1 count display command, when the large winning opening 1 opening and count change to the large winning opening 1 (when opening the large winning opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100, and the game ball entered the large winning opening 2005 Is detected by the count sensor 4005), and the big hit ending command is sent at the beginning of the big hit ending. , Big hit symbol display command is sent during the special winning opening open (when opening the special winning opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100).

  Also, the small hit opening command is transmitted at the start of the small hit opening, and the small hit open display command is transmitted at the small hit opening (at the opening of the big winning opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100 at the small hit), The small hit count display command is transmitted at the time of the small hit medium large winning opening (when the game ball entered the large winning hole 2005 during the small hit is detected by the count sensor 4005), the small hit ending command is Sent at the start of a small hit ending. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[13-2-4. Power on]
As shown in FIG. 143, the power-on category includes a command at the time of power-on and a command named “main control return destination at power-on”. These various commands are assigned “D * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). , And is predetermined by the specification contents of the pachinko machine 1).

  The power on state command indicates the start of the RAM clear effect and the game state. The power-on status command is used when the power-on (including when the power is turned on, and also when the power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure) of the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. When the operation switch 954 is operated to clear the RAM, information indicating that, and when the power is turned on (in addition to when the power is turned on, including when the power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure )), Information indicating which state (probability and time-short state) to return from among the low-probability short-time state, high-probability short-time state, and low-probability non-short-time state described above, and the model code of the pachinko machine And information indicating. For example, when creating a so-called max type, middle type, sweet digital type, the model code of this pachinko machine is for which copyright of the work, game specification (for example, probability fluctuation occurs) And, in addition to the game specification that the condition is continued until the next big hit game state occurs, the game specification that the probability fluctuation occurs in the state that the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol is limited (for example, 30 times or 70 times) It is specified whether it is (so-called ST machine etc.) or the like. In other words, the information of the model code of the pachinko machine is a series code for identifying which type among max type, middle type, and sweet digital type that indicates the model type, and to identify the copyright of the work. In addition to the game code of the game specification (for example, when probability fluctuation occurs, the state is continued until the next big hit gaming state occurs, the probability fluctuation with the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol is limited. And a game specification code for specifying a game specification (ST machine, etc.).

  The main control return destination command at power-on indicates the return destination of the main control board 1310 itself. The power-on main control return destination command mainly includes information for instructing the driving state of the universal solenoid 2107 shown in FIG. 123 and information for instructing the driving state of the attacker solenoid 2108 shown in FIG. ing.

  As the transmission timing of the power-on status command and the power-on main control return destination command, when the main control board power is turned on (in addition to when the power is turned on, when power is restored due to a power failure or instantaneous power failure) Is also sent). Specifically, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, when it recovers from a power failure or a momentary power failure, the main control side power-on process described later is executed, and the peripheral control board command in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process is executed. In the transmission process, a power-on state command and a power-on main control return destination command are transmitted.

[13-2-5. General drawing related production]
The general-synchronization effect is based on the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 shown in FIG. 123, and, as shown in FIG. 143, the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. The command 1402 is composed of commands with the names of general drawing synchronization production start, universal symbol designation, universal drawing synchronization production end, and variable state designation. These various commands are assigned “E * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The popular drawing tuning effect start command instructs the starting of the common pattern tuning effect in the rendering pattern specified in the mode, and the common symbol designation command is for designating a specific jackpot, a non-specified jackpot, and The figure tuning effect end command is for instructing the end of the common figure tuning effect, and the variation state designation command is for instructing the probability and the time saving state. In the probability and time saving states, as described above, a low probability time saving state which indicates a low probability state and a time saving state, and a high probability indicating a high probability state and a time shortening state It is composed of a short time state and a low probability short time state which indicates that it is a low probability state and not a short time state (a low probability short time state is set as a normal gaming state).

  As the transmission timings of these various commands, the ordinary symbol synchronization effect start command is transmitted at the time of the normal symbol 1 variation start, the ordinary symbol designation command is transmitted immediately after the ordinary symbol synchronization effect start, and the ordinary symbol synchronization effect end command is Usually, it is transmitted when the symbol fluctuation time has elapsed (when the symbol is decided normally), and the fluctuation state specification command is transmitted immediately after the common map win information specification. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[13-2-6. Regular Drama Director Related]
The ordinary electric role effect is related to the pair of movable pieces shown in FIG. 8 that are opened and closed by the drive of the universal solenoid 2107 shown in FIG. 123. It consists of commands named hit opening, public power open display, and ending per common figure. These various commands are assigned “F * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). , And is predetermined by the specification contents of the pachinko machine 1).

  The opening command per base figure is an instruction to start the opening per base figure, and the open command display command starts during the opening of the general power (a pair of movable pieces are expanded in the horizontal direction by driving the general solenoid 2107). The state (or the time of expansion) is indicated, and the ending command per common drawing is the instruction to start ending per common drawing.

  As transmission timings of these various commands, the opening command per common drawing is transmitted at the start of opening per common drawing, and the common power release display command is transmitted when the common power is open (the pair of movable pieces is driven by the common drawing solenoid 2107 Is sent when expanding in the direction), and the ending command per drawing is sent at the beginning of the ending per drawing. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[13-2-7. Notification display]
As shown in FIG. 144, the notification display divisions are composed of commands such as a winning abnormality display, a connection abnormality display, a disconnection / short circuit abnormality display, a magnetic detection switch abnormality display, a door open, and a door closed. These various commands are assigned status "6 * H" and mode "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number) , And is predetermined by the specification contents of the pachinko machine 1).

  In the prize failure display command, the game ball enters the big winning opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100 when the player wins a big winning opening other than during a big hit (during operating condition device) (even if it is not even a big hit) When the count sensor 4005 detects that the count error is detected), the connection error display command is, for example, an electrical signal in a route between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. When there is a connection error, the start of connection error notification is instructed, and for example, the disconnection / short circuit error display command includes a main control board 1310, a first start port sensor 4002, a second start port sensor 4004, a count sensor This command instructs the start of the break / short circuit display when there is a break or short circuit in the electrical connection with the 4005 etc. De is for instructing the start of magnetic detection switch abnormality notification when an abnormality occurs in the magnetic detection sensor 4024 shown in FIG. 123.

  The door opening command is sent from the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 based on a detection signal (opening signal) from the door frame opening switch 618 input via the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. In the opened state, the door opening notification is instructed, and the door frame closing command is based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4. When it is in the state, it is instructed to end the door opening notification. On the other hand, the main body frame opening command is sent from the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal (open signal) from the main body frame opening switch 619 input via the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. In the open state, the main body frame close command is sent to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame open switch 619. In the closed state, the main body frame opening notification is instructed to end.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, a winning abnormality display command is transmitted when winning a prize winning opening other than during a big hit (when the condition device is operating), and a connection abnormality displaying command is sent from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951. Is transmitted when there is no ACK reply (ACK signal) from the payout control board 951 when the command is transmitted to the terminal, and the disconnection / short circuit abnormality display command is the first start port sensor 4002, the second start port sensor 4004, the count sensor 4005, The magnetic detection switch abnormality display command is transmitted when an abnormality of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is detected. The door opening command is transmitted when the door opening is detected (when the door frame 3 is in an open state with respect to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618), and the door is opened. The frame closing command is transmitted when door closing is detected (when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4 based on a detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618). The body frame release command is transmitted when the body frame release is detected (when the body frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the body frame release switch 619). The frame closing command is transmitted when the main body frame closing is detected (when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 619). Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[13-2-8. Status display]
As shown in FIG. 144, the status display section is composed of commands named frame status 1 command (corresponding to an error occurrence command), error canceling navigation command (corresponding to error canceling command), and frame status 2 command. There is. These various commands are assigned status "7 * H" and mode "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number) , And is predetermined by the specification contents of the pachinko machine 1).

  The frame status 1 command, the error canceling navigation command, and the frame status 2 command are commands having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) transmitted from the payout control board 951, and detailed descriptions thereof will be described later. . When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 receives the frame state 1 command, the error cancellation navi command and the frame state 2 command from the payout control board 951, as shown in FIG. 144, “7 * H” While setting as a status, the received command is set as it is as a mode. That is, when the main control MPU 1310a receives the frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command from the payout control board 951, it adds “7 * H” as additional information to these received commands. Thus, the command is shaped into a command having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits).

  The shaped frame status 1 command is transmitted when the power is restored, when the status of the frame is changed, and when the error cancellation navigation is performed. The error cancellation navigation command is transmitted during the error cancellation navigation. The frame status 2 command is transmitted when the power is restored. And when the frame state changes. Note that these shaped frame state 1 command, error release navigation command, and frame state 2 command are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control timer interrupt process.

13-2-9. Test related]
As shown in FIG. 144, the test-related category includes various commands named test. In this test command, “8 * H” is assigned as the status, and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) is assigned as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number) , And is predetermined by the specification contents of the pachinko machine 1).

  The test command instructs various inspections of the peripheral control substrate 1510 (for example, the peripheral control unit 1511, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, the lamp drive substrate 4170, the motor drive substrate 4180, and the frame decoration shown in FIG. Inspection of various substrates such as the drive amplifier substrate 194 etc.).

  As a transmission timing of a test command, it is transmitted at the time other than RAM clear and RAM clear at the time of main control board power-on. Specifically, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 is operated when returning from a power failure or a momentary power failure, the main control side power-on process described later is performed. When executed, a test command is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control timer interrupt process.

13-2-10. Others]
As shown in FIG. 144, the other categories include start opening prize, change shortening operation end designation, high probability end designation, special symbol 1 memory, special symbol 2 memory, normal symbol memory, special symbol 1 memory prefetching effect, and It consists of a command with the name of special symbol 2 storage pre-reading effect. These various commands are assigned a status of “9 * H” and a mode of “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). , And is predetermined by the specification contents of the pachinko machine 1).

  The start opening winning combination command is for instructing the start opening start winning effect start, and based on the detection signal from the first start opening sensor 4002, the start of the effect when the game ball enters the first start opening 2002 , And the start of the effect when a game ball enters the second start port 2004 based on the detection signal from the second start port sensor 4004, respectively. The command for instructing state transition from the shortened operating state to the variable shortening non-operating state, and the high probability end designation command is for instructing state transition from the high probability state to the low probability state. The special symbol 1 holds 0 to 4 pieces (the game ball enters the first starting port 2002 shown in FIG. 8 and the special symbol is changed by the first special symbol display 1403 of the function display unit 1400. The number of balls not yet used for display (the number of holdings) is transmitted, and the special symbol 2 storage command is a special symbol 2 holding 0-4 pieces (the game ball is placed in the second starting port 2004 shown in FIG. 8). The second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 enters the ball and transmits the number of balls (number of pending) not yet used for the variable display of the special symbol, and the ordinary symbol memory command is the ordinary symbol 1 Hold 0 to 4 (The game ball passes through the gate unit 2003 shown in FIG. 8 and the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 shows the number of balls not yet used for the variable display of normal symbols (number of held)) The special symbol 1 memory pre-reading effect command is pre-read before the special symbol 1 hold is used for the variable symbol display of the special symbol on the first special symbol indicator 1403 of the function display unit 1400. It is intended to instruct the start of pre-reading effect to notify the advance notice of the display result by the first special symbol display 1403 based on the special symbol 1 suspension, the special symbol 2 storage pre-reading effect command of the special symbol 2 suspension is the function display unit 1400 Before being used for the variable display of the special symbol in the second special symbol display 1405, pre-read and instruct pre-reading effect start to notify the notice of the display result by the second special symbol display 1405 based on the special symbol 2 suspension To do.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the start opening prize command is the start opening winning prize (when a game ball enters the first start opening 2002 based on the detection signal from the first start opening sensor 4002, When a game ball enters the second start port 2004 based on a detection signal from the start port sensor 4004), the fact is mainly voiced from the speaker 921 shown in FIG. 5 and the upper speaker 573 shown in FIG. Is sent at the end of the stop period after the change is confirmed after digesting the specified number of fluctuation reductions (after the outage stop period has elapsed). The special symbol 1 storage command is sent at the end of the stop period after the change is confirmed (after the lapse of the stoppage period), after digesting the high probability count in the case of “high probability N times”. At the time of change (in a state where a game ball enters the first start port 2002 and there is a number of holdings that are not yet used in the special symbol change display on the first special symbol display unit 1403 of the function display unit 1400, Sent when a game ball enters the starting port 2002 and the number of holds increases, or when the number of holds decreases by using the first special symbol display 1403 to display the fluctuation of the special symbol from the number of holds) The special symbol 2 memory command is displayed when the special symbol 2 operation holding ball number changes (the game ball enters the second starting port 2004 and the special symbol 2 1 is displayed on the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400). In the state where there is a number of reservations not yet used, when the game ball enters the second starting hole 2004 and the number of reservations increases and the number of special symbols in the second special symbol indicator 1405 from the number of reservations Strange The normal symbol memory command is transmitted when the number of reserved balls decreases (using the display) and the normal symbol 1 operation ball number change (when the game ball passes through the gate part 2003, the normal symbol of the function display unit 1400) In the state where there is the number of reservations not yet used for the fluctuation display of the normal symbol in the indicator 1402, when the number of the reservation balls further passes through the gate part 2003 and the number of reservations increases, the normal symbol display 1402 from the number of reservations The special symbol 1 memory pre-reading effect command is sent when the number of reserved symbols is reduced and used for the fluctuation display of the normal symbol in the special symbol 1 operation pending ball number increase (the game ball is in the first starting opening 2002) The special symbol 2 memory pre-reading effect command is sent when the ball number increases and the number of reservations increases) When the number of special symbol 2 operation suspension balls increases (the game ball enters the second starting opening 2004 and the number of reservations is increase Sent) when Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control timer interrupt process.

  By the way, as described above, the start opening prize command is given when the start opening is won (when a game ball enters the first start opening 2002 based on the detection signal from the first start opening sensor 4002, 126 (when a game ball enters the second starting port 2004 based on a detection signal from the sensor 4004), the sound is transmitted mainly from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 to notify that effect. The manner in which the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 7 uses the start opening winning command may differ depending on the specifications of the pachinko machine. For example, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment is of a specification that is used for monitoring the presence or absence of fraud in addition to notifying the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by voice. On the other hand, in other pachinko machines, there is a specification in which the peripheral control board 1510 simply receives the start opening prize command and does not notify the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by voice.

13-3. Various commands from the payout control board received by the main control board]
Next, various commands from the payout control board 951 received by the main control board 1310 will be described.

  Classification of various commands from the payout control board 951 is composed of commands named frame state 1, error cancellation navigation and frame state 2 as shown in FIG. 145, and frame state 1, error cancellation navigation and Priorities are set in the order of frame state 2.

  In the frame status 1 command (corresponds to the error generation command), out of sphere, full, in 50 or more stocks, connection abnormality and CR non-connection are prepared, and in out of sphere bit 0 (B0, "B" Represents a bit)), the value 1 is set to bit 1 (B1) if full, bit 2 (B2) is set to 1 in more than 50 stocks, and A value 1 is set in bit 3 (B3), and a value 1 is set in bit 4 (B4) when the CR is not connected. In bit 5 (B5) to bit 7 (B7) of the frame state 1 command, a value 1 is set in B5, a value 0 is set in B6, and a value 0 is set in B7.

  In the error cancellation navigation command (corresponding to the error cancellation command), the ball is detected, and the payout detection sensor error and the retry error are prepared. In error, the value 1 is set in bit 3 (B3), and in retry error, the value 1 is set in bit 4 (B4). Here, “disbursement detection sensor error” indicates whether or not the malfunction of the payout detection sensor 842 shown in FIG. 124 has occurred. The "retry error" indicates that the payout of the inconsistent game ball due to the retry operation is repeated. Bit (B0), bit (B1), and bit 5 (B5) to bit 7 (B7) of the error cancellation navigation command have a value 0 for B0, a value 0 for B1, a value 0 for B5, a value 1 for B6, And the value 0 is set to B7.

  The frame state 2 command is prepared for ball removal, and the value 1 is set to bit 0 (B0) during ball removal. Bit 1 (B1) to Bit 7 (B7) of the frame status 2 command include a value 0 for B1, a value 0 for B2, a value 0 for B3, a value 0 for B4, a value 1 for B5, a value 1 for B6, and The value 0 is set to B7.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the frame status 1 command is transmitted when the power is restored, when the frame status is changed, and during error cancellation navigation, and the error cancellation navigation command is transmitted during error cancellation navigation. Is transmitted when the power is restored and when the frame state changes. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the command transmission process of step S558 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control unit power-on process described later.

[14. Various control processes of main control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 123 in accordance with the progress of the game of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 146 is a flow chart showing an example of the main control side power on process, FIG. 147 is a flow chart showing the continuation of the main control side power on process of FIG. 146, and FIG. 148 is an example of the main control timer interrupt process It is a flowchart which shows. First, various random numbers used for game control will be described, and then the operation of the initial value update type counter, main control side power-on processing, and main control side timer interrupt processing will be described.

[14-1. Various random numbers]
As the various random numbers used for game control, a big hit determination random number used for determining whether or not to generate a big hit gaming state, and whether or not to generate a reach (reach out) when no big hit gaming state is generated The random number for reach determination for use in determination, and the variation for use in determining the variation display pattern of the special symbol variably displayed by the first special symbol indicator 1403 and the second special symbol indicator 1405 shown in FIG. 123 Display pattern random numbers, jackpot symbol random numbers for use in determining the jackpot symbols derived and displayed by the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 when generating the jackpot gaming state, and the jackpot The jackpot symbol initial value determination random number for use in determining the initial value of the symbol random number, the first special symbol indicator when generating a small hit gaming state 403 and a small bonus symbol for use in determining the small hit symbol derived and displayed by the second special symbol display 1405, and an initial value for the small bonus symbol for use in determining the initial value of the random symbol for the small bonus symbol A random number for decision etc. is prepared. Further, in addition to these random numbers, it is used to determine a normal random number for determination per symbol for use in determining whether or not the movable piece shown in FIG. 8 is opened and closed, and an initial value of the random number for determination per normal symbol. For determining the initial value for determining the normal symbol for the normal symbol, the random number for the normal symbol variation display pattern to be used for determining the variation display pattern of the ordinary symbol displayed by the ordinary symbol display unit 1402 shown in FIG. It is prepared.

  Among the various random numbers used for such game control, the random number for determining the jackpot is updated by hardware, and the other various random numbers are updated by software.

  For example, the big hit determination random number is directly updated by hardware by the main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an built in the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. As described above, when the main control MPU 1310 a is reset, the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310 an first uses a value within a predetermined numerical range as an initial value to be a clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310 a Based on (the clock signal output from the main control crystal oscillator MX0 shown in FIG. 131), other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at a high speed, and all values within the predetermined numerical range are obtained. When the extraction is completed, one value in the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and other values in the predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. Do. The main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an repeatedly performs such a high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU 1310a wins the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an at the time of acquiring a value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an. It is set as a judgment random number.

  On the other hand, the counter for updating the random number for determination per normal symbol is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value, and a range from the minimum value to the maximum value will be described later. Each time the main control timer interrupt process is performed, the value is incremented by one to count up. This counter counts up from the normal value for determining the initial value for determination per normal symbol toward the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value to the random number for determining the initial value for determination per normal symbol. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the random number for normal symbol determination, the random number for initial value determination for normal symbol is updated. Such a counter updating method is referred to as an “initial value updating type counter”. The random value for determining the initial value for normal symbol determination can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process for drawing one value from the fixed numerical range of the counter for updating the random number for determination per normal symbol. .

  In this embodiment, when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 124 is operated when the power is turned on, or in the main control side power-on process described later, the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. The check sum value (sum value) obtained by calculating the sum of the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value is stored in the main control side power-off process (at power-off). When the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared, such as when the check sum value (sum value) does not match, the random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal per symbol is the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. Fetches the ID code from its built-in non-volatile RAM, and based on the fetched ID code, fixed number range of the counter which updates the random number for judgment per normal pattern Et always performs initial value derivation process of deriving the same fixed value, a fixed value this derivation has a mechanism to be set. That is, the random number for determining the initial value per symbol normally is designed to always overwrite and update the same fixed value derived based on the ID code by execution of the initial value derivation process. As described above, the value set to the random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal symbol is derived by using the ID code, and the nonvolatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a by the manufacturer that manufactured the main control MPU 1310a. When the ID code is stored in the ID code, the ID code is not rewritten even if an external device is used, and the ID code is executed by executing the initial value derivation process when clearing the entire area of the main control built-in RAM. The second security measure that derives the same fixed value on the basis of and the two-step security measure by the second security measure is prevented from being analyzed.

  Here, an advantage will be described in which an ID code is extracted from the nonvolatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a, and the extracted ID code is used as a random number for determining an initial value for normal symbol determination. For example, a person who intends to illegally acquire a game ball to be paid out as a prize ball obtains the game board 5 by some method, disassembles it, and uses an ID code stored in advance in a nonvolatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a. Even if the counter value that is obtained illegally and the counter value for updating the determination random number per normal symbol and the determination value per normal symbol match can be grasped, the ID code is unique for identifying the individual. Since the reference numerals are given, the ID codes are completely different from the ID codes stored in advance in the nonvolatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a ′ included in the other game board 5 ′. In other words, in the other game boards 5 ′, the timing at which the counter value for updating the random number for normal symbol determination matches the normal symbol determination value is also completely different from that of the acquired game board 5. In other words, the ID code obtained by disassembling and analyzing the obtained game board 5 is completely useless in other game boards 5 ', that is, other pachinko machines 1'. Even if an instantaneous power failure is generated at every predetermined interval and the game ball is passed through the gate unit 2003 shown in FIG. 8 at each predetermined interval, the movable piece shown in FIG. A game state in which the game ball can be accepted to the starting opening 2004 can not be generated.

[14-2. Main control side power on process]
First, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the main control MPU 1310a is configured so that the stack pointer is set to a predetermined address as a default. This stack pointer indicates, for example, an address stacked on the stack to temporarily store the contents of the storage element (register) in use, or the return address of this routine when the subroutine is ended and returned to this routine. It indicates the address stacked on the stack for temporary storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked.

  Then, under the control of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the above-mentioned main control program performs processing at the time of main control power on as shown in FIGS. 146 and 147. When the main control side power-on process is started, the main control program sets RAM access permission under the control of the main control MPU 1310a (step S10). Update to the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) can be performed by setting the RAM access permission.

  Subsequent to step S10, the main control program performs initial value setting and activation setting of the main control built-in WDT 1310af shown in FIG. 123 (step S12). Here, in order to set an initial value in the main control built-in WDT 1310af for monitoring whether or not the operation (system) of the main control MPU 1310a is operating normally, a watchdog timer control register (hereinafter referred to as “the main control MPU 1310a”). The timer setting value is set in the "WDT control register"), the main control built-in WDT 1310af is started, and the time measurement from when the main control MPU 1310a is reset is started. When the main control built-in WDT 1310af is started, the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is started, and the watchdog timer clear register ( Hereinafter, when the timer clear set value is not set in “WDT clear register”, the main control MPU 1310 a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310 af. On the other hand, when the main control built-in WDT 1310af is started and clocking is started, if the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register before this clocked time reaches the time set by the timer setting value, The timing by the main control built-in WDT 1310 af is cleared, and the timing is started again. As described above, the operation (system) of the main control MPU 1310 a operates normally by repeatedly performing the process of clearing the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT 1310 af until the time set by the timer setting value is reached and starting the time measurement again. Can be monitored.

  Subsequent to step S12, the main control program performs a power failure clear process (step S14). In this blackout clear process, first, the output of the blackout clear signal is started to the blackout monitoring circuit 1310e shown in FIG. The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e includes a comparator MIC21 that is a voltage comparison circuit and a D-type flip-flop MIC22. The comparator MIC21, which is a voltage comparison circuit, compares the voltage between + 24V and the reference voltage, or compares the voltage between + 12V and the reference voltage, and outputs the comparison result. The comparison result is that when no power failure or momentary interruption occurs, the logic becomes HI and is input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22, while when a power failure or momentary interruption occurs. The logic becomes LOW and is input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip flop MIC22.

  In the power failure clear process, first, the power failure clear signal is started to be output to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, whereby the power failure clear signal is started to be output to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. This blackout clear signal is input to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D type flip flop IC via the main control output circuit with reset function 1310 ca with its logic set to LOW from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310 a. Is done. Thus, the main control MPU 1310a can release the latch state of the D type flip flop MIC22, and the logic input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22, is set until the latch state is set. The signal can be inverted to be output from the 1Q terminal which is an output terminal, and the signal from the 1Q terminal can be monitored.

  Subsequently, in the power failure clear process, a wait timer process is performed to determine whether or not a power failure notice signal is input. The voltage does not rise immediately between the time the power is turned on and the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, when there is a power failure or a momentary power failure (a phenomenon in which the supply of power is temporarily stopped), when the voltage drops and becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input as a power failure warning from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. Similarly, when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage from when the power is turned on until it reaches the predetermined voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. Therefore, in the wait timer process, after the power is turned on, the process waits until the voltage becomes larger than the power failure warning voltage and stabilizes. In this embodiment, 200 milliseconds (ms) is set as the wait time (wait timer). It is done. Whether or not the power failure warning signal is input is determined based on the signal output from the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 as the power failure warning signal.

  If there is no input of the power failure notification signal after waiting for the voltage to become higher than the power failure notification voltage and stabilized after power on, the main control program outputs a power failure clear signal to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22. Stop output. Here, the power failure clear signal changes its logic to HI from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a, and the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D type flip flop IC via the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca. Is input. Thereby, the main control MPU 1310a can set the D-type flip-flop MIC22 to the latched state. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 outputs a power failure notice signal from the 1Q terminal which is an output terminal, when a state in which the logic becomes LOW to be input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal is latched.

  Subsequent to step S14, the main control program makes it possible to execute the RAM clear process for initializing the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) for a predetermined time from when the power is turned on (when the game side power is turned on) Operation control means). Specifically, the main control program first determines whether the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 124 is operated (step S16). In this determination, the main control program inputs, to the main control MPU 1310a, an error release navigation command (first error release command) based on an operation signal (detection signal) accompanying operation of the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951. Depending on whether or not it is done. The main control program determines that the RAM clear is not instructed when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is HI based on the logical value of the operation signal, and the operation switch 954 is operated. On the other hand, when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is LOW, it is determined that the instruction is to clear the RAM, and it is determined that the operation switch 954 is operated.

  In step S16, when the operation switch 954 is operated, the main control program sets a value 1 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S18). On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is not operated in step S16, the main control program sets a value 0 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S20). That is, the main control program can execute the RAM clear process for initializing the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a (that is, the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit)) for a predetermined time from when the power is turned on. The state is set (game control side power on operation control means). The RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG described above determines whether or not to delete game information related to games such as probability fluctuation and unpaid award balls stored in the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) of the main control MPU 1310a. It is a flag indicating that it is set to a value of 1 when erasing game information, and a value of 0 when not deleting gaming information. Note that the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG set in step S18 and step S20 is stored in a general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a.

  Subsequent to step S18 or step S20, the main control program performs wait time standby processing (step S22). In this wait time standby process, the system that performs drawing control of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 by the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 of the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. Wait until In the present embodiment, 2.5 seconds (s) is set as a standby time (boot timer) until boot.

  Following step S22, the main control program determines whether or not a power failure advance signal is input (step S24). As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is shut off, or when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e as a power failure warning voltage when the voltage becomes equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage. The determination in step S24 is made based on this power failure notice signal. When a power failure warning signal is input in the determination in step S24, the main control program returns to the determination in step S24 again, and repeats the determination in step S24 as long as the power failure notification signal is continuously input. As a result, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT 1310af activated in step S12, the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared, and the time measurement is started again. As a result, the main control MPU 1310 a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310 af. After that, the main control program again performs the main control side power-on process under the control of the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310. A detailed description of the point that the determination of step S24 is performed subsequent to the wait time waiting process of step S22 will be described later.

  If it is determined in step S24 that the power failure advance notification signal is not input, the main control program determines whether the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value 0 (step S26). As described above, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value 1 when the game information is deleted and a value 0 when the game information is not deleted. When the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 0 in step S26, that is, when the game information is not deleted, a checksum is calculated (step S28). This checksum is calculated by regarding the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value and calculating the sum.

  Subsequent to step S28, the main control program calculates the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main-control-side power-off process (power-off) described later and the calculated checksum value (sum value). It is determined whether or not they match (step S30). If they match, the main control program determines whether or not the backup flag BK-FLG is 1 (step S32). This backup flag BK-FLG stores game backup information such as game information, checksum value (sum value) and backup flag BK-FLG in the main control built-in RAM in the main control side power-off process described later. It is a flag indicating whether or not it has been set, and is set to a value 1 when the main control side power-off process has ended normally, and a value 0 when the main control side power-off process has not ended normally. In the inspection process of the production line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after being manufactured for inspection, the checksum is calculated in step S28 and the determination is made in step S30. A detailed description will be given later.

  When the backup flag BK-FLG has the value 1 in step S32, that is, when the main control side power-off process has ended normally, the main control program sets the work area of the main control internal RAM as power recovery ( Step S34). In this setting, power recovery information is read from a ROM (that is, main control built-in ROM) built in the main control MPU 1310a, and this power recovery time information is set in a work area of the main control built-in RAM. Thereby, the game information is read out from the game backup information, and various commands corresponding to the game information are stored in the predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Note that “power recovery” refers to a state in which power is turned on from a power-off state, a state in which power is subsequently recovered from a power failure or a momentary power interruption, and unauthorized means (for example, an unauthorized person is placed on the skirt of his arm). A high frequency from the hidden high frequency output device is irradiated to the main control board 1310 to reset the main control MPU 1310 a itself, and also includes a state where it is restored thereafter.

  Subsequent to step S34, the main control program sets a value 0 to the backup flag BK-FLG (step S36). As a result, the game information, the value (sum value) of the checksum, etc. are changed by performing various processes after this, so the main control side power-off process described later is normally ended and the backup flag BK- If the value 1 is not set in FLG, as will be described later, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared.

  On the other hand, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step S26, that is, when the game information is erased, or when the checksum value (sum value) does not match in step S30. Alternatively, when the backup flag BK-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0) in step S32, that is, when the main control side power-off process has not been terminated normally, the main control program stores all the main control built-in RAM. The area is cleared (step S38). That is, the main control program executes the game control side RAM clearing process triggered by the input of the detection signal accompanying the operation of the operation switch 954 described above (payout control side power-on operation control means). Specifically, the main control program is executed by writing the value 0 in the main control built-in RAM. Alternatively, the main control program may read and set a predetermined value from the main control built-in ROM as an initial value. In addition, the main control MPU 1310a performs processing for when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 instructs to clear the RAM, when the game information is erased, when the sum values do not match, or when the main control side power is cut off. When not finished normally, a unique ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is taken out, and a fixed numerical range of a counter for updating the random number for determination per ordinary symbol based on the taken out ID code The initial value derivation process for always deriving the same fixed value from is performed, and this fixed value is set as the normal value determining random number for determining the initial value for the normal symbol determining random value described above. To do.

  Subsequent to step S38, the main control program sets a work area of the main control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S40). This setting is performed by reading the initial information from the main control built-in ROM and setting the initial information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S36 or step S40, the main control program performs interrupt initialization (step S42). This setting is to set an interrupt cycle when a main control timer interrupt process described later is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 4 milliseconds (ms).

  Subsequent to step S42, the main control program performs serial communication initial setting (step S44). Here, various serial input / output ports (for example, serial input / output ports (reception channels and transmission channels) for the payout control board 951 and serial input / output ports (reception channels and transmission channels) for the peripheral control board 1510 built in the main control MPU 1310a. ) Corresponding to the transmission serial port prescaler, the transmission speed is set and the parity is set, and the transmission serial port control register is set to initialize the transmission circuit and set transmission permission.

  Subsequent to step S44, the main control program performs test signal output port initialization settings (step S46). Here, in the testing organization of the gaming machine, the test signal output port (not shown) for outputting various inspection information is initialized (set to OFF data output) etc. when the power is turned on.

  Following step S46, the main control program performs start setting of the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an shown in FIG. 123 (step S48). Here, among the various random numbers related to the game, a hard random number control register built in the main control MPU 1310a in order to update the big hit determination random number for use in determining whether or not to generate the big hit gaming state by hardware The random number is latched and acquired, and the activation of the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310 an is set in the hard random number setting register. When the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an is activated by these settings, it is predetermined in advance at a high speed based on the clock signal (clock signal output from the main control crystal oscillator MX0 shown in FIG. 131) input to the main control MPU 1310a. After extracting other values in the numerical range one after another without overlapping and extracting all the values in the predetermined numerical range, one value in the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, Based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a, other values in a predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another without overlapping at high speed. The main control MPU 1310a outputs a latch signal to the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an when acquiring a random number (random number value) from the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an, and the main control when the latch signal is input. The random number (random number value) extracted by the built-in hard random number circuit 1310an is obtained from a hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a. The main control MPU 1310a sets the acquired random number value as a jackpot determination random number.

  Subsequent to step S48, the main control program performs reservation setting for a command to be transmitted when the power is turned on (step S50). Here, in order to notify that the power is turned on (power recovery) based on the power recovery time information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, FIG. The power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command, which are classified into the power-on shown in FIG. 5, are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, the game information may be read from the game backup information and various commands corresponding to the game information may be stored. is there. In such a case, first after completion of transmission of various commands according to the game information, a power-on state command and a power-on main control return destination command are transmitted. These commands are transmitted in the main control timer interrupt process described later. A detailed description will be given later of reservation setting of a command to be transmitted at power-on in step S50.

  Subsequent to step S50, the main control program performs interrupt permission setting (step S52). As a result of this setting, a main control timer interrupt process to be described later is repeatedly performed at an interrupt cycle set in step S42, that is, every 4 ms.

  Subsequent to step S52, the main control program, when a predetermined time elapses from when the power is turned on, that is, when the main process on the main control side is started, the error cancellation navigation command associated with the operation of the operation switch 954 (operation switch). Execution of the game control side RAM clear process triggered by the reception will be restricted (normal operation control means). As described above, the main control program uses the concept of time sharing to detect a detection signal input in accordance with the operation of the operation switch 954 for a predetermined time from the time of power-on as described above. When the input is triggered, the RAM clear process is executed (game control side power-on operation control means), and after the predetermined time has elapsed, the execution of the RAM clear process is restricted even if the error canceling navigation command is input ( The game control side normal operation control means) is handled as a release switch for releasing the error notification associated with the error that has occurred. That is, the operation switch 954 (error canceling unit) that should have been originally used for canceling the error that has occurred with respect to the payout operation is used as a game storage unit instead of a predetermined time from power-on. The main control built-in RAM (and a payout control built-in RAM as a payout storage unit to be described later) functions as an operation unit for executing a RAM clear process for starting initialization, and after the predetermined time has elapsed, It can function as an operation unit for canceling an error that has occurred with respect to the ball dispensing operation.

  Next, the main control program determines whether or not a power failure notice signal is input (step S54). As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is shut off, or when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e as a power failure warning voltage when the voltage becomes equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage. The determination in step S54 is performed based on the power failure advance signal.

  When there is no input of the power failure advance notice signal in step S54, the main control program performs non-attrition random number update processing (step S56). In the non-winning random number update process, the above-described reach determination random number, variable display pattern random number, big hit symbol initial value determining random number, small hit symbol initial value determining random number, and the like are updated. As described above, in the non-coincidence random number update process, the software updates random numbers that are not related to the collision judgment (big hit judgment). It should be noted that the above-described random numbers for normal symbol determination, random numbers for initial value determination for normal symbol determination, random numbers for normal symbol variation display pattern, and the like described above are also updated by this non-winning random number update process.

  Following step S56, the main control program returns to step S54 again, determines whether or not there is an input of a power failure advance notification signal, and if there is no input of this power failure notification signal, non-falling random number update processing is performed in step S56. The steps S54 to S56 are repeated. The processes in steps S54 to S56 are referred to as “main control side main process”.

  On the other hand, when a power failure warning signal is input in step S54, the main control program performs interrupt prohibition setting (step S58). With this setting, the main control side timer interrupt processing described later is not performed, writing to the main control built-in RAM is prevented, and rewriting of game information is protected.

  Following step S58, the main control program starts outputting a power failure clear signal (step S60). Here, the same process as the process that started outputting the power failure clear signal in the power failure clear process in step S14 is performed. Thus, the main control program can release the latched state of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 under the control of the main control MPU 1310a.

  Subsequent to step S60, the main control program displays the common drawing solenoid 2107, the attachment solenoid 2108, the first special symbol display 1403, the second special symbol display 1405, and the first special hold number display 1404 shown in FIG. The drive signal output to the second special reserved number display 1406, the normal symbol display 1402, the normal symbol storage display 1188, the status indicator 1401, the round indicator 1407, etc. is stopped (step S62).

  Subsequent to step S62, the main control program calculates a checksum and stores the calculated value (step S64). This checksum is calculated by regarding the game information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value excluding the storage area for the checksum value (sum value) and backup flag BK-FLG described above.

  Subsequent to step S64, the main control program sets a value 1 to the backup flag BK-FLG (step S66). This completes the storage of game backup information.

  Following step S66, the main control program performs setting of RAM access prohibition (step S68). By the setting of the RAM access prohibition, the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) can not be accessed, so that the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) can be prevented from being updated.

  Following step S68, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a with respect to the main control built-in WDT 1310af activated in step S12, the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared, and the time measurement is started again. As a result, the main control MPU 1310 a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310 af. After that, the main control program again performs the main control side power-on process under the control of the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310. The processing from step S58 to step S68 and the infinite loop are referred to as “main control side power-off processing”.

  The pachinko machine 1 (main control MPU 1310a) is reset when a power failure occurs or an instantaneous power failure is performed, and the main control side power-on process is performed by subsequent power recovery.

  In step S30, it is checked whether or not the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM is normal. Subsequently, in step S32, whether or not the main control side power-off process has been normally completed. Are inspected. In this way, by checking the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM twice, it is checked whether or not the game backup information is stored by an illegal act.

  Here, the point where the presence / absence of the power failure notice signal in step S24 is determined following the wait time waiting process in step S22 will be described. First, regarding the problem in the case where the presence / absence of the power failure warning signal is not determined in step S24, that is, the value of the RAM clear flag in step S26 is determined after the wait time waiting process in step S22, and the subsequent processing is performed. Explain the problems in

  As described above, the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is charged to the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 131 when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and the power supply from the pachinko island facility is cut off. The charge is applied as +5 V over a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the occurrence of a power failure or a momentary power failure. That is, even if the power supply from the pachinko island facility is shut off due to a momentary power failure or a power failure, the power supply from the pachinko island facility is applied by applying +5 V as the charge stored in the hardware of the electrolytic capacitor MC2. The main control side power-off process can be completed within a period of about 7 ms after it is shut off. This is because when a player is playing a game, that is, when performing a main control side main process or a main control side timer interrupt process to be described later, a power failure or a momentary stoppage occurs and a pachinko island facility When the power is cut off, the main control side power-off process can be completed with certainty.

  However, as a very rare phenomenon, in the wait time standby process of step S22 at the time of power return, the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display by the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 of the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. The system waits for the system that performs drawing control of the device 460 to start (boot) (boot timer: 2.5 seconds in this embodiment is set). Thus, if a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs, the electric charge charged to the hardware called the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, as +5 V, but within a period of about 7 ms, step S42. Interrupt initialization is performed, and then, in step S52, interrupt permission setting is performed. Even if the contents of the main control built-in RAM are updated after the main control side timer interrupt processing to be described later is performed, the main control side power off processing in the main control side power on processing may not be able to be completed. . For this reason, the main control side power-on process is started again at the time of power recovery without storing the calculated value of the checksum based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM.

  Then, the main control side power-on process is started at the time of the current power recovery, and the wait time standby process at step S22 is completed without an instantaneous power failure or power failure, and then the main control built-in RAM is processed at step S28. If the value obtained by calculating the checksum based on the contents of and the value stored in the main control built-in RAM just before the momentary power failure or power failure occur in step S30, the checksum values should match. In step S38, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared. In other words, even if the operation switch 954 is operated by a store clerk or the like at the time of power recovery and there is no intention indication by the store clerk or the like in the hall of RAM clear, the information stored in the main control built-in RAM is forcibly erased (clear ).

  Therefore, in this embodiment, immediately after the wait time waiting process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power failure warning signal is input is provided as step 24, and when a power failure warning signal is input, Returning to the determination in step S24, the determination in step S24 is repeatedly performed as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input. As a result, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT 1310af activated in step S12, the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared, and the time measurement is started again. The main control MPU 1310a can be forcibly reset by the built-in main control WDT 1310af. Although the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value in the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG in step S18 or step S20 before the wait time waiting process in step S22, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is as described above. Since it is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the control MPU 1310a, even if the RAM access permission is set in step S10, the contents (game information) of the main control built-in RAM are not changed at all.

  As described above, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, a process of determining whether or not the power failure notice signal is input is provided as step 24, and when the power failure notice signal is input (that is, step If it is determined by the determination in step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is shut off after waiting in the wait time standby process of S22), the process returns to the determination of step S24 again, as long as the power failure notification signal continues to be input, Since it is possible to forcibly reset the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 and restart the main control board 1310 by repeatedly performing the determination of step S24, it is possible to proceed with the game It is not possible to prevent the game information from being updated, and there is no change in the calculation result of the checksum. It has become so that it does not. Thereby, when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is restarted, it is determined that the calculation result of the checksum in step S28 matches the calculated and stored value of the checksum in step S64. Therefore, the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure, which is stored and held in the main control built-in RAM, is not initialized. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game information from being initialized immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs at the time of power recovery.

  Further, immediately after the wait time waiting process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power failure warning signal is input is provided as step 24, and when a power failure warning signal is not input (that is, in step S22). When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is proceeding with the game (when it is determined by the determination in step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is not shut off after waiting in the wait time waiting process) Even if the power to 1 is shut off, backup processing for storing game information according to the progress of the game by supplying power from the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 131 to the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. Main composed of the processing of step S58 to step S68, which is Since the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 can complete the control-side power-off process, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control MPU 1310a calculates the checksum in step S28 when it restarts. Since it is determined that the result and the calculation result of the checksum in the backup processing (that is, the calculated and stored value of the checksum in step S64) match, the instantaneous value stored and held in the main control internal RAM There is no need to initialize game information immediately before a stop or power failure occurs. That is, the main control board 1310 can be activated by being restored to the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs.

  Further, immediately after the wait time waiting process in step S22, when it is determined in step S24 that a power failure warning signal has been input, the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af, thereby causing the contents of the main control built-in RAM. It is possible to start the main control side power-off process again without updating the key at all, but immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, when it is determined in step S24 that the power failure notice signal is not input As a result, it is possible to reliably complete the main control side power-off process within the “instantaneous power failure or power failure securing period” of about 7 ms. That is, in the present embodiment, when the main control side power-on process is performed at the time of power recovery, a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs and the power from the pachinko facility is shut off, and the main control MPU 1310 a The charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 131 is applied to the VDD terminal, which is a power supply terminal, as +5 V over a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after a power failure or a momentary stoppage occurs. In the case where the main control side power-off process can not be completed within the "instant power failure or power supply securing period" of about 7 ms due to the hardware of the electrolytic capacitor MC2, the wait time standby process of step S22 is performed. Immediately after that, it is determined whether or not the power failure notification signal is input in step 24. If the power failure notification signal is input, step S2 is performed. The determination in step S24 is repeated as long as the power failure notification signal continues to be input, and the timer in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT 1310af activated in step S12. The main control MPU 1310a can be forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af by setting the clear setting value, clearing the time measured by the main control built-in WDT 1310af and not being able to start the time measurement again. Yes. Since the main control MPU 1310 a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310 af by such software, a step after step S 24 (specifically, interrupt initialization is performed in step S 42, and thereafter, in step S 52 It is possible to prevent the contents (gaming information) of the main control built-in RAM from being updated by blocking the progress to the control flow of setting the interrupt permission and starting the main control timer interrupt processing described later. Adopted the mechanism. In this way, when the power supply from the pachinko island facility is shut off due to a power failure or momentary stoppage, the portion covered by software so that the content (game information) of the main control built-in RAM is not changed at all The contents of the main control internal RAM by dividing it into two parts to ensure complete completion of interrupt processing and that the contents (game information) of the main control internal RAM are not changed at all The game information can be reliably prevented from being changed.

  Next, the point will be described where reservation setting of a command to be transmitted when the power is turned on is performed in step S50. In step S50, as described above, based on the power recovery time information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, the power is turned on (power recovery) In order to convey the information, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command divided into the power-on shown in FIG. 143 are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control internal RAM. As described above, the power-on main control return destination command mainly includes information for instructing the driving state of the general solenoid 2107 and information for instructing the driving state of the attacker solenoid 2108 shown in FIG. Yes. Here, first, when the power-on main control return destination command does not include the information for instructing the driving state of the general solenoid 2107 and the information for instructing the driving state of the attacker solenoid 2108 shown in FIG. The problem in step S50, that is, the problem in the case where the reservation of the command to be transmitted when the power is on and the main control return destination command is not performed in the power on in step S50, will be described.

  For example, when the peripheral control board 1510 controls the display of the big hit gaming state screen (for example, the big hit gaming effect screen) in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 shown in FIG. When the attacker solenoid 2108 is driven and the special winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. 8 is opened, when an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs, and then power is restored, the main control board 1310 performs the main control in step S34. Based on the power recovery time information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the built-in RAM, the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs is restored to drive the attacker solenoid 2108 And the big winning opening 2005 is shifted from the closed state to the open state.

  However, if a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs, the peripheral control substrate 1510 receives various commands from the main control substrate 1310 upon power recovery and returns, so a momentary power failure or power failure occurs. Thereafter, when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can be restored based on the probability and the time saving state instructed by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power recovery. However, when the main control board 1310 generates a big hit gaming state as the gaming state, a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs, and then when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 receives the main power control board 1310 at the time of power recovery. Even if it is possible to display the screen in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and return according to the probability and the time saving state based on the probability and the time saving state instructed by the power-on state command received from. It is not possible to indicate at all which round of the jackpot gaming state. In other words, for example, a winning prize opening 1 count display command is transmitted to notify the number of gaming balls that have been entered into the big winning opening 2005 and detected by the count sensor 4005 shown in FIG. Even if the main control board 1310 transmits to the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral control board 1510 receives the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control board 1510 is a ball of the game ball that has entered the big winning opening 2005 on the screen according to the probability and the short time state. Even if the number can be displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, it is not possible to display at all which round of the jackpot gaming state (that is, how many rounds).

  In such a situation, for example, when ending the fourth round of the big hit gaming state (fourth round), the main control board 1310 stops the driving of the attachment solenoid 2108 and the big winning opening 2005 is opened. A special winning opening 1 closing display command is sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 for instructing to shift to the closed state (that is, closing start of the big winning opening 2005 of the start opening unit 2100). When the main control board 1310 starts 5 rounds of the big hit gaming state (5th round), the driving of the attachment solenoid 2108 is started, and from the closed state of the big winning opening 2005 to the opened state Large winning opening that instructs to shift (that is, opening of the fifth round of the large winning opening 2005) Transmitting a fifth display commands release from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. Thereby, the peripheral control board 1510 finally switches the screen of the start of the 5 rounds of the big hit gaming state from the screen corresponding to the above-described probability and the short time state, and displays it on the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Become.

  In addition, for example, the game state where the game ball can be accepted to the second start port 2004 becomes a game state that indicates that the game state is advantageous to the player in the game state (for example, the movable piece has been expanded While the peripheral control board 1510 controls the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 to display a screen to communicate to the player, the main control board 1310 drives the common drawing solenoid 2107 to display the pair shown in FIG. When a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs when the movable piece is expanded in the left-right direction, and then the power is restored, the main control board 1310 operates in the working area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. Based on the power recovery time information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting, the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs is restored to start the driving of the common drawing solenoid 2107 And thus the transition to a state of being expanded from a state in which the movable piece is up standing substantially perpendicularly to the lateral direction.

  However, when a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and returns when power is restored. When power is restored thereafter, the peripheral control board 1510 can be restored based on the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310 is in a gaming state and a gaming state in which a gaming ball can be received at the second start port 2004 is generated and a gaming state advantageous to the player is generated, a momentary power failure or power failure occurs. Then, when the power is restored after that, the peripheral control board 1510 displays the screen according to the probability and the time-short state based on the probability and the time-short state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power recovery. Even if it can be displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and returned, it becomes a gaming state in which a game ball can be received at the second starting port 2004 and becomes a gaming state advantageous to the player. The peripheral control board 1510 cannot display the screen indicating that it is present in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 at all. For this reason, the player who sits in front of the pachinko machine is surprised that a momentary power failure or power failure has occurred, and at the time of power recovery, the game ball is received at the second start port 2004 immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs. In some cases, it is forgotten that the gaming state is enabled. In such a case, the gaming state is restored to the second starting port 2004 as a gaming state at the time of power recovery. Nevertheless, a screen for instructing a game (that is, a screen for instructing a game to enter a game ball into the second starting port 2004) is not displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 when power is restored. As a result, there is also a problem that the player can not understand what kind of game the player plays.

  As described above, in the two examples described above, there has been a problem that the gaming state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure can not be promptly returned after power recovery. In other words, a player who sits in front of a pachinko machine mistakes for a momentary power outage or power failure, and then recovers after power recovery, and the pachinko machine system appears to be in a clumped state, a so-called frozen state. There was a problem.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the main control board 1310 is powered on (including power recovery when power is restored due to power failure or momentary power failure, in addition to power on), the power on state command In order to transmit the power-on main control return destination command to the peripheral control board 1510, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command shown in FIG. And are stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information. Then, these commands are to be transmitted in the main control timer interrupt process described later.

  Thus, based on the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command received from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510, for example, in the above-described example, in the fourth round of the big hit gaming state, When a momentary power failure or power failure occurs, and then the power is restored, as the return destination of the main control board 1310, the drive of the attacker solenoid 2108 is started and the state where the special winning opening 2005 is closed is changed to the opened state. Since the peripheral control board 1510 can be informed to the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control board 1510 displays a screen (that is, a screen showing how many rounds) that specifies that the big hit gaming state is four rounds. Although it can not be displayed in the display area of the side effect display device 1600, it is a big hit gaming state and the attacker solenoid 2108 A screen that informs that the grand prize opening 2005 is opened after starting driving (for example, “It is a big hit. The big prize opening is open. A game to make a game ball enter the big prize opening. For the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine by displaying a message telling the player the message “Please give It is possible to instruct the game of entering the ball, and for example, in the above-mentioned example, the game state becomes a game state where the game ball can be received to the second start port 2004 and the game state becomes advantageous to the player In the above state, when a momentary power failure or power failure occurs, and then the power returns, the drive of the common drawing solenoid 2107 is started as a return destination of the main control board 1310, and the pair of movable pieces is expanded in the left and right direction. Display a message telling the player that the game is in progress (for example, "I'm expanding the movable piece. Please play the game so that the game ball enters the lower starting opening.") ) Is displayed on the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the player sitting on the front surface of the pachinko machine is allowed to enter the game ball into the second starting port 2004 after power recovery. Can be instructed. As a result, when an instantaneous power failure or a power failure occurs and then the power is restored, the return destination of the peripheral control board 1510 can be finely instructed on the main control board 1310 side. Therefore, it is possible to quickly return to the gaming state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure after the power recovery. In other words, the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine misunderstands that the system of the pachinko machine appears to be in a frozen state, a so-called frozen state, and breaks down when a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs. Can be prevented.

  Next, in the main control board inspection process, which is an inspection process of a manufacturing line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is first powered on after being manufactured for inspection, the checksum of step S28. Calculation and determination in step S30 will be described. In the main control board inspection step, when the main control board 1310 is first powered on after being manufactured for inspection, a main composed of the processing of step S58 to step S68 which is the backup processing described above and an infinite loop Since the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310 has not executed the control-side power-off process at one time, even if the checksum based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM is calculated in step S28, In the comparison determination, the checksum values cannot be matched, and the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is always cleared in step S38. As a result, when the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on is performed in step S50, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command divided into the power-on shown in FIG. By storing in the transmission information storage area of the main control internal RAM as transmission information, only the two commands of the power on status command and the power on main control return destination command as transmission information transmit information storage area of the main control internal RAM as transmission information Will be stored in the state. In these commands, a power on state command is first transmitted in the main control side timer interrupt process to be described later, and then a power on main control return destination command is transmitted. Using this, in the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is first powered on after being manufactured for inspection, the power on state command from the main control board 1310 is taken as the first command. It is transmitted to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process.

  By the way, as described above, the power-on state command is as shown in FIG. 124 at the time of power-on (in addition to the case of power-on, it also includes power-on recovery due to power failure or momentary power outage). Information indicating that when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 shown is operated to clear the RAM, and when the power is turned on (other than when the power is turned on, a power failure or a momentary interruption occurs and the power is Information indicating which state (probability and time reduction state) of the low probability time short state, the high probability time short state, and the low probability short time state described above are to be restored in the recovery from power recovery. And information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine. Here, the problem in the case where the power-on state command does not include the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine will be described.

  As described above, the model code of the pachinko machine corresponds to the copyright of which work when creating the so-called max type, middle type and sweet digital type as the pachinko machine 1 (more precisely, the main control board 1310). What kind of gaming specifications (for example, if the probability variation occurs, the state will continue until the next big hit gaming state occurs, in addition to the number of variations of special symbols (for example, It is possible to specify whether or not the game specifications (so-called ST machine, etc.)) in which the probability fluctuation occurs in the state of 30 times or 70 times).

In the manufacturing line of the maker who manufactures the pachinko machine 1, when manufacturing the main control board 1310, the main control board 1310 with respect to the copyright of a plurality of types of works may be mixed.
Then, the worker of the production line is the master of the copyright of any work among the copyrights of a plurality of kinds of works (for example, the copyright of works such as movie A, movie B, drama C, movie D, cartoon E, and cartoon F). The main control board for one of the copyrights of a plurality of types of works (for example, the copyright of a work of movie D) among the copyrights of a plurality of types of works can not be known whether the main control board 1310 flows to the manufacturing line to manufacture the control board 1310 Although the main control board 1310 flows to the manufacturing line to manufacture 1310, the main control board 1310 is used to manufacture the main control board 1310 for another copyright (for example, the copyright for the work of cartoon F). There are also misconceptions and misconceptions that flow to the manufacturing line. For this reason, when manufacturing the main control board 1310 in the manufacturing line of the maker that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control board 1310 for the copyright of a plurality of types of works is mixed, the worker of the manufacturing line It is not possible to confirm to which work copyright the manufactured main control board 1310 belongs, and which model type (max type, middle type, sweet digital type, etc.) for the same work copyright It is also impossible to confirm whether it is a type, and what game specifications (a game specification or a ST machine in which, when probability fluctuations occur, the state is continued until a next big hit gaming state occurs). As a result, when manufacturing the main control substrate 1310 in the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control substrate 1310 for the copyrights of multiple types of works coexists, the main control substrate for the copyrights of multiple types of works It will be sent to the game board assembly line for attaching the main control board 1310 to the game board 5 while 1310 is mixed. Therefore, a worker of the game board assembly line may attach the main control board 1310 not corresponding to the game board 5 to the copyright of the work to the game board 5 in some cases. As a result, there is a problem that the production efficiency of the game board 5 is reduced.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 is turned on (including when the power is turned on, and also when the power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure), the model code of the pachinko machine is included. In step S50, a power-on state command and a power-on main control return destination command classified into power-on shown in FIG. And are stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information. Then, these commands are to be transmitted in the main control timer interrupt process described later.

  Thereby, an operator of a manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1 turns on the main control board 1310 in the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process of the production line, so that the inspection apparatus causes the main control board 1310 to turn on. Based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on state command received from the above, that is, constituting the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine, the above-described max type indicating the model type, middle type, And a series code for specifying which of the types is a sweet digital type, a copyright code for specifying the copyright of the work, and a game specification (for example, when probability change occurs, the next jackpot game state is In addition to the game specification that the state will continue until it occurs, the probability variation with a limited number of special symbol variations By checking the detailed model information displayed on the inspection monitor based on the game specification code for specifying the game specification (ST machine, etc.), the main control board 1310 is associated with which copyright. It is possible to determine the type of machine, and for the copyright of the same work, which model type (max type, middle type, and sweet digital type), and what game specifications It is also possible to determine whether the game state or ST machine is such that when the probability variation occurs, that state will continue until the next big hit gaming state occurs. Thereby, when manufacturing the main control board 1310 in the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, even if the main control board 1310 for the copyrights of a plurality of types of works is mixed, the main control board inspection process of the production line The operator can discriminate each main control board 1310 with respect to the copyright of the work, by accurately determining the model type of the main control board 1310, the copyright of the work, and the game specification by visually checking the inspection monitor. It can be sent to the game board assembly line. The operator of the game board assembly line can securely attach the main control board 1310 corresponding to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work to the game board 5, and the main control board not corresponding to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work. It is possible to prevent a decrease in production efficiency of the game board 5 caused by the work of attaching 1310 to the game board 5. Therefore, it can contribute to the improvement of the production efficiency of the game board 5.

[14-3. Main control timer interrupt processing]
Next, the main control timer interrupt process will be described. This main control side timer interrupt process is repeated at every interrupt cycle (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the main control side power-on process shown in FIGS. 146 and 147.

  When the main control side timer interrupt process is started, in the main control board 1310, the main control program switches the register bank as shown in FIG. 148 under the control of the main control MPU 1310a (step S100). The general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a has two register banks each composed of a first register bank and a second register bank. The first register bank is used in the main control main process in the main control side power-on process described above, while the first register bank is used in the main control timer interrupt process which is this routine. In step S100, in order to use the second register bank in the main control side timer interrupt process which is this routine, the first register bank used in the main control main process in the main control side power on process is selected from the first register bank Switch the register bank to the register tank of. In the present embodiment, when the main control timer interrupt process, which is this routine, is started, the process of saving each register to the stack is not necessary.

  Subsequent to step S100, the main control program performs timer subtraction processing (step S102). In this timer subtraction process, for example, the time during which the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 turn on in accordance with the special symbol to be described later and the variable display pattern determined in the special electric character control process Payout control board 951 various commands transmitted by the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) in addition to the time when the normal symbol display 1402 lights up in accordance with the normal symbol variation display pattern determined in the symbol and normal motor combination control process. When it is determined whether or not the customer ACK signal that indicates the normal reception is received is determined, time management such as an ACK signal input determination time set as the determination condition is performed. Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interruption period is set to 4 ms, so the fluctuation time is subtracted by 4 ms each time this timer subtraction processing is performed. When the subtraction result becomes 0, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is accurately measured.

  In this embodiment, the ACK signal input determination time is set to 100 ms. Each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the ACK signal input determination time is subtracted by 4 ms, and the subtraction result becomes 0, thereby accurately measuring the ACK signal input determination time. The various times and the ACK signal input determination time are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

  As described above, when the movable member 2011a of the normal motorized winning opening 2011 is operated to the open state by winning normally, the time when the time saving state is controlled rather than the normal gaming state (non-time shortening state) The time for maintaining the open state is extended, whereby the game ball can be easily accepted in the normal electric winning hole 2011 when being controlled to the short time state. Here, when the normal winning is won, the normal symbol variation corresponding to the corresponding selection is started. As long as this normal symbol variation is not stopped, the normal electric prize winning opening 2011 is set in step S116 shown in FIG. 148. There is no transition to the processing step of operating the movable member 2011a. That is, in this case, the movable member 2011a of the normal motorized winning opening 2011 does not move to the open state and maintains the closed state. On the other hand, when the normal symbol variation is hit and stopped at the symbol, the process proceeds to the processing step of operating the movable member 2011a of the ordinary electric winning hole 2011 in step S116 shown in FIG. The movable member 2011a of 2011 comes to operate to the open state.

  Subsequent to step S102, the main control program performs switch input processing (step S104). In this switch input process, various signals input to the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Specifically, the main control program detects, for example, a detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 4020 or 4020 shown in FIG. 123 which detects the game ball entering the general winning opening 2001 or 2201 shown in FIG. Detecting the game ball entering the big winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. 8 The detection signal from the count sensor 4005 shown in FIG. 123 detects the game ball entering the first starting opening 2002 shown in FIG. The detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 4002 shown in FIG. 123, the detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 4004 shown in FIG. 123 which detects the game ball entering the second starting opening 2004 shown in FIG. The detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 shown in FIG. 123 which detects the game ball which has passed through the gate unit 2003 shown in FIG. 8 and the magnet which detects the cheating using the magnet shown in FIG. The payout ACK signal from the payout control board 951 which indicates that the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 123 has normally received the detection signal from the detection sensor 4024 and the prize ball command transmitted in the prize ball control processing described later Each is read and stored as input information in the input information storage area. In addition, the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 4002 which detects the game ball which entered the first starting opening 2002, the detection from the second starting opening sensor 4004 which detects the game ball which entered the second starting opening 2004 When each signal is read, the start opening winning command classified in the other shown in FIG. 144 corresponding to this is stored as the transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above. That is, when there is a detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 4002, the corresponding starting opening winning command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, and there is a detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 4004. The start-up winning command corresponding to this is stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information.

  In this embodiment, detection signals from general winning opening sensors 4020 and 4020 for detecting gaming balls entering the general winning openings 2001 and 2201, and count sensors 4005 for detecting gaming balls entering the large winning opening 2005. Detection signal from the first starting opening 2002, detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 4002 for detecting gaming balls entering the second starting opening 2002, second starting opening sensor 4004 for detecting the gaming balls entering the second starting opening 2004 The detection signal from the gate and the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 for detecting gaming balls that have passed through the gate unit 2003 are first read as the first time when the switch input processing is started, for a predetermined time (for example, 10 μs) ) After the passage, each is read again as the second time. Then, the result of the second reading is compared with the result of the first reading. It is determined whether there is a comparison result among the comparison results. If the result is not the same, the result is further read again as the third time, and the result of the third read is compared with the result of the second read. It is determined again whether there is a comparison result among the comparison results. If the result is not the same, it is read again as the fourth time, and the result of the fourth read is compared with the result of the third read. It is determined again whether there is a comparison result among the comparison results. Those with the same result are treated as having no game balls.

  Thus, in the switch input process, the main control program detects the detection signals from the general winning opening sensors 4020 and 4020, the count sensor 4005, the first starting opening sensor 4002, the second starting opening sensor 4004, and the gate sensor 4003 The effect of chattering, noise, etc. is achieved by performing two readings in total: two readings comparing the first to third times and two readings comparing the second to fourth times. Since false detection can be avoided, detection signals from the general winning opening sensors 4020 and 4020, the count sensor 4005, the first starting opening sensor 4002, the second starting opening sensor 4004, and the gate sensor 4003 Reliability can be increased.

  Subsequent to step S104, the main control program performs a false random number update process (step S106). In this winning random number update process, the big hit symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number described above are updated. Further, in addition to these random numbers, the big hit symbol initial value determination random number updated in the non-winning random number update process of step S56 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. And the random number for the initial value decision for small hitting design is renewed. The random value for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol and the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol are updated in the main control side main process and the main control side timer interrupt process, respectively, thereby improving the randomness. . On the other hand, since the big hit symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number are random numbers related to the winning determination (big hit determination), each counter is incremented only when the winning random number update process is performed. Note that the above-described random numbers for normal symbol determination and random numbers for determining the initial value for normal symbol determination are also updated by this winning random number update process.

  For example, as described above, the counter for updating the random number per pattern determination is an initial value updating type counter, and is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical range from the minimum value to the maximum value, and this minimum value To the maximum value, the value is incremented by adding 1 each time the main control timer interrupt process is performed. The symbol is counted up from the random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal pattern to the maximum value, and then it is counted up from the minimum value toward the random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal pattern. When the counter has counted up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the random number per symbol normal determination, the random number for big hit determination is updated by this success random number update process. The random value for determining the initial value for normal symbol determination can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process for drawing one value from the fixed numerical range of the counter for updating the random number for determination per normal symbol. .

  In this embodiment, the random number for the big hit symbol initial value determination and the random number for the small hit symbol initial value determination are not displayed in step S56 in the main control side power on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. Although updating is performed in the current random number update processing and the main control side timer interrupt processing that is the main routine in step S106 in the main control side timer interrupt processing, the processing time of the present routine is uneven every time the interrupt timer is generated. If the number of executions of the non-match random number update process in step S56 becomes random by repeatedly executing the main control side main process within the remaining time until the generation of the interrupt timer, the random number for determining the initial value of the jackpot symbol Also, a mechanism for updating the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol only in the non-winning random number update process in step S56. .

  Subsequent to step S106, the main control program performs a winning ball control process (step S108). In this prize ball control process, the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and the prize ball command shown in FIG. 142 for paying out the game ball based on this input information is created and paid out as a prize ball. When the number of scheduled game balls has reached 10, the main prize ball number information output signal is set to notify that fact and stored as output information in the output information storage area, The self-check command shown in FIG. 142 for confirming the connection state between the control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 is created. Then, the prize ball command and the self-check command that have been created are transmitted to the payout control board 951 as main payment serial data. For example, when one game ball enters the big winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. 8, a prize ball command for paying out 15 balls as a prize ball is created, and the number of game balls to be paid out as a prize ball Is set to 10 balls, the main prize ball number information output signal output is set in order to notify that, and is stored in the output information storage area as output information, and a prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control board 951. Or when the payout ACK signal notifying that the payout control substrate 951 has received the award ball command normally is not input within a predetermined time, the connection state between the main control substrate 1310 and the payout control substrate 951 is confirmed. A self-check command to be generated is transmitted to the payout control board 951. If the number of game balls to be paid out as a prize ball exceeds 10 as in the case of creating a prize ball command for paying out 15 balls as a prize ball, In the prize ball control process, the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, the number of game balls to be paid out as a prize ball is added based on this input information, and the added number of game balls When the number has reached 15 balls, the output of the main prize ball number information output signal is set in order to inform the fact and stored as output information in the output information storage area.

Subsequent to step S108, the main control program performs a frame command reception process (step S110). In the payout control board 951, the payout control program executes various commands of 1 byte (8 bits) classified into the status display shown in FIG. 145 (for example, frame status 1 command, error release navigation command, and frame status 2 command). Send On the other hand, as described later, the payout control program outputs an error occurrence command when an error occurs in the payout operation, or outputs an error cancellation navi command based on a detection signal of the operation switch 954.
In the frame command reception process described above, when the main control program normally receives the various commands as the payee serial data, the information for conveying the fact to the payout control board 951 is stored as the output information of the output information of the main control internal RAM. Store in the area. In addition, the main control program reformats the command received normally as the payer serial data into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (various commands (frame status 1 command, error cancelation) classified in the status display of FIG. 144. The navigation command and the frame state 2 command) are stored in the transmission information storage area described above as transmission information. The frame state 1 command here corresponds to the first error occurrence command, and the error cancellation navigation command corresponds to the first error cancellation command.

  Subsequent to step S110, the main control program performs a fraudulent operation detection process (step S112). In this fraudulent action detection process, the abnormal state regarding the winning balls is confirmed. For example, when the input information is read out from the above-described input information storage area and the detection signal from the count sensor 4005 is input when the game is not in the big hit gaming state (when the game ball enters the big winning opening 2005) A prize failure display command divided into the notification display shown in FIG. 144 as an abnormal state is created, and is stored in the transmission information storage area described above as transmission information.

  Subsequent to step S112, the main control program performs a special symbol and special electric accessory control process (step S114). In this special symbol and special motorized product control process, a latch signal is output to the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310 an shown in FIG. 123, and the random number extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310 an when the latch signal is input. The (random number value) is acquired from a hard random number latch register incorporated in the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a, and the acquired random number value is set as a jackpot determination random number. Then, whether or not the big hit judgment random number (that is, the random number value acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a) matches the big hit decision value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM. It is determined whether the jackpot gaming state is to be generated or not (referred to as "special lottery") or the value of the counter for updating the jackpot symbol random number is taken out and stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM It is determined whether or not it matches with the probability variation determination value (determination of whether or not to generate a probability fluctuation). Here, “probability fluctuation” means that the probability of hitting a jackpot changes to a high probability (probability variation) set higher than that at normal time (low probability). In the present embodiment, values 32668 to 32767 are set as the range (big hit determination range) of the above-described big hit determination values with low probability and are read out from the normal determination table, while the value is 31768 with high probability. ˜value 32767 is set and read from the probability variation determination table. Thus, in the special symbol and special motorized product control process in step S114, the jackpot determination random number (that is, the random number value acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a) and the built-in main control When it is determined whether or not the jackpot judgment value stored in advance in the ROM matches, the jackpot judgment random number (that is, a random number value acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a) Is determined by whether or not is included in the big hit determination range.

  When these determination results are based on the first starting opening sensor 4002, various commands related to the special figure 1 tuning effect shown in FIG. 143 are created, while the lottery results are based on the second starting opening sensor 4004. In some cases, various commands related to the special figure 2 tuning effect shown in FIG. 143 are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, and the first special symbol display according to the determined variation display pattern of the special symbol Set the output of the lighting signal to the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 so that the second special symbol display 1405 is turned on and stored in the output information storage area described above as output information Do. Depending on the game state to be generated, for example, when the game state is a big hit game state, various commands classified into the big hit relationship shown in FIG. 143 (a big hit opening command, a big winning opening 1 opening Nth display command, a big winning opening 1 A closing display command, a big winning opening 1 count display command, a big hit ending command, and a big hit symbol display command), and storing them in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, or opening / closing the big winning opening 2005. When the number of times (round) in which the special winning opening 2005 changes from the closing state to the opening state is two, the output of the driving signal to the driving signal is set and stored as the output information in the output information storage area. 2 rounds to make the 2 round indicator lamp 1407a of the round indicator 1407 light The output of the lighting signal to the lamp 1407a is set, and stored as output information in the output information storage area, or when the round is 15 times, the 15-round display lamp 1407b of the round indicator 1407 shown in FIG. The lighting signal to the status indicator 1401 is set to set the output of the lighting signal to the 15-round display lamp 1407b and store it as output information in the output information storage area, or light the presence or absence of occurrence of probability fluctuation in a predetermined color The output of is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S114, the main control program performs normal symbol and normal motorized product control processing (step S116). In the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process, the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and the gate winning process is performed based on the input information. In this gate winning process, it is determined from the input information whether or not a detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 has been input to the input terminal. Based on the determination result, when the detection signal is input to the input terminal, the value etc. of the counter for updating the above-mentioned random number per symbol for determination is extracted and gate information storage area of the main control internal RAM as gate information To remember.

  In this gate information storage area, the 0th to third partitions (four partitions) are provided, and gate information is stored in the order of the 0th partition, the first partition, the second partition, and the third partition. It is supposed to be. For example, when gate information is stored in the 0th to 2nd sections of the gate information storage, the gate information is stored in the 3rd section of the gate information storage when the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 is input to the input terminal Do.

  The gate information stored in the zeroth section of the gate information storage is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. When this gate information is set, the gate information of the first section of the gate information storage is in the 0th section of the gate information storage, the gate information of the second section of the gate information storage is in the first section of the gate information storage, The gate information of the third section of the information storage is shifted to the second section of the gate information storage, and the third section of the gate information storage becomes an empty area. For example, when gate information is stored in the first to second sections of the gate information storage, the gate information of the first section of the gate information storage is stored in the zeroth section of the gate information storage. The gate information of the two sections is shifted to the first section of the gate information storage, and the second section of the gate information storage and the third section of the gate information storage become empty areas. Here, when the gate information is stored in the first to third sections of the gate information storage, the gate information described above causes the normal symbol storage indicator 1188 to light up with the total number of stored gate information as a holding ball. The output of the lighting signal of the normal symbol storage indicator 1188 is set based on the above, and stored as the output information in the above-mentioned output information storage area.

  Following the gate winning process, the gate information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM is read out, and the normal design random number is extracted from the read gate information and stored in the main control built-in ROM in advance. It is determined whether or not it matches the normal symbol hit determination value (referred to as a "normal lottery"). Whether or not to move the movable member 2011a (a pair of movable pieces) of the normal electric prize winning port 2011 to the open state is determined based on the determination result (the lottery result by the normal lottery). When the opening and closing operation is performed by this determination, the pair of movable pieces is expanded in the left and right direction, and the game ball can be accepted to the ordinary electric winning hole 2011, which is advantageous to the player. It becomes gaming state. The variation display pattern of the normal symbol corresponding to this determination is determined based on the random number for the normal symbol variation display pattern described above, and various commands classified into the common figure synchronization effect related shown in FIG. 143 are created and transmitted as transmission information The output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display 1402 is set to light the normal symbol display 1402 according to the determined variation display pattern of the normal symbol while being stored in the transmission information storage area described above, and the output information is described above as the output information Store in the output information storage area. Also, for example, when the value of the random number for determining the normal symbol taken out matches the determination value for the normal symbol stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, various commands relating to the ordinary electric circuit production shown in FIG. And store the output in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and set the output of the drive signal to the common drawing solenoid 2107 to open and close the movable member 2011a (a pair of movable pieces) of the ordinary electric winning hole 2011 While storing in the above-mentioned output information storage area as output information, when the value of the random symbol determination random number per symbol that has been taken out does not match the standard symbol per round determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, The normal symbol variation display pattern is determined based on the random number for the normal symbol variation display pattern, and is classified into the common drawing synchronization effect related shown in FIG. 143 Various commands are created and stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area as transmission information, and the output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display 1402 is made to light the normal symbol display 1402 according to the determined normal symbol variation display pattern It is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area described above.

  Subsequent to step S116, the main control program performs port output processing (step S118). In this port output process, output information is read from the output information storage area described above from the output terminals of various output ports of the main control MPU 1310a, and various signals are output based on the output information. The main control program is, for example, based on the output information, and when the various commands from the payout control board 951 are normally received from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a, the main payout ACK signal is output to the payout control board 951. To the attacker solenoid 2108 that opens and closes the winning prize opening 2005 when in a big hit gaming state, or the normal solenoid 2107 that opens and closes the movable member 2011a of the ordinary electric winning opening 2011 In addition to outputting a drive signal, the main prize ball number information output signal, 15 round big hit information output signal, 2 round big hit information output signal, probability fluctuation in-progress information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information Regarding the game such as output signal, time information output information, starting opening winning information output signal etc And outputs various information (game information) signal to the payout control board 951. In addition, if the power is shut off between the winning of the normal hit and the stopping of the normal symbol, or the RAM is cleared between the winning of the normal hitting and the stopping of the normal symbol. In some cases, the normal symbol variation is not stopped but the movable member 2011a of the normal electric winning award port 2011 is not opened.

  Subsequent to step S118, the main control program performs peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S120). In the peripheral control board command transmission process, the main control program reads transmission information from the transmission information storage area described above, and transmits the transmission information to the peripheral control board 1510 as main cycle serial data. In this transmission information, various commands classified in the special figure 1 tuning effect related shown in FIG. 143 created in the main control timer interrupt processing which is this routine, various types classified in the special figure 2 synchronous effect related A command winning hole based on a detection signal from the count sensor 4005 (see FIG. 123) when a game ball entered into various commands (for example, the big winning opening 2005 (see FIG. 8)) divided into a command and a big hit relation is detected. Large winning opening 1 count display command corresponding to the count command), various commands classified as power on, various commands classified as general drawing entrainment related, various commands classified as regular electric circuit related, Various commands (door open command, door frame close command, main frame open command, main frame close command, etc.) classified into the notification display, status display Segmented by various commands (frame state 1 command, error reset navigation command and the frame state 2 command), various commands and various commands are classified into other are divided into test-related are stored. The main serial data consists of 3 bytes per packet. Specifically, the main peripheral serial data includes a status indicating a type of command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode indicating a production variation having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a status. And a sum value obtained by calculating the sum of the modes as numerical values, and this sum value is created at the time of transmission.

  In this peripheral control board command transmission process, the main control program transmits to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which configures various commands as main cycle serial data. As described above, when a power failure or an instantaneous stop occurs, the charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 131 is applied as +5 V to the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. Therefore, the main cycle serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. 133 shifts at least the command set by the main control CPU core 1310aa in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb by using the serial management unit 1310aec. The data can be transferred to the register 41aea, and transmission can be completed from the transmission shift register 1310aea as the main cycle serial data. When a power failure is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power outage, in the reservation setting of the command to be sent when the power is turned on in step S50 in the main control power-on process shown in FIG. In addition, the power-on state command and power-on main control return destination command shown in FIG. 143 are generated and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. , Constituting a power-on state command as main peripheral serial data, transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, and subsequently configuring a main control return destination command at power-on, status, The mode and then the sum value is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in this order. In the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, the game information is read from the game backup information in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the main control side power-on process. Various commands may be stored. In such a case, first after completion of transmission of various commands according to the game information, a power-on state command and a power-on main control return destination command are transmitted.

  In this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a frame state 1 command (first error occurrence command) from the payout control board 951 via the RXA terminal reception port, the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control unit) And the frame state 1 command (second error generation command) is transmitted (error command transmission means). In this case, the main control program transfers the frame state 1 command in the form shown in FIG. 145 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the frame state 1 command in the form shown in FIG.

  On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, if the main control program receives an error release navigation command (first error release command) from the payout control board 951 through the reception port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 An error release navi command (second error release command) is transmitted to the (error command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the error release navi command in the form shown in FIG. 145 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the error release navi command in the form shown in FIG.

  Furthermore, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a main body frame release command (first main body frame release command) from the payout control board 951 via the RXA terminal reception port, the peripheral control board 1510 A main body frame open command (second main body frame open command) is transmitted to (effect control unit) (main body frame command transmission means, second main body frame transmission means). In this case, the main control program transfers the body frame release command in the form shown in FIG. 145 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the body frame release command in the form shown in FIG. On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a main body frame close command (first main body frame close command) from the payout control board 951 through the reception port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 ( A main body frame closing command (second main body frame closing command) is transmitted to the effect control unit) (main body frame command transmission means, second main body frame command transmission means). In this case, the main control program transfers the main body frame closing command in the form shown in FIG. 145 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the main body frame closing command in the form shown in FIG.

  In the peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a door open command (first door open command) from the payout control board 951 through the reception port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control) A door opening command (second door frame opening command) (door frame command sending means, second door frame command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the door frame closing command in the form shown in FIG. 145 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the door closing command in the form shown in FIG. On the other hand, in the peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives the door closing command (first door closing command) from the payout control board 951 by the reception port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control) A door closing command (second door closing command) (door frame command sending means, second door frame command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the door closing command in the form shown in FIG. 145 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the door closing command in the form shown in FIG.

  Following step S120, the main control program clears the main control built-in WDT 1310af shown in FIG. 123 (step S122), and ends this routine. The main control built-in WDT 1310af in step S22 is cleared by setting a timer clear setting value in a WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a. Thereby, the time count by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared. Then, the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is started again, so that the main control MPU 1310a is not forcedly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af.

  Note that, as described above, when the main control board 1310 is in the process of proceeding with the game, the above-described backup for storing the game information by the progress of the game before the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off The process can be executed and completed, and at the time of power recovery, the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is shut off based on the game information for which the backup process has been executed as a return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 143 when the power-on main control return destination command of FIG. Can be output to. In other words, the main control board 1310 is set in the reservation setting of the command transmitted at power-on in step S50 in the main-control-side power-on process in FIG. Based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the control built-in RAM, the power on status command divided into the power on status in Fig. 143 and the power on status are reported to notify that power has been switched on (power recovery). A control return destination command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S120 in this routine, the power-on state command is used as the main peripheral serial data. Are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, There are constituting the main control return destination command at power-transmitting status, mode, and a peripheral control board 1510 in the order of thumb value. Therefore, based on the power-on main control return destination command from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510 returns the game progress by the main control board 1310 at the time of power return to the game board side effect display device 1600. It is possible to display effects in the display area. As a result, when a player is playing a game, when a momentary power failure or power failure occurs, and when power is restored thereafter, the game state immediately before the power failure or power failure is restored immediately after power recovery. In addition, the return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 can be displayed and notified in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, so that the system of the pachinko machine 1 is clumped, so-called freeze Thus, it is possible to prevent the player from being mistaken for the failure due to the appearance of the player. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being misunderstood by returning to the gaming state immediately before a momentary power failure or a power failure, and returning promptly after power recovery.

  Further, in the main control board inspection step which is an inspection step of the manufacturing line of the main control board 1310, when the power of the main control board 1310 is first turned on after being manufactured for inspection, as described above, In step S38 in the main control side power-on process, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is necessarily cleared. Thereby, in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50 in the same process, when the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on, the power-on state command divided into the power-on shown in FIG. And a power-on main control return destination command are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, two commands of a power-on state command and a power-on main control return destination command Is stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control internal RAM as transmission information, and in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in this routine, the power on state command is configured as the main cycle serial data. Check the main control board inspection process in the order of status, mode, and thumb value. Send apparatus, followed by forming the main control return destination command at power-transmitting status, mode, and the inspection apparatus of the main control board inspection process in the order of thumb value. The inspection apparatus of the main control board inspection process configures information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310, that is, information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine. The above-mentioned series type for specifying the model type, max type, middle type, and sweet digital type, the series code for specifying the type, the copyright code for specifying the copyright of the work, and the game specification (For example, in addition to a game specification in which when a probability change occurs, that state will continue until the next jackpot game state occurs, a game specification in which a probability change occurs with a limited number of special symbol changes (ST Detailed machine model information is displayed on the inspection monitor of the main control board inspection process based on the game specification code for identifying the machine) It has become.

[15. Various control processing of payout control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 124 will be described with reference to FIGS. 149 to 165. FIG. 149 is a flowchart showing an example of the process when the payout control unit is turned on, FIG. 150 is a flowchart showing the continuation of the process when the payout control unit is turned on in FIG. 149, and FIG. FIG. 152 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a payout control unit timer interrupt process, FIG. 153 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a rotation detection sensor history creation process, and FIG. 154 is a sprocket. FIG. 155 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a ball corner determination process, and FIG. 156 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a prize ball stock number addition process for a prize ball. FIG. 158 is a flowchart showing an example of the winning ball stock number addition processing of the rental balls, and FIG. FIG. 159 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a payout ball edge motion determination setting process, FIG. 160 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a payout setting process, and FIG. FIG. 162 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a retry operation monitoring process, FIG. 163 is a flowchart illustrating an example of an inconsistency counter reset determination process, and FIG. 164 is an error release operation determination. FIG. 165 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing, and FIG. 165 is a timing chart showing signal processing (a) at the time of payout operation by ball lending and input signal confirmation processing (b) from the CR unit.

  First, the payout control unit power-on processing will be described, and then, the payout control unit timer interrupt processing, ball removal switch operation determination processing, rotation detection sensor history creation processing, sprocket fixed position determination skip processing, ball coverage determination processing, prize Ball prize ball stock number addition processing, prize ball stock number addition processing for rental balls, stock monitoring processing, withdrawal ball look operation judgment setting processing, payout setting processing, ball look operation setting processing, retry operation monitor processing, inconsistency The counter reset determination process and the error release operation determination process will be described. In addition, ball removal switch operation determination processing, rotation detection sensor history creation processing, sprocket fixed position determination skip processing, ball sight determination processing, prize ball prize ball stock number addition processing, rental ball prize ball stock number addition processing, stock The monitoring process, the payout ball viewing operation determination setting process, the retry operation monitoring process, the inconsistency counter reset determination process, and the error release operation determination process are one of the main operation setting processes in step S562 in the payout control unit power-on process described later. Performed as processing, rotation detection sensor history creation processing, sprocket fixed position determination skip processing, ball look determination processing, retry operation monitoring processing, inconsistency counter reset determination processing, error release operation determination processing, prize ball stock ball number Addition processing, winning ball stock number addition processing for rental balls, stock monitoring processing, and the processing for setting out the movement of the balls to be judged Priority in turn has been set.

[15-1. Processing when the dispensing control unit is turned on]
When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the payout control program in the payout control unit 952 of the payout control board 951 turns on the payout control unit as shown in FIGS. 149 to 151 under the control of the payout control MPU 952a. Perform time processing. When the payout control unit power-on process is started, the payout control program causes the payout control MPU 952a to set an interrupt mode (step S500). This interrupt mode is to set the priority of the interrupt of the payout control MPU 952a. In the present embodiment, a payout control unit timer interrupt process described later is set to the highest priority, and when an interrupt of the payout control unit timer interrupt process occurs, the process is preferentially performed.

  Subsequent to step S500, the payout control program performs input / output setting (I / O input / output setting) (step S502). In this I / O input / output setting, various input ports and various output ports of the payout control MPU 952a are set.

  Subsequent to step S502, the payout control program performs weight timer process 1 (step S506), and determines whether or not a power failure notice signal is input (step S508). The voltage does not rise immediately between the time the power is turned on and the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs (a phenomenon in which the supply of power is suspended), the voltage drops and becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. A warning signal (paid outage warning signal) is input. Similarly, when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage during the period from the power-on to the predetermined voltage, a power failure notification signal (payout failure notification signal) is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310 e of the main control board 1310. Therefore, wait timer process 1 in step S506 is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes larger than the power failure notice voltage and becomes stable after power on. In the present embodiment, 200 milliseconds (wait timer) is used as a waiting time (wait timer). ms) is set. The determination in step S508 is performed based on the power failure notification signal (payout failure notification signal) from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310.

  Following step S508, the payout control program determines whether the operation switch 954 is operated (step S512). This determination is based on the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954, and when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is HI, it is determined that the RAM clear is not instructed. If the operation switch 954 is determined to be instructed to clear the RAM when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is LOW, it is determined that the operation switch 954 is operated. judge.

  When the operation switch 954 is operated in step S512, the payout control program sets the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG to the value 1 (step S514). That is, the payout control program can execute a RAM clear process for initializing a RAM (hereinafter referred to as “payout control built-in RAM”) built in the payout control MPU 952a for a predetermined time from when the power is turned on. State (the discharge control side power on operation control means). On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is not operated in step S512, the payout control program sets a value 0 to the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG (step S516). This payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is stored in the payout control built-in RAM (payout storage unit) of the payout control MPU 952a, for example, various flags, various information stored in various information storage areas, etc. (for example, The prize ball stock number PBS, real ball count PB, drive command number DRV, inconsistency counter INCC, etc. stored in the prize ball information storage area, and the logic of the PRDY signal stored in the CR communication information storage area Flag indicating whether or not the payout information related to payout of the set status (PRDY signal output setting information, etc.) is to be erased, and is set to a value of 1 when the payout information is erased and a value of 0 when the payout information is not erased. Is done. Note that the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG set in steps S514 and S516 is stored in a general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the payout control MPU 952a.

  Following step S514 or step S516, the payout control program performs setting for permitting access to the payout control internal RAM (step S518). By this setting, the payout control built-in RAM can be accessed, and for example, writing (storage) or reading of the payout information can be performed.

  Subsequent to step S518, the payout control program sets the stack pointer (step S520). The stack pointer indicates, for example, an address stacked on the stack to temporarily store the contents of a storage element (register) in use, or temporarily returns the return address of this routine when the subroutine is ended and returned to this routine. It indicates the address that is stacked on the stack for storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked. In step S520, an initial address is set in the stack pointer, and the contents of the register, the return address, etc. are stacked on the stack from this initial address. Then, the stack pointer returns to the initial address by sequentially reading from the last stacked stack to the first stacked stack.

  Following step S520, the payout control program determines whether or not the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG has a value of 0 (step S522). As described above, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the payout information is erased and to a value of 0 when the payout information is not erased.

  When it is determined in step S522 that the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG has a value of 0, that is, when the payout information is not erased, the payout control program calculates a checksum (step S524). This checksum is to calculate the total by regarding the payout information stored in the payout control built-in RAM as a numerical value.

  Subsequent to step S524, the payout control program determines whether the calculated checksum value matches the checksum value stored in the payout control unit power-off process (described at power-off) described later. (Step S526). If they match, the payout control program determines whether or not the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is 1 (step S528). The payout backup flag HBK-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not payout backup information such as the payout information and the checksum value is stored and held in the payout control internal RAM in the payout control unit power-off process described later. A value of 1 is set when the control unit power-off process is normally terminated, and a value of 0 is set when the payout control unit power-off process is not normally terminated.

  When the payout backup flag HBK-FLG has a value of 1 in step S528, that is, when the payout control unit power-off process is normally terminated, the payout control program sets the work area of the payout control built-in RAM as power recovery. (Step S530). In this setting, in addition to the value 0 being set in the payout backup flag HBK-FLG, information at the time of power recovery is read from the ROM built in the payout control MPU 952a (hereinafter referred to as “ROM with built-in payout control”). This power recovery information is set in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM. Accordingly, the above-mentioned payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, various flags, various information stored in various information storage areas, etc. (for example, prizes stored in the prize ball information storage area, PRDY signal output setting information in which the logic state of the PRDY signal stored in the CR communication information storage area, such as the ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, and the like, Information used for various processes is set based on payout information relating to payout of inconsistency counter reset determination time (stored in the time management information storage area). Note that “recovery” includes not only a state in which the power is turned off from a state in which the power is turned off but also a state in which the power is restored after a power failure or a momentary power failure.

  On the other hand, when the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step S522, that is, when the payout information is erased, or when the checksum values do not match in step S526, or step When the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0) in S528, that is, when the payout control unit power-off process is not normally terminated, the payout control program reads the entire area of the payout control built-in RAM. It clears (step S532). That is, the payout control program executes a payout control side RAM clear process triggered by detection of an operation signal from the operation switch 954 (payout control side power-on operation control means). As a result, the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is cleared.

  Subsequent to step S532, the payout control program sets the work area of the payout control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S534). In this setting, the initial information is read from the payout control built-in ROM, and the initial information is set in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S530 or step S534, the payout control program performs interrupt initialization (step S536). This setting is to set an interrupt cycle when a payout control unit timer interrupt process to be described later is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 2 ms.

  Subsequent to step S536, the payout control program performs interrupt permission setting (step S538). With this setting, the payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed at the interrupt cycle set in step S536, that is, every 2 ms.

  Following step S538, the payout control program sets the value A in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S539). The value A, the value B and the value C are sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL to clear the watchdog timer.

  Following step S539, the payout control program determines whether or not a power failure advance notification signal (payout failure notification signal) is input (step S540). As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is shut off, or when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, if the voltage falls below the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal (paid power failure warning signal) is sent to the main control board 1310 as a power failure warning. Is input from the blackout monitoring circuit 1310e. The determination in step S540 is performed based on the power failure advance signal.

  If there is no input of the power failure advance notice signal in step S540, the payout control program determines whether the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is equal to 1 (step S542). The 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag that counts 2 ms in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing that is processed every 2 ms, which will be described later. When 2 ms has elapsed, the value 1 and 2 ms have not elapsed. It is set.

  If the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 0 in step S542, that is, if 2 ms has not elapsed, the process returns to step S540, and the payout control program determines whether or not the blackout notice signal (payout blackout notice signal) is input. Determine

  On the other hand, when the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 1 in step S542, that is, 2 ms has elapsed, the payout control program sets the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG to the value 0 (step S544).

  Following step S544, the payout control program sets the value B in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S546). At this time, the value B is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL following the value A set in step S539.

  Subsequent to step S546, the payout control program performs port output processing (step S548). In this port output process, various information is read from the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and various signals are output from the output terminals of the various output ports of the payout control MPU 952a based on the various information. In the output information storage area, for example, payer ACK information that indicates that various commands related to the payout from the main control board 1310 (a prize ball command and a self check command shown in FIG. 142) have been received normally, a payout motor 834 There are stored various information such as drive information for performing drive control, winning ball number information of the number of balls for which the payout motor 834 has actually paid out game balls, and LED display information to be displayed on the error LED indicator 860b. When various commands relating to payout from the main control board 1310 are normally received from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a based on the output information, a payer ACK signal is output to the main control board 1310, or a payout motor The number of balls for which a drive signal is output to 834 or the game motor 834 has actually paid out a game ball is award ball number information. (In this embodiment, the payout ball number information signal is output to the external terminal board 784 every time the payout motor 834 actually pays out 10 game balls.) Concretely, Is provided with a counter for determining the number-of-awards information signal output for outputting the number-of-awards information, and the counter for determining the number-of-awards information signal output is provided for the game balls actually paid out The ball number is counted based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 842 shown in FIG. 124 in the port input process of step S550 described later, and the payout motor 834 actually counts the ball number of the gaming ball paid out. It is updated in the award ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM by a process (program) (not shown) for monitoring. A process (program) (not shown) for monitoring the value of the prize ball number information signal output determination counter stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM is shown in FIG. Based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 842 shown in 124, the number of balls of the gaming balls actually paid out by the payout motor 834 is added and stored and updated in step S548, from the winning ball information storage area to the winning balls. The value of the number information signal output determination counter is read out, and when the read value of the read ball number information signal output determination counter exceeds the value 10, the prize ball number information signal is output to the external terminal board 784, The surpassed number of balls is stored and updated in the award ball information storage area of the above-described payout control built-in RAM as the value of the award ball number information signal output determination counter. ing. Or a display signal is output to the error LED display 860b.

  Following step S548, the payout control program performs port input processing (step S550). In this port input process, various signals input to the input terminals of the various input ports of the payout control MPU 952a are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control internal RAM. For example, an operation signal of the operation switch 954, a detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840, a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 842, a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279, a BRQ signal from the CR unit 6, a BRDY signal and a CR connection A signal, a main payment ACK signal from the main control board 1310 for notifying that the main control board 1310 has normally received various commands transmitted in the command transmission processing described later, etc. are read respectively, and stored as input information in the input information storage area Do.

  Subsequent to step S550, the payout control program performs timer update processing (step S552). In this timer update process, when it is determined whether or not the ball is in a state of being blinded by the dispensing rotating body to which the rotation of the rotating shaft of the dispensing motor 834 is transmitted, the sphere being set as the determination condition is determined The time, the skip determination time set when the fixed position determination of the payout rotary body is not performed, and the ball removal determination time set when the gaming balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail 803 are discharged When the determination is made as to whether or not the storage space of the fal cover unit 270 shown in FIG. 1 is full with stored gaming balls, the full tank determination time set as the determination condition, the out-of-ball detection sensor It is set as the determination condition when it is determined whether or not the number of gaming balls taken into the supply passage of the payout device 830 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number based on the detection signal from 827. In addition to performing time management such as the ball out determination time, the ball number of the gaming ball received and dispensed by the recess of the payout rotating body is not the same as the ball number actually detected by the payout detection sensor 842 Inconsistent counter reset judgment that is set as the judgment condition when judging whether or not to reset the inconsistency counter INCC to monitor whether or not the payout of the game ball which does not fit properly is repeated repeatedly Perform time management of time. For example, when the ball judging time is set to 5005 ms, the timer interrupt period is set to 2 ms, so every time this timer update processing is performed, the ball judging time is reduced by 2 ms and the subtraction result When the value becomes 0, the ball collision determination time is accurately measured.

  In this embodiment, the skip determination time is 22.75 ms, the ball removal determination time is 60060 ms, the full tank determination time is 504 ms, the ball breakage determination time is 119 ms, and the inconsistency counter reset determination time is 7000 s (about 2 hours). Each time the timer update process is performed, the ball removal determination time, the full tank determination time, the ball out determination time, and the mismatch counter reset determination time are each reduced by 2 ms, and the result of the subtraction becomes 0. The extraction determination time, the full tank determination time, the ball out determination time, and the mismatch counter reset determination time are accurately measured. These various determination times are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

Following step S552, the payout control program performs CR communication processing (step S554). In this CR communication processing, whether or not various signals (BRQ signal, BRDY signal, and CR connection signal) from the CR unit 6 are input based on the input information read from the input information storage area described above. Determine The payout control MPU 952a exchanges various signals with the CR unit 6 based on various signals from the CR unit 6.
In the processing for setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530, as described above, the payout backup information stored in the payout control internal RAM, various flags, and various information stored in the various information storage areas. (For example, the prize ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, etc. stored in the prize ball information storage area, the PRDY stored in the CR communication information storage area, etc. Information to be used for various processes is set based on payout information relating to payout of PRDY signal output setting information or the like in which the logic state of the signal is set.

  By this process, for example, even if there is a momentary power failure or a power failure, values such as the prize ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, and the inconsistency counter INCC at the time of power recovery are stored as payout backup information. The value of the award ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, etc. immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure can be restored. As a result, when the payout operation of the game ball by the payout device 830 is executed, even if the payout operation cannot be continued due to a momentary power failure or a power failure, the payout operation can be continued at the time of power recovery. Therefore, the game balls can be paid out to the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 without excess or deficiency. In other words, in the CR communication process, the payout control MPU 952a exchanges various signals with the CR unit 6 while paying out the game ball to the upper plate 321 or the lower plate 322, and thus the payout control MPU 952 a Even if the exchange of various signals with the unit 6 is interrupted and the payout of the game ball cannot be continued, the prize ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, and the inconsistency counter INCC at the time of power recovery Etc. are restored to values such as the prize ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, etc., which are stored as the payout backup information and immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure. The exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU 952a) and the CR unit 6 immediately before a momentary power failure or power failure is restored. It is possible to continue from time to time, so that it can continue to perform the payout of the game ball.

  As described above, the exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (the payout control MPU 952a) and the CR unit 6 is restored to the state immediately before the momentary stop or stop at the time of power recovery even if the momentary stop or stop occurs. The various signals by the pachinko machine 1 (the payout control MPU 952a) and the CR unit 6 do not change due to the influence of a momentary stop or stop. Therefore, the reliability of exchange of various signals by the pachinko machine 1 (the payout control MPU 952a) and the CR unit 6 can be enhanced.

  In addition, as described above, various information stored in the CR communication information storage area is included in the payout backup information. In the CR communication process, when power is restored, the PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM set in the process of setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530. For example, when the read PRDY signal output setting information is set to the logic state of the PRDY signal which indicates that the dispensing operation for dispensing the rental ball is impossible, for example, the payout control of the PRDY signal is performed. Output to the CR unit 6 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the MPU 952a. The value of the inconsistency counter INCC in the prize ball information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM, which is included in the payout backup information, for example, in the retry operation monitoring process performed as one process of the main action setting process Is determined whether the value of the mismatch counter INCC is smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH. If the value of the mismatch counter INCC is not smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH, the retry operation is abnormal. In other words, it is determined that the game ball payout operation by the payout device 830 is in an abnormal state, the value 1 is set to the retry error flag RTERR-FLG, and in the payout ball collision operation determination setting process , As an output of an error state to the CR unit 6, for example, when not communicating with the CR unit 6 The logic state of the PRDY signal informing of dispensing operation is not possible (LOW) is set to PRDY signal output setting information stored in the CR communication information storage area for dispensing.

  Thus, in the CR communication processing, the logic state of this PRDY signal is read from the CR communication information storage area and the PRDY signal is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a at the next timer interrupt from the time of power recovery. Output to CR unit 6. Thus, for example, if the game ball payout operation by the payout device 830 is in an abnormal state immediately before a momentary power failure, the state is restored at the time of power recovery. At this stage, a PRDY signal notifying that the payout operation for paying out the ball cannot be performed can be output to the CR unit 6 from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a. It can be notified that the game ball payout operation by the device 830 is in an abnormal state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the output of BRDY, which is a useless ball rental request signal from the CR unit 6, at an extremely early stage after power recovery.

  In the CR communication process, when the port connection process in step S550 reads the CR connection signal from the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM and the logic is HI based on the CR connection signal, that is, a pachinko machine. 1 when the power supply is turned on, and when the payout control board 951 and the CR unit 6 are electrically connected via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, In order to notify that the payout operation is possible, the logic state of the PRDY signal is set to HI and output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a to the CR unit 6, while when the logic is LOW, that is, When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the payout control board 951 and the CR unit 6 are connected to the game ball etc. In order to notify that the payout operation for paying out the rented ball is impossible, the logic state of the PRDY signal is set to LOW and the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a is not connected. Output to CR unit 6 from the output terminal. The logical state of the EXS signal that indicates that one payout operation has been started or ended is stored as EXS signal output setting information in the CR communication information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and the payout control board 951 A CR connection signal that indicates whether or not the CR unit 6 is electrically connected is stored as CR connection information in the state information storage area.

  Following step S554, the payout control program performs full tank and out-of-balls check processing (step S556). In this full tank and out-of-ball check process, input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and based on this input information, the accommodation space of the above-mentioned foul cover unit 270 is stored by a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279. It is determined whether the game balls are full or the number of game balls taken into the supply passage of the above-described payout device 830 based on the detection signal from the ball break detection sensor 827 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number. It is determined whether or not it has become. For example, whether or not the storage space of the foul cover unit 270 is filled with a game ball is full is determined by using a timer interruption period of 2 ms and detecting a full tank in the current full tank and out-of-ball check process. When the detection signal from the sensor 279 is ON, and the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 is OFF in the previous full (2 ms before) full and ball-out check processing, that is, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 is When transitioning from OFF to ON, timing of the full tank determination time (504 ms) described above in the timer update process of step S552 is started. When the full tank determination time becomes 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the full tank determination time is reached, whether the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 is ON in this full tank and ball shortage check process. Determine whether or not. In this determination, when the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 is ON, the full tank information that indicates that the storage space of the foul cover unit 270 is full with the stored game ball is filled with the state information described above. Store in the storage area. On the other hand, when the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 is OFF, the full tank information indicating that the storage space of the foul cover unit 270 is not full with the stored game ball is stored in the state information storage area. .

  Whether or not the number of game balls taken into the supply passage of the payout device 830 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number also uses the timer interruption period of 2 ms, and the current full tank and out of ball check process is performed. When the detection signal from the detection sensor is ON, the detection signal from the ball detection sensor is turned OFF in the last full (2 ms before) fullness and ball check check processing, that is, the detection signal from the ball detection sensor 827 is OFF. When the state transitions from ON to ON, the counting of the ball out determination time (119 ms) described above is started in the timer update process of step S552. When the ball break determination time becomes 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the ball break determination time is reached, whether the detection signal from the ball break detection sensor 827 is ON in this full tank and ball break check process. It is determined whether or not. In this determination, when the detection signal from the ball break detection sensor 827 is ON, the ball break information indicating that the number of game balls taken into the supply passage of the payout device 830 is greater than or equal to a predetermined number is displayed. While the information is stored in the information storage area, when the detection signal from the ball break detection sensor 827 is OFF, the ball break is notified that the number of game balls taken into the supply passage of the payout device 830 is not more than a predetermined number. Information is stored in the state information storage area.

Subsequent to step S556, the payout control program performs command reception processing (step S558). In this command reception process, various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 (a prize ball command and a self-check command shown in FIG. 142) are received.
When the various commands are normally received, the payer ACK information indicating that is stored in the output information storage area. On the other hand, when various commands can not be received normally, a connection error is transmitted that indicates that the connection between the main control substrate 1310 and the payout control substrate 951 is abnormal (the various command signals are abnormal). Information is stored in the state information storage area described above.

  Subsequent to step S558, the payout control program performs command analysis processing (step S560). In this command analysis processing, the command received in step S558 is analyzed, and the analyzed command is stored as received command information in the received command information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S560, the payout control program performs main operation setting processing (step S562). In this main operation setting process, operation settings such as winning balls, rental balls, ball removal and ball scoring are performed, retry operations are judged, and the number of unpaid balls (the number of winning ball stock) is monitored. To do.

  Following step S562, the payout control program performs LED display data creation processing (step S564). In this LED display data creation process, various information is read out from the above-mentioned state information storage area, and display data to be displayed on the error LED indicator 860b of the payout control board 951 is created and output information storage area mentioned above as LED display information. Remember. For example, the above-mentioned ball out information is read out from the state information storage area, and based on the ball out information, the corresponding display data (when the ball number of the game balls taken into the supply passage of the payout device 830 is not more than a predetermined number) In the present embodiment, the display value 1 (number "1") is created and the LED display information is stored in the output information storage area.

  Following step S564, the payout control program performs command transmission processing (step S566). In this command transmission process, various types of information are read out from the above-described state information storage area, and various commands (door open command, door frame close command, main body frame open) divided into the state display shown in FIG. Main control board 1310 by creating a command, a body frame closing command, a frame state 1 command (corresponding to the first error occurrence command), an error canceling navigation command (corresponding to the first error canceling command) and a frame state 2 command) Send to. For example, when the out-of-ball information is read out from the state information storage area, a frame state 1 command is created based on the out-of-ball information when the number of gaming balls taken into the supply passage of the payout device 830 is not more than a predetermined number. And sends it to the main control board 1310. In addition, in this command transmission process, the payout control program is, for example, when there is a change in the frame state such as an error in the game ball payout operation occurring, the information on the portion where the error occurs in the payout operation A frame state 1 command (first error canceling command) including “error occurrence position information” is generated (error occurrence command generation means). On the other hand, in this command transmission process, the above-described error occurs when the payout control program determines that the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is the value 1, that is, the operation signal corresponding to the operation of the operation switch 954 is detected. A cancellation navigation command (first error cancellation command) is output (command sending means). The payout control program transmits a main body frame open command (first main body frame open command) when the main body frame open detection signal from the main body frame open switch 619 is input (main body frame command sending means, 1 body frame command sending means). When the main frame closing detection signal from the main frame opening switch 619 is input, the payout control program transmits a main frame closing command (first main frame closing command) (main frame command sending means , 1st main body frame command sending means). Further, the payout control program transmits a door frame open command (first door frame open command) when the door frame open detection signal from the door frame open switch 618 is input (a door frame command sending means, 1 door frame command sending means). On the other hand, the payout control program transmits a door frame closing command (first door frame closing command) when the door frame closing detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618 is input (a door frame command sending means, 1 door frame command sending means). In addition, the payout control program reads out error information including error contents from the above-mentioned status information storage area in the above-mentioned command transmission process (step S566), and machine number information for identifying itself with other pachinko machines and An error information signal based on the error information is output to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784. Upon receiving this error information signal, the hall computer provides the above-mentioned machine number information and error information to the radio device possessed by the hall clerk, and this hall clerk provides the pachinko machine with the machine number based on this machine number information. In the above, it is possible to recognize that an error content included in the error information has occurred.

  Subsequent to step S566, the payout control program sets a value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S568). The value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S568, so that the value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL following the value B set in step S546. As a result, the value A, the value B and the value C are sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, and the watchdog timer is cleared.

  Following step S568, the process returns to step S539 again, and the payout control program sets a value A to the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, and whether or not a power failure warning signal (paid power failure warning signal) is input in step S540. If this power failure warning signal (paid power failure warning signal) is not input, it is determined in step S542 whether or not the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1, and the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1. When 2 ms has elapsed, that is, when 2 ms has elapsed, the value 0 is set in the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG in step S544, the value B is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S546, and port output processing is performed in step S548 Port input processing in step S550, and in step S552 Immediate update processing is performed, CR communication processing is performed in step S554, full tank and out of ball check processing is performed in step S556, command reception processing is performed in step S558, command analysis processing is performed in step S560, and main processing is performed in step S562. Operation setting processing is performed, LED display data creation processing is performed in step S564, command transmission processing is performed in step S566, value C is set in watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S568, and steps S539 to S568 are repeated. . The process of steps S539 to S568 is referred to as "payout control unit main process".

  Depending on the progress of the game by the main control board 1310, the processing content of the payout control unit main process varies. For this reason, the time required for the processing of the payout control MPU 952a varies. Accordingly, the payout control MPU 952a preferentially outputs to the main control board 1310 a payer ACK signal notifying that various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 have been normally received in the port output processing of step S548. Yes. As a result, the payout control MPU 952a ensures the processing time so that other fluctuating processes can be sufficiently performed.

  On the other hand, when there is an input of the power failure advance notification signal (payout failure notification signal) in step S540, the interrupt prohibition setting is performed (step S570). With this setting, a payout control unit timer interrupt process to be described later is not performed, the writing to the payout control internal RAM is prevented, and the rewriting of the payout information described above is protected.

  Following step S570, the payout control program stops the output of the drive signal to the payout motor 834 (step S574). Thereby, payout of the game ball is stopped.

  Subsequent to step S574, the payout control program performs clear setting of the watchdog timer (step S576). As described above, the clear setting is performed by sequentially setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL.

  Subsequent to step S576, the payout control program calculates a checksum and stores the calculated value (step S578). This checksum is calculated by regarding the payout information of the work area of the payout control built-in RAM as a numerical value, excluding the storage area of the value of the checksum and the value of the payout backup flag HBK-FLG calculated in step S524.

  Following step S578, the payout control program sets the payout backup flag HBK-FLG to the value 1 (step S580). Thereby, storage of the payout backup information is completed.

  Subsequent to step S580, the payout control program performs setting to prohibit access to the payout control built-in RAM (step S582). With this setting, access to the payout control built-in RAM is prohibited and writing and reading cannot be performed, and payout backup information stored in the payout control internal RAM is protected.

  Following step S582, the payout control program enters an infinite loop. In this infinite loop, the value A, the value B, and the value C are not set in this order in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, so that the watchdog timer is not cleared. For this reason, the payout control MPU 952a is reset, and thereafter, the payout control program performs the payout control unit power-on process again under the control of the payout control MPU 952a. Note that the processing in step S570 to step S582 and the infinite loop are referred to as “payout control unit power-off processing”.

  The pachinko machine 1 (the payout control MPU 952a) is reset when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, and the payout control unit power-on process is performed when the power is restored thereafter.

  In step S526, it is checked whether or not the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is normal, and then in step S528, whether or not the payout control unit power-off process is normally completed. Are inspected. In this way, by checking the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM twice, it is checked whether or not the payout backup information is stored by fraud.

[15-2. Disbursement control unit timer interrupt processing]
Next, the payout control unit timer interrupt processing will be described. This payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeated every interrupt cycle (2 ms in this embodiment) set in the payout control unit power-on process shown in FIGS.

  When the payout control unit timer interrupt process is started, in the payout control unit 952 of the payout control board 951, the payout control program sets the timer interrupt to be prohibited as shown in FIG. 152 under the control of the payout control MPU 952a. Then, switching (saving) of the register is performed (step S590). Here, the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) used in the above-described payout control unit main processing is switched to the auxiliary register. By using this auxiliary register in the dispensing control unit timer interrupt processing, the value of the general purpose register is not overwritten. This prevents the destruction of the contents of the general purpose register used in the payout control unit main processing.

  Following step S590, the payout control program sets the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG to the value 1 (step S592). This 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag that counts 2 ms every time 2 ms of this dispensing control unit timer interrupt processing is performed, that is, a value of 0 when 1 ms or 2 ms has not elapsed when 2 ms has elapsed. Each is set.

  Subsequent to step S592, the payout control program switches (returns) the register (step S594). This return is switched from the auxiliary register used in the dispensing control unit timer interrupt processing to the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register). By using this general-purpose register in the payout control unit main process, the value of the auxiliary register is not overwritten. This prevents destruction of the contents of the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt process.

  Following step S594, the payout control program sets the interrupt permission (step S596), and ends this routine.

[15-3. Rotation detection sensor history creation processing]
Next, rotation detection sensor history creation processing will be described. In this rotation detection sensor history creation process, a history of detection signals from the rotation detection sensor 840 shown in FIG. 124 is created.

  When the rotation detection sensor history creation process is started, the payout control program in the payout control unit 952 of the payout control board 951 detects the rotation from the payout control built-in RAM as shown in FIG. 153 under the control of the payout control MPU 952a. The sensor detection history information RSW-HIST is read out (step S610). The rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST is of 1 byte (8 bits: most significant bits B7, B6, B5, B4, B3, B2, B1, least significant bits B0, "B" represent bits). A history of detection signals from the rotation detection sensor 840 is stored as rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST in the rotation detection sensor history information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S610, rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST is read from this rotation detection sensor history information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S610, the payout control program determines whether or not there is a detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840 (step S612). This determination is performed based on the detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840 in the port input process of step S550 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the detection signal is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S612, it is determined whether or not there is a detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840 by reading input information from the input information storage area. When there is a detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840 in the input information, the payout control program detects the light of the rotation detection sensor 840 for detecting the rotational position of the payout rotary body to which the rotation of the rotary shaft of the payout motor 834 is transmitted. It is determined that the shaft is in a state where the shaft has transitioned from the cut-off state to the non-cut-off state. On the other hand, when there is no detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840 in the input information, the payout control program determines that the detection slit has shifted the optical axis of the rotation detection sensor 840 from the non-blocking state to the blocking state.

  When the detection slit has shifted the optical axis of the rotation detection sensor 840 from the blocking state to the non-blocking state in step S612, the payout control program performs shift processing of the rotation detection sensor detection history information (step S614). In the shift process of the rotation detection sensor detection history information, the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S610 is the most significant bits B77B6, B6 ← B5, B5 ← B4, B4 ← B3, B3 ← B2 , B2 ← B1, B1 ← the least significant bit B0, and so on, and is shifted bit by bit from the least significant bit B0 toward the most significant bit B7.

  Following step S614, the payout control program sets the value 1 to the least significant bit B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST (step S616), and ends this routine.

  On the other hand, when the detection slit is in a state where the optical axis of the rotation detection sensor 840 is changed from the non-blocking state to the blocking state in step S612, the payout control program performs the rotation detection sensor detection history information shift process (step S618). . In this rotation detection sensor detection history information shift process, the payout control program performs the same process as the rotation detection sensor detection history information shift process in step S614, and the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S610. B7 B B6, B6 B B5, B5 B B4, B4 B B3, B3 B B2, B2 最 下 位 B1, B1 最 下 位 least significant bit B0, etc. from the least significant bit B0 to the most significant bit B7 Shift one bit at a time.

  Following step S618, the payout control program sets the value 0 to the least significant bit B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST (step S620), and ends this routine.

  As described above, each time the rotation detection sensor history creation processing is performed, the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST is shifted by 1 bit from the least significant bit B0 toward the most significant bit B7, and then the detection slit is rotated. The least significant bit B0 has a value of 1 or 1 in accordance with a state in which the optical axis of the detection sensor 840 has transitioned from the blocking state to the non-blocking state or a detection slit transitions the optical axis of the rotation detection sensor 840 from the non-blocking state to the blocking state. Since the value 0 is set, a history of detection signals from the rotation detection sensor 840 can be created.

[15-4. Sprocket fixed position determination skip processing]
Next, the sprocket fixed position determination skip process will be described. In the sprocket fixed position determination skipping process, the determination as to whether or not the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotary shaft of the payout motor 834 is transmitted is at the regular position is skipped when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The fixed position determination of the payout rotating body is also performed when the payout of the game ball by the payout device 830 is completed. Thereby, rotation of the rotating shaft of the payout motor 834 can be reliably started in a state in which no ball is generated.

  When the sprocket fixed position determination skip process is started, in the payout control unit 952 of the payout control board 951, the payout control program is controlled by the payout control MPU 952a and as shown in FIG. It is determined whether FLG is the value 0 (step S630). The fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not fixed position determination of the payout rotating body is performed, and the value of 1 when the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body is not performed (when skipping), payout rotation The value is set to 0 when the body position determination is performed (when skipping is not performed).

  When it is determined in step S630 that the home position determination skip flag SKP-FLG has a value of 0 (when not skipping), that is, when home position determination of the payout rotating body is performed, the payout control program determines the rotation detection sensor history information of the payout control internal RAM. The rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST is read out from the storage area (step S632), and it is determined whether or not it matches the home position determination value (step S634). The home position determination value is stored in the payout built-in ROM, and in the present embodiment, "00001111B (" B "represents a bit)", and the upper 4 bits B7 to B4 have a value of 0, and a lower 4 Bits B3 to B0 have a value of 1. In step S634, it is determined whether the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the home position determination value.

  Here, in the case where the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST have a value 1, the detection slit is the optical axis of the rotation detection sensor 840 described above continuously in four timer interrupt cycles. Is a state in which the state is changed from the cut-off state to the non-cut-off state. In the generation of the four timer interrupt cycles, the payout motor 834 shown in FIG. 124 is rotated by four steps. The rotation of the payout motor 834 is the rotation of the payout rotating body of the rotation detection board via the first gear, the second gear, and the third gear. Since the first gear, the second gear, and the third gear have play (backlash), the discharge rotating body rotates clockwise or counterclockwise. The rotation is designed to be equivalent to about two steps of rotation of the dispensing motor 834. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the fixed position determination of the dispensing rotating body is performed, the rotation from the rotation detection sensor 840 is used. History of detection signal, rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST is created by rotation detection sensor history creation processing shown in FIG. 153, and lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST created, that is, This is based on the detection signal from the occurrence of the latest four timer interrupt cycles. Thus, in the four timer interrupt cycles, the payout motor 834 rotates four steps, so it rotates more than the rotation of the payout rotor due to the backlash, and absorbs the rotation of the payout rotor due to the backlash. Can do. Therefore, since the erroneous detection of the fixed position of the dispensing rotating body due to the backlash can be prevented, the rotational position of the dispensing rotating body can be properly managed by the rotational position of the dispensing motor 834. In the present embodiment, the four timer interrupt cycles are 8 ms (= 2 ms × 4 times), and are set as the backlash absorption time.

  In step S634, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S632 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value match, the payout control program A value 1 is set to the fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG (step S636). Thereby, it can set so that the fixed position determination of the paying-out rotating body is not performed (skip). The payout control MPU 952a sets the rotational position of the payout rotary body at step S636 as the fixed position of the payout rotary body.

  Following step S636, the payout control program sets the skip determination time to be valid (step S638), and ends this routine. Here, the number of detection slits is three, which is the same as the number of concave portions of the dispensing rotating body, and is formed equally (every 120 degrees) on the outer periphery of the rotation detection board. Further, as described above, the rotation of the payout motor 834 is the rotation of the payout rotating body of the rotation detection board via the first gear, the second gear, and the third gear. In the present embodiment, the rotation between the detection slits (120 degrees) of the rotation detection board (dispensing rotary body) is designed to correspond to the 18-step rotation of the dispensing motor 834.

  The payout control program manages the rotational position of the payout rotating body based on the number of steps of the payout motor 834 under the control of the payout control MPU 952a. Specifically, (1) a transition state in which the detection slit causes the optical axis of the rotation detection sensor 840 to transition from the blocking state to the non-blocking state (referred to as "edge detection state"); A state in which the optical axis of the sensor 840 transitions from the blocking state to the non-blocking state (referred to as “fixed position determined state”), and (3) a detection slit transitions the optical axis of the rotation detection sensor 840 from the non-blocking state to the blocking state It manages in three states of the state ("fixed position determination skip state"), and. The edge detection state of (1) corresponds to one step rotation of the dispensing motor 834, and the fixed position determination state of (2) corresponds to the four step rotation of the dispensing motor 834, and the fixed position determination skip state of (3) In this case, the rotation position corresponds to 13 steps of the dispensing motor 834, and the rotation position between the detection slits (120 degrees) between the detection slits of the rotation detection board, that is, the rotation position of the dispensing rotating member, is managed by a total of 18 steps of rotation.

  In the fixed position determination skip state (3), the detection slit transitions the optical axis of the rotation detection sensor 840 from the non-blocking state to the blocking state, so that the skip determination time is the time for the dispensing motor 834 to rotate by 13 steps. Is set. As described above, since the timer interruption period is set to 2 ms, the skip determination time is 26 ms (= 2 ms × 13 steps).

  When the skip determination time becomes valid in step S638, the skip determination time is subtracted in the timer update process in step S552 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. The payout control MPU 952a subtracts the skip determination time, and sets the initial value 0 to the fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG when the subtraction result becomes a value 0.

  On the other hand, when the home position determination skip flag SKP-FLG is not 0 (is the value 1) (when skipping) in step S630, that is, when home position determination of the payout rotating body is not performed, or in step S634, step S632. When the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST read out in step 4 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value do not match, the payout control program ends this routine as it is. . The home position determination skip flag SKP-FLG set in step S636 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the payout control MPU 952a.

  The game balls supplied from the pachinko island facility are stored in the prize ball tank 802 and the tank rail 803, taken into the supply passage of the payout device 830, and guided to the payout device 830. When the gaming balls are charged against each other and charged, they are electrostatically discharged to generate noise. For this reason, the dispensing device 830 is affected by noise and is in the file environment. The payout device 830 is provided with a rotation detection sensor 840, and a detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840 is susceptible to noise due to electrostatic discharge of the gaming ball.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, in order to suppress erroneous detection due to the influence of noise, the fixed position determination skip state (3) described above, that is, the detection slit changes the optical axis of the rotation detection sensor 840 from the non-blocking state to the blocking state. In the transitioned state, the fixed position determination of the dispensing rotating body is not performed. Thereby, the accuracy of the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body is enhanced. In addition, since the period and period required for detecting the fixed position of the payout rotating body can be obtained by calculation in advance as described above, the skip determination time can be easily set and adjusted.

[15-5. Ball sight judging process]
Next, the ball look determination process will be described. In this ball sight judging process, it is judged whether or not the ball sighting state by the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 834 is transmitted is generated.

  When the ball judging process is started, as shown in FIG. 155, the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control unit 952 in the payout control board 951 detects rotation from the rotation detection sensor history information storage area of the above-mentioned payout control built-in RAM. The sensor detection history information RSW-HIST is read (step S640).

  Subsequent to step S640, the payout control program determines whether there is a detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840 described above (step S642). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S640 matches the home position determination value. As described above, this fixed position determination value is stored in the payout built-in ROM, and in this embodiment, is “00001111B (“ B ”represents a bit)”, and the upper 4 bits B7 to B4 are the same. The value 0 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 are the value 1. In the determination in step S642, it is determined whether or not the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value.

  In step S642, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S640 match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value, the payout control program This routine is finished as it is, assuming that the detection slit has changed the optical axis of the rotation detection sensor 840 from the non-blocking state to the blocking state, that is, the payout rotating body is rotating, and no ball-spinning state has occurred. Do.

  On the other hand, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST read out at step S640 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value do not match in step S642, a sphere is seen. A value 1 is set in the middle flag PBE-FLG (step S644). This in-between-ball flag PBE-FLG is a flag that indicates whether or not a ball-bending state due to the payout rotating body has occurred. When no operation is performed, the value is set to 0.

  Subsequent to step S644, the payout control program sets the ball collision determination time to be valid (step S646), and ends this routine. By making this ball look determination time effective, subtraction of the ball look determination time is performed in the timer update process of step S552 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. 151. .

[15-6. Various prize ball stock addition processing]
Next, various prize ball stock number addition processing will be described. The various prize ball stock number addition processing includes prize ball prize ball stock number addition processing and rental ball prize ball stock number addition processing, and the prize ball prize ball stock number addition processing is from the main control board 1310. The processing for adding the number of balls to be paid out on the basis of the winning ball command described later, the processing for adding the number of balls for winning ball stock number for rental balls is a processing for adding the number of balls to be paid out based on the rental ball request signal from the CR unit 6 is there. First, the award ball stock number addition process for prize balls will be described, and then the award ball stock number addition process for rental balls will be described. In the present embodiment, it is set that the winning ball stock number adding process for the winning balls is preferentially performed, and the winning ball stock number adding process is performed according to the winning ball stock number adding process. After the game balls have been paid out by the payout device 830, it is set to carry out a process of adding the number of balls for the number of ball stock balls for rental.

[15-6-1. Prize Ball Stock Ball Addition Number Processing]
When the award ball stock number addition process for the award ball is started, the payout control unit 952 on the payout control board 951 executes a payout control program as shown in FIG. 156 under the control of the payout control MPU 952a. It is determined whether there is any (step S650). This determination is performed based on the command analyzed in the command analysis process of step S560 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the analyzed command is stored as reception command information in the reception command information storage area of the payout control internal RAM. In step S650, the payout control program reads out the received command information from the received command information storage area and determines whether or not it is a prize ball command.

  If the received command information is not the winning ball command in step S650, the payout control program ends this routine as it is, while if the received command information is the winning ball command in step S650, the payout control program changes the winning ball command to this winning ball command. The corresponding prize ball number PBV is read from the prize ball number information table (step S652). The prize ball number information table, which will be described in detail later, is an information table stored in advance in the payout built-in ROM in association with the prize ball command and the prize ball number PBV.

  Subsequent to step S652, the payout control program reads the prize ball stock number PBS from the payout control built-in RAM (step S654). The award ball stock number PBS represents the number of game balls not yet paid out by the payout device 830, that is, the number of unpaid balls, and has a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits) in the present embodiment. There is. As a result, the award ball stock number PBS can store the number of unpaid balls from 0 to 32767. The prize ball stock PBS is stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S652, the prize ball stock number PBS is read from the prize ball information storage area.

  The payout control program adds the prize ball number PBV read in step S652 to the prize ball stock number PBS read in step S654 (step S656), and ends this routine. Note that after the addition in step S656, the prize ball command read in step S650 is erased from the received command information storage area.

[15-6-2. Addition of prize ball stock for rental balls]
Next, the processing for adding the number of winning ball stocks will be described. When the winning ball stock number addition process for the rental balls is started, the payout control program in the payout control unit 952 of the payout control board 951 requests the rental balls under the control of the payout control MPU 952a as shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not there is a signal (step S660). This determination is performed based on the lent ball request signal from the CR unit 6 in the port input process of step S550 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the lending request signal is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S660, the payout control program reads input information from the input information storage area and determines whether or not there is a lending request signal.

  When there is no lending request signal in step S660, the payout control program ends this routine as it is. On the other hand, when there is a lending request signal in step S660, the payout control program reads the prize ball information in the above-described payout control built-in RAM. The prize ball stock number PBS is read out from the storage area (step S662), and the number of balls RBV is added to the prize ball stock number PBS (step S664), and this routine is ended. The number of balls to be lent RBV is a fixed value, and is stored in advance in the payout built-in ROM. In the present embodiment, the value 25 is set as the number of rented balls RBV. In addition, after adding in step S664, the payout control program deletes the ball rental request signal read in step S660 from the input information storage area. Further, in the present embodiment, since the winning balls are prioritized (the winning balls and the lent balls are managed separately), the lent ball request signal is held even when there is a lent ball request signal. , Pay out the rental balls with the completion of the delivery of the winning balls. Therefore, in this embodiment, the payout of the rented ball is performed after the prize ball stock PBS reaches the value 0.

[15-7. Stock monitoring process]
Next, the stock monitoring process will be described. This stock monitoring process monitors whether or not the player continues playing the game in a state where the storage space of the foul cover unit 270 shown in FIG. 1 is filled with the stored game balls (stocked state). It is processing to do.

  When the stock monitoring process is started, the payout control unit 952 of the payout control board 951 causes the payout control program to display the award ball information in the payout control built-in RAM as shown in FIG. 158 under the control of the payout control MPU 952a. The prize ball stock number PBS is read out from the storage area (step S670), and it is determined whether the read prize ball stock number PBS is equal to or more than the caution threshold TH (step S672). The caution threshold TH is a fixed value and is stored in advance in the payout built-in ROM. In the present embodiment, the value 50 is set as the caution threshold value TH.

  If it is determined in step S672 that the winning ball stock number PBS is equal to or greater than the caution threshold TH, the payout control program sets the caution flag CA-FLG to the value 1 (step S674), and terminates this routine. In this caution flag CA-FLG, the player starts stocking the gaming balls in the accommodation space of the far cover unit 270, and the number of unpaid gaming balls (the number of prize balls stocked as described above) exceeds the caution threshold TH. It is a flag indicating that it has reached, and is set to a value of 1 when it has reached the caution threshold TH or more, and a value of 0 when it has not reached the caution threshold TH or more.

  On the other hand, when the winning ball stock number PBS is less than the caution threshold TH in step S672, the payout control program sets a value 0 to the caution flag CA-FLG (step S676), and this routine is ended.

  If the game state is a big hit and the player relaxes and sees the effect developed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 shown in FIG. 126, the player is carelessly During one round, a game ball paid out as a prize ball may not be removed from the lower plate 322 by operating the lower plate ball removal button 354. When the game is continued in this state, the lower plate 322 is filled with game balls, and the game balls are accumulated in the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 270. When the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 270 is filled with gaming balls, as described above, the value of the prize ball stock number PBS increases and becomes equal to or more than the caution threshold TH, and provided in the door frame 3 as a caution effect Several LEDs of various decoration boards blink. By this blinking, for example, it is possible to inform a hall clerk of paying attention to the player's game. Thus, the store clerk in the hall can notify the player that the game ball should be pulled out of the lower plate 322, and the player fills the lower plate 322 (the housing space of the far cover unit 270) with the game ball full. It is possible to prevent the continuation of the game.

  In the present embodiment, the caution threshold value TH is set to a value 50 corresponding to about one fifth of the upper limit value 255 which can be represented by one byte (8 bits). This makes it possible to notify the store clerk in the hall to warn the player of the game at the earliest possible stage.

[15-8. Disbursement ball look operation judgment setting process]
Next, the payout ball look-up operation determination setting process will be described. In this paying-ball ball movement determination setting process, the payout motor 834 pays out the game ball to the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322, performs the ball-balling operation, or does not perform such payout or discharge. It is processing to set to either or.

  When the payout ball look-up operation determination setting process is started, the payout control program in the payout control unit 952 of the payout control board 951 has the above-mentioned payout control built-in as shown in FIG. 159 under the control of the payout control MPU 952a. The rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST is read from the rotation detection sensor history information storage area of the RAM (step S680).

  Subsequent to step S680, the payout control program determines whether or not there is a detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840 shown in FIG. 103 (step S682). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST read out in step S680 matches the home position determination value. As described above, this fixed position determination value is stored in the payout built-in ROM, and in this embodiment, is “00001111B (“ B ”represents a bit)”, and the upper 4 bits B7 to B4 are the same. The value 0 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 are the value 1. In step S682, it is determined whether the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the home position determination value.

  In step S682, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST read out in step S680 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the home position determination value match in step S682, It is determined whether the retry error flag RTERR-FLG has a value 1 (step S684). The retry error flag RTERR-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not a retry operation described later is operating abnormally. The value is 1 when the retry operation is operating abnormally, and the retry operation is not operating abnormally (retry operation). When the operation is normal), the value is set to 0.

  In step S682, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST read out in step S680 do not match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the home position determination value, or in step S684. If the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is not the value 1 (is the value 0), that is, the retry operation is not in an abnormal operation, the payout control program determines whether the ball watching flag PBE-FLG is the value 1 or not. Is determined (step S686). The flag PBE-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not the ball is viewed by the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotary shaft of the payout motor 834 is transmitted, and the ball for the payout motor 834 is spherical A value of 1 is set when the motion is being performed, and a value of 0 is set when the ball motion is not performed.

  When the flag PEB-FLG is not 1 in step S686 (ie, the value 0), that is, when the ball is not moving, the payout control program determines whether or not the prize ball information storage of the above-mentioned payout control built-in RAM. The prize ball stock number PBS is read out from the area (step S688), and it is determined whether the read prize ball stock number PBS is larger than the value 0 (step S690). In this determination, it is determined whether or not there are unpaid balls in the payout of game balls by the payout motor 834.

  When the winning ball stock number PBS is greater than 0 in step S690, that is, when there is an unpaid ball number, the payout control program determines whether or not the game ball in which the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 270 is stored is full. It is determined (step S692). This determination is performed based on the fullness information stored in the fullness and step check processing of step S 556 in the payout control portion power-on process (disbursement control portion main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the full tank information is stored in the state information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM described above. In step S692, the full tank information is read out from the state information storage area, and it is determined whether or not the storage space of the far cover unit 270 is full with the stored gaming balls.

  If it is determined in step S692 that the storage space of the foul cover unit 270 is not full of the stored gaming balls, the payout control program performs payout setting processing described later (step S694), and this routine is ended. In this payout setting process, a payout operation of paying out the gaming balls to the upper tray 321 and the lower tray 322 is performed.

  On the other hand, when the storage space of the foul cover unit 270 is full in step S692, the payout control program ends this routine as it is. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the payout motor 834 is forcibly stopped when the storage space of the far cover unit 270 is filled with the stored gaming balls. When a prize ball is generated while the payout motor 834 is forcibly stopped, the number of unpaid balls by the payout motor 834 increases, and the prize ball stock number PBS is added by the prize ball prize ball number addition process shown in FIG. Will increase.

  On the other hand, when the winning ball stock number PBS is not larger than 0 (is the value 0) at step S690, that is, when there is no unpaid ball number, the payout control program ends this routine as it is. Thus, the game balls are not paid out.

  On the other hand, in step S686, when the ball is in-flag flag PBE-FLG is the value 1, that is, the ball is moving, the payout control program performs the ball setting operation processing described later (step S700). Exit. In this ball facing operation setting process, a ball facing operation for eliminating the state of the ball due to the dispensing rotating body of the dispensing device 830 is performed.

  On the other hand, in step S684, when the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is the value 1, that is, when the retry operation is in abnormal operation, the payout control program sets the output stop (stop) of the drive signal to the payout motor 834. (Step S702). In this setting, drive information for stopping the drive signal is set in the payout motor 834 and stored in the output information storage area of the above-described payout control built-in RAM.

Following step S702, the payout control program sets an output of an error state to the CR unit 6 (step S704), and ends this routine. In step S704, when the payout control program is not communicating with the CR unit 6 under the control of the payout control MPU 952a in order to notify the CR unit 6 that the ball lending is not possible at present (CR unit 6). The logic of the PRDY signal from LOW, that is, held down and held), the logic of the PRDY signal is held LOW, that is, the state of falling is held, and the logic state of the PRDY signal is set in the PRDY signal output setting information And store it in the CR communication information storage area.
Thus, the PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM in the CR communication process of step S554 in the payout control part main process of the payout control part power-on process of FIG. The PRDY signal output setting information read out, that is, the PRDY signal whose logic is LOW, is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control unit 952 through the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and CR. Output to unit 6 On the other hand, when communicating with the CR unit 6 (when the BRDY logic from the CR unit 6 is HI, that is, rises and is held), the logic state of the EXS signal is maintained and the logic state of the EXS signal is maintained. Is set in the EXS signal output setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area. Thereby, the EXS signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM in the CR communication process of step S554 in the payout control part main process of the payout control part power-on process of FIG. The read EXS signal output setting information, that is, the EXS signal in which the logic is maintained is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a to the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. . Note that “maintain the logic state of the EXS signal” means that when the logic of the EXS signal is LOW (when the EXS signal falls and is held), the logic of the EXS signal is HI. If at all (EXS signal is held rising) is to maintain its logic HI.

[15-8-1. Disbursement setting process]
Next, the payout setting process will be described. In this payout setting process, the payout motor 834 is driven to perform setting for paying out the gaming balls.

  When the payout setting process is started, the payout control unit 952 in the payout control board 951 causes the payout control program to set the drive command number DRV from the payout control built-in RAM as shown in FIG. 160 under the control of the payout control MPU 952a. Read out (step S710). The drive command number DRV is used to command the number of game balls to be paid out by the payout motor 834, and is equal to the number of ball stock numbers PBS. The drive command number DRV is stored in the award ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S710, the drive command number DRV is read from the prize ball information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S710, the payout control program determines whether or not the drive command number DRV is 0 (step S712). This determination is made based on the drive instruction number DRV whether or not the number of gaming balls to be paid out by the payout motor 834 remains.

  When the number of drive commands DRV is 0 in step S712, that is, when the number of balls to be paid out by the payout motor 834 is zero, the payout control program stops the output of the drive signal to the payout motor 834 (stops ) Is set (step S714). In this setting, drive information for stopping the drive signal is set to the payout motor 834 and stored in the output information storage area of the above-described payout control built-in RAM.

  Following step S714, the payout control program reads out the prize ball stock number PBS from the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM (step S716), and reads the actual ball count PB (step S718). The actual ball count PB is obtained by counting the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 834. This count will be described in detail later, but from the payout detection sensor 842 shown in FIG. 124 in the port input process of step S550 in the payout control part power-on process (payout control part main process) shown in FIG. Based on the detection signal of The actual ball count PB is stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control internal RAM. In step S718, the real ball count PB is read from this prize ball information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S718, the payout control program sets a value obtained by subtracting the actual ball count PB read in step S718 from the prize ball stock number PBS read in step S716 to the prize ball stock number PBS and the drive command number DRV. (Step S720) The real ball count PB is set to the value 0 (step S722), and this routine is ended. When the drive command number DRV and the real ball count PB are 0, in step S722, the value of the prize ball stock number PBS read in step S716 is set as the drive command number DRV as it is.

  On the other hand, when the drive command number DRV is not 0 in step S712, that is, when there is a number of game balls to be paid out by the payout motor 834, the payout control program sets an output of a drive signal to the payout motor 834. (Step S724). In this setting, drive information for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 834 is set and stored in the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  Following step S724, the payout control program subtracts (decrements, 1 step) from the drive command number DRV (step S726), and determines whether there is a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 842 (step S728). This determination is performed based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 842 in the port input process of step S550 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the detection signal is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S728, the payout control program reads input information from the input information storage area and determines whether there is a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 842 or not.

  When there is a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 842 in step S728, the payout control program adds 1 to the actual ball count PB (increments, step S730), and this routine ends. In step S730, the real ball count PB is incremented by incrementing the real ball count PB.

  On the other hand, when there is no detection signal from the payout detection sensor 842 in step S728, the payout control program ends this routine as it is. As described above, the payout control program decrements the drive command number DRV in step S726 under the control of the payout control MPU 952a, and when there is no detection signal from the payout detection sensor 842 in the determination of step S728, that is, When the ball count is not incremented, the game ball can not be paid out because the game ball is not received in the recess of the payout rotary body to which the rotation of the rotary shaft of the payout motor 834 is transmitted. Judge. Therefore, the payout control program sets a value obtained by subtracting the real ball count PB from the winning ball stock number PBS in the drive command number DRV in step S720 described above in order to pay out the one ball to be paid out again. Thus, when there is no detection signal from the payout detection sensor 842 in the determination of step S728, that is, when the real ball count PB is not incremented, the value 1 which is one ball to be paid out is included in the winning ball stock number PBS. In other words, the value 1 which is the one ball to be paid out can be rounded into the prize ball stock number PBS, so that the retry operation can be performed to pay out the one ball to be paid out again . By performing this retry operation, it is possible to extremely reduce the possibility that the game balls will not be paid out to the player, and the disadvantage of the player due to the non-payment of the game balls can be prevented.

[15-8-2. Ball clasp movement setting process]
Next, the ball look-up operation setting process will be described. In this ball facing operation setting process, setting is performed to eliminate the state where the ball is viewed by the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 834 of the payout device 830 is transmitted.

  When the ball staking operation setting process is started, the payout control unit 952 in the payout control board 951 causes the payout control program to pass the ball scouring determination time as shown in FIG. 161 under the control of the payout control MPU 952a. It is determined whether or not it has been (step S750). This determination is performed based on the sphere determination time which is subtracted in the timer update process of step S552 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the ball judging time is stored in the time management information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM described above as time management information. In step S750, the time management information is read from the time management information storage area to determine whether or not the ball stagnation determination time has elapsed.

  If it is determined in step S750 that the ball determination time has not elapsed, the payout control program reads the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST from the rotation detection sensor history information storage area of the payout control internal RAM described above (step S752). .

  Following step S752, the payout control program determines whether or not there is a detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840 described above (step S754). In this determination, it is determined whether the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST read out in step S752 matches the home position determination value. As described above, this fixed position determination value is stored in the payout built-in ROM, and in this embodiment, is “00001111B (“ B ”represents a bit)”, and the upper 4 bits B7 to B4 are the same. The value 0 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 are the value 1. In the determination in step S754, it is determined whether or not the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value.

  In step S754, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S752 do not match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value, the payout control program The output of the drive signal to the dispensing motor 834 is set so that the ball can be turned on (step S756), and this routine is ended. In this setting, drive information for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 834 is set and stored in the output information storage area of the above-described payout control built-in RAM.

  On the other hand, in step S754, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S752 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value match, the payout control program Sets the stop of the drive signal to the payout motor 834 (step S758). In this setting, drive information for stopping the drive signal is set to the payout motor 834 and stored in the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S758, the payout control program sets a value of 0 to the in-ball flag PBE-FLG as the end of the ball-bending operation (step S760), and ends this routine. This ball is a medium flag PBE-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not the ball is in a state of being seen by the payout rotating body, and when the payout motor 834 is performing a blind movement, the value 1 and the ball are When no operation is being performed (end of the ball collapsing operation), the value is set to 0, respectively.

  On the other hand, when the ball collision determination time has elapsed in step S750, the payout control program sets stop of the drive signal to the payout motor 834 (step S762). In this setting, drive information for stopping the drive signal is set in the payout motor 834 and stored in the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  Following step S762, the payout control program sets an output of an error state to the CR unit 6 (step S764). Here, in order to inform the CR unit 6 that the ball lending is not possible at present, the payout control MPU 952a is not communicating with the CR unit 6 (the BRDY logic from the CR unit 6 is LOW, that is, The logic of the PRDY signal is LOW, that is, the state of falling is held, and the logic state of the PRDY signal is set in the PRDY signal output setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area. To do. Thus, the PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM in the CR communication process of step S554 in the payout control part main process of the payout control part power-on process of FIG. The PRDY signal output setting information read out, that is, the PRDY signal whose logic is LOW, is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control unit 952 through the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and CR. Output to unit 6. On the other hand, when communicating with the CR unit 6 (when the BRDY logic from the CR unit 6 is HI, that is, rises and is held), the logic state of the EXS signal is maintained and the logic state of the EXS signal is maintained. Is set in the EXS signal output setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area. Thereby, the EXS signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM in the CR communication process of step S554 in the payout control part main process of the payout control part power-on process of FIG. The read EXS signal output setting information, that is, the EXS signal in which the logic is maintained is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a to the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. . Note that “maintain the logic state of the EXS signal” means that, as described above, when the logic of the EXS signal is LOW (the EXS signal falls and is held), the logic LOW is maintained and the EXS signal is maintained. When the logic of H is HI (EXS signal is held rising) is to maintain that logic HI.

  Subsequent to step S764, the payout control program sets the ball watching flag PBE-FLG to the value 0 as the end of the ball watching operation (step S766), and ends this routine.

[15-9. Retry operation monitoring process]
Next, retry operation monitoring processing will be described. In this retry operation monitoring process, it is a process of monitoring whether or not the retry operation of paying out the gaming ball to be paid out again is normally performed.

  When the retry operation monitoring process is started, the payout control unit 952 of the payout control board 951 detects the rotation of the above-described payout control built-in RAM as shown in FIG. 162 under the control of the payout control MPU 952a. The rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST is read from the sensor history information storage area (step S770).

  Subsequent to step S770, the payout control program determines whether there is a detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840 described above (step S772). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST read out in step S770 matches the home position determination value. As described above, this fixed position determination value is stored in the payout control built-in ROM, and in this embodiment, is “00001111B (“ B ”represents a bit)”, and B7 to B4 of the upper 4 bits. Has a value of 0, and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 have a value of 1. In the determination in step S772, it is determined whether or not the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value.

  In step S772, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST read out in step S770 match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the home position determination value, the payout control program The mismatch counter INCC is incremented by 1 (increment, step S774). The misalignment counter INCC includes the number of balls of the gaming balls paid out by being received by the recess of the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 834 is transmitted, and the number of balls detected by the payout detection sensor 842 Usually, the number of balls of the game ball received and paid out by the recess of the payout rotary body is in agreement with the number of balls detected by the payout detection sensor 842 Therefore, the value is 0. Since the payout control program performs a retry operation in the payout setting process shown in FIG. 160, the number of balls of the gaming ball paid out by being received by the recess of the payout rotating body by the retry operation and the payout detection in practice It is determined by monitoring the inconsistency counter INCC whether or not the game balls, which are inconsistent due to the mismatch between the number of balls detected by the sensor 842 and the game balls, are repeatedly being repeated. The inconsistency counter INCC is stored in the award ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S774, the payout control program increments the inconsistency counter INCC stored in the prize ball information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S774 or in step S772, the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST read out in step S770 do not match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value Sometimes, the payout control program determines whether there is a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 842 (step S776). This determination is performed based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 842 in the port input process of step S550 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, as described above, the detection signal is stored as the input information in the input information storage area of the above-described payout control built-in RAM. In step S776, the payout control program reads input information from the input information storage area and determines whether there is a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 842.

  When there is a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 842 in step S776, the payout control program subtracts the value 1 from the inconsistency counter INCC stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control internal RAM (decrement, step S778). ).

  Subsequent to step S778 or when there is no detection signal from the payout detection sensor 842 in step S776, the payout control program determines whether or not the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is smaller than the inconsistency threshold INCTH (step S780). In the pachinko machine 1, it has been experimentally obtained that the probability that one game ball that does not fit due to the retry operation is paid out is about 1 / million. In this embodiment, the mismatch threshold INCTH is obtained. Is set to a value of 5.

  In the process of setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530 in the payout control unit power-on process of FIG. 151, as described above, the payout backup information is stored in the payout control internal RAM when power is restored. Information to be used for the retry operation monitoring process is set based on the inconsistency counter INCC stored in the prize ball information storage area. By this processing, for example, even if a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs, the value of the inconsistency counter INCC or the like at the time of power recovery is restored to a value such as the inconsistency counter INCC etc. Can be done. As a result, in the determination in step S780, monitoring of the game ball payout operation (retry operation) by the payout device 830, which has been performed immediately before a momentary power failure or power failure, can be continued from the time of power recovery. Yes. Therefore, for example, immediately before a momentary power failure or power failure, if the value of the mismatch counter INCC is smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH in the determination in step S780, it is determined that the retry operation is operating normally, that is, the payout device It is determined that the payout operation of the gaming ball by 830 is in the normal state, and even at the time of power recovery, it can be determined that the payout operation of the gaming ball by the payout device 830 is normal by the determination of step S780. On the other hand, when the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is not smaller than the inconsistency threshold INCTH in the determination in step S780, it is determined that the retry operation is abnormal, that is, the game ball payout operation by the payout device 830 is abnormal. It is possible to determine that the payout operation of the gaming ball by the payout device 830 is in an abnormal state by the determination of step S780 even at the time of power recovery.

  If it is determined in step S780 that the value of the mismatch counter INCC is smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH, this routine ends. On the other hand, when the value of the mismatch counter INCC is not smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH in step S780, that is, when the value of the mismatch counter INCC is equal to or greater than the mismatch threshold INCTH, the payout control program In order to notify that it is “1”, retry error information for displaying the number “5” on the error LED indicator 860b which is a segment indicator mounted on the payout control board 951 is set and the above-mentioned payout control built-in RAM Is set (stored) in the state information storage area (step S782). On the other hand, when notifying that it is "in prize ball stock", the payout control program sets the prize ball in-progress information for displaying the number "9" on the error LED display 860b and incorporates the above-mentioned payout control. It is set (stored) in the status information storage area of the RAM (step S782).

  Following step S782, the payout control program sets the value 0 (initial value 0) to the inconsistency counter INCC stored in the award ball information storage area of the payout control internal RAM (step S784). In step S784, the mismatch counter INCC determines that the value of the mismatch counter INCC is not smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH in step S780, that is, when the value of the mismatch counter INCC is greater than or equal to the mismatch threshold INCTH. It is designed to be initialized upon the occurrence of this internal factor. When the operation switch 954 is operated to clear the RAM when the power is turned on, the mismatch counter INCC is initialized in response to the occurrence of the external factor. When the operation switch 954 is operated when the power is turned on, as described above, an operation signal corresponding to the operation is input as a RAM clear signal to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. As described above, the main control program described above erases all the various information stored in the main control built-in RAM under the control of the main control MPU 1310a, and the RAM clear notification command is displayed on the peripheral control board shown in FIG. To 1510. As a result, the RAM clear notification sound flows from the speaker 921 shown in FIG. 91 and the upper speaker 573 shown in FIG.

  Subsequently to step S784, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is set to the value 1 (step S786), and this routine is ended. This retry error flag RTERR-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not the retry operation is operating abnormally. The value is 1 when the retry operation is operating abnormally, and the retry operation is not operating abnormally (retry operation is not performed). It is respectively set to the value 0 when operating normally

  The payout control program shows retry error information (or prize ball stock information) set (stored) in the output information storage area of the payout control internal RAM in step S782 under the control of the payout control MPU 952a, as shown in FIG. In the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process), a retry error state command is created and transmitted to the main control board 1310 in the command transmission process in step S566, and LED display data creation in step S564 in the process is performed. In the process, display data to be displayed on the error LED display 860b is created and stored as LED display information in the output information storage area, and the LED display information stored in the output information storage area in the port output process of step S548 in the process is stored. Based on the error LED indicator 860b, To display the number "5" on the error LED display device 860b. In the main control board 1310 that has received the status command, the main control program transmits it to the peripheral control board 1510 in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. This peripheral control board 1510 emits a plurality of LEDs on various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 to emit light in a predetermined color (red in this embodiment), and outputs a lighting signal on the door frame side. Are output to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, and a plurality of LEDs are caused to emit light in a predetermined color. As described above, the store clerk or the like who notices the light emission of the plurality of LEDs opens the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 to thereby display the number "" on the error LED display 860b mounted on the payout control board 951. By visually observing that “5” is displayed, it can be confirmed that a “retry error” has occurred. As a result, the store clerk or the like in the hall checks the failure of the dispensing detection sensor 842, disconnection of various harnesses extending to the dispensing control board 951 from the dispensing detection sensor 842, contact failure of various connectors, etc. in order to investigate the cause. The operation can be performed extremely quickly compared to the case where the light emission of the plurality of LEDs and the display content of the error LED indicator 860b are not notified.

  Also, by intentionally putting the payout detection sensor 842 into the inoperative state, the above-described detection of the gaming balls paid out by being received by the recess of the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 834 is transmitted If the value of the above-mentioned inconsistency counter INCC is equal to or more than the incoincidence threshold value INCTH, even if a fraudulent act of illegally acquiring the game ball paid out by this retry operation is performed by forcibly generating the retry operation. Then, since a plurality of LEDs on various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 emit light, a clerk or the like of the hall rushes to confirm the state of the pachinko machine 1. In this case, the player who performs the injustice is forced to interrupt so as not to find the action, and can not continuously acquire the illegal gaming ball due to the injustice. Even if the value of the inconsistence counter INCC matches the inconsistency threshold INCTH, the number of gaming balls that can be acquired by the player who cheats is the same as the inconsistency threshold INCTH, that is, five balls Therefore, the damage to the hall due to the act of intentionally disabling the payout detection sensor 842 can be minimized.

  Furthermore, as described above, the mismatch counter INCC is determined in step S780 when the value of the mismatch counter INCC is not smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH, that is, the value of the mismatch counter INCC is greater than the mismatch threshold INCTH. Initialization is triggered by the occurrence of an internal factor. Thus, the mismatch counter INCC is not initialized, for example, in response to the occurrence of an external factor such as operating the operation switch 954 to clear the error. Therefore, even if the operation switch 954 or the like is illegally modified so that the operation signal is input to the payout control MPU 952a, the inconsistency counter INCC may be forcibly initialized by such an illegal action. Absent.

[15-10. Mismatched counter reset judgment processing]
Next, mismatch counter reset processing will be described. In this misalignment counter reset process, the number of balls of the gaming balls paid out by being received by the recess of the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 834 is transmitted, and the number of balls detected by the payout detection sensor 842 Is a process for determining whether or not to reset the inconsistency counter INCC that calculates the difference between.

  When the inconsistency counter reset determination process is started, the payout control unit 952 in the payout control board 951 causes the payout control program to execute the inconsistency counter reset determination time as shown in FIG. 163 under the control of the payout control MPU 952a. It is determined whether it has elapsed (step S790). This determination is performed based on the mismatch counter reset determination time updated in the timer update process in step S552 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the inconsistency counter reset determination time is stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the above-described payout control built-in RAM. In step S 790, the time management information is read out from the time management information storage area, and it is determined whether the inconsistency counter reset determination time has elapsed.

  When the mismatch counter reset determination time has not elapsed in step S790, the payout control program ends this routine as it is. On the other hand, when the mismatch counter reset determination time has elapsed in step S790, the payout control program initializes the mismatch counter reset determination time (step S792). By this initialization, an initial value of 7000 s (about 2 hours) is set as the mismatch counter reset determination time.

  Subsequent to step S792, the payout control program sets a value 0 (initial value 0) to the inconsistency counter INCC stored in the award ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM described above (step S794). Exit. As described above, the inconsistency counter INCC is detected by the payout detection sensor 842 and the number of game balls that are received and paid out by the recess of the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 834 is transmitted. A counter for calculating the difference between the number of balls and the number of game balls normally received and paid out by the recess of the payout rotating body, the number of balls detected by the payout detection sensor 842, and Since they match, the value is 0. Since the payout control program performs a retry operation in the payout installation process shown in FIG. 160 under the control of the payout control MPU 952a, the ball of the game ball that is received and paid out by the concave portion of the payout rotating body by this retry operation. The inconsistency counter INCC monitors and determines whether or not the game balls that are not consistent due to a mismatch between the number and the number of balls actually detected by the payout detection sensor 842 are repeatedly paid. In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present invention, it has been experimentally obtained that the probability that one game ball that does not fit due to the retry operation is paid out is about one millionth.

  Here, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 is made up of the game board 5 and a frame body such as the main body frame 4 on which the game board 5 is mounted, and the game board 5 is replaced by replacing the game board 5 Since the specifications are configured to be changeable, the payout control substrate 951 that controls the payout device 830, the power supply for driving the payout device 830, and the power supply substrate 931 that generates the control power for the payout control substrate 951 have a common function. It is equipped on the body side. Under the control of the payout control MPU 952a, the payout control unit 952 in the payout control board 951 determines whether the retry operation is repeated by monitoring the inconsistency counter INCC as described above. The operation can be determined, and in the payout control unit power-off process in the payout control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 151, the inconsistency counter INCC immediately before the shut-off is stored when the power is shut off. In the processing of step S530 (setting at power recovery of the RAM working area) in the processing at power-on of the dispensing control unit shown at 150, processing is restarted from the stored mismatch counter INCC at power-on.

  Then, when the game board 5 attached to the pachinko machine 1 is turned off and replaced with another game board 5 ′ having a different game specification from the game board 5, the payout control board is turned on. In 951, the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control unit 952 starts processing again from the inconsistency counter INCC stored when the game board 5 is mounted on the pachinko machine 1. That is, when the player plays the pachinko machine 1 to which the game board 5 ′ is attached, the mismatch counter INCC in the pachinko machine 1 to which the game board 5 before replacement is attached is inherited as it is. For this reason, when a player plays the pachinko machine 1 with the game board 5 ′ installed, the probability of 1 / million million happens, and the number of inconsistent game balls is generated, and the inconsistency counter INCC is set. When the inconsistency counter INCC becomes equal to or greater than the inconsistency threshold INCTH described above, it is determined as an abnormal operation of the retry operation by the payout control MPU 952a in a short period after the game board 5 is replaced with the game board 5 ′. There is a fear. That is, in a short period after the game board 5 is replaced with the game board 5 ′, malfunctions of the payout detection sensor 842, disconnection of various harnesses extending from the payout detection sensor 842 to the payout control board 951, and contact of various connectors There is a risk that it is suddenly determined as an abnormal operation of the retry operation even though no defect or the like has occurred.

  In this way, when the game board 5 is replaced with the game board 5 ′ and it is determined as an abnormal operation of the retry operation in a short period of time, the impression that the replaced game board 5 ′ is likely to break down despite being new. It may be given to the player. The probability of one millionth of a game ball being paid out due to a retry operation is one millionth of the time when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the hall and operated continuously for one week during the hall's business hours. Since it is the same as the probability that one unsuccessful game ball is paid out due to the retry operation, the probability of 1 / million from the inconsistency counter INCC in the process of step S778 in the retry operation monitoring process shown in FIG. The value 1 is not drawn. Then, the value 1 is incremented to the mismatch counter INCC in one week and the mismatch counter INCC becomes the value 1, and the value 1 is further incremented in the mismatch counter INCC and the mismatch counter INCC becomes the value 2 in 2 weeks. In week, value 1 is further incremented in inconsistency counter INCC, value in inconsistency counter INCC becomes value 3, in value 4 in inconsistency counter INCC is further incremented, value in inconsistency counter INCC becomes value 4, and in week 5 When the mismatch counter INCC is further incremented by the value 1, the mismatch counter INCC becomes the value 5, which matches the above-mentioned mismatch threshold INCTH. That is, when 5 weeks have elapsed, the inconsistency counter INCC matches the inconsistency threshold INCTH, so that the payout control program performs the operation of step S776 in the retry operation monitoring process shown in FIG. 162 under the control of the payout control MPU 952a. In the determination, it is determined that there is no detection signal from the payout detection sensor 842. The malfunction of the payout detection sensor 842, the disconnection of various harnesses extending to the payout control board 951 from the payout detection sensor 842, and the poor contact of various connectors. The segment display mounted on the payout control board 951 in order to notify that it is a “retry error” in the process of step S782 in the retry operation monitoring process shown in FIG. 162. To display the number "5" on the error LED display 860b Set the color information so that the set (stored) in the status information storage area of the payout control chip RAM.

  Therefore, when the payout control MPU 952a determines that the mismatch counter reset determination time has elapsed in the determination in step S790 in this mismatch counter reset determination processing, that is, it repeatedly performs the mismatch counter reset every 7000s (about 2 hours). In the process of step S 794 in the determination process, the value 0 is forcibly set to the mismatch counter INCC, that is, the reset is performed forcibly, thereby incrementing the mismatch counter INCC generated with the probability of a few millions of parts described above. Invalidated. This causes an error in the retry operation even though there is no malfunction of the payout detection sensor 842, disconnection of various harnesses from the payout detection sensor 842 to the payout control board 951, contact failure of various connectors, or the like. It is possible to prevent the setting (storage) of retry error information that indicates the presence in the state information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  It should be noted that, by intentionally disabling the payout detection sensor 842, it is difficult to detect a game ball that is received by the recess of the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 834 is transmitted. In the case where the payout detection sensor 842 is intentionally repeatedly inactivated for a short time even if an illegal act of forcibly generating the retry operation performed and illegally acquiring the game ball paid out by the retry operation is performed, As described above, when the value of the mismatch counter INCC is equal to or greater than the mismatch threshold INCTH, a plurality of LEDs on various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 emit light, so that the hall clerk or the like is in the state of the pachinko machine 1 It will rush to confirm. In this case, the player who performs the injustice is forced to interrupt so as not to find the action, and can not continuously acquire the illegal gaming ball due to the injustice. On the other hand, when the payout detection sensor 842 is intentionally repeatedly deactivated for a long time so that the value of the mismatch counter INCC does not exceed the mismatch threshold INCTH, the mismatch counter INCC every 7000 s (about 2 hours). However, during this period, the number of game balls that can be acquired by a player who performs fraud is, as described above, the inconsistency counter INCC is up to the inconsistency threshold INCTH, and the payout detection sensor 842 is Even if the game player intentionally deactivates for a long time, it is possible to extremely reduce the number of game balls that can be acquired by a player who performs fraudulent acts.

[15-11. Error release operation determination process]
Next, the error release operation determination process will be described. In this error release operation determination process, it is determined whether or not the operation switch 954 shown in FIG. 124 is operated.

  When the error release operation determination process is started, the payout control program in the payout control unit 952 of the payout control board 951 causes the operation switch 954 to release an error as shown in FIG. 164 under the control of the payout control MPU 952a. It is determined whether or not it is operated (step S800). This determination is made based on the operation signal from the operation switch 954 in the port input process in step S550 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the operation signal is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the above-described payout control built-in RAM. In step S800, the payout control program reads the input information from the input information storage area, and determines that the error cancellation is not instructed when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is HI. On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is determined not to be operated, when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is LOW, it is determined that the error cancellation is instructed and the operation switch 954 is operated. It is determined that

When the operation switch 954 is not operated in step S800, the payout control program ends this routine as it is, while when the operation switch 954 is operated in step S800, the payout control program checks an error flag state confirmation process. This is performed (step S802). In this error flag state determination process, the state of the error flag corresponding to various error information regarding the dispensing device 830 is confirmed. For example, the state of a retry error flag RTERR-FLG indicating whether the retry operation is operating abnormally is confirmed.
As described above, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG has a value 1 when the retry operation is abnormal, and a value 0 when the retry operation is not abnormal (the retry operation is normal). Since it is set, the payout control program checks whether the value of the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is the value 0 or the value 1 under the control of the payout control MPU 952a.

  Following step S802, the payout control program performs state information setting processing (step S804). In this state information setting process, if the state of the error flag indicates that an error has occurred based on the error flag confirmed in step S802, the state information corresponding to the error flag is The payout control built-in RAM is set (stored) in the state information storage area. As a result, in the command transmission process of step S566 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. 151, various information (status information) is read from the status information storage area, and this read status Based on the information, a state command is created and transmitted to the main control board 1310. For example, when the retry error flag RTERR-FLG indicating whether or not the above-mentioned retry operation is abnormal operation is the value 1, that is, when the retry operation is abnormal operation, it is indicated that an error occurs in the retry operation. If retry error information to be conveyed is set (stored) in the state information storage area of the payout control internal RAM, the command transmission process of step S566 in the payout control unit power-on process (payment control unit main process) shown in FIG. A retry error status command is created and transmitted to the main control board 1310.

  The main control board 1310 that has received the retry error information is transmitted from the main control program to the peripheral control board 1510 in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. In the control board 1510, the sub control program performs retry operation error notification processing to notify that an error has occurred in the retry operation. In this retry operation error notification process, the error notification announcement of the retry operation “Check the prize ball unit.” And “Check the payout control board harness.” Two times.) By flowing from the speaker 921 shown in FIG. 91 and the upper speaker 573 shown in FIG. The store clerk or the like in the hall who heard the error notification announcement of the retry operation breaks the malfunction of the payout detection sensor 842 shown in FIG. Defects and the like can be confirmed extremely quickly as compared with the case where the error notification announcement of the retry operation does not flow from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. Further, in the retry operation error notification process, the plurality of LEDs of various decoration substrates provided in the door frame 3 are caused to emit light in a predetermined color (red in this embodiment).

  Following step S804, the payout control program performs release setting processing (step S806). In this cancellation setting process, when the status of the error flag indicates that an error has occurred based on the error flags corresponding to the various error information confirmed in step S802, the error flag is handled. The CR unit 6 indicates that the error is forced to stop the content displayed by the error LED indicator 860b, which is a segment indicator already mounted on the payout control board 951, or that the ball can be rented. In order to communicate to the above, the logic of the PRDY signal described above is held HI, that is, the activated state, and from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control unit 952 Or output to the CR unit 6. For example, when the retry error flag RTERR-FLG indicating whether or not the retry operation described above is operating abnormally is the value 1, that is, when the retry operation is operating abnormally, the error LED display 860b is already displayed. The retry error information stored in the state information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM described above is “normal” in order to forcibly stop the numeral “5” notifying that it is “retry error” It forcibly overwrites the information on which the graphic "-" for notifying the effect is displayed. Also, in order to tell the CR unit 6 that it is ready to lend a ball, the logic of the PRDY signal is held HI, that is, it keeps up and the gaming ball is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a. Output to the CR unit 6 through the equal lending device connection terminal plate 869.

  Following step S806, the payout control program performs error flag initialization processing (step S808), and the routine ends. In this error flag initialization process, if the error flag status indicates that an error has occurred based on the error flag corresponding to the various error information confirmed in step S802, the error flag is set. initialize. For example, when the retry error flag RTERR-FLG indicating whether or not the above-described retry operation is operating abnormally is the value 1, that is, when the retry operation is operating abnormally, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG has the value 0. Set and initialize. At this time, the logic of the PRDY signal described above is held at HI, that is, the rising state is maintained, and the logic state of the PRDY signal is set in the PRDY signal output setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area. Thus, the PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM in the CR communication process of step S554 in the payout control part main process of the payout control part power-on process of FIG. The read out PRDY signal output setting information, that is, the PRDY signal whose logic is LOW, is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a to the CR unit 6 through the game ball connection device connection plate 869. .

  As described above, when the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is determined in step S780 in the retry operation monitoring processing shown in FIG. In the process of step S786 in the same process, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is set to the value 1 while the operation switch 954 is operated, causing this external factor to trigger. When this occurs, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is set to 0 and initialized. The retry error flag RTERR-FLG is operated when the operation switch 954 is operated to clear the RAM when the power is turned on, that is, the operation switch 954 is operated to clear the RAM to cancel the error. Similar to the case where the switch 954 is operated, the initialization is triggered by the occurrence of this external factor.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1, the main control side main processing is executed from the time the power is turned on, with respect to the operation switch 954 (operation switch), which was originally used to cancel the error that occurred in the dispensing operation. An operation unit for exerting a RAM clear function for starting initialization of the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) and the payout control built-in RAM (payout storage unit) for a predetermined time until It functions as In addition, the pachinko machine 1 causes the operation switch 954 to function as an operation unit for canceling an error that has occurred with respect to the game ball payout operation after the predetermined time has elapsed. Here, even if the store clerk is not accustomed to the operation of the pachinko machine, even if the position of the operation switch 954 on the back of the gaming machine is remembered, according to the timing at which the operation switch 954 is operated, If the predetermined time has passed since the power was turned on, the function to release the error generated for the payout operation of the gaming ball is exhibited, while according to the timing when the operation switch 954 is operated, it is predetermined from the power turned on If it is within the time, the function of initializing the storage unit can be exhibited. Therefore, even if an error occurs in such a gaming machine, the hall clerk can improve the efficiency of the switch operation at the time of handling the error and can cope appropriately without losing the switch operation, so the game is interrupted. It is possible to resume the game before the player who has lost the game loses the will to play.

[15-12. Exchange of various signals with CR unit]
Next, the CR communication process of step S554 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control unit power-on process of FIG. 151 will be described using a timing chart. In this CR communication process, various signals are exchanged between the payout control board 951 and the CR unit 6 shown in FIG. First, signal processing at the time of payout operation by ball lending will be described, and subsequently input signal confirmation processing from the CR unit 6 will be described. Here, the number of gaming balls for 200 yen as the amount of money (in the present embodiment, 50 balls, and the payout operation of 25 balls for 100 yen is performed twice as the amount of money) is the number of lent balls, The case of paying out to the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 will be described. The BRQ signal, the BRDY signal and the CR connection signal from the CR unit 6 read out the input information from the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM and are stored in the read input information, and the CR communication processing is performed. , From the input information, confirms the logic state of the BRQ signal, the BRDY signal and the CR connection signal every 2 ms which is an interrupt timer period.

[15-12-1. Signal processing at the time of payout operation by ball rental]
The payout control MPU 952a of the payout control unit 952 in the payout control board 951 reads out the PRDY signal output setting information from the CR communication information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and the read PRDY signal output setting information pays out the lent ball. When it is set to the logic state of the PRDY signal that indicates that the payout operation is possible, as shown in FIG. 165 (d), the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is possible. In order to communicate the logic of the PRDY signal as HI, that is, start up and hold and output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control unit 952, and as the PRDY, a gaming ball lending device connection terminal The signal is output to the CR unit 6 via the plate 869 (timing H0). In this state, for example, when the ball lending button 328 is pressed by the player, the ball lending button 328 is turned on (turned on), and this ball lending operation signal is TDS shown in FIG. 125. The frequency display plate 365 is input to the CR unit 6 through the game ball and the like lending device connection terminal plate 869. As shown in FIG. 165 (a), the CR unit 6 to which this TDS has been input pays out the number of gaming balls worth 200 yen to the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 as the number of lent balls, as shown in FIG. The ball request signal BRDY is output from the CR unit 6 to the payout control board 951 (the payout control MPU 952a) through the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, and the signal is raised and held (timing H1) . The BRDY signal is input as a BRDY signal to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

  As shown in FIG. 165 (b), the payout control MPU 952a receives the BRDY signal, and the payout control program sets the lending request monitoring time HA (from 20 milliseconds (ms) to 58 ms in this embodiment) from timing H1. The predetermined number of lent balls (in this embodiment, 25 balls) in one payout operation from the CR unit 6 through the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal plate 869 until the elapsing. ) It is monitored whether or not BRQ, which is a single request for starting dispensing operation to pay out 100 yen as the amount of money, rises.

  Since the CR unit 6 pays out the ball number of the gaming ball for 100 yen to the upper plate 321 or the lower plate 322 as the rental ball number among the ball number of the gaming ball for 200 yen as an amount, as shown in FIG. As shown in), until the lending request monitoring time HA elapses from the timing H1, the BRQ is output from the CR unit 6 to the CR unit 6 via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, and the signal thereof Start up and hold (timing H2). The BRQ is input as a BRQ signal to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

  As shown in FIG. 165 (c), when the BRQ signal rises from the timing H1 until the lending request monitoring time HA elapses, the payout control MPU 952a causes the BRQ demand acknowledgment ACK monitoring time HB from the timing H2 (in this embodiment, Is set to 20 ms ± 1 ms), the payout control MPU 952a holds the logical state of the EXS signal as HI, that is, keeps the raised state, in order to notify that one payout operation has started. Output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, and to the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 as EXS (timing H3).

As shown in FIG. 165 (b), the CR unit 6 to which this EXS has been input is set to the lending instruction monitoring time HC (from 20 ms to 58 ms in the present embodiment) from timing H3.
) Is output from the CR unit 6 to the payout control board 951 via the gaming device lending device connection terminal plate 869, and the signal is lowered and held until the elapse of time) To (timing H4).

  As shown in FIG. 165 (c), the payout control MPU 952a performs one payout operation from the timing H4 until the payout monitoring time HD (in this embodiment, the ball payout time is set) elapses. It goes and pays out to the upper plate 321 or the lower plate 322 as the number of balls for the predetermined number of lent balls, that is, the number of gaming balls for 100 yen as the number of lent balls. When the payout monitoring time HD elapses, the EXS signal that has been raised and held from timing H3 is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a with its logic set to LOW, that is, in the lowered state. , EXS is output to the CR unit 6 via the gaming ball rental device connecting terminal plate 869 (timing H5).

  Since the CR unit 6 pays out the remaining number of game balls of 100 yen out of the number of game balls of 200 yen as the amount of money to the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 as the rented number, FIG. ), The BRQ is transferred from the CR unit 6 to the lending device connection terminal board such as a game ball until the next request confirmation timing HE (in this embodiment, the maximum is set to 268 ms) from the timing H5. The signal is output to the payout control board 951 (the payout control MPU 952a) via 869, and the signal is raised and held (timing H6).

  Similarly, when the payout control MPU 952a pays out the remaining 100 yen of game balls to the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 as shown in FIG. 165 (c) using the method described above. The EXS signal that has been raised and held is set to the logic level LOW, that is, held in the lowered state, and output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a. The signal is output to the CR unit 6 via the plate 869 (timing H7).

  The CR unit 6 stands from the timing H1, as shown in FIG. 165A, until the CR unit lending completion monitoring time HF (in the present embodiment, the maximum is 268 ms) elapses from the timing H7. The BRDY thus raised and held is output from the CR unit 6 to the payout control board 951 (the payout control MPU 952a) via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, and the signal is lowered and held (timing H8).

  The above-described lending request monitoring time HA, BRQ request acknowledgment ACK monitoring time HB, lending instruction monitoring time HC, payout monitoring time HD, next request confirmation timing HE, CR unit lending completion monitoring time HF are the payout control shown in FIG. The time is counted by the timer update process in step S552 in the power-on process (payout control part main process).

  The payout control MPU 952a is not in communication with the CR unit 6 when there is a ball out, a ball is out, a payout detection sensor error, a retry error, a full tank, etc. (BRDY from the CR unit 6 When the logic is LOW, that is, when it falls and is held, as shown in FIG. 165 (d), the PRDY signal which is raised and held from the timing H1 is in a state where the logic is LOW, that is, it is fallen. , And output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a to the CR unit 6 as a PRDY through the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 (timing H9). On the other hand, when communicating with the CR unit 6 (when the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, that is, rising and held), the state of the logic of the EXS signal is maintained and the payout is made, though not shown. It outputs from the output terminal of the predetermined | prescribed output port of control MPU952a, and outputs to CR unit 6 via the lending apparatus connection terminal board 869, such as game balls, as EXS. “Maintain the logic state of the EXS signal” means that when the logic of the EXS signal is LOW (when the EXS signal falls and is held), the logic LOW is maintained and the logic of the EXS signal is HI ( The logical HI is maintained when the EXS signal is held up.

  Thus, the CR unit 6 exchanges various signals with the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control unit 952 in the payout control board 951, and the payout control MPU 952a sets the ball number of the gaming ball for 200 yen as the amount and 100 as the amount. By performing the payout operation of 25 balls for the yen twice, the game balls with 50 balls for the number of lent balls are paid out to the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322. When a store clerk or the like in the hall operates a setting unit (not shown) provided on the front side of the CR unit 6, for example, the upper plate 321 or the number of gaming balls for 100 yen is used as the amount of money. When it is set to pay out to the lower plate 322, the payout control MPU 952a performs a payout operation of 25 balls for 100 yen as a monetary amount, and the number of game balls for 500 yen as a monetary amount When it is set to pay out to the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322, the payout control MPU 952a performs payout operation of 25 balls for 100 yen as an amount of money five times, and sets the number of game balls for 1000 yen as an amount of money. When the number of rented balls is set to be paid out to the upper plate 321 or the lower plate 322, the payout control MPU 952a performs the payout operation of 25 balls for 100 yen as the amount of money 10 times.

[15-12-2. Confirmation process of input signal from CR unit]
The payout control MPU 952a of the payout control unit 952 in the payout control board 951 causes the CR unit 6 to perform BRQ from the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 even if the above-described loan request monitoring time HA has elapsed. CR unit 6 connects BRDY from CR unit 6 to a game ball lending device connection even if the signal is not output to payout control board 951 and the above-mentioned lending instruction monitoring time HC has elapsed. The CR unit 6 plays the BRQ from the CR unit 6 even when the signal is not output via the terminal plate 869 and is not output to the payout control board 951 or when the next request confirmation timing HE described above has elapsed. The signal is output to the payout control board 951 via the ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, and the signal is not activated, or the CR unit described above Even if the ejection completion monitoring time HF has elapsed, the CR unit 6 outputs BRDY from the CR unit 6 to the payout control board 951 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and does not drop the signal. In this case, PRDY and EXS described above are used to confirm whether BRQ and BRDY are normal. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 165 (e) and 165 (f), when the payout control MPU 952a determines that BRQ and BRDY are not normal (timing J0), a predetermined period JA from this timing J0 (in the present embodiment) , 200 ms ± 1 ms), the logic of the PRDY signal is changed to LOW, that is, held down and output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control unit 952 Output as a PRDY signal to the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, and the logic of the EXS signal is set to LOW, that is, held down, and the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a To the CR unit 6 via the game ball connection device board 869 as an EXS. (Timing J1).

  Subsequently, the payout control MPU 952a sets the PRDY signal, which has been dropped from timing J1 and held, to a logic of HI after elapse of a predetermined period JB (set to 200 ms ± 1 ms in this embodiment) from timing J1. That is, it holds in a raised state and outputs it from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a, and outputs it as the PRDY to the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 (timing J2 ).

  Subsequently, the payout control MPU 952a sets the PRDY signal, which has been raised from timing J2 and held, to LOW after the elapse of a predetermined period JC (set to 100 ms ± 1 ms in the present embodiment) from timing J2. In other words, it holds in the lowered state and outputs it from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a, and outputs it as the PRDY to the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 (timing J3 ).

  Subsequently, the payout control MPU 952a sets the PRDY signal, which has been dropped from timing J3 and held, to a logic of HI after elapse of a predetermined period JD (in this embodiment, 100 ms ± 1 ms) from timing J3. That is, it holds in a raised state and outputs it from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a, and outputs it as the PRDY to the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 (timing J4 ).

  Subsequently, the payout control MPU 952a sets the PRDY signal, which has been raised from timing J4 and held, to LOW after the elapse of a predetermined period JE (100 ms ± 1 ms in this embodiment) since timing J4. That is, it holds in the lowered state and outputs it from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a, and outputs it as the PRDY to the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 (timing J5 ).

  Subsequently, the payout control MPU 952a sets the logic of the PRDY signal held down and held from the timing J5 after the elapse of a predetermined period JF (in this embodiment, 10000 ms ± 1 ms) from the timing J5 as the logic HI. In other words, it is held in the raised state and is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a, and is output as PRDY to the CR unit 6 via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 (timing J6). ).

  The above-described predetermined period JA to predetermined period JF are timed in the timer update process in step S552 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG.

[16. Various control processing of peripheral control board]
Next, various processes of the peripheral control board 1510 that receive various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) shown in FIG. 123 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 166 is a flowchart showing an example of processing at power-on of the peripheral control unit, FIG. 167 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing, and FIG. 168 shows an example of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing. 169 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process, FIG. 170 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process, and FIG. 171 illustrates the LOCKN signal history generation process. FIG. 172 is a flowchart showing an example of connection failure determination processing, FIG. 173 is a flowchart showing an example of connection recovery processing, and FIG. 174 is a diagram showing an example of the INIT terminal of the door frame side effect transmitter IC. The timing to output a connection confirmation signal is explained That is a timing chart.

  As shown in FIG. 126, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 and a liquid crystal display control unit 1512. Here, various control processes of the peripheral control unit 1511 will be described. First, peripheral control unit power-on processing will be described, followed by peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing, peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing, LOCKN signal The history creation process, connection failure determination process, and connection recovery process will be described. The LOCKN signal history creation process is executed as one process of the drawing state information acquisition process in step S1110 in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later. The connection failure determination process and the connection recovery process are performed when the peripheral control unit described later is turned on. This process is executed as one process of the warning process in step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the process, and the connection recovery process is performed following the connection failure determination process. In the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing is set as the highest priority as the interrupt processing priority, followed by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and peripheral control unit The order of V blank interrupt processing is set.

[16-1. Various control processes of peripheral control unit]
[16-1-1. Peripheral control unit power-on processing]
First, peripheral control unit power-on processing will be described with reference to FIG. When the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 126 performs a peripheral control unit power-on process as shown in FIG. When the peripheral control unit power-on process is started, the effect control program performs an initial setting process under the control of the peripheral control MPU 1511a (step S1000). In the initial setting process, the effect control program performs a process of initializing the peripheral control MPU 1511a itself, a hot start / cold start determination process, a process of setting a wait timer after reset, and the like. The peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a process of initializing itself. The time required for the process of initializing the peripheral control MPU 1511a is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the peripheral control MPU 1511a is initialized in a very short time. be able to. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a enters the state in which the interrupt permission is set, for example, as shown in FIGS. 143 and 144, which is output from the main control board 1310 in peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing described later. It will be in the state which can receive various commands, such as a command about control of game production production, a command about a state of pachinko machine 1, etc.

  In the hot start / cold start determination process, for the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 127, effect backup information (1fr) that is backed up in Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) in the backup first area 1511cb. ) And the production backup information (1 ms), which is the contents backed up in Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 (1 ms), are compared, and Bank 3 (1 fr) and Bank 4 (1 fr) in the backup second area 1511 cc are compared. The production backup information (1fr), which is the content that is backed up at the same time, is compared, and the production backup information that is the content that is backed up to Bank3 (1 ms) and Bank4 (1 ms) 1ms), and when the compared contents match, the contents stored in Bank1 (1fr) with respect to Bank0 (1fr), which is a normally used storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. The production backup information (1fr) and the production backup information (1ms) stored in Bank1 (1ms) with respect to Bank0 (1ms) are copied back to make a hot start, When the contents do not match (that is, when they do not match), the value 0 is forcibly written to Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1 ms), which are normally used storage areas of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. And a cold start.

  Also, in the hot start / cold start determination processing, the production control backup information which is the contents backed up in the Bank 1 (SRAM) and Bank 2 (SRAM) in the backup first area 1511 db for the peripheral control SRAM 1511d shown in FIG. The (SRAM) is compared, and the effect backup information (SRAM) which is the content backed up in Bank 3 (SRAM) and Bank 4 (SRAM) in the backup second area 1511 dc is compared. When the compared contents match, the production backup information (SRAM) which is the contents stored in Bank 0 (SRAM) with respect to Bank 0 (SRAM) which is the storage area normally used in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d shown in FIG. ) Is copied back to make a hot start, while when the compared contents do not match (that is, when they do not match), a value for Bank 0 (SRAM), which is a storage area normally used of peripheral control SRAM 1511 d Force 0 to write a cold start. Following such a hot start or cold start, the value 0 is forcibly written into the backup non-management target work area 1511 cf of the peripheral control RAM 1511 c shown in FIG. 127 and cleared to zero. The peripheral control MPU 1511a, after performing this initialization setting process, outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af shown in FIG. 127 and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e shown in FIG. 126 and resets to the peripheral control MPU 1511a. I try to prevent it.

  Following step S1000, the effect control program performs current time information acquisition processing (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition processing, calendar information for specifying a date and time information for specifying hour / minute / second are acquired from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 41654a of the RTC control unit 4165 shown in FIG. The RTC information acquisition storage area 1511 cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511 c shown in is set in the calendar information storage unit as current calendar information, and in the time information storage unit as current time information. Further, in the current time information acquisition process, the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device is also performed. In this brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, the peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires brightness setting information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, and the game board is set to have the brightness of the LED included in the acquired brightness setting information. A process of turning on the backlight by adjusting the luminance of the backlight of the side effect display device 1600 is performed. As described above, the luminance setting information includes luminance adjustment information for adjusting the range of the luminance of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, from 100% to 70% in increments of 5%, The brightness of the LED that is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 that has been set is included.

  Specifically, in the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165 is 75% and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 When lighting up, the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information, and the brightness stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165 is lit. When the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on when the luminance of the LED included in the setting information is 80%, the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on based on the luminance adjustment information included in the luminance setting information. Adjust the brightness and turn on. In the luminance setting process of the liquid crystal display device, the same correction as the luminance correction program for correcting the luminance of the game board side effect display device 1600 described above according to the usage time of the game board side effect display device 1600 is performed. It is supposed not to be done at all. This is because the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device incorporates a correction program similar to the brightness correction program, so that the brightness of the LED is corrected toward 100% each time the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device is executed. It is to prevent being done.

  In the present embodiment, the peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires calendar information and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a only once at power-on. The peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e after performing the current time information acquisition processing so that the peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset.

  Subsequent to step S1002, the effect control program sets a value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1006). This V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute a peripheral control unit steady process to be described later. The value is set to 0 when not executing. The V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is executed when the V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511 a can be received is input from the sound source built-in VDP 1512 a as a peripheral control described later. The value 1 is set in part V blank signal interrupt processing. In step S1006, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized once by setting the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. Peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and peripheral control external WDT 1511e after setting V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to a value of 0 so that peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset. There is.

  Subsequent to step S1006, the effect control program determines whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 (step S1008). When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not 1 (value 0), the process returns to step S1008 again to repeatedly determine whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1. By repeating such a determination, the process waits until the peripheral control unit steady process is executed. The peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1, and then outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e to reset the peripheral control MPU 1511a. I try to prevent it.

  When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 in step S1008, that is, when the peripheral control unit steady process is executed, a value 1 is first set to the steady process flag SP-FLG (step S1009). The steady process in progress flag SP-FLG is set to a value 1 when the peripheral control unit steady process is being executed, and a value 0 when the peripheral control unit steady process is completed.

  Subsequent to step S1009, the effect control program performs 1 ms interrupt timer activation processing (step S1010). In this 1 ms interrupt timer activation process, the 1 ms interrupt timer for executing peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing to be described later is activated, and the number of times the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated and peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed. The value 1 is set in the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN for counting the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN. The 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process.

  Subsequent to step S1010, the effect control program performs lamp data output processing (step S1012). In this lamp data output process, the effect control program performs DMA serial continuous transmission to the lamp drive board 4170 shown in FIG. Here, the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board is continuously transmitted using the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 8, the lamp drive substrate side transmission data storage area 1511 caa of the peripheral control RAM 1511 c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511 a shown in FIG. The game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs of various decoration boards provided on the game board 5 are created by a lamp data creation process described later Is set.

  The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 127 designates transmission of the lamp drive board serial I / O port as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa The first 1 byte of the game board side light emission data SL-DAT stored in the top address is sent to the serial I / O port for a lamp drive board via the external bus 1511 h, peripheral control bus controller 1511 ad, and peripheral bus 1511 ai Transfer and write to the transmit buffer register of As a result, the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board transfers the written data in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the light emission clock signal SL-CLK on the game board side to 1 byte of the transmission shift register. The data starts to be transmitted bit by bit.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac is triggered by the transmission interrupt request for the lamp drive board serial I / O port (in this embodiment, in the transmission buffer register of the lamp drive board serial I / O port). The written 1-byte data is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register is empty because the 1-byte data is lost.), The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa is using the bus. If not, the remaining game board side light emission data SL-DAT stored in the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa is byte by byte via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. Transmit serial I / O port for lamp drive board By transferring and writing to the buffer register, the lamp drive board serial I / O port transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the light emission clock signal SL-CLK on the game board side. Transmission of 1-byte data of the transmission shift register is started bit by bit, and continuous transmission is performed through the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board.

  In the lamp data output process, the effect control program performs a DMA serial continuous transmission process to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 shown in FIG. Also here, the frame I / O port LED serial I / O port continuous transmission is performed using the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. When this frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O port continuous transmission starts, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. In 1511cab, door-side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs on various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 is created by a lamp data creation process described later. Is set.

  The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a designates transmission of the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O port as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and transmits the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area. The first one byte of the door-side light emission data STL-DAT stored at the head address of 1511cab is serialized for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. Transfer and write to the I / O port transmit buffer register. As a result, the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O port transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the door side light emission clock signal STL-CLK. Transmission of 1-byte data is started bit by bit.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac is triggered by generation of a transmission interrupt request of the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate LED (in the present embodiment, the serial I / O for the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate LED) One byte of data written to the port's transmit buffer register is transferred to the transmit shift register, and it is triggered by the fact that one byte of data is empty in the transmit buffer register and becomes empty.) Peripheral control CPU core 1511 aa When the bus does not use a bus, the remaining door side light emission data STL-DAT stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab is stored byte by byte in the external bus 1511h and the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad. , And frame decoration through the peripheral bus 1511ai By transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register of the serial I / O port for the dynamic amplifier board LED, the frame I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED uses the data of the written transmission buffer register as the transmission shift register. Transfer and start transmitting data of 1 byte of the transmission shift register in synchronization with the door side light emission clock signal STL-CLK, bit by bit, and perform continuous transmission by the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O port Yes.

  Subsequent to step S1012, the effect control program performs effect operation unit monitoring processing (step S1014). In this rendering operation unit monitoring process, in the rendering operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, the operation of the operation button 410, etc. based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the rendering operation unit 400 Various information which acquired the is set, based on the effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511 cai of the peripheral control RAM 1511 c shown in FIG. 127, the presence or absence of operation of the operation button 410 is monitored, and the state of operation of the operation button 410 It is decided as appropriate whether or not to reflect the above.

  Subsequent to step S1014, the effect control program performs display data output processing (step S1016). In this display data output process, drawing data for one screen (one frame) generated on the built-in VRAM of the built-in VDP 1512a in the display data creation process described later is generated from channels CH1 and CH2 shown in FIG. Output to the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. Thereby, various screens are drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. In the display data output process, when the drawing exceeding the drawing capability of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a is performed, the generated drawing data for one screen (one frame) is used for the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect. The output to the display device 460 is canceled. Although this can prevent the processing time from being delayed, so-called dropping of frames will occur, but various decoration boards provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. 8 by the lamp data output process of step S1012. A plurality of LEDs and effects by a plurality of LEDs on various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and various effects from the speaker 921 shown in FIG. 5 and the upper speaker 573 shown in FIG. It is a mechanism that can give priority to the synchronization with the production of combined music and sound effects.

  Subsequent to step S1016, the effect control program performs sound data output processing (step S1018). In this sound data output process, the effect control program outputs to the audio data transmission IC 1512c as audio data obtained by serializing sound data such as music and sound effects set in the sound source built-in VDP 1512a in the sound data creation process described later, In addition to music and sound effects, the audio data transmission IC 1512c outputs the audio data of the notification sound and the notification sound as serialized audio data. When the audio data transmission IC 1512c receives the serialized audio data from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, the audio data transmission IC 1512c is directed toward the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as differential serial data using the right audio data as a plus signal and a minus signal. While transmitting, the left audio data is transmitted toward the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as serial data of a difference system in which a plus signal and a minus signal are used. Thus, in addition to stereo reproduction of music, sound effects and the like adapted to various effects from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the notification sound and the notification sound are also reproduced in stereo.

  Following step S1018, the effect control program performs scheduler update processing (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, the effect control program updates various schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511 cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511 c shown in FIG. For example, in the scheduler update process, the screen data of the first screen data from the screen data at the top among the screen data arranged in time series constituting the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae The pointer is updated to indicate whether to output.

  In the scheduler update process, among the light emission data arranged in time series constituting the light emission mode generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, the number of the light emission data from the first light emission data is emitted from the various LEDs. The pointer is updated to indicate whether it is an aspect.

  In the scheduler update process, sound data such as music and sound effects, sound data of notification sounds and notification sounds, which are arranged in time series constituting the schedule data for sound generation set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, are instructed. Of the sound command data, the pointer is updated in order to indicate what number of sound command data from the head sound command data is to be output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a.

  Also, in the scheduler update processing, from the drive data at the top of the drive data of the electric drive source such as the motor and the solenoid arranged in time series that configure the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae. The pointer is updated to indicate which drive data is to be output. Drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series constituting the electric drive source schedule data is peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt which is repeatedly executed each time 1 ms timer interrupt described later is generated. Updated with motor and solenoid drive processing in processing. In the motor and solenoid drive processing that is repeatedly executed each time the 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, the electric drive source such as the motor and solenoid is driven according to the drive data indicated by the pointer, and the next drive defined in time series is performed. It updates pointers to data, and updates pointers every time it executes its own processing. That is, since the drive data instructed by the pointer updated in the motor and solenoid drive processing is forcibly updated in the scheduler update process, the pointer is originally instructed for some reason in the motor and solenoid drive processing. Even when other driving data is designated from the driving data to be designated, the scheduler updating process is forcibly updated so as to instruct the driving data to be essentially designated.

  Subsequent to step S1020, the effect control program performs a received command analysis process (step S1022). In this reception command analysis process, the effect control program is transmitted from the effect display drive board 4450 via the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and various information transmitted from the main control board 1310. The command is analyzed for various commands received in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing (command receiving means) described later (command analyzing means). The effect control program is based on the information transmitted from the effect display drive board 4450 via the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, screen generation schedule data, light emission mode generation schedule data, sound Generation schedule data, electrical drive source schedule data, and the like are extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and set in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c in 1511cae. To do. In addition, the effect control program, the command from the main control board 1310 received in this peripheral control unit command interrupt processing, for example, start opening winning command for instructing the start of the start opening winning effect, the number of pending normal symbols A normal symbol memory command for identifying (0 to 4 pieces), a symbol tuning effect start command for instructing the start of symbol tuning effect, a symbol memory command which is output when the number of start pending changes, and the special winning opening 2005 A large winning opening 1 count display command (large winning opening count command) output each time a game ball is accepted, or a frame state 1 command (second error generation command, which indicates the content of full shown in FIG. 144) It is analyzed whether or not it is a full error occurrence command (command analysis means), and it is recognized which gaming state is currently in effect. Also, in this effect control program, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on, the command received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is the main body frame open command, the main body frame close command, the door open command or the door frame closed Analyzes whether it is a command or not. Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the reception command storage area 1511 cac of the peripheral control RAM 1511 c shown in FIG. 127. In the reception command analysis processing, The effect control program analyzes various commands stored in the received command storage area 1511cac. The various commands shown in FIG. 143 are various commands classified as special figure 1 tuning effect related, various commands classified as special figure 2 synchronous effect related, various commands classified as big hit related, power ON Various commands to be displayed, various commands to be classified to general drawing tuning effect related, various commands to be classified to regular electric terminal production related, various commands to be classified into notification display shown in FIG. 144, door frame opening command described above , For displaying status such as door frame closing command, body frame opening command and body frame closing command, error cancellation navigation command (corresponding to second error cancellation command) and frame state 1 command (corresponding to second error occurrence command) There are various commands that are classified, various commands that are classified as related to the test, and various commands that are classified into others.

  Subsequent to step S1022, the effect control program performs warning processing (step S1024). In this warning process, when the effect control program further includes various commands divided into the notification display shown in FIG. 144 in the commands analyzed in the received command analysis process of step S1022 as described above, various kinds of commands are performed. The schedule data for screen generation, the schedule data for light emission mode generation, the schedule data for sound generation, the electrical drive source schedule data, etc., which are set in the abnormality display mode for executing the abnormality notification, of the peripheral control unit 1511 It extracts from various control data copy area 1511ce of peripheral control ROM 1511b or peripheral control RAM 1511c, and sets 1511cae in a schedule data storage area of peripheral control RAM 1511c. In the warning process, when multiple abnormalities occur simultaneously, the abnormality notification is performed in the order of the priority registered in advance, and the abnormality is automatically resolved and the remaining abnormality notifications are automatically transitioned to. It is supposed to This allows you to monitor multiple anomalies at the same time without losing the information that an anomaly has occurred due to the occurrence of another anomaly after the occurrence of the anomaly but before resolving the anomaly Can.

  Furthermore, in this warning process, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on, the command analyzed by the effect control program in the above-described received command analysis process (step S1022) is classified into the status display shown in FIG. Various commands, for example, an error cancellation navigation command (second error cancellation command), by controlling the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 in a mode different from the normal performance mode accompanying the performance operation, for example, on the game board side Visually warn the outside using an effect display device 1600 (effect device), door frame side effect display device 460 (effect device), and a lamp (effect device), or audibly warn the outside using a speaker ( Error notification means). In this way, when a malicious player attempts to input an error canceling navigation command to the main control board 1310 by operating the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 despite being in a gaming state. Since the pachinko machine 1 is configured to warn the outside, fraudulent acts on the main control board 1310 that may affect the progress of the game are suppressed.

  Next, following step S1024 described above, the effect control program performs an RCT acquisition information update process (step S1026). In this RTC acquisition information update process, the effect control program stores the current time information acquisition process in step S1002 and stores it in the calendar information storage unit set in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. The updated calendar information and the time information stored in the time information storage unit are updated. By this RCT acquisition information update process, the hour, minute and second as time information stored in the time information storage unit are updated, and the year and month as calendar information stored in the calendar information storage unit based on the updated time information. The day is updated.

  Subsequent to step S1026, the effect control program performs lamp data creation processing (step S1028). In this lamp data creation process, the effect control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process in step S1020, and the pointer indicates the light emission data arranged in time series constituting the light emission mode generation schedule data. Based on the light emission data, the game board side light emission data SL- for outputting a lighting signal, a flashing signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided in the game board 5 shown in FIG. The DAT is created by extracting from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and set in the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. And various equipment provided to the door frame 3 The door side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs on the board is used as the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the peripheral control RAM 1511c. From the frame control drive amplifier substrate side LED transmission data storage area 1511 cab of the peripheral control RAM 1511 c shown in FIG.

  Subsequent to step S1028, the effect control program performs display data creation processing (step S1030). In this display data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020 in the effect control program, and the screen data indicated by the pointer among the screen data arranged in time series constituting the screen generation schedule data Are extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and output to the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source. When the screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a extracts character data from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b based on the input screen data to create sprite data, and the game board side effect display device 1600 and drawing data for one screen (one frame) displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460 are generated on the built-in VRAM.

  Subsequent to step S1030, the effect control program performs sound data creation processing (step S1032). In this sound data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020 in the effect control program, and the pointer points out of the sound command data arranged in time series constituting the sound generation schedule data. The sound command data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. The sound source built-in VDP 1512a receives sound command data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, extracts sound data such as music and sound effects stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b, and controls the built-in sound source In addition to incorporating sound data such as music and sound effects according to the track number defined in the data, an output channel to be used is set according to the output channel number.

  In the sound data generation process, the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak shown in FIG. 127 is activated each time the sound data generation process is performed (that is, each time the peripheral control unit steady process is performed), and the volume adjustment volume is generated. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position of the knob portion 1510 a is converted into 1024 steps of values from 0 to 1023. In this embodiment, the value of 1024 steps is divided into seven and managed as substrate volumes 0 to 6, and the sound volume is set to the substrate volume 0, the maximum volume is set to the substrate volume 6, and the substrate volume 0 to the substrate volume are set. The volume is set to increase toward the volume 6 respectively. The sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is controlled so that the volume set in the substrate volumes 0 to 6 is transmitted, and audio data is transmitted as audio data obtained by serializing sound data in the sound data output process of step S1018 described above. By outputting to the IC 1512 c, music and sound effects are made to flow from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

  Further, the notification sound and the notification sound flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob at all, and the sound source built-in of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is programmed by the program from the mute to the maximum volume. The VDP 1512a can be controlled and adjusted. The volume adjusted by this program can be changed smoothly from the muffling to the maximum volume, unlike the substrate volume divided into the seven steps described above. For example, even when a hall clerk or the like turns the knob of the volume control volume 1510a to set the volume to a low level, the production sound such as music and sound effects flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 is reduced. However, when a malfunction occurs in the pachinko machine 1 or when the player is cheating, a notification sound set to a large volume (in this embodiment, the maximum volume) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the clerk or the like in the hall from becoming aware of the occurrence of a malfunction or the player's fraudulent act by the notification sound. Also, based on the current board volume set by volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob part, the volume of the advertisement sound is reduced so as not to interfere with the music and sound effects. To increase the volume of the sound to make the screen being displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 more powerful in addition to music and sound effects, or advantageous for the player It is also possible to notify that there is a high possibility that the game state will be entered.

  Subsequent to step S1032, the effect control program performs backup processing (step S1034). In this backup process, the contents of the effect control program stored in the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached with the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 127 are stored in the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc. The contents are copied and backed up, and the contents stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a are copied and backed up in the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc, respectively.

  Specifically, in the backup process, the peripheral control RAM 1511c is backed up for each frame (1 frame) in the backup target work area 1511ca shown in FIG. 127, that is, every time peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. The lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, the reception command storage area 1511cac, the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad, and The effect information (1fr), which is the content stored in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, is used as effect backup information (1fr) to indicate Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1 for backup first area 1511cb). Peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to r) is copied at high speed, and backup Bank3 second area 1511cc (1fr) and peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to Bank4 (1FR) is copied at high speed.

  The high-speed copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. The content stored in Bank0 (1fr) is designated to be copied to Bank1 (1fr) in the backup first area 1511cb, and the content stored in the first address of Bank0 (1fr) is changed to the end address of Bank0 (1fr) All the contents stored up to this point are copied sequentially from the start address of Bank 1 (1fr) of backup first area 1511cb successively by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte), and peripheral control MPU core 1511aa performs peripheral control The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) as the request factor of the MA controller 1511ac, the copy to the Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb is designated, and the Bank0 from the contents stored at the head address of Bank0 (1fr) The contents stored in the end address of (1fr) are all copied sequentially from the top address of Bank 2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb successively by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte).

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511 aa designates the contents stored in Bank 0 (1 fr) as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac, and designates copying of the backup second area 1511 cc to Bank 3 (1 fr). ) To the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (1fr), the first address of Bank3 (1fr) in the backup second area 1511cc continuously by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte) Copy all in order from the above, and the peripheral control MPU core 1511 aa specifies the contents stored in Bank 0 (1 fr) as the request factor of peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac and copy of backup second area 1511 cc to Bank 4 (1 fr) The Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc continuously for each predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) from the content stored at the head address of Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (1fr) Copy all in order from the start address of.

  In the backup process, the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is a backup target every frame (1 frame) in the backup target work area 1511da shown in FIG. 127, that is, every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed. The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac operates at high speed in the bank 1 (SRAM) and the bank 2 (SRAM) of the backup first area 1511db using the production information (SRAM) stored in the Bank 0 (SRAM) as production backup information (SRAM). The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies the data to the bank 3 (SRAM) and the bank 4 (SRAM) of the backup second area 1511dc at high speed.

  The high speed copy of the content stored in Bank 0 (SRAM) by this peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control MPU core 1511 aa of peripheral control MPU 1511 a shown in FIG. The content stored in Bank0 (SRAM) is designated to be copied to Bank1 (SRAM) in the backup first area 1511db, and the content stored at the beginning address of Bank0 (SRAM) is changed to the end address of Bank0 (SRAM). The stored contents are all copied sequentially from the first address of Bank 1 (SRAM) in the backup first area 1511db in order of predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte), and the peripheral control MPU core 1511a Is stored in the first address of Bank0 (SRAM), specifying the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, specifying the copy to Bank2 (SRAM) of the backup first area 1511db The contents to the contents stored at the end address of Bank 0 (SRAM) are all copied in order from the start address of Bank 2 (SRAM) in the backup first area 1511 db in succession by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte).

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa designates the content stored in the Bank 0 (SRAM) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, specifies the copy of the backup second area 1511dc to the Bank 3 (SRAM), and Bank 0 (SRAM). ) To the content stored at the end address of Bank 0 (SRAM) to the content stored at the end address of Bank 0 (SRAM) continuously by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) at the start address of Bank 3 (SRAM) in backup second area 1511 dc The peripheral control MPU core 1511aa copies the contents stored in the Bank 0 (SRAM) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to the Bank 4 (SRAM) of the backup second area 1511dc. P2 is designated, and the backup second area 1511dc is continuously written by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte) from the content stored at the start address of Bank0 (SRAM) to the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (SRAM). Are all copied in order from the top address of Bank 4 (SRAM).

  Following step S1034, WDT clear processing is performed (step S1036). In this WDT clear process, a clear signal is output to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e so that the peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset.

  Subsequent to step S1036, the effect control program sets the value 0 in the steady processing flag SP-FLG as completion of execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing (step S1038), returns to step S1006 again, and V blank signal detection flag VB -FLG is initialized by setting value 0, and the determination in step S1008 is repeated until value 1 is set in V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. That is, in step S1008, the process waits until a value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. If it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1, the process proceeds from step S1009 to step S1009. The process of S1038 is performed, and the process returns to step S1006 again. As described above, when it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is the value 1, the processing of steps S1009 to S1038 is performed. The process of step S1009 to step S1038 is referred to as "peripheral control unit steady process".

  The peripheral control unit steady process starts from the fact that the effect control program first sets the value 1 in the steady processing flag SP-FLG, assuming that the peripheral control unit steady process is being executed in step S1009, and 1 ms in step S1010. An interrupt timer activation process is performed, and each process of steps S1012, S1014,..., And step S1036 is performed. Set to to complete. The peripheral control unit steady processing is executed when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value 1 in step S1008. As described above, this V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is triggered by the fact that a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511 a can be received is input from the VDP 1512 a with built-in sound source. The value 1 is set in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. In the present embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps per second as described above. The interval at which the blank signal is input is approximately 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, the peripheral control unit steady process is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms.

[16-1-2. Peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing]
Next, as shown in FIG. 126, a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from peripheral control MPU 1511 a of peripheral control unit 1511 can be received is input from VDP 1512 a with built-in sound source of liquid crystal display control unit 1512. The peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing executed with the above as an opportunity will be described. When this peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing is started, peripheral control MPU 1511a of peripheral control unit 1511 determines whether steady-state processing-in-progress flag SP-FLG has a value 0 as shown in FIG. S1045). As described above, the steady process in progress flag SP-FLG has a value 1 when the peripheral control unit steady process in step S1009 to step S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. 166 is being executed. It is set to a value of 0 when execution of the process is completed.

  If the steady process flag SP-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step S1045, that is, if the peripheral control unit steady process is being executed, this routine is terminated. On the other hand, when the steady processing in progress flag SP-FLG is 0 in step S1045, that is, when the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to 1 (step S1050), This routine ends. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not peripheral control unit steady processing is to be performed, and the value 1 when peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, peripheral control When the partial steady process is not performed, the value is set to 0, respectively.

  In this embodiment, it is determined in step S1045 whether or not the steady process in progress flag SP-FLG has a value of 0, that is, whether the peripheral control unit steady process has been completed, and the peripheral control unit steady process is completed. Sometimes the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in step S1050. This is because the V blank signal is input and the V blank signal is input when the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed. If the value 1 is set to the signal detection flag VB-FLG, the peripheral control unit steady processing currently being executed is assumed as the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed in the determination of step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. Since the peripheral control unit steady processing is started from the beginning by forcibly canceling in the middle, the peripheral control unit power supply in FIG. In step S1009 in the time processing (peripheral control unit steady processing), the peripheral control unit V blank, which is this routine, indicates that the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed by setting the value 1 to the steady processing flag SP-FLG. In addition to signal interrupt processing, peripheral control unit steady processing is executed by setting the value in the steady processing flag SP-FLG to 0 in step S1038 in peripheral control unit power on processing (peripheral control unit steady processing) in FIG. By notifying the completion to the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing which is this routine, the steady processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 0 in the determination of step S1045 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing which is this routine. To determine whether or not the peripheral control unit steady processing has been completed. . In other words, this is a measure for the case where the peripheral control unit steady-state processing cannot be completed before the next V blank signal is input and the next V blank signal is input, so-called processing failure.

  As a result, in the current peripheral control unit steady process, if the process cannot be completed in about 33.3 ms and the process is dropped, the next determination is made in step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 166. It stands by until the V blank signal of is input. That is, the time for executing the current peripheral control unit steady processing which has been dropped is about 66.6 ms. Normally, a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is repeatedly executed every time a 1 ms interrupt timer is generated by starting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral controller power-on process (peripheral control unit steady process) in FIG. Is executed only 32 times for one peripheral control unit steady process. However, if there is a current peripheral control unit steady process that has been dropped as described above, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is not performed 64 times. It is supposed to be executed only 32 times. In other words, even if the peripheral control unit steady process has failed, the consistency between the presentation progress state by the peripheral control unit steady process and the presentation progress state by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which is timer interrupt control, is consistent. It is designed not to collapse. Therefore, even if the peripheral control unit steady process is lost, it is possible to reliably match the progress state of the performance.

[16-1-3. Peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing which is repeatedly executed every time 1 ms interrupt timer is generated by activation of 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in peripheral control unit steady processing of peripheral control unit power on processing in FIG. 166 will be described. . When this peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started, as shown in FIG. 168, peripheral control MPU 1511 a of peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 126 determines whether 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 times or not. Is determined (step S1100). As described above, this 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN starts the 1 ms interrupt timer in the 1 ms interrupt timer start process in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. It is a counter that counts the number of times a certain peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process has been executed. In the present embodiment, since the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps per second as described above, The interval at which the blank signal is input is approximately 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, since the peripheral control unit steady process is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms, after starting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, the next peripheral control unit steady process is performed. The peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed only 32 times before. Specifically, when the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated in step S1010 in peripheral control unit steady processing, the first 1 ms timer interrupt is generated first, the second,..., And the 32nd 1 ms timer interrupt sequentially Will occur.

  If it is determined in step S1100 that the 1 ms timer interrupt execution number STN is not smaller than 33, that is, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt has occurred and this peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started, this routine is ended as it is. If the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next occurrence of the V blank signal, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is the peripheral control unit V as the priority of the interrupt processing in this embodiment. Although set higher than the blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in the present embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next occurrence of the V blank signal. In order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. Then, after the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated again in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is newly started by the generation of the first 1 ms timer interrupt. ing.

  On the other hand, when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution number STN is smaller than 33 in step S1100, the value 1 is added to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution number STN (increment, step S1102). By adding 1 to this 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated in the 1 ms interrupt timer activation process of step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 166. The number of times that the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which is this routine, is executed is increased by one.

  Subsequent to step S1102, motor and solenoid drive processing is performed (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid driving process, the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511 cae of the peripheral control MPU 1511 a and the peripheral control RAM 1511 c externally attached shown in FIG. 127 are arranged in time series. 126. According to the drive data indicated by the pointer among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as the motor and the solenoid, the electric drive sources such as the motor and the solenoid of the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 and the motor drive board 4180 shown in FIG. And the pointer is updated to the next drive data defined in time series, and the pointer is updated each time the motor and solenoid drive processing is executed.

  Specifically, in the motor and solenoid drive processing, DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate 194 is performed. Here, serial I / O port serial transmission of the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate motor is performed using the peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511 a shown in FIG. When serial I / O port serial transmission of the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate motor is started, first, the electrical drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached with the peripheral control MPU 1511a In order to output a drive signal to the dial drive motor 414 of the rendering operation unit 400 based on the drive data indicated by the pointer among the drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series to configure The door-side motor drive data STM-DAT is extracted from the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the peripheral control RAM 1511c and created, and the frame decoration drive of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. A Set in the transmission data storage area 1511caf for flops substrate side motor. The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a designates transmission of the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and stores transmission data of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor The first 1 byte of the door-side motor drive data STM-DAT stored at the top address of the area 1511 caf is sent via the external bus 1511 h, peripheral control bus controller 1511 ad, and peripheral bus 1511 ai to the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate motor Transfer and write to the transmission buffer register of the serial I / O port. Thus, the frame I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate motor transfers the data of the written transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and the transmission shift register is synchronized with the door side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK. The 1-byte data starts to be transmitted bit by bit.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac is triggered by generation of a transmission interrupt request for the frame I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate motor (in the present embodiment, the frame I / O for the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate motor serial I / O One byte of data written to the port's transmit buffer register is transferred to the transmit shift register, and it is triggered by the fact that one byte of data is empty in the transmit buffer register and becomes empty.) Peripheral control CPU core 1511 aa When the bus is not used, the remaining door-side motor drive data STM-DAT stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate-side motor transmission data storage area 1511 caf for 1 byte, external bus 1511 h, peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and via the peripheral bus 1511ai By transmitting and writing to the transmission buffer register of the serial drive I / O port for the decoration drive amplifier board motor, the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor transmits the data of the written transmission buffer register Transfer to 1-byte data of the transmission shift register in synchronization with the door-side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK, and start transmission one bit at a time, and continuous transmission by the serial I / O port for frame decoration drive amplifier board motor Is going.

  In the motor and solenoid drive processing, DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the motor drive board 4180 is performed. Also here, serial transmission of the motor drive board serial I / O port is performed using the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. When serial I / O port serial transmission for a motor drive substrate is started, first, electrical drive source schedule data set in schedule data storage area 1511 cae of peripheral control MPU 1511 a and peripheral control RAM 1511 c externally attached is configured. Motors for moving various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. 8 based on the drive data indicated by the pointer among the drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in series. The game board side motor drive data SM-DAT for outputting a drive signal to the motor or solenoid is created by extracting it from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. Peripheral control RAM 15 shown at 127 Set to 1c of the motor driving the substrate side transmission data storage area 1511Cag. The peripheral control CPU core 1511 aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511 a designates transmission of the motor drive board serial I / O port as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac and stores it at the top address of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag The first 1 byte of the game board-side motor drive data SM-DAT thus processed is transmitted via the external bus 1511 h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511 ad, and the peripheral bus 1511 ai, as a transmission buffer for the motor drive board serial I / O port. Transfer and write to register. Thereby, the serial I / O port for motor drive board transfers the data of the written transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and one of the transmission shift register is synchronized with the game board motor drive clock signal SM-CLK. Start transmitting byte data bit by bit.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac is triggered every time a transmission interrupt request for the motor drive board serial I / O port is generated (in the present embodiment, to the transmission buffer register of the motor drive board serial I / O port). It is triggered by the fact that the written 1 byte data is transferred to the transmission shift register and the transmission buffer register becomes empty due to the lack of 1 byte data.) The peripheral control CPU core 1511 aa uses the bus If not, the remaining game board side motor drive data SM-DAT stored in the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag is byte by byte via the external bus 1511 h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511 ad, and the peripheral bus 1511 ai , Serial I / O port for motor drive board By transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register, the motor drive board serial I / O port transfers the data of the written transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and the game board motor drive clock signal SM-CLK and In synchronization, transmission of 1-byte data of the transmission shift register is started bit by bit, and continuous transmission is performed by the motor drive board serial I / O port.

  Following step S1104, movable body information acquisition processing is performed (step S1106). In this movable body information acquisition process, it is determined whether or not detection signals from various detection switches provided on the game board 5 are input, thereby detecting history information of detection signals from the various detection switches (for example, original position history information). , The movable position history information, etc.) is created and set in the movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah of the peripheral control MP1511a and the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached as shown in FIG. From the history information of detection signals from various detection switches set in the movable body information acquisition storage area 1511 cah, original positions, movable positions and the like of various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 can be acquired.

  Subsequent to step S1106, an effect operation unit information acquisition process is performed (step S1108). In the effect operation unit information acquisition process, it is determined whether or not detection signals from various detection switches provided in the effect operation unit 400 are input, thereby detecting history information (for example, operation signals) from the various detection switches. Operation history information of the button 410 etc.) is created and set in the effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511cai of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached as shown in FIG. The presence or absence of the operation of the operation button 410 can be acquired from the history information of detection signals from various detection switches set in the effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511 cai.

  Following step S1108, drawing state information acquisition processing is performed (step S1110). In this drawing state information acquisition process, history information of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive substrate 4450 shown in FIG. 141 is created, and the periphery shown in FIG. It is set in the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511 cak of the peripheral control RAM 1511 c externally attached to the control MPU 1511 a. As described above, the LOCKN signal indicates that the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal data. Judging, it is a signal output to convey that effect, and more specifically, transmitter IC 1512d for door frame side effect provided on peripheral control board 1510, and receiver ICSDIC0 for door frame side effect provided on effect display drive board 4450 , And a signal output to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (restoring) the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. The door frame side effect display device is acquired from the history of LOCKN signals set in the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511 cak, from the frequency of the trouble between the connection of the peripheral control board 1510 and the effect display drive board 4450 and the occurrence state of the trouble. The drawing state of 460 can be acquired.

  Subsequent to step S1110, backup processing is performed (step S1112), and this routine is terminated. In this backup processing, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached shown in FIG. 127 are copied to the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc, respectively, to back up. At the same time, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d provided externally are copied to the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc for backup.

  Specifically, in the backup processing, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing which is this routine is executed whenever the 1 ms interrupt timer is generated in the backup target work area 1511 ca shown in FIG. 127 for the peripheral control RAM 1511 c. The frame decoration drive amplifier substrate side motor transmission data storage area 1511 caf, the motor drive substrate side transmission data storage area 1511 cag, and the movable body information acquisition storage area 1511 cah which are included in Bank 0 (1 ms) to be backed up each time , And effect information (1 ms), which is the content stored in the effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511 cai, as Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 1 of the backup first area 1511 cb as effect backup information (1 ms) Peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac in (1 ms) is copied at high speed, and backup Bank3 second area 1511cc (1ms) and Bank4 (1 ms) to the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies at high speed.

  The high-speed copy of the contents stored in Bank 0 (1 ms) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. The content stored in Bank0 (1 ms) is designated to be copied to Bank1 (1 ms) in backup first area 1511 cb, and the content stored at the beginning address of Bank0 (1 ms) is changed to the end address of Bank0 (1 ms) The stored contents are all copied in order starting from the first address of Bank 1 (1 ms) in the backup first area 1511cb in succession to a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte), and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa performs peripheral control. The content stored in Bank0 (1 ms) as the request factor of the MA controller 1511ac is designated to be copied to Bank2 (1 ms) in the backup first area 1511cb, and the content stored in the first address of Bank0 (1ms) is used as Bank0. The contents stored at the end address of (1 ms) are all copied in order from the start address of Bank 2 (1 ms) of the backup first area 1511cb in succession by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte).

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa designates the content stored in Bank0 (1 ms) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, specifies the copy of the backup second area 1511cc to Bank3 (1 ms), and Bank0 (1 ms) From the contents stored at the start address of) to the contents stored at the end address of Bank 0 (1 ms), the start address of Bank 3 (1 ms) of backup second area 1511 cc in succession by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte) The peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies the contents stored in Bank0 (1 ms) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and specifies that the backup second area 1511cc is copied to Bank4 (1 ms). The From the content stored at the beginning address of Bank0 (1 ms) to the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (1 ms), bank 4 (1 ms) in the backup second area 1511 cc is continuously provided by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte). Copy all in order from the start address of.

  As described above, in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, various processes relating to the effects of step S1104 to step S1108 described above as the progress of the effect are executed within a period of 1 ms. On the other hand, in the peripheral control unit steady processing in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 166, various processing relating to the effects of step S1012 to step S1032 described above as progress of the effect is executed within a period of about 33.3 ms. doing. In the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than the value 33 in step S1100, that is, when the first 1 ms timer interrupt is generated and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is started. Since this routine is ended as it is, even if the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next occurrence of the V blank signal, the peripheral control unit by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt The start of the 1 ms timer interrupt processing is forcibly canceled, and after the 1 ms interrupt timer is started again in step S1010 in peripheral control unit steady processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, peripheral control by the generation of the first 1 ms timer interrupt 1ms timer division It is adapted to start the actual processing. That is, the consistency between the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady process and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process which is timer interrupt control does not break. Therefore, it is possible to reliably match the progress of the production.

  In addition, as described above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies somewhat depending on the liquid crystal sizes of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, and the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the sound source built-in VDP 1512a are different. Even in the manufacturing lot of the mounted peripheral control board 1510, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may vary somewhat. In this embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that dominates the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal, the peripheral control is performed. In order to execute the part V blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control part 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in the present embodiment, even if the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes slightly, by forcibly canceling the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt, A time shift due to a slight change in the interval at which the V blank signal is output can be absorbed.

[16-1-4. Peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing]
Next, peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 will be described. The peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 126 starts main transmission of main peripheral serial data in the peripheral control MPU 1511a when various commands from the main control board 1310 are started to be transmitted as serial data. One byte (8 bits) of information is taken into the reception buffer at the board serial I / O port, and when this taking is completed, an interrupt is generated triggered by this taking, and peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is performed. In the main cycle serial data, one packet is composed of 3 bytes, the status is assigned as the first byte, the mode is assigned as the second byte, and the status and mode are regarded as numerical values as the third byte and the total The sum value that is calculated is assigned.

  When the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 determines whether or not the 1-byte reception period timer has timed out as shown in FIG. 169 (step S1200). The 1-byte reception period timer is for setting a period in which information of 1 byte (8 bits) can be received among the main cycle serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310.

  When the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, within a period in which 1-byte (8 bits) information can be received among the main cycle serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310, The 1-byte information received from the reception buffer of the main control board serial I / O port incorporated in the control MPU 1511a is taken (step S1202), and the value 1 is added to the reception counter SRXC (increment, step S1204). This reception counter SRXC is a counter indicating the number of times the data has been extracted from the reception buffer. When the status, which is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data, is extracted from the reception buffer, the value is 1, and the mode is the second byte of the main peripheral serial data. When the data is taken out from the reception buffer, the value 2 is obtained, and when the sum value which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data is taken out from the reception buffer, the value becomes 3. The reception counter SRXC is set to an initial value 0 when the power is turned on.

  Subsequent to step S1204, it is determined whether or not the reception counter SRXC has a value of 3, that is, whether or not the sum value that is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data has been extracted from the reception buffer (step S1206). In this determination, the status that is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data, the mode that is the second byte of the main peripheral serial data, and the sum value that is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data are sequentially received from the reception buffer. It is determined whether or not it has been taken out.

  When the reception counter SRXC is not the value 3 in step S1206, that is, following the status that is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data, the mode that is still the second byte of the main peripheral serial data, and the third byte of the main peripheral serial data When the sum values are not sequentially taken out from the reception buffer, the 1-byte reception period timer is set (step S1208), and this routine is terminated. By setting the 1-byte reception period timer in step S1208, the mode that is the second byte of the main circumference serial data or the period during which the sum value that is the third byte of the main circumference serial data can be received is set.

  On the other hand, when the reception counter SRXC has a value of 3 in step S1206, that is, following the status that is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data, the mode that is the second byte of the main peripheral serial data, and the main peripheral serial data 3 When the sum value which is the byte is taken out from the reception buffer in order, the initial value 0 is set in the reception counter SRXC (step S1210), and the sum value is calculated (step S1212). In this calculation, the status that is the first byte of the main circumference serial data and the mode that is the second byte of the main circumference serial data, which have already been extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, are regarded as numerical values and the sum (sum value). ) Is calculated.

  Following step S1212, it is determined whether the sum value which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202 matches the sum value calculated in step S1212 (step S1214). The sum value that is the third byte of the main cycle serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202 is the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main cycle serial data of the main cycle serial data from the main control board 1310 Therefore, it should match the sum value calculated in step S1212. However, pachinko machine 1 is supplied with gaming balls from a pachinko facility, and when the gaming balls rub against each other to be charged, they are electrostatically discharged and generate noise, so pachinko machine 1 is affected by noise. It is in a file environment. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1511 considers the status allocated as the first byte of the received main cycle serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main cycle serial data as numerical values. Whether the calculated sum value matches the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main cycle serial data in the main cycle serial data from the main control board 1310 It is determined whether or not. Accordingly, peripheral control MPU 1511 a determines whether or not the main cycle serial data has been changed to main cycle serial data different from normal due to the influence of noise between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. be able to.

  If the sum value, which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, matches the sum value calculated in step S1212 in step S1214, the received main cycle serial data The status allocated as the 1st byte and the mode allocated as the 2nd byte of the main cycle serial data are shown in FIG. 127, which are peripheral control MPU 1511a and receive command storage area 1511cac of peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached. (Step S1216), and this routine ends. The reception command storage area 1511cac is used as a ring buffer, and the status assigned as the first byte of the main circumference serial data and the mode assigned as the second byte of the main circumference serial data are: It is stored in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer 1511 cac. This "peripheral control unit reception ring buffer" is a buffer that is used so that the end and the top of the buffer are connected. Data is sequentially stored from the beginning of the buffer, and when it reaches the end of the buffer, it returns to the beginning. Remember. When the peripheral control MPU 1511a stores the received data in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer in step S1216, the peripheral control MPU 1511a allocates the received status allocated as the first byte of the main peripheral serial data and the second byte of the main peripheral serial data. The stored mode is associated with the stored mode, and the sum value allocated as the third byte is discarded.

  On the other hand, when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, the period in which 1-byte (8 bits) information can be received among the main cycle serial data transmitted from main control board 1310 is exceeded. Sometimes, or when it is determined in step S1214 that the sum value, which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, does not match the sum value calculated in step S1212, this routine is directly performed. finish.

[16-1-5. Peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing]
Next, a peripheral control unit blackout notification signal which is executed when the blackout notification signal (peripheral blackout notification signal) from the blackout monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 129 is input from the main control board 1310 The interrupt processing will be described. When the peripheral control unit blackout notification signal interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 126 starts the 2 microsecond timer first (step S1320), and the blackout notification signal (peripheral power outage notification It is determined whether or not a signal is input (step S1302). If no power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is input in this determination, this routine is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, when a power failure warning signal is input in step S1302, it is determined whether or not 2 microseconds have elapsed (step S1304). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the timer started in step S1320 has passed 2 microseconds. If 2 macroseconds have not elapsed in step S1304, the process returns to step S1302, where it is determined whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input. If no power failure warning signal has been input, this routine is terminated. If a signal is input, it is determined again in step S1304 whether 2 microseconds have elapsed. That is, in the determination in step S1304, it is determined whether or not the power failure warning signal is continuously input for 2 microseconds after the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, is started.

  When the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, is started in step S1304 and the power failure warning signal is continuously input for 2 microseconds, power saving processing is performed (step S1306). In this power saving process, the backlights of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 are sequentially turned off, the motors and solenoids provided in the game board 5 are turned off, and various LEDs are turned off sequentially. Thus, by suppressing the power consumption of the entire system of the pachinko machine 1, stable operation is ensured only for a period of 20 milliseconds, which is the time during which the peripheral control MPU 1511a can operate even when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off.

  Following step S1306, command reception standby processing is performed (step S1308). In this command reception standby process, assuming that there are various commands being transmitted by the main control board 1310, the peripheral control MPU 1511a can receive the command being transmitted at least for a period of at least 17 milliseconds. It is supposed to wait. When the command is received, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process described above is started, and the reception command storage area 1511cac (peripheral control unit reception ring buffer of the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. ) Stores the received command.

  Following step S1308, command backup processing is performed (step S1310). In the backup processing of this command, the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) in the backup target work area 1511ca shown in FIG. 127 are changed to Bank1 (1fr) and The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies to Bank2 (1fr) at high speed, and the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies to Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) in the backup second area 1511cc at high speed.

  The high-speed copy of the content stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. Specify the content stored in the receive command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) as the request factor of the control DMA controller 1511ac, and copy the backup first area 1511cb to the receive command storage area included in Bank1 (1fr) From the contents stored in the start address of the reception command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the end address of the reception command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr). All the contents stored are sequentially copied sequentially from the start address of the receive command storage area included in Bank 1 (1fr) of backup first area 1511cb in succession by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte), and peripheral control MPU The contents stored in the receive command storage area 1511 cac included in Bank 0 (1 fr) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac to the receive command storage area included in Bank 2 (1 fr) of the backup first area 1511 cb The contents stored in the start address of reception command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) are specified from the contents stored in the end address of reception command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr). A predetermined number of bytes (e.g., 1 byte) all copies sequentially from the start address of the received command storage area included in the Bank2 (1FR) of the backup successively by the first area 1511Cb.

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa includes the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac in Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc. To the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) from the contents stored in the start address of the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr). The specified contents (for example, 1 byte) are successively copied sequentially from the start address of the reception command storage area included in Bank 3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc in succession by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte), and peripheral control The PU core 1511aa stores the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and the received command storage area included in Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc. From the content stored at the start address of the reception command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored at the end address of the reception command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) All of the data is copied in order starting from the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank 4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc successively by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte).

  Subsequently to step S1310, it is determined whether or not a power failure notification signal (peripheral power failure notification signal) is input (step S1312). If a power failure warning signal is input in this determination, WDT clear processing is performed (step S1314). In this WDT clear process, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af shown in FIG. 127 and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e shown in FIG. 126 so that the peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset. .

  On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is not input in step S1312, or following step S1314, the process returns to step S1312, and it is determined whether the power failure warning signal is input. In other words, it continues to determine infinitely whether or not the power failure notification signal (peripheral power failure notification signal) is input. By continuing determination indefinitely in this manner, when no power failure notification signal (peripheral power failure notification signal) is input in step S1312, the peripheral control MPU 1511a clears the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e. Can not be output, and the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset, while when a power failure notice signal is input in step S1312, WDT clear processing is performed in step S1314, and the peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset. When the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset, the processing at power on of the peripheral control unit shown in FIG. 166 is started again.

  As described above, when the input of the power failure notification signal (peripheral power failure notification signal) continues in the infinite loop in the determination of step S1312, the peripheral control is performed immediately before the power failure state occurs by executing the WDT clear processing in step S1314. The MPU 1511a is not reset. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1312 that the input of the power failure advance notice signal is not continued and released in the infinite loop, the WDT clear process is not executed, so the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511 af and peripheral control external WDT 1511 e Output of the clear signal is interrupted. As a result, the peripheral control unit blackout notification signal interrupt processing, which is the main routine, is erroneously started due to noise and the noise is generated beyond the period of 2 microseconds and the determination in step S1302 is passed even if the step is passed. If the input of the power failure notice signal (peripheral power failure notice signal) is not continued and canceled in the infinite loop in the determination by S1312, the WDT clear processing in step S1314 is not executed, so that the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset. Therefore, it is possible to cope with such noise by automatically resetting and returning.

[16-1-6. LOCKN signal history creation processing]
Next, the LOCKN signal history creation process executed as one process of the drawing state information acquisition process of step S1110 in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 168 will be described. In this LOCKN signal history creation process, a history of LOCKN signals output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 shown in FIG. 141 is created. As described above, the LOCKN signal is the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. If it is judged that it is abnormal data, it is a signal output to convey that effect, and more specifically, a door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d provided in the peripheral control substrate 1510 and a door frame provided in the effect display drive substrate 4450 It is a signal to output a transmission request for a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (restoring) the connection between the side effect receiver ICSDIC0 and the connection, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

  When the LOCKN signal history creation process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 126 is connected to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. The LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is read out from the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak (step S1500). This LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is stored in 1 byte (8 bits: most significant bits B7, B6, B5, B4, B3, B2, B1, and least significant bit B0, "B" represents a bit). The history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 having a capacity and provided on the effect display drive substrate 4450 is stored in the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak as LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST It is memorized.

  Subsequent to step S1500, it is determined whether or not there is a LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 (step S1502). In this determination, when there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 determines that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d is abnormal data. A transmission request is made for a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. On the other hand, when there is no LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d is not abnormal data (normal). Data)) and No transmission request is made for a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame effect receiver IC ICDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. It is determined that

  When there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 in step S1502, shift processing of the LOCKN signal detection history information is performed (step S1504). In this LOCKN signal detection history information shift process, when there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1500 is converted into the most significant bits B7 ← B6, B6 ←. B5, B5 ← B4, B4 ← B3, B3 ← B2, B2 ← B1, B1 ← the least significant bit B0 and so on are shifted bit by bit from the least significant bit B0 toward the most significant bit B7.

  When the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is shifted in step S1504, the value 1 is set to the least significant bit B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST (step S1506), and this routine is ended.

  On the other hand, if there is no LOCKN signal from the door frame effect receiver ICSDIC0 in step S1502, the LOCKN signal detection history information is shifted (step S1508). In the shift process of the LOCKN signal detection history information, the same process as the shift process of the LOCKN signal detection history information in step S1504 is performed, and when there is no LOCKN signal from the door frame side rendering receiver ICSDIC0, the LOCKN read in step S1500. Signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST, the most significant bits B7 ← B6, B6 ← B5, B5 ← B4, B4 ← B3, B3 ← B2, B2 ← B1, B1 ← least significant bit B0, etc. 1 bit to the most significant bit B7.

  When the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is shifted in step S1508, the value 0 is set to the least significant bit B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST (step S1510), and this routine is ended.

  Thus, every time this LOCKN signal history creation processing is executed, the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is shifted from the least significant bit B0 toward the most significant bit B7 by one bit, and then shifted to the least significant bit B0. Since the value 1 or the value 0 is set, the history of the LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 can be created.

[16-1-7. Connection failure judgment process]
Next, a connection failure determination process executed as one process of the warning process in step S1024 in the peripheral control part steady process of the peripheral control part power-on process shown in FIG. 166 will be described. In this connection failure determination process, the door frame side provided in peripheral control board 1510 based on the history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in effect display drive board 4450 shown in FIG. 141. It is determined whether a failure has occurred in the connection between the effect transmitter IC 1512 d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC 0 provided on the effect display drive substrate 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

  When the connection failure determination process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 126 is, as shown in FIG. 172, of the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached with the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. The LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is read out from the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak (step S1520). As described above, the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST stores the history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive substrate 4450. As described above, in the LOCKN signal, the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal data. If it is determined that the signal is output to convey that effect, specifically, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d provided in the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC 0 provided in the effect display drive substrate 4450 , That is, a signal output to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

  Subsequently to step S1520, it is determined whether there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 (step S1522). In this determination, it is determined whether the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read out in step S1520 matches the connection confirmation determination value. This connection confirmation determination value is stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 1511b shown in FIG. 126, and is “00001111B (“ B ”represents a bit) in the present embodiment, and is the upper 4 bits B7 to B4. Is the value 0, and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 are the value 1. In step S1522, it is determined whether the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the connection check determination value.

  In step S1522, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1520 do not match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the connection confirmation determination value, the peripheral control board 1510 is prepared. It is determined that there is no problem in the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450, that is, in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. And exit this routine as it is.

  On the other hand, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read out in step S1520 matches the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the connection check determination value in step S1522, peripheral control board 1510 Between the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d for preparing the frame and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC 0 for the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the state where a failure occurs in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver It is determined that the communication check counter CC-CNT is incremented by 1 (increment, step S1524). This communication check counter CC-CNT counts up the number of times that it is determined in step S1522 that there is a failure in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver each time this routine is executed. (Count the cumulative number). The communication check counter CC-CNT is set to 0 when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, and is reset. However, the communication check counter CC-CNT is not reset due to an instantaneous power failure or power failure, and the power recovery is restored. The value is restored to the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT immediately before the moment or power failure occurs.

  Following step S1524, it is determined whether the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT (step S1526). In this determination, when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, the cumulative number of times the cumulative number determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is in a failure state is the cumulative number If it is determined that the upper limit value CC-LMT has not been reached, but the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not smaller (larger) than the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, a problem occurs in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver It is determined that the cumulative number determined to be in the state of having reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT.

  When the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT in step S1526, that is, the cumulative number determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is defective is the cumulative number. If the upper limit value CC-LMT has not been reached, the communication error flag CC-FLG is set to the value 0 (step S1528), and this routine is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1526 that the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not smaller (larger) than the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, that is, it is determined that a problem occurs in connection between the transmitter and the receiver. If the accumulated number has reached the accumulated number upper limit value CC-LMT, the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is set to the value 1 (step S1530), and this routine is ended. The communication abnormality flag CC-FLG indicates that the accumulated number of times determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is in trouble has reached the accumulated number upper limit CC-LMT, and the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. Is a flag indicating whether or not there is a malfunction in the value, and value 1 when there is a malfunction in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, a malfunction occurs in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver When the accumulated number of times determined to be in the state is not reaching the accumulated number upper limit CC-LMT, the value is set to 0, respectively. The communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is set to 0 when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, and is reset. However, the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is not reset due to an instantaneous power failure or a power failure, and the power recovery is restored. At this time, the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG immediately before the moment or power failure is restored.

[16-1-8. Connection recovery process]
Next, the connection recovery process executed as one process of the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral control part steady process of the peripheral control part power-on process shown in FIG. 166 will be described. In the connection recovery process, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC 0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 are executed subsequent to the connection failure determination process shown in FIG. While outputting a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) to confirm (restore) the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, that is, when the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is abnormal Report that fact.

  When connection recovery processing is started, as shown in FIG. 173, peripheral control MPU 1511a of peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 126 performs peripheral control steady processing in the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. Of the various schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 127 in the scheduler update process of step S1020, it is determined whether or not the screen generation schedule data is being activated (step S1540). In this determination, in the scheduler update process, among the screen data arranged in time series constituting the screen generation schedule data, the order of the screen data to be output from the top screen data to the built-in sound source VDP 1512a is instructed. Then, it is determined whether or not the pointer has been updated. In other words, in the scheduler update process, when the pointer is being updated, the effect is progressing along the screen generation schedule data, so it is determined that the screen generation schedule data is active, while the screen generation schedule When the presentation is completed along with the data and all the pointer updates are completed, it is determined that the screen generation schedule data is not activated. In this determination, a demonstration is performed by the game board side effect display device 1600 during a period when the start-up screen at the time of power-on of the pachinko machine 1 is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, or in a waiting state of the customer. It is possible to judge based on the screen generation schedule data whether or not it is a period, and display the start screen at the time of powering on of the pachinko machine 1 on the game board side effect display device 1600 If the game board is in a waiting state or a period during which a demonstration is performed by the game board side effect display device 1600, the process proceeds to step S1542, which will be described later, while the start-up screen when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is displayed on the game board side. The period displayed on the effect display device 1600 or the waiting state for the customer is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. That when it is not a period that is doing a demonstration in the (mere, is when in the standby state of the customer wait), which is as it is to terminate this routine.

  When the effect is progressing along the screen generation schedule data in step S1540, that is, when the screen generation schedule data is being activated, this routine is ended as it is, while the screen generation schedule data is followed in step S1540. When the effect is completed and all the pointer updating is completed, that is, when the screen generation schedule data is not activated, it is determined whether the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0 (step S1542). As described above, this communication check counter CC-CNT is used for the door frame side effect provided in the peripheral control board 1510 in the determination of step S1522 in the process every time the connection failure determination process shown in FIG. 172 is executed. During the connection between transmitter IC 1512 d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC 0 provided on the effect display drive substrate 4450, that is, the number of times it is determined that there is a failure in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver (Count the cumulative number). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the number of times of determining that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is in a failure state is even one.

  When the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is 0 in step S 1542, that is, when the number of times determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is in trouble is not once, this is left as it is. While the routine is finished, the number of times when it is determined in step S1542 that the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is in trouble is even once. If there is, it is determined whether or not the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is 0 (step S1544). As described above, the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG indicates that the cumulative number of times determined that there is a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has reached the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT, This flag indicates whether or not there is a problem with the connection between the receiver and the value 1 when the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is definitely defective. When the cumulative number of times determined to be in a state in which the connection has not reached the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT, the value is set to 0.

  When the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is 0 in step S1544, that is, the accumulated number of times determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is defective is the accumulated number upper limit value CC-LMT. If not, the SYNC pattern output process is performed (step S1546), and this routine ends. In this SYNC pattern output process, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510, thereby providing the door frame side effect provided on the peripheral control board 1510. The transmitter IC 1512 d outputs a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC 0 provided on the effect display drive substrate 4450. This predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is stored in advance in the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and is output to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0. It restores the connection between the transmitter IC 1512 d and the door frame side rendering receiver ICSDIC 0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

  On the other hand, when the value of the communication error flag CC-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step S1544, that is, when a problem occurs in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the communication error display process is performed. Then (step S1548), this routine ends. In this communication error display process, the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 provided in the game board 5 shown in FIG. 8 in order to reliably convey that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a problem. Do the drawing process. For example, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, a message “A problem has occurred with the upper plate side liquid crystal display device. Please call a clerk.” Is displayed. Also, in the communication error display process, the demonstration screen by the game board side effect display device 1600 is in a period during which the game board side effect display device 1600 displays the start screen at the time of powering on the pachinko machine 1 or in waiting for customers. Between the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC 0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 during the period being performed, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver In order to confirm whether a problem has occurred in the door frame side effect display request of the door frame side effect display device 460, LOCKN signal output request data is transmitted from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is LOCKN As a response signal to the transmission of signal output request data, When the LOCKN signal is output from the OCKN terminal to the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the LOCKN signal is not input, the door frame side effect display device 460 has a failure as a failure occurs in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. It is judged that the notification is being made, and a notification image (for example, "A problem has occurred with the upper plate liquid crystal display device. Please call a clerk.") Is displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. In addition to the processing described above, a notification sound (for example, "a problem has occurred in the upper-plate-side liquid crystal display device") is repeatedly flowed from a speaker or the like provided in the door frame 3. At this time, processing may be performed to turn on all of the LEDs for light emission decoration provided on the door frame 3 and the various kinds of LEDs mounted on various decoration substrates provided on the game board 5.

  Next, the timing at which the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the door frame side rendering transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 128 will be described using the timing chart of FIG.

  First, to briefly describe the decorative symbol variably displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 included in the game board 5 shown in FIG. 8, the peripheral control of the process at power on of the peripheral control unit shown in FIG. The variable display of the decorative symbol is executed by the part steady processing etc., and the main control side of the main control side power on process shown in FIG. 147 by the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. The first special lottery result drawn by the reception of the game ball to the first starting port 2002 shown in FIG. 8 by the main processing or the main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 148, or the second shown in FIG. When the second special lottery result drawn by the acceptance of the game ball to the starting opening 2004 becomes "big hit", the number of repetitions (round number) of the opening and closing operation of the large winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. The game balls enter the big winning opening 2005 in a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) in a total of 15 rounds from 15 rounds to 15 rounds, and the number of balls is a predetermined number (for example, 9 balls) When it comes to), the round is to be digested, and every time one game ball enters the big winning opening 2005, a predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) of game balls are paid out .

  The first special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball to the first starting port 2002 or the second special drawing result drawn by receiving the game ball to the second starting port 2004 can be obtained from the main control board 1310 The peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 controls the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 based on the command, so that the left side display symbol is on the left side of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, and the center decorative pattern is on the center. The variable display of the right side decorative symbol is started on the right side, and after the predetermined time has passed, the variable display of the left side decorative symbol, the center decorative symbol, and the right side decorative symbol is stopped and the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result Can be recognized by the player, and at this time, the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special feature display of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. Also in the first special symbol or the second special symbols displayed in the symbol display device 1405 it is made to be able to check the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result. When the left side decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right side decorative pattern are variably displayed, the left side decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right side decorative pattern are translucent to the extent that the background image can be seen, and the left side decorative pattern is displayed From the upper left to the lower left of the area, the central decorative symbol rotates from the upper center of the display area to the lower central, and the right decorative pattern rotates from the upper right to the lower right of the display area. When the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are stopped, the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol correspond to the stopped decorative display. The left decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern are in an opaque aspect so that the background image at the position is difficult to see. Thus, the first special symbol or the second special symbol to be variably displayed and stopped in the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 120, The left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol, which are variably displayed and stop-displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, are synchronized with each other.

  The peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 receives the first special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball into the first start port 2002 or the second lot selected by receiving the game ball into the second start port 2004. As shown in FIG. 174, the game board side shown in FIG. 8 is received by controlling the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 based on the received command when the command from the main control board 1310 conveying the special lottery result is received. When the variable display of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol is started in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (timing K0), the peripheral control unit in the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. In the scheduler update process of step S1020 in the process, schedule data storage area 1 of peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. Among the screen data arranged in chronological order constituting the screen generation schedule data set to 11cae, the pointer is used to indicate what number of screen data is output from the top screen data to the built-in sound source VDP 1512a. Since updating is performed, that is, when the pointer is being updated in the scheduler update process, the effects are progressing along the screen generation schedule data, so the screen generation schedule data is being activated, and the screen generation schedule While the data is being activated, that is, until the display of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol is started and stopped, the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 166 is performed. In the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady process of FIG. Was also perform connection recovery process, it is determined in step S1540 in this connection restoration process, and it so as to end the routine forcibly.

  Thus, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the variable display of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol is started and stopped before being displayed in the communication check counter CC-CNT. Even when the value is not 0, that is, between the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d provided on the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC 0 provided on the effect display drive substrate 4450 (that is, Even if it is determined that the connection with the receiver is in a state where a failure has occurred even once, the SYNC pattern output process of step S1546 in the connection recovery process is not performed, and the transmitter and the receiver Process to recover the connection between the client and the For example, the message “The liquid crystal display device on the upper tray has a problem. Please call a clerk.” Is not displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 without performing the communication error display process of step S1548. Therefore, the LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is transmitted to notify that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d is abnormal data, and the door frame side effect display device In 460, an image is displayed based on the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d.

  When the variable display of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol is started and stopped in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (timing K1), the peripheral control unit shown in FIG. 166 is turned on. In the scheduler update process of step S1020 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of time processing, the rendering is completed along the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. Since all the updates have been completed, that is, while the schedule data for screen generation is not activated and the schedule data for screen generation is not activated in the scheduler update process, the peripheral control unit shown in FIG. 166 is powered on. Step S102 in the peripheral control unit steady process In the determination of step S1540 in the connection recovery process shown in FIG. 173 executed as one process of the warning process, the process proceeds to the process of step S1542 in the same process, and when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is the value 0, that is, If the number of times it is determined that there is a failure in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is less than one, the routine is ended as it is, while the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0, In other words, when the number of times it is determined that there is a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is also one, the process proceeds to step S1544 in the same process, and the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is When the value is 0, ie the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is broken If the cumulative number determined to be in the state does not reach the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, the process proceeds to the processing of step S1546 in the same processing, performs the above-mentioned SYNC pattern output processing, and ends the routine, while the communication abnormality flag When the value of CC-FLG is not 0 (value 1), that is, when a problem occurs in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the process proceeds to step S1548 in the same process, and the above-mentioned communication is performed. Perform error display processing and end the routine. In other words, while the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver When there is a failure in the connection between ICSDIC0, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver, even when there is a failure in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. When the cumulative number determined to be present does not reach the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, by always performing the SYNC pattern output processing, between the connection of the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC 0, In other words, while processing to recover the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, When the cumulative number of times when it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a failure has reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT (that is, there is a failure in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver) For example, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, "A problem has occurred with the upper side liquid crystal display device. Please call a clerk. The LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is transmitted to notify that the message “is displayed and to notify that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d is abnormal data. Is activated.

  The variable display of the left side decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right side decorative pattern is started and stopped on the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, and the variable display of the left side decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right side decorative pattern again In the interval period until the start of the game, since the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, as described above, The LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is transmitted to convey that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d is abnormal data, and the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d and the door frame side effect Trouble occurs between the connection with the receiver ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. If the number of occurrences is at least one, and the cumulative number of times that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has been determined to be defective has not reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, SYNC While the pattern output processing is always performed, processing for recovering the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC 0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, is performed, while the transmitter and receiver When the cumulative number determined to be in a state where a fault occurs in the connection between has reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT (that is, there is a fault in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver) For example, by performing the communication error display process, for example, the game board side effect display device 1600 The display region "problem with the upper tray side liquid crystal display device has occurred. Please call your clerk." Displays a message that to have so as to perform the process of informing.

  When the variable display of the left side decorative symbol, the center decorative symbol, and the right side decorative symbol is started again (timing K2), as described above, the screen generation schedule data is active, so the left side decorative symbol and the central decorative symbol , And until the right-hand decorative symbol is stopped and displayed (timing K3), even if the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0, that is, for the door frame side effect provided on the peripheral control substrate 1510 The number of times that it is determined that there is a problem between the connection between the transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 (that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver) is 1. Even if the number of times is the same, the SYNC pattern output process of step S1546 in the connection recovery process is performed , The process of recovering the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is not performed, and the communication error display process of step S1548 in the connection recovery process is not performed. For example, the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 Since the message “There is a problem with the liquid crystal display on the upper tray. Please call a clerk.” Is not displayed, the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d is an abnormal data. While invalidating the LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that tells that there is a drawing, the door frame side effect display device 460 receives the drawing data that the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 has received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. Display an image based on.

  In this way, the variable display of the left side decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right side decorative pattern is started and stopped in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, and the left side decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern and the right side decoration are displayed again. During the interval period until the variable display of the symbol is started, the LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is transmitted to convey that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d is abnormal data. Between the display on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the display on the door frame side effect display between the start of variation display of the left side decoration symbol, the center decoration pattern, and the right side decoration symbol. Receiver ICSD for door frame side effect that conveys that the drawing data received from IC 1512 d is abnormal data LOCKN signal from the C0 is adapted to be disabled. This is a combination result of the stop display of the left side decorative symbol, the center decorative symbol, and the right side decorative symbol in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 being information most of interest to the player, and a profit to the player Since the player can determine whether or not a big hit gaming state to be awarded is generated, the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol change display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Then, the image of the effect drawn in the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460 is disturbed by the influence of noise and the like until the left side decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern and the right side decorative pattern are stopped and displayed. Even if it becomes impossible to draw, it is not left to the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, instead of interrupting the effect midway and performing processing to recover to the state where it can be drawn correctly. Decorative symbol, central decorative pattern, and by stopping displaying the right decorative design, and the most interesting of information of the player to complete the drawing.

  In this point, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 displays a start screen at the time of powering on the pachinko machine 1 on the game board side effect display device 1600, and a customer waiting state This is largely different from the case where the LOCKN signal output request data is transmitted to the differential circuit 1512e provided in the peripheral control board 1510 during the demonstration period by the game board side effect display device 1600. The LOCKN signal output request data is a period during which the game board side effect display device 1600 displays a start screen when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, or becomes a customer wait state for a demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600. In the period of time, the peripheral control MPU 1511a transmits the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450. This is transmitted as an operation confirmation request for the door frame side effect display device 460 in order to confirm whether or not there is a problem in the connection between the connections, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

  When the LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, is differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal in the differential circuit 1512e provided in the peripheral control board 1510, as described above, differential Two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the merging circuit 1512e are input to a forced switching circuit 1512f provided in the peripheral control board 1510. The forcible switching circuit 1512f is connected to the circuit so as to transmit the two signals that are differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differentiation circuit 1512e, so that the two signals are transmitted. One signal is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. When the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 of the liquid crystal module circuit 4450V provided in the effect display drive board 4450 determines that the two received signals are LOCKN signal output request data, the LOCKN signal output request data is As described above, since the data format is different from the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, it is determined that the data is abnormal, and the LOCKN signal is transmitted to the periphery of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510. It outputs to control MPU1511a. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines that there is no problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver when the LOCKN signal is input as a response signal to the transmission of the LOCKN signal output request data. While it can be determined that no malfunction has occurred, when the LOCKN signal is not input, it is determined that a malfunction has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. A notification image (for example, “A problem has occurred in the upper plate side liquid crystal display device. Please call the store clerk”) is transmitted to the game board side effect display device by controlling the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. An alarm sound to be output to 1600 and to that effect (for example, Problems with crystal display device has occurred. "), And notification sound from the speaker or the like provided in the door frame 3 by outputting the audio data transmission IC1512c to control the sound source built VDP1512a flows. Thereby, notification can be performed by the notification image displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the notification sound that repeatedly flows from the speaker or the like provided on the door frame 3. At this time, all of the LEDs for light emission decoration provided in the door frame 3 and the various LEDs mounted on various decoration substrates provided in the game board 5 may be lighted.

  As described above, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 transmits the LOCKN signal output request data which is serial data, the forcible switching circuit 1512f can receive the LOCKN signal output request data by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDDIC0. The door frame side receiver ICSDIC0 that receives the LOCKN signal output request data outputs the LOCKN signal from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side receiver ICSDIC0 as a response signal to the peripheral control MPU 1511a. Therefore, when the LOCKN signal is input, it can be determined that there is no problem with the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, and it can be determined that there is no problem with the door frame side effect display device 460, while LOCKN The signal is input When it not can be determined that the defect on the door frame side effect display device 460 as a malfunction has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and receiver occurs. Then, the peripheral control MPU 1511a can execute the communication error display process in step S1548 in the connection recovery process of FIG. 173 as a notification process when it is determined that a problem has occurred in the door frame side effect display device 460. It has become. In other words, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a finds a defect in the door frame side effect display device 460, it can notify the store clerk or the like of the hall by executing the notification process. Hall clerk and the like can very easily check whether there is a problem in the door frame side effect display device 460 before the player plays a game, and the check does not take time. ing. Therefore, the trouble of the door frame side effect display device 460 can be found without taking time and effort.

  Further, as described above, the LOCKN signal is data in which the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 by the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 is abnormal data. If it is judged that there is, it is a signal output to convey that effect, and more specifically, a door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512 d provided in the peripheral control substrate 1510 and a door frame side effect receiver provided in the effect display drive substrate 4450 Since it is a signal to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (restoring) the connection between the ICSDIC 0 and the connection, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver, for door frame side effect Receiver ICSDIC0 is a transmitter IC1512d for door frame side effect When the transmitted image cannot be received normally, a communication failure occurs between the image communication between the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 and the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, and the drawing data received becomes abnormal data. The LOCKN signal can be output to the peripheral control MPU 1511 a of the peripheral control unit 1511 for transmission. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a to which the LOCKN signal is input doors the connection confirmation signal for informing that transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is started. By outputting the data to the frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512 d, it is possible to eliminate the communication failure between the image communication. In other words, the peripheral control MPU 1511a can detect the failure of the door frame side effect display device 460 due to the communication failure between the image communications at an early stage, and act on the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d so as to eliminate the failure. It is supposed to be. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play by finding and eliminating a defect in the door frame side effect display device 460.

  Further, the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that receives the image transmitted from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and outputs the image to the door frame side effect display device 460 receives the image transmitted from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. When the reception is impossible, the effect control microprocessor outputs a LOCKN signal, which is a communication failure occurrence signal indicating that a communication failure has occurred between the image communication between the door frame side effect receiver ICSDDIC0 and the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. The peripheral control MPU 1511a, to which the LOCKN signal is input, controls the built-in sound source VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 so that a communication failure occurs because it can be output to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of a certain peripheral control unit 1511. Telling you To generate a message “There is a problem with the liquid crystal display on the upper plate. Please call a clerk.” And display the generated image on the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 for notification. Can be done. In other words, the peripheral control MPU 1511a detects a defect of the door frame side effect display device 460 due to a communication defect between image communication at an early stage, and notifies the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine 1 to that effect. Since the player can directly notify the store clerks in the hall or notify the store clerk in the hall that took the front of the pachinko machine 1 by chance, the store clerk in the hall suffers from the problem. Work can be started at an early stage to resolve the problem. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play by detecting and solving the defect of the door frame side effect display device 460 at an early stage.

  Furthermore, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 includes a door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and a door frame provided in the effect display drive board 4450 in the period (interval period) from the timing K1 to the timing K2. Even if there is a failure in the connection between the receiver ICSDIC0 for the side effect, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, there is a failure in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. When the cumulative number determined to be in the state of not being reached does not reach the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for enabling the LOCKN signal to eliminate communication failure between image communication From the transmitter IC1512d for door frame side effect A connection confirmation signal indicating that transmission is to be started to the frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 can be continuously output to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d until the cumulative number reaches the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT. It has become. Thus, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 changes the first special symbol or the second special symbol game in the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 Since it is possible to continue outputting the connection confirmation signal repeatedly only during a period in which the game is not progressed by displaying the start and stop, it is possible to move in the direction in which the communication failure is resolved.

  The peripheral control MPU 1511 a of the peripheral control unit 1511 is provided with the transmitter IC 1512 d for door frame side effect provided on the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the door frame side provided on the effect display drive substrate 4450 in a period (interval period) of timing K1 to timing K2. If the connection between the effect receiver ICSDIC0 and the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is broken even once, the connection between the transmitter and receiver fails When the accumulated number of times determined to be in the state does not reach the accumulated number upper limit CC-LMT, a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for validating the LOCKN signal and eliminating a communication malfunction between image communications is displayed. Door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d to door When the connection confirmation signal informing the start of transmission to the side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is repeatedly output to the door frame effect transmitter IC 1512d until the accumulated number reaches the accumulated number upper limit CC-LMT. When the main control MPU 1310a of the control board 1310 starts fluctuating the first special symbol or second special symbol game in the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 and confirms that the game progress is started again When the signal output is stopped and the connection confirmation signal output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a is stopped and no connection confirmation signal is input, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d outputs a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) to the door frame. Controlling liquid crystal display by stopping transmission to the receiver ICSDIC0 for side effects The image the sound source built VDP1512a to the generation of 1512 has been to be able to output to the door frame side for effect receiver ICSDIC0. Accordingly, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 causes the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 to change the first special symbol or the second special symbol game in the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405. By continuing to output the connection confirmation signal, which is a failure resolution signal, only during the period when the game is not started by displaying the start and stop, the communication failure can be resolved. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts fluctuating the first special symbol or the second special symbol game in the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 and displays stop. When the connection confirmation signal is repeatedly output only during the period when the game is not progressing, the main control board 1 Even if ten main control MPUs 1310a start changing the first special symbol or the second special symbol game in the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 and start executing the game again, the door frame When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts executing the game again and ends (period of timing K1 to timing K2), the distortion of the image (disturbance of the image) that progresses on the display screen of the side effect display device 460. Every time (interval period), it can be made to go away.

  According to the embodiment as described above, the pachinko machine 1 includes the main control board 1310 in FIG. 123 and the payout control board 951 in FIG. The main control board 1310 is a start area in which the game balls emitted by the ball hitting and launching apparatus 650 toward the game area 5a partitioned in the game board 5 are provided in the game area 5a. The main control MPU 1310a of FIG. 123, which is a game control microprocessor that controls the progress of the game based on the ball 2004 entering the mouth 2004, is implemented. The payout control board 951 is a payout control microprocessor that controls the payout of the gaming balls by the payout device 830 based on the award ball command of FIGS. 142 (a) and 142 (b) which is a payout command from the main control board 1310. 124 payout control MPU 952a is installed.

  The main control MPU 1310a, which is a game control microprocessor, includes at least a RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 1310a. The main control built-in RAM can store information related to the game even after the power is shut off.

  The payout control MPU 952a, which is a payout control microprocessor, includes at least a RAM (payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU 952a. The payout control built-in RAM can store information on the payout even after the power is shut off.

  The pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment further includes an operation switch 954 shown in FIG. If the operation switch 954 is operated within the period in which the determination process of step S16 in the main control-side power-on process in FIG. 146 is performed from when the power is turned on, the operation switch 954 erases the information about the game stored in the main control built-in RAM. 131 is output to the main control MPU 1310a, which is a game control microprocessor, and is operated within the period in which the determination process of step S512 in the payout control unit power-on process of FIG. The RAM clear function outputs the RWMCLR signal of FIG. 136 to the payout control MPU 952a, which is a payout control microprocessor, as a RAM clear signal for erasing information on the payout stored in the payout control built-in RAM. 146 in the main control side power-on process in FIG. When the operation is performed after the period during which the determination process in step S16 is performed (or the period during which the determination process in step S512 is performed in the payout control unit power-on process in FIG. 149 from when the power is turned on), the payout device 830 is concerned. The error release function of outputting the RWMCLR signal of FIG. 136 as the error release signal for releasing the generated error to the payout control MPU 952a which is the payout control microprocessor without outputting it to the main control MPU 1310a which is the game control microprocessor It is also something to be prepared.

  As described above, when the operation switch 954 is operated within the period in which the determination process of step S16 in the main control side power on process of FIG. 146 is performed from when the power is turned on, the game stored in the main control built-in RAM. 131 is erased to the main control MPU 1310a, which is a game control microprocessor, and the determination process of step S512 in the payout control unit power-on process of FIG. 149 is performed after power-on. When it is operated within the specified period, the RAM clear which outputs the RWMCLR signal of FIG. 136 to the payout control MPU 952a which is the payout control microprocessor as the RAM clear signal for erasing the information on the payout stored in the payout control built-in RAM. 146 and the main control side power When the operation is performed after the period during which the determination process of step S16 in the time process is performed (or the period during which the determination process of step S512 is performed in the payout control unit power-on process in FIG. 149 from when the power is turned on) has passed, The error release function of outputting the RWMCLR signal of FIG. 136 as the error release signal for releasing the error generated for the device 830 to the payout control MPU 952a which is the payout control microprocessor without outputting the RWMCLR signal of FIG. 136 to the main control MPU 1310a which is the game control microprocessor. Thus, the pachinko machine 1 can be provided with two different functions, a RAM clear function and an error release function, by an operation with one operation switch 954. Therefore, the RAM clear function and the error release function can be provided while contributing to cost reduction.

[17. Sensor signal input section of panel relay board]
The sensor signal input unit of the panel relay board 4161 includes various detection sensors arranged on the game board, for example, a general winning port sensor 4020, a first starting port sensor 4002, a second starting port sensor 4004, a count sensor 4005, and a vibration detection sensor. , A circuit to which a detection signal from the magnetic detection sensor 4024 or the like is input. Since the circuit configuration to which the detection signal from each detection sensor is input is the same, here, the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is cited as an example of the detection sensor, and the circuit to which the detection signal from the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is input will be described. Do.

  In a gaming machine, a magnet (for example, a permanent magnet or an electromagnet) is brought close to a game ball driven into a game area, etc. to manipulate the flow state of the game ball as desired and obtain an unfair profit There is no end to unfair gaming practices.

  A magnetic detection sensor 4024 capable of detecting magnetism is provided in correspondence with a predetermined position in the game area in order to detect such illegal gaming activities and to control the illegal activity by the light emitting means or the alarm by sound or the like. Yes.

[17-1. Conventional magnetic sensor input circuit]
FIG. 175 is a circuit diagram showing an example of a conventional magnetic sensor input circuit provided in a gaming machine. The gaming machine has a main control board 1310 and a panel relay board 4161. As shown in the figure, the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is supplied with the voltage + 5V created by the + 5V creation circuit 1310g.

  The magnetic detection sensor 4024 includes a magnetic sensor MGS and a built-in transistor STR. The magnetic sensor MGS is formed of, for example, a magnetoresistance effect element, and outputs a predetermined voltage (for example, +5 V) when not detecting magnetism of a predetermined value or more, and outputs a voltage when detecting magnetism of a predetermined value or more Do not (0V).

  The base terminal of the transistor STR is connected to the output terminal of the magnetic sensor MGS, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR is grounded. The collector terminal of the transistor STR is connected to one end of a pull-up resistor IR0 provided on the panel relay substrate 4161 via a connector CON1, and + 12V is applied to the other end of the pull-up resistor IR0. Thus, when the transistor STR is in the OFF state, the collector terminal of the transistor STR is pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor IR0 (corresponding to the first voltage).

  When the magnetic sensor MGS is not detecting magnetism, the transistor STR is turned on by the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS, and a current flows from the collector terminal to the ground via the emitter terminal. In addition, when the magnetic sensor MGS detects the magnetism, the transistor STR is turned off when the output from the magnetic sensor MGS is stopped, and the current flow from the collector terminal to the emitter terminal is stopped.

  The collector terminal of the transistor STR is connected to one end of the resistor IR1 in addition to being connected to the pull-up resistor IR0, and the other end of the resistor IR1 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0 is grounded, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR2, and + 12V is applied to the other end of the pull-up resistor IR2. Thereby, when the transistor ITR0 is in the OFF state, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor IR2.

  The collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 in the subsequent stage, in addition to being connected to the pull-up resistor IR2. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is connected to the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the connector CON2.

  The main control input circuit 1310b is composed of a pull-up resistor NR1, a resistor NR2, and a transistor NTR1, and one end of the pull-up resistor NR1 is connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 in the previous stage of the panel relay board 4161 via the connector CON2. + 12V is applied to the other end of the pull-up resistor NR1. As a result, when the transistor ITR in the previous stage is in the off state, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor NR1.

  The collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is connected to one end of the resistor NR2 in addition to being connected to the pull-up resistor NR1, and the other end of the resistor NR2 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1. The emitter terminal of the transistor NTR1 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor NTR1 is electrically connected to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

  In the figure, the detection sensor unit corresponds to the magnetic detection sensor 4024, the voltage output unit 4163 corresponds to the pull-up resistor IR0 connected to the magnetic detection sensor 4024 and to which +12 V is applied. The detection circuit unit 4164 is connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 and includes a pull-up resistor IR2 to which +12 V is applied, and a transistor ITR1 whose base terminal is connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0. Is applicable.

  In addition, a sensor signal input unit 4162 is configured by a circuit configured by the connector CON1, the voltage output unit 4163, the resistor IR1, and the transistor ITR0 in the preceding stage of the detection circuit unit 4164. Thus, the sensor signal input unit 4162 and the detection circuit unit 4164 are disposed on the panel relay substrate 4161.

[17-2. Detection operation]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 402 does not detect magnetism, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR, thereby turning on the built-in transistor STR. When the transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the connector CON1, the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR. Further, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor STR is pulled down to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage). In addition, since the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to the collector terminal of the transistor STR, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 is also lowered to the ground side. Thereby, the transistor ITR0 is turned off.

  When the transistor ITR0 is turned off, the voltage raised to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor IR2 is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1, whereby the transistor ITR1 is turned on. When the transistor ITR1 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor NR1, the connector CON2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1.

  Further, when the transistor ITR1 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1 connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is pulled down to the ground side, and the transistor NTR1 is turned off. A magnetic detection switch signal in which the logic of the collector terminal in which the transistor NTR1 is off is LOW (off) is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

  When the magnetic sensor MGS is in a detection state in which magnetism is detected, the output of the voltage from the magnetic sensor MGS is stopped, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR disappears, so that the built-in transistor STR is turned off. When the transistor STR is turned off, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is raised to the + 12V side. In addition, since the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to the collector terminal of the transistor STR, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 is also raised to the + 12V side (corresponding to the first voltage). Thereby, the transistor ITR0 is turned on.

  When the transistor ITR0 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0. Further, when the transistor ITR0 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is pulled down to the ground side, and the transistor ITR1 is turned off.

  When the transistor ITR1 is turned off, the voltage pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor NR2 of the main control input circuit 1310b is applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1 to turn on the transistor NTR1. When the transistor NTR1 is turned on, the magnetic detection switch signal whose logic is HI (on) connected to the collector terminal of the transistor NTR1 is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

  The operation states of the magnetic sensor MGS, the built-in transistor STR, the transistor ITR0, the transistor ITR1, and the transistor NTR1 described above are shown in a table form in FIG. Even when the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is disconnected from the panel relay substrate 4161, the transistor ITR0 is turned on, the transistor ITR1 is turned off, and the transistor NTR1 is turned on, as in the operation when the magnetic sensor MGS detects magnetism. .

  By the way, when signal transmission is performed by the connector member, when the connector member is corroded or dust enters the connector connecting portion, contact resistance is generated. There are pin contact types and bellows contacts in the connector member depending on the shape of the contact part terminal of the connector member, but in the case of the bellows contact type, when the harness attached to the connector member is pulled during connection work, the pin contacts The gap is easier to open than the type. When the gap is open, dust and the like can easily enter from this portion.

  Similarly, contact resistance occurs when vibration is applied to the connector member. For example, when playing right-handed, when sliding wear occurs due to vibration from a specific part of the game area where many game balls continuously concentrate and flow down to the connector member However, this may cause contact resistance.

  Here, the conventional magnetic sensor input circuit when such a contact resistance RR is generated in the connector member (connector CON1) that electrically connects the magnetic detection sensor 4024 and the voltage output portion 4163 of the panel relay board 4161. Will be described. For example, in FIG. 175, when the contact resistance RR occurs in the connector member, the contact resistance RR is indicated by a dashed line. The magnitude of the contact resistance RR is 100 times to 1000 times that in the case where the contact of the connector is normal.

  As described above, when the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 402 does not detect magnetism, the built-in transistor STR is turned on. When the built-in transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the contact resistor RR (connector CON1), the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR. As a result, although the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is lowered to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage), the current flows through the contact resistance RR, whereby the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistance RR Will be lifted. In FIG. 175, the connection point between the pull-up resistor IR0 and the resistor IR1 is illustrated as a black circle as a portion where the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistor RR is increased.

  That is, when a current flows in the contact resistance RR generated due to the contact state of the connector portion, a voltage higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 . When the voltage raised by the contact resistance RR reaches a specified voltage between the base terminal and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0, the transistor ITR0 is turned on. Therefore, there is a possibility that the transistor ITR0 is turned on even though the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in the non-detection state. That is, in the conventional sensor signal input unit 4162 provided on the panel relay board 4161, when the contact resistance RR is generated, there is a possibility that the sensor signal is erroneously detected.

17-3. First Embodiment of Magnetic Sensor Input Circuit]
FIG. 176 is a circuit diagram showing an example (Example 1) of a magnetic sensor input circuit provided in the gaming machine of the embodiment. The magnetic sensor input circuit according to the first embodiment of the present embodiment includes the magnetic detection sensor 4024, the connector CON1, the voltage output unit 4163 of the panel relay board 4161, the detection circuit unit 4164, and the main control board of the conventional magnetic sensor input circuit of FIG. The main control input circuit 1310 b of 1310 has the same circuit configuration. Therefore, the same reference numerals are used for the same circuit component.

  Note that the magnetic detection sensor 4024 should be installed at a plurality of locations in the game area, for example, in the vicinity of the first start opening 2002, the second start opening 2004, the general winning opening 2001, the large winning opening 2005, the out opening 1126 become.

  The magnetic sensor input circuit of this embodiment differs from the conventional magnetic sensor input circuit in that it is between the voltage output unit 4163 and the detection circuit unit 4164 when the magnetic detection sensor 4024 does not detect magnetism in the non-detection state. Even when a predetermined voltage higher than the voltage (second voltage) at which the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is pulled down to the ground side is applied, the action by the predetermined voltage on the detection circuit unit 4164 is performed. The voltage raising unit 4166 is provided to avoid the problem, and the voltage output unit 4163 and the detection circuit unit 4164 are electrically connected via the voltage raising unit 4166.

  In the first embodiment, the voltage raising unit 4166 is an example configured of a Zener diode ZD0 whose Zener voltage is higher than the predetermined voltage. Specifically, the cathode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR0 of the voltage output unit 4163, and the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 It is connected.

  The anode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 disposed in the subsequent stage. Further, + 12V is applied to the other end of the pull-up resistor IR0. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR2 to which +12 V is applied to the other end in the detection circuit unit 4164 and the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit unit 4164 Connected to the base terminal. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is connected to the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the connector CON2. A sensor signal input unit 4162 is configured by the connector CON1, the voltage output unit 4163, and the voltage raising unit 4166.

[17-3-1. Detection operation when connector contact is normal]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 402 does not detect magnetism, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR, thereby turning on the built-in transistor STR. When the transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the connector CON1, the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR.

  As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor STR is pulled down to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage). Further, since the collector terminal of the transistor STR is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 via the Zener diode ZD0, the Zener diode ZD0 maintains the non-conductive state because the Zener voltage is higher than the second voltage. Therefore, no voltage is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 (0 V). Thereby, the transistor ITR0 is turned off.

  When the transistor ITR0 is turned off, the voltage raised to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor IR2 is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit portion 4164, whereby the transistor ITR1 is turned on. When the transistor ITR1 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor NR1, the connector CON2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1.

  When the transistor ITR1 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is pulled down to the ground side, and the transistor NTR1 is turned off. A magnetic detection switch signal in which the logic of the collector terminal in which the transistor NTR1 is off is LOW (off) is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

  When the magnetic sensor MGS unit is in a detection state in which magnetism is detected, the output of voltage from the magnetic sensor MGS is stopped, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR disappears, so that the built-in transistor STR is turned off. When the transistor STR is turned off, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is raised to the + 12V side. Further, since the collector terminal of the transistor STR is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 via the Zener diode ZD0, a Zener voltage is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 (corresponding to the first voltage). Thereby, the transistor ITR0 is turned on.

  When the transistor ITR0 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0. Further, when the transistor ITR0 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit unit 4164 connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is pulled down to the ground side, and the transistor ITR1 is turned off.

  When the transistor ITR1 is turned off, the voltage pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor NR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b is applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1, thereby turning on the transistor NTR1. When the transistor NTR1 is turned on, the magnetic detection switch signal whose logic is HI (on) connected to the collector terminal of the transistor NTR1 is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

  When the main control MPU 1310a determines that such an abnormal state is present, in the above example, when the logic of the magnetic detection switch signal is determined to be HI, the main control unit MPU 1310a An error command is sent to the control unit 1511, and processing such as outputting a signal to that effect from the external terminal plate 784 to the hall computer is performed. In response to the error command, the peripheral control unit 1511 reports an abnormality with the game board side effect display device 1600, the door frame side effect display device 460, the alarm lamp, the sound, or the like.

17-3-2. Detection operation when connector contact is abnormal]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 402 does not detect magnetism, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR, thereby turning on the built-in transistor STR.

  When the built-in transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the contact resistor RR (connector CON1), the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR. Thereby, although the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is pulled down to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage), the current flows through the contact resistance RR, so that the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistance RR. Lift up. In FIG. 176, the connection point between the pull-up resistor IR0 and the Zener diode ZD0 is illustrated as a black circle as a location where the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistance RR increases.

  That is, a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage is applied to the cathode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 due to the current flowing through the contact resistance generated due to the contact state of the connector portion. become. Even when a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage is applied, the Zener diode ZD0 maintains the non-conduction state because the Zener voltage is higher than the predetermined voltage. Therefore, no voltage is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 (0 V). Thereby, the transistor ITR0 is turned off. That is, the voltage raising unit 4166 prevents the action of the predetermined voltage on the detection circuit unit 4164.

  The operation of the detection circuit unit 4164 and the main control input circuit 1310b in the subsequent stage is the same as the detection operation when the connector contact is normal.

  As a result, the voltage of detection circuit portion 4164 is not affected (because there is no change in voltage), and when contact resistance is generated due to slight sliding wear of the connector member, etc. False detection can be prevented.

  As in the conventional case, when an abnormality is detected by the magnetic sensor MGS, the main control MPU 1310a transmits an error command to the peripheral control unit 1511, and the peripheral control unit 1511 transmits a magnet according to the transmitted error command. The game board side effect display device 1600, the door frame side effect display device 460, a warning indicator, a sound, etc. notify that an illegal game action using a character is performed or that a break occurs in the magnetic detection sensor 4024 Do. Also, an error signal is output from the external terminal plate 784 to the hall computer.

[17-4. Example 2 of Magnetic Sensor Input Circuit]
FIG. 177 is a circuit diagram illustrating an example (Example 2) of a magnetic sensor input circuit arranged in the gaming machine of the embodiment. The magnetic sensor input circuit of the second embodiment includes the magnetic detection sensor 4024, the connector CON1, the voltage output unit 4163 of the panel relay board 4161, the detection circuit unit 4164, and the main control board 1310 of the conventional magnetic sensor input circuit of FIG. The input circuit 1310b has the same circuit configuration. Therefore, the same reference numerals are used for the same circuit component.

  In the second embodiment, the voltage raising unit 4166 has one end connected to the first resistor IR1 whose one end is connected to the voltage output unit 4163 and the other end of the first resistor IR1 and the other end grounded. And a second resistor IR3. When the sensor signal input unit 4162 of the second embodiment is compared with the conventional sensor signal input unit 4162 of FIG. 175, one end of the resistor IR3 whose other end is grounded is arranged downstream of the other end of the resistor IR1. The difference is that it is connected to the connection point with the base terminal of the transistor ITR0. That is, in the second embodiment, the voltage raising unit 4166 is an example configured by the resistor IR3 which causes a current to flow to the ground to drop when the predetermined voltage is applied.

  Note that one end of the first resistor IR1 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR0 of the voltage output unit 4163, and connected to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 via the connector CON1 in the previous stage of the connection portion. ing.

  Further, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR1 to which + 12V is applied to the other end in the detection circuit unit 4164, and to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is connected to the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the connector CON2. A sensor signal input unit 4162 is configured by the connector CON1, the voltage output unit 4163, and the voltage raising unit 4166.

[17-4-1. Detection operation when connector contact is normal]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 402 does not detect magnetism, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR, thereby turning on the built-in transistor STR. When the transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the connector CON1, the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR.

  As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor STR is pulled down to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage). Further, the collector terminal of the transistor STR is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0, so that the voltage pulled down to the ground side is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0. Thereby, the transistor ITR0 is turned off.

  When the transistor ITR0 is turned off, the voltage raised to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor IR2 is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1, whereby the transistor ITR1 is turned on. When the transistor ITR1 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor NR1, the connector CON2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1.

  When the transistor ITR1 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is pulled down to the ground side, and the transistor NTR1 is turned off. A magnetic detection switch signal in which the logic of the collector terminal in which the transistor NTR1 is off is LOW (off) is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

  When the magnetism detection sensor 4024 detects magnetism, the output of the voltage from the magnetism sensor MGS is stopped, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR disappears to turn off the built-in transistor STR. When the transistor STR is turned off, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is raised to the + 12V side.

  Further, a voltage of +12 V is applied to a series resistance circuit composed of the pull-up resistor IR0, the first resistor IR1 of the voltage raising unit 4166, and the second resistor IR3, and the pull-up resistor IR0 and the voltage raising unit 4166 A current flows to the ground via the first resistor IR1 and the second resistor IR3. When a current flows through the second resistor IR3, a potential difference generated between both ends of the second resistor IR3 is applied between the base terminal and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0, whereby the transistor ITR0 is turned on.

  When the transistor ITR0 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0. Further, when the transistor ITR0 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit unit 4164 connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is pulled down to the ground side, and the transistor ITR1 is turned off.

  When the transistor ITR1 is turned off, the voltage pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor NR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b is applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1, thereby turning on the transistor NTR1. When the transistor NTR1 is turned on, the magnetic detection switch signal whose logic is HI (on) connected to the collector terminal of the transistor NTR1 is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

17-4-2. Detection operation when connector contact is abnormal]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 402 does not detect magnetism, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR, thereby turning on the built-in transistor STR.

  When the built-in transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the contact resistor (connector CON1), the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR. Thereby, although the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is pulled down to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage), the current flows through the contact resistance RR, so that the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistance RR. Lift up. In FIG. 177, a connection point between the pull-up resistor IR0 and the first resistor IR1 is illustrated as a black circle as a portion where the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistor RR increases.

  That is, when a current flows in the contact resistance RR generated due to the contact state of the connector portion, a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage is applied to one end of the first resistor It will be. This voltage is sufficiently lower than the voltage applied when the built-in transistor of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is turned off.

  When a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage is applied to one end of the first resistor, a current flows through the first resistor IR1, and this current further flows to the ground through the second resistor IR3. That is, since the other end of the second resistor IR3 is grounded, a current with a predetermined voltage higher than the applied second voltage and lower than the first voltage almost falls to the ground, and the second resistor Almost no current flows into the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 subsequent to IR3. Therefore, the subsequent transistor ITR0 is not turned on. As a result, the subsequent transistor ITR0 maintains the off state. That is, the voltage raising unit 4166 avoids the action of the predetermined voltage on the detection circuit unit 4164.

  The operation of the detection circuit unit 4164 and the main control input circuit 1310b in the subsequent stage is the same as the detection operation when the connector contact is normal.

  As a result, the voltage of detection circuit portion 4164 is not affected (because there is no change in voltage), and when contact resistance is generated due to slight sliding wear of the connector member, etc. False detection can be prevented.

17-5. Third Embodiment of Magnetic Sensor Input Circuit]
FIG. 178 is a circuit diagram showing an example (third example) of the magnetic sensor input circuit provided in the gaming machine of the embodiment. The magnetic sensor input circuit of the third embodiment includes the magnetic detection sensor 4024, the connector, the voltage output unit 4163 of the panel relay board 4161, the detection circuit unit 4164, and the main control input of the main control board 1310 of the conventional magnetic sensor input circuit of FIG. The circuit 1310 b has the same circuit configuration. Therefore, the same reference numerals are used for the same circuit component.

  In the third embodiment, the voltage boosting unit 4166 includes two transistors ITR0 and ITR2 which constitute a Darlington circuit set to an operating voltage higher than the second voltage and lower than the predetermined voltage higher than the first voltage. And resistors IR1, IR4, and IR5. Compared to the second embodiment described above, in the third embodiment, in place of the resistor IR3 whose other end is grounded, a resistor IR4 and a resistor IR5 which are connected in series are respectively connected in parallel to two transistors ITR0 and ITR2 which constitute a Darlington circuit. Connected That is, in the third embodiment, the voltage raising unit 4166 is an example configured of the resistor IR4 and the resistor IR5 which cause a current to flow to the ground and drop when the predetermined voltage is applied.

  More specifically, one end of the resistor IR1 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR0 of the voltage output unit 4163, and the other end of the resistor IR1 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 in the front stage of the Darlington circuit. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR2 at the rear stage of the Darlington circuit, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR2 is grounded.

  The other end of the resistor IR1 is connected to the base terminal of the previous stage transistor ITR0, and is also connected to one end of the resistor IR4. The other end of the resistor IR4 is connected to the emitter terminal of the previous stage transistor ITR0. Further, one end of the resistor IR5 is connected to the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0 in the previous stage, and the other end of the resistor IR5 is grounded.

  That is, the resistor IR4 is connected in parallel between the base terminal and the emitter terminal of the previous stage transistor ITR0, and the resistor IR5 is connected in parallel between the base terminal and the emitter terminal of the latter stage transistor ITR2. The collector terminals of the two transistors ITR0 and ITR2 are connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 as well as being one end of a pull-up resistor IR2 whose +12 V of the detection circuit unit 4164 is applied to the other end.

[17-5-1. Detection operation when connector contact is normal]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 402 does not detect magnetism, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR, thereby turning on the built-in transistor STR. When the transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the connector CON1, the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR. Further, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor STR is pulled down to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage). Since the base terminal of the transistor is connected to the collector terminal of the transistor STR, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 is also lowered to the ground side. As a result, the transistor ITR0 is turned off and the transistor ITR2 is also turned off.

  When the transistor ITR0 is turned off, the voltage raised to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor IR2 is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit portion 4164, whereby the transistor ITR1 is turned on. When the transistor ITR1 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor NR1, the connector CON2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1.

  When the transistor ITR1 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is pulled down to the ground side, and the transistor NTR1 is turned off. A magnetic detection switch signal in which the logic of the collector terminal in which the transistor NTR1 is off is LOW (off) is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

When the magnetism detection sensor 4024 detects magnetism, the output of the voltage from the magnetism sensor MGS is stopped, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR disappears to turn off the built-in transistor STR. When the transistor STR is turned off, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is pulled up to +12 V.

  Further, a voltage of +12 V is applied to a series resistance circuit composed of a pull-up resistor IR0, a resistor IR1, a resistor IR4, and a resistor IR5 of the voltage raising unit 4166, and a pull-up resistor IR0 and a resistor IR1 of the voltage raising unit 4166, A current flows to the ground via the resistors IR4 and IR5. When a current flows through the resistor IR4, a potential difference generated between both ends of the resistor IR4 is applied between the base terminal and the emitter terminal of the previous stage transistor ITR0. As a result, the previous stage transistor ITR0 is turned on.

  When the previous transistor ITR0 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0, the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0, and the resistor IR5. When a current flows through the resistor IR5, a potential difference generated between both ends of the resistor IR5 is applied between the base terminal and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR2 in the subsequent stage. Thereby, the transistor ITR2 in the rear stage is turned on.

  When the succeeding transistor ITR2 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR2, the collector terminal of the succeeding transistor ITR2, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR2. Further, as the transistor ITR2 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit unit 4164 connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR2 in the subsequent stage is pulled down to the ground side, and the transistor ITR1 is turned off.

  When the transistor ITR1 is turned off, the voltage pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor NR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b is applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1, thereby turning on the transistor NTR1. When the transistor NTR1 is turned on, the magnetic detection switch signal whose logic is HI (on) connected to the collector terminal of the transistor NTR1 is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

[17-5-2. Detection operation when connector contact is abnormal]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 402 does not detect magnetism, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR, thereby turning on the built-in transistor STR.

  When the built-in transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the contact resistor RR (connector CON1), the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR. Thereby, although the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is pulled down to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage), the current flows through the contact resistance RR, so that the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistance RR. Lift up. In FIG. 178, a connection point between the pull-up resistor IR0 and the resistor IR1 is illustrated as a black circle as a portion where the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistor RR increases.

  That is, when a current flows through the contact resistance generated due to the contact state of the connector portion, a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage is applied to one end of the resistor IR1. . This voltage is sufficiently lower than the voltage applied when the built-in transistor of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is turned off.

  When a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage is applied to one end of the resistor IR1, a current flows through the resistor IR1, and the current also flows to the ground through the resistor IR4 and the resistor IR5. That is, since the other end of the resistor IR5 is grounded, most of the current due to the applied predetermined voltage falls to the ground, and almost no current flows in the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 in the previous stage of the Darlington circuit, which is the subsequent stage of the resistor IR1. It does not flow in. Therefore, the transistor ITR0 in the previous stage is not turned on. Further, the transistor ITR2 in the subsequent stage is also not turned on. As a result, the two transistors ITR0 and ITR2 of the Darlington circuit maintain the off state. That is, the voltage raising portion 4166 avoids the action of the predetermined voltage on the detection circuit portion 4164.

  The operation of the detection circuit unit 4164 and the main control input circuit 1310b in the subsequent stage is the same as the detection operation when the connector contact is normal.

  As a result, the voltage of detection circuit portion 4164 is not affected (because there is no change in voltage), and when contact resistance is generated due to slight sliding wear of the connector member, etc. False detection can be prevented.

  As shown in FIG. 180, a plurality of open collector type sensor signal input units 4162 connected to each of the plurality of magnetic detection sensors 4024 are connected in parallel to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit unit 4164. ing. When any one of the sensor signal input units 4162 detects magnetism and is turned on, the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit unit 4164 is turned off.

  Similarly, when any one of the connections between the magnetic detection sensor 4024 and the sensor signal input unit 4162 is disconnected, the detection circuit unit 4164 is turned on when the sensor signal input unit 4162 corresponding to the disconnected magnetic detection sensor 4024 is turned on. The transistor ITR1 is turned off. Further, when there are a plurality of sensors, a voltage output unit 4163 is provided for each of the plurality of sensors, and each provided voltage output unit 4163 is a transistor array having a plurality of Darlington circuits, for example, “TD62083AP” (commercial product, TOSHIBA Corporation). It can be used by connecting to the product.

  As mentioned above, although the sensor signal input part 4162 arrange | positioned at the panel relay board 4161 of this embodiment was demonstrated, the detection sensor applicable to the sensor signal input part 4162 is not limited to the magnetic detection sensor 4024, A connector member As long as the sensor signal is transmitted from the detection sensor, various sensors such as a general winning opening sensor 4020, a first starting opening sensor 4002, a second starting opening sensor 4004, a count sensor 4005, a vibration detection sensor, a contact, etc. A sensor or the like can be applied.

[17-6. Application to which the sensor signal input unit 4162 is applicable]
The sensor signal input unit 4162 in each of the first to third embodiments described above is described as one that prevents erroneous detection of a signal from the detection sensor due to contact resistance that occurs when contact of the connector is abnormal. By the way, the applicable part of the sensor signal input unit 4162 of the first to third embodiments is not limited to the contact portion of the connector.

  As described above, in the gaming machine, there are circumstances in which the detection sensor sets a plurality of locations in the game area (for example, each is arranged near the starting opening, winning opening, big winning opening, out opening, etc.) . Therefore, the electrical connection between the detection sensor and the detection circuit unit (for example, a transistor on the panel relay board) that detects a detection signal from the detection sensor depends on various circuit patterns and wiring (harness) depending on the installation location of the detection sensor. Is appropriately selected. About this point, various forms will be taken by the difference in the model of a game machine.

  By the way, the electric current which flows in the detection sensor is changed by changing the resistance value depending on the aging of the used electric parts (for example, connector and detection sensor) and the wiring pattern and the length of the wiring (harness). If the value is different from the value, the circuit may not operate normally. In addition, the resistance value also changes when, for example, the type of the detection sensor, the placement location, and the length of the wiring (harness) are design-changed due to the specification change during development. Therefore, the current flowing through the detection sensor changes. Further, depending on the location where the detection sensor is arranged, the length of the harness, or the location where the harness is routed changes, there may be a location where noise is easily picked up, and the influence level of the noise also changes.

  If a current flows to a resistance value that changes due to such a cause, the current flowing to the detection sensor may be different from the original design value. That is, there is a possibility that the signal of the detection sensor may be erroneously detected. In addition, the circuit may not operate normally due to the influence of noise, and the detection sensor signal may be erroneously detected.

  The sensor signal input unit 4162 provided with the voltage raising unit 4166 according to the first to third embodiments is an electric component (for example, a connector or a detection sensor) used, aging of the wiring pattern, wiring (harness) Depending on the length, even when the resistance value changes, false detection of the signal from the detection sensor due to aging or noise can be prevented, and the detection circuit can be generalized. In the conventional example of FIG. 175 and the example of FIG. 176, the changing resistance value is indicated by a two-dot chain line.

  In the following, the case where noise appears on the harness will be described as an example. 181 (A) shows the signal waveform input to the sensor signal input unit 4162 in the conventional example, and FIG. 181 (B) shows the signal waveform input to the sensor signal input unit 4162 in the example. The left side of FIG. 181 (A) is a signal waveform input when there is no noise, and the right side is a signal waveform input when noise appears.

  As shown in FIG. 181 (A), in the conventional example, when there is no noise, the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is at a low level (0.4 V) in a state where no magnetism is detected, and the transistor ITR0 in FIG. Can be maintained at a level lower than the voltage (0.8V). When the magnetism detection sensor 4024 detects magnetism, it is at high level (12 V), which is higher than the voltage (0.8 V) at which the transistor ITR0 turns on, and the transistor ITR0 turns on.

  On the other hand, in the conventional example, when noise is applied, even if the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is not detecting magnetism, the peak of the noise waveform has a voltage (0.8 V) at which the transistor ITR0 is turned on as shown by the hatched portion. Since the transistor ITR0 is turned on, the off state can not be maintained. Therefore, the sensor signal is erroneously detected.

  In addition to noise, for example, as shown in FIG. 181 (A), when overshoot occurs, detection of magnetism does not result in false detection, but when undershoot occurs, transistor ITR0 is turned on. As a result, the off state cannot be maintained. Therefore, the sensor signal is erroneously detected.

  As shown in FIG. 181 (B), in the embodiment, the voltage raising unit 4166 raises the voltage that can be input to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 in FIG. 176 to 2V as an example of a voltage higher than 0.8V. It is done. The detection operation is low level (0.4 V) in the state where the magnetic detection sensor 4024 does not detect magnetism in the absence of noise, and is lower than the boosted voltage 2 V, the voltage at which the transistor ITR0 turns on. A level lower than (0.8V) can be maintained. When the magnetic detection sensor 4024 detects magnetism, it is at high level (12 V) and higher than the boosted voltage 2 V, so the voltage boosting unit 4166 is turned on and the voltage at which the transistor ITR0 is turned on (0. The level is higher than 8 V), and the transistor ITR0 is turned on.

  On the other hand, in the embodiment, when noise is present, the peak of the noise waveform exceeds the voltage (0.8 V) at which the transistor ITR0 is turned on even when the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is not detecting magnetism. Since the voltage is also lower than the boosted voltage 2 V, the voltage raising unit 4166 maintains the off state. Therefore, the transistor ITR0 can be maintained in the off state. Therefore, erroneous detection can be prevented.

  Next, for example, a case where a voltage rise occurs due to a rise in resistance due to aging will be described as an example. FIG. 182 (A) shows the signal waveform input to the sensor signal input unit 4162 in the conventional example, and FIG. 182 (B) shows the signal waveform input to the sensor signal input unit 4162 in the embodiment. The left side of FIG. 182 (A) is a signal waveform input in the normal case, and the right side is a signal waveform input when a voltage rise occurs due to a rise in resistance due to aging.

  In the conventional example, when a voltage increase occurs due to an increase in resistance value due to secular change, even if the magnetic detection sensor 4024 does not detect magnetism, the input voltage as shown by the hatched portion is a transistor. Since the voltage (0.8 V) at which ITR0 turns on is exceeded, the transistor ITR0 remains on and can not maintain the off state. Therefore, the sensor signal is erroneously detected.

  On the other hand, in the embodiment, even when a voltage rise occurs due to the increase in resistance value due to aging, in the state where the magnetic detection sensor 4024 does not detect magnetism, the input voltage is turned on by the transistor ITR0. Voltage (0.8 V) is lower than the boosted voltage 2 V, the voltage boosting unit 4166 maintains the off state. Therefore, the transistor ITR0 can be maintained in the off state. Therefore, erroneous detection can be prevented.

  As described above, since the sensor signal input unit 4162 according to the first to third embodiments includes the voltage raising unit 4166, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of a signal from the detection sensor due to secular change or noise. In addition, since the sensor signal input unit 4162 includes a voltage raising unit 4166, noise may be caused by changing the location of the detection sensor, extending the length of the harness, or changing the place where the harness is routed. Even if there is a place where it is easy to pick up, the sensor signal input unit 4162 can prevent the influence of noise. Therefore, the circuit units (the sensor signal input unit 4162 and the detection circuit unit 4164) provided on the panel relay substrate 4161 can be generalized. Therefore, it is possible to have a margin in design change during development.

17-7. Sensor signal input unit 4162 'of another embodiment]
The magnetic detection sensor 4024 described in the first to third embodiments described above includes the built-in transistor STR, and the built-in transistor STR is turned on when magnetism is not detected, while the built-in transistor STR is turned on when magnetism is detected. Although the transistor STR is turned off, in other words, the sensor signal input unit 4162 uses a signal whose input is low when magnetism is not detected and whose input is high when magnetism is detected. Instead, a magnetic sensor whose input is high when magnetism is not detected and whose input is low when magnetism is detected, in other words, a magnetic sensor which is turned off when magnetism is not detected and turned on when magnetism is detected. It is also possible to use.

  FIG. 183 is a circuit diagram illustrating an example of a magnetic sensor input circuit according to another embodiment. The magnetic sensor MGS is turned off when not detecting magnetism of a predetermined value or more, and turned on when magnetism of a predetermined value or more is detected.

  The input terminal of the magnetic sensor MGS is connected to one end of a pull-up resistor IR0 provided on the panel relay board 4161 via a connector CON1, and + 12V is applied to the other end of the pull-up resistor IR0. The output terminal of the magnetic sensor MGS is grounded.

  As the voltage raising portion 4166, the one described in the first to third embodiments can be used. In this alternative embodiment, the voltage raising unit 4166 is an example formed of a Zener diode ZD0 whose Zener voltage is higher than the predetermined voltage. Specifically, the cathode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR0 of the voltage output unit 4163, and is connected to the input terminal of the magnetic sensor MGS via the connector CON1 at the front stage of the connection portion.

  The anode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 disposed in the subsequent stage. In another embodiment, the detection circuit unit 4164 'is constituted by the transistor ITR0. Further, + 12V is applied to the other end of the pull-up resistor IR0. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1 is grounded, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is connected to the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the connector CON2, and +12 V is connected to the pull-up resistor NR applied at one end. There is. Here, the circuit configuration of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 is the same as in the first to third embodiments. In another embodiment, the voltage output unit 4163 and the voltage raising unit 4166 constitute a sensor signal input unit 4162 ', and the transistor ITR0 constitutes a detection circuit unit 4164'.

17-7. Detection operation in the normal case]
When the magnetic sensor MGS is in the non-detection state where the magnetism is not detected, the magnetic sensor MGS is off. As a result, the voltage pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor IR0 is applied to the cathode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 (corresponding to the first voltage). Since this applied voltage is higher than the Zener voltage, the Zener diode ZD0 is turned on, and is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 of the detection circuit unit 4164 via the anode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0, thereby turning on the transistor ITR0.

  When the transistor ITR0 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor NR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b, the connector CON2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 of the detection circuit unit 4164 ′, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0.

  Further, when the transistor ITR0 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is pulled down to the ground side, and the transistor NTR1 is turned off. A magnetic detection switch signal in which the logic of the collector terminal in which the transistor NTR1 is off is LOW (off) is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

  When the magnetic sensor MGS is in the detection state in which the magnetism is detected, the magnetic sensor MGS is turned on. When the magnetic sensor MGS is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0 to which +12 V is applied, the connector CON1, the input terminal of the magnetic sensor MGS, and the output terminal of the magnetic sensor MGS.

  Thus, the voltage at one end of the pull-up resistor IR0 of the voltage output unit 4163 is lowered to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage). In addition, one end of the pull-up resistor IR0 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 via the Zener diode ZD0, so that the Zener voltage is higher than the second voltage, so that the Zener diode ZD0 maintains the off state. Therefore, no voltage is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 (0 V). Thereby, the transistor ITR0 is turned off.

  When the transistor ITR0 is turned off, the voltage pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor NR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b is applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1, thereby turning on the transistor NTR1. When the transistor NTR1 is turned on, the magnetic detection switch signal whose logic is HI (on) connected to the collector terminal of the transistor NTR1 is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

[17-7-2. Detection operation in abnormal case due to change of resistance value]
When the magnetic sensor MGS is in the non-detection state where the magnetism is not detected, the magnetic sensor MGS is off. As a result, the voltage pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor IR0 is applied to the cathode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 (corresponding to the first voltage). Since this applied voltage is higher than the Zener voltage, the Zener diode ZD0 is turned on, and is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 of the detection circuit unit 4164 via the anode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0, thereby turning on the transistor ITR0.

  At this time, even if noise is applied to the harness from the magnetic sensor MGS, the voltage applied to the cathode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 (corresponding to the first voltage) is a higher voltage, so the Zener diode ZD0 There is no influence on the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit portion 4164 via the anode terminal thereof, and the transistor ITR0 remains unchanged. In other words, the voltage raising unit 4166 avoids the action of the predetermined voltage on the detection circuit unit 4164 ′.

  On the other hand, when the magnetic sensor MGS is in a detection state in which magnetism is detected, the magnetic sensor MGS is turned on. When the magnetic sensor MGS is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0 to which +12 V is applied, the connector CON1, the input terminal of the magnetic sensor MGS, and the output terminal of the magnetic sensor MGS.

  Thus, the voltage at one end of the pull-up resistor IR0 of the voltage output unit 4163 is lowered to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage). In addition, one end of the pull-up resistor IR0 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 via the Zener diode ZD0, so that the Zener voltage is higher than the second voltage, so that the Zener diode ZD0 maintains the off state. Therefore, no voltage is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 (0 V). Thereby, the transistor ITR0 is turned off.

  At this time, even if noise is placed on the harness from the magnetic sensor MGS, the predetermined voltage due to the noise applied to the cathode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 is higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage. The predetermined voltage is applied to the cathode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0. Even if a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage is applied, the Zener diode ZD0 maintains the off state because the Zener voltage is higher than the predetermined voltage. Therefore, no voltage is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 (0 V). Thereby, the transistor ITR0 is turned off. That is, the voltage raising unit 4166 prevents the action of the predetermined voltage on the detection circuit unit 4164. The operation of the main control input circuit 1310b is the same as the detection operation in the normal case.

[17-8. Example of arranging a plurality of sensor signal input units 4162 on panel relay substrate 4161]
Next, FIG. 184 is a diagram showing an example of the circuit configuration of the invention according to claim 1. In FIG. As shown in FIG. 184, an example in which three of the same substrate (on the panel relay substrate 4161), the voltage output unit 4163, the voltage raising unit 4166, and the detection circuit unit 4164 are arranged is shown. The present invention is not limited to this. For example, the voltage raising unit 4166, and at least one of the voltage output unit 4163 and the detection circuit unit 4166 may be disposed on the same substrate. FIG. 185 shows a circuit configuration in which the voltage raising unit 4166 and the detection circuit unit 4164 are disposed on the same substrate (panel relay substrate 4161) and the voltage output unit 4163 is disposed on another substrate (for example, sensor substrate). It is a figure which shows an example.

  In FIG. 186, the voltage output unit 4163 and the voltage raising unit 4166 are disposed on the same substrate (panel relay substrate 4161), and the detection circuit unit 4164 is disposed on another substrate (for example, the main control substrate 1310). It is a figure which shows the example of the performed circuit structure. Thus, the arrangement positions of the voltage output unit 4163 and the detection circuit unit 4164 can be variously changed.

  FIG. 185 is a view showing another example of the circuit configuration of the invention related to the embodiment of the present invention. The resistance value that changes with age or wiring length includes the magnetic detection sensor 4024, the magnetic sensor MGS, the wiring (harness) from these to the panel relay board 4161, and the connector CON1. In FIG. 184, the detection sensor unit disposed at a predetermined position on the game board 5a is configured by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 of the first to third embodiments.

  The voltage output unit 4163 outputs a first voltage when the detection sensor unit is in the first state, and a second voltage that is lower than the first voltage when the detection sensor unit is in the second state. Output voltage. For example, in the circuit shown in FIG. 184, when the magnetic detection sensor 4024 does not detect magnetism, it outputs a low level voltage (eg, 0.4 V) while the magnetic detection sensor 4024 detects magnetism. When this happens, a high level voltage (for example, 12V) is output.

  The detection circuit unit 4164 switches on / off of the output of the detection signal according to the first voltage or the second voltage output from the voltage output unit 4163. In the detection circuit unit 4164 of FIG. 184, since the detection circuit unit 4164 described in the first to third embodiments is used, the pull-up resistor IR2 pulled up to +12 V is connected to the previous stage of the base terminal of the transistor ITR1. ing.

  Then, for the subsequent stage of the voltage output unit 4163, the first voltage (12 V in each embodiment) is higher than the second voltage (eg 0.4 V in each embodiment). Even if a predetermined voltage (for example, a voltage of 0.8 V or more and less than 2.0 V is illustrated in FIG. 182) lower than V) is applied, the action of the predetermined voltage on the detection circuit unit 4164 is avoided A voltage raising part 4166 is provided.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 184, one detection circuit unit 4164, a plurality of voltage output units 4163 and a plurality of voltage raising units 4166 are disposed on the same substrate (on the panel relay substrate 4161). . In this example, a sensor signal input unit 4162 is configured by the voltage output unit 4163 and the voltage raising unit 4166 disposed at the subsequent stage of the voltage output unit 4163. Also, a plurality of voltage raising units 4166,... Are electrically connected in parallel to one detection circuit unit 4164.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 184, a plurality of open collector type sensor signal input units 4162 respectively connected to the plurality of magnetic detection sensors 4024 or the magnetic sensor MGS is the base of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit unit 4164. Multiple terminals are connected in parallel. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is connected to the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the connector CON2.

  In FIG. 184, when any one of the sensor signal input units 4162 detects magnetism and is turned on, the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit unit 4164 is turned off, whereby the transistor NTR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b is turned on. It is. Therefore, the detection signal can be detected without erroneously detecting any of the plurality of detection sensor units. As described above, when the sensor signal input unit 4162 including the voltage raising unit 4166 is used, it is not necessary to take into consideration the changing resistance value as illustrated. Therefore, a plurality of sensor signal input units 4162 can be integrated on one substrate (on panel relay substrate 4161), and panel relay substrate 4161 can be commonly used (generalized) in various types of game machines. Is possible. Therefore, it contributes to reduction of man-hours involved in design change and manufacturing in the middle of development.

  FIG. 187 shows an example in which a plurality of magnetic sensors MGS of another embodiment described in FIG. 183 are provided, and a plurality of magnetic sensors MGS are electrically connected in parallel to the voltage output unit 4163. Moreover, in FIG. 187, it is comprised with the magnetic sensor MGS of another Example. In another example of FIG. 187, when the magnetic sensor MGS detects magnetism (magnetic sensor MGS is on), the voltage output unit 4163 outputs a low level voltage (for example, 0.4 V) while the magnetic sensor When the MGS does not detect magnetism (magnetic sensor MGS is off), the voltage output unit 4163 outputs a high level voltage (for example, 12 V).

  On the other hand, in FIG. 187, since the detection circuit unit 4164 ′ described in another embodiment is used, there is no pull-up resistor IR2 pulled up to + 12V, and + 12V is connected to one end of the main control input circuit 1310a. The collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is pulled up to + 12V by the pull-up resistor NR1 to which is applied.

  In FIG. 187, when any one of these magnetic sensors MGS detects magnetism and is turned on, the transistor ITR0 of the detection circuit unit 4164 ′ is turned off, thereby turning on the transistor NTR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b. is there.

[18. Characteristic game control and effect control]
Characteristic game control, effect control, and the like in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described.

[18-1. Control Summary]
As described above, the main control board 1310 executes various processes for controlling the entire pachinko machine 1 and outputs various control signals (control commands) according to the processing results. Also, the peripheral control board 1510 is based on the control signal (control command) output from the main control board 1310, and the display mode (design images, various background images, display images of characters, characters, etc.) Control).

  Also, as described above, the main control board 1310 stores a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns. The fluctuation pattern is to determine the time from the start to the end of the symbol fluctuation of the special symbol, and by transmitting the information to the peripheral control board 1510, the game board side effect display device 1600 It is also possible to determine the type of effect pattern that appears in. In the present embodiment, a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns can be classified into a fluctuation pattern for big hit fluctuation, a fluctuation pattern for outlying reach fluctuation, and a fluctuation pattern for outlying fluctuation. The jackpot fluctuation is a fluctuation that is performed when it is determined that the jackpot game is given, and in the game board side effect display device 1600, the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol finally stops the jackpot symbol after the reach effect. An effect that is expanded so as to be displayed is executed. Out-of-reach reach fluctuation is a fluctuation that is performed when it is determined that the big hit game is not given, and in the game board side effect display device 1600, after reaching effect, the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol is finally lost and the symbol is stopped An effect that is expanded so as to be displayed is executed. Outlying fluctuation is a fluctuation that is performed when it is determined that the big hit game is not given, in the game board side effect display device 1600, without going through reach effect, the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol finally loses the symbol An effect to be developed so as to cause a stop display is performed. In addition, the fluctuation pattern is defined so as to be able to identify which fluctuation pattern is the first special symbol side or the second special symbol side.

  Next, the processing performed in the processing of step 114 concerning the special symbol and special electric power symbol control processing shown in FIG. 148 and in the processing of step 116 concerning the normal symbol and ordinary electric power symbol control processing will be described. .

  The main control MPU 1310 a executes a special symbol start process of starting the variation of the special symbol when the symbol variation is not being executed and the big hit game is not being executed. In this special symbol start process, first, it is determined whether the second number of pending storages stored in the main control MPU 1310 a is larger than “0”. When the second number of pending storages is "1" or more, the display content of the function display unit 1400 is set to subtract the number of second pending storages by "1" and display the second number of pending storages after updating (after subtraction). Control. And main control MPU1310a performs the big hit judgment by the side of the 2nd special symbol.

  On the other hand, when the second pending storage number is “0”, the main control MPU 1310 a determines whether the first pending storage number stored in the main control MPU 1310 a is larger than “0”. . If the first number of pending storages is "1" or more, the display content of the function display unit 1400 is set so that the first number of pending storages is subtracted by "1" and the first number of pending storages after updating (after subtraction) is displayed. Control. Then, the main control MPU 1310a executes a first jackpot determination process.

  Thus, the main control MPU 1310a gives priority to the second jackpot determination process when both the first number of pending storages and the second number of pending storages are "1" or more, whereby the second side symbol variation is performed. It will be executed preferentially.

  When the main control MPU 1310a performs the jackpot determination on the first special symbol side, first, the jackpot determination random number stored in a predetermined storage area in the main control MPU 1310a is associated with the first reserved storage number. Read the value. Next, the main control MPU 1310a compares the jackpot determination random number associated with the first reserved storage number with the jackpot determination value based on the probability variation flag to determine whether or not both values match. Do. That is, as described above, the main control MPU 1310a according to the present embodiment can change the jackpot winning probability so that the jackpot determination can be performed in the low probability state in the non-probability variation state and in the high probability state in the probability variation state. The positive change flag is a flag indicating whether the positive change state is being controlled.

  If the determination result of the big hit determination is affirmative, the main control MPU 1310a sets a big hit flag indicating that it is a symbol variation that becomes a big hit, and executes a first big hit variation process for executing the symbol variation that becomes a big hit . In the first big hit time variation process, the main control MPU 1310a reads the value of the big hit symbol random number (design random number) associated with the first reserved memory number, and based on the value of the big hit symbol random number (design random number), The jackpot symbol to be stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display unit 1403 is determined, and the type of jackpot corresponding to the jackpot symbol is determined. Subsequently, the main control MPU 1310a selects and determines one of the big hit fluctuation patterns based on the probability change flag and the operation flag. This operation flag is a flag indicating whether it is the first time-short state, the second time-short state, or the non-time-short state. Thereafter, the main control MPU 1310a ends the special symbol start process.

  On the other hand, if the determination result of the jackpot determination is negative, the main control MPU 1310a reads the value of the reach determination random number associated with the first reserved storage number, and the reach determination random number value and the reach determination value. And reach determination as to whether or not both values match. In addition, as reach determination values, different values are mainly determined depending on whether or not a definite change state or a time saving state is given, the number of pending storages after subtraction, etc., and it is determined whether to execute reach effect or not The probability of doing this may be different.

  If the determination result of the reach determination is affirmative, the main control MPU 1310 a has won the reach determination, and thus executes the first reach time change process for executing the symbol change that is the out-of-reach reach change. In the first reach variation processing, the main control MPU 1310a determines a special symbol as a special symbol to be stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 1403, and based on the probability variation flag and the operation flag, from among the variation patterns for the deviation reach variation. Choose one and make a decision. Thereafter, the main control MPU 1310a ends the special symbol start process.

  On the other hand, when the determination result of the reach determination is negative, the main control MPU 1310a has not won the reach determination, and therefore executes a first shift variation process for executing a symbol variation that becomes a shift variation. In the first deviation variation process, the main control MPU 1310a determines a deviation symbol as a special symbol to be stopped and displayed on the first special symbol indicator 1403. Subsequently, the main control MPU 1310a selects and determines one of the variation patterns for deviation variation based on the probability variation flag and the operation flag. Thereafter, the main control MPU 1310a ends the special symbol start process.

  On the other hand, when the main control MPU 1310a performs the jackpot determination on the second special symbol side, first, the jackpot stored in a predetermined storage area in the main control MPU 1310a in association with the second reserved memory number. Read out the value of the judgment random number. Next, the main control MPU 1310a compares the jackpot determination random number associated with the second reserved storage number with the jackpot determination value based on the probability variation flag to determine whether or not both values match. Do.

  When the determination result of the big hit determination is affirmative, the main control MPU 1310a sets a big hit flag indicating that it is a symbol variation that becomes a big hit, and executes a second big hit variation process for executing the symbol variation that becomes a big hit . In the second big hit time variation process, the main control MPU 1310a reads the value of the big hit symbol random number (design random number) associated with the second reserved memory number, and based on the value of the big hit symbol random number (design random number), The jackpot symbol to be stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 1405 is determined, and the type of jackpot corresponding to the jackpot symbol is determined. Subsequently, the main control MPU 1310a selects and determines one of the variation patterns for big hit variation based on the probability variation flag and the operation flag. Thereafter, the main control MPU 1310a ends the special symbol start process.

  On the other hand, if the determination result of the jackpot determination is negative, the main control MPU 1310a reads the value of the reach determination random number associated with the second reserved storage number, and also determines the reach determination random number value and the reach determination value. And reach determination as to whether or not both values match.

  If the determination result of the reach determination is affirmative, the main control MPU 1310a has won the reach determination, and thus executes the second reach time change process for executing the symbol change that is the out-of-reach reach change. In the second reach variation process, the main control MPU 1310a determines a deviated symbol as a special symbol to be stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 1405, and, based on the probability variation flag and the operation flag, out of the variation pattern for deviating reach variation. Choose one and make a decision. Thereafter, the main control MPU 1310a ends the special symbol start process.

  On the other hand, when the determination result of the reach determination is negative, the main control MPU 1310a has not won the reach determination, and therefore executes the second shift variation process for executing the symbol variation that becomes the shift variation. In the second deviation variation process, the main control MPU 1310a determines a deviation symbol as a special symbol to be stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 1405. Subsequently, the main control MPU 1310a selects and determines one of the variation patterns for deviation variation based on the probability variation flag and the operation flag. Thereafter, the main control MPU 1310a ends the special symbol start process.

  After that, in a process different from the special symbol start process, the main control MPU 1310a outputs the control command generated according to the determination items determined in the special symbol start process to the peripheral control board 1510 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) at a predetermined timing. . More specifically, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a command indicating the type of the special symbol, the determined variation pattern, the result information of the jackpot determination, and the like when starting the symbol variation. After that, when the timing at which symbol variation is stopped comes, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a symbol stop command.

  When the main control MPU 1310a wins the big hit, after the symbol fluctuation based on the decided fluctuation pattern is completed, the main control MPU 1310a proceeds to the following processing to start the big hit game according to the symbol type. That is, the main control MPU 1310a first outputs an opening command after stopping symbol variation. Further, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a round command each time a round game is started. Also, when the last round game is over, the main control MPU 1310a outputs an ending command after an interval time has elapsed. Then, after the ending time has elapsed, the main control MPU 1310a clears the big hit flag and terminates the big hit game. If the main control MPU 1310a wins a big win, the main control MPU 1310a outputs an opening signal to the actuator when opening the big winning opening 2005, and sends a closing signal to the actuator when closing the big winning opening 2005. Output.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a controls the gaming state relating to the probability changing state and the time saving state by controlling the probability changing flag, the operation flag, or the number of times of operation.
Specifically, the main control MPU 1310a clears the probability change flag, the operation flag, and the number of operations (set “0”) at the start of the big hit game regardless of the type of big hit game. The number of operations is a counter for counting the number of times that the short-time state is given.

  Further, the main control MPU 1310a sets a probability variation flag when the probability variation state is given after the end of the big hit game, and clears the probability variation flag when the probability variation state is not imparted.

  The main control MPU 1310a determines whether to give the first time-short state, give the second time-short state, or not give the time-short state based on the type of jackpot that has been won after the end of the big-hit game. Then, the main control MPU 1310a sets a value indicating that the first time reduction state is given to the operation flag when the first time reduction state is given, and the second time reduction when the second time reduction state is given. A value indicating that a state is to be applied is set in the operation flag. On the other hand, the main control MPU 1310a clears the operation flag when not giving the short-time state after the end of the big hit game. By controlling in this way, the main control MPU 1310a switches between controlling in the first short time state, controlling in the second short time state, and controlling in the non-short time state. Then, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a time reduction designation command corresponding to the operation flag to the peripheral control board 1510 (peripheral control MPU 1511a). The time reduction designation command is a command indicating whether the first time reduction state is assigned, the second time reduction state is assigned, or the time reduction state is not assigned.

  Further, when the time saving state is given with the predetermined number of times (100 times in the present embodiment) as the upper limit number, the main control MPU 1310a uses a value indicating the number as the predetermined number in the main control MPU 1310a. Set in the storage area of In addition, the main control MPU 1310a subtracts “1” from the number of operations at the start of symbol variation (or at the end of symbol variation), and when the value becomes “0”, the activation flag is cleared and a short time termination command is displayed. It outputs to the control board 1510 (peripheral control MPU 1511 a). At this time, the short end command is a command indicating that the short time state has ended. Further, when the time saving state is provided until the next big hit game occurs, the main control MPU 1310a sets data indicating that.

  On the other hand, the main control MPU 1310a executes normal symbol start processing for starting normal symbol variation when the normal symbol variation is not being performed and the normal hit game is not being performed. In this normal symbol start process, first, it is determined whether the number of common drawing reserve storages stored in the main control MPU 1310 a is larger than “0”. When the number of reserved maps is “1” or more, the number of stored maps is decremented by “1” and stored in a predetermined storage area in the main control MPU 1310a in association with the number of reserved maps. Obtain the value of the normal hit judgment random number. Then, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not the acquired value of the normal hitting determination random number matches the normal hitting determination value stored in the main control MPU 1310a to make a normal hit determination, and the determination result is The corresponding normal symbol is determined as a stop symbol to be stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display unit 1402. That is, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not a normal hit is achieved based on the fact that the normal start condition that can be satisfied after the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003 is satisfied. In the present embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a performs normal hit determination in the low probability state in the non-time-short state and high probability state in the time-short state based on the operation flag. Then, the main control MPU 1310a executes various processes related to the normal symbol, such as controlling the display content of the normal symbol display 1402 so as to start the variable display of the normal symbol.

  When the main control MPU 1310a determines the normal hit, the main control MPU 1310a executes control related to the normal hit game after the end of the normal symbol change. In addition, the main control MPU 1310a operates the movable member 2011a of the normal electric prize winning opening 2011 to the open state in an open mode that differs depending on whether or not the time-short state is given when the symbol variation of the normal symbol starts. Control the solenoid 2107.

  In particular, main control MPU 1310a operates movable member 2011a of ordinary electric winning hole 2011 to the open state according to the first opening pattern illustrated in FIG. The normal solenoid 2107 is controlled. On the other hand, main control MPU 1310a operates to move movable member 2011a of ordinary motor winning hole 2011 to the open state according to the second opening pattern illustrated in FIG. 193 when the second symbol is short when normal symbol variation starts. Control the solenoid 2107 so that In addition, the main control MPU 1310a is selected based on the type (the type of hit symbol) of the stop symbol of the normal symbol variation as shown in FIG. The general-purpose solenoid 2107 is controlled to operate the movable member 2011a of the normal motor winning hole 2011 to the open state in accordance with the 1st to the 3rd open patterns (see FIG. 193).

  In addition, the main control MPU 1310a controls the sorting solenoid 2109 to operate the sorting member 2011b in the same operation mode after the end of the normal symbol change, regardless of the gaming state when the normal symbol change is started.

  As described above, the main control MPU 1310a can move the movable member 2011a and the distribution member 2011b of the normal electric winning award 2011 according to the gaming state (first short time state, second short time state) when the normal symbol fluctuation that is a normal hit starts. Are controlled so as to be switchable between a state in which the game ball easily passes through the first operation opportunity region and a state in which the game ball easily passes through the second operation opportunity region.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as illustrated in FIG. 192, the main control MPU 1310a can select different fluctuation patterns of the normal symbol fluctuation based on whether or not the time saving state is given. Thereby, in the time saving state, the main control MPU 1310 a controls to make the variation time of the normal symbol variation shorter than that in the non-time saving state, and the time required for obtaining one open state of the normal motor winning hole 2011 It can be shortened.

  Next, control contents executed by the peripheral control board 1510 (peripheral control MPU 1511 a) to execute a variable game including various effects will be described below.

  When a predetermined control command is input from the main control MPU 1310a at a predetermined timing, the peripheral control MPU 1511a performs control according to the input control command based on the effect control program.

  More specifically, the peripheral control MPU 1511a displays the game board side effect display device 1600 based on the special symbol type indicated by the command from the main control MPU 1310a, the determined variation pattern, the result information of the jackpot determination, and the like. Decide on a decorative pattern to be displayed and an effect pattern. That is, the decorative design is variably displayed with the effect pattern thus determined, and the decorative design determined when the all symbols stop command is received is controlled to be confirmed and stopped. In addition, the peripheral control MPU 1511a can determine the big hit type when winning a big hit based on the type of the special symbol indicated by the command from the main control MPU 1310 a, the result information of the big hit determination, etc. After the completion, it is possible to specify whether or not the probability variation state, the first time-short state, and the second time-short state are given, and the number of time reductions.

  In addition, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether or not to display a specific notice effect indicating the jackpot expectation level when the decorative design is variably displayed in the determined effect pattern, and a specific notice is determined according to the result of the determination. Control etc. which make a rendition appear can also be performed.

  In addition, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires the opening command, the peripheral control MPU 1511a controls the display content of the game board side effect display device 1600 so as to execute the opening effect corresponding to the command. The peripheral control MPU 1511a, upon acquiring a round command, controls the display content of the game board side effect display device 1600 so as to execute each round effect. In addition, when the peripheral control MPU 1511 a acquires the ending command, the peripheral control MPU 1511 a controls the display content of the game board side effect display device 1600 so as to execute the ending effect.

  In addition, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires the time saving specification command and the time reduction ending command, the peripheral control MPU 1511 sets a value corresponding to the command. Then, when the time reduction state is given, the peripheral control MPU 1511a counts the number of executions of the special symbol after the time reduction state occurs. Then, the peripheral control MPU 1511a adds “1” to the number of times of operation every time the symbol variation is executed until the number of executions of the special symbol after the time-short state occurs becomes “100”, and recognizes the remaining number of times. Control is made to cause the game board side effect display device 1600 to display the enabled display.

  In addition, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether the lamp (LED) provided on the door frame 3 is based on the special symbol type indicated by the command from the main control MPU 1310a, the determined variation pattern, the jackpot determination result information, or the gaming state. , And control to emit a lamp (LED) provided on the game board 5 at a specific timing, and control to output a specific sound (sound effect, music, etc.) from the upper speaker 573 or the speaker 921.

[18-2. Effects on the non-electric start winning opening in the open state]
By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the second starting port (second non-electric starting start winning port) 2004 has a driven member that operates in an open state and a closed state. No limit time is set from the open state to the closed state, and the open state is received until a predetermined number of game balls are accepted (two in this case, but may be one). It has been mentioned above that it is supposed to maintain. In addition, as described above, in the big hit determination (second special symbol) on the second start opening (second non-electric start start winning opening) 2004 side, the first start opening 2002 (first start winning opening 2002a, first non-start winning opening). The total number of prize balls that can be acquired in the big hit game when the big hit is obtained is larger than the big hit judgment (first special symbol) on the electric start winning opening 2002b) side, and the second time short after the big hit ends It is considered that the game conditions are greatly advantageous, such as being highly likely to be controlled by the state (see FIGS. 190 and 194).

  And in such a pachinko machine 1, even if it becomes the first short-time state, basically, it is a big hit on the first start opening 2002 (first start winning opening 2002a, first non-electric start winning opening 2002b) side. Only the determination (the first special symbol) can be performed with high frequency, and even if the jackpot is won, only four rounds of round games are executed. Not only that, but even after the big hit game, it can only be controlled to the second short-time state with a probability of less than 50% (here, 30%). It is clear that it is difficult to get a lot of winning balls.

  On the other hand, in the second time-short state, basically, only the big hit determination (second special symbol) on the second start opening (second non-electric start winning opening) 2004 side can be performed with high frequency. When winning the big hit, the round game for 16 rounds is executed, and after the big hit game, the second short time state occurs with a probability of 100%, and the probability change state occurs with a probability of 80%. .

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, if aiming to obtain a large number of winning balls, it is possible to control to the second time-short state other than aiming to be controlled to the second time-short state It is extremely important for the player to play the game so that the sex can be slightly enhanced.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the second start opening (second non-electric start winning opening) 2004 is selected when transitioning from the second short time state to the normal gaming state (non short time state, non probability change state). It is possible to play so that it is maintained in an open state. In this case, the second starting port (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004 thus opened is made to win when it is in the normal gaming state (non-deterministic state) with a low probability of taking a big hit determination. In the second time saving state, it is possible to win and make the closing state after shifting to the first short time state (probability change state) in which the probability of taking a big hit is high, instead of putting the closed state. It can be said that this is the most effective gaming technique for increasing the possibility of being controlled. That is, in this case, the second start opening (second non-electric start winning opening) despite being in the first short time state (probability change state) that it is basically expected that only the first special symbol side big hit determination can be executed. ) It becomes possible to digest the big hit judgment (second special symbol) on the 2004 side under the condition of high probability, and when winning in the big hit judgment, a round game for 16 rounds is executed, After the big hit game, the second short time state can be generated with a probability of 100% and the probability variation state can be generated with a probability of 80%.

  Accordingly, when the second start port (second non-electric start start winning port) 2004 can be maintained in the open state when shifting from the second short time state to the normal gaming state (non-short time state, non-probability change state). In the normal gaming state such as “Let's work hard until the big hit is obtained again” despite the transition from the gaming state that is most advantageous to the player to the gaming state that is most advantageous to the player. It is expected to be suitably maintained.

  In the presence of such a gaming background, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment has a second start port (second non-electrically driven) when shifting from the second short-time state to the normal gaming state (non-short-time state, non-probability changing state). Opening winning opening 2004) (see FIG. 197) or in the normal gaming state (non-short time state, non-determination state) second starting opening (second non-electric start winning opening) 2004 open Control can be performed to cause an image display (see FIG. 196) related to being in a state to appear.

[18-2-1. First production example]
FIGS. 195 and 196 show the above-mentioned game board side effect display in relation to the second start opening (second non-electric start winning opening) 2004 being open in the normal gaming state (non-short time state, non probability change state) FIG. 10 is an image display that can appear on the device 1600. In FIG. 195 and FIG. 196, the contents of the presentation (including the background image), which are displayed changing every moment at the time of the reach production in the drawings, are indicated by the white “reach presentation” for convenience of explanation. expressing.

  That is, as described above, when the second start port (second non-electric start start winning port) 2004 is in the open state in the normal game state (non-time-short state, non-probability change state), in the normal game state (non-probability change state) The open state is maintained until the big hit gaming state occurs or the first short-time state and the probable change state occur so that the second start opening (second non-electric start start winning opening) 2004 is not performed. It is desirable to endeavor to ensure that the maximum number of winnings is not reached.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, first, a first sensor (not shown) that detects a game ball flowing down the area on the right side of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a, and a second start port ( A second sensor (not shown) for detecting that the second non-electric start start winning opening 2004 is in an open state is provided. Further, the peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires detection signals from the first sensor and the second sensor, determines whether or not there is a game ball flowing down the area on the right side of the center accessory 2500, and determines whether or not there is a second start port (second Whether or not (non-electric start start winning opening) 2004 is in an open state is determined. Note that the first sensor is provided on the upstream side of the ordinary electric winning award port 2011.

  According to such a configuration, in the normal gaming state, when the second start port (second non-electric start winning port) 2004 is in the open state, the situation where the right is hit (the second start port in the open state ( It is possible to recognize whether or not the second non-electric start winning opening 2004) is in a situation where there is a risk that it will be in a closed state, and cause a specific image display to appear when the situation at risk occurs. It becomes possible.

  Further, when the second start port (second non-electric start winning award port) 2004 is in an open state in the normal gaming state, the game is theoretically input to the second start port (second non-electric start start winning port) 2004. Even if it is beneficial for the player to keep the ball from entering the ball, it appears that it is beneficial for the player to hit the ball obviously right from the viewpoint of the view. In addition, the game ball can be made to enter the second starting opening (the second non-electric start winning combination opening) 2004 with a higher entering probability than the first starting winning combination opening 2002a when hitting to the right, compared to the first starting winning combination opening 2002a. Therefore, it is clear that it is more beneficial for the player to actually hit the right if looking only at the current profit without regard to the future profit.

  Nevertheless, instilling a large impression on the player, since a specific image display appears to the effect that a disadvantageous situation has occurred to the player if the player strikes a right strike that he / she recognizes as beneficial. In addition to being able to do the future, at least a profit at the very near end (a profit that allows the game ball to enter the second starting opening (the second non-electric start winning opening) 2004 with a high probability in the normal gaming state) It will be possible to make them aware of securing. As a result, it becomes possible to have a willingness to continue the game until such a large profit can be obtained, and it is possible to favorably maintain the gaming interest in the normal gaming state. It will be expected.

  Although described later, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment is configured to be capable of performing control to emit light toward the second start port (second non-electric start winning port) 2004. However, in the normal gaming state, even if the second start opening (second non-electric start winning opening) 2004 is in the open state, toward the second start opening (second non-electric start winning opening) 2004 The light emission control is not performed, and the presence of the second start port (second non-electric start start winning port) 2004 is made inconspicuous.

  Here, the specific image display promotes the maintenance of a state where the possibility of being controlled to the second short time state can be increased as much as possible, and functions as game information that is extremely important for the player. Therefore, for the specific image display, when it is recognized that the risky situation has occurred in the normal gaming state, the gaming board is irrespective of the presentation situation of the gaming board side effect display device 1600 at that time. It is desirable to control to make it appear in the side effect display device 1600. Therefore, in the game board side effect display device 1600, when the decorative symbol does not change and effects for the big hit are not performed, or when the decorative symbol changes and the effect for the big hit is performed. Even when the above risky situation occurs, a specific image display is made to appear on the game board side effect display device 1600.

  For example, now, the number of reservations on the second special symbol side is "0" in the normal gaming state, and as shown in FIG. 195 (a), the degree of expectation obtained for a big hit in the game board side effect display device 1600 It is assumed that the reach effect (effect according to the big hit judgment on the side of the first special symbol) indicating that it is high is being performed. In such a situation, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment is shown in FIG. 195 (b) even if the player has made a right strike by the player to acquire the second special symbol side suspension. As such, it is indicated that the risk of losing the chance (the risk that the second starting opening (the second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004 is closed) has occurred based on the detection of the right-pressed gaming ball. By performing control to make the image display appear, the player is urged to interrupt the adverse right strike and return to the left strike.

  In this production example, as a specific image display, a friend character and a notation such as “Chance disappearance risk occurred!” May appear, but only one of them may be displayed. In addition, regarding “chance disappearance risk occurrence!”, As a more direct expression, for example, it may be urged to stop right-handed, or it may be urged to strike non-right-handed.

  In addition, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, with regard to the specific image display that appears in this way, part of the reach effect image (the reach effect image) and the display area overlap with each other. By concealing the background image related to the reach effect and displaying it preferentially, the seriousness of the thing (the second starting opening (the second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004 is closed) To make it possible for the player to recognize as soon as possible.

  However, as shown in FIGS. 196 (e) and (g), the peripheral control MPU 1511a avoids the location where the result display of the reach effect (decorative symbol display position when the ornamental symbol is stopped) appears. As such, a specific image display is made to appear. Therefore, even when a specific image display is made to appear when the decorative symbol is stopped, a part of the decorative symbol that has been fixed and stopped is not hidden by the specific image display. .

  In addition, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, after the specific image display indicating that the chance disappearance risk has occurred, the right-handed game ball is moved to the second start opening (second non-electric start start winning opening) ) It is decided to perform control to cause an image display which can be recognized in 2004 and can recognize whether or not it is in a closed state.

  In this production example, after the specific image display shown in FIG. 195 (b) appears, first, the appearance of the enemy character appearing as the specific image display firing a bullet is shown (not shown). Next, as shown in FIG. 195 (c), a state in which the bullet thus fired is directed toward the teammate character (whether the teammate character can avoid the bullet) is displayed. As a result, when two game balls are received by the second starting port (second non-electric starting start winning port) 2004 and the second starting port (second non-electric starting start winning port) 2004 is closed, FIG. As shown in 196 (d), the ally character is hit with a bullet to cause an image display to appear.

  Thereby, while the reach effect (one time of symbol fluctuation according to the first special symbol side big hit judgment) is being performed, two game balls in the second start opening (second non-electric start winning opening) 2004 Is accepted, and the player can recognize that the second start port (second non-electric start start winning port) 2004 is closed (or the possibility is high). In other words, in this case, it is strongly hoped that the current reach performance alone will be a big hit in order to fill the loss, such as the reach production (the first special symbol side depending on the big hit judgment on the first special symbol side) It will be possible to maintain the amusement interest by strengthening their feelings about (variation). In addition, after the reach production has ended with a loss, it will be recognized that the production corresponding to the big special determination on the second special symbol side (the production that shifts to the second short-time state when the big win comes) will appear. Also, while regretting that the second start opening (second non-electric start winning combination opening) 2004 is in a closed state, an expectation for the effect can be generated in advance.

  Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, the image display shown in FIG. 196 (d) is performed within the period in which the reach effect (one symbol variation corresponding to the first special symbol side jackpot determination) is performed. When (an image display in which a bullet hits a ally character falls down) appears, as shown in FIG. 196 (e), the reach effect (one time corresponding to the jackpot determination on the first special symbol side) The same image display (image display in which a bullet hits an ally character and falls down) is maintained without being erased until an effect result (decoration stop mode of decoration symbol) appears. Thus, while regretting that the second starting port (second non-electric starting start winning port) 2004 is closed, the next effect (the effect according to the big special determination on the second special symbol side (advantage side)) The expectation for can be continued.

  In the image display shown in FIG. 196 (d) (the image display in which a bullet hits an ally character and falls over), even if a part of the reach effect image is concealed as in the above specific image display While being displayed preferentially, it is displayed at a position where there is no possibility of concealing a part of the decorative symbol that has been fixedly stopped.

  In addition, the image display shown in FIG. 196 (image display in which a bullet hits an ally character and falls down) is a reach effect (a one-time symbol variation corresponding to the big hit determination on the first special symbol side). After the appearance of the first effect (decision stop mode of decoration symbol) appears, the display on the second special symbol side is digested and the display is maintained after the next effect is started. , You may make it hide within the next production. In addition, when the display is maintained after the next presentation is started, it may interfere with the presentation. Therefore, the position where the image display is displayed is moved to another position, or the size thereof. It is desirable to change.

  On the other hand, although right-handed, the game ball is not accepted in the second start opening (second non-electric start winning opening) 2004 and the open state of the second start opening (second non-electric start winning opening) 2004 is maintained When this is done, the image display shown in FIG. 196 (d) does not appear after the display image shown in FIG. 195 (c) appears. In the peripheral control MPU 1511a, as shown in FIG. 196 (f), when the game ball is not accepted in the second start port (second non-electric start winning entry port) 2004, no display image regarding the result appears We are going to control it.

  That is, if the game ball is not accepted in the second start opening (second non-electric start winning opening) 2004 and the open state of the second start opening (second non-electric start winning opening) 2004 is maintained, the game Concerns for persons completely disappear, and their interest will shift to reach production. Therefore, if it is displayed as a result that the open state of the second start port (second non-electric start start winning port) 2004 is maintained, it is irritated that it is difficult to confirm the reach effect that has changed interest. There are concerns about the decline in the entertainment interests.

  In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, although it is right-handed, a game ball is not received at the second start opening (second non-electric start winning opening) 2004 and the second start opening (second non-electric start) When the open state of the (winning port) 2004 is maintained, as shown in FIGS. 196 (f) and (g), the second start port (second non-electric start start winning) until the reach effect ends. Mouth) Since the result display regarding the fact that the open state of 2004 is maintained does not appear, it is expected to maintain the game entertainment at the time when the reach effect is being performed.

  According to such a first effect example, an effect pattern corresponding to one pattern change corresponding to a big hit determination on the first special symbol side is displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 Sometimes, another effect unrelated to the jackpot determination or symbol variation is suddenly started in the same display area. Therefore, it is expected to maintain the game interest when the big hit is not easily obtained.

  Moreover, the effect that is suddenly started in this way is that two game balls are added to the game risk (second non-electric start start winning opening) 2004 as a specific disadvantageous event generated by the player's intention (operation). Is received and closed or not), and can be generated at an appropriate timing depending on the player's intention (operation). You will be able to create and enjoy the exciting effects that you will have.

  In other words, according to the first production example, the predetermined adverse event (second start port (second non-electric start start winning port) 2004 is performed during the period in which the reach production corresponding to the big hit determination is executed. The reach effect is executed for a disadvantageous concern effect (a specific image display shown in FIG. 195 (b)) suggesting that two game balls will be accepted and closed). It can be executed in a predetermined display area (display area of the game board side effect display device 1600). Therefore, even if it is difficult to maintain the expectation of the game simply because of the reach performance according to the jackpot determination, it is difficult to maintain the game interest. By generating the disadvantage concern presentation) in the same display area, it is possible to attract the player's interest and realize a highly stimulating presentation.

  Moreover, according to the second effect example described above, a predetermined adverse event (two game balls being received in the second start opening (second non-electric start winning opening) 2004 and being in a closed state) occurs. In the case of performing the above, as reach presentation is being performed in a predetermined display area (display area of the game board side effect display device 1600), the above-mentioned display as the result of the above-mentioned disadvantage concern presentation (see FIG. 195 (b)) While the image display (see FIG. 196 (d)) that can recognize that a predetermined adverse event has occurred can appear, when the predetermined adverse event does not occur, a predetermined display area While the reach effect is being executed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the display itself as the result of the adverse concern effect is not made to appear (see FIG. 196 (f)). That is, in this case, even if it is difficult to maintain a sense of expectation only by the effect (here, reach effect) according to the result of the big hit judgment, it is difficult to expect the game to be expected By generating an effect (adverse concern effect) in the same display area, which causes the player to be aware of the opposite disadvantage, it is possible to attract the player's interest and to realize a highly stimulating effect. In addition, the fact that the predetermined adverse event does not occur in the predetermined display area (the display area of the game board-side effect display device 1600) can not be determined in a definite manner, so the above-mentioned predetermined adverse event occurs. It becomes possible to last for a long time the pounding feeling as to when the image display (see FIG. 196 (d)) which makes it possible to recognize the image display (see FIG. 196 (d)) appears. In addition, when it is recognized that a predetermined adverse event does not occur, the player shifts his interest to the above-mentioned reach production, but it is not easy to see the reach production that the interest shifted in this way as a result of the above-mentioned disadvantage concern production. It will also be avoided that you do.

  It should be noted that the effects shown in FIGS. 195 and 196 may be changed and executed as follows.

  For example, in the above example of presentation, when the second start opening (the second non-electric start winning combination) 2004 is closed, the display image shown in FIG. 196 (d) is made to appear, but instead First, based on the fact that the first gaming ball has been received in the second starting opening (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004, the margin up to the closing upper limit (two) is lost and the risk increases. For example, an image display in which a bullet hits a teammate character and appears. Then, after the second gaming ball is received in the second starting opening (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004, the closing upper limit (two) is reached and the second starting opening (second If the non-electric start winning combination opening 2004 is in a closed state, control may be performed to cause an image display in which the ally character falls down.

  According to such a configuration, since it becomes possible to express the progress of the degree of risk until the second start opening (second non-electric start winning combination opening) 2004 is closed, reach effect is performed. The image display at the time of risk can be realized as an effect with a progress that is not inferior to the contents of the reach effect.

  Also in this case, when the gaming ball is not accepted in the second start opening (second non-electric start winning combination opening) 2004, it is desirable to make a display image not appear at all regarding the result.

  On the other hand, when only the first game ball is received in the second start opening (second non-electric start start winning opening) 2004, the second start opening (second non-electric start start winning opening) 2004 is in an open state. Because it is in a state where the margin up to the closure upper limit (2 pieces) is lost and the risk is increasing, at least the reach production (the design for one time according to the big hit judgment on the first special symbol side) It is desirable to continuously display the image displayed by the teammate character until the end of the fluctuation). Thereby, while recognizing that the risk is increasing, it is possible to continue expectation that the next performance is based on the jackpot determination on the second special symbol side.

  In addition, the image display (image display indicating that the risk has increased) that the ally character crawls is also maintained after the next production is started by digestion of the hold on the second special symbol side, You may make it hide in the next production. In addition, when the display is maintained after the next presentation is started, it is desirable to move the position where the image display is displayed to another position or change the size thereof.

  In addition, when adopting the rendering method that expresses the progress of the degree of risk in this way, the game board is based on the fact that the first gaming ball is accepted in the second starting opening (the second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004 The game display side effect is displayed on the basis of the fact that the second game ball is accepted in the second start port (second non-electric start winning opening) 2004 while displaying the image display in which the ally character turns in the side effect display device 1600. It is possible to maintain the display of the image display displayed by the ally character on the display device 1600 without deleting it, and display another image display in which the ally character falls down.

  According to such a configuration, even if the player misses the progress of the degree of risk until two game balls are received at the second start opening (second non-electric start start winning opening) 2004. The progress of the degree of risk can be grasped from the final display mode, and as a result, two game balls are received at the second start opening (second non-electric start start winning opening) 2004 and are closed. You will be able to understand what happened.

  In the case where the progress of the risk degree is expressed by a plurality of image displays (displayed image display, image display falling down) in this way, the timing for erasing the image display appearing separately may be the same or different. It may be, but it is possible to maintain it without erasing within a symbol variation in which at least a plurality of image displays have appeared, symbol variation on the side advantageous to the player in the next symbol variation (second special symbol Will be able to sustain the expectation of being Also, when the second starting opening (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004 is closed (when two game balls are accepted), the symbol variation on the side advantageous to the player as compensation (second In consideration of the fact that two special symbols are executed twice in a row, it is possible to hide image displays that appear separately (rounding image display, falling image display) within different symbol variations 2 It is more desirable to maintain the expectation that advantageous symbol variation will take place over time.

  However, in this case, the same teammate character is displayed in one display screen in the two operation states (seen, falling down), and a sense of incongruity remains. The display method may be changed according to the display method. For example, based on the fact that the first game ball is received at the second start opening (second non-electric start start winning opening) 2004, the first blood stain image is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, The second blood-stain image is further displayed without erasing the first blood-stain image on the basis of the second game ball being received at the second start-up port (second non-electric start start winning port) 2004. In this way, it is possible to express how the damage received by the specific character gradually increases.

  In addition, the important point in the production examples shown in FIGS. 195 and 196 is that “the second start port (second non-electric start) in the open state even when the reach production is being performed. (Award opening) When a risk that the 2004 will be closed occurs, a specific image display is made to appear (FIG. 195 (b)) ”and“ the number required to be closed (two here) ” Image display as to whether the game ball is received at the second start opening (second non-electric start start winning opening) 2004 (FIGS. 195 (d) and 195 (f)) ” The image display shown in () is not necessarily required and may be omitted. That is, in this case, after the image display shown in FIG. 195 (b) appears, the image display shown in either FIG. 195 (d) or FIG. 195 (f) appears.

  Further, among the production examples shown in FIG. 195 and FIG. 196, in particular, when there is a risk that the second start port (second non-electric start start winning port) 2004 in the open state will be closed. When the image display appears (FIG. 195 (b)), it is desirable to output a predetermined sound effect or music related thereto. Also, at this time, after changing the predetermined sound effects and music generated with the reach production to a lower volume, the predetermined sound effects and music related to the specific image display are output at a higher volume. It is more desirable to do so.

  Also, if a specific image display is made to appear only when there is a risk that the second start port (the second non-electric start winning port) 2004 in the open state will be in the closed state, a specific image It is feared that a player who has not seen the display may have the risk of losing once by right-handling. In particular, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, a situation in which it seems that it is useful for the player to clearly hit the right from the viewpoint (the second start opening (second non-electric start winning opening in the normal gaming state) These concerns are all the more so since 2004 is in an open state). Therefore, at least for the specific image display shown in FIG. 195 (b), it should be made to appear regardless of whether or not the second starting opening (second non-motorized starting winning opening) 2004 is in the open state. Desirably, in this case, the second sensor may not necessarily be present.

  Further, in the above effect example, a specific display image is displayed at a position overlapping with the reach effect image, but the specific display image may be displayed at a position not overlapping with the reach effect image.

[18-2-1-1. When the first production example spans multiple variations]
As described above, since the first effect example is generated at an appropriate timing according to the player's intention (operation), depending on the timing when the effect is started, according to the big hit determination on the first special symbol side. It will be displayed over multiple symbol variations.

  However, in this case, if the decision stop of the decorative symbol appearing in each symbol variation is sometimes made difficult to be recognized by such an effect unrelated to the big hit judgment, it is not possible to enjoy the effect of the big hit or not The desire to continue playing may be lost. Therefore, the specific image display shown in FIG. 195 (b), the image display shown in FIGS. 196 (d) and (e) (the image display in which a bullet hits the teammate character, and the It is desirable that the display of each image shown in the modified example (such as the image display to be done) is displayed only at a location that does not overlap with the display position of the decorative symbol when the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped.

  According to such a configuration, when a big hit is not easily obtained, for example, across two symbol variations (big hit determination), it is an effect unrelated to any of those symbol variations (big hit determination) It will also be possible for the player to be able to create and enjoy the exciting effects affecting the game value by the player's own intention.

  In addition, when the first performance example is executed across two symbol variations (big hit determination), the specific image display shown in FIG. 195 (b) appears within the first symbol variation (big hit determination). On the other hand, the image display shown in FIG. 195 (d) (image display in which a bullet hits an ally character and falls down, and each image display shown in the above-described modified example related to this (displayed image) Etc.)) will appear within the second symbol variation (big hit determination).

  In this respect, the image display shown in FIG. 196 (d) (the image display in which the bullet hits the teammate character and falls down, and the respective image displays (the image display etc) shown in the above-mentioned modified example related thereto) For the symbol display (in this case, the second symbol variation) appeared at least until the end of the symbol variation (or the second symbol variation) continues (or after the next symbol variation is started, within the next symbol variation). It is a big hit judgment of the side (the second special symbol side) that the next symbol variation on which the symbol display that this image display appeared finished is to be displayed continuously without erasing). As described above, it is desirable to maintain the expectation of this. That is, in this case, even if the time from the appearance of the specific image display shown in FIG. 195 (b) to the appearance of the image display shown in FIG. 196 (d) is the same, FIG. 196 (d) The timing at which the image display shown in appears is “within the symbol variation that has fluctuated when the specific image display shown in FIG. 195 (b) appears” or “the symbol variation has ended and the next Since the time required for the image display shown in FIG. 196 (d) to be erased varies greatly depending on whether the symbol variation has been started or not, there is a difference in content even in the same effect. It becomes possible to appear as if it is a production, and it is expected that maintenance of the game entertainment will be maintained.

  In particular, with the image display shown in FIG. 196 (d), it can be grasped that two game balls have been received in the second starting opening (second non-electric start winning opening) 2004 and have become closed. Function as a result display, but the second start opening (the second non-motorized state (the second non-motorized case) requires a longer time than the first pattern change, when the second change in the appearance of the result display appears. The result display is more than the time when the effect (such as the effect shown in FIG. 195 (b)) of whether or not the two game balls are received in the start winning prize opening 2004 and is in a closed state is displayed The appearing time is longer. That is, in this case, the side which is expected to be a big hit by the second pattern fluctuation and the next pattern fluctuation (the third pattern fluctuation) is advantageous even if the second pattern fluctuation does not result in the big hit It becomes possible to taste for a long time the sense of expectation for being based on the big hit judgment of the second special symbol side), and it is expected that the maintenance of the game interest will be achieved.

  According to such a configuration, an effect on whether or not a predetermined effect result (image display shown in FIG. 196 (d)) unrelated to the effect (reach effect) according to the big hit determination appears is for one time. In the case where the result display (image display shown in FIG. 196 (d)) is executed while the symbol variation is performed, the result is displayed while the symbol variation is performed once (FIG. 196). In these two cases, the control mode (FIG. 196 (d)) for displaying a predetermined effect result is not to be missed. The time during which the displayed image display is maintained is made different.

  That is, in this case, by directing attention to effects (see FIG. 195 (b)) to be advanced in a procedure completely different from the effects (reach effects) corresponding to the big hit determination, only with a certain control procedure so far It is possible that the player's eyes can be diverted only for a while from the "representation according to the big hit determination" which has been feared of being renounced, and the above-mentioned certain control procedure for the player. You will be able to instill a sense that the production will proceed in a different procedure. Therefore, when returning to a situation in which attention to the effect (reach effect) according to the big hit judgment is returned again, the concern about the mannerism to the effect is eliminated, and it is expected to maintain the game interest.

  It should be noted that the time during which the image display shown in FIG. 196 (d) is maintained appears until the symbol variation where the image display appears is completed or the next symbol variation after the symbol variation is completed. As described above, it is desirable to be within the period. In other words, the image display shown in FIG. 196 (d) is that a predetermined disadvantageous event (second starting port (second non-electric starting start winning port) 2004 receives two game balls and enters a closed state. ) Can be recognized, but the event that is advantageous to the player (the jackpot determination on the side advantageous to the player (the jackpot determination on the second special symbol side) is Because it is an image with a special property that makes it possible to recognize that the occurrence of a change in the design has occurred), the control mode related to the production related to the image display becomes characteristic. It can be said that

[18-2-2. Second production example]
FIG. 197 is an image display that may appear on the game board side effect display device 1600 when in the second short time state and the uncertain change state.

  In other words, it is assumed that the 100th symbol variation has been started after the control has been performed in the second short time state and the uncertain variation state. Then, in the game board side effect display device 1600, as shown in FIG. 197 (a), the decorative symbols are variably displayed in three symbol rows based on the determination result of the big hit.

  However, as described above, the second short-time state and non-probability change state is terminated when the 100th symbol change is stopped by the loss change, and thereafter, the normal gaming state (non-short-time state and non-non-change state). A positive change state will occur (see FIGS. 190 and 194). Also, as described above, after the normal gaming state (non-short-time state and non-probability change state) has occurred, unlike the case where it is controlled to the second short-time state, basically the second in the closed state. It can not be expected that the starting opening (the second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004 is operated to the open state.

  Therefore, it is possible to definitely determine that the second short-time state and the non-probability change state will end, such as when the 100th symbol change after the control to the second short-time state and the non-probability change state is started with a loss variation. In this case, the second start port (second non-electric start start winning port) 2004 is presented to urge the user to hold the open state in the remaining period until the second short-time state and the uncertain change state end. It is desirable to do so.

  In the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 197 (b), when the 100th symbol variation after being controlled to the second short time state and the non-probability variation state is performed by the loss variation, the loss control is performed. Within the period of change, a special character GM that imitates a gentleman appears, judging that there is a special gaming situation in which a new launch of a game ball can be disadvantageous to the player, It ’s a good idea to leave it open, ”he says.

  In other words, in the second short-time state, the player will continue to make a right-hand hit, but as long as such a right-hand hit continues, the game ball will be intermittently received at the normal electric winning award 2011. As a result, the game ball is intermittently received by the second start opening (second non-electric start winning opening) 2004, and the second start opening (second non-electric start winning opening) 2004 is opened and closed. Repeat the state and the state is not stable. Therefore, in order to shift to the normal gaming state while the second starting port (second non-electric starting start winning port) 2004 is in an open state, first, the player must first stop the right handing, It is desirable to first check whether the second start port (second non-electric start start winning port) 2004 is in an open state or a closed state.

  Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, the second start opening (second non-electric start winning opening) 2004 is opened by causing the specific character GM imitating a gentleman to appear in the period of the 100th lost fluctuation. Whether or not it is in the state, the player is given an opportunity (opportunity to review the gaming situation) to once stop firing the gaming ball.

  With regard to the specific character GM made to appear in this way, regardless of whether the firing of the gaming ball has been temporarily stopped or whether the second starting opening (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004 has become open, the loss It is desirable to continuously display the game board side effect display device 1600 until the fluctuation is at least stopped. That is, in this case, it can be easily recognized that the second start port (the second non-electric start winning port) 2004 should be in the open state.

  However, when such a specific character GM is made to appear over a plurality of times of pattern variation, it is preferable to perform processing such as changing the position where the specific character GM is displayed, as shown in FIG. 197. .

  In the case where the specific character GM is made to appear over a plurality of times of symbol variation, for example, while the symbol variation is being performed for the 99th time after being controlled to the second time short state and the non-probability state, It is a case where it is determined in advance that a jackpot has not been won by a certain 100th symbol fluctuation (big hit judgment). Even in such a case, for example, it is possible to definitely determine that the second short time state and the non-probability state end when the 100th symbol variation (big hit determination) is stopped. It is determined that a new launch of the game ball is in a special game situation that may be disadvantageous to the player while the second symbol change is being made, and the specific character GM is made to appear (see FIG. 197 (b)) It is possible to display the specific character GM at the position shown in FIG. 197 (c) when the 100th symbol variation is performed.

  In addition, although it is a progression pattern of the game which does not exist in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, temporarily, when winning a big hit (second special symbol) in the second short time state, according to the symbol type (according to symbol type) If it is determined that there is a game progression pattern of transitioning to the non-short time state, the second short time state and the non-probability state end when it is determined that the jackpot (second special symbol) is won in the second time short state. Risk (though not 100%) will occur. Therefore, even in such a case, it is determined that a new launch of the game ball is in a special game situation that may be disadvantageous to the player during the period until the jackpot symbol appears, and the specific character GM is made to appear. Whether or not the second start opening (the second non-electric start winning opening) 2004 is in the open state, to give the player an opportunity (opportunity to review the game situation) to temporarily stop the firing of the game ball It is desirable to do.

  Also, in such a case, for example, when it is determined in advance that the jackpot determination (second special symbol) in the hold state includes what can be a jackpot, at that time, Because it is possible to deterministically determine that there is a risk that the second short-time state will end and a non-time-short state will occur (a big hit game), for example, a big hit determination that gives a big hit (second special symbol) Is determined to be in a special game situation in which a new launch of a game ball that is still on hold can be disadvantageous to the player, and a specific character GM appears (see FIG. 197 (b)), and the next symbol variation Thereafter, the specific character GM can be displayed at the position shown in FIG. 197 (c).

  Note that the effect example shown in FIG. 197 may be changed and executed as follows.

  For example, in the above production example, when it is determined that an event (the stop of the 100th symbol variation, the big hit game) occurs that there is a risk that the second time-short state ends and the non-time-short state occurs. (Second non-electric start start winning opening) The specific character GM is made to appear regardless of whether the 2004 is in the closed state or the open state. Instead, the second start opening (second non-start start winning opening) The specific character GM may be made to appear only when the electrically-driven start winning opening 2004 is in the open state.

  For the specific character GM, when the second start port (second non-electric start start winning port) 2004 is in the open state and when it is in the closed state (for example, blue when closed, closed In the state, red) may be made different. According to such a configuration, in addition to being able to give the player the opportunity to temporarily stop the launch of the game ball (the opportunity to review the game situation), in addition to the current game situation (the situation to be right-handed again) Can be displayed).

  Further, in the above-mentioned effect example, the specific character GM is continuously displayed on the game board-side effect display device 1600 until an event (the 100th stop of symbol variation, a big hit game) which has been decidedly determined occurs. . However, since such a specific character GM can be a hindrance to the display effect, instead of the effect of displaying the specific character GM, an effect of outputting a specific sound for a relatively short time is performed. It is also good. Even with such an effect, it is possible to give the player an opportunity to temporarily stop the launch of the game ball (an opportunity to review the game situation).

  Further, in the above example, it is determined that the specific character GM is made to appear when it is determined that a special game situation where a new launch of the game ball is likely to be disadvantageous to the player is generated. The specific character GM may not necessarily appear even if it is determined that the occurrence of. That is, the situation where such a specific character GM appears means that some event having a risk of giving a disadvantage to the player occurs, such as the start of the 100th symbol variation due to the losing variation. However, there are concerns that some players may feel that they have been deprived of the enjoyment of the result of the jackpot determination. Therefore, even if it is determined that a special game situation occurs, it is expected that such a concern is suppressed if the specific character GM is not necessarily displayed.

  Furthermore, the specific character GM may be realized as a gentleman effect that can function like a butler suited to the character of each player. That is, a setting screen is displayed on which the player can vary the probability of causing the specific character GM to appear when it is determined that the special game situation should occur, using a predetermined operation means, and through this setting screen If the control for causing the specific character GM to appear with the set probability is performed, the game situation can be reviewed at a frequency suitable for each player's personality, and it is preferable to maintain the gaming interest. Will be able to Moreover, if the display mode (color, clothes, gender), etc. of the specific character GM can be changed on the setting screen, it will be more troublesome for each player as a butler suited to the personality of each player. You will be able to realize a production that will show you.

[18-2-3. Third production example]
According to the second effect example, since the trigger to review the game situation is given prior to the second time reduction state being ended by the display of the specific character GM, the second time reduction state The above second start (while the driven member of the second start port (the second non-electric start winning port) 2004 is operated to the open state with high frequency if controlled to the right) It is possible to realize this because there is enough time to play a game adjusted to hold the mouth (the second non-electric start winning opening) 2004 in the open state.

  However, despite the fact that such a specific character GM is displayed, the second starting port (the second non-electric starting winning entry port) 2004 is not held in the open state, or the gaming situation is achieved by the above-mentioned Yugentman function. If right-handed driving is continued without giving a trigger for reviewing, the second time saving state ends and the second starting port (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004 remains closed. A situation may occur in which a transition is made to a gaming state (non-time-short state).

  When such a situation occurs, the gaming ball is not newly accepted in the second starting opening (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004 basically. However, if the normal symbol variation started immediately before the end of the second time saving state is executed in the normal gaming state and the normal hitting symbol is stopped in the normal gaming state, the normal electric winning hole 2011 The movable member 2011a operates in the opening pattern (second opening pattern in FIG. 193) adopted in the second short time state despite being in the normal gaming state. At this time, if the game ball is made to enter the normal electric winning opening 2011 thus opened (right-handed), the second start port (second non-stop) is set despite the normal game state. It is possible to open the electric start winning award 2004). Or, in the normal gaming state, even when the movable member 2011a of the ordinary electric winning opening 2011 operates in the first opening pattern or the third opening pattern of FIG. 193, the movable member 2011a of the ordinary electric winning opening 2011 is opened. When entering the ball while in the state, and the game ball that has entered is accelerated or decelerated by colliding with another game ball, etc., and as a result, the time until it reaches the sorting member 2011b is different from the expected As a very rare event, it is possible for the gaming ball to pass through the second passage 2011e and open the second starting opening (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004.

  Therefore, if the game is performed with the second starting port (second non-electric starting start winning port) 2004 being opened as the highest priority, the movable member 2011a of the ordinary electric winning port 2011 is used even in the normal gaming state. When it moves to the open state, it is required to hit the right and aim at entering the ball into the ordinary electric winning hole 2011. However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, both the normal electric winning opening 2011 and the second starting opening (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004 are provided on the path through which the game ball with the right strike flows down. It is done. That is, in this case, when the movable member 2011a of the normal motorized winning opening 2011 operates to the open state, temporarily three game balls are continuously hit to the right (at intervals of 0.6 seconds), and the first of them is Even if the game ball of is normally accepted by the motorized winning opening 2011 and the second starting opening (second non-motorized starting winning opening) 2004 can be opened, the second and third gaming balls are If the second start port (second non-electric start winning award port) 2004 thus opened is received, the upper limit of closure (two) is reached, and the second start port (second non-electric start start award port) is reached. It may happen that 2004 will soon return to the closed state.

  Such a situation may occur because in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the second game ball among the three game balls fired continuously is the second start port ( Prior to reaching the second non-electric start winning opening 2004), the first game ball received in the ordinary electric winning opening 2011 reaches the second operation opportunity area (or the first operation opportunity area). This is because the structure that can be used (the length of the flow-down path, the shape of the flow-down path (collision surface, friction surface, etc.) is adopted. Incidentally, by adopting such a structure, in the short-time state (first short-time state, second short-time state), three game balls that are continuously right-handed are replaced with the ordinary electric winning award 2011 or the first It becomes possible to enter the 1 non-electric start winning opening 2002b or the second start opening (second non-electric start winning opening) 2004, respectively, and smooth game progress can be realized. .

  Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, first, when the normal hit is stopped in the normal gaming state, the follower member of the second start port (second non-electric start winning entry) 2004 in the closed state is opened. It is monitored whether the minimum number of game balls required for operating to the state have been hit to the right. In this case, since the minimum number of pieces required to operate the driven member of the second start port (second non-electric start winning port) 2004 in the closed state to the open state is one, the ordinary electric motor In order to operate the driven member of the second start opening (second non-motorized start winning opening) 2004 which is in the closed state when there is detection by the first sensor provided on the upstream side of the winning opening 2011, to the open state It is determined that the minimum required number of game balls have been hit to the right.

  In this respect, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, when the detection by the first sensor is performed in this way, it is possible to wait for the time required for the game ball targeted for the detection to reach the ordinary electric winning hole 2011 without waiting. At the timing before, it is made to start the production which urges that the right strike should be interrupted. That is, in this case, there is a possibility that the game ball detected by the first sensor will not be accepted by the ordinary electric winning award 2011, but this is due to the following concerns. The occurrence of a situation in which the second start port (second non-electric start start winning port) 2004 is opened and immediately returned to the closed state is suppressed.

  That is, without waiting for the passage of time required for the game ball to be detected by the first sensor to reach the normal motorized winning opening 2011, the user is urged to interrupt the right hitting at a timing before this Even when the effect is performed, by the time the player interrupts the right hitting according to the effect, the launch of the second game ball (the launch 0.6 seconds after the launch of the first game ball) is already performed. It may have been completed. Therefore, in order to start the effect of prompting the right-handed player to be interrupted after confirming that the game ball has been received in the ordinary electric winning award 2011, the second and third game balls are launched. There is a concern that even if the second start port (second non-electric start winning award port) 2004 is opened, there may still be a situation in which the state immediately returns to the closed state. Be done.

  According to such a third effect example, for example, the normal symbol variation started immediately before the end of the second time-short state is executed in such a manner as to straddle the normal gaming state and hit normally in the normal gaming state When the symbol is stopped, when the right hitting is performed in the normal gaming state and the first gaming ball is detected by the first sensor, an effect appears to urge that the right hitting should be interrupted. The first game ball to be detected may be accepted by the ordinary electric winning hole 2011 opened in the opening pattern (second opening pattern in FIG. 193) adopted in the second short time state. Is sufficient, and when the reception is made, the driven member of the second start port (second non-motorized start winning port) 2004 operates to the open state. And in this case, if it is possible to end the right strike by stopping the game ball up to 2 at most (the launch after 0.6 seconds), the second starting opening (the second non-opening state (the second non There is no possibility that the electric start winning opening 2004) immediately returns to the closed state, and this can be maintained in the open state. In addition, such an effect can be expected to be achieved even when the normal hit is stopped due to the normal symbol change started in the normal gaming state (the above-mentioned rare event may occur) For).

  In the above production example, when the normal winning symbol is stopped in the normal gaming state, the driven member of the second starting port (second non-electric starting start winning port) 2004 in the closed state is moved to the open state. The minimum required number of game balls is now monitored. However, it is possible to always monitor regardless of whether or not the normal winning symbol is stopped in the normal gaming state, or when it is monitored that the minimum number of game balls are hit right. , You may make it always start the production which urges that a right-handed strike should be interrupted.

  Further, in the first to third opening patterns illustrated in FIG. 193, when the movable member 2011a of the ordinary electric winning opening 2011 operates, the opening that makes it easy for the game ball to actually enter the ordinary electric winning opening 2011. The number of states is one. However, the opening pattern is merely an example, and for example, a plurality of opening states may be set. In such a case, the performance when it is monitored that the minimum number of game balls required for acceptance into the ordinary electric winning award 2011 has been hit to the right is to be ended only in a predetermined time. It is desirable to return to the state in which the effect that prompts the user to stop hitting does not appear. According to such a configuration, since intermittent right-handed driving is promoted, even if the second start port (second non-electric start winning port) 2004 is opened, it immediately returns to the closed state. It is possible to acquire the opportunity to open the second start port (second non-electric start start winning port) 2004 a plurality of times while suppressing the occurrence of the situation.

  In addition, as an effect when it is monitored that the minimum number of game balls required for acceptance into the ordinary electric winning award 2011 has been hit right, an image displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, It can be realized by outputting a specific warning sound. Further, as the image display, in addition to directly displaying that the right-handed driving should be interrupted, the steering wheel operation itself may be displayed as an indication that it should be interrupted, or a display for prompting a non-right-handed driving. .

  In addition, since there is a concern that the appearance condition overlaps with the first effect example described above, for the first effect example and the third effect example, one of them is selected. It is desirable not to adopt one of the production examples in the control program.

[18-2-4. Other productions]
By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 194, the transition of the gaming state is complicated, and the receiving openings to be targeted for entering the ball in each gaming state are also different. In particular, there is a concern that a player with little game experience or a person who is not used to complicated games (such as a beginner or an elderly person) can not recognize how the game should be played, thereby reducing the interest in playing the game.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, light emitters (not shown) such as LEDs are respectively provided in the vicinity of the first non-electric start winning opening 2002b and the second starting opening (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004. It is arranged. And in peripheral control MPU 1511a, the reception side of the side which should aim at basically entering the game ball into those respective light emitting devices (the first non-electric start winning opening 2002b, the second starting opening The second non-electric start winning combination opening 2004 is controlled so as to emit light so that the player is not confused about how to proceed with the game.

  However, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment employs a light emission mode that can add interest to the game or maintain an advantageous state for the player even for such light emission control. And

  For example, as shown in FIG. 198 (a), in the second short time state, the driven member of the first non-electric start winning port 2002b is in the closed state, and the second start port (second non-electric start winning port) When the driven member 2004 is in the open state, the peripheral control MPU 1511a has a second start port (first non-start start port 2002b) and a second start port (second non-electric start start port 2004). Control can be performed to emit light only toward the 2 non-electric start winning award 2004).

  Then, the second start port (second non-electric start start winning port 2004) opened in the second short time state is kept in the open state while the second start port is in the open state. When the state is shifted to (non-time-short state), as shown in FIG. 198 (b), in the normal gaming state, the driven member of the first non-electric start winning opening 2002b is in a closed state, In addition, a situation occurs in which the driven member of the second start port (second non-electric start start winning port) 2004 is in an open state. In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, when the situation shown in FIG. 198 (b) occurs, any of the first non-electric start winning opening 2002b and the second start opening (second non-electric start winning opening) 2004) It is possible to control not to emit light even if

  Then, the normal game state (non time short) with the second start port (second non-electric start winning port 2004) in the open state in such a normal game state (non-short time state) maintaining the open state. 198 (c), the driven member of the first non-electric start winning opening 2002b is closed in the first short state, as shown in FIG. 198 (c). And there is a situation where the driven member of the second starting port (second non-electric starting start winning port) 2004 is in the open state. In this respect, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, when the situation shown in FIG. 198 (c) occurs, of the first non-electric start winning opening 2002b and the second starting opening (second non-electric starting winning opening 2004)) , Can be controlled to emit light only toward the first non-electric start winning opening 2002b

  According to such a configuration, first, in the situation shown in FIG. 198 (a), the second start port (second non-motor start start port) 2004 in the light emitting state should be brought into an advantageous state to enter the ball. Certain things can be easily recognized, and it will be expected to maintain the game interest. In the situation shown in FIG. 198 (a), if the right-handed operation is continued after the second starting port (second non-electric starting start winning port) 2004) is closed, the state immediately returns to the open state. Since it is expected that the light emission state for the second start port (second non-electric start winning opening 2004) may be maintained as long as it is controlled to the second short time state.

  On the other hand, when the situation shown in FIG. 198 (a) is shifted to the situation shown in FIG. 198 (b), the open state of the second start opening (second non-electric start winning prize opening 2004) is maintained. However, no light is emitted toward either the first non-electric start winning opening 2002b or the second start opening (second non-electric start winning opening 2004).

  That is, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the second start port (second non-electric start start winning port) 2004 is in the open state in the normal gaming state (non-time-short state), the second start It is useful for the player to keep the game ball in the open state without entering the game ball into the mouth (the second non-electric start winning combination opening) 2004. Therefore, according to such a configuration, in the normal gaming state, the second start port (second non-electric start start winning port) 2004 is in an open state, and it seems that it is more beneficial to make a right turn for the sake of appearance. Even if it is, it can be easily recognized that it is not in the right-handed state, and the second starting port (second non-electric starting start winning port) 2004 is opened until the normal gaming state (non-time-saving state) is finished. It will be possible to urge to maintain in the state.

  According to such a configuration, it is not noticeable that the second starting port (second non-electric starting start winning port) 2004 is in an open state, and the game is advanced by left-handed in such a situation. Become. In this regard, in the normal gaming state (non-time-short state, non-probability change state), since it usually takes a relatively long time before the big hit is obtained again, it is an effect whether or not the big hit is made in the normal gaming state. While being depressed, it becomes possible to expect to gradually forget that the second start port (second non-electric start start winning port) 2004 that is not conspicuous is open.

  Then, when it is forgotten that the second start opening (second non-electric start winning opening) 2004 is in the open state, the state shown in FIG. 198 (b) is shifted to the state shown in FIG. 198 (c) Then, even though it has returned to the same time state as shown in FIG. 198 (a state in which the frequency of acceptance to the ordinary electric winning hole 2011 becomes high) and the definite change state (a state in which the big hit probability is high), Light is emitted only toward the first non-electric start winning opening 2002b in the closed state, not the second starting opening (second non-electric start winning opening) 2004 in the open state.

  Here, the game ball is entered into the second start opening (second non-electric start winning combination opening) 2004 in the open state only when controlled to the state (first time short state) shown in FIG. 198 (c). It is extremely useful to the player if it is made (the second special symbol despite being controlled to a definite change state in which it is difficult to cause the game ball to enter the second start opening (the second non-electric start winning opening) 2004) As described above, it is the timing at which it is possible to enjoy the same gaming value as when in the most advantageous state by performing the jackpot determination of. And as described above, the first non-electric start winning opening 2002b, the second starting opening (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004, the normal electric winning opening 2011, and the gate section 2003 are all right-handed games It is provided on the same path where the ball flows down.

  That is, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, it is extremely useful for the player to enter the game ball into the second start opening (second non-electric start winning opening) 2004 in the open state. Regardless, not the second starting port in the open state (the second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004, but only the first non-electric starting winning port 2002b in the closing state is lighted to emit light, and the first non-electric starting winning port A right-hand strike aiming at 2002b is encouraged. According to such a configuration, the second start opening (second non-electric start winning opening) is left without the player noticing that the second start opening (second non-electric start winning opening) 2004 is in the open state. ) Since the game ball will flow down toward 2004, and it will be possible to generate a very useful event for the player (a big hit judgment on the second special symbol side despite the short time condition) Such a sense of surprise makes it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the right-handed game ball first reaches the ordinary electric winning opening 2011, and then when it is not received at the ordinary electric winning opening 2011, the second starting opening ( 2nd non-electric start winning award) 2004 is reached, and then when the second start opening (second non-electric start winning award) 2004 is not received, the first non-electric start winning award 2002b is reached, Then, when it is not accepted by the first non-electric start winning opening 2002b, the gate portion 2003 is reached.

  Therefore, when the right hitting aiming at the first non-electric start winning opening 2002b in the closed state is started, the game ball is not accepted by the gate unit 2003 and the normal electric winning opening 2011 remains unopened, the second Since the gaming ball can be received in the starting opening (second non-electric start winning combination opening) 2004, it is possible to more suitably give a feeling of surprise. In the situation shown in FIG. 198 (c), as long as the second start port (second non-electric start start winning port) 2004) is closed, the first non-stop time is controlled. A light emission state with respect to the motorized start winning opening 2002b may be maintained. For example, in the first short-time state, even if a rare event that the second start port (second non-electric start start winning port) 2004 is once closed and then opened again occurs, Of the first non-electric start winning port 2002b and the second start port (second non-electric start winning port) 2004, the second start port is controlled so as to emit light only toward the first non-electric start winning port 2002b. If the second non-electric start winning opening 2004 is maintained in the light-off state, such a feeling of surprise can be given again. However, after the second start port (second non-electric start start winning port) 2004 is opened again, when the second short time state occurs, the first non-electric start start port 2002b and the second start port (second The non-electric start start prize) 2004 and the second start opening (second non-electric start start prize opening) 2004 are controlled so as to emit light only to the game progress procedure. It is desirable to prevent people from getting confused.

  On the other hand, for example, as shown in FIG. 199 (a), in the normal gaming state, the driven member of the first non-electric start winning opening 2002b and the driven member of the second starting opening (second non-electric start winning opening) 2004 When none of them is in the open state, the peripheral control MPU 1511a does not emit light toward either of the first non-electric start winning opening 2002b and the second starting opening (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004. Control.

  That is, in the situation shown in FIG. 199 (a), it is beneficial for the player to keep the second starting opening (second non-motorized starting winning opening) 2004 in the open state, but the first non It is not necessary to maintain the open state for the electric start winning opening 2002b, but rather, it can be said that it is more useful to play a game so that the player can enter with a high acceptance probability when in the normal gaming state. However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the first non-electric start winning opening 2002b is a gaming ball that was not accepted by the second starting opening (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004. It is provided at the receiving position. Therefore, when aiming at the first non-electric start winning opening 2002b, the gaming ball is not the first non-electric starting winning opening 2002b but the second starting opening (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004 There is a concern that the second start port (second non-electric start winning port) 2004 may be closed. Then, in the normal gaming state, the gaming value which is lost when the second start opening (second non-electric start winning opening) 2004 in the open state is closed is the first non-electric start winning in the open state. Since the game value is extremely larger than the game value obtained when the player enters the mouth 2002b with a high acceptance probability, it is desirable to prevent such a risky game progression from being performed.

  In this respect, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, in the situation shown in FIG. Since the light is not emitted in any direction and the left-handed rather than the right-handed is urged, the open state of the second starting port (second non-electric starting winning port) 2004 is preferably maintained. Will be able to.

  Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 199 (b), in the first short time state, the driven member of the first non-electric start winning opening 2002b and the driven member of the second starting opening (second non-electric start winning opening) 2004 If neither of the above is in the open state, the peripheral control MPU 1511a does not have the second start opening (second non-electric start winning opening) 2004 where an extremely useful event occurs when entering the ball, but the first non-electric start winning combination Light is emitted only toward the mouth 2002b.

  That is, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, when the situation shown in FIG. 199 (b) occurs, the same processing as when the situation shown in FIG. 198 (c) occurs is performed. As a result, even when the situation shown in FIG. 199 (b) occurs, the player remains unaware that the second start port (second non-electric start start winning port) 2004 is in the open state. A game ball flows down toward the second starting port (second non-electric starting start winning port) 2004, and as a result, an event that is extremely beneficial to the player (a big hit determination on the second special symbol side despite the first short-time state) Such a sense of surprise makes it possible to improve the fun of the game.

  Also, for example, as shown in FIG. 199 (c), in the second short time state, the driven member of the first non-electric start winning opening 2002b and the driven member of the second starting opening (second non-electric start winning opening) 2004 In the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the second start port (second one) of the first non-electric start prize port 2002b and the second start port (second non-electric start prize port) 2004 when both are open. It is possible to control to emit light only toward the non-electric start start winning opening 2004.

  According to such a configuration, in the second short time state, both the driven member of the first non-electric start winning opening 2002b and the driven member of the second starting port (second non-electric start winning opening) 2004 are open Even if it is in, the game ball will be launched aiming at the second starting port (second non-electric starting winning opening) 2004 on the side where the big hit determination is made under conditions advantageous to the player For this reason, the player can appropriately enjoy the gameability assumed when the vehicle is in the second short time state.

  As described above, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, both the driven member of the first non-electric start winning prize port 2002b and the driven member of the second start opening (second non-electric start winning prize port) 2004 are open. Even if it is possible to enter any ball, both the first non-electric start start winning opening 2002b and the second start opening (second non-electric start start winning opening) 2004 are emitted simultaneously. I don't want to let you. Therefore, it is possible to enjoy smooth gaming without causing anxiety about which open port should be aimed.

[18-3. Opening of the non-electric start winning opening in the normal gaming state]
As described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment is not limited to the short-time state but also in the non-short-time state (normal game state), through the normal hit game (the first non-electric start start prize port). 2002b, the second non-electric start start winning opening 2004) can be opened. By providing such a technical feature, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment can realize characteristic configurations and effects not found in the conventional game machine. Below, the characteristic structure and effect etc. which are implement | achieved by the pachinko machine 1 of such this embodiment are demonstrated.

[18-3-1. First feature]
According to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the first special symbol side jackpot determination (first special lottery) and the second special symbol side jackpot determination (second special lottery) more advantageous than the first special symbol are performed. In the prepared gaming machine, even when the game machine is controlled in the normal gaming state, a gaming situation is provided that can execute the symbol variation of the second special symbol when the predetermined condition is satisfied, and The execution of the symbol variation of the second special symbol can be maintained until an arbitrary timing by the player (first characteristic relating to the opening of the non-electric start start winning opening in the normal gaming state).

  First, as illustrated in FIG. 114, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the left side of the center accessory 2500 in the game board 5 is separated from the gate portion 2003a for performing the normal lottery when the player is right-handed. In the middle of the flow-down path flowing toward the first start winning opening 2002a, the gate portion 2003b through which the game ball can pass is disposed. By arranging the gate portion 2003b in this manner, the normal lottery can be performed even when the recommended left hitting game is performed in the normal gaming state. In addition, as described above with reference to FIG. 114, when the gate portion 2003 is disposed at a position where the game ball can pass either right-handed or left-handed (that is, the game medium is gated in both the short-time game state and the normal game state). In the case where it can pass through, the number of gate parts 2003 may be one (the gate parts 2003a and 2003b may not be provided separately).

  And, as illustrated in FIG. 191, although the normal lottery in the normal gaming state (non-short time state) is set lower than the short time state in the probability of winning the normal hit, when it is elected the normal hit, the normal hit Of the plurality of open patterns (first open pattern to third open pattern) including the open pattern (first open pattern, second open pattern) similar to that of normal hit in the short time state based on the type of hit pattern Since the operation pattern of the opening operation of the movable member 2011a of the normal electric winning opening 2011 is selected, it is realistic to make the ordinary electric winning opening 2011 win the gaming ball in the ordinary hit game accompanying the normal hitting of the normal gaming state. Has been made possible.

  Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, as described above for the configuration of the inside of the normal motorized winning opening 2011, the path of the gaming ball entered the ordinary motored winning opening 2011 by the distributing member 2011b, the first passage 2011d, the second By distributing to either of the passage 2011e and the third passage 2011c, the first non-electric start winning opening 2002b is opened when passing through the first passage 2011d, and the first non-electric start winning opening 2002b is opened when passing through the second passage 2011e. 2) The non-electric start winning opening 2004 is opened (see FIGS. 115 and 116). Here, after the first non-electric start winning opening 2002b and the second non-electric starting winning opening 2004 are opened, the open state is maintained until a predetermined number of game balls enter. The game ball can be easily entered (winning) by performing a right strike different from the main game method (left strike) in the normal gaming state for each non-electric start winning opening in the open state. it can.

  That is, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, even in the normal gaming state, the game ball can be won in the normal electric prize 2011, and the second opening pattern for guiding the game ball to the second passage 2011e. Is selected (in other words, when the winning symbol 3 is a normal hit), the second non-electric start start winning port 2004 is opened along with the flow of the game ball, so that the normal gaming state The game situation which can execute the symbol variation of the second special symbol which is more advantageous than the symbol variation of the first special symbol mainly for the game is provided. Then, as described above, once the second non-electric start winning opening 2004 is opened, the player makes a right turn at his / her favorite timing to enter the second non-electric start winning opening 2004. The second special symbol variation (the second special lottery) is repeated a predetermined number of times (2 in this example) until the second non-electric start winning opening 2004 shifts to the closed state. ) Can be executed.

  Here, in a conventional gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine disclosed in Patent Document 1), the opening and closing means is provided to provide a second starting port that can adjust whether or not a game medium can be entered, thereby providing a normal game. Although the second start port can be opened even in the state, if the game medium cannot be entered within a predetermined opening time, the second start port is closed and the second start port is closed. The special lottery (second special lottery in the present embodiment) resulting from entering the starting port could not be received. As a result, in the conventional gaming machine, there is a risk that the given chance will be missed and the interest of the player will be greatly reduced.

  On the other hand, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment having the configuration described above, in the normal gaming state, the second non-electric start winning opening 2004 is operated in the open state where the game ball can easily enter. In addition to being in an open state, the open state can be maintained until a predetermined number of game balls have entered (winning) without transitioning to the closed state over time. Thus, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment can prevent the player from losing the chance (the opportunity to obtain the second special drawing), so that it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest of the player due to the loss of the chance. it can.

  In addition, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the player can freely select the timing for winning the game ball with respect to the second non-electric start winning opening 2004 in the open state in the normal game state. Since it is possible, it becomes possible to play a game in which the benefits (the payout of the winning balls and the execution of the second special lottery) can be reliably acquired. Specifically, for example, when the number of reserved symbols for special symbols reaches the upper limit (for example, 4) or is close to the upper limit (for example, 3), a prize is awarded to the non-electric start winning opening. However, there is a possibility that the number of holds will overflow and the special lottery based on the winning will not be executed. In such a game situation, the above-mentioned privilege can be reliably acquired by selecting to maintain the open state without hitting the right.

  In addition, as illustrated in FIG. 115, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the first start winning opening 2002a is displayed as a game board side effect display as a fixed first starting opening that is always open and does not fluctuate. A second non-electric start winning opening 2004 is disposed at the lower right of the game board side effect display device 1600 as a second starting opening disposed immediately below the device 1600 and having a variable ball entry rate. That is, while the first start winning opening 2002a is disposed at a position where it is possible to enter the ball when hitting the left, the second non-electric start winning opening 2004 enters the ball if the right hitting is not performed. It will be arranged at a position where there is almost no possibility of this. By having such an arrangement relationship, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the left-handed game is played when the second non-electric start winning opening 2004 is maintained in the open state in the normal gaming state. Also, the game ball flowing down toward the first start winning opening 2002a can be prevented from entering the second non-electric starting winning opening 2004, and the open state of the second non-electric starting winning opening 2004 is the player Can be prevented from finishing at an undesired timing (entering a ball and shifting to a closed state). In other words, this contributes to enabling the player to arbitrarily select the timing at which the game ball enters the second non-electric start winning opening 2004.

  Furthermore, according to the configuration illustrated in FIG. 115, since the special winning opening 2005 is disposed at the lower part on the right side of the center of the game board 5, in the big hit gaming state in which the special winning opening 2005 is opened. Right-handed games are recommended (game balls can easily win by right-handed). And, according to FIG. 115, when any of the non-electric start winning openings (the first non-electric starting winning opening 2002b and the second non-electric starting winning opening 2004) is in the open state, the game ball is played by the right hitting It is arrange | positioned in the position which accepts. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the non-electric start winning opening (the first non-electric starting winning opening 2002b, the second non-electric starting winning opening 2004) is in the open state by having such an arrangement relationship. When the big hit game is executed when it is turned on, the big hit game is performed by right-handed play, so the game ball enters the non-electric start winning opening and is shifted to the closed state.

  That is, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment having the configuration as shown in FIG. 115, in the normal gaming state, the open state of the non-electric start winning opening can be maintained until an arbitrary timing. Thus, it is possible to suppress the release state from being maintained until after the big hit game ends. In the pachinko machine 1, there is a possibility that the game state may be changed before and after the big hit game (for example, transition from the normal game state to the definite change state), but by performing maintenance suppression of the open state as described above It is possible to suppress the inconvenience due to the open state of the electric start winning opening being maintained across the change of the gaming state. In this way, suppressing the maintenance of the open state of the non-electric start start gate across the change of the game state causes a game that is more advantageous than the game originally assumed in the pachinko machine 1 (for example, This contributes to the prevention of the second special lottery in the first short time state. Furthermore, it is possible to contribute to the prevention of illegal operation being performed on the non-electric start winning opening (in particular, the second non-electric start winning opening 2004) and the above-described unexpected advantageous game being executed. .

  In addition, as a gaming machine which can realize the first feature concerning the opening of the non-electric start winning opening in the normal gaming state as described above, the pachinko machine 1 has been described in the configuration, control, etc. The present invention is not limited to this, and may have a configuration as described below, or control as described below may be performed.

  For example, the pachinko machine 1 as a gaming machine capable of realizing the first feature is, as exemplified in FIGS. 114 to 116, the first start winning opening 2002a, the first non-electric start winning opening 2002b, and the first (2) Not limited to the configuration in which all the non-electric start winning openings 2004 are arranged, the internal structure of the normal electric winning openings 2011 also includes a plurality of operation trigger areas (first operation trigger area, second operation trigger area , Outlier region) is not limited to the configuration. Specifically, at least a first start winning opening 2002a and a second non-electric start winning opening 2004 may be disposed, and the internal configuration of the normal electric winning opening 2011 also includes at least a second operation trigger area. The 2nd channel | path 2011e which has is just provided. Even with such a minimum configuration, when a normal hit in the normal gaming state, the game ball can enter the normal electric winning hole 2011 and pass through the second operation trigger area from the second passage 2011e If control is performed, the second non-electric start winning opening 2004 is opened even in the normal gaming state, and the open state is maintained until a predetermined number of gaming balls enter (winning). Can be made.

  The same applies to other features (second to fourth features) to be described later, but in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment according to the first feature, a non-electricity equivalent to the second non-electric start winning hole 2004 A plurality of start winning ports may be provided. In such a case, the second non-electric start winning according to the operation trigger area through which the game ball passes by providing the operation trigger area corresponding to each second non-electric start winning opening in the ordinary electric winning port 2011 The mouth can be open. Also, with each of the plurality of second non-electric start winning openings, the number of winning game balls allowed to be changed from the open state to the closed state may be different, or the number of winning balls at the time of winning may be different. May be. When these configurations are adopted, it is possible to provide an execution opportunity of the second special lottery with more complicated game characteristics.

  Also, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the entry of a plurality (for example, two) game balls of the second non-electric start winning combination port 2004 is set as a condition to shift from open to closed Good. In such a case, when the second non-electric start winning opening 2004 is opened in the normal gaming state, the opportunity to receive the second special lottery more advantageous than the normal first special lottery is given multiple times. Since the game is provided to the player over, it is possible to increase the chance of being expected to give a larger profit than usual (big hit by the second special drawing). Furthermore, such a plurality of profit earning opportunities are not limited to being provided within a predetermined time, and can be obtained at a timing preferred by the player across a plurality of games. The width can be greatly expanded. More specifically, even if a game ball is entered once by right-hand hitting the second non-electric start start winning opening 2004 that has been opened, one entry is still left, The player can arbitrarily select at which timing two second special lotteries are executed.

  Further, for example, in FIG. 191, the open pattern (first open pattern, second open pattern) of the movable member 2011a that is partially common to the short time state and the non short time state is employed. Then, the opening pattern of the movable member 2011a of the normal motor winning hole 2011 may be different in the short time state and the short time state. Specifically, for example, in the case of a short-time state, a long-time release mode (long open mode) is selected so that a game ball can be accepted very easily, while in the non-time-short state, a long open mode is selected. An opening mode (short opening mode) with an opening time shorter than the mode may be selected. However, even if the short opening mode is selected in the normal gaming state, it is possible to enter the gaming ball into the ordinary electric winning hole 2011 at a rate exceeding at least a certain degree, and the gaming ball that has entered the ball is It is required to have a possibility of passing through the second passage 2011e. As described above, by providing the open pattern of the movable member 2011a of the normal electric winning hole 2011 with diversity, it is possible to expect the effect of enhancing the game performance of the normal hit game.

  For example, in FIG. 114, the non-electric start winning opening (the first non-electric starting winning opening 2002b, the second non-electric starting winning opening 2004) controls the acceptance of the game ball by opening and closing the movable member left and right. The non-electric start winning opening in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is a Vero type that controls the acceptance of the game balls by opening and closing on the front side of the game board 5 though it has a structure having opening and closing opening and closing means. The structure which has the opening-and-closing means of this may be sufficient. That is, when the Vero type opening / closing means is in the open state, the gaming ball having flowed down from above or side is received, while when the Vero type opening / closing means is in the closed state, the flow of the game ball is not impeded. For example, a flow path to the special winning opening 2005 is formed. In such a case, the left / right open / close type opening / closing means is not necessary, and therefore the area required for disposing the non-electric start start winning opening in the game board 5 can be reduced. If a non-electric start winning opening is provided in the middle of the flow path to the big winning opening 2005, the big hit game is executed even when the big hit game is started with the non-electric start winning opening opened. It can be closed securely.

  Further, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, similarly to the effect (for example, the light emission control illustrated in FIGS. 198 and 199) informing that the non-electric start winning opening is in the open state in the time saving state. In the normal gaming state, an effect may be performed to notify that the non-electric start winning opening is in the open state. That is, when the non-electric start winning opening (the first non-electric start winning opening 2002b, the second non-electric start winning opening 2004) is in the open state, it is opened until the non-electric start winning opening is closed. A specific effect of notifying the player that he is in a state may be performed. As display means for performing the specific effect, an LED, a lamp or the like provided at a position where the game board side effect display device 1600 or a player can visually recognize can be considered.

  In addition to notifying that the non-electric start prize opening is being opened, the contents of the production by the specific production can be entered at any time in the open non-electric start prize opening (digestible Or in a manner that can identify which non-electric start start opening is open (specifically, for example, the screen display of the game board side effect display device 1600) In such a case, a message such as "Please open the second starting opening", "Please let me enter when you like" may be displayed, etc., and furthermore, it is possible to display the contents of each of these effects in combination as appropriate. Good. However, when such an effect is executed, it is preferable not to provide teaching that induces a player's disadvantage. Further, when a game ball enters the open non-electric start winning opening and shifts to a closed state, an effect related to the shift may be displayed.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the open / closed state of the non-electric start start opening is detected by a sensor or the like and is sent to the main control board 1310. Further, in the case where the specific effect is executed. Alternatively, the main control board 1310 may notify the peripheral control board 1510 of the open / close state of the non-electric start winning opening. In this way, not only the main control board 1310 but also the peripheral control board 1510 can recognize the open / close state of the non-electric start winning opening, so that various effects can be executed according to the game situation, and the player It is also possible to teach useful information in more detail by the presentation. Specifically, for example, when it is recognized in advance that the non-electric start winning opening is open in the normal gaming state and the normal winning is derived in the normal lottery, the peripheral control board 1510 gives the result of the normal winning. Perform the effect of teaching the game ball to win in the non-electric start winning opening in the open state until the game is released (preliminary). Further, for example, when it is recognized in advance that the second non-electric start start winning opening 2004 is in the open state in the normal gaming state and the symbol variation of the first special symbol for which execution is suspended is a big hit, the peripheral control board An instruction is given to instruct the second non-electric start winning combination port 2004 not to win a game ball until the jackpot is determined. In this way, when it is specified that the second side symbol variation is executed in preference to the first side symbol variation, it is a wasteful first before the big hit due to the first side symbol variation is derived. 2 It is possible to avoid the disadvantage that a special lottery will be made.

  Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the condition that the non-electric start winning opening (in particular, the second non-electric start winning opening 2004) shifts from the open state to the closed state is performed. In this case, effects of different display contents may be performed according to the number of game balls having won in the non-electric start winning opening in the open state. By doing this, not only the fact that the non-electric start winning opening is in the open state is notified by the specific effect described in the previous paragraph, but what is the current winning state, and how many remaining wins Information on whether an opportunity has been left can also be additionally taught to the player to assist the player's selection regarding the timing of entering the ball. Specifically, for example, while it is displayed that two winning opportunities remain until the closed state in the normal gaming state, the degree of winning of the game ball at the first start winning opening 2002a has decreased. When the player wants to avoid that the special symbol stops moving (when the number of holds decreases), for the time being, only one game ball is hit to the right and the non-electric start prize opening The game strategy can be selected such that the player wins the game once and sees the situation once.

[18-3-2. Second feature]
A second feature that is realized by the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment and that is related to the opening of the non-electric start start opening in the normal gaming state will be described. In the following (second to fourth features), detailed explanations of technical matters whose detailed reasons are explained in the first feature are omitted to avoid repetition.

  According to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, there is a big hit determination (first special lottery) on the first special symbol side and a big hit determination (second special lottery) on the second special symbol side that is more advantageous than the first special symbol. In the prepared gaming machine, even when the normal gaming state is controlled, when a predetermined starting condition related to the normal lottery is satisfied, the opening operation by the movable member 2011a of the normal electric winning opening 2011 is a game ball. Provides an advantageous opening operation (specifically, a second opening pattern for the special 2 route distribution) that provides an open state that can easily pass through a predetermined operating region, and an open state that makes it difficult to pass through the predetermined operating region. Can be performed at a predetermined rate (a second feature concerning the opening of the non-electric start winning opening in the normal gaming state) .

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, even in the normal gaming state, a normal lottery (during a low probability) is performed when the game ball is hit to the left and passes through the gate portion 2003b (see FIG. 114). And, as exemplified in FIG. 191, the opening pattern of the movable member 2011a of the ordinary electric winning hole 2011 is based on the type of the winning symbol (stop symbol of normal symbol variation) when 1/99 becomes a normal hit. It is determined. More specifically, the second opening pattern (corresponding to the above-mentioned advantageous opening operation) is selected in the case of the hit symbol 3 corresponding to 20% of the normal hit, and the third release in the case of the hit symbol 2 corresponding to the hit 40% of the normal hit. A pattern (the disadvantageous release operation described above) is selected. That is, in the example of FIG. 191, in the pachinko machine 1, when the normal lottery of the normal gaming state is performed, the advantageous opening operation and the disadvantageous opening operation are executed at a predetermined ratio (20% and 40% when hitting normal). Will be.

  Then, when the advantageous opening operation is performed, the game ball that has entered the normal electric winning opening 2011 is easily guided to pass through the second passage 2011e and the second operation opportunity region, so that the second The non-electric start start winning opening 2004 is opened. The series of flows and their effects have been described in the first feature.

  Here, in a conventional gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine disclosed in Patent Document 1), when a win is obtained in the normal lottery in the normal gaming state, a predetermined number of times elapses through the second start port. Until the player wins a prize, and the second special lottery can be executed in response to the game ball winning in the second starting port during the opened state. However, in such a conventional gaming machine, since it is a simple game feature that only opens the second starting port when the normal winning is won in the normal gaming state, there is a place where the game is not interesting. There was a problem that it was difficult to expect improvement. That is, there is a considerable risk that the player may not enjoy the game simply by entering the game ball into the second starting opening when the hit is normal.

  On the other hand, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment having the above-described configuration, by the time the second non-electric start winning opening 2004 is opened in the normal gaming state, a normal lottery is won normally In addition, in the normal winning game associated with the winning, it is a necessary condition that the game ball passes through a specific route exceeding the distribution of a plurality of routes provided inside the normal electric prize winning opening 2011. That is, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the opening of the second starting port (the second non-motorized start winning port 2004) can be finally obtained by clearing the multi-step process, the complicated game property, It can be expected to enhance the amusement interest by detailed game characteristics. In particular, since the “out of” path is included in the plurality of paths, in some cases, any of the start ports (the first non-electric start winning port 2002b and the second non-electric start winning port 2004) is opened. There are cases where this is not possible. By the existence of such a disadvantageous case, it is possible to attract the interest of the player to the proceeding path of the game ball, and the game interest can be enhanced.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the normal gaming state, in addition to the second opening pattern corresponding to the advantageous opening operation and the third opening pattern corresponding to the disadvantageous opening operation, opening having an advantageous degree between the two. As the operation, the first opening pattern (especially, distribution of the first route) can also be made executable at a predetermined rate (40% per ordinary) (see FIG. 191). In this case, depending on the progress path of the game ball that has entered the normal electric winning hole 2011 when it becomes a normal hit, it is possible to add more diversity to the benefits granted, so by fine game characteristics It can be expected to have an effect of further enhancing the fun of gaming.

  In addition, as a gaming machine which can realize the second feature concerning the opening of the non-electric start winning opening in the normal gaming state as described above, the pachinko machine 1 has been described in the configuration, control, etc. The present invention is not limited to this, and may have a configuration as described below, or control as described below may be performed.

  For example, the pachinko machine 1 as a gaming machine capable of realizing the above-mentioned second feature has a first start winning opening 2002a, a first non-electric start winning opening 2002b, and (2) Not limited to the configuration in which all the non-electric start winning openings 2004 are arranged, the internal structure of the normal electric winning openings 2011 also includes a plurality of operation trigger areas (first operation trigger area, second operation trigger area , Outlier region) is not limited to the configuration. Specifically, at least a first starting winning opening 2002a and a second non-electric starting winning opening 2004 are provided, and the second passage 2011e having a second operation trigger area as an internal configuration of the normal electric winning opening 2011 What is necessary is just to provide the 3rd channel | path 2011c which has a peeling area | region. Even with such a minimum configuration, the opening operation by the movable member 2011a of the normal motorized winning opening 2011 when the predetermined start condition for the normal lottery is satisfied in the normal gaming state (pass the game ball of the gate portion 2003b) The second control method is controlled to execute the advantageous opening operation (the second opening pattern for the second route distribution) and the disadvantageous opening operation (the third opening pattern for the second route distribution) at a predetermined ratio. Features can be realized.

  In addition, for example, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is an effect (first effect) for promoting entry of a ball into a predetermined ball entry port (specifically, the ordinary electric winning hole 2011), and the predetermined ball entry port Effect based on whether or not the game ball has entered the game (second effect), and effect (the third effect) based on which operation trigger area the game ball having entered the predetermined ball entry has passed Control means for executing the above may be provided. In addition, these effects may be executed by the screen display of the game board side effect display device 1600, and in addition, are performed by the light emission of a predetermined bonus provided on the game board 5, etc. It is also good. Specifically, for example, in the third effect, a passage (one of the first passage 2011d, the second passage 2011e, and the third passage 2011c) having the actuation trigger area through which the gaming ball passes may be made to emit light. Further, in the third effect, when the non-electric start winning opening (for example, the second non-electric starting winning opening 2004) is opened based on the game ball passing the actuation trigger area, the non-electric start winning combination The mouth may be made to emit light.

  By executing the first to third effects in this manner, when the player is hit normally in the normal gaming state, the player is allowed to hit the right and encourage the player to enter the ordinary electric winning hole 2011, Since different effects are executed according to the flow-down path of the entered game ball, it is possible to be interested in the movement of the game ball.

  In addition, for example, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment does not pass through the predetermined operation trigger area and the passage detection means for detecting that the gaming ball has passed the predetermined operation trigger area (or another predetermined area And non-passing detection means for detecting passing). Specifically, for example, the passage detection means corresponds to a sensor 2011i (see FIG. 115) that detects the passage of a game ball in the second operation opportunity area (may be replaced with the second passage 2011e), and the non-passage detection means. Corresponds to the sensor 2011g that detects the passage of the game ball in the outlier region (which may be replaced with the third passage 2011c). And in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, based on the detection results by the passage detection means and the non-passage detection means, it is possible to determine whether or not the third effect can be performed and the contents of the effect of the third effect.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, as described when the game balls are distributed in the ordinary electric winning award 2011 with reference to FIG. 115 and FIG. 116 (see chapter [5]), By forming the front surface of the electrically driven winning opening 2011 (at least the front surface from the distributing member 2011b to the entrance of the first passage 2011d, the second passage 2011e, and the third passage 2011c) by a material that allows visual recognition, the ordinary electrically driven winning opening 2011 The flow path of the game ball in the inside can be made visible to the player. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it possible for the player to visually recognize which operation trigger area the game ball entering the ordinary electric winning hole 2011 passes (or whether it passes the specific operation trigger area or not). Therefore, the interest of the game ball can be noticed to enhance the interest.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the rolling speed of the gaming ball before the gaming ball entering the ordinary electric start winning hole 2011 passes a predetermined actuation trigger area (for example, the second actuation trigger area). It is possible to provide a speed reduction means for lowering. For example, as shown in FIG. 116 (B), when looking at the flow-down path of the gaming ball having entered the ordinary electric starting hole 2011, the gaming ball is to be distributed to the sorting member 2011b while passing through the second passage 2011e. Since it comes into contact, the rolling speed is reduced. In this way, by reducing the rolling speed of the game ball inside the normal electric start port 2011, the movement of the game ball can be shown carefully, and the player's interests regarding which operation opportunity area to pass through Can be expected to improve the

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as described in the first feature as well, it is related to the open state of the non-electric start start winning opening (the first non-electric start start winning opening 2002b and the second non-electric start start winning opening 2004). It is possible to execute various effects such as notifying the player that the non-electric start winning opening is open. However, when the predetermined game situation is in progress (during special symbol hit fluctuation, big hit game, etc.), execution of such effects may be restricted.

  Here, with the predetermined game situation where the execution of the effect related to the open state of the non-electric start winning opening should be restricted, confusion of the player or giving a disadvantage to the player by executing the effect It is a game situation that there is a risk of Specifically, for example, even if it is taught that the non-electric start winning opening is in the open state during the big hit game, it does not become a special benefit for the player, and the profit obtained by the player is unknown. This may confuse the player. In the first place, even if the non-electric start prize opening is in an open state, it is inevitable that the game ball will win the non-electric start prize opening by the end of the big hit game as the big hit game is digested. Also, for example, when a variation of the special symbol is being executed, the effect that the game ball is caused to enter the non-electric starting winning opening in the open state is displayed, and the most recent big hit is determined. Therefore, there is no effect due to the effect, and it may be disadvantageous for the player as much as the game ball is prompted to be launched. In this manner, the player can proceed with the game at ease by suppressing the predetermined effect in the gaming situation which can induce the disadvantage to the player, and it is possible to suppress the decline in the gaming intention. it can.

[18-3-3. Third feature]
A third feature of opening the non-electric start winning opening in the normal gaming state, which is realized by the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, will be described.

  The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment is provided with a big hit determination (first special lottery) on the first special symbol side and a big hit determination (second special lottery) on the second special symbol side that is more advantageous than the first special symbol. Game machine, the first operation trigger area (may be replaced with the first passage 2011d) and the first non-electric start winning opening 2002b as a mechanism related to the first side symbol variation, the first side symbol variation at the time of big hit A second game trigger area (which may be replaced with the second passage 2011e) and a second non-electric start start winning port 2004 as a mechanism related to the second side symbol fluctuation that gives the player a larger profit than the normal game Even when being controlled to the state, when the normal hit is obtained by the normal lottery, the game ball holds the first operation trigger area for the opening operation by the movable member 2011a of the normal electric winning hole 2011 The first advantageous opening operation (first opening pattern) that provides an open state that allows the game ball to pass through and the second advantageous opening operation (second operation) that provides the open state in which the game ball can easily pass through the second operation trigger area. It can be controlled to execute the opening operation according to any one of a plurality of operation patterns including at least an opening pattern) (a third feature concerning opening of the non-electric start winning opening in the normal gaming state) ).

  The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has, as illustrated in FIG. 115, a first passage 2011d having a first actuation trigger region and a second passage 2011e having a second actuation trigger region inside the ordinary motorized start port 2011. Is provided, and the distributing member 2011b operates with a fixed operation pattern, while the opening operation of the movable member 2011a is selected from a plurality of operation patterns, it is determined which operation trigger area the game ball passes through. It is controlled. More specifically, according to the illustration of FIG. 191, in the normal gaming state, when the hit symbol 1 makes a normal hit, the gaming ball is easily guided to the first actuation trigger area (first passage 2011d) If the first possible opening pattern (specially assigned to one route) is executed and the hit symbol 3 makes a normal hit, the gaming ball can be easily guided to the second actuation trigger area (second passage 2011e) The second release pattern (special 2 route distribution) is executed. In any case, a non-electric start start opening that is opened after passing through each operation opportunity area is provided with the benefit of paying out a prize ball as the game ball wins the normal electric start opening 2011. However, since the start opening on the side of the first special symbol and the start opening on the side of the second special symbol are different, the profit given to the player is larger in the special route apportionment.

  Here, in the conventional gaming machine (e.g., the gaming machine disclosed in Patent Document 1), the second starting opening is configured to be opened when a hit is normally obtained by a normal lottery in the normal gaming state. However, this was only monotonous as the predetermined second starting opening was opened after winning the symbol normally. Therefore, in the case of such a conventional gaming machine, the interest of the player is diminished each time the game is repeated due to its monotony although the player is given an advantageous chance of judging the big hit of the second special symbol. There was no doubt that there was a risk of

  On the other hand, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment having the above-described configuration, when the hit is obtained by the normal lottery in the normal gaming state, the movable member 2011a is opened and the ordinary electric winning hole 2011 is opened. In addition to making it possible for the game ball to enter easily, the distribution within the ordinary electric winning hole 2011 can open one of a plurality of types of starting holes with different degrees of profit, so the final hit game Up to the stage, you can entertain and expect what benefits will be granted. Thus, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of maintaining the interest of the player even if the number of games increases.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, although the degree of profit is different, when all the non-electric start winning openings are maintained in the open state by arranging a plurality of non-electric starting winning openings. Assuming that the number of non-electric start winning combination ports is one, it is possible to increase the number of times the player can enter the ball arbitrarily arbitrarily (the number of times to execute the special lottery). For example, assuming that the first non-electric start winning opening 2002b and the second non-electric starting winning opening 2004 are maintained in the open state until two game balls enter each, the first special lottery twice and the second You can stock the opportunity to receive a special lottery for a total of four special lotteries. By arranging the plurality of non-electric start winning openings in this manner, it is possible to increase the degree of influence of the opening of the non-electric start winning openings on the entire game progression and to intensify the player's interest in the opening. .

  As described in the present embodiment, the first non-electric start winning hole 2002b and the second non-electric start winning hole 2004 have different types of special lottery to be executed based on entering the ball, so the player can Although the degree of advantage of the profit with respect to is different, it is also possible to make a difference in the degree of advantage of the profit as follows. That is, for example, while the first non-electric start winning opening 2002b is defined as being open when one gaming ball enters (winning), the second non-electric starting winning opening 2004 is open while defining that it shifts to the closed state. The predetermined number of winnings related to the end of the open state may be changed so that the closed state is not defined until two game balls enter (win) in the state. Also, for example, while the number of winning balls accompanying the winning of the gaming ball to the first non-electric start winning opening 2002b is one, the number of winning balls following the winning of the game ball to the second non-electric starting winning opening 2004 The number of prize balls may be changed, such as three. In addition, the method of giving a difference to the advantage degree of the benefit provided in this way is not limited to a different kind of starting opening, A plurality of starting openings of the same type (for example, a plurality of second non-electric starting winning combinations) It can apply also when a mouth is provided.

  In addition, as illustrated in FIG. 115, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the first start winning opening 2002a is disposed immediately below the game board side effect display device 1600, and the first non-electric start winning opening 2002b and the first 2 By disposing the non-electric start winning opening 2004 at the lower right of the game board side effect display device 1600, even if a game ball is shot aiming at the first start winning opening 2002a in the normal gaming state, the game It is made difficult for the ball to reach the periphery of the first non-electric start winning opening 2002 b and the second non-electric start winning opening 2004. That is, even when the first non-electric start winning opening 2002b or the second non-electric start winning opening 2004 is in an open state, a game ball that has been left-handed to aim at the first start winning opening 2002a enters the ball. Is configured to suppress such an operation, and by providing such a configuration, the first advantageous opening operation (first opening pattern) or the second advantageous opening operation (second opening pattern) is used to open With respect to the non-electric start winning combination port which has become, it is assisted that the game ball can be entered (winning) at any timing of the player.

  In addition, as a gaming machine which can realize the third feature concerning the opening of the non-electric start winning opening in the normal gaming state as described above, the pachinko machine 1 has been described in the configuration, control, etc. The present invention is not limited to this, and may have a configuration as described below, or control as described below may be performed.

  For example, the pachinko machine 1 as a gaming machine capable of realizing the above-mentioned third feature is, as exemplified in FIGS. 114 to 116, the first start winning opening 2002a, the first non-electric start winning opening 2002b, and the first (2) Limited to a configuration in which a plurality of non-electric start winning openings 2004 are provided and a plurality of operation trigger areas (a first operation trigger area, a second operation trigger area, and an out-of-range area) are provided Not. Specifically, at least a first non-electric start winning hole 2002b and a second non-electric start winning hole 2004 are provided, and a first passage having a first operation trigger area as an internal configuration of the normal electric winning hole 2011. 2011d and the 2nd channel | path 2011e which has a 2nd operation opportunity area | region should just be provided. Even with such a minimum configuration, the opening pattern of the movable member 2011a is more profitable than the game aimed at the normal first start winning opening 2002a when the game is hit normally in the normal gaming state. Control is performed to select and execute any one of a plurality of operation patterns including a first advantageous opening operation and a second advantageous opening operation having a higher degree of profit than the first advantageous opening operation. The third feature can be realized by (see, eg, FIG. 191).

  Further, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, while a plurality of non-electric start winning openings having different degrees of profit in the open state are provided, predetermined conditions are established in a state in which one non-electric start winning opening is open. If is established, the other non-electric start winning award may be overlapped and opened. In the specific example, in the normal gaming state, a normal hit of the symbol 1 is generated (the first opening pattern is selected), and the first non-electric start winning opening 2002b is opened, and then the opening state is When a left-handed game is played and a normal winning of the winning symbol 3 occurs (the second opening pattern is selected), the game ball that has entered the normal electric winning opening 2011 is the second activation opportunity. Since the region is passed, the second non-electric start winning opening 2004 is opened. As a result, the first non-electric start winning opening 2002b and the second non-electric start winning opening 2004 can be superimposed and opened. It should be noted that such a state of superimposed opening can be maintained until a predetermined number of gaming balls are made to enter each non-electric start winning entry.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the opening and closing of each non-electric start winning opening is performed as an independent operation while the plurality of non-electric starting winning openings having different degrees of profit in the open state are provided. In other words, a plurality of non-motorized start with different degree of profit, a state where only a relatively small profit non-electric start winning opening is open, a state where only a relatively large profit non-electric start winning opening is open It is possible to create a state where the winning opening is overlapped and opened, and it can be expected to entertain the player.

  Further, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the plurality of non-electric start winning openings having different degrees of profit in the open state are provided, each non-electric starting winning opening has different opening / closing means. Good. Specifically, if one side has left and right open / close opening and closing means (see FIG. 199 etc.), the other may have a Vero type opening and closing means (not shown). When the shape of the opening / closing means is made different in this way, the player can easily distinguish between a plurality of non-electric start start winning holes having different degrees of profit in the open state (improvement of discrimination). In addition, by arranging the winning holes having different shapes, it is possible to change the image held by the player with respect to each winning hole, and it can be expected to enhance the decorativeness of the game board 5.

  Further, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, as described in the first and second features, the non-electric start winning opening (the first non-electric starting winning opening 2002b, the second non-electric starting winning opening 2004) In relation to the open state, various effects can be executed such as notifying the player which non-electric start start winning opening is in the open state in the normal game state. These effects may indicate the notification contents by the screen display of the game board side effect display device 1600, or other realization methods (for example, suggesting that the winning opening in the open state emits light) May be.

  As the effect related to such a non-electric start winning opening, when the above-mentioned "a state in which a plurality of non-electric starting winning openings overlap and occur" is generated, "double open" is clearly indicated. Such a special effect may be executed. Specifically, for example, in the case of "single open" in which any non-electric start winning opening is in the open state, the effect of flashing the non-electric start winning opening in the open state (or the periphery thereof) is performed. When "double open" occurs, both non-electric start winning openings (or their surroundings) are made to emit light more prominently than in "single open". As a light emission mode that is more noticeable than in the single open state, it can be considered to blink at a shorter cycle, to emit light at a higher intensity, or to emit light of a different color. By performing such special effects, it is possible for the player to recognize that the game situation is rare, and it is felt as if a higher profit can be obtained, It can be expected to raise the game interest.

  Incidentally, with regard to the effect related to such non-electric start winning opening, as described in the second feature, there is a fear that performing the effect may confuse the player or cause the player to be disadvantaged. When a “predetermined game situation” is in progress (during special symbol hit fluctuation, big hit game, etc.), execution of such effects may be restricted.

  Further, in the minimum configuration described above with respect to the third feature, as the internal configuration of the ordinary electric winning hole 2011, the first passage 2011d having the first actuation trigger region and the second passage 2011e having the second actuation trigger region Although it is only necessary to be provided, in order to create further game play, even if a game ball passes through a route distributed inside the ordinary electric winning award 2011, any non-electric start winning award is operated. It is possible to provide a route which is not a trigger (that is, a route which is out of order). With such a configuration, as illustrated in FIG. 115 and FIG. 116, even if the game ball enters the ordinary electric winning hole 2011, if it has flowed down the off route (for example, FIG. 116 (C)) The first non-electric start winning opening 2002b and the second non-electric start winning opening 2004 are not opened, and only the prize balls are paid out in association with the winning on the normal electric winning opening 2011. Then, such sort control that the game ball is guided to the off-route can be realized by an operation (third release pattern) in the case of normal hit with the hit symbol 2 (see FIG. 193).

[18-3-4. Fourth feature]
A description will be given of a fourth feature that is realized by the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment and that is related to the opening of the non-electric start start opening in the normal gaming state.

  According to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, there is a big hit determination (first special lottery) on the first special symbol side and a big hit determination (second special lottery) on the second special symbol side that is more advantageous than the first special symbol. The prepared game machine has a first operation trigger area (which may be replaced with the first passage 2011d) and a first non-electric start winning opening 2002b as a mechanism related to the first side symbol variation, and the first side at the time of big hit A second actuation trigger area (which may be replaced with the second passage 2011e) and a second non-electric start winning opening 2004 as a mechanism related to the second side symbol variation that gives the player a greater benefit than the symbol variation, In the normal gaming state, when a normal hit result is obtained in a normal lottery, the game ball enters the normal electric winning hole 2011 and passes any operation trigger area (first operation trigger area or second operation trigger area) Do In addition, a suggestion effect (preliminary suggestion effect in the open state) that indicates in advance which variable start opening (the first non-electric start winning opening 2002b or the second non-electric start winning opening 2004) can be opened is executed. (4th characteristic concerning the opening of the non-electric start start opening in the normal gaming state).

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when control related to the normal symbol is performed as illustrated in FIG. 191, in the normal gaming state, based on the type of the normal winning result by the normal lottery (the symbol type of the winning symbol) The opening pattern of the movable member 2011a is determined. Then, as shown in FIG. 193, an operation trigger area (a first operation trigger area, a second operation trigger area) through which the game ball entering the ordinary electric winning hole 2011 passes depending on which release pattern is executed. Is controlled. Therefore, the main control board 1310 that executes the normal lottery actually determines which non-electric start start opening is led to the open state based on the type of the normal hit result, and the normal hit game is actually started and the normal electric win is obtained. Prior to the game ball entering the mouth 2011, it is possible to make a prior judgment. Then, based on the result of such prior determination, the main control board 1310 or the peripheral control board 1510 may execute the "previous presentation effect in the open state" suggesting the winning opening assumed to be in the open state. it can.

  FIG. 200 is a diagram for explaining the pre-suggestion effects in the open state. In FIG. 200, as an example of the “preliminary suggestion effect of the open state” in the pachinko machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, before the normal hit game is started in the normal game state and before the game ball enters the normal electric winning opening 2011. The effect which suggests that the condition where the 2nd non-electricity starting opening 2004 will be opened is approaching is shown in order of time lapse. In addition, it is assumed that the prior suggestion effect shown in FIG. 200 is executed on the display screen of the game board side effect display device 1600, and the peripheral control board 1510 having received the result of the above "preliminary judgment" from the main control board 1310 Control this display screen.

  First, in FIG. 200 (A), during the fluctuation of the normal symbol in the normal gaming state (the state of the spread map display is not shown), “the opening chance!” In the upper left portion of the display screen of the game board side effect display device 1600. Is displayed and a prior suggestion effect is started. In addition, since the symbol variation of the special symbol can be performed even during the execution of the prior suggestion effect, in the case of FIG. 200 (A), the symbol variation of the decorative symbol is displayed in the upper right part in a display range smaller than normal. There is. Such a display of the symbol variation of the decorative symbol is continued until the diagram 200 (D) where the prior suggestion effect ends.

  At the time of display in FIG. 200 (A), the game is played with a left-hand hit because it is in the normal game state. Therefore, in the lower part of the display screen, a character string "right-handed preparation" is displayed in preparation for future opening timing (FIG. 200 (D)). In addition, the number "7" displayed in the left central portion of the display screen means that the remaining time of the countdown until the release timing is 7 seconds. Here, as illustrated in FIG. 191, it is assumed that the normal symbol variation time in the normal gaming state is 10 seconds, and the normal hit at the winning symbol 3 can be derived by the symbol variation of the normal symbol currently changing. Assume that it has been decided. That is, FIG. 200 (A) is displayed approximately 3 seconds after the start of the symbol variation of the normal symbol from which the normal hit by the hit symbol 3 is derived.

  Further, in FIG. 200 (A), a model diagram of the game board 5 is shown in the right central part of the display screen, and among them, the ordinary electric winning opening 2011, the first non-electric starting opening 2002b, and The range where the second non-electric start winning opening 2004 is arranged is highlighted (indicated by a broken line in the figure), which suggests that something will happen in the range. However, at this stage, it is not specified which non-electric start start opening is open, so that the player can have a sense of expectation.

  Next, in FIG. 200B, the remaining countdown time is reduced to “5 seconds”. At this stage, in the model diagram of the game board 5 shown in the right center portion of the display screen, the periphery of the second non-electric start start winning opening 2004 is highlighted by being surrounded by a broken line. That is, it is suggested in advance that the second non-electric start winning opening 2004 may be in the open state at this opening opportunity.

  Thereafter, time elapses, the remaining countdown time is “1 second” in FIG. 200C, and the remaining countdown time is 0 seconds in FIG. 200D, that is, the normal hit according to the winning symbol 3 is determined. . In FIG. 200 (D), an image instructing to hit the gaming ball right is displayed in the model diagram of the game board 5, and further, a character string "right strike!" Is displayed at the bottom of the display screen. Therefore, it is strongly recommended to make a right strike toward the ordinary electric winning award 2011.

  When the player is made to switch to the right at the display step of FIG. 200 (D) but the normal hit game is started simultaneously with the display timing of FIG. 200 (D), the movable member of the normal electric winning hole 2011 There is a possibility that the game ball can not reach at the start of the opening operation of 2011a. Therefore, by setting an appropriate delay time between the display timing shown in FIG. 200 (D) and the start timing of the normal hit game, the right-handed game ball is entered into the normal electric winning hole 2011 at a good timing. It can be made to be able to make a ball. In terms of internal control, it is preferable that the peripheral control board 1510 adjust the display timing of the screens of FIGS. 200A to 200D so that there is a margin for the set delay time. .

  Then, the game ball is easily received by the ordinary electric winning hole 2011 where the movable member 2011a performs the opening operation in the second opening pattern by right-handed in accordance with the display screen of FIG. 200 (D), the sorting member 2011b The game ball passes through the second passage 2011e (which may be read as passing through the second operation trigger area) due to the flow path distribution by, thereby opening the second non-electric start winning opening. That is, the game situation in accordance with the content of the suggestion by the pre-suggestion effect is realized.

  Thereafter, when the normal hit game is completed, a normal effect screen in the normal game state is displayed as shown in FIG. If the display period in FIG. 200 (D) is too long, the gaming ball may enter the second non-electric start winning opening that has been opened before returning to the left in FIG. 200 (E). As there is a risk, as shown in FIG. 200 (D) at an appropriate time, or as the number of gaming balls that have won in the ordinary electric winning hole 2011 reaches a predetermined number, as shown in FIG. It may be.

  As described above, the peripheral control board 1510 having received the predetermined information from the main control board 1310 executes the pre-suggestion effect as shown in FIG. 200, whereby the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment realizes the fourth feature. be able to. In addition, the prior suggestion effect may not necessarily be controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 (for example, the main control board 1310 may be controlled), and even if it is not displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 Good (for example, other display monitor or display device may be used).

  In addition, as a result of the game according to the suggestion of the prior suggestion effect shown in FIG. 200 (A) to (D) being performed, the gaming situation (for example, the second non-electric start winning winning opening) 2004 will be open). In such a case, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the same "non-electric start winning opening (first non-electric starting winning opening 2002b, second non-electric start" as described in the first to third features. The “effect related to the open state of the winning opening 2004)” may be performed subsequently to the effect screen of FIG. 200 (D). Specifically, for example, it may be considered to display a message such as "The second opening has been opened. Please let me enter when you like."

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a plurality of types of advance suggestion effects as illustrated in FIG. 200 are prepared, and among the plurality of types of advance suggestion effects based on the types of hit symbols per ordinary hit. An effect to be executed may be determined, and the determined effect may be executed while the normal symbol changes. Specifically, the effect screen shown in FIG. 200 is a pre-indication effect when the second non-electric start winning opening 2004 is opened, but similarly, when the first non-electric start winning opening 2002b is opened as well It is enough to prepare a direct suggestion of

  In addition, even when an out-going route is prepared and an ordinary hit in which the out-going route is selected is won (in FIG. 191, hit symbol 2), some kind of suggestive effect may be performed. For example, a prior suggestion effect by a countdown may be displayed together with a character string such as “open chance?”. However, since none of the non-electric start winning entry ports will eventually be in the open state, “specify the open state” as specified in the model diagram of the game board 5 in FIG. 200 (B) is not performed . The pre-suggested effect at the time of selecting the off-route does not lead to the open state of the non-electric start start winning opening, but at least the normal electric winning opening 2011 is awarded by winning the game ball at the normal electric winning opening, It does not give a big disadvantage to the player, and it can be a way to enhance the game interest.

  In addition, as a gaming machine which can realize the fourth feature according to the opening of the non-electric start winning opening in the normal gaming state as described above, the pachinko machine 1 has been described in the configuration, control, etc. The present invention is not limited to this, and may have a configuration as described below, or control as described below may be performed.

  For example, the pachinko machine 1 as a game machine capable of realizing the fourth feature is, as exemplified in FIGS. 114 to 116, the first start winning opening 2002a, the first non-electric start winning opening 2002b, and the first (2) Limited to a configuration in which a plurality of non-electric start winning openings 2004 are provided and a plurality of operation trigger areas (a first operation trigger area, a second operation trigger area, and an out-of-range area) are provided Not. Specifically, at least a first non-electric start winning hole 2002b and a second non-electric start winning hole 2004 are provided, and a first passage having a first operation trigger area as an internal configuration of the normal electric winning hole 2011. 2011d and the 2nd channel | path 2011e which has a 2nd operation opportunity area | region should just be provided. Even with such a minimum configuration, when a normal hit in the normal gaming state, as the opening pattern of the movable member 2011a, the degree of profit is higher than the game aimed at the normal first start winning opening 2002a Any of a plurality of operation patterns including the first advantageous opening operation and the second advantageous opening operation having a higher degree of profit than the first advantageous opening operation is selected and executed based on the type of the normal hit. Be done. Therefore, it is possible to execute an effect that suggests in advance a non-electric start winning opening that is to be in the open state by recognizing such types of normal hits and operation patterns to be executed before the normal hits are started. it can.

  Further, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the normal hold indicator 1408 is set so as to be able to store up to a plurality of normal determination storage numbers (normal figure hold storage number) (for example, four), the normal figure hold is set. By pre-reading of the memory, the type of hit symbol derived in the normal lottery is determined in advance before the symbol variation of the normal symbol is started, and based on the result of the determination, any of a plurality of types of prior suggestion effects May be executed during the symbol variation from which the normal hit is derived.

  In addition, when performing pre-suggesting effects by performing pre-reading of the general-purpose hold storage as described above, the pre-suggesting effects should be performed during the execution of the symbol variation before the pre-read normal symbol variation. May be. That is, the pre-suggestion effect may be performed over a plurality of symbol variations, and in such a case, the pre-suggestion effect can be displayed for a longer period of time, so that the player is prepared for the right strike A long preparation period or a display like a continuous performance can enhance the entertainment interest of the game.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the open / closed state of the non-electric start winning opening is detected by a sensor or the like and sent to the main control board 1310. It can be recognized that one of the mouths (for example, the first non-electric start winning prize port 2002b) is in an open state. Here, when a normal hit by the hit symbol 3 is determined in advance, it is assumed that in the future, the second non-electric start winning opening 2004 will also be in the open state. This is the occurrence of "a state in which a plurality of non-electric start winning openings overlap and remain open (double open)" described in the third feature. As described above, in a situation where double opening may occur, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment may perform “previous indication effect of the opening mode” in a special effect mode.

  However, in order to complete the double opening, it is preferable to consider that a game ball does not enter the already opened non-electric start winning opening (in this case, the first non-electric start winning opening 2002b). . Therefore, for example, in the prior suggestion effect of double opening in a special effect mode, the timing for starting the right-hand hit is limited to the timing for reliably entering the normal electric winning opening 2011, or the game ball is right-handed with a single shot. Or may be taught to do so.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, as in the case of the "representation related to the non-electric start winning opening" described in the second and third features, the "previous indication effect in the open state" When a "predetermined game situation" which may confuse the player or cause a disadvantage by executing the game is in progress (during a special symbol being hit, a big hit game, etc.) Can limit the execution of such effects.

  Specifically, for example, when the effect screen such as "Opening chance" shown in FIG. 200 is displayed during the change of the special symbol, the reach screen is not displayed despite the change of the hit of the special symbol. Problems arise. Since the big hit of the special symbol is a bonus larger than the opening of the non-electric start winning entry, in such a case, the "predictive effect in the open state" is limited as the "predetermined game situation".

  Then, as in the above-mentioned specific example, in the case where it is judged whether or not the pre-suggestion effect of the open state is executable in consideration of the hit variation of the special symbol, the main control board 1310 only reads the common drawing reserve memory In addition, the reserve storage (the first special figure reserve storage, the second special figure reserve storage) about the special lottery is also read ahead, and based on these prefetched results, it is determined whether or not the preliminary suggestion effect in the open state can be performed. May be.

  Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, an effect that suggests a result due to a special symbol variation in advance using the prefetch result of the general map hold memory and the prefetch result of the hold memory regarding the special lottery (so-called prefetch suggestion effect). It may be made to perform the effect (equivalent to the prior suggestion effect of an open state) which suggests in advance the result by the change of a normal symbol and the normal symbol by the effect of a similar mode (special pre-reading effect). In other words, when it is determined that the prefetching result is either a normal hit (ordinary symbol) or a big hit (special symbol), the special prefetching effect is difficult to understand from the player halfway. Is executed. In this way, if the result of the big hit, the big benefit of the big hit game is given to the player, but even if it is the result of the normal hit, it is possible to expect the same effect as the pre-intentional effect, so A payout of a winning ball with a winning on the electric winning opening and an open state of the non-electric starting winning opening are provided. As a result, when the special pre-reading effect is executed, the player receives a fair benefit regardless of the outcome, so it is possible to make the effect to greatly enhance the game interest.

  The present invention has been described with reference to preferred embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various modifications can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention as described below. And design changes are possible.

  The discrete component is an electronic component in which only a single function element (an element having one electrical function (such as a resistance element)) is encapsulated. For example, the number of elements having a specific function is two or three. It is a concept that includes components that are enclosed in one package.

  That is, although the embodiment shows the one applied to the pachinko machine 1 as a gaming machine, the present invention is not limited to this, and is applied to a pachislot machine or a gaming machine formed by fusing a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine. Even in this case, the same effect can be obtained.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 2 Outer frame 3 Door frame 4 Body frame 5 Game board 5a Game area 6 CR unit 10 Upper frame member 11 Engagement notch 12 Mounting stepped portion 20 Lower frame member 21 Engagement notch 22 Front end notch 30 Left frame Member 31 recessed portion 32 projecting portion 40 right frame member 41 recessed portion 50 projecting portion 50 rear plate member 51 rearward extending portion 52 left discharge hole 53 right discharge hole 54 upright wall portion 55 bent portion 56 left mounting portion 57 right mounting portion 60 outer frame side Upper hinge member 61 upper fixing portion 62 front extension portion 63 bearing groove 64 horizontal fixing portion 65 hanging portion 66 lock member 66a lock main body 66b operating portion 66c elastic portion 66d mounting hole 67 mounting screw 70 outer frame side lower hinge member 71 horizontal portion 72 Rising portion 73 Outer frame lower hinge pin 74 Discharge hole
80 curtain plate reinforcing member 81 left sliding member 82 right sliding member 85 connecting member 85A upper left connecting member 85B upper right connecting member 85C lower left connecting member 85D lower right connecting member 86 horizontal fixing portion 87 upper horizontal fixing portion 88 lower horizontal fixing portion 89 bending portion 90 upper hook member 91 lower hook member 95 induction blade 96 induction blade 100 door frame base unit 110 door frame base 111 through hole 112 handle mounting surface 113 cylinder mounting portion 114 cylinder insertion hole 115 ball feed opening 116 lower plate passage opening 117 Upper plate passage port 118 Glass unit mounting portion 119 Speaker insertion port 130 Reinforcement unit 131 Upper reinforcement sheet metal 132 Middle reinforcement sheet metal 132a Notch 133 Left reinforcement sheet metal 134 Right reinforcement sheet metal 135 Locking locking part 140 Door frame side upper hinge member 141 Hinge shaft bracket on door frame 141a Protruding piece 142 Door frame upper hinge pin 143 鍔 member 144 Lock spring 150 Door frame side lower hinge member 151 Door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151a Extension piece 152 Door frame lower hinge pin 160 Door frame left side decoration board 161 Door frame left side upper decoration board 161a LED
162 Door frame left side lower decorative board 162a LED
170 glass unit mounting member 171 base portion 172 projecting portion 180 handle portion mounting member 181 tube portion 182 flange portion 183 protrusion 184 reinforcing rib 190 glass unit 191 glass frame 191a mounting piece 191b locking piece 192 glass plate 194 frame decorative drive amplifier substrate 194a + 9V Creation circuit 200 Crime prevention cover 201 Main body portion 202 Rear protrusion piece 203 Locking piece 210 Opening and closing cylinder unit 211 Cylinder lock 211a Key hole 212 Rotation transmission member 212a Notch portion 213 Cylinder mounting plate 213a Front plate portion 213b Side plate portion 213c Mounting plate portion 250 Ball feed Unit 251 front cover 251a entrance 251b ball outlet 251c slit 252 rear cover 252a hitting ball supply port 252b mounting recess 253 ball extracting member 253a partition part 253b Rotating rod 253c Actuating rod 253d Weight 254 Ball feeding member 254a Blocking part 254b Ball holding part 254c Ball feeding part 256 Ball feeding solenoid 256 Ball feeding actuating rod 257 Ball feeding crank 257a Engagement part 257b Shaft part 257c Transmission part 260 Fraud prevention Member 261 Upper piece 262 Lower piece 263 Inclined portion 270 Foul cover unit 271 Unit main body 272 Lid member 273 Through ball passage 274 Full ball receiving port 275 Foul ball receiving port 276 Ball discharge port 277 Storage passage 278 Movable piece 279 Full tank Detection sensor 280 spring 281 door opening and closing contact portion 300 handle unit 301 handle base 301a base 301b front end 301c groove portion 302 handle 302a first protrusion 302b second protrusion 302c third protrusion 302d fourth protrusion 302e Lit 302f Locking projection 303 Handle cover 303a Mounting boss 304 Inner base 305 Shaft member 305a Drive gear 306 Transmission gear 307 Handle rotation detection sensor 307a Detection shaft 308 Handle return spring 309 Auxiliary spring 310 Handle touch sensor 311 One-shot button 312 One-shot button Operation sensor 315 handle relay terminal board 320 plate unit 321 upper plate 321a induction passage portion 321b ground bracket 322 lower plate 322a lower plate ball extraction hole (lower plate discharge port)
322b Escapement part 322c Sphere guidance part (guidance means)
322d Buffer (inducing means)
322e return part (guide means)
323 Dish unit base 323a Upper flat ball supply port 323b Speaker slit 323c Lower flat ball supply port (lower plate supply port)
323d Upper bowl ball feed port 323e Ball feed guide path 323f Ball extraction guide path 323g Opening 323h Handle insertion port 323i Cylinder insertion port 324 Upper disc body 325 Lower disc body 325A Main body portion 325B First extension portion 325C Second extension portion 325a Bottom Wall unit 325b Standing wall unit 326 Dish unit cover (cover)
326a Production operation unit mounting part (covering part)
326b dish upper upper decoration part 326c dish lower lower decoration part 326d lower dish opening 326e lower speaker opening 326f handle insertion opening 326g cylinder insertion opening 326h top plate 326i bottom plate 326j mounting space 327 upper plate ball release button (discharge operation unit)
327a operation transmission unit 327b ball removing slider 327c upper plate ball releasing spring 328 ball lending button 329 return button 330 ball loan return display unit 331 effect selection left button 332 effect selection right button 333 lower plate ball releasing button 334 lid member 335 lower plate ball Extraction base 335a Discharge port 340 Lower plate cover 340a Cover upright wall portion 340b Ceiling portion 365 degree display plate 365a Ball lending switch 365b Return switch 365d CR unit lamp A1 Lower plate first area A2 Lower plate second area PL division line 400 production operation unit (Covered part)
400A Second production operation unit (cover)
410 Operation Button (Operation Support)
411 button lens 411a first button decoration portion 411b second button decoration portion 412 button frame 412a frame opening 413 button base 413a main body portion 413b flange portion 413c guide boss portion 413d detection piece 413e base opening portion 415 frame unit 416 frame main body 416a center Opening part 416b Outer peripheral opening part 416c Notched part 416d Inner cylindrical part 416e Attachment part 417 Frame side lens 418 Frame top lens 420 Substrate unit 421 Substrate base 422 Operation button Left outer decoration substrate 422a 1st LED
422b second LED
423 Operation button right outside decorative board 423a First LED
423b second LED
424 vibration motor 424a weight 425 motor cover 430 base unit 431 unit base 431a through hole 431b holding hole 431c light shielding wall portion 432 operation member inner decoration member 432a peripheral wall portion 432b front plate portion 432c opening portion 432d flange portion 432e mounting boss 432f first button Inner decoration part 423g Second button inner decoration part 433 Operation button left inner decoration board 434 Operation button right inner decoration board 435 Operation button upper inner decoration board 436 Operation button lower inner decoration board 437 Frame top lens decoration board 438 Operation button spring 439 Sensor holder 440 pressure detection sensor 441 effect operation unit relay substrate 442 relay substrate cover 442a leg 450 second base unit 451 unit base 451a main body 451b cover 4 1c through hole 451d holding hole 451e upper bearing portion 451f lower bearing portion 451g rotation restricting portion 452 button shaft 454 press detection sensor 460 door frame side effect display device (second effect display means)
460A door frame side second effect display device 461 liquid crystal display device 462 mounting bracket 470 screen unit 471 main screen 472 subscreen 472a peripheral decoration portion 472b screen portion 473 upper shaft member 474 lower shaft member 475 actuating gear member 475a gear tooth 475b stopper 475c Detection piece 476 Sub-screen decoration member 477 Sub-screen decoration substrate 477a LED
478 peripheral decorative member 480 upper bearing member 481 bearing member 481 a recess 482 frame top lens decorative substrate 485 lower bearing member 490 rotational drive unit 491 unit case 492 switching drive motor 495 second transmission gear 500 projector 501 projector body 502 lens unit 505 projector Mounting member 505a Slit 506 Upper cover 507 Rotation detection sensor 510 Buffer unit 511 Buffer member 512 Buffer base 512a Body portion 512b Leg piece portion 515 Second stage operation unit relay substrate 516 Relay substrate cover 530 Door frame left side unit 531 Left unit base 531a Opening 532 Left unit diffusion lens member 532A upper diffusion lens member 532B lower diffusion lens member 532a circular lens portion 532b Shaped lens part 532c Central diffuse reflection part 532d Front diffused lens part 532e Input lens part 532f Front reflection part 534 Left unit upper decoration base 535 Left unit lower decoration base 536 Left unit decoration cover 537 Decoration member 550 Door frame right side unit 551 Right unit Base 552 door frame right side decorative board 552A door frame right side upper decorative board 552B door frame right side lower decorative board 552a left LED
552b Right LED
552c middle LED
553 Right unit left diffusing lens member 553a Main body portion 553b Rear wall portion 553c Notch portion 553d Housing recess 553e Input lens portion 553f Side surface reflecting portion 554 Right unit left decorative member 555 Right unit left cover 556 Right unit right diffusing lens member 556a Main body portion 556b Rear wall 556c Notch 556d Housing recess 556e Input lens 556f Side reflector 557 Right unit right decoration member 558 Right unit right cover 559 Right unit left light shielding member 559a Main body 559b Rear wall 559c Notch 559d Reinforcement portion 560 Right unit Right light shielding member 561 Right unit decorative lens member 561a Circular decorative portion 561b Multi-faced decorative portion 562 Right unit decorative base 563 Right unit cover 564 Decorative member 570 Door frame top unit 571 Medium Base 572 side base 573 upper speaker 574 unit main body 574a opening 574b slit 574c upper opening 574d lower opening 574e top left decoration 574f top right decoration 575 speaker cover 576 top middle decoration member 577 door frame top middle decoration board 578 conductive board Optical member 578a Direct part 578b Arc part 578c Diffuse reflection part 578d Diffuse input part 579 Top left decorative lens member 579a Decorative lens part 580 Top right decorative lens member 580a Decorative lens part 581 Top middle left decorative member 582 Top middle right decorative member 583 door Frame top left decorative board 583a LED
584 Door frame top right decorative board 584a LED
585 Substrate base 586 Door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586a LED
587 Door frame top middle right decorative board 587a LED
588 Light shielding member 589 Door frame top unit relay substrate 590 Relay substrate cover 591 Upper cover 592 Lower cover CL Center axis (of operation button 410)
600 Main body frame base 601 Game board insertion slot 602 Game board placement section 603 Game board regulation section 604 Launcher mounting section 605 Cylinder insertion slot 606 Connection opening section 607 Speaker opening section 608 Rear extension section 609 Upper hinge mounting section 610 Lower hinge attachment portion 615 Opening cover 616 Game board lock member 618 Door frame open switch 619 Main frame open switch 620 Main frame side upper hinge member 621 Upper hinge main body 622 Main frame upper hinge pin 623 Door frame upper hinge hole 640 Lower main frame side Hinge member 641 Lower hinge first main body 643 Lower hinge second main body 644 Hinge hole for door frame 645 Restricted piece 660 Reinforcement frame 661 Left positioning member 680 Sphere launcher 681 Launch base 682 Launch solenoid 683 Hit bowl 684 Launch rail 700 Locking unit 70 DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Unit base 702 Door frame cage 703 Outer frame cage 710 Key cylinder 784 External terminal board 800 Discharge unit 801 Discharge unit base 802 Sphere tank 803 Tank rail 804 Sphere equalizing member 820 Sphere guide unit 821 Front case 821a Sphere guide inlet 821b Ball induction outlet 821c Induction passage 821d Introduction part 821e Detection part 821f Meandering part 821g Notch part 822 Back case 822a Ball induction inlet 822b Ball induction outlet 822c Induction path 822d Introduction part 822e Detection part 822f Meandering part 822g Notch 823 Partition plate 825 Movable piece member front 825a Movable piece 825b Shaft hole 825c Extension part 825d Coupling part 825e Weight attachment part 825f Detection piece 825g Stopper piece 826 Movable piece member back 826a Movable piece 826b Shaft hole 826c Extension portion 826d Connection portion 826e Weight attachment portion 826f Detection piece 826g Stopper piece 827 Ball breakage detection sensor 830 Discharge device 831 Front box 831a Discharge inlet 831b Discharge outlet 831c Discharge passage 831d Discharge passage shelf 831e 831g Lever mounting portion 832 Rear box 832a Discharge inlet 832b Discharge outlet 832c Ball outlet 832d Discharge passage 832e Ball extraction passage 832f Guide shelf 832g Lever attachment portion 833 Front cover 834 Discharge motor 835 Drive gear 837 Intermediate gear 837 8 Detection piece 837c Connection part 838 Shaft member 839 Dispensing blade 839a Base tube part 839b Front blade 839c Rear blade 839d Connected part 839e Ball housing part 840 Blade rotation detection sensor 841 partition plate 842 release detection sensor 843 ball removing movable piece 843a main body portion 843b shaft cylinder portion 843c projecting portion 843d weight attaching portion 844 ball removing lever 850 upper full ball passage unit 850a upper releasing ball receptacle 850b upper ball removing inlet 850c upper portion Ball storage passage 850d Normal discharge port 850e Full tank discharge port 850f Partition piece 850g Upper ball removal passage 850h Upper ball extraction outlet 851 Upper full tank base 852 Upper full tank cover 853 Dispensing device pressing member 854 Back cover attachment part 860 Lower full tank path Unit 860b error LED indicator 861 normal guideway 862 full-time guideway 863 guideway opening / closing door 863a base 863b first door plate 863c second door plate 863d extension 863e actuating protrusion 864 closing spring 865 lower ball out invitation Road 866 Upper case 867 Lower case 867a Boss 868 Frame peripheral relay terminal board 869 Game ball rental device connection terminal board 870 Induction door opening and closing door 870a Base 870b First door plate 870c Second door plate 870d Recess 870e Working projection 880 Main door relay terminal board 882 Peripheral door relay terminal board 900 Board unit 910 Board unit base 911 Door frame relay board 920 Speaker unit 921 Speaker 930 Power board box 934 Power switch 931 Power board 935 Power controller 935a Synchronous rectifier circuit 935b Force Rate improvement circuit 935c Smoothing circuit 935d Power supply creation circuit 940 Interface control board box 950 Payout control board box 951 Payout control board 951a Payout control filter circuit 952 Payout control section 952a Payout control PU
952b Payout control input circuit 952c Payout control output circuit 952d Payout motor drive circuit 952da Voltage switching circuit 952e CR unit input / output circuit 953 Launch control unit 953a Launch control circuit 954 Operation switch 980 Back cover 1000 Front component 1001 Outer rail 1002 Inner rail 1003 Out guiding portion 1004 Right lower rail 1005 Right rail 1006 Stopping portion 1007 Backflow prevention member 1008 Crime prevention concave portion 1009 Positioning projection 1010 Mounting boss 1011 Notch portion 1100 Game panel 1110 Panel plate 1111 Out concave portion 1112 Opening portion 1113 Fitting hole 1114 Long hole 1115 Engaging step 1116 Inner rail fixing hole 1120 Panel holder 1121 Holding step 1122 Through hole 1123 Protruding pin 1124 Engaging claw 1125 engaging 1126 Out port 1127 notch 1128 mounting hole 1129 through opening 1150 gaming panel (Second Embodiment)
1151 Out port 1152 Notched portion 1153 Insertion hole 1154 Inner rail fixing hole 1155 Mounting hole 1200 Substrate holder 1201 Ejection unit 1300 Main control unit 1310 Main control substrate 1310a Main control MPU
1310 aa main control CPU core 1310 ae main transmission serial transmit port 1310 aea transmit shift register 1310 aeb transmit buffer register 1310 aec serial management unit 1310 af WDT
1310an hard random number circuit 1310b main control input circuit 1310c main control output circuit 1310ca main control output circuit with reset function 1310cb reset function without main control output circuit 1310d main control solenoid drive circuit 1310e power failure monitoring circuit 1300g + 5V creation circuit 1300h main control filter circuit 1320 Main control board box 1400 function display unit 1401 status indicator 1402 first special symbol indicator 1404 first special hold number indicator 1405 second special symbol display 1406 second special hold number indicator 1407 round indication Unit 1500 Peripheral control unit 1510 Peripheral control board 1510b + 3.3V creation circuit 1511 Peripheral control unit 1511a Peripheral control MPU
1511aa peripheral control CPU core 1511ab peripheral control built-in RAM
1511ac peripheral control DMA controller 1511ad peripheral control bus controller 1511ae peripheral control various serial I / O port 1511af peripheral control built-in WDT
1511ag peripheral control various parallel I / O port 1511ak peripheral control A / D converter 1511ai peripheral bus 1511ah internal bus 1511b peripheral control ROM
1511c Peripheral control RAM
1511d Peripheral control SRAM
1511e Peripheral control external WDT
1511h External bus 1512 Liquid crystal display controller 1512a Sound source built-in VDP
1512b Liquid Crystal and Sound Control ROM
1512c Audio data transmission IC
1512d Transmitter IC for door frame side production
1512e Differential circuit 1512f Forced switching circuit 1520 Peripheral control board box 1600 Game board side effect display device 1600a Liquid crystal module 1600b Backlight power supply 1601 Left fixed piece 1602 Right fixed piece 2000 Table unit 2001 General winning opening 2002 First start opening 2002a First 1 Start winning opening 2002b 1st non-electric starting winning opening 2003 (2003a, 2003b) Gate part 2004 2nd starting opening (2nd non-electric starting winning opening)
2005 Grand prize opening 2011 Normal electric prize opening 2011a Movable member 2011b Distributing member 2011c 3rd passage 2011d 1st passage 2011d 2nd passage 2100 Start opening unit 2101 Unit base 2102 Ball holder 2103 Front decoration base member 2104 Front center decoration board 2105 Front Decorative member 2105a Fake portion 2106 Induction passage member 2107 General drawing solenoid 2108 Attachment solenoid 2200 Lower side unit 2300 Side unit upper 2500 Center piece 2520 Warp inlet 2522 Warp outlet 2530 Stage 3000 Back unit 3010 Back box 3010a Opening 3010b Liquid crystal mounting portion 3010c Fixed groove 3010d Notch 3010e Fixed piece 3042 Production drive board box 3050 Back left middle decorative unit G 3100 back bottom back movable production unit 3200 back top left movable production unit 3300 back left movable production unit 3400 back top and back middle movable production unit 3500 back bottom front movable production unit 4002 first starting opening sensor 4003 gate sensor 4004 second starting opening sensor 4005 count sensor 4020 general winning opening sensor 4024 magnetic detection sensor 4161 panel relay substrate 4162 sensor signal input unit 4163 voltage output unit 4164 detection circuit unit 4165 RTC control unit 4165a RTC
4165b Battery 4165aa Built-in RAM
4166 Voltage raising part 4170 Lamp drive board 4180 Motor drive board 4450 Effect display drive board 4450v Liquid crystal module circuit 4450x Door frame side effect module power supply circuit 4450y Door frame side effect module backlight power supply circuit MGS Magnetic sensor STR transistor (built-in type)
ZD0 Zener diode CON1 connector RR Contact resistance CNO2 connector

Claims (1)

  It is a gaming machine equipped with a front door,
  An upper plate provided on the front door;
  A lower plate provided on the front door and capable of receiving a supply of game balls from the upper plate;
  And a predetermined effect device provided on the front door,
  In the front door, a predetermined space is formed on the side of the lower plate, and the effect device is disposed in the predetermined space,
  The lower plate is provided with a lower plate cover part that blocks communication with the predetermined space,
  The stage device can be removed from the predetermined space without removing the lower plate cover part,
  With the stage device removed from the predetermined space, the outer surface of the lower plate cover part can be visually recognized through the predetermined space from the outside.
  A gaming machine characterized by that.